Reference Manual

Chief Architect 9.
5 Reference Manual
Professional Design & Drafting Software for the Building Professional
Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. 6500 N. Mineral Dr. Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
Chief Architect Reference Manual
Copyright 2003 by Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. Chief Architect is a trademark of Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Printed in the United States of America.
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction .........................................................................................1 The Chief Architect Environment .....................................................2 Chief Architect Terms.........................................................................4 Chief Architect Interface ....................................................................5 Starting Chief Architect....................................................................10 Selecting Objects................................................................................10 Editing Selected Objects ...................................................................11 How to Draw a Plan ..........................................................................12 Program Updates...............................................................................13 Getting Help .......................................................................................14 Windows Standard Color Dialog .....................................................15
Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chapter Overview .............................................................................17 Toolbar Customization Dialog .........................................................18 Toolbar Configurations.....................................................................21 Restoring Toolbars ............................................................................21 Chief Architects Tools......................................................................22 3D and Render View Toolbar Buttons ............................................59 CAD Preference Buttons...................................................................61 Edit Toolbar Buttons.........................................................................62
Contents
Contents
Chapter 3: File Management

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 67 Compatibility with Previous Versions............................................. 68 Creating a New Plan.......................................................................... 68 Creating a New Layout ..................................................................... 69 Saving a Plan or Layout File ............................................................ 69 Save and Save As ............................................................................... 70 Saving a Plan Thumbnail.................................................................. 70 Opening a Plan or Layout File ......................................................... 70 Template Files.................................................................................... 72 Searching for Plans ........................................................................... 73 Closing Plans and Views ................................................................... 76 Exiting Chief Architect ..................................................................... 77 Exporting a Plan................................................................................ 77 Exporting an Entire Plan.................................................................. 77 Autosave Files .................................................................................... 79 Backup Files ....................................................................................... 80 File Types ........................................................................................... 80
Chapter 4: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter Overview ............................................................................. 83 Default Settings.................................................................................. 84 Dynamic Defaults .............................................................................. 86 Plan Defaults ......................................................................................86 Reset to Defaults ................................................................................ 89 Edit Preferences Panel ...................................................................... 90 Appearance Panel.............................................................................. 90 Colors Panel ....................................................................................... 92 Font Panel .......................................................................................... 93
ii
Library Browser Panel......................................................................94 Text Objects Panel.............................................................................95 General Panel.....................................................................................97 Directories Panel................................................................................99 New Plans Panel...............................................................................100 Unit Conversions Panel...................................................................101 Architectural Panel .........................................................................103 CAD Panel........................................................................................104 Line Properties Panel ......................................................................111 Special CAD Panel...........................................................................112 Material List Panel ..........................................................................113 Report Style Panel ...........................................................................114 Master List Panel.............................................................................115 Categories Panel ..............................................................................116 Render Panel....................................................................................117 Texture Filter Panel ........................................................................120 3D Preferences .................................................................................120
Chapter 5: Layers
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................125 Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................126 Displaying Objects...........................................................................128 CAD Layers......................................................................................129 Layer Sets .........................................................................................129 Importing Layer Sets ......................................................................130
Chapter 6: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................133 Default Settings................................................................................134 The Wall Tools.................................................................................135
iii
Contents
The Curved Wall Tools ................................................................... 137 Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 137 Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 137 Pony Walls........................................................................................ 138 Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 139 Railings ............................................................................................. 140 Deck Railings ................................................................................... 141 Fencing ............................................................................................. 141 Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 142 Break Wall ....................................................................................... 143 Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 144 Drawing Curved Walls ................................................................... 146 Displaying Walls, Railings, and Fences ......................................... 147 Selecting Walls, Railing, and Fences ............................................. 148 Deleting Walls, Railings, and Fences .............................................148 Copying Walls, Railings, and Fences............................................. 149 Moving Walls and Railings............................................................. 149 Moving Walls Using Dimensions.................................................... 152 Resizing Walls.................................................................................. 152 Editing Walls.................................................................................... 153 Editing Curved Walls...................................................................... 153 Editing Walls in 3D ......................................................................... 157 Connecting Walls............................................................................. 158 Aligning Walls.................................................................................. 159 CAD to Walls ...................................................................................160 Wall Type Definitions ..................................................................... 162 The Wall Type Definitions Dialog.................................................. 163 Importing Wall Definitions............................................................. 166 Exporting Wall Definitions............................................................. 167 Curved Walls and Roofs ................................................................. 168 Special Walls ....................................................................................169
iv
Chapter 7: Rooms
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................187 Room Defaults..................................................................................188 Room Material Defaults..................................................................188 Floor and Ceiling Materials............................................................188 Wall Materials .................................................................................189 Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................189 Room Definition...............................................................................191 Decks.................................................................................................192 Selecting a Room..............................................................................193 Room Specification..........................................................................193 Displaying Room Labels .................................................................195 Special Ceilings ................................................................................198 Room Polylines.................................................................................202 Select Same and Load Same for Rooms ........................................204 Room Specification Dialog..............................................................204 Floor Defaults Setup........................................................................209
Chapter 8: Doors
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................211 Door Defaults ...................................................................................211 The Door Tools ................................................................................212 Displaying Doors..............................................................................213 Selecting Doors.................................................................................214 Deleting Doors..................................................................................215 Copying Doors .................................................................................215 Moving Doors...................................................................................216
Contents
The Wall Specification Dialog ........................................................172 Wall/Railing Defaults Setup ...........................................................184
Changing Door Swings.................................................................... 217 Resizing Doors ................................................................................. 219 Special Doors....................................................................................220 The Door Specification Dialog........................................................ 221 Door Default Settings ...................................................................... 231
Chapter 9: Windows
Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 233 Window Defaults ............................................................................. 234 Window Types ................................................................................ 234 Window Levels................................................................................. 239 Displaying Windows........................................................................ 240 Selecting Windows........................................................................... 241 Deleting Windows............................................................................ 242 Copying Windows............................................................................ 242 Moving Windows............................................................................. 243 Resizing Windows............................................................................ 244 Centering Windows ......................................................................... 244 Windows in Curved Walls .............................................................. 245 Custom Muntins .............................................................................. 246 Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows ............................................247 Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .................................................. 250 Window Specification Dialog ......................................................... 252 Window Default Settings ................................................................ 267
Chapter 10: Multiple Floors

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 269 Floor Defaults .................................................................................. 269 Floors and File Extensions.............................................................. 269 Adding Floors .................................................................................. 270
vi
Deleting Floors .................................................................................271 Copying Floors.................................................................................272 Current Floor / Reference Floor ....................................................272 Reference Display ............................................................................273 Swap Floor/Reference .....................................................................273 Floor Up/ Floor Down .....................................................................273 Reference Floor Color.....................................................................274 Display Objects in Reference Floor ...............................................274
Chapter 11: Foundations

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................277 Foundation Defaults ........................................................................277 Automatic vs. Manual Foundations...............................................278 The Slab Tools..................................................................................278 Building a Foundation.....................................................................279 New Floor Dialog .............................................................................283 Displaying Foundations...................................................................283 Deleting Foundations.......................................................................283 Aligning Stem Walls and Footings.................................................284 Resizing Stem Walls ........................................................................284 Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations......................................285 Editing Pier and Grade Beam Foundations..................................285 Editing Piers & Pads .......................................................................285 Foundations and Room Specification ............................................286 Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................287
Chapter 12: Stairs

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................289 Stair Tools ........................................................................................290 Stair Direction..................................................................................290
vii
Contents
Displaying Stairs.............................................................................. 292 Selecting Stairs................................................................................. 292 Deleting Stairs.................................................................................. 294 Resizing Stairs.................................................................................. 294 Moving Stairs ................................................................................... 294 Rotating Stairs ................................................................................. 296 Copying Stairs.................................................................................. 296 Stair Landings.................................................................................. 296 Merging Stair Sections .................................................................... 299 Curved Stairs ...................................................................................301 Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs.......................................... 304 Maintaining Tread Width............................................................... 305 Creating Winders ............................................................................ 307 Flared Stairs..................................................................................... 309 Starter Treads.................................................................................. 313 Other Special Stairs & Railings ..................................................... 315 Creating a Stairwell......................................................................... 316 Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases .............................................. 317 Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................ 318 Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................ 327
Chapter 13: Roofs

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 329 Roof Defaults....................................................................................330 The Roof Tools................................................................................. 330 Skylights ........................................................................................... 331 Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs................................................ 331 Automatic Roofs .............................................................................. 332 Automatically Generated Roof Styles............................................ 334 Roof Baselines .................................................................................. 337
viii
Editing Roof Baselines ....................................................................338 Gable/Roof Line...............................................................................339 Manual Roofs ...................................................................................341 Roof Planes.......................................................................................341 Displaying Roof Planes....................................................................342 Selecting Roof Planes ......................................................................343 Deleting Roof Planes........................................................................343 Editing Roof Planes .........................................................................344 Locating Roof Plane Intersections .................................................348 Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors ........................................349 Ceiling Planes...................................................................................350 Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings .......................................351 Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................352 Roof Baseline Specification Dialog.................................................356 Roof Plane Specification Dialog .....................................................357 Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog .................................................360 Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog .......................................362 Roof Pitches in Degrees...................................................................363
Chapter 14: Framing

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................365 Framing Defaults .............................................................................365 Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing .....................................366 The Framing Tools ..........................................................................367 Blocking and Bridging ....................................................................369 Automatic Framing .........................................................................370 Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog.......................................371 Framing Reference Markers ..........................................................382 Bearing Lines ...................................................................................384 Joist Direction Lines........................................................................385
ix
Contents
Wall Framing Details ...................................................................... 388 Drawing Wall Framing Members.................................................. 389 Displaying Framing......................................................................... 390 Editing Framing .............................................................................. 390 Regenerating Framing .................................................................... 391 Framing and the Material List....................................................... 391 Framing Specification Dialog ......................................................... 392 Beam Specification .......................................................................... 394 Post Specification............................................................................. 394
Chapter 15: Trusses

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 397 Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 398 Roof Trusses..................................................................................... 398 Deleting Trusses............................................................................... 400 Copying Trusses .............................................................................. 400 Moving Trusses................................................................................ 401 Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View.................................. 402 Truss Details .................................................................................... 402 Truss Labels..................................................................................... 403 Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing............................................... 403 Truss Base ........................................................................................ 404 Hip Trusses ...................................................................................... 408 Girder Trusses ................................................................................. 413 Scissors Trusses ............................................................................... 413 Truss Base Specification Dialog ..................................................... 413 Roof Truss Specification Dialog..................................................... 415 Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog ...................................... 419
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................421 The Electrical Tools.........................................................................422 Outlets...............................................................................................422 Lights ................................................................................................423 Switches ............................................................................................423 Creating Wiring Schematics...........................................................424 Place Outlets.....................................................................................425 Electrical Library ............................................................................425 Selecting Electrical Objects ............................................................426 Deleting Electrical Objects .............................................................426 Copying Electrical Objects .............................................................426 Moving Electrical Objects ..............................................................427 Rotating Electrical Objects.............................................................427 Adjusting the Height .......................................................................428 Other Edit Tools ..............................................................................428 Displaying Electrical .......................................................................429 Electrical Service Specification Dialog ..........................................430 Electrical Defaults ...........................................................................435
Chapter 17: Cabinets

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................437 Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................438 The Cabinet Tools............................................................................438 Selecting Cabinets............................................................................440 Displaying Cabinets.........................................................................442 Cabinet Labels .................................................................................442 Deleting Cabinets.............................................................................443 Copying Cabinets.............................................................................444
xi
Contents
Chapter 16: Electrical
Moving Cabinets.............................................................................. 445 Rotating Cabinets ............................................................................ 446 Resizing Cabinets ............................................................................ 446 Editing Cabinets .............................................................................. 447 Editing the Cabinet Door Style ...................................................... 448 Editing Custom Countertops.......................................................... 449 Attaching Cabinets .......................................................................... 450 Special Cabinets............................................................................... 451 Cabinet Specification Dialog .......................................................... 453 Custom Countertop Specification Dialog...................................... 462 Cabinet Defaults Setup ................................................................... 463
Chapter 18: Other Objects

Soffits ................................................................................................ 465 Special Applications for Soffits ...................................................... 466 Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits .................................... 467 Soffit Specification Dialog............................................................... 467 Fireplaces ......................................................................................... 471 Fireplace Types................................................................................ 471 The Fireplace Specification Dialog ................................................ 472 Library Fireplaces ........................................................................... 474 Chimneys .......................................................................................... 476 Corner Boards ................................................................................. 476 Wall Corner Specification Dialog .................................................. 478 Quoins............................................................................................... 478 Quoin Specification Dialog ............................................................. 479 Architectural Blocks........................................................................ 480 Displaying Architectural Blocks .................................................... 481 Selecting Architectural Blocks ....................................................... 481 Exploding Architectural Blocks ..................................................... 482
xii
Deleting Architectural Blocks ........................................................482 Copying Architectural Blocks ........................................................482 Moving Architectural Blocks..........................................................483 Rotating Architectural Blocks........................................................483 Editing Architectural Blocks ..........................................................484 Architectural Block Specification Dialog ......................................484 Molding Polylines ............................................................................485 Displaying Molding Polylines .........................................................486 The Molding Polyline Specification Dialog ...................................486 Polyline Solids ..................................................................................488 Displaying Polyline Solids...............................................................489 The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog.........................................489
Chapter 19: Terrain

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................491 The Different Types of Terrain Data.............................................492 Displaying Terrain in Plan View....................................................494 Displaying Terrain In 3D Views.....................................................495 Selecting Terrain Data ....................................................................496 Deleting Terrain Data .....................................................................496 Copying Terrain ..............................................................................496 Clearing the Terrain........................................................................497 Editing the Terrain Perimeter........................................................497 Editing Elevation Data ....................................................................497 Editing Terrain Features ................................................................498 The Terrain Specification Dialog ...................................................498 The Elevation Point Specification Dialog ......................................502 The Elevation Line Specification Dialog .......................................504 The Flat Region Specification Dialog ............................................505 The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog............................................505
xiii
Contents
The Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ..................... 506 The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog..................................... 506 Importing Terrain Data.................................................................. 507 Import Terrain Wizard................................................................... 508 Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data........................................... 511 Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................ 512
Chapter 20: Roads & Sidewalks

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 515 Road and Sidewalk Defaults........................................................... 515 The Different Types of Road Objects ............................................516 Displaying Road Objects................................................................. 519 Selecting Road Objects ................................................................... 519 Deleting Road Objects..................................................................... 519 Editing Road Objects ...................................................................... 520 The Road Specification Dialog ....................................................... 522 The Driveway Specification Dialog................................................ 524 The Road Marking Specification Dialog ....................................... 525 The Sidewalk Specification Dialog................................................. 525 Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................526
Chapter 21: Libraries

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 527 Compatibility With Earlier Versions ............................................528 The Library Browser ...................................................................... 528 Adding to the Library ..................................................................... 531 Adding Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the Library ........... 532 Adding a Molding Profile ............................................................... 532 Editing Libraries ............................................................................. 533 The Select Library Object Dialog .................................................. 535
xiv
Library Categories ..........................................................................536 Architectural Blocks Library .........................................................537 Backdrops Library ..........................................................................537 Cabinet Doors Library....................................................................537 Cabinet Modules Library ...............................................................538 CAD Blocks Library........................................................................538 Doors Library ..................................................................................539 Doorways Library ...........................................................................539 Electrical Library ............................................................................540 Exterior Fixtures Library...............................................................540 Interior Fixtures Library................................................................540 Exterior Furnishings Library.........................................................541 Interior Furnishings Library..........................................................542 Geometric Shapes Library..............................................................542 Hardware Library ...........................................................................543 Images Library ................................................................................543 Millwork Library.............................................................................543 Moldings and Profiles Library .......................................................544 Terrain Library ...............................................................................544 Textures Library .............................................................................544 Windows Library.............................................................................545 Library Search.................................................................................545 Placing Library Objects..................................................................546 Displaying Library Objects ............................................................549 Selecting Library Objects ...............................................................549 Deleting Library Objects ................................................................550 Copying Library Objects ................................................................550 Moving Library Objects .................................................................550 Resizing Library Objects ................................................................551 Editing Library Objects..................................................................551 Library Objects and the Material List ..........................................554
xv
Contents
Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 554
Chapter 22: Materials

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 557 Defining Materials ........................................................................... 558 Material Definitions ........................................................................ 559 Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab .................................. 568 Editing Materials in 3D Views ....................................................... 569 Exporting/Importing Material Definitions ................................... 570 Defining the Default Materials ....................................................... 571
Chapter 23: Zoom & View Tools

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 573 Zoom Tools....................................................................................... 573 Fill Window...................................................................................... 574 Undo Zoom....................................................................................... 574 Aerial View....................................................................................... 575 Panning the Display......................................................................... 576 Tiling Views...................................................................................... 577 Cascade............................................................................................. 578 Arrange All ...................................................................................... 578 Swapping Views............................................................................... 578 Closing Views ................................................................................... 578
Chapter 24: Perspectives & Overviews

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 579 Perspective Views ............................................................................ 580 3D Tools............................................................................................ 581 Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras ................................... 582
xvi
Zooming in Perspective Views........................................................584 Overviews .........................................................................................584 Displaying 3D Views........................................................................588 Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................589 Editing in a 3D or Render View .....................................................590 Delete 3D Surface ............................................................................591 Saving 3D Cameras .........................................................................591 Remove 3D .......................................................................................592 Walkthroughs ..................................................................................592 Camera Specification Dialog ..........................................................592 Camera Defaults ..............................................................................593
Chapter 25: Cross Section/Elevation Views

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................595 Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views .......................................596 Wall Elevation..................................................................................597 Cross Section/Elevations .................................................................597 Lines in Section/Elevation Views ...................................................598 Detailing a Cross Section/Elevation View .....................................599 Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras......................................600 3D Display Options..........................................................................601
Chapter 26: Render Views

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................603 Hardware..........................................................................................604 Rendering Tools...............................................................................604 Render Views ...................................................................................605 Glass House View ............................................................................606 Low Detail Mode..............................................................................607 Preview vs. Final Render View.......................................................607
xvii
Contents
Using the Contextual Menu ............................................................ 608 Camera Movement .......................................................................... 608 Field of View ....................................................................................609 Textures, Images & Backdrops ...................................................... 610 Materials in a Render View ............................................................ 611 Editing Objects in Render Views ................................................... 611 Saving a Render View Picture........................................................ 611 Printing a Render View .................................................................. 612 Rendering Tips and Tricks ............................................................. 612 Light Sources ................................................................................... 614 Light Types ...................................................................................... 614 Defining Light Types....................................................................... 618 Adjusting Lights .............................................................................. 619 Sun Angle Specification Dialog ...................................................... 620 Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 622 Cross Section Slider Dialog ............................................................ 626
Chapter 27: Raytracing

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 627 Creating a Raytrace View............................................................... 627 The Raytrace Window .................................................................... 630 Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................ 630 Tips and Tricks................................................................................ 632 POV-Ray .......................................................................................... 633
Chapter 28: Dimensions

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 635 Compatibility With Previous Versions.......................................... 635 Dimension Defaults.......................................................................... 636 The Dimension Tools....................................................................... 636
xviii
Displaying Dimension Lines ...........................................................640 Selecting Dimension Lines ..............................................................640 Deleting Dimension Lines ...............................................................640 Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................641 Editing Extension Lines ..................................................................642 Dimensions and Importing/Exporting...........................................644 Relocating Objects Using Dimensions ...........................................644 The Dimension Line Specification Dialog .....................................646 The Dimension Defaults Dialog......................................................649
Chapter 29: Text

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................657 Fonts..................................................................................................657 Text ...................................................................................................658 Displaying Text ................................................................................658 Selecting Text ...................................................................................659 Editing Text......................................................................................660 Text Specification Dialog ................................................................662 Text Arrows .....................................................................................664 Printing Text ....................................................................................666 Text and Layout...............................................................................666
Chapter 30: Callouts & Markers

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................667 Callouts.............................................................................................667 Selecting Callouts.............................................................................668 Editing Callouts ...............................................................................668 Callout Specification Dialog ...........................................................669 Markers ............................................................................................671 Selecting Markers............................................................................672
xix
Contents
Editing Markers .............................................................................. 672 Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 672
Chapter 31: CAD

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 675 The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 676 Lines.................................................................................................. 676 Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 680 Arcs ................................................................................................... 684 Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 687 CAD Polylines .................................................................................. 689 Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 690 Polyline Edit Tools........................................................................... 693 Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract ................................... 693 Splines............................................................................................... 696 Box Tools .......................................................................................... 701 CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................ 703 Circles ............................................................................................... 704 CAD Circle Specification Dialog.................................................... 705 Ovals ................................................................................................. 705 CAD Oval Specification Dialog ...................................................... 706 Points ................................................................................................ 707 Displaying CAD Objects ................................................................. 710 Selecting CAD Objects .................................................................... 710 CAD Buttons .................................................................................... 712 Moving CAD Objects ...................................................................... 713 Copying CAD Objects..................................................................... 715 Move Object ..................................................................................... 716 Rotate Object ...................................................................................717 Resize Object.................................................................................... 718
xx
Reflect About Line...........................................................................718 Reflect Object...................................................................................719 Replicate Object...............................................................................720 Delete ................................................................................................721 Reverse Direction.............................................................................721 Make Parallel/Perpendicular .........................................................721 Break Line........................................................................................723 Trim and Extend..............................................................................724 Fillet and Chamfer ..........................................................................725 CAD Blocks ......................................................................................726 CAD Block Specification Dialog.....................................................729 Creating a Library of CAD Blocks ................................................731 Dimensions .......................................................................................732 CAD Preferences .............................................................................732 Number Style/Angle Style Dialog...................................................733 Converting CAD Objects ................................................................733 CAD Menu .......................................................................................735 Snap To: (Snap Points) ...................................................................735 North Pointer ...................................................................................739 CAD Details......................................................................................740 Plan Footprint..................................................................................742 Line Thickness Visibility.................................................................743
Chapter 32: Advanced Design & Editing

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................745 House Wizard...................................................................................745 Plan Check .......................................................................................747 IRC Checklist...................................................................................748 Select Same / Load Same ................................................................749 Edit Area Tools ................................................................................750
xxi
Contents
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area .............................................. 752 Reflect About Line with Edit Area ................................................ 753 Copy/Paste with Edit Area ............................................................. 753 Delete Objects .................................................................................. 754 Rotate View ...................................................................................... 755 Reverse Plan..................................................................................... 756
Chapter 33: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 757 Importing Picture Files ................................................................... 758 Scaling Picture Files ........................................................................ 759 Picture Box Specification Dialog.................................................... 760 Exporting Picture Files ................................................................... 761 Placing Images ................................................................................. 761 Viewing Images................................................................................ 762 Copying Images ............................................................................... 763 Moving Images................................................................................. 763 Resizing an Image............................................................................ 763 Adding Images to the Library ........................................................ 764 Image Specification Dialog ............................................................. 764 Windows Metafiles .......................................................................... 765 Walkthroughs .................................................................................. 766 VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) .............................. 768
Chapter 34: DXF/DWG

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 771 Compatibility ...................................................................................771 DXF vs. DWG .................................................................................. 772 CAD to Walls ...................................................................................772 Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 772
xxii
Chapter 35: Create Symbol Wizard

Overview...........................................................................................787 Importing 3D Data ..........................................................................788 Opening the Create Symbol Wizard..............................................789 Selecting the Symbol Category.......................................................789 Loading the 3D File .........................................................................791 2D Block ...........................................................................................794 Symbol Options................................................................................796 Sizing.................................................................................................799 Materials...........................................................................................802 Openings...........................................................................................802 Plan View..........................................................................................803 Closing the Create Symbol Wizard................................................804 Symbol Specification Dialog ...........................................................804
Chapter 36: Layout

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................807 Preparing for Layout ......................................................................808 Creating a Layout File ....................................................................809 CAD and Text in Layout.................................................................810 Testing the Print Area.....................................................................810 Creating Borders .............................................................................811 Sending Views to Layout.................................................................813 Selecting Layout Views ...................................................................817 Resizing Views .................................................................................817
xxiii
Contents
Additional 2D Import Information................................................779 Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files.......................................................780 Additional 2D Export Information ................................................783 Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model.................................................784
Rescaling Views ............................................................................... 818 Changing the Display of Layout Views ......................................... 818 Keeping Layout Views Current ..................................................... 820 Editing Layout ................................................................................. 822 Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................................................................ 823 Changing the Printing Line Weight............................................... 824 Line Color and Printing.................................................................. 825 Relinking Layout Views .................................................................. 825 Finding Missing Files ...................................................................... 825 Printing Layout Files....................................................................... 827 Exporting Layout Files ................................................................... 830 Layout & Printer Relationship ...................................................... 830
Chapter 37: Printing & Plotting

Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 833 The Different Types of Printers and Plotters ............................... 834 Printing Options .............................................................................. 835 Setting up the Printer...................................................................... 836 Testing the Printer........................................................................... 836 Printing Text and Dimensions........................................................ 837 Printing Directly from a View ........................................................ 839 Printing from Layout ...................................................................... 840 Print Image ...................................................................................... 840 Printing to Scale............................................................................... 841 Printing Across Multiple Pages...................................................... 842 Printing Color or Black and White................................................ 842 Line Weights .................................................................................... 842 Printing to a File .............................................................................. 843 Printing to a Remote Plotter........................................................... 845
xxiv
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................847 Printing the Model...........................................................................847 Assembling the Model .....................................................................849
Chapter 39: Schedules

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................851 Schedule Defaults.............................................................................851 Creating Schedules ..........................................................................852 Schedule Specification Dialog.........................................................852 Converting Schedules to Text.........................................................858 A Window Schedule Example ........................................................858
Chapter 40: Materials List

Chapter Overview ...........................................................................859 Creating an Accurate Materials List .............................................860 Working With the Materials List...................................................861 Calculate From All Floors ..............................................................861 Calculate From Area.......................................................................862 Calculate From Room .....................................................................862 Materials Polyline............................................................................862 The Master List................................................................................863 Editing Columns ..............................................................................865 Editing Materials Lists....................................................................867 Material List Display Options ........................................................868 The Components Dialog..................................................................869 Managing Materials Lists ...............................................................871 Manufacturers .................................................................................871 Exporting the Material List............................................................871
xxv
Contents
Chapter 38: Model Maker
Appendix A: Technical Support Services ................. 873

Printing Problems............................................................................ 873 How to Contact Technical Support ............................................... 873
xxvi
Chapter 1:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Note: This chapter is similar to the Overview chapter in the Getting Started Guide. If you have already read the Getting Started Guide, you may want to proceed to the next chapter.
Create complete working drawings and concept drawings. Reduce your average project cycle while increasing your time for other priorities. Communicate your ideas accurately using CAD details, cross sections, views, renderings, and models. Increase your impact with clients, subcontractors, finance professionals, and planning officials.
Chief Architect is designed to allow builders, architects and other professionals in the building and interior design trades to design effectively and produce plans rapidly. With Chief Architect, the input and correction of design information is fast and simple, allowing you to produce and edit plans during meetings with clients. Chief Architect lets you design and lay out buildings in Plan View while the program simultaneously creates the 3D model. You can tile a Plan View next to a Perspective View and watch one update automatically as you draw in the other. Create working drawings for permit approval and design communication. Produce materials lists for project bids.
Chapter Contents
The Chief Architect Environment Chief Architect Terms Chief Architect Interface Starting Chief Architect Selecting Objects Editing Selected Objects How to Draw a Plan Program Updates Getting Help Windows Standard Color Dialog
The Chief Architect Environment

Both flexible and easy to use, Chief Architect adapts to your needs. The simple interface and extensive custom options allow you to tailor the tools to suit your workflow. You can add as much or as little detail as you like. Most tools are accessed in Chief Architect with the mouse and keyboard. The laying out of rooms and the creation of the model is quick and easy. Instead of drawing lines, Chief Architect places objects which are used to create the 3D model. Chief Architect ships with all of the tools required to produce complete working drawings. This symbol appears in sections of this manual to indicate features that are available only in the Full Version of Chief Architect. Walls are usually the first thing drawn in Chief Architect. Walls can be a simple two line graphical representation or they can be drawn to show an entire assembly. The position and/or thickness of walls can be defined. Rooms are defined by walls. Each room must have one and only one complete, unbroken boundary that defines it. Rooms can be created from a combination of walls, invisible walls, railings, and invisible railings. By defining the room type, common characteristics associated with that type of room will be applied. For example a room defined as a "deck" will not automatically produce a roof. New Floors can be created automatically based on the layout of others. Chief Architect creates a file for each floor of the model. The first floor is the most important because it contains information that will help define the rest of the model. The program will automatically build the floors and ceilings based on the layout of walls. Roof Planes are objects that can be easily edited in Plan View and assigned 3D information such as pitch, thickness, and height. Chief Architect has the capability to automatically model a roof based on userdefined guidelines. Roof planes may also be created from scratch and edited individually. The Foundation is the only floor that can be placed under the first floor. The program will automatically create a Foundation Plan based on the footprint of the first floor and the specified construction methods.
Object-Based Design
Creating working drawings is faster than ever with Chief Architects object-based design technology. Instead of working with the many lines that define an object, simply select the object itself (such as doors, windows, walls, stairs, fireplaces, electrical appliances, furniture, etc.) and open a specification dialog designed for that object. The specification dialogs allow you to define each objects characteristics such as dimensions, placement, style, materials, and other design elements. You can even select and edit an object in 3D Views for instant results.
The Chief Architect Environment
A door, window, fireplace or bay window is an Opening. When an opening is removed from a wall, the wall will create a space for it automatically. Cabinets, Soffits, Partitions, and Shelves are the basic building blocks used to design kitchens, bathrooms, and closets. These objects are very versatile and can be used to create an unlimited number of design details throughout your model. Many other Objects required to model a complete house are available as 3D objects or symbols. Some must be placed in a wall, while others may be placed anywhere in the model. All 3D objects may be copied, moved and resized to represent real world objects. Framing and other structural objects can be created automatically or manually. Once built, framing can be viewed or modified to show the construction details of a model. Images are pictures of real world objects that can be used to enhance the model in 3D views. They are stored in the Images library. Many are shipped with the program, but you can also create your own. Materials can be defined and assigned to objects to graphically represent real world materials in 3D views. Material quantities can be calculated in the Material List. Materials are assigned a Type which is often associated with a pattern. The Type defines how the material will be calculated in the Material List. The pattern and the color of the material will display in 3D views. Materials can be assigned a Texture which defines how the material will appear in a Render View. The texture is represented by a
2D bitmap image, which can make a flat surface appear to have 3D qualities. Site Plans and Terrain Modeling - In addition to creating accurate 3D models of buildings, Chief Architect has the ability to create a 3D approximation of the building site. The Terrain Modeler allows you to enter elevation data that can be used to model the changes in elevation of the finished grade. The Terrain Perimeter can be used as the terrain boundary and to represent property lines in 2D. CAD objects such as lines, arcs, polylines, text, and dimensions can be used to add details or annotation to a plan or working drawing. CAD objects are 2D objects and will not appear in 3D Views as part of the model. Some 3D objects can be created from CAD objects.
Easy Access to Tools

Chief Architect has many features and commands that are accessible in a variety of ways. Menus provide access to most common tools. Toolbar buttons offer convenience and familiarity. Many tools are also available as keyboard shortcuts. Contextual menus are available anytime with a right-click of the mouse. A Status Bar at the bottom of the screen keeps you informed and offers descriptions of tools.
Overview
Customizable Toolbars
Customizable toolbars have won the popularity contest among users of Chief Architect. Since the tools needed depend on the work being done, Chief Architect allows you to tailor toolbars to suit your own needs, preserves your customizations between sessions, and even allows you to store different toolbar button configurations for future use.
retrofit your new specifications to all default windows in your plan. Manual overrides accomodate exceptions to the rule. Chief Architects extensive Preferences let you change the program behavior to suit your needs. Turn on/off certain display elements. Choose your own background and Plan View colors. Change the default appearance of text. Set autosave frequency, maximum number of undos, and file protection. Set default directories for various files. Complete CAD settings control the behavior of CAD tools. Setup the material list categories, subcategories, and report style, as well as manufacturer / supplier information. Set rendering specifications to maximize efficiency and presentation quality.
Comprehensive Default and Preference Settings

Chief Architects powerful Defaults allow you to tailor the objects used in the program to match the objects they represent in real life. Change your default windows or doors to match those available from your supplier, before placing them in your plan. The default settings also allow you to make changes to existing objects in your plan. Make changes to the default settings and
Chief Architect Terms

Mode refers to the two main interfaces of Chief Architect - Architectural and CAD mode or the active tool mode such as Interior Wall mode, Window mode, Straight Stair mode, etc. In Architectural mode you can create, place and edit 3D objects that are used to create the 3D model. As you design the building, you can work in different views with the available Architectural tools. CAD mode is similar to many other 2D drafting programs. In CAD mode you can draw 2D objects that help clarify the graphic information in the views of the model. Some CAD objects have 3D characteristics that make them part of the 3D model. Layers - The objects drawn in both Architectural and CAD mode are placed on Layers. The layers can be used to organize which information displays. Layers are organized into three categories in the Layer Display Options dialog. Layers that are already named should not be changed. The Layers on the User tab can be named however you wish.
Chief Architect Interface
Architectural - These layers mostly contain common architectural components that are part of the model. System - These layers mostly contain CAD objects that are drawn by the program. Some objects that are placed on System layers can be moved to User layers. User - These layers can be named and used by the user to organize information in the plan files. Both System and User layers are referred to as CAD layers. 3D Views - Chief Architect is a 3D modeling program. Much of the creation and editing of
Textures are bitmap images which are applied to surfaces. In the render view they look like real materials. Some texture bitmaps are included in the program to help you become familiar with rendering materials.

Most work is done in the Plan View of the model. Walls, roofs, windows and doors are easily created and edited in the Plan View. While work is being done in Plan View the program is creating a 3D model that can also be viewed from any angle. Once the 3D model exists, interior and exterior elevations, cross sections and 3D views can be automatically generated. The model may be edited in all views. Changes made in one view are automatically updated in all others. main window indicates which mode is currently active. Left button refers to the left mouse button, which is the primary mouse button used in Chief. If unspecified, the manual refers to the left mouse button.
Note: This assumes that the mouse is programmed for a right-handed person. If you are left-handed, and have re-programmed your mouse, you will need to reverse the instructions for left and right buttons in this manual.
Using the Mouse

Most objects (cabinet, door, window, electrical object, etc.) are created by either clicking the left mouse button or by dragging the cursor from one end of the object to the other (wall, dimension line, stairway). The Status Bar at the bottom of Chief Architects
Right button refers to the right mouse button. In Chief Architect it is used as a single-click select. The right mouse button will allow you to select any object from within any drawing mode. For example, if you are in Wall mode, you can use the right mouse button to select an object such as a cabinet or a piece of
Overview
the model is done in Plan View, but you can also work in many different 3D views. When 3D objects are viewed in a 3D view, (Perspective, Overview, Section/Elevation, or Render View), their appearance depends on the materials assigned to them. Materials can be defined with patterns, colors and textures that will appear in the 3D views.
furniture. Once an object is selected there are many editing options. The right mouse button can also be used to open a context sensitive menu which contains additional editing commands. For more information, see Appearance Panel on page 90. Middle button: Chief Architect does not utilize the middle mouse button on a three-button mouse. It can be programmed to work as a doubleclick if you desire. Wheel Mouse: The scroll feature of a wheel mouse enables you to zoom in and out, in both plan and cross section views, centering on the location of your cursor. Depending on the configuration of your mouse, it may be necessary to press the Shift key, or the Ctrl while turning the mouse wheel. Drag - means to hold down the left mouse button, move the mouse and then release the mouse button when the move is complete. Move to - means to move the cursor with the mouse to a certain place on the plan. Click - means to press and release the specified mouse button. Click on - means to move the cursor to an object and then click while the cursor is over the object. Double-click - means to quickly click the left mouse button twice. The double-click speed is programmed in Windows.
each mode a standard toolbar has been provided with the tools most often used. You can customize the toolbars by removing and adding buttons to these toolbars or by creating your own toolbars from scratch.
The Standard Toolbar

A toolbar displays near the top of the main window. Each button also corresponds to a menu object. The toolbar is basically a shortcut that allows you to conveniently access the most commonly used menu functions. Entering a new mode can cause the toolbar itself to change, allowing options which are only available in the chosen mode.
Child Tools
Some tool buttons only appear on child toolbars. A child toolbar is a toolbar that is activated when a parent tool has been selected. Click the Wall Tools parent button and see the child tools that appear to the right.
Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the current mode. This determines what the left mouse button will do when pressed. Use the toolbar buttons whenever possible to save time. All drawing modes may also be accessed through the Build menu.
Toolbars
Toolbars and tool buttons are the fastest way to access most features in the program. For
The Edit Toolbar

When an object is selected in Chief Architect, a special toolbar called the "Edit" toolbar will appear on your screen. Any edit
tools realted to the currently selected object will appear on the edit toolbar. The edit toolbar is very closely related to the contextual menu.
Contextual menus can be displayed by clicking the right mouse button when the cursor is over a selected object. The options that appear will vary depending on the type of object selected.
Menus
Chief Architect utilizes a standard Windows Menu format. The Menus appear below the title bar in the program window. In this Reference Manual, menu paths will be written as Build> Window> Box Window. The Window submenu of the Build menu is shown below.
Dialogs are used to enter sizes and other information to move and edit objects within the program. Many dialogs have a preview to show you how the changes made affect the selected object. To see the picture of the object update in the dialog as numbers are changed, click in a different box or press the Tab key on the keyboard. Every Chief Architect object has its own unique specification dialog which allows for data related to the object to be detailed. This dialog is referred to as the objects Specification dialog and can be accessed by selecting the object and clicking the Open Object edit button. Some objects will open their Specification dialog if you doubleclick on them in Select Objects mode
If a menu item has a check left, it is active.
displayed to its
Menu items which have an ellipsis ... after their name open a dialog when selected. Menu items with an arrowhead after their name have sub-menu that will open when they are selected. Some menu items have shortcut keys listed next to them. These can be typed on the keyboard to activate the specified command, often saving valuable time. For example, Ctrl S = Save, F6 = Fill Window, F1 = Help.
Pressing the Enter key when a dialog is opened is the same as clicking OK. The dialog will close and the object will be updated with the new information.
Entering Dimensions
When using Imperial units, lengths and distances may be entered as inches or feet and inches, in either decimal or fractional form. When using Metric units, Millimeters are used for all metric distances. To enter feet you must include the "" marker otherwise the program will read inches.
Overview
Dialogs
In most cases the program will allow precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractional inches with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are allowed. The program will convert decimals to fractions. If the number in the dialog is followed by a decimal point, the number can be entered as a floating point number instead of a whole number with fractions. These numbers can be entered to a greater precision than 1/16th of an inch. Angles may be entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or degrees, minutes and seconds.
Shortcut Keys Many commands can be initiated directly from the keyboard. A standard way of opening menus and menu items is using the Alt + access key. Press Alt on your keyboard and press the access keys that appear in the menu. The access key is the underlined letter in a menu name. Some of the function keys located across the top of the keyboard can be used to access Chief Architect commands. For more information about the available menu items, toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys, see Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set or changed globally throughout a model. In a dialog, you will know if a value is a dynamic default if it is followed by a "(D)". This indicates that the value can be changed in the default setup for that type of object and all objects in the model of the same type will be updated automatically. If an object has one of these values that has been set to something other then the default, it will not be updated when the default value is changed. To reset a value to the dynamic default, or to check and see if a value is dynamic, type a "d" in an entry box. If a new value appears with the "(D)" following it, then the value is dynamic. If the box will not accept a "d" as an entry, the value does not have a dynamic default. For values that do not have dynamic defaults, you can group select related objects and change the settings for all selected objects in the specification dialog.
Windows
Window has two meanings in Chief Architect. First, there is the window-object that is placed into a wall of your plan. Second are the views within a software program that are also commonly referred to as "Windows". Chief Architect can create many different kinds of views, all of which are displayed within their own window. Up to ten windows showing different views of the same or different models can be in the main window at any given time. When multiple windows are open on your screen, the active window is the one whose title bar has the same color and configuration as the Chief Architect title bar. Click anywhere within a window to activate it. Here is a list of child window types: Plan View - A 2D view of the model looking from the top. Only one floor can be current in any Plan View. Wall Elevation - An interior elevation of a wall.
Cross Section/Elevation - A section cut through the full model, from foundation to ridge. Exterior Elevations are also produced by using the Cross Section View. Full Camera View - The Full Camera tool creates a perspective view of the entire model. Floor Camera- A perspective view of the current floor only. Full Overview - A view of the entire model. Floor Overview - A view of a single floor. Ceilings are omitted so you can see the interior from above. Render View - A render view is similar to a perspective. It can be generated automatically with the Render camera or from a perspective view. Render Full Overview - A Render View of the entire structure, including all floors and the roof. Render Floor Overview - A Render View of the current floor. Framing Overview - A view of the entire model displaying only framing. Framing must be built before this is generated. Render Framing Overview - A Render View of the entire multi-story structure, displaying only framing. Raytrace View - A photo realistic view generated from a Render View. Material List - A spreadsheet of materials for a specified portion of the model. CAD Detail - A 2D CAD drawing that is saved with the model.
Wall Framing Detail - When framing is built, the program creates a detail for each wall in the building. Layout File - Layout pages consisting of views arranged for printing. Up to 200 Layout pages are available per plan.
Library Browser - A window which displays the library objects available. Aerial View - A view window which allows you to move around the Plan View quickly.
Any combination of child windows can display at one time. Multiple windows can display different parts of the same plan or unrelated plans. Child windows can be placed on top of one another or tiled so that all are visible. When you make a change to the model all windows related to the model are updated simultaneously to reflect the change. Click the button in the upper right corner to close a window. The in line with the Chief Architect title bar closes the program, and any s below it are for individual windows open within the program.
Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of Chief Architects main window displays helpful information. At far left a short description will display for the tool buttons or menu item which is currently highlighted with the mouse. It displays the active tool.
Overview
Walkthrough - A series of pictures recorded by the Record Walkthrough function in the 3D menu.
It displays the current floor. At far right it displays the current CAD layer and the CAD coordinates of the cur-
sor, which is similar to the Cartesian coordinate system and allows for the CAD tools to be used with precision.
Starting Chief Architect

When you open the program, a blank plan file opens in a child window within the larger main window. The main window contains all of the menus and toolbars. When you pass the cursor over a toolbar button or above a pull down menu item, a brief help message appears at the bottom of the main window. Whenever you see one of these messages you can press the F1 key to get more detailed information about that object. The title bar at the top of a child window holds the name of your drawing file followed by the word "Plan". At first, the drawing has no name, so "Untitled" appears. As you create other views, the name of the file and view type can be found in this area.
Selecting Objects
Select refers to selecting an object for editing. Any object can be selected in Select Objects mode. You can also right-click on an object in any mode to select an object or open a context sensitive menu. You can also restrict your selection set to certain types of objects, such as cabinets, by clicking on them in Cabinet mode. In most cases, if you activate the mode for the type of object you wish to select, then hold down the Shift key as you drag a marquee, only the objects of the same type as the active mode will be selected. If in Base Cabinet only base cabinets. If in Wall Cabinets only wall cabinets. mode, this selects mode, this selects
Marquee Select ( Shift +drag)

Objects may be group selected by one of two methods. The easiest and fastest method is to hold down the Shift key while dragging a marquee (rectangle) around the objects to be selected. The marquee must cross at least one half of the object for it to be selected. This method will work for free-standing objects only, not for walls, windows and doors.
If in Full Height mode, this selects only base, wall and full height cabinets. If in a Soffit soffits. If in Text If in Callout callouts. mode, this selects only mode, this selects only text. mode, this selects only
10
Editing Selected Objects
In other modes (such as Select Objects mode) CAD objects as well as all of the above objects are selected.
Multiple Select ( Shift +click)

You may instead choose to group select objects one-by-one. This method is required for group selecting walls or openings. This method is optional for free-standing objects. Select the first wall or railing. Then Shift +click each additional wall or railing to be selected. No other type of object will be selected once the first wall or railing is selected. Select the first opening (window, door or built-in masonry fireplace). Then Shift +click each additional opening to be selected. Nothing but openings will be selected once the first opening is selected.
Select Next Object

If there is more than one object in the selected area, it may be difficult to select the desired object. Click the Select Next Object edit button until the desired object is selected. Pressing the Tab key on the keyboard functions similarly. This button is not available for a group of selected objects.
Note: A selected object will remain selected until another object is selected or the current mode is changed.
Editing Selected Objects

When an object is selected one or more handles (small red squares or triangles) display. Drag from a handle to move, resize or rotate the object. When an object is selected the Edit toolbar will appear with edit buttons that are specific to the selected object(s). Place the cursor over the center handle to reveal a four-headed arrow which allows you to relocate the object.
Most moving constraints can be overridden by holding down the grabbing the move handle.
Ctrl
key while
Using the Mouse

Once an object is selected the cursor will change as you drag it over the various handles to indicate what can be done with that object. Move the cursor above the various handles to see the possibilities.
Place the cursor over a side handle to reveal a two-headed arrow which allows you to resize the object.
11
Overview
Select a free-standing object (cabinet, etc.). Then Shift +click each additional free-standing object to be selected. Nothing but free standing objects will be selected once the first object is selected. This method will not discriminate by type of free-standing object.
Place the cursor over the triangular handle to reveal a circular arrow which allows you to rotate the object.
If only one type of object is selected, clicking the Open Object edit button will normally access the specification dialog for that type of object. If different types of objects are selected, the Open Object edit button usually does not appear. If the group-selected objects have data in common, then the Open Object edit button may appear, allowing you to open the group of objects for specification. Only some of the data may be editable. Cabinets are the exception to this rule. Although base cabinets, wall cabinets, and full height cabinets are different types of objects, they are also similar types. If the selection set consists only of these three types of cabinets, the Cabinet Specification dialog will open when the Open Object edit button is clicked. This can be used to change the door style of multiple cabinets. Activate Full Height Cab and use a marquee style select around the entire kitchen to select all cabinets and only cabinets.
Using Edit Buttons

When an object has been selected certain edit buttons will appear on the edit toolbar. The edit buttons that appear depend on the type of object selected, the current view, and how the object was selected. Edit toolbars are not customizable by the user, they are defined by the program. For more information, see Edit Toolbar Buttons on page 62.
Open Object
The Open Object edit button will appear when an object is selected. Click this button to open the objects specification dialog and edit it. You can also double-click on an object while in Select Objects mode to open its specification dialog.
How to Draw a Plan

When you are drawing a plan in Chief Architect, you are not just drawing lines, you are placing and/or creating 3D objects that represent building components. Here is a brief overview of the standard order for you to create your buildings. The program ships with default settings so that you can immediately start drawing plans. It is recommended that you first review these default settings and make the appropriate changes to match your methods of drawing and building. For more information, see Defaults & Preferences on page 83. 1. Go through each of the Edit> Default Settings menu items and define the parts that will make up your building. Double-click the Roof Plane tool to open the Build Roof dialog and define the parameters of your roofs. See, Build Roof Dialog on page 352.
2.
12
Program Updates
3.
Use Build> Wall> Define Wall Types to define the various wall types to be used in your building. See Wall Type Definitions on page 162.
to add up to nine floors above the first floor. See Adding Floors on page 270. 10. Build the foundation plan for your model. Use the Foundation Defaults dialog to define your foundations. See Building a Foundation on page 279. 11. Model your roof plan with the manual roof tools or the automatic roof generator. When the roof plan is correct, protect it from being accidentally rebuilt by checking Lock Roof Planes in the Build Roof dialog, and by locking System Layer 10, Roof Planes. See Roofs on page 329. 12. Place cabinet modules into the kitchen and bathrooms. Place fixtures, appliances and other electrical objects. Now that your design has been fine tuned you can use the framing tools to design the structure of the building and create the details needed for working drawings. 13. Open the Build Framing dialog and check the appropriate boxes to automatically build framing. See Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371. 14. Create 3D views of your model and send them to a Layout File for printing. 15. Use the Layout facility to properly present your drawings.
Once your objects have been defined you can start placing them in the Plan View. 4. Lay out exterior walls first. Always draw your walls in a clockwise direction. This keeps exterior surfaces to the outside of the building. See Drawing Walls on page 144. Generate automatic exterior dimensions and adjust walls using the dimensions for precision. See Moving Walls Using Dimensions on page 152. Layout interior walls next. Use the dimension tools to adjust the walls and correctly size your rooms. Place doorways and windows in walls.
5.
6.
7.
Note: Draw walls first. Openings can be placed within them later.
8.
Define rooms, floor height, and ceiling heights. This will define the top plate height when you model your roof plan or upper floors. See Room Specification Dialog on page 204. Click the Build New Floor button to add a blank upper floor or one based on the first floor footprint. Repeat this step
9.
Program Updates
Select Help> Download Program Updates to launch your default Web browser to the Program Updates section of the Chief Architect Web site. www.chiefarchitect.com
13
Overview
Getting Help
There are many forms of help available for Chief Architect. Tool Tips, the Status Bar, online Help, product documentation in both printed and electronic format, and ARTs official Web site, www.chiefarchitect.com. When you move the cursor above any toolbar button or menu item, a Tool Tip will appear in the Status Bar at the bottom of Chief Architects main window. This offers a brief description of the tool and how to use it. Any time you see a Tool Tip in the Status Bar, you can press the F1 function key to open the online help for more information about that topic. Press the Help button in any of the dialogs to open the online help for more information about that dialog. When an object is selected, handles will appear that allow you to move, resize or rotate the object. Place the cursor over one of these handles and press the F1 function key to open the online help for more information about editing that object. Online Help is also available through the Help menu. Select Help> Index to open the online help and explore the Table of Contents or search for key words. The entire manual can be found on the installation CD in .pdf format. With Acrobat 4.0 and newer you can view the Reference Manual and Getting Started Guide right on your computer. All Cross References and page numbers can be clicked to jump directly to that topic. Select Help> View Reference Manual, or Help>View Getting Started Guide to view the documentation in electronic format. Visit our Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com to find the answers to commonly asked Technical Support questions (FAQs). Another great way to expand your skills and productivity is to tap into the wealth of experience and knowledge of fellow Chief Architect users. Chief Architect has a community of customers who are happy to share tips and tricks theyve learned from years of experience. Two Web sites are available. ChiefTalk is maintained and monitored by the makers of Chief Architect and is easily accessible through ARTs Web site. Yahoo! Groups also hosts a Chief Architect users group independently supported by active Chief Architect users. Both Web sites are an excellent resource for beginners and power users alike.
We strive to make our documentation as helpful as possible for all of our customers. We hope your learning experience with Chief Architect is smooth and comfortable. Please send any questions, comments, or feedback to documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
14
Windows Standard Color Dialog
3 4 Overview 15 1
Chief Architect uses the standard Windows Color dialog to select colors in all areas of the program.
1 Click in any one of the Base colors

boxes to select it as the new color. boxes to define which box will contain the new custom color to be defined.
2 Click in one of the Custom colors
3 Click and drag in the color palette area

to dynamically choose a color. selected color.
4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of the

here. Click Add to Custom Colors to add the color to the Custom Colors palette.
5 The current color selection displays
16
Chapter 2:
Menus and Toolbar Buttons
Chapter Overview
Using Chief Architects menus is a good way to familiarize yourself with the program. They provide a familiar way to access almost 100% of the programs functionality. Chief Architect simplifies access to much of the programs functionality through the use of toolbars and toolbar buttons. Tool bars contain toolbar buttons. Tool buttons are basically short cuts to specific functions, or "tools", within the program. While the menus offer access to most of the programs functionality, toolbars are often more convenient to work with. Chief Architect has many preset toolbars that display at different times, depending on your current mode or view. You can customize all but the Edit toolbar, a toolbar that appears whenever an object is selected. New toolbars can also be created for each mode or view.
Default toolbar configuration files for an 800 x 600 screen resolution and another for 1024 x 768 have been shipped with the program. If you change your screen resolution, you may also want to change your toolbar configuration.
Some tool buttons have child buttons. Parent buttons can be identified by a blue triangle in their bottom right corner. Click the parent button to display its child buttons.
Chapter Contents
Toolbar Customization Dialog Toolbar Configurations Restoring Toolbars Chief Architects Tools 3D and Render View Toolbar Buttons CAD Preference Buttons Edit Toolbar Buttons
17
Tools
Toolbar Customization Dialog

To customize a toolbar choose Tools> Customize Toolbars and the Toolbar Customization dialog will display.
Tools Tab
4 5
2 3
Adding Tool Buttons

Buttons Available For Current Mode area and drop it into an existing toolbar, outside of the dialog, to add the button. Drag a button from the Main Toolbar Buttons Available For Current Mode area and drop it away from an existing toolbar to create a new toolbar. The selected button will be first in the new toolbar. The new toolbar will be named with the current mode followed by a number.
1 Drag a button from the Main Toolbar
You can use the blank button in the upper left hand corner of the Main Toolbar Buttons Available For Current Mode area in your toolbars as a spacer.
Buttons Available For Current Mode area to display it in the Child Buttons area. If it has child buttons associated with it, they will display to its right.
2 Click a button in the Main Toolbar
3 All child buttons related to the selected

parent button display here. In this example, the Cabinet Tools parent button was selected in the Main Toolbar Buttons Available For Current Mode area.
18
Toolbar Customization Dialog
As a result all cabinet child buttons display with it in the Child Buttons area. By default, child buttons are only displayed when their parent buttons are clicked. This can be changed however. You can add any child button such as Soffit or Wall Cabinets to other toolbars by dragging it from the Toolbar Customization dialog to the desired location. A parent button will always display its child buttons. So, if you add the Cabinet Tools parent button to a toolbar, it will display all child buttons whenever the Cabinet Tools parent button is clicked.
existing toolbar. As you choose different modes, the available tools will change appropriately, as well as the background window.
5 Drag the Information Window into

any toolbar for it to display.
Deleting Tools from Toolbars

You can delete a button from a toolbar only when the Toolbar Customization dialog is displayed. To delete a tool button, drag it out of the toolbar while holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button and that toolbutton will be removed from the toolbar.
Modes - Select the mode for which you want to add or customize an
Toolbar Tab
1 3
2 4 5 7 6
given mode is displayed in this area. Select any toolbar by clicking on its name. affected displays here, and may be changed by selecting another from the drop down list.
1 A list of all existing toolbars for the 2 The mode or window type being
deactivated, the Activate button will become available. Click Activate to have the selected toolbar become activated again. toolbar from the list. Once deleted, that toolbar will no longer be available.
3 If a selected toolbar is currently
4 Click Delete to remove a selected
19
Tools
toolbars to their original configuration. This button is only available if a backup toolbar configuration file has been created with the same name as the toolbar configuration file.
Note: Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button will delete any toolbar customization you have done.
5 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
box to have the tool tips pop up when the cursor is moved over the buttons and menu items. lock toolbars in their current position on screen.
6 Display Tool Tips - Select the check
7 Lock Toobars - Select the check box to
Configurations Tab
1 3
2 4 5
configurations displays here. Select a configuration before clicking the Remove, Copy, or Switch To buttons.
1 A list of currently available toolbar
4 Copy - Use this button to create a copy

of the selected toolbar configuration. to the selected toolbar configuration. You can also accomplish this by right clicking on any toolbar and selecting a configuration from the menu, or clicking a Toolbar Configuration button.
5 Switch To - Click this button to switch
Add - Click this button to browse for a toolbar configuration file.
the selected toolbar configuration. This removes the configuration but doesnt delete the configuration file.
3 Remove - Click this button to remove
20
Toolbar Configurations
Toolbar Configurations
Chief Architect has many different toolbar buttons and only a limited amount of space to contain them, which depends on your monitors size. Chief Architect comes with toolbars configured for 800 x 600 monitors and 1024 x 768 monitors. The Chief Architect Version 8.0 compatibility toolbar configuration makes your toolbar appear much like it did in Version 8.0. Custom toolbar configurations allow you to create and save toolbar button combinations. If you are working in a particular stage of design you can create a custom configuration that shows only the needed buttons. You can switch between toolbar configurations in 3 ways: Choose a configuration from the Configurations tab of the Toolbar Customization dialog. Right click on a toolbar and choose a toolbar configuration from the contextual menu. Click a toolbar configuration button. By default, new toolbar configurations show up with the button. You can create your own button icon by creating a .bmp file with the same name as the configuration. Look at the Default.bmp file in the Chief Architect 9.0 program folder that corresponds to the "Default Toolbar" configuration for an example of this. Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24 pixels in size. The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to the system 3D face color. The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to the system 3D Shadow color. The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to the system 3D light color.
Placing your custom configurations on the utility toolbar makes them available in all modes.
The current toolbar configurations are stored in the custtbset.dat file in Chief Architects program folder.
Restoring Toolbars
There are two files installed by Chief Architect that affect the way toolbars appear, *.toolbar and *.toolbarbak. *.toolbarbak is written by the program any time the program is closed. When another toolbar configuration is selected, or when the Toolbar Customization dialog is closed, it saves changes made to the toolbar layout. *.toolbar files are used to remember original toolbar settings. When you click the Reset Toolbars button in the Toolbar Customization dialog, the program copies this file and saves it as *.toolbar. If you have made changes, and you prefer them over the original toolbar, create a copy of your *.toolbar file and save it as *.toolbarbak. The next time you click Reset Toolbars, you will return to your original settings.
21
Tools
Chief Architects Tools

Chief Architects main menu appears under the main title bar. Menu items followed by a triangle open submenus. Menu items followed by an ellipsis (...) open a dialog. Move the cursor over each menu name for a brief description in the help message area at the bottom of the screen. Press the F1 key to get online Help for that menu item. Menus may be activated using the keyboard at any time by pressing the Alt key and the underlined letter of the menu name. Many menu items have tool buttons that act as shortcuts. Images of those tool buttons have been included next to the menu item that they access in this manual.
File Menu
The File menu contains all the options related to opening files, closing files, saving files, exporting files, or printing files.
Menu Command
File> New File> New Layout File> Open... File> Open Layout... File> Open Template... File> Search For Plans...
Tool Keyboard Button Shortcut

Ctrl + N
Effect
Create a new plan file. See Creating a New Plan on page 68. Create a new layout file. See Creating a Layout File on page 809.
Ctrl + O
Open an existing plan file. See Opening a Plan or Layout File on page 70. Open an existing layout file. See Opening a Plan or Layout File on page 70. Create a new plan file using a template plan. See Template Files on page 72. Search for a plan in an existing plan database file. See Searching for Plans on page 73.
22
Menu Command
File> Close

Ctrl + W (or F4)
Effect
Close the current view window. If the current view window is a Plan View, you will be prompted to close any related 3D views first. See Closing Plans and Views on page 76. Close all windows. See Closing Plans and Views on page 76.
File> Close All File> Save Ctrl + S
Save all files related to the 3D model except for the layout file. See Saving a Plan or Layout File on page 69.
File> Save As...
File> Save Plan Thumbnail File> Export> Entire Plan... File> Export> Current View (DWG,DXF)... File> Export> All Floors (DWG, DXF)... File> Export> 3D Model (DWG, DXF)... File> Export> VRML (WRL)...
Save the current view as a thumbnail for the plan, which will appear in the Open Plan File dialog. See Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 70. Export all plan files and external referenced files to an empty folder. See Exporting an Entire Plan on page 77. Exports a 2D DXF/DWG file of the current Plan View. See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 780. Exports a 2D DXF/DWG file which includes all floors in Plan View. Items of different types or on different floors are placed on distinct layers. See Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 780. Only available from a 3D view. Exports the entire model as a 3D DWG/DXF. See Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model on page 784. Only available from a Perspective or Render View. Export the entire model in a .wrl file format which allows you to create real time Walkthroughs using a VRML plug-in or import into other graphics programs. See VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) on page 768.
23
Tools
Save the 3D model, and all associated files with another path name. See Save and Save As on page 70.
Menu Command
File> Export> POV-Ray (POV)... File> Export> Metafile(WMF,E MF)... File> Export> Picture (BMP, JPG, PNG)... File> Export> Material Definitions...
Effect
Exports the entire model as a POV Ray compatible file which can then be imported into POV Ray. See Raytracing on page 627. Export a Windows Metafile of the current view. See Windows Metafiles on page 765. Export any view as a picture file. See Exporting Picture Files on page 761.
N/A
Export the set of defined materials from the current plan file. This creates a .dat file that can be imported into other plan files. See Exporting/ Importing Material Definitions on page 570. Export the set of multi-layer wall definitions from a plan so that they can be imported into another. See Exporting Wall Definitions on page 167. Import a 2D DWG/DXF file as CAD data. See Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 772. Import a picture file (.bmp, .jpg, .png) into the Plan View, Layout View or Cross Section/ Elevation View. See Importing Picture Files on page 758.
File> Export> N/A Wall Definitions... File> Import> Drawing (DWG, DXF)... File> Import> Picture (BMP, JPG, PNG)... File> Import> Material Definitions... N/A
Import a previously created material definition file. See Exporting/Importing Material Definitions on page 570. Import a file containing wall type definitions from a different plan and merge them with the current plans wall type definitions. See Importing Wall Definitions on page 166. Open a dialog that allows you to import a defined Layer Set from another plan file. See Importing Layer Sets on page 130.
File> Import> N/A Wall Definitions...
File> Import> Layer Sets...
24
Menu Command
File> Import> Terrain... File> Print> Print... File> Print> Print Image... File> Print> Print Model... File> Print> Printer Setup... File> Send to Layout... File> Exit Names of Plans Most Recently Opened
Effect
Import terrain data from a text file in a variety of formats. See Importing Terrain Data on page 507. Open the Print dialog to print your plan file or layout sheet. See Printing Options on page 835. Print the current view as an image. Used to print a Render View or a 3D view showing images, such as trees. See Print Image on page 840.
N/A
Opens Print Setup dialog which is used to specify the settings of the default Windows printer. See Setting up the Printer on page 836. Send the current view to an open Layout file. See Sending Views to Layout on page 813. Exit from Chief Architect. See Exiting Chief Architect on page 77.
N/A
Only available after opening a plan. The number of plans that appear in the list can be set, See General Panel on page 97.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the options for manipulating items. Many of these editing options also have a toolbar button and/or a keyboard option (noted next to the menu item) which do the same thing.
Menu Command
Edit> Undo

Ctrl + Z
Effect
Allows multiple undos of plan changes depending on your settings in the Preferences dialog. See General Panel on page 97.
25
Tools
Opens the Print Model dialog which allows you to print plan templates for making a model of your plan. See Model Maker on page 847.
Menu Command
Edit> Redo Edit> Cut Edit> Copy

Ctrl + Y N/A Ctrl + X Ctrl + C
Effect
Redo the last Undo performed. Delete the selected item, and copies it to the clipboard so it may be pasted elsewhere. Copy the selected item to the clipboard so it may be pasted elsewhere. The original item is left unchanged. See Copying on page 713. Paste the last item cut or copied. See Copying on page 713. Delete the selected object. Opens a dialog which allows you to delete items of a particular type in a single room, all rooms, or throughout a whole plan. See Delete Objects on page 754. Activate the mode for selecting objects. See Selecting Objects on page 10. Display the specification dialog for the selected object. See Editing Selected Objects on page 11. Displays the Symbol Specification dialog. See Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804. Allows you to select all objects within an area and Move or Copy the entire area by dragging it to a new location. See Edit Area on page 750. Allows you to select visible objects within an area and Move or Copy the entire area by dragging it to a new location. See Edit Area on page 750. Group selection tool that allows you to Move or Copy an entire area from all floors. See Edit Area (All Floors) on page 751.
Edit> Paste Edit> Delete Edit> Delete Objects...
Ctrl + V Del Ctrl + Spacebar
Edit> Select Objects Edit> Open Object...
Spacebar Ctrl + E
Edit> Open Symbol...
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area Visible
Edit>Edit Area> Edit Area (All Floors)
26
Menu Command
Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All Floors) Visible Edit> Default Settings> Plan Defaults...
Effect
Group selection tool that allows you to Move or Copy visible objects from an entire area from all floors. See Edit Area (All Floors) on page 751. Set general parameters for a plan including resizing fixtures and furniture, and setting the nominal wall thickness and allowed wall angles. See Plan Defaults on page 86. Set or change the default wall type for interior and exterior walls, or create new types. See Wall/Railing Defaults Setup on page 184.
DoubleClick
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Pony Wall... Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Railing...
Set or change the defaults for pony walls. See Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on page 185. DoubleClick Set or change the default railing type. See Railing Defaults Dialog on page 185. DoubleClick Set or change the default railing type. See Deck Railing Defaults Dialog on page 185. DoubleClick Set or change the default fencing type. See Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 186. DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Deck Railing... Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Fencing...
27
Tools
Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Wall...
Menu Command
Edit> Default Settings> Door Defaults> Interior Door... Edit> Default Settings> Door Defaults> Exterior Door... Edit> Default Settings> Window Defaults...
Effect
Set or change the defaults for interior doors. See Door Defaults on page 211.
DoubleClick Set or change the defaults for exterior doors. See Door Defaults on page 211. DoubleClick Set or change the default window type and size. See Window Defaults on page 234. DoubleClick Opens Foundation Defaults dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page 277. Set or change the default floor and ceiling height and other settings for the current floor. See Floor Defaults on page 269.
Edit> Default Settings> Foundation Defaults... Edit> Default Settings> Floor Defaults...
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Framing Defaults...
Set the member sizes for all framing items. See Framing Defaults on page 365. DoubleClick Opens list of the default electrical items. See Electrical Defaults on page 435. DoubleClick Set or change the default cabinet size, door style, etc. See Cabinet Defaults on page 438. DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Electrical Defaults...
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> General...
28
Menu Command
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> Base Cabinet...
Effect
Set or change the default cabinet size, door style, etc. for base cabinets. See Cabinet Defaults on page 438.
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> Full Height DoubleCabinet... Click Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> Wall Cabinet... Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> Shelf...
Set or change the default cabinet size, door style, etc. for full height cabinets. See Cabinet Defaults on page 438.
DoubleClick
Set or change the default size and height for shelves. See Cabinet Defaults on page 438. DoubleClick Set or change the default sizefor partitions. See Partitions on page 439. DoubleClick Set or change the defaults for roads. See Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515.
Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> Partition...
Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Road...
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Driveway...
DoubleClick
Set or change the defaults for driveways. See Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515.
29
Tools
Set or change the default cabinet size, door style, etc. for wall cabinets. See Cabinet Defaults on page 438.
Menu Command
Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Road Stripe... Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Sidewalk...
Effect
Set or change the defaults for road striping. See Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515.
DoubleClick
DoubleClick N/A
Set or change the defaults for sidewalks. See Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515.
Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> General Materials... Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> Room Materials... Edit> Default Settings> Camera Defaults... Edit> Default Settings> Dimension Defaults...
Allows you to assign materials to objects that do not have a default setup. See Defining the Default Materials on page 571. Set or change the defaults for room materials. See Room Material Defaults on page 188.
N/A
N/A
Set or change the default camera height, movement, etc. See Camera Defaults on page 593. Set general parameters on how dimensions are produced and displayed, and which items a dimension will locate. See Dimension Defaults on page 636. Set or change the default settings for door schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Door...
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Window...
DoubleClick
Set or change the default settings for window schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
30
Menu Command
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Cabinet...
Effect
Set or change the default settings for cabinet schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Fixture...
DoubleClick
Set or change the default settings for cabinet schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
DoubleClick
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Electrical...
DoubleClick N/A
Set or change the default settings for electrical schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
Edit> Default Settings> Reset to Defaults... Edit> Preferences...
Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and wall heights. See Reset to Defaults on page 89. Shift + Define the global preferences for Chief Architect. Some of these settings are unique to individual plans. See Edit Preferences Panel on page 90.
Build Menu
The Build menu accesses the tools used to build the 3D model in Chief Architect. Here you define and select the items to place into your plan. Each arrowhead indicates a submenu which offers more choices. Most Build menu items have corresponding buttons on the toolbar.
31
Tools
Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> Furniture...
Set or change the default settings for furniture schedules. See Schedule Defaults on page 851.
Menu Command
Build> Wall> Exterior Wall

Shift + Q
Effect
Draw walls using the wall type defined for Exterior walls in the Wall Defaults dialog. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 135. Draw walls using the wall type defined for Interior walls in the Wall Defaults dialog. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 135. Draw foundation walls using the settings from the Foundation Defaults dialog. See Foundation Walls on page 135. Draw pony walls using the default settings for pony walls. See Pony Walls on page 136. Draw an Invisible wall used to define room areas. See Invisible Walls on page 136.
Build> Wall> Interior Wall
Build> Wall> Foundation Wall Build> Wall> Pony Wall Build> Wall> Invisible Wall Build> Wall> Railing Build> Wall> Deck Railing Ctrl + Q
Draw railings defined in Default Railing dialog. See Railings on page 136. Draws a deck, complete with framing and bounded by a railing. If a foundation level exists, supports for the deck are created as well. See Deck Railings on page 136. Draw fencing using the settings from the Fencing Defaults dialog. See Fencing on page 136. Fill a wall with a hatch pattern. See Hatch Wall on page 136.
Build> Wall> Fencing
Build> Wall> Hatch Wall Build> Wall> Break Wall Build> Wall> Fix Wall Connections Ctrl + B
Break a wall into two. See Break Wall on page 136. Repair connections of walls whose ends are within a few inches of each other but are not quite connected. See Fix Connections on page 159.
32
Menu Command
Build> Wall> Define Wall Types Build> Wall> 2 - 12 Inch Walls (or metric equivalant) Build> Curved Walls> Curved Exterior Wall Build> Curved Walls> Curved Interior Wall Build> Curved Walls> Curved Foundation Wall Build> Curved Walls> Curved Pony Wall Build> Curved Walls> Curved Railing Build> Curved Walls> Curved Deck Rail Build> Curved Walls> Curved Fencing Build> Door> Door Build> Door> Sliding Door Build> Door> Pocket Door
Effect
Open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to create or modify the available wall types. See Wall Type Definitions on page 162. Select the nominally sized walls if you are using a system Default Wall type. See Alter Default Wall on page 136. Draw exterior curved walls. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw interior curved walls. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw curved foundation walls. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw curved pony walls. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw curved railings. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw curved deck railing. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137. Draw curved fencing. See The Curved Wall Tools on page 137.
Shift + E
Place a doorway or swinging door into a wall. See Hinged Doors on page 212. Place a sliding door into a wall. See Sliding Doors on page 212. Place a pocket door into a wall. See Pocket Doors on page 212.
33
Tools
Menu Command
Build> Door> Bifold Door Build> Door> Garage Door Build> Door> Door Library... Build> Door> Doorway Library... Build> Window> Window Build> Window> Bay Window Build> Window> Box Window Build> Window> Bow Window Build> Window> Window Library... Build> Floor> Build New Floor... Build> Floor> Insert New Floor... Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor
Effect
Place a bifold door into a wall. See Bifold Doors on page 212. Place a garage door into a wall. See Garage Doors on page 213. Display a selection of special doors. See The Library on page 213. Displays a selection of special doorway systems. See The Library on page 213.
Shift + W
Place a window defined in Window Defaults dialog. See Standard Windows on page 234. Place a bay window into a wall. See Bay Windows on page 234. Place a box window into a wall. See Box Windows on page 235. Place a bow window into a wall. See Bow Windows on page 235. Display a selection of special windows. See Windows Library on page 236.
Shift + X
Creates a new floor in the 3D model. See Adding Floors on page 270. Inserts new floor in place of the current floor and move all other floors up one level. See Adding Floors on page 270. Deletes current floor. The floor above moves down to take the place of the current floor. This option is grayed out when the first floor is current. See Deleting Floors on page 271.
Build> Floor> Build Foundation...
Shift + F
Adds foundation to model. See Building a Foundation on page 279.
34
Menu Command
Build> Floor> Delete Foundation Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs
Effect
Deletes current foundation. See Deleting Foundations on page 283. Rebuilds a monolithic slab foundation based on the current first floor footprint. See Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations on page 285.
Build> Roof> Build Roof... Build> Roof> Roof Plane Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane Build> Roof> Truss Base Build> Roof> Gable/ Roof Line Build> Roof> Skylight Build> Roof> Delete Roof Planes Build> Roof> Fix Roofs Build> Structure> Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Ceilings Build> Structure> Round Pier Build> Structure> Square Pad
Ctrl + R
Opens Build Roof dialog to specify settings for the automatic roof generator. See Automatic Roofs on page 332.
Allows you to manually place ceiling planes in Plan View. See Ceiling Plane on page 330. Allows you to define a truss base on a roof plane. See Truss Base on page 404. Allows you to draw a Gable/Roof line in Plan View. See Gable/Roof Line on page 330. Allows you to draw closed polyline within a roof plane that will be defined as a skylight See Skylights on page 330. Deletes all roof planes. See Delete Roof Planes on page 331. Mends all broken roof edges. See Fix Roofs on page 331. F12 Updates 3D model with any recent changes. See Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings on page 351. Place round piers under foundation walls See Piers & Pads on page 279. Place a square pad under foundation walls. See Piers & Pads on page 279.
35
Tools
Allows you to manually place roof planes in Plan View. See Roof Plane on page 330.
Menu Command
Build> Structure> Slab Build> Structure> Slab with Footing Build> Structure> Slab Hole Build> Structure> Slab Hole with Footing Build> Structure> Platform Hole
Effect
Draw a slab at grade in Plan View. See Slabs on page 278. Draw a slab with thickened footing in Plan View. See Slabs on page 278. Draw a rectangular polyline within a larger polyline (Slab) to create a hole. See Slab Holes on page 278. Draw a rectangular polyline within a larger polyline (Slab) to create a hole with footings. See Slab Holes on page 278. Draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in the above ceiling/floor platform. Hole will appear after floors and ceiling are rebuilt. See Platform Holes on page 279.
Build> Framing> Build Framing...
Ctrl + Shift Display the dialog used to automatically build +S framing. Also used to define floor and ceiling platform thickness and framing spacing. See Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371. Manually draw a rafter. See Rafter on page 367. Manually draw roof blocking. See Joist and Roof Blocking on page 369. Manually draw a truss. See Roof Truss on page 367. Draw a two line wall to represent a beam in Plan View. See Roof Beam on page 367. Manually draw a ceiling or floor joist. Type depends on the platform over which it is drawn. See Joist on page 367. Draw a joist blocking. See Joist and Roof Blocking on page 369.
Build> Framing> Rafter Build> Framing> Roof Blocking Build> Framing> Roof Truss Build> Framing> Roof Beam Build> Framing> Joist Build> Framing> Joist Blocking
36
Menu Command
Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam Build> Framing> Post Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker Build> Framing> Bearing Line
Effect
Manually draw a floor truss. See Floor/ Ceiling Truss on page 368. Manually draw a floor or ceiling beam. See Floor/Ceiling Beam on page 368. Manually draw a post. See Post on page 368. Place a Framing Reference Marker in a plan. See Framing Reference Markers on page 382. Draw a line defining bearing areas (usually over walls and beams) for automatic framing to break joists. See Bearing Lines on page 384. Draw a line defining joist direction for next time floor or ceiling framing is automatically generated. See Joist Direction Lines on page 385. Click in Plan View to place corner boards. See Corner Boards on page 476. Click in Plan View to place Quoins at the corner of buildings. See Quoins on page 478. Draw a molding polyline. See Molding Polylines on page 485. Draw a molding line. See Molding Polylines on page 485. Opens the Library Browser directly to the Millwork library. See Millwork Library on page 543.
Build> Framing> Joist Direction
Build> Trim> Corner Boards Build> Trim> Quoins
Build> Trim> Molding Polyline Build> Trim> Molding Line Build> Trim> Millwork Library...
37
Tools
Menu Command
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs Build> Stairs> Curve to Left Build> Stairs> Curve to Right Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet Build> Cabinet> Wall Cabinet Build> Cabinet> Full Height Build> Cabinet> Soffit Build> Cabinet> Shelf Build> Cabinet> Partition Build> Cabinet> Custom Countertop Build> Cabinet> Custom Counter Hole Build> Cabinet> Cabinet Library... Build> Cabinet> Cabinet Door Library...

Shift + Y
Effect
Drag to create an UP stair. Hold the Shift key and drag to create a DOWN stair. See Stair Tools on page 290. Click to place stairs that curve to the left. See Stair Tools on page 290. Click to place stairs that curve to the right. See Stair Tools on page 290.
Shift + T
Place a base cabinet defined by the Base Cabinet Default dialog. See Base Cabinets on page 438. Place a wall cabinet defined by the Wall Cabinet Default dialog. See Wall Cabinets on page 438. Place a full height or pantry cabinet defined by the Full Height Cabinet Default dialog. See Full Height Cabinets on page 438.
Ctrl + T
Place a soffit. See Soffits on page 438. Place a shelf used in a closet. See Shelves on page 439. Place a vertical partition. See Partitions on page 439. Create a custom counter top with a rectangular polyline. See Custom Counter Tops on page 439. Draw a polyline to create a hole in a Custom Counter Top. See Custom Counterholes on page 439. Insert a cabinet from the Cabinet Module library. See Cabinet Library on page 440. Insert a cabinet door style into an existing cabinet. See Cabinet Door Library on page 440.
38
Menu Command
Build> Fireplace
Effect
Create a masonry fireplace that is freestanding or built into a wall. See Fireplaces on page 471. Place 110V outlets. See Outlets on page 422. Place 220V outlets. See Place Outlets on page 425. Place default lights on walls or ceiling. See Lights on page 423. Place switches. See Switches on page 423. Display a selection of special electrical See Electrical Library on page 425. Automatically place outlets in room. See Outlets on page 422. Connect electrical items into circuits. See Connect Electrical on page 424.
Build> Electrical> 110V Outlet Build> Electrical> 220V Outlet Build> Electrical> Light Build> Electrical> Switch Build> Electrical> Electrical Library... Build> Electrical> Place Outlets Build> Electrical> Connect Electrical Build> Library> Library Browser... Build> Library> Library Search... Build> Library> Refresh Library Browser Build> Library> Architectural Block Library... Build> Library> Fixture (Exterior) Library... Ctrl + L
Display the Library Browser window to access all library files. See The Library Browser on page 528. Search for objects in the Library Browser. See Library Search on page 545. Refresh the display of the Library Browser whenever library files have been modified outside of Chief Architect. See Refresh Library Browser on page 532. Opens the Library Browser to the Architectural Block library. See Architectural Blocks on page 480. Opens the Library Browser to the Exterior Fixture library. See Exterior Fixtures Library on page 540.
39
Tools
Menu Command
Build> Library> Fixture (Interior) Library... Build> Library> Furniture (Exterior) Library... Build> Library> Furniture (Interior) Library... Build> Library> Geometric Shapes Library... Build> Library> Hardware Library... Build> Library> Image Library...
Effect
Opens the Library Browser to the Interior Fixture library. See Interior Fixtures Library on page 540. Opens the Library Browser to the Exterior Furniture library. See Exterior Furnishings Library on page 541. Opens the Library Browser to the Interior Furniture library. See Interior Fixtures Library on page 540. Opens the Library Browser to the Geometric Shapes library. See Geometric Shapes Library on page 542. Opens the Library Browser to the Hardware library. See Hardware Library on page 543. Opens the Library Browser to the Image library. See Images Library on page 543.
Terrain Menu
Menu Command
Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter Terrain> Terrain Specification...
Effect
Create a rectangular polyline as Terrain Perimeter. See Terrain Perimeter on page 492. The Terrain Specification dialog allows you to specify how the program approximates the terrain and draws the contour lines. See The Terrain Specification Dialog on page 498. Models the terrain based on the elevation data you have entered with points, lines and splines. This calculates terrain data such as contour lines and the 3D mesh. See Building the Terrain on page 495.
Terrain> Build Terrain
40
Menu Command
Terrain> Clear Terrain
Effect
Clears the plan of the 3D terrain data and contour lines. To restore information you must rebuild the terrain. See Clearing the Terrain on page 497. Allows you to place an Elevation Point containing data in Plan View. See Elevation Points on page 497. Allows you to draw a line containing elevation data. See Elevation Lines and Splines on page 498. Allows you to draw a spline containing elevation data. See Elevation Lines and Splines on page 498. Draw a polyline to create a region of constant elevation. See Terrain Elevation Tools on page 492. Allows you to draw a polyline that modifies elevation data to create a raised region. See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a polyline that modifies elevation data to create a lowered region. See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a polyline that modifies elevation data to create a hill. See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a polyline that modifies elevation data to create a valley. See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a polyline that modifies elevation data to create a flat region. See Terrain Modifier Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a line or series of lines to create a terrain feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page 493.
Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Points Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Lines Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Splines Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Region Terrain> Modifiers> Raised Region Terrain> Modifiers> Lowered Region Terrain> Modifiers> Hill Terrain> Modifiers> Valley Terrain> Modifiers> Flat Region Terrain> Features> Feature Lines
41
Tools
Menu Command
Terrain> Features> Feature Polylines Terrain> Features> Feature Splines Terrain> Features> Feature Closed Spline Terrain> Features> Kidney Shaped Feature Terrain> Features> Terrain Hole Terrain> Roads> Road Terrain> Roads> Road Polyline Terrain> Roads> Median Terrain> Roads> Driveway Terrain> Roads> Culde-sac Terrain> Roads> Road Marking
Effect
Allows you to draw a polyline to create a terrain feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page 493. Allows you to draw a spline to create a terrain feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page 493. Draw a closed feature spline. See Terrain Feature Tools on page 493. Draw a kidney-shaped terrain feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page 493. Draw a terrain hole polyline. See Terrain Holes on page 494. Draw a road. See Roads on page 516.
Draw a road polyline. See Road Polyline on page 516. Draw a road median. See Median on page 517. Draw a driveway. See Driveway on page 517. Draw a Cul-de-sac. See Cul-de-sac on page 517. Draw a road marking. See Road Marking on page 518.
42
Menu Command
Terrain> Roads> Road Stripe Terrain> Roads> Sidewalk Terrain> Roads> Sidewalk Polyline Terrain> Terrain Library...
Effect
Draw a road stripe. See Road Stripe on page 517. Draw a sidewalk. See Sidewalk on page 518. Draw a sidewalk polyline. See Sidewalk Polyline on page 518. Opens the Library Browser directly to the Terrain library. See Adding Road Objects to the Library on page 526.
3D Menu
The 3D menu controls most information related to the 3D views.
Menu Command
3D> Create View> Full Camera 3D> Create View> Floor Camera 3D> Create View> Full Overview 3D> Create View> Floor Overview 3D> Create View> Framing Overview

G N/A H
Effect
Create a perspective view of all floors. See Perspective Views on page 580. Create a perspective view of the current floor only. See Floor Camera on page 581. Create an isometric overview of an entire model, including ceilings and roofs. See Overviews on page 584. Create an isometric overview of the current floor, without ceilings or roofs. See Overviews on page 584. Create an isometric overview of an entire model displaying only framing. Should only be used after framing has been built. See Overviews on page 584.
Shift + G
43
Tools
Menu Command
3D> Create View> Cross Section/ Elevation

Shift + H
Effect
Create a cross section view of an entire model when used inside the model. Create an exterior elevation view of the entire model when used outside the model. See Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 596. Create a single floor elevation view of an interior wall. See Wall Elevation on page 597.
3D> Create View> Wall Elevation 3D> Create View> Render Camera 3D> Create View> Render Full Overview 3D> Create View> Render Floor Overview 3D> Create View> Render Framing Overview 3D> Create View> Glass House Render Camera 3D> View Angle... 3D> Remove 3D 3D> Swap Views F7 Shift + J Shift + K
Create Render View directly from the Plan View. See Render Views on page 605. Create a rendering of an entire model, including ceilings and roofs. See Render Views on page 605. Create a rendering of the curent floor, without ceilings or roofs. See Render Views on page 605. Create a rendering of an entire model displaying only framing. Build framing before using this view. See Render Views on page 605. Create a glass house render view. See Glass House View on page 606. Adjust the view direction in an Overview. See Overviews on page 584. Remove all 3D views associated with the current plan. See Remove 3D on page 592. This will toggle between the plan and the most recently created 3D view. See Swapping Views on page 578. Creates a Render View based on the current perspective view using the same camera settings. See Render Views on page 605.
3D> Render
44
Menu Command
3D> Final View
Effect
Redraws a Render View with the Final View settings in the Preferences dialog. See Rendering Tools on page 604. Create a Raytrace View of the current Render View. See Raytracing on page 627. Click in Plan View to place point light source. Click and drag to create a parallel light. See Added Lights on page 616.
3D> Raytrace...
3D> Add Lights
3D> Materials> Define Materials... 3D> Materials> Adjust Material Definition 3D> Materials> Material Painter 3D> Walkthroughs> Play Walkthrough... 3D> Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough 3D> Walkthroughs> Stop Recording 3D> Toggle High/Low 3D Detail 3D> Toggle Glass House
Shift + C
Allows you to create and edit materials and textures. See Defining Materials on page 558. See Defining Materials on page 558. Change a material definition by clicking on a surface. See Adjust Material Definition on page 569. Allows you to paint a material onto an object. See Material Painter on page 570. Play back a previously recorded walkthrough movie. See Walkthroughs on page 766. Record a walkthrough movie. See Walkthroughs on page 766. Stop recording the walkthrough movie. See Walkthroughs on page 766. Switch to Low Detail mode. See Low Detail Mode on page 607. Turn the Glass House feature on/off. See Glass House View on page 606.
45
Tools
3D> Adjust Lights...
Allows you to adjust the render properties of the lights within the plan. See Adjusting Lights on page 619.
Menu Command
3D> Glass House Options... 3D> Cross Section Slider 3D> 3D Preferences
Effect
Adjust the Glass House options. See Glass House View on page 606. Open the Cross Section Slider dialog. For more information, see Cross Section Slider Dialog on page 626.
Ctrl +
Change how 3D views are displayed. Selects which items to suppress when generating a 3D view. Controls display of saved, inactive cameras. See 3D Preferences on page 120.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is used to access the CAD tools. Most of these menu items are accessible from the CAD toolbar.
Menu Command
CAD> CAD Mode On/Off CAD> Select CAD Objects

F2
Description
Toggles between CAD mode and Architectural mode. See The CAD Drawing Tools on page 676. Activate CAD Select Objects mode. Click on a CAD object to select, or hold down Shift key and drag a rectangle around multiple CAD objects to select as a group. Hold Shift key and click individual CAD objects to add or subtract from the selection set. Double-click to display the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog when in CAD mode. See Selecting CAD Objects on page 710. Click to place a temporary CAD Point. See Points on page 707.
CAD> Points> Place Point
46
Menu Command
CAD> Points> Input Point... CAD> Points> Point Marker
Description
Click to place a new Point in an absolute location from the origin or relative to the current point. See Input Point on page 707. Click to place a Point Marker. Unlike temporary CAD points, which are not saved with the plan, Point Markers are permanent and are saved. Point Markers can be placed automatically with the Point to Point Dimension Point Markers on page 708. tool. See
CAD> Lines> Draw Line CAD> Lines> Input Line... CAD> Lines> Line With Arrow CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc CAD> Arcs> Input Arc... CAD> Arcs> Arc About Center CAD> Arcs> Arc With Arrow CAD> Circles> Circle
Click and drag to create lines. See Lines on page 676. Click to draw a line in an absolute location from the origin or relative to the current point. See Input Line on page 677. Draw a CAD line with an arrowhead. See Line with Arrow on page 679.
Draw an Arc by dragging along the desired curve. See Arcs on page 684. Click to draw an arc in an absolute location from the origin or relative to the current point. See Input Arc on page 685. Activate Arc About Center mode where arc is drawn around the current CAD point. See Draw Arc About Center on page 686. Click to draw an arc with an arrowhead. See Arc with Arrow on page 686.
Shift + X
Click and drag to draw a circle. See Circles on page 704.
47
Tools
CAD> Points> Delete Temporary Points
Delete all temporary CAD points at the same time. You can also press the Del key when nothing is selected to delete the points one by one. See Delete Temporary Points on page 708.
Menu Command
CAD> Circles> Circle About Center CAD> Circles> Oval CAD> Boxes & Framing> Rectangular Polyline CAD> Boxes & Framing> Box CAD> Boxes & Framing> Framing CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall Bridging CAD> Boxes & Framing> Cross Box CAD> Boxes & Framing> Insulation CAD> Spline
Description
Click and drag from a center point to draw a circle from its radius. See Draw Circle About Center on page 704. Draw a circle which can be selected and resized to an oval. See Ovals on page 705.
Shift + P
Draw a closed rectangular polyline from corner to corner. See Rectangular Polylines on page 701. Draw a resizable box. See Boxes on page 701. Draw a framing member. This CAD item will show in 3D views and in the Material List. See Framing on page 701. Click to draw wall bridging or blocking. Only available in Wall Details. See Wall Bridging on page 702. Draw resizable box containing a cross. Use to show a cross section of a framing member. See Cross Boxes on page 702. Draw resizable insulation. Use for detailing Cross Section Views. See Insulation on page 702. Click this button and drag from end to end to draw a smooth curve passing through the points. See Splines on page 696. Click to draw a regular polyline solid that will also appear in 3D Views. See Polyline Solids on page 488. Single click to draw a dimension line. Doubleclick to open the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Manual Dimensions on page 637. Draw a dimension marking only the beginning and end points. See End-to-End Dimensions on page 637.
CAD> Polyline Solid
CAD> Dimension> Manual Dimension CAD> Dimension> End to End Dimension
48
Menu Command
CAD> Dimension> Angular Dimension CAD> Dimension> Interior Dimension CAD> Dimension> Point to Point Dimension CAD> Dimension> Baseline Dimension CAD> Dimension> Automatic Exterior Dimensions CAD> Text> Text CAD> Text> Text with Arrow CAD> Text> Callout CAD> Text> Marker CAD> Special:> Sun Angle
Description
Use this tool to find the Angular Dimension between any two straight, non-parallel lines. See Angular Dimensions on page 637. Click to draw only interior dimension lines, only locating interior surfaces of walls. See Interior Dimensions on page 638. Click to draw a dimension between any two arbitrary points. See Point to Point Dimensions on page 638.
Shift + A
Automatically generates exterior dimensions as defined in Dimension Defaults dialog. See Automatic Exterior Dimensions on page 639. Click on screen to add text. See Text on page 658. Click on screen to add text with an arrow. See Text With Arrow on page 658. Click on screen to add a callout. See Callouts on page 667. Place a Marker in Plan View. See Markers on page 671. Draw a Sun Angle to show shadow information at specific place and time and to create a light source in a Render View. See Sun Angles on page 616. Draw a North Pointer to define true North. See North Pointer on page 739. Create a basic footprint of the current plan from within a CAD Detail window. See Plan Footprint on page 742.
CAD> Special:> North Pointer CAD> Special:> Plan N/A Footprint
49
Tools
Click to draw baseline dimensions for each object located along the line. See Baseline Dimensions on page 639.
Menu Command
CAD> Autodetail
Description
Click to automatically generate CAD Details. See Auto-Detailing on page 599.
CAD> CAD Block Management... CAD> CAD Block Library... CAD> CAD Detail...
Insert a CAD block from the list of available blocks in CAD Block Management dialog. See CAD Block Management on page 728. Click to open the Library Browser to the CAD Block library. See CAD Blocks Library on page 538.
Shift + V
Open the CAD Detail dialog to create new detail or open an existing detail. See CAD Details on page 740. Click to convert the current view in to a CAD Detail. See CAD Detail From View on page 600.
CAD> CAD Detail From View CAD> CAD to Walls... CAD> Snap To:> Point CAD> Snap To:> Object End CAD> Snap To:> Intersection CAD> Snap To:> Object CAD> Snap To:> Line Midpoint N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ctrl + F3
Converts CAD lines into walls. See CAD to Walls on page 160. Snap point to closest other point. See Snap to Point on page 736. Snap point to nearest line/arc end or polyline corner. See Snap to Object End on page 737. Snap point to nearest intersection of two lines. See Snap to Intersection on page 737. Snap point to nearest point on line, arc, or other CAD object. See Snap to Object on page 738. Snap point to midpoint of nearest line, arc, or item side. See Snap to Line Midpoint on page 738. Restrict Angles/Unrestrict Angles - Toggle the angle restriction. See CAD Preference Buttons on page 712. Autosnap - Toggle autosnap for CAD object moving/editing. See CAD Preference Buttons on page 712.
N/A
50
Menu Command
N/A
Description
Display Arc Centers - Toggle the display of arc centers. See CAD Preference Buttons on page 712. Restrict/Unrestrict Positioning - Toggle positioning of CAD objects at restricted increments or unrestricted. See CAD Preference Buttons on page 712. Edit Polyline Parts - Toggle ability to edit individual components of polylines See CAD Preference Buttons on page 712. Current CAD Layer - Displays the current CAD Layer when in CAD mode. Click to jump to new layer. See Displaying CAD Objects on page 710. Current Floor - Displays the current floor in Plan View. See Current Floor / Reference Floor on page 272. Current Page - Displays the current page in Layout View. See Creating a Layout File on page 809. CAD Layer Down - Change the current CAD layer when in CAD mode. Down One Floor - Change the current floor in Plan View. Page Down - Change the current page in Layout View. CAD Layer Up - Change the current layer when in CAD mode. Up One Floor - Change the current floor in Plan View. Page Up - Change the current page in Layout View.
N/A
N/A
51
Tools
Tools Menu
The Tools menu offers various tools for dimensions, text, manipulating reference floors and modifying toolbars.
Menu Command
Tools> Display Options...
Effect
This will open the 3D Display Options dialog or the Layer Display Options dialog, depending on the current view. These dialogs are used to control the display of items in both 2D and 3D views. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126, or Displaying 3D Views on page 588. Toggle the color on or off. When turned off, 3D views appear as a line drawing. Best turned off for cross sections and elevations. See Color Off/On on page 588. Superimpose the plan of another floor over the current floor. See Reference Display on page 273. Switch so that the reference plan becomes the working plan, and the working plan becomes the reference plan. See Swap Floor/ Reference on page 273.
Tools> Color Off
Shift + F7
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference Display On Tools> Reference Floors> Swap Floor/ Reference Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floor/Reference Tools> Plan Check
F9
Ctrl + G
Define which is the working plan and which is the reference plan. See Current Floor / Reference Floor on page 272. Plan Check is best used when your floor plan is substantially complete. It checks for some very basic code compliance issues in the floor plan. See Plan Check on page 747. See IRC Checklist on page 748.
Tools> View IRC Checklist Tools> Customize Toolbars... N/A
Create new toolbars or modify existing ones. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18.
52
Menu Command
Tools> Hide/Show Toolbars Tools> Rotate View...

N/A
Effect
Toggle the display of the toolbar on or off. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18. Open the Rotate Plan View dialog to rotate the current Plan View. See Rotate View on page 755. Reverses your entire plan. The plan is reflected about a vertical line. Reverse Plan reverses all floors associated with the current floor. Reversing a plan will cause the model to be rebuilt which will close any 3D view windows currently open. See Reverse Plan on page 756. Page Down - Moves the current page in the layout file down one. Opens Go To Layout Page dialog. See Changing the Display of Layout Views on page 818. Page Up - Moves the current page in the layout file up one. Edit Layout - Select and modify any line from any 3D view which has been sent to layout other than CAD objects. See Editing Layout on page 822.
Tools> Reverse Plan
N/A Tools> Layout> Change Layout Page... N/A Tools> Layout> Edit Layout
Tools> Layout> Layout Files... Tools> Layout> Rescale Layout Picture...
N/A
See Layout Files Dialog on page 826. Rescale Layout - Rescales the view. This appears when a layout picture containing a Plan View, CAD Detail, Wall Elevation, or Cross Section/Elevation View is selected. See Changing the Display of Layout Views on page 818. See Relinking Layout Views on page 825.
Tools> Layout> Relink File...
53
Tools
Menu Command
Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol... Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol...
Effect
Opens the Create Symbol Wizard. See Opening the Create Symbol Wizard on page 789. Allows the most recently created symbol to be placed back into the plan. See Closing the Create Symbol Wizard on page 804. Use to add moldings, CAD blocks, fixtures, furniture, electrical, windows, doors, doorways, cabinets, and cabinet doors to the Library. See Adding to the Library on page 531. Opens the House Wizard which leads you through the steps to quickly lay out a floor plan. See House Wizard on page 745. Builds a 3D model of the house based on the organization of Room Boxes that you defined. (Must be done for each floor of the building.) See House Wizard on page 745. Turns on the display of Room Boxes after they have been hidden. Room Boxes normally display after they have been created by using the House Wizard and then hidden after using the Build House tool. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a bedroom. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a Master bedroom. See House Wizard on page 745. Place an office. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a bathroom. See House Wizard on page 745.
Tools> Symbol> Add to Library...
Tools> House Wizard> Start House Wizard... Tools> House N/A Wizard> Build House
Tools> House N/A Wizard> Show Room Boxes
Tools> House Wizard> Bedroom Tools> House Wizard> Master Bedroom Tools> House Wizard> Office Tools> House Wizard> Bathroom
54
Menu Command
Tools> House Wizard> Laundry Room Tools> House Wizard> Garage Tools> House Wizard> Living Room Tools> House Wizard> Family Room Tools> House Wizard> Dining Room Tools> House Wizard> Kitchen Tools> House Wizard> Entry Tools> House Wizard> Closet Tools> House Wizard> Hallway Tools> House Wizard> Stair Tools> House Wizard> Stairwell Tools> House Wizard> Deck Tools> House Wizard> Porch
Effect
Place a laundry room. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a garage. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a living room. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a family room. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a dining room. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a kitchen. See House Wizard on page 745. Place an entry. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a closet. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a hallway. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a stair. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a stairwell. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a deck. See House Wizard on page 745. Place a porch. See House Wizard on page 745.
55
Tools
Menu Command
Tools> Plans Database> Create Plan Database... Tools> Plans Database> Edit Plan Database... Tools> Schedules> Door... Tools> Schedules> Window... Tools> Schedules> Cabinet... Tools> Schedules> Fixture... Tools> Schedules> Furniture... Tools> Schedules> Electrical... Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All Floors Tools> Materials List> Calculate From Area Tools> Materials List> Calculate From Room
Effect
Create a plan database for plans on your system. See Plan Find Wizard on page 73. Edit an existing plan database file. See Plan Find Wizard on page 73. Create a door schedule for one or all floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Create a window schedule for one or all of the floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Create a cabinet schedule for one or all of the floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Create a fixture schedule for one or all of the floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Create a furniture schedule for one or all of the floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Create an electrical schedule for one or all of the floors in the 3D model. See Creating Schedules on page 852. Generate a Material List for all the floors. See Calculate From All Floors on page 861. Draw a rectangle around an area to generate a Material List for that area. See Calculate From Area on page 862. Select the room, then this menu option. Generates a Material List for the selected room. See Calculate From Room on page 862.
56
Menu Command
Tools> Materials List> Materials Polyline Tools> Materials List> Master List
Effect
Draw a rectangular polyline defining an area for which a materials list is produced. See Materials Polyline on page 862.
Ctrl + M
View the current master Material List. Modify the Master List by making changes to a Material List. See The Master List on page 863. Display contact information for manufacturers whose products are represented in Chief Architect. See Manufacturers on page 871. Opens the Materials Lists dialog where you can edit. delete, or rename saved materials lists. See Managing Materials Lists on page 871.
Tools> Materials List> Manufacturers... Tools> Materials List> Materials List Management...
Window Menu
The Window menu defines which window is active and how it displays. Some of these menu items are common to other Windows programs.
Menu Command
Window> Refresh Display

F5
Effect
Redraws the current window. This cleans up extra lines, missing items, and other random effects sometimes caused when making changes to a model. If something appears to be drawn incorrectly or incompletely, refreshing the display will often correct the problem. Show the entire plan in the current window. See Fill Window on page 574. Zoom in on a defined area. See Zoom Tools on page 573.
Window> Fill Window Window> Zoom
F6 Shift + Z
57
Tools
Menu Command
Window> Zoom Out Window> Zoom In Window> Undo Zoom
Effect
Move back to display twice as much of your plan or view. See Zoom Tools on page 573. Zoom in to center of screen by 2x. See Zoom Tools on page 573. Undo the previous zoom. See Undo Zoom on page 574. Create a resizable Aerial View of the entire plan in the upper left corner. A Zoom within this window will adjust the view of the main plan for editing. See Aerial View on page 575.
Window> Aerial View N/A
Window> Tile
N/A
Shift + F6
A standard Windows option which shows all open views simultaneously on the screen, adjusting the size of each view to fit the available space. See Tiling Views on page 577. A standard Windows option which displays all the open views in a row, each slightly offset from the others. See Cascade on page 578. A standard Windows option which lines up the icons of the minimized views in a row. See Arrange All on page 578. Lists the open views, with a check next to the active view. Click on any view in the list to activate it.
Window> Cascade
N/A
Shift + F5
Window> Arrange All
N/A
Names of Open Views N/A
Help Menu
The Help menu is an extremely useful but usually underused resource. Online Help can be obtained for most topics without resorting to other aids. The Help menu also provides important customer information.
58
3D and Render View Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Help> Index
Effect
Open the Online Help index and display an outline of all the help information. See Getting Help on page 14.
Help> Current Mode
F1
Help> View Getting Started Guide... Help> View Reference Manual... Help> Visit Chief Architect Web Site... Help> Download Program Updates... Help> About Chief Architect...
N/A
Opens the Getting Started Guide PDF directly with Acrobat Reader. See Getting Help on page 14. Opens the Reference Manual PDF directly with Acrobat Reader. See Getting Help on page 14. Opens the Chief Architect Web page using your default Web browser. See Getting Help on page 14.
N/A
Opens to the Program Updates section of the Chief Architect Web page. See Program Updates on page 13. Opens the About dialog that displays the registered owners name, the version number and release date of the program. Contact information is displayed on the More Info tab.
N/A
3D and Render View Toolbar Buttons

Depending on the type of camera used to generate the 3D view, different toolbar options will be available. Many of the buttons available in 3D mode are also available in other modes. See 3D Tools on page 581.
59
Tools
Display information specific to the current mode button. The F1 function key accesses this same information, but is more flexible since it can access information specific to any toolbar button or menu item above which the cursor is held. Most dialogs also have a Help button which accesses information related to their function. See Getting Help on page 14.
Save Camera - Save the current 3D or Render camera so that it can be opened later. See Saving 3D Cameras on page 591. Delete View Surfaces - Click to delete surfaces from a 3D view. Once surfaces are deleted, click the button again to restore them. See Delete 3D Surface on page 591. Edit Camera - Allows you to edit the position of the camera. Opens the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Specification Dialog on page 592. Sun Toggle On/Off - Toggles the sunlight on or off. See Sun Angles on page 616.
Move Camera Down - Lowers the camera vertically in space while maintaining the same line of sight. Turn Camera Left - Turns the camera toward the left while staying in the same location. Turn Camera Right - Turns the camera toward the right while staying in the same location. Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the camera upward while keeping it in the same location. Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the camera downward while keeping it in the same location. Orbit Camera Downward Rotates camera down around its focal point. Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates the camera up around its focal point. Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the camera to the right around its focal point. Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the camera to the left around its focal point. Move Camera In - Moves the position of the camera closer to the focal point along the line of sight. Move Camera Out - Moves the position of the camera away from the focal point along the line of sight. Mouse-Orbit Camera - Allows you to rotate the camera around the current camera center. For more information, see Camera Movement on page 608.
Camera Movement Tools

See Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras on page 582. Move Camera Forward - Takes the camera one step forward while maintaining the same line of sight. Move Camera Backward - Takes the camera one step backward while maintaining the same line of sight. Move Camera Left - Takes the camera one step to the left while maintaining the same line of sight. Move Camera Right - Takes the camera one step to the right while maintaining the same line of sight. Move Camera Up - Raises the camera vertically in space while maintaining the same line of sight.
60
CAD Preference Buttons
Mouse-Pan Camera - Allows you to move the camera up, down, left and right. For more information, see Camera Movement on page 608. Mouse Dolly Camera - Allows you to move the camera forward, backward, left and right. For more information, see Camera Movement on page 608. 3D Center Camera On Point Allows you to focus the camera at a particular point in the scene. For more information, see Camera Movement on page 608.
View Angle - Click to open the View Angle dialog. Front View - Click for front view. Back View - Click for back view. Top View - Click for top view. Bottom View - Click for bottom view.
View Direction Tools

These tools are only available in Overviews. See View Direction Tools on page 587.
Right Side View - Click for right side view. Restore Original View - Click to restore the original view position.

These buttons are essentially shortcuts to preference settings. They control how different objects behave when edited. Edit Polyline Parts - Toggle ability to edit individual components of polylines. For more information about Edit Polyline Parts, see Edit Polyline Parts on page 110. Restrict/Unrestrict Angles Toggle the angle restriction. For more information about Allowed Angles, see Allowed Angles on page 105. Autosnap - Toggle autosnap for CAD object moving/editing. For more information about Autosnap, see Auto Snap on page 109. Display Arc Centers - Toggle the display of arc centers. For more information about Show Arc Centers, see Line Properties Panel on page 111. Restrict/Unrestrict Positioning Toggle positioning of CAD objects at restricted increments or unrestricted. See Positioning Unit on page 106.
61
Tools
Left Side View - Click for left side view.
Edit Toolbar Buttons

Architectural Edit Buttons
The Edit buttons display only when an item or a group of items are selected. Different buttons will be available in different situations. The CAD tools are discussed in detail in the CAD chapter. Some of the CAD tools have a compliment tool in the Architectural mode, and others are implemented very similar to Architectural tools. Open Object - When one or more objects are selected, click this edit button to display the specification dialog for that object or group of objects. See Open Object on page 12. Select Next Object - When many objects are located in a small area, you can select one of them and click this edit button until the desired object is selected. See Select Next Object on page 11. Copy/Paste - Click to make a single copy of the selected object(s). Double-click to make multiple copies. See Copy/Paste on page 715. Multiple Copy - Select CAD object(s), click this button, and drag to create copies at specified intervals. Double-click to set the intervals. See Multiple Copy on page 715. Delete - Click to delete the selected object(s). Add to Library - Adds a symbol, CAD block, or molding profile to the Library. See Adding to the Library on page 531. Connect Walls - Fixes all unattached wall sections. See Connecting Walls on page 158. Same Type Wall - Click this button when a wall is selected to change how walls are edited. See Architectural Panel on page 103. Adjust Wall Angle - Click this button when a wall is selected to change how walls are edited. See Architectural Panel on page 103. Join Roof Planes - Joins two roof planes. See Joining Roof Planes on page 346. Move to be Coplanar - Move the selected roof plane to be coplanar with the next selected roof plane. See Move to be Coplanar on page 347. Load Muntins - Turns a CAD block drawn over window or door glass into a custom muntin design. See Custom Muntins on page 246. Unload Muntins - Explodes muntins into CAD lines and objects for editing. See Custom Muntins on page 246. Components - Opens an objects Component dialog. See The Components Dialog on page 869.
62
Center Object - Centers objects on walls. See Centering Windows on page 244. Gable Over Door/Window - Places roof/gable line over door or window. See Place Gable Over Window(s) on page 239. Delete Gable Over Opening Select a window or door with a gable above it and click this button to delete the gable when roofs are built. For more information, see Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors on page 349. Starter Tread - Rounds one of the bottom two treads of a staircase. Must select staircse at one of the two bottom treads. See Starter Treads on page 313. Flare/Curve Stair - Allows you to flare the sides of the selected staircase. See Flared Stairs on page 309. Allowed Angles - This button appears when walls which are not at allowed angles are selected with the Edit Area or Edit Area All Floors marquee. Click to open the Place at Allowed Angles dialog. See Place at Allowed Angles Dialog on page 162. Edit Camera - Allows you to edit the position of the camera. Opens the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Specification Dialog on page 592.
Convert to Polyline Road/ Sidewalk - Converts the selected Road or Sidewalk into a Road Polyline or a Sidewalk Polyline. See Convert to Polyline Road/Sidewalk on page 521. Automatically Generate Sidewalks - Allows you to automatically generate sidewalks along a selected road object. See Automatically Generate Sidewalks on page 521. Expand Room Polyline - Select a room and click this button to enlarge the current room selection to include all rooms that are continuous and only separated by invisible walls or railings. For more information, see Room Polylines on page 202. Frame Deck - Click this button to frame the selected deck. See Decks on page 192. Remove Deck Framing - Click this button to turn a framed deck into a solid deck. See Decks on page 192. Form Stairwell - Select a staircase and click this button to create a stairwell automatically. See Creating a Stairwell Automatically on page 316. Accurate Move - Select an object then click this button to move it with more accuracy. For more information, see Accurate Move on page 713.
63
Tools
CAD Edit Buttons

Move Object - Click to display the Move Object dialog to move the object(s) selected. See Move Object on page 716. Rotate Object - Click to display the Rotate Object dialog to rotate the object(s) selected. See Rotate Object on page 717. Resize Object - Click to display the Resize Object dialog to resize the object(s) selected. See Resize Object on page 718. Reflect About Line - Click to reflect the selected object(s) about a line. See Reflect About Line on page 718. Reflect Object - Click to display the Reflect Object dialog to reflect the object(s) selected. See Reflect Object on page 719. Replicate Object - Click to display the Replicate Object dialog to replicate the object(s) selected. See Replicate Object on page 720. Move To Front - Click to move the selected item in front of other CAD objects. See Move to Front on page 714. Make Parallel - Click to align selected line or polyline edge with another item (such as a wall or line). See Make Parallel/Perpendicular on page 721.
Break Line - Single-click and then click on selected item to add a jointtype break. Double-click and then click on selected item to completely sever the line. See Break Line on page 723. Make Block - Appears only when more than one CAD object is selected. Click to link selected items into a single unit, or block. See CAD Blocks on page 726. Explode Block - Appears only when a single block is selected. Click to explode selected block into its individual parts. See CAD Blocks on page 726. Point-to-Point Move - Moves selected items from start point to the end point of the move. You may also drag from the start point to the end point of the move. See Point-toPoint Move on page 714. Fillet Two Lines - Select an edge, click this button, and select a different edge to create a rounded fillet of specified size between them. (Double-click to set the fillet radius.) See Fillet and Chamfer on page 725. Chamfer Two Lines - Select an edge, click this button, and select a different edge to create a straight bevel of specified size between them. Double-click to set the chamfer size. See Fillet and Chamfer on page 725. Reverse Direction - Select a line, arrow, or polyline, then click this button to reverse the direction. See Reverse Direction on page 721.
64
Select/Make Fence - Select a line or polyline, then click this button to select everything touched by the original line. Or click this button and draw a fence line when the button becomes available. See Selecting CAD Objects Using a Fence on page 711. Extend Objects - Select boundary edge(s), click this button, then select CAD objects on end to extend. This may be used with the Select/Make Fence tool as well. See Trim and Extend on page 724. Trim Objects - Select cutting edge(s), click this button, then select CAD objects on end to eliminate. This may be used with the Select/ Make Fence tool as well. See Trim and Extend on page 724. Make Arc Tangent - Makes the arc tangent to the attached lines/arcs. See Make Arc Tangent on page 693. Change Line/Arc - Turns the line into an arc or the arc into a line. See Change Line to Arc on page 693. Move to Framing Reference Select framing members, then click this button to position them in relation to the framing reference. See Framing Reference Markers on page 382. Resize Bitmap - Allows you to resize the selected bitmap. See Resizing an Image on page 763.
Open Wall Detail - Opens a framing detail when you select a wall. Framing must be built. See Wall Framing Details on page 388. Lock Centers - Locks the centers of arcs. See Lock Center Arc on page 686. Hold Position - Copies the selected items directly above or below when they are copied to another floor. Click first then copy. See Hold Position on page 754. Lock Control Handle Angle Locks or unlocks the control handles for editing advanced splines. See Reshaping Splines on page 697. Straighten Spline Segment Straightens a segment of an advanced spline between two points. See Reshaping Splines on page 697 . Convert Spline to Polyline Change the spline into a polyline made up of straight lines. See Converting Splines into Polylines on page 699. Convert to Spline - Convert a polyline into a spline. See Converting Polylines into Splines on page 699. Polyline Subtract - Subtracts one polyline from another to create a new polyline. See Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract on page 693.
65
Polyline Intersection - Creates a new polyline around the area in common between two polylines. See Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract on page 693. Polyline Union - Creates a new polyline using the entire area of overlapping polyines. See Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract on page 693. Add to Library - Adds a symbol, CAD block, or molding profile to the Library. See Adding to the Library on page 531. Convert Polyline - Appears for selected polylines. See Converting CAD Objects on page 733. Select Same Type - Opens Select Similar Objects dialog. See Select Same / Load Same on page 749. Load Values To Make Same Click this button to load the selected values. See Select Same / Load Same on page 749.
66
Chapter 3:
File Management
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect uses two main document types, Plan files and Layout files. The complete 3D model of a structure and surrounding terrain, as well as any CAD data associated with it are stored in the Plan files. All data used to create working drawings such as CAD data and the links to various views or details are stored in the Layout files. The 3D model is generated from a collection of related files with each floor being stored in a separate plan file. As with any file, you should back up your plan and layout files externally on a regular basis to avoid accidental loss of work. All commands related to opening, saving and closing plans are located in the File menu.
Compatibility with Previous Versions Creating a New Plan Creating a New Layout Saving a Plan or Layout File Save and Save As Saving a Plan Thumbnail Opening a Plan or Layout File Template Files Searching for Plans Closing Plans and Views Exiting Chief Architect Exporting a Plan Exporting an Entire Plan Autosave Files Backup Files File Types
67
File Management
Chapter Contents
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in versions of Chief Architect 5.0 through 8.0, plans produced by Chief Architect Home Edition 5.0, and plans produced by 3D Home Architect versions 3.0 and 4.0 can all be read by Chief Architect 9.0.
Note: Because 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not developed by Advanced Relational Technology, plans written using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot be read by Chief Architect 9.0.
The copies which have never been saved by Chief Architect 9.0 may still be read by the version in which they were created. There are several steps required to successfully convert plans to the Chief Architect 9.0 format. After opening the old file, Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings , and Build Fascia, gutters. You may also need to rebuild the terrain. If you notice any problems with symbols placed using earlier versions, delete the symbol and replace it with a new symbol from a Chief Architect 9.0 library.
If you want to be able to continue to read your plans that were produced in any earlier versions of Chief Architect or 3D Home Architect, be sure to save copies of your files before opening them in Chief Architect 9.0.
After performing these steps select File> Save to save the plan.
Creating a New Plan

When Chief Architect is opened, a new, blank plan is automatically created. The first floor plan file is called Untitled.PL1. Unless this plan is named and saved, it will be lost when Chief Architect is closed. A new blank plan can be created by choosing File> New. The first floor plan files of new models are created as a copy of the current Template Plan specified in the Preferences dialog.For more information, see New Plans Panel on page 100. Commonly used settings and defaults are included in the template plan file. You should open this file and change the settings to fit your style of work. For more information, see Creating Your Own Template Plan on page 72. If no plan template has been specified in your preferences, a new plan will be created using the system defaults for new plans. System defaults cannot be modified so it is a good idea to customize your own setup template files with your default settings. New plan files will be created in either Imperial or Metric units depending on the current units setting in the New Plans tab of the Preferences dialog. The units cannot be changed once a file has been created. If you normally work in one set of units but need to create a new plan in the other set, you can use the File>Open Template feature to open up an appropriate template plan and begin a new plan in those units.
68
Creating a New Layout
Creating a New Layout

A new blank layout may be created at any time by choosing File> New Layout. The new layout is created as a copy of the current Template Layout specified in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see New Plans Panel on page 100. Commonly used settings, title blocks, and any other data you wish to use for your layouts are included in the template layout file. You should open this file and change the settings to fit your style of work. For more information, see Creating Your Own Template Plan on page 72.
Saving a Plan or Layout File

When a new plan file is first saved, you will be prompted to give it a name. By default, a new layout file will use the same name of the first plan file which is sent to it, associating the layout files with the plan files used. Once you understand the file management of Chief Architect you should decide upon a naming convention that suits your needs. Choose File> Save to bring up the Save Plan File dialog. will automatically attach the extension .la1 when a layout file is saved.
Every model in Chief Architect has a first floor, .PL1 file, associated with it. If a .PL1 file is deleted or renamed using Windows Explorer, important information about your plan will be lost.
Initially all Open or Save As operations go to the "My Documents" folder of your computer. After that, the path last visited is remembered and subsequent File> Open or File> Save As commands default to that directory. This path is saved when the program exits. The next time Chief Architect is launched, these defaults are used. This behavior can be changed to use a specific directory every time you perform an Open or Save As operation. To do this, modify the settings in the Preferences dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 100. Its a good idea to keep plans separate from the support files needed to run Chief Architect. Chief Architect creates and saves many files for each 3D model. To keep files
In the File name text box, enter a name for the plan. Chief Architect will automatically attach the extension .PL1 to define this file as the first floor of your model. It can be the only floor, or one of many. Chief Architect
69
File Management
organized, it may be easier if you create a new folder for each project that you start.
Save and Save As

There are two options for saving plans and layouts; File> Save (Ctrl + S) and File> Save As. File> Save should normally be used for saving your work. When you select File> Save, the program saves all plan, .PLn files, (where n represents the floor number) associated with the current model in the same directory as the .PL1 file. Any saved Cross Section/Elevation Views and CAD Details associated with the 3D model are also saved with this command. When saving a layout, the program saves all pages of the layout, all of the links to the various views saved in the layout, and all of the CAD added to the layout in two files, .la1. File> Save As is used whenever an identical copy of a plan or layout needs to be created. This command can also be used to transfer a file to a new location or store it. File> Save As will save all the floors and any other files needed for that specific model in the correct directory with the new name. This is the best way to create backups of your models. Although the program will warn you if you try to exit without saving, it is a good idea to get in the habit of saving plan files before exiting the program.
Saving a Plan Thumbnail

Select File>Save Plan Thumbnail to save a thumbnail for the current plan. The plan thumbnail will appear in the preview window of the Open Plan File dialog and in the Find Plan Wizard when using the Search for Plans feature. You can save any view of a plan such as a floor plan view or a render overview as the plan thumbnail. You cant save a plan thumbnail for a new plan until after you have saved it and given the plan a name. A plan thumbnail is saved using the same filename as the current plan and with the .jpg file extension. If a plan thumbnail already exists, you will get a warning message asking you if you want to overwrite the existing thumbnail file.
Opening a Plan or Layout File

Select File> Open to open an existing plan, layout or backup file. The program will automatically browse to the last used directory or to a specific directory depending on your current preference settings.
70
Opening a Plan or Layout File
Chief Architect assumes you want to open the first floor plan file of the model, and will show all the available first floor plans located in the current directory. To open files of a different type, select one from the Files of type list.
The main window will display all available files of the requested type. It will also display a preview of the plan if a plan thumbnail was previously created for the plan. The Open Plan File dialog may be resized to display more files when desired.
To open a Layout file, use File> Open Layout and the program will automatically browse for .la1 files. In the Open Plan File dialog, the path to the directory structure is noted as you change current directories. The available files of the type specified will display on the left. Click on any available file and it will display in the File name box. Click OK to open it. Once the 3D model is opened, any floor of the model can be accessed by using the Change Floor buttons in the toolbar. To simultaneously display different floors of a model, use File> Open to open a .PLn file other than the one currently being displayed. A maximum of 10 Chief Architect windows or files can be open at the same time.
Press shift + F6 , or choose Window> Tile to tile the two windows. You can work in either window. As you make changes, the view in both windows will update. The names of the last four plan files you have opened or saved appear at the bottom of the File menu. To display more or less files in this list, you can change the maximum number of recent files in the Preferences dialog on the General tab. Clicking on a recent file will open the file, without having to use the Open Plan File dialog.
71
File Management
Template Files
Plan Templates
When the program opens, a template plan file is opened. This file is determined by the Edit> Preferences> General> New Plans preferences. You can specify a default template file for both plans and layouts. You can also setup default template files for metric as well as imperial plans. By default it is called profile.PL1 or profileM.PL1 for metric plans. The default template plan should contain all of the information and settings that you use regularly. When the program opens it, the file name is changed to untitled.PL1 to make sure that you do not overwrite it. Once you are familiar with the Default Setups for Chief Architect you can set up your template plan files that fit your needs. If your work is simple and you think one template plan will do, then the setup is simplified. If you need more than one tamplate plan you can set them up as needed and store them in the plan templates directory. You can set the plan templates directory in Edit> Preferences> General> Directories. Any changes made to your default template will cause all subsequently drawn plans to be created with the new default settings. in your preferences. Your default template file can be specified on the New Plans tab of the Preferences dialog. When opening a template file, the program will browse to the Templates directory which has been specified in the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog. When a template file is opened, the program behaves almost exactly the same as when File>New or File>New Layout has been used and you will have a new untiltled plan or layout. The only difference is that you will be using the specified template file for all of the settings and default values instead of your default template file.
Creating Your Own Template Plan

Note: Make sure that when you create a template plan that you use the appropriate units. The units used in the new plan will be the same as when the file was saved.
1. 2.
Start Chief Architect and select File> New. Go to the Edit> Defaults Settings menu and go through each menu item opening up the dialogs and modifying the settings as needed. If you draw anything in the template plan, it will appear in all new plans created with that template. After modifying all of your default settings, select File> Save As... to save your changes under a new name.
3.
Opening Template Files

Choose File>Open Template to create a new plan or layout file using a different template then your current default specified 4.
72
Searching for Plans
5. 6.
Navigate to the templates directory and name the file. You can then close the file, select File> Close. The new template is now available by using the Open Template tool.
2.
Navigate to the Templates directory and select the file you have just saved. From now on when you create a new plan this plan will be used for your defaults.
If you would like to return your default settings to those shipped with the program, you can restore the profile.PL1 file from the Chief Architect 9.0 program CD.
If you have more than one configuration that you like to use, you can create additional template plan files and do a File> Open Template... to open whichever template that you want.
To make your new template your default template that will be used whenever you use File>New from the menu: 1. Go to the Edit> Preferences> General> New Plans pane and click the browse button.
Updating Templates
When you make a change to the settings within a plan file, the template file is not automatically updated. To include recent updates to your default settings you must open the template plan file and make the change or do a File> Save As... of the current plan file.
Searching for Plans

Choose File>Search for Plans to search a plan database for an existing plan. This command will open the Plan Find Wizard which will allow you to specify which plan database to search as well as any specific information about a plan that you wish to use for search parameters. For more information on using the Plan Find Wizard, see Plan Find Wizard on page 73. For more information about creating a plan database file, see Creating a Plan Database File on page 74. For more information about modifying a plan database file, see Modifying a Plan Database File on page 75.
Plan Find Wizard

The Plan Find Wizard can be used to search for plan files using stored information about each plan such as the style of construction or the number of a specified type of rooms. A plan find database file must already exist before you can use the Plan Find Wizard to search for plans. When you first open the Plan Find Wizard you must choose the appropriate plan find database file to search. When you first run Chief Architect, you will find only one plan find database file which has been created for the sample plans that come with the program. Clicking on the Browse button will allow you to select the plan find database file you want to use.
73
File Management
Click the Next button to select the style of house desired, the number of floors in the house, and the number of bedrooms. This page will also display the number of plans which currently match your search parameters. As you modify the search parameters you will see this number increase or decrease as plans are found which match. Click the Next button to select the number of bathrooms, size and price range that are desired. As you modify these parameters you should see the number of plans which match increase and decrease. Click the Next button to see each of the plans which match your current search parameters. Selecting any of the available plans will display a preview picture of the plan, if one exists. For more information on plan thumbnails, see Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 70. You can select the Back button to modify any of the previous selected parameters which will then show you a new list of plans. Select the Next and then the Finish button to open the desired plan.
1 2 3
specify the name of the plan database file to be created. Click the Browse button to navigate to a desired folder. If you choose a plan database file that already exists, the program will ask you if you want to overwrite the existing file. specify the folder which will be used for finding plans to include in the plan database. The program will search for any plan files that exist in this folder and add entries in the plan database for them. You can navigate to a particular folder on your machine using the Browse button. allows you to specify whether or not the search will only look in the Plan Search Path or if it will also search any subfolders found. When the OK button is selected the program will begin searching for plan files and add them to the plan database file. The program must read each plan and analyze it so this process may take a while. While the program is searching, it will display a temporary dialog indicating which plans are being processed. You can Cancel the search process at any time. If you do, your plan database will have incomplete information and wont contain
1 The Database File field allows you to
2 The Plan Search Path allows you to
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox
Creating a Plan Database File

Select Tools> Plans Database> Create Plan Database to create a new plan database file that can be used to search for plans using the Plan Find Wizard.The Create Plan Database dialog opens.
74
Searching for Plans
entries for all plans in your search folder(s). When all plans have been found and the information added to the plan database, the program will automatically open the new plan database file for modification.
Modifying a Plan Database File

Once a plan database file has been created it it can be modified. You can edit any of the information in the plan database as well as add and remove plans from the database. Select Tools>Plans Database>Edit Plan Database to modify an existing plan database file.
You will first be prompted to select the plan database file you wish to modify. Select the desired file and click OK to open the Edit Plan Database dialog. File Management
Edit Plan Database Dialog
1 7 9 11 2 3 5 4
6 8 10 12 14 13
currently have information stored in the plan database display here.
1 Plans in the Database - All plans that
2 Add Plan - Click this button to select a

plan file to add to the plan database.
75
remove the currently selected plan file from the plan database.
3 Remove Plan - Click this button to
to the database. You can modify this data and enter your own area if desired. is automatically calculated by the program when a plan is added to the database. You can modify this data and enter your own number of bedrooms. automatically calculated by the program when a plan is added to the database. You can modify this data and enter your own number of bathrooms. automatically calculated by the program when a plan is added to the database. You can modify this data and enter your own number of floors. description for the plan if desired. This description will display when a plan is found and selected using the Search for Plans tool. thumbnail is displayed if one was created for the plan. For more information about creating plan thumbnails, see Saving a Plan Thumbnail on page 70. plan displays here.
4 Select File - Click this button to relink the entry in the plan database to a plan file on your system. If a plan file is been removed, renamed, or moved on your system the plan find database will not know how to locate the file. You must then relink the plan database to the file or remove it to keep the plan database information accurate.
any of the plans referenced in the plan database. Opening a plan will close the Plan Database dialog. If you have not saved any changes you have made before clicking the Open Plan button, you will be prompted to do so before you can continue. down list for this plan. You can also create a new plan style by simply typing in the name of the new style in the blank area.
9 Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms
10 Baths - The number of bathrooms is
5 Open Plan - Click this button to open
11 Floors - The number of floors is
6 Style - Select a plan style from the drop
12 Description - You can enter a
7 Price - Enter the price range for this

plan. calculated by the program based on the living area of the plan when a plan is added
13 Plan Thumbnail - The plan preview or
8 Area - The area is automatically
14 File Path - The file path of the selected
Closing Plans and Views

Choose File> Close to close the active window. If this is the last open view for a plan and you did not save first, the program will remind you to save before it is closed. Cross Section/Elevation views will also prompt you to save changes before closing. Select Yes to save it, or No to close the window without saving. Select Cancel to close the dialog and return to the window. Choose File> Close All to close all currently open windows.
76
Exiting Chief Architect
Exiting Chief Architect

Choose File> Exit to exit the program. If you have not saved any open plans, you will be prompted to do so. It is better to actively save your work before exiting the program than to save on exit. When you exit from the program using File> Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are automatically deleted.
Exporting a Plan
Because Chief Architect stores your model in multiple plan files, one of the simplest ways to transfer a model to another directory or another machine is to use the Save As feature. Open the plan in Chief Architect and choose File> Save As, saving to the desired drive location and directory. The program will make sure that all plan files are saved along with the new copy. This is a good way to create backups of your work. It is important to know that plan files can have references to other external data files such as imported bitmaps, textures, images, backdrops, and pattern files. These external files will not be automatically saved with the plan files with the Save As command. If you transfer a set of plan files from one machine to another, you may see warning messages when the files are opened on a new machine that these referenced files are not present. When transfering plans to another machine that does not have the external files, it is usually better to use File> Export Entire Plan instead of File> Save As. For more information, see Exporting an Entire Plan on page 77. When transferring layout files, be aware that the plan files are also external file references and are not actually contained in the layout file. Using Save As on a layout file will only copy the layout file and will not copy any of the referenced plan files. You should always use the File> Export Entire Plan to copy all of the associated files instead of Save As for layout files. Individual files can also be copied or transferred manually with Windows Explorer. After transferring files manually, be sure to open the copy and look for any error messages about missing files. It is recommended that you store all files for a single job in the same folder so that you can keep all of the associated files in a single place. If you use this technique, it will make it much easier to transfer or backup files because you can then use Windows Explorer to copy the entire folder.
Exporting an Entire Plan

Because Chief Architect stores your plans and layouts in multiple files and can contain many references to other external files, it is sometimes necessary to save or copy all of
77
File Management
the associated files to a new location. This can be useful when trying to transfer plan files to another machine or when sending them to another user. It is also useful for making backups of plan or layout files because all externally referenced or linked files are included.
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan when sending files to a user of the Chief Architect Client Viewer to make sure that they have all associated data.
transferring a plan or layout file to a machine which already has the graphics files installed.
Export Entire Plan dialog, the program will display the Browse for Folder dialog.
Once you have clicked the OK button on the
Choose File>Export>Entire Plan to copy all associated plan or layout files to a new directory. The Export Entire Plan dialog will open, allowing you to choose what files will be copied.
The Browse for Folder dialog allows you to select the destination folder for the associated plan files. You can navigate to any folder on your system, to an external storage device, or you can create a new folder. Choosing Export All Files will copy all plan or layout files as well as all externally referenced files such as linked plan files, insterted picture files, custom pattern files, and any graphics files (such as textures, images, and backdrops). Choosing Export Plan Files Only will copy all associated plan files as well as any externally linked files and inserted picture files but it will not copy any graphics or pattern files. This is best used when
You must select a folder which is currently empty for the Export Entire Plan feature to work properly. If you select an existing folder which is not empty, you will get a warning message and the export will be cancelled.
While the files are being copied you will see a temporary dialog that displays the files being copied. When the export is complete this dialog will disappear.
78
Autosave Files
Autosave Files
Chief Architect creates Autosave files for all files that you open, once you have worked past the Autosave time. The frequency of Autosave is set on the General tab of the Preferences dialog. To use the Autosave feature, make sure that Autosave is checked and that a value greater than zero is defined in the number of minutes. In the event that your computer shuts down accidentally, you can recover your work by opening the most recent Autosave files created by the program. When you reopen Chief Architect after a computer shut down or system crash, a dialog similar to the following will display:
Once a file is saved and named, the program will reference the file name in the Autosave file name. Autosave files have the extension .pan (where n is the floor number). In addition, numbers will be appended to the file name to guarantee unique names for the Autosave files. For a file called Johnson.PL1, the autosave file may be named Johnson900_0.pa1. If you opened the Johnson file again or opened a file named Johnson.PL1 from a different directory, the autosave file would be named Johnson900_1.pa1 Even with Autosave active, you should manually save your work by selecting File> Save, or Ctrl+S. All plans with recent Autosave files will display and will be checked. The plans with
If you do not want to open the Autosave file, click Cancel, or remove the check box next to the file name and click OK. You will not be prompted to open the Autosave file again. This dialog will only display the first time the program starts after an abnormal exit. The Chief Architect Temporary Directory is where all autosave files are stored. The Undo Directory is where the undo files are stored. Both of these directories can be specified on the General> Directories panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Directories Panel on page 99. Chief Architect stores copies of all open plan file changes up to a maximum number as
79
File Management
If the file has not been saved, the Autosave files will be named autosave#.pa1, autosave#.pa2, etc., where the # symbol represents the sequence of unsaved files.
checkmarks next to them will be opened when you click OK. When you open an Autosave file, the file name will be changed to Untitled.PL1. You must select File> Save and save the file with its original name before continuing your work.
specified in the Maximum Undos value in the Preference settings. If you have Undo enabled be sure to define a directory on a hard drive with enough space for these files. If you exit Chief Architect normally, any current Autosave and Undo files are deleted. If you exit abnormally, such as with a system crash or a power failure, the autosave files will not be deleted. They will be available when Chief Architect is started again.
In addition to backing up your plan files, you should back up the toolbar configuration files (*.toolbar), mmaster.mat (master materials list) and any template files you are using. You can access these and back them up using Windows Explorer.
Never store your files in a temporary directory. They may be deleted by the program.
Backup Files
Every time a model is saved, internal backup files are automatically created by renaming the existing plan files using b as the second letter of the file extension. The model is then saved in new plan files. Any existing backup files are then deleted. This allows you the ability to recover your data in the event of a power failure during a save. If this has happened and you need to open a backup file of your model, select File> Open and choose Backup Files (*.pbn) from the Open Plan File dialog. Browse to the directory where your plan files are saved and select the correct backup file to open.
File Types
The following file types are produced by Chief Architect. These files may be opened, copied, deleted, or modified. .pln: Plan file. n is the floor number from 0 to 9 with A for 10 and B for the attic above the 10th floor. .can: CAD file for floor n. .la1: Layout file. .mat: Material List information. .pan: Autosave file for floor n. Stored in the temporary directory. .pbn: Plan backup file for floor n. Stored in the same folder as the original plan. .tan: Used to store CAD objects when you save a Layout sheet. .tmn: Temporary plan file produced by Undo. Sometimes you can recover this file if your plan file is lost or damaged. .wmf: Windows Metafile. .dxf: Drawing Exchange File. Used for import and export to other CAD programs. Chief Architect produces and reads both 2D and 3D DXF files. .dwg: AutoCADs native drawing file format. .wlk: File produced by Record Walkthrough feature.
80
File Types
.txt: Tab delimited text file for exporting a Material List. .csv: Tab delimited text file for exporting a Material List. .wrl: VRML file exported from 3D views. A VRML 3D model that can be viewed with available VRML viewing programs. .dat: Data files that can contain wall layer definitions or material definitions. .pov: Files exported from POVRay. For more information, see Exporting to POV-Ray Format on page 634.
Files Required by Chief Architect

These file types are required for proper operation of the program and should not be deleted or changed unless specifically instructed to do so by Chief Architect Technical Support personnel. .exe: System run file. .dll: Dynamic Link Libraries (program files). .alb: Fixture, furniture, electrical, cabinet door, and other symbol libraries. .int: Chief Architect error messages. .hlp: Files used by the Help system. .dat: Various data files for materials and other program data. .toolbar: toolbar configuration files. File Management
All .exe, .dll, .int and .hlp files must remain in the same installation directory. The .alb files must remain in the Library subdirectory.
81
File Types
82
Chapter 4:
Defaults & Preferences
Chapter Overview
Becoming familiar with the Edit> Default Settings menu and the Edit> Preferences dialog will help you understand how the program works with all of the various objects, and help you gain the maximum benefit from Chief Architect. Some of the settings specified here affect all plan files, others can be applied in specific cases.
If you use special settings regularly, it is a good idea to save your settings in a template plan. For more information, see Creating Your Own Template Plan on page 72.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings Dynamic Defaults Plan Defaults Reset to Defaults Edit Preferences Panel
Appearance Panel Colors Panel Font Panel Library Browser Panel Text Objects Panel General Panel Directories Panel New Plans Panel Unit Conversions Panel Architectural Panel CAD Panel Line Properties Panel Special CAD Panel Material List Panel Report Style Panel Master List Panel Categories Panel Render Panel Texture Filter Panel 3D Preferences
83
Default Settings
Defaults play a valuable role in Chief Architects design process. When prepared and used properly, defaults can save a lot of time. It is a good idea to become familiar with the default settings for the many objects that can be used in a plan.
Fencing Defaults dialog. For more
Fencing
child button to open the
information, see Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 186.
Door Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Door Defaults> Interior Door / Exterior Door or double click the Door Tools parent button to open the Door Defaults dialog. For more information, see Door Default Settings on page 231.
Plan Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Plan Defaults or double-click the Select Objects button to open the Plan Defaults dialog. For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86.
Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Wall or double click the Wall Tools parent button to set the defaults for interior and exterior type doors. For more information, see Wall Defaults on page 134. Select Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Pony Wall or double click the
Wall Defaults dialog. For more
Window Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Window Defaults or double click the Window Tools parent button to open the Window Defaults dialog. For more information, see Window Defaults on page 234.
Foundation Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Foundation Defaults or click the Build Foundation child button to open the Build Foundation dialog. For more information, see Foundation Defaults on page 277.
Pony Wall
child button to open the Pony
information, see Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on page 185. Select Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Railing or double click the Railing child button to open the Railing Defaults dialog. For more information, see Railing Defaults Dialog on page 185. Select Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Fencing or double click the
Floor Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Floor Defaults, double click the Floor Tools parent button, or click the Floor Defaults child button to open the Floor Defaults dialog. For more information, see Floor Defaults on page 269.
84
Default Settings
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Framing Defaults or double click the Framing Tools parent button to open the Framing Defaults dialog. For more information, see Framing Defaults on page 365.
Select Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Sidewalk or double click the Sidewalk child button to open the Sidewalk Defaults dialog. For more information, see Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515.
Electrical Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Electrical Defaults or double click the Electrical Tools parent button to open the Electrical Defaults dialog. For more information, see Electrical Defaults on page 435.
Material Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> General Materials to open the Material Defaults dialog. For more information, see Defining the Default Materials on page 571. Select Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> Room Materials to open the Room Materials dialog. For more information, see Room Material Defaults on page 188.
Cabinet Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> or double click the Cabinet Tools parent button to access the defaults dialogs for many cabinet types. For more information, see Cabinet Defaults on page 438.
Camera Defaults Defaults & Preferences

Select Edit> Default Settings> Camera Defaults to open the Camera Defaults dialog. For more information, see Camera Defaults on page 593.
Road & Sidewalk Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Road or double click the Road Tools parent button to open the Road Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Driveway or double click the Driveway child button to open the Driveway Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default Settings> Road Defaults> Road Stripe or double click the Road Stripe child button to open the Road Marking Defaults dialog.
Dimension Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Dimension Defaults or double click the Dimension Tools parent button to open the Dimension Defaults dialog. For more information, see Dimension Defaults on page 636.
Schedule Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> to choose from the available schedule defaults for various objects. For
85
more information, see Schedule Defaults on page 851.
For more information, see Reset to Defaults on page 89.
Reset Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Reset to Defaults or double click the
Edit> Preferences
Select Edit> Preferences to open the Edit Preferences dialog. For more information, see Edit Preferences Panel on page 90.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults can be found in the default specification dialogs for almost any object, such as windows, doors, cabinets, walls, railings, fencing, rooms, etc. Whenever you see a value followed by a "(D)" in a dialog, that value is a dynamic default. Changing the value will remove the (D) from the field, indicating that this instance is an exception to the default settings of the program for that object. To restore default settings for a particular value, highlight it and replace it with a lower case "d". Press the Tab key to update the new values. Any object that uses a material is really using a dynamic default as well. Materials are almost always set to "Use Default". If you change the default material then many objects in the plan will also change. For more information, see Defining the Default Materials on page 571. CAD objects use layers in much the same way that other objects use dynamic defaults. If you change the layer information in the Layer Display Options dialog, any object which is currently using the settings "By Layer" for an attribute such as line style or color, will be updated whenever those settings are changed. For more information, see CAD Layers on page 129.
Plan Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings> Plan Defaults or double-click the Select Objects button to open the Plan Defaults dialog. Much of the information in
86
Plan Defaults
this dialog is general and applies to all models created in the program. Other
settings may get changed in individual plans depending on your working style.
3 4 5 6 7 9 8
10 12
11 13
14
Select the check box to allow the resizing of library symbols in Plan View or any 3D view.
1 Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable -
box to display the total Living Area label in Plan View.
6 Show Living Area - Select the check 7 Show "S" markers on step
Check this box if you want the program to require confirmation before an item is deleted. whether the upper or lower section of a pony wall displays in Plan View.
3 Warn Before Delete Selected Item -
Degree Allowed Angles or 7 1/2 Degree Allowed Angles option for restricted angles. If 7 1/2 is selected, up to eight additional angles can also be defined. eight additional angle values. When you enter an angle, it must be between 45 degrees and -45 degrees. After an angle has been entered, walls can be drawn at that angle. Walls can also be drawn at angles of 90 degrees and 180 degrees to the defined angle. Positive angles are measured in the counterclockwise direction with zero degrees being at horizontal right.
8 Allowed Angles - Select either the 15
9 Additional Angles - Specify up to
4 Show Lower Pony Wall - Specify
5 Show Pitch as Degrees - Check this
box to display the roof pitch in degrees.
87
2 Ignore Casing for Opening Resize Select the check box to allow openings to be moved right up to an intersecting wall. If this is cleared, the program does not allow you to place a door within the specified trim width of an intersecting wall.
foundation - Check this box to display an "S" in Plan View for stepped foundations.
The diagram below shows walls drawn when the angle allowed entered is 18d 26.
Define the shortest unconnected wall that can be drawn. Walls that are shorter than this distance, and are not connected to other walls are deleted. Define the number of inches that the Plan View scrolls when you press an arrow key or one of the two buttons at the ends of a scroll bar. spacing for all wall hatching in the Plan View. within this distance of each other will snap together. This also defines how close you need to be to the wall to select it. If this value is set to "1", you must click directly on an object to select it. Five inches (12 cm) works well in most cases. Specify the actual thickness of system defined Default wall types. For more information, see System Default Walls on page 162.
10 Unconnected Wall Min. Length -
18d 26 (positive angle)
11 Inches Scrolled by Arrow Key -
In order to be able to draw a wall at the equivalent angle in a clockwise direction, the negative value of the same angle should be entered. If 15 degree allowed angles is selected, no additional angles are available even though the values show in the Plan Defaults dialog. To access the additional angles, you must first select 7 1/2 degree allowed angles. These values must be between 45 degrees and -45 degrees. When you enter a value, you also get the values that are 90 degrees, 180 degrees and 270 degrees off of that angle.
12 Wall Hatch Spacing - Define the
13 Wall Snap Distance - Walls drawn
14 Actual Thickness for Nominal
88
Reset to Defaults
Reset to Defaults
1
the roof built over other parts of the plan. These are reset to the default roof group, zero. how a roof surface will rise from a wall can be set into a wall using the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. All Roof tab items are unchecked and any value, such as the roof pitch, is reset to the default pitch.
4 Roof Directives - Directives describing
2 3 5 4
Select Edit> Default Settings> Reset to Defaults from the main menu to open the Reset to Defaults dialog. This dialog allows special settings you have made in various parts of your plan to be cleared.
1 The settings can be cleared for the

plan.
current floor, or for all floors in the
designate floor and ceiling heights for each room that varies from the floor defaults in the Room Specification dialog. These are reset to the default values as specified in the Floor Defaults dialog. For more information, see Floor Defaults on page 269.
2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - You can
If your plan behaves strangely, the current settings may have been inherited and no longer appropriate. An easy way to check for this is to open your plan and reset these items to their defaults. Rebuild floors and ceilings and see if the plan looks better. If so, you know what the problem is. Rather than save your plan at this point and lose all these settings, you may wish to investigate and find the specific settings causing the problem and fix only those.
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a
Room Specification dialog. This causes
different roof group for a room in the
the roof to be built over this room, and others in its same roof group, independently from
89
Heights - Normally the tops and bottoms of walls are cut off by ceiling and floor platforms or by roof surfaces. This is done whenever you Build Floors and Ceilings. You can explicitly change the height of a wall's top or bottom, or reshape it into a raked wall or some other configuration when you edit that wall in Cross Section/ Elevation View. When these are reset the wall top and bottom heights and shapes are again determined from the platforms and roof surfaces.
5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom
Edit Preferences Panel

Choose Edit> Preferences to access the Preferences dialog. In this dialog, you can define settings which are global to the Chief Architect application, rather than specific to a particular plan. The Preferences dialog consists of a number of panels. Each panel is accessed by clicking on its name in the category tree along the left side. The Category tree structure on the left side of the dialog is similar to other Windows programs. A small + next to a category indicates that there are subcategories to choose from as well. Click the + to expand the tree and make the subcategories visible. The + then becomes a -, and all the subcategories display. To collapse the tree, press the -.
Appearance Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
90
Appearance Panel
1 Click Appearance to display the panel

for general display settings. options to specify where and when the status bar displays. Always - Displays the status bar at the bottom of the program, below the scroll bar. A description appears there when you move above a toolbar button or menu item. Always is the default and is used by most people. Only as needed causes the information to pop-up below the scroll bar whenever you move above a toolbar button or menu item, but otherwise will not display. In Title Bar displays the online help in the title bar whenever you move the cursor over a tool or menu item. display the coordinates of your cursor at all times in the status bar.
2 Show Status Bar - Choose one of the
the first right-click to be a general select without having to use the contextual menu. A double right-click is required to display the contextual menus. All the options available in the Edit toolbar are usually available in the contextual menu. The following example shows a selected cabinet with both the Edit toolbar and the contextual menu displayed. Note that the options correspond.
3 Status Bar Objects - Check this box to
5 Double Buffer Drawing - Check the

box to Double Buffer in these views. Double buffering means that all drawing is done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied to the screen. The result is that the screen will not flicker, however, it will not display individual objects as they are drawn. Some people like to see things as they draw, especially when there is a lot to draw. This option does not affect Render and Raytrace Views, which use different drawing methods. the selection handles in pixels. By default this is set to 3 which results in a handle that is 7 x 7 pixels. A value of 1 will result in a handle that 3 x 3 pixels. The allowed range is from 1 to 10.
a pop-up menu when you right-click in the program. If you right-click on an object, the Contextual pop-up menu displays options appropriate to the object. If you right-click in the window away from any object, a different menu selection displays. Since Chief Architect can use the right-click as a general select, you have the option to disable or limit the contextual menus. Enabled - Select the check box to activate contextual menus. Clear the check box to disable contextual menus. Click twice to display is used in order to require two right-clicks on an object before the contextual menu displays. This allows
4 Contextual Menus allow you to access
6 Selection Handle Size is the 1/2 size of
If you find that it is difficult to select a handle for an object then you may want to increase this number. If you find that the handles get in the way of your work then you may want to decrease the number.
91
line weight display on screen. Because of the monitors resolution, the lines may appear to be much wider on screen than when they are printed. Zooming closer reflects a more accurate idea of the actual line width.
7 Check Show Line Weight to have the
The line weight for CAD objects may be defined individually through each objects specification dialog or globally in the Layer Display Options dialog.
display the number of seconds it takes to redraw the screen. This is particularly useful for determining the effectiveness of the 3D acceleration of your graphics card.
8 Check Show Screen Redraw Time to
Colors Panel
1 2 3 4 1 Click Colors to display the panel that 2 Background Color - Click the 3 Reference Plan Color - Click the
defines the background and reference color in Chief Architect.
rectangle to open the standard Windows Color dialog. Use the dialog to choose the desired background color for the program. This background color is used for all views except Render Views. You can set the background color for Render Views in the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Render Tab on page 124.
rectangle to open the standard Windows Color dialog. Select a color from the list. The Reference Plan Color is the color of the lines that the Reference floor displays in. open the standard Windows Color dialog. Select a color from the list. The Move Color is the color of the lines that represent the object(s) that are currently being moved.
4 Move Color - Click the rectangle to
92
Font Panel
Font Panel
3 4
2 Choose Text, Dimension, Materials or

Toolbar to define its font. Text sets the default font for all text objects. Dimension sets the fonts for all dimensions. Materials sets the default font for the Material List and the Master Material List. for the specified type of object. The program finds the currently installed fonts on the computer and makes those fonts available
4 A sample sentence shows how the

selected font appears. The reference size of 10 is used for all fonts. You can set the size of text objects individually in the Text dialog or globally on the Text Objects panel of the Preferences dialog.
3 Click Change Font to select a new font
93
font settings in Chief Architect. Fonts are set by computer not by plan file. If you work in an office with more than one license of the program you may want all of your font settings to be consistent.
1 Click Font to display the panel for the
for use. Select the desired Font and Font style then click OK.
Library Browser Panel
1 2 3
The settings on the Library Browser panel control the display of the Library Browser window.
highlighted level to be displayed on a scrollable list. Layout - Select a radio button to change the appearance of the Library Browser. If currently docked, these options will be unavailable. For more information, see Docking the Library Browser on page 530. Vertical - Displayed sections of the Library Browser are divided vertically. Horizontal - Displayed sections are divided horizontally. Stacked - Displayed sections are divided both horizontally and vertically.
1 Hide Selection Pane - Select the check box to hide the pane that displays possible selections.
Hide Preview Pane - Select the check box to hide the pane that shows a preview of the selected library object. radio button if you would like all of the library objects at the highlighted level to be fit into the Selection Pane of the Library Browser. If there are many objects, this option will cause them to appear very small. Scrollable List - Select this radio button if you would like all library objects at the
3 Preview Pane - Selection Pane
2 Tiled To Fit Window - Select this
4 Check the Disable Docking button to

disable library docking. When this is
94
Text Objects Panel
unchecked and you move the library browser to the left, right, top or bottom of the screen it will dock. Instead of floating above your drawing it will resize the drawing area so that it doesnt obscure your model. If you wish to temporarily disable docking at any time, you can hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the Library Browser window. For more information, see Docking the Library Browser on page 530. display the Status Bar at the bottom of the Library Browser.
If you have two monitors you can place your library browser and even some toolbars on one monitor allowing more drawing area on the other monitor.
6 Show Menu - Check this box to display

the menu on the Library Browser. this box to display the file name of the object, image, or texture in the Selection Pane of the Library Browser.
7 Show Name in Selection Pane - Check
5 Show Status Bar - Check this box to
Text Objects Panel

The settings on the Text Objects panel are local settings only. They affect only the subsequently created text objects in the current plan.
3 4 5 1 Text Attributes - The settings in this

section affect text objects.
95
Character Height - Sets the height of new text in scaled inches. You need to consider your plotting scale when setting this value in the model. In the layout facility you also need to set a value for Text height. In Layout, the size is in real world dimensions. Tabs - Set tab spacing for text that is entered in table form. Layer - Specify the default layer for text objects. When the layer number is specified as "NONE", then text objects will use the Architectural layer named "Text" for their display attributes. You can also specify a System or User layer as the default layer for text objects. A layer number from 0 to 199 can be entered. For more information, see Layers on page 125. Transparent Background - Check this box box to create text objects with transparent backgrounds.
Size - This is the length of the arrow head in real world inches. Include Arrow - Select the check box to include an arrow when creating new text objects. Special Use - Select the check box to create Special Use arrows. For more information, see Special Use Arrow on page 665. size of your room labels. Changing this value has no effect on any previously created room labels. box to specify the default callout size. If checked, the value at right will become the default callout size. If you leave this option unchecked, your callouts will be sized dynamically so that they are just large enough to contain the text. Check this box if you would like to insert a new line in the the Text Specification dialog when the Enter key is used. If unchecked, using the Enter key will close the dialog.
3 Room Label Size - Specify the initial
4 Specify Callout Size - Select the check
5 Accept Enter Key When Editing -
Arrow - Define the default arrow style.
Type - Select an arrowhead style from the list. Fill Color - If the arrowhead style has a fill area, you can specify the color.
96
General Panel
General Panel
1 2 3 4 5
The General tab offers various options for file management.
1 Auto Save - Select the Enable check

box to use the Auto Save feature. Enter a value greater than zero to specify the frequency in minutes that Autosave files are created. Autosave files are stored in your Temporary Directory. For more information, see Directories Panel on page 99. If the file has not been saved, the Autosave files are named autosave#.pa1, autosave#.pa2, etc., where the # symbol represents the sequence of unsaved files. Once you save a file and give it a name, the program will use that file name by default. Autosave files have an extension of PAn (where n is the floor number). In addition, numbers are appended to the file name to guarantee unique names for the Autosave files. For a file called Johnson.PL1, the
Note: Even with Autosave active, you should frequently save your work to the hard drive by selecting File> Save or ctrl + S.
In the event that your computer shuts down, you can recover your most recent work by opening the Autosave file created by the program. When you reopen the program after a computer or system crash, a dialog containing a list of all recent Autosave files will display. The plans with the selected check box next to them are opened when you click OK.
97
autosave file may be named Johnson900_0.pa1. If you opened the Johnson file again or opened a file named Johnson.PL1 from a different directory the autosave file would be named Johnson900_1.pa1
When you open an Autosave file, the file name is Untitled. You must select File> Save and save the file with its original name before continuing your work. If you do not want to open the Autosave file, click Cancel, or clear the check box next to the file name and click OK. You will not be prompted to open the Autosave file again. This dialog only displays the first time the program starts after an abnormal exit. activate the multiple undo feature. Specify how many levels of Undo and Redo you want to save. You may specify any value from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the Undo Directory. to lock files when they are open. This is important when more than one computer has access to the same set of files at the same time. Locking the file prevents another user from opening and modifying the same file at the same time. If file locking is enabled, a file with the extension .lck is created. You
are not able to open the plan if that file exists. If you exit Chief Architect abnormally, that file remains. You need to delete the .lck file before you can reopen the plan. Never Lock Files is the typical choice of individual users. Lock Files if Network Version is the typical choice for anyone using the network version of the program. (This requires a network hardware lock as well.) Always Lock Files is the typical choice of those who run individual versions of the program but who are also tied into a network. box to utilize a cross hair cursor in plan, elevation, cross section, and over view modes. Size is specified as a percentage of window width. Choosing 100% always extends the cross hairs across the entire screen. in the Recent File List can be set here. Specify from 0 to 50, the default it 4.
2 Undo - Select the Enable check box to
4 Cross Hair - Select the Enable check
3 File Locking - Choose whether or not
5 Recent File List - The Maximum Files
98
Directories Panel
Directories Panel
Temporary File Directories

There are two directories that can be specified to store your temporary files. By default they are the same. If you have the ability to create a RAM drive, you may wish to specify a different directory for your undo files to improve performance. You must define a directory on a hard drive with sufficient space to hold these files. If you exit normally from Chief Architect, any current Autosave and Undo files are deleted from this directory. If you exit abnormally, such as with a system crash or a power failure, the autosave files are not deleted. They are then available immediately after restarting Chief Architect. The Temporary directory should not be the
Graphics Directories
Graphics are stored in three directories in the Chief Architect program Folder. The program looks for the directories - Images, Textures, and Backdrops, when it opens the Library Browser. Do not rename these directories. If you do, they will not appear in the Chief Architect Library Browser. If you prefer, you can specify different default directories for your graphics.
99
Chief Architect installation directory. You should create a folder for the Temporary Directory and do not use this directory for anything else. Do not store plan files here. Unless defined, the program will use the Temp folder in your Chief Architect installation directory.
You can rename or add a folder to any of these and add your own graphics. Any .bmp, .jpg, or .png files can be used in Chief Architect. The graphics you copied can be viewed in the Library Browser. Choose Tools> Library Browser to view the Library.
Note: If you add, rename, or move any files or folders while Chief Architect is running you must refresh the Library Browser to see your changes. For more information, see Refresh Library Browser on page 532.
All Other Directories

The location that files are located by default is listed here. Default locations need not be changed under normal circumstances. However, if it is preferable to look for files of a certain type in another location, that may be done here. You may enter a directory manually, or use the Select button to specify a folder on your computer. Individual files may always be saved to a desired location using the Save As function.
New Plans Panel
or Metric Units radio button to determine the units of your new plans. Once a new plan has been created the units of the
1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units
plan may not be changed. You can specify a different set of templates to be used for imperial plans then for metric plans.
100
Unit Conversions Panel
If you do not specify a template file, or the template file cant be found, the program will start a new plan in the selected units but will use the system defined defaults for new plans instead of the settings from the template plan.
Note: You should make sure that you use an imperial plan for your imperial template file and a metric plan for your metric template file. When a new plan is created, the plan will be created in the units of the template file regardless of the units setting.
Layout Template - This displays the current layout plan template that will be used whenever a new layout file is started. You can select a new default layout template by typing in a new file name or by using the Browse button to select a new file. For more information about creating templates, see Template Files on page 72. Open/Save As Directory options to control how Chief behaves by default when opening a new plan or when doing a save as on a plan. There are two options. The first is to remember the directory that was last used to save or open a plan file. The other is to always go to a particular location which you can specify. Select the Browse button to specify a different directory when using this option.
2 Open/Save As Directory - Use the
Plan Template - This displays the current plan template file that will be used whenever a new plan is started. You can select a new default template file by typing in a new file name or by using the Browse button to select the new template.
Unit Conversions Panel

Defaults & Preferences 101
1 2
In many places throughout Chief Architect you can choose what type of units are displayed with different objects. Chief Architect comes standard with a variety of unit conversions built-in. These are locked and cannot be changed. If you wish to create your own unit conversions you can add them here.
any unit conversion you have added is correct. the unit conversions. Certain unit conversions that ship with Chief Architect are locked and cannot be modified. Locked units cannot be Edited or Deleted. When you Add, Edit or Copy a unit you will be presented with the same dialog. The dialog title will be specify the action being performed, but all 3 dialogs function similarly.
3 You can Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy
1 List of unit conversions that are

available. selected unit converts to a sampling of similar units. You can use this to verify that
2 Sample. This area shows how the
1 3 2
want for your unit. Names must be unique.
1 Unit Name this is the name that you
modifying. Select the appropriate radio button. multiply by to convert to the unit that you select in the Combo box. You must select a measurement type before the combo box is populated with units.
2 Default Unit check this box if you want this unit to show up in places that present a list of availble units. For example if you have in, and inches as units, if you make inches your default unit, that will be the unit that is displayed when you are given a choice of units. In some cases, such as in the Import Drawing Wizard this is used to present a smaller set of units. In other places, such as the Material List all units are displayed. 3 Measurement Type defines what kind
of unit conversion you are defining or
4 Multiply by gives you a number to
Example
Create a unit conversion for Furlongs. A Furlong is 660 ft, a unit of measurement originating in England. 1. Click Add on the Unit Conversions page of the Preferences dialog to
102
Architectural Panel
open the Add Unit Conversion dialog. 2. 3. 4. Type Furlong into the unit name dialog. Select Length in the measurement type. Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
5. 6.
Select ft in the combo box. Hit OK.
You now will have Furlong as a unit conversion.
Architectural Panel
1 3
2 4
The options on the Architectural panel of the Preferences dialog allow you to control how the program behaves when building certain types of objects.
appear, allowing you to temporarily override this behavior. option to allow the edit handle at the end of a selected wall to create a new wall of the same type. If a wall is selected and you are in this mode, the Adjust Wall Angle edit button will appear, allowing you to temporarily override this behavior.
2 Same Wall Type Mode - Select this
1 Wall Angle Mode - Select this option to allow the edit handle at the end of a selected wall to move that wall at allowed angles.
If a wall is selected and you are in this mode, the Same Type Wall edit button will
103
Wall Angle Mode Ceiling Holes - Select this option and the program will automatically generate a ceiling hole for a new skylight.
Same Wall Type Mode - Select this option to create your own ceiling holes.
3 Skylights Automatically Generate
4 Manually Edit ceiling Hole Polylines
CAD Panel
1 5 2 3 7
4 6
9 11
8 10 12
The CAD panel is unique to each drawing file. This dialog contains the information which lays the foundation for everything done with CAD. These settings are an important aspect of the CAD facility. These are not global settings.
The CAD panel defines how many of the tools on the CAD toolbar operate. Many of these settings are quickly toggled on and off from the toolbar itself while others can only be changed here.
104
CAD Panel
Note: Most of the values in the Preferences dialog are global settings. The CAD panel of the Preferences dialog affects the current session of the program only.
Rotate/Resize About
Rotate around Rotate around Item Center Current Point
Resize around Item Center
Resize around Current Point
Rotate around current Point. Rotate Jump=68d
defines the point around which an object or a group of objects rotates or resizes. Object Center is the default. Current Point is always the red X on the screen.
1 The Rotate/Resize About selection
Rotate Jump defines the angle increment at which an object or group of objects will snap as it is being rotated. It overrides the allowed angle or unrestricted rotation status set under Allowed Angles. If set to zero the allowed angle or unrestricted rotation status set under Allowed Angles are used.
Comparison between 15 Degree Increments and Unrestricted Angles
Example requiring Unrestricted angles since the 15 degree restriction will not allow the polyline to close.
angular constraint for any new CAD object being drawn. Keep it set to 15 Degree Increments unless Unrestricted is necessary. It is easier to drag a horizontal or vertical line when restricted to 15 degree angles. This setting can also be toggled from the CAD toolbar using Unrestricted Angle tool.
2 The Allowed Angles option defines the
Note: Plan Defaults defines angle restriction on walls. When walls are set to 7-1/2 degree angles, the Allowed Angles in CAD will be 71/2 Degree Increments, not 15 Degree Increments. Any Additional angles set in the Plan Defaults dialog are available as allowed angles when creating or rotating CAD objects.
105
Allowed Angles
Positioning Unit
Positioning Unit set to 4. Points snapped to grid. Note that the objects drawn diagonally follow pattern not defined by these points.
Positioning Unit set to 5. Lines are all in increments of 5" and have jumped to 5" apart.
imaginary snap grid that rotates to the defined angle restrictions as you draw a line or CAD object. As you draw, the cursor jumps to a grid crossing, and the length of each object snaps to the specified increments when drawing it. Moving objects are also affected by this grid. If Rotate Jump is set to 0, when you Rotate/ Resize the first jump is to the nearest point on the grid. It then jumps from grid point to grid point. The Positioning Unit is used to quickly draw lines, circles or boxes at sizes of a specified increment.
Note: If there is any other object nearby to snap to, the object(s) will snap to the other object and not jump to the Positioning Unit grid. You can turn off Autosnap this. to prevent
3 The Positioning Unit creates an
Notes
The Positioning Unit has no affect when Allowed Angles is Unrestricted. The Positioning Unit has no affect on arcs. It is a good idea to reset the Positioning Unit back to 1 inch (or 10 mm) immediately after use. Otherwise it affects other drawing and editing commands. Use Concentric Jump to resize objects.
Note: Be aware of objects that seem to "jump" when drawing or moving. If this gets in your way, you may need to change the positioning unit for that action or reset it if it is responding to a changed value.
106
CAD Panel
Edit Type
default Edit Type for closed polylines. Move Corners allows you to relocate any corner of a polyline, without resizing the rest of the polyline. The edge you select restricts how you can move the corner. These principles are very important to learn and understand.
4 Edit Type - Move Corners is the
Select one edge next to a corner and you can move the corner along the other edge.
If you pick an edge adjacent to the corner, you can only move the corner along this edge. If you pick an edge opposite the corner, you can freely move the corner. Move Corners allows you to change the shape of a polyline by adding break points (also known as joints or corners or hinge points) to a polyline. You will use this often when editing Roofs and Slabs.
Select opposite edge and you can move the corner anywhere desired.
Concentric Defaults & Preferences

copy or resize a CAD object (except arcs) at a specified distance from the object's center. Concentric editing affects the entire polyline if any corner is grabbed and dragged. When Concentric Jump is set to 0, you can resize an object in increments of 1/16. When Concentric Jump is set to a specific
5 Concentric - Select this edit type to
value other than 0, the object resizes at each increment of the specified amount. This amount overrides the value set under Positioning Unit. Following are several examples of objects in the process of being edited. Concentric Jump is set to 12 inches. Notice that each new edge is the same distance away from the original edge. This is not a proportional adjustment,
107
Resize must be selected for proportional scaling.
Copying Concentrically
Select Concentric. Select an object, and click the Copy edit button. Drag a corner of the selected object. The original object remains unchanged and a concentric copy is created. If the Copy edit button is not selected, the original object resizes concentrically when dragged. Following is a simple illustration of the results with and without selecting the Copy edit button:
Original box. Concentric editing.
Results with copy
Results without copy.
Always reset Concentric Jump to "0". This value will continue to affect editing even if another Edit Type is selected. Roof sections are also affected by the concentric jump value. This value saves with the specific plan, so be sure to reset it before closing the plan. Watch for CAD objects (including roof sections) jumping at specific increments, and know where to go to reset this value.
Resize (Proportional)
proportional copying or scaling. To Resize a closed polyline proportionally, always drag a corner, not an edge. The Concentric Jump value is used even when Resize is the current Edit Type. Below
6 Resize is the Edit Type used for
are some examples. Notice that the resizing is proportional to the original.
Note: Move Corners should be your default edit type, unless you prefer one of the others. Its a good idea to be familiar with these options and how they affect CAD behavior.
108
CAD Panel
Fillet Edit Type 7 Fillet causes the rounding of corners of

a box or polyline. If you use Fillet, all the corners of a box adjust together when one side or corner is dragged to the middle. The radius of each corner is the same.
The snap distance is defined by the percent. The value is represented by a percentage of the screen width. Because it is based on screen and not actual or scale distance, zooming in or out is the best way to increase the snapping accuracy. Only visible objects can be snapped to. Autosnap can be turned off and on with the Autosnap Toggle button. If Auto Snap is checked, the object attempts to snap to these locations in this order of priority:
Original
Drag inward
Result
You can fillet individual corners of a polyline by using the Fillet tool from the Edit CAD toolbar and selecting two sides.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
A point. A line end or corner (two line ends coming together). An intersection. An edge of any object. The imaginary grid defined by the Positioning Unit in the Preferences dialog.
Fillet Notes
1. 2. Remember to reset Fillet to Move Corners as soon as you are finished. To produce fillets of an exact radius (or chamfer), it is better to set the Fillet/ Chamfer radius and use the Fillet or Chamfer buttons on the Edit toolbar. These can be used on lines already connected in a polyline.
When the Auto Snap check box is selected, lines and arcs drawn end to end merge to form a closed polyline. When the Auto Snap check box is cleared, the lines do not unite automatically. Always leave Auto Snap selected unless it is negatively affecting a specific action by snapping to an undesired location.
Auto Snap
start and end points of any object being drawn to other locations within the specified screen distance. In this case, the snap distance is set to 1% of the screen width.
8 Auto Snap - Check this box to snap the
109
If the Auto Snap check box is cleared, only the Positioning Unit affects the start or end point.
Edit Polyline Parts
Edit Polyline Parts is not checked polyline remains a unit.
. The
Edit Polyline Parts is checked . Each edge is an individually editable item.
box to edit the individual components of a polyline. This setting can also be toggled from the CAD toolbar with the Edit Polyline Parts button. Lines and arcs touching end to end form a polyline, which limits you to editing the object as a whole. Sometimes a single edge of a polyline needs to be removed, but when you click on that edge, the entire polyline is selected. Clicking the Delete edit button would remove the entire polyline. Above is an illustration of the same polyline being edited without and with Edit Polyline Parts selected. Notice the difference between the number of handles for the two objects, and the different cursor shapes. When the object is a polyline unit, the entire unit picks up red handles when selected. When the polyline is broken up into its individual components, the handles relate to the individual component.
9 Edit Polyline Parts - Select the check
Block Fill
fill by Object to retain the hatch pattern for component objects when they Checked Unchecked are blocked. If unchecked the individual hatch definitions are lost. Select the check box to cause newlycreated CAD block instances to default to maintaining the individual characteristics of the component parts, including line color, line style, and hatch or solid fill. This is the preferred setting. The By layer or By block setting of an existing CAD block can be changed on the Line Style tab of the CAD Block Specification dialog. have all handles appear on a selected spline. The additional handles allow you to customize the shape of the spline. If unchecked then only the handles at the vertices appear and the program automatically maintains the shape of the spline.
10 Check Block
11 New Block Instances by Layer -
12 Advanced Splines - Check this box to
110
Line Properties Panel
Line Properties Panel
1 2 3 5 7 4 6
the information displayed for lines in scaled inches. This value is not related to the size of other text objects or dimension numbers. You can set this higher so that line labels on objects such as Property lines can be easily read at small scales. Fractional feet or Decimal feet. This setting is not available in metric format, which will always use millimeters.
1 Number Height - Defines the height of
Fractional Degrees
Decimal Feet Bearing
2 Display Line Lengths as - Select either
Degrees or Bearings relative to the North Pointer. If no North Pointer has been established, north is assumed to be straight up on the screen.
3 Display Line Angles as - Select either 2
111
The Line Properties panel sets the preferences for displaying lengths and angles of CAD lines and polyline edges as well as the Line Style Pattern Scaling.
Centers, Ends - Select the check box to display the centers and ends of arcs. A displayed center is a snap point.
4 Show Arc
not correct, try changing the scaling percentages. Endcap Length (Pixels) - The beginning and end of CAD lines that are not solid are sometimes difficult to distinguish. Endcaps can be placed to eliminate this problem. Specify the number of pixels for endcaps.
Show Arc centers, ends
the check box to have all new framing members drawn with a solid white fill. This makes it easy to tell which framing member is on the top, since the objects below are blocked by the solid white fill.
5 Fill New Framing Members - Select
Overall Scale Factor - This factor lengthens or shortens the line length and the gap length based on the percentage typed in. The default is 100% which means the line is not adjusted. A value of 50% would result in the line lengths and gaps being 1/2 the original size and a value of 200% would result in line lengths and gaps being twice the original size. 1 is the minimum value allowed. Space Increase Per Line Thickness - This factor increases the size of all gaps as the line thickness increases. The default is 100% which means the line gaps are not adjusted as the line thickness increases which can result in line segments appearing to merge together as the line thickness becomes larger. Typing in a value of about 120% results in the gap increasing at a reasonable rate. Values between 110% and 130% produce good results, but results may vary depending on the printer.
6 Use Line for Framing - Check this box Line Style Pattern Scaling
to show framing members as a single line.
correct any Line Styles that do not generate correctly at thicker line weights. For each factor there is a Printing Only and a Screen Only scale factor. In most instances, all Line Styles should print correctly at all line weights. In an instance where they are
7 Scaling factors have been added to
Special CAD Panel
112
Material List Panel
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and Time Zone to be used when creating Sun Angles.
For more information, see Shadows on page 617.
Material List Panel
The Material List panel displays the names of all the possible categories and their ID prefix that appears in the Material List. Categories are defined by the program and cannot be changed. When a material is entered in the Material List the program decides what category it goes in and assigns an ID, which is the code followed by a number. EX1 would be the first instance of an exterior trim piece in the Material List. This ID unique within a list. Include These Categories - Check all the categories to display in every new Material List generated. Before you decide to hide
Categories you must be sure which items are listed in which Category. It is better to remove Categories from individual lists rather than globally. Categories may be removed from a Material List by choosing Tools> Display Options from within that individual Material List.
113
Report Style Panel
Report Style specifies how the Material List displays. This information may also be specified individually per Material List by choosing Tools> Display Options from within that Material List. columns to display in the Material List. You can set these on a per material list basis as well. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order that columns are displayed. To change the order, select one or more items in the list and click the button. The selected columns will be moved up or down by one in the list. The order that they appear in the list is the order that they will be displayed when a material list is generated.
For a more detailed description of Material Lists, see Materials List on page 859. Manufacturers - Select an option to narrow or broaden your query when searching the Master List. Grid - Define whether or not to have grid lines display in the materials list. If lines are desired, choose to have horizontal, vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off, they do not show on screen or print. Solid Lines uses solid lines for the grids instead of dotted lines.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
1 Include These Columns - Check all the
4 Background Colors can be set for

even and odd numbered lines.
114
Master List Panel
Master List Panel
2 3 4
The Master List panel allows you to configure the Master List(s) for materials. Multiple Master Lists may be maintained, but only one may be used at any given time. For a more detailed description of Material Lists, see Materials List on page 859.
1 Include These Columns - Check each column to be displayed in the master Material List.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order that columns are displayed. To change the order, select one or more items in the list and click the button. The selected columns will be moved up or down by one in the list. The order that they appear in the list is the order that they will be displayed when a material list is generated. Refer to the materail list chapter for more information on what these columns represent.
List. Navigate the directory structure until you find the new Master List to be used, select it, then click OK. Master List. You need to name it and save it in the location of your choice. If a new Master List has been created, it is blank until you build a Material List, and enter a price, supplier or manufacturer. The Master List is saved automatically when you close.
3 Press Select to select a different Master
4 Press New to create a new, blank
115
currently referenced is displayed. It is referenced for all subsequently opened plans when a Material List is generated from any model. A Master List contains the price and manufacturer information for materials.
2 The name and path of the Master List
Categories Panel
2 4 5 3
The Categories panel expands the scope of the Material List by allowing you to specify additional information within each of the main Material List headings. Subcategories contain more detailed information needed by each Category. Subcategories are global, and do not belong to a particular plan. The Subcategories you define will be available in all plan files. In the illustration above, the Windows category has two subcategories, GLZ (Glazing) and EXT (Ext Trim). See A Window Schedule Example on page 858 for information on adding additional material information to the windows, the Window Schedule and Material List. The extra material information can be added to a selected object only through its Components dialog. This is accessed by
the Components edit button when the object is selected. Only objects with a related Components dialog can use this material subcategory capability. Any object that can be used in a schedule can also use this formula in the schedule. To create or modify a subcategory:
click Delete. To change a subcategory, select it and click Edit. Or click Add to create a new subcategory. displays, give the subcategory a code name which will appear in the SubCat column of the Material List. This is the name
1 Select the Category from the list. 2 Existing subcategories display here. 3 To delete a subcategory, select it and
4 When the Subcategory dialog
116
Render Panel
used to select the material when applying it to an item, so use something logical to you.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,

Furniture, and Electrical objects can
generate a schedule. Any subcategory for these objects can appear as a column in that schedule. Name the schedule heading.
Render Panel
2 4 6
3 5
The Render panel allows you to set options that will be used in Render Views. Some values have separate settings for previews and final views. Since these settings have a significant impact on rendering speed it is a good idea to optimize them for your system.
rendered using the color assigned to the material. The pattern lines that you see in other 3D views are not drawn in a Render View. The Smooth Edges option causes the Render View to be drawn with anti-aliased edges where two surfaces meet. This removes the infamous jaggies that would otherwise appear. This feature is significantly slower because the renderer redraws the scene 8 times and blends the Views together. It is normally used only for Final Render Views.
1 The choices are the same in both the
Preview box and the Final View box.
The Use Textures option controls whether or not surfaces are rendered with textures. This only affects surfaces which are defined with a material that has a texture assigned to it. When textures are turned off, surfaces are
117
This option can also be accessed from the Contextual menu in a Render View. The Smooth Faces option generates smooth curved surfaces in Render Views. It uses new surface normals to alter the lighting effects on the surface and make them appear curved. It does not alter the shape of the surfaces. It should only have a minimal impact on rendering speed. This option can also be accessed from the Contextual Menu. The Use Multipass option produces better lighting and transparency effects. When using textures, you wont see proper highlights unless the Use Multipass feature is used. The program redraws certain surfaces multiple times when this is selected, so it does slow down rendering. Depending on your hardware, this may or may not be a noticeable delay. The Show Images option controls whether or not Chief Architect images (trees, shrubs, people, cars, etc.) are drawn in the Render View. The Show Shadows option controls whether or not the renderer calculates shadows. Shadows are extremely complicated to calculate and slow down rendering speed significantly. Multiple lights can cast shadows at the same time. Please note that the rendering time increases accordingly, i.e. 2 lights takes twice as long, 3 lights takes 3 times as long, etc. You should experiment with this feature before you turn it on as a default for Render Views. This option can also be accessed from the Contextual Menu. It is recommended that you only set this from the Contextual Menu rather than as a preference.
The Use Triangles option takes all large surfaces (such as walls, floors, and ceilings) and splits them into smaller triangles. This feature is necessary to get good lighting effects since OpenGL calculates lighting at the corners of surfaces. It only affects the appearance when point or spot light sources are being used. Max Triangle Size sets the size of the triangles modeled by the program. The smaller the maximum triangle size, the more triangles there are drawn. The lighting will look better with smaller triangles, but it will take longer to render. The minimum value is 6".
Other Render Settings

These following settings affect both the Preview and Final View functions. shadows to be drawn with soft edges instead of hard edges. This feature is only used when Show Shadows and Smooth Lines are also being used. 3D model and the render data to be recalculated every time the View is redrawn. If this is not checked, the program redraws the screen without recalculating the model. For any View, you can rebuild the model by hitting F5 on the keyboard or clicking on the Refresh Display button.
2 The Soft Shadows option causes
3 The Always Rebuild option causes the
When Always Rebuild is turned off, you may notice an incorrect view after a number of camera movements, (lighting and surfaces may appear wrong). Lighting calculations are done for the room in which the camera was originally in. When Always Rebuild is not checked, you are able to view other
118
Render Panel
rooms, but the lights could be calculated for a previous room. the Renderer to calculate all surfaces of a model. Turning off this feature speeds up rendering because surfaces that cannot be seen in the View are ignored. However, if you move the camera into a position where a surface that was not originally visible is now visible, there is a gap in the View. It is not necessary to use this feature when you have specified Always Rebuild. For fastest performance in the Render View you can select the Keep All Surfaces check box and clear the Always Rebuild check box. Your lighting will be wrong when the camera moves between rooms. You must use F5 to refresh the screen and update the lighting. box to have your computer save the rendering data to memory. On some OpenGL graphics cards this may cause problems if the rendering data for your model is greater than the amount of memory on the card. If your computer stops responding when rendering, try clearing the check box. This slows down the rendering time considerably. If your problems are not fixed, leave the check box selected. generate the backdrop image using hardware acceleration. For some cards there is a large improvement in drawing speed when using this option. OpenGL graphics card displays here. This information may be important if you are having problems generating Render Views.
4 The Keep All Surfaces option causes
The most important piece of information is what follows the Acceleration Label. If your video card supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL this will say "Installed Client Driver", otherwise it will say "No Hardware Acceleration". There is a significant difference in speed between rendering with acceleration and not. The Maximum Lights value will tell you how many lights you can have turned on at any given time when generating a Render View. This value should always be 8 or higher.
5 Use Optimizations - Select the check
6 H/W Backdrop - Check this option to
7 The information regarding your
119
Texture Filter Panel
1 2
When a texture is applied to a surface in a Render View its size must be adjusted to accomodate the size of the surface. This process is referred to as magnification and minification. Different video cards will produce different results. The options given on this page will affect the appearance of textures used in Render Views. How the appearance will be affected also depends on your video card. If you are not pleased with
the appearance of your textures, you may want to try changing these settings. how textures are mapped when they need to be magnified.
1 Magnification - These options control 2 Minification - These options apply to
textures that must be reduced to fit the surface to which they are applied.
3D Preferences
All 3D views are affected by settings in the 3D Preferences dialog. 3D Preferences are not global settings. They can be set per plan and will be saved with each plan file. The settings in this dialog define whether a 3D view generates in color or as a line drawing, whether or not the windows are opaque from the outside, which objects are included in 3D views, and much more. Choose 3D> 3D Preferences from the menu to display the 3D Preferences dialog.
Creating Backdrops
New backdrops can be created using a .bmp,
120
3D Preferences
.jpg, or .png file format. The backdrop is automatically adjusted to fit the window size. These images will look best if they are created with the same proportions of height to width as the window you are working in. Scanned images from a photograph or digital photos can be used to create backdrops of a specific view site if they can be saved in either the .bmp, .jpg, or .png file format.
For more information on using Textures, Images, and Backdrops in Render Views, see Textures, Images & Backdrops on page 610. For more information on saving your own Backdrops, see Adding Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the Library on page 532.
Options Tab
1
3
2 4 6
10 11 7 8 12 Defaults & Preferences 121
make the glass in windows and doors opaque when seen from outside the house. This helps simplify elevations and overviews. This setting does not affect Render Views that allow glass transparency to be controlled separately.
1 Check Opaque Glass From Outside to
the Floor Camera accessed by selecting 3D> Create View> Floor Camera.
2 Restrict Camera to Room only affects
Check this box to suppress the generation of any object beyond the room containing the camera. If checked, the view through a doorway into another room shows only blank
space. Use this option to maximize computer resources, or to minimize file size when creating a single room 3D Walkthrough movie. the Cross Section/Elevation View. A Cross Section/Elevation View normally displays everything from the cut line (where the mouse button was pressed) and beyond. Select the Back Clip Cross Sections check box to display only the objects between the cut line and the point where the mouse button was released. This option can be easily toggled on and off with the Backclip button. this box to create any camera in Low Detail mode by default. For more information, see Low Detail Mode on page 590.
3 Back Clip Cross Sections only affects
tune the performance of 3D views. Chief uses an adaptive panelization algorithim that can be tuned using these factors. Normally you shouldnt need to change these values. However, you may be able to get modest performance improvements by changing these numbers. These numbers represent target numbers of surfaces to use in creating panels. A value of 10000 in the first panel means that as you move from left to right on screen a total of 10000 or more surfaces will be collected to define each vertical panel. A value of 2000 as the second factor indicates that as you move from top to bottom in each vertical panel 2000 or more surfaces will be collected to define horizontal panels. Making these numbers larger will result in fewer panels and making them smaller will result in more panels. Adjusting these numbers too low or too high will cause the time required to draw to go up. You may wish to turn on "Show Screen Redraw Time" in the Preferences> Appearance panel when changing these numbers to see whether the change improves or decreases drawing speed. For more information, see Appearance Panel on page 90. These panels have no effect on render or raytrace views. clip for framing members only in any Cross Section/Elevation View. Framing must be included in 3D views to see the effects of this value. A zero value does not back clip at all.
6 View Panel Facors are available to
4 Start in Low Detail 3D Mode - Check
5 Display Inactive Views affects only

saved Wall Elevation or Cross Section/Elevation cameras. Check this to show section or elevation cameras in Plan View. Active cameras display in red. Inactive cameras display in green, and can be reactivated at any time. If this box is not checked, it appears as though all saved cameras have been lost. These cameras never appear in printed output. boxes for each type of 3D view. Select the check box to specify the View to generate in color. Clear the check box to have that type of View appear as a line drawing. A colored View can always be changed to a line drawing and vice versa by choosing Options> Color Off/Color On.
5 Default Color Display has check
7 Framing Back Clip defines the back
122
3D Preferences
be used to create spherical panoramic backdrops. A spherical backdrop is created by placing the selected backdrop onto a sphere that surrounds your scene. The horizontal and vertical angles control how far around the sphere that the backdrop is stretched.
8 Backdrop - Render View Options can
background image. This opens the Library Browser window to the Backdrops directory. Choose the desired backdrop. backdrop to a solid color. The color used is defined on the Render tab of this dialog for Render Views or in the Color Panel for 3D Views. Views the backdrop is displayed.
10 Click Select Backdrop to choose a
11 Click Remove Backdrop to change the
9 A preview of the selected backdrop

displays.
12 Select the check boxes to define in what Include Tab
5 1 On the Include tab, checked objects are
calculated for the 3D view. Unchecked objects will not have any surfaces calculated. The fewer the surfaces, the faster the 3D view generates. All subsequent Views are affected. If an object is checked on the Include tab, its display can be turned on and off in the Display Options dialog from within each individual 3D view. If Display Options is used to turn off the display of a 3D object, the surfaces are still calculated but they are not displayed.
control the display of scroll bars for each type of 3D view. Clear the check box to suppress the scroll bar along the right side and along the bottom of the appropriate 3D view. This yields more viewing area when using smaller display windows. When the scroll bars are suppressed, use the keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan the display, hold the Ctrl key and drag the cursor across the window. Scroll bars do not appear in Render Views.
2 Scroll Bars has check boxes that
123
3D Preferences
to display only framing in 3D views. This automatically eliminates other objects. Foundations and soffits are also calculated when Display only Framing is selected. To suppress the soffits, choose Tools> Display Options from the 3D view, uncheck Soffits to remove them from the display.
3 Display only Framing - Check this box
rebuild the terrain to reflect recent changes before generating 3D views. If this option is unchecked, you will instead be prompted about whether or not to rebuild the terrain. box to have the program retain the 3D model in memory when you are making changes to the model. This can speed up the generation of additional 3D views of the model. This may slow down the speed of working in 2D.
5 Check this option to automatically
6 Auto Remove 3D - Clear this check
4 Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings Select the check box to have the program rebuild floors and ceilings just before a 3D view or elevation is displayed.
Render Tab
2 3 4
to set the background color for a Render View that does not use a backdrop.
1 Background Color - Click on this box 2 Interior Ambient controls the overall
light when you are outside the model and the Sunlight Toggle is on.
3 Daytime Ambient controls the overall 4 Nighttime Ambient controls the
light when a Render View is inside the model.
overall light when you are outside the model and the Sunlight Toggle is off.
124
Chapter 5:
Layers
Chapter Overview
Layers are used to organize and manage the 2D display of objects in drawing and layout files. In addition to displaying only desired information, layers can also be used to manage linetype, color, and lineweight. The concept of layers is similar to a stack of transparencies, with specific information stored on each sheet. Once the desired information is displayed, it can then be printed. In a Plan View, Cross Section/Elevation, or Wall Elevation click the Display Options button to open the Layer Display Options dialog. In a Layout file, select a layout window and click the Display Options button to open the Layer Display Options dialog for the active window.
Chapter Contents
Layer Display Options Dialog Displaying Objects CAD Layers Layer Sets Importing Layer Sets
125
Layers
Layer Display Options Dialog

1
2 4 3 5 6
There are many layers in the Architectural tab that are grouped with like items. These cannot be deleted or reordered in any way. They do not have numbers. Items in the Architectural tab are created by the program. These layers control the 2D representation and display of objects modeled in the program. You can doubleclick on a layer to rename it, but it is recommended that you use the same layer names on all plans. System layers are listed in ascending numerical order and are also grouped with like items. The System tab contains CAD items which are also created by the program. Items can be placed on these layers, and the layers can be renamed, but we recommend that you do not rename them. As Chief Architect continues to evolve, it is the layers within the System tab that will become
The Layer Display Options dialog controls the display of objects in the different views. In Plan View, click the Display Options button to display the Layer Display Options dialog shown above.
.
Note: objects that are not displayed in Plan View will be calculated when a 3D view is generated, but they will not appear in the 3D view unless turned on from within that view.
Layer Tabs
is organized into three tabs: Architectural, System, and User. Each tab consists of a table that displays the avaiable layers and their properties. The number of layers in each tab is fixed. New layers cannot be added and existing layers cannot be deleted.
1 The Layer Display Options dialog
126
occupied in the future. Items on the System tab which are in conflict with future versions of Chief will be overridden. The User layer table is empty, and may be organized to suit individual needs.
columns can be redefined in the Properties box. When a layer is selected, its display properties are shown and can be edited in this area. Single or multiple layers can be edited simultaneously. CAD items can have their properties set individually in their specification dialogs. Name: Some layers are already named, others are left blank and can be named and used as desired. Although CAD layers can be named, it is their numbers that the program uses to define them. When setting a current CAD layer, or defining on what layer an object is stored, the number must be specified, not the name. Layer: This is the layer number. CAD layers are organized by numbers, although they can be given names to describe their contents.
Layer Tables
appear in a table. Use the scroll bar to view them all.
2 When a layer tab is selected, its layers
You can quickly toggle the Displayed, Reference and Locked attributes of any layer by clicking under the corresponding attributes column directly in the layer table. Layers are selected by clicking on them in the table. Hold down the shift key or control key to select multiple layers. Double-click on a layers name to rename it. Press Select All to select all layers in the table. Press Select All and remove the check from the Display check box to turn off all layers in the table. Single or shared layer attributes can be manipulated with the controls in the Properties box (see 3 below). Single or multiple items may be placed on one layer on the System and User tabs. A red cross appears to the left of every layer which contains at least one item.
Display: Check to have all items on this layer display in all Views. Ref: Lock: Check to display all items on this layer with the Reference Floor. Check to prevent accidental changes. Items on locked layers display, but they cannot be selected, deleted, moved, or modified. Define the color for the layer. Define the line style for the layer. Define the line width in pixels.
Color: Style: Size:
Layer Properties
In the layer table there are eight columns displaying information for each layer. The contents of the last six
Layer Sets 4 Layer Sets are used to define and save

commonly used layer settings. Layer
127
Layers
Sets may be selected, added or deleted. For more information, see Layer Sets on page 129.
name and number of the Current CAD Layer displays in the status bar of the Chief Architect window in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD Layers on page 129. current layer. It is active when a System or User layer in the layer table is selected. Click Set to make the selected layer the current CAD layer.
Current CAD Layer 5 You can specify the Current CAD layer from the Layer Display Options dialog. Enter a value in the field between 0-199. When you click OK this layer becomes the current CAD layer. The
6 The Set button is another way to set the
Displaying Objects
When the Reference Floor is visible the layers Normal walls, Railings/No locate and Windows are set to display in the Layer Display Options dialog by default. If you would like to see more information in the Reference Floor, open the Layer Display Options dialog and specify which layers to display from the reference floor. Layer settings affect all floors related to the current floor. When a layer is defined to display in Reference Floor, it displays with the Color defined for the Reference Floor in the Preferences dialog.
whether or not this layer displays in the current view. This does not affect display of the Reference Floor.
1 A check in the Disp column affects
Reference Floor
that the layer displays with the Reference Floor. Click the "R" or remove the check in the Properties box when the desired layer is selected to not display that layer in the Reference Floor.
2 An "R" in the Ref. column indicates
128
CAD Layers
CAD Layers
When in CAD mode, items drawn are placed on the Current CAD Layer, unless a System layer has already been assigned by the program to that type of object. In Plan or Cross Section/Elevation View you can change the Current CAD Layer by toggling the Up or Down CAD layer arrows on the toolbar. also set the Current CAD Layer directly from the Layer Display Options dialog. When you open the Layer Display Options dialog, a red plus sign is shown in the icon to the left of every System or User layer which contains at least one CAD item. Each layer has several attributes which affect every item on that layer. These attributes only affect CAD items which have not had their color, line weight or line style modified individually.
To skip directly to a layer, click directly on the layer number and enter a new number in the Go to CAD Layer dialog box. You can
Layer Sets
Layer Sets can be used to define specific settings for layers in Plan, Section/Elevation and Wall Elevation Views. Each plan file can have an unlimited number of Layer Sets. Each plan always has one Layer Set called Default Set. The Default Set cannot be deleted. Layer Sets cannot be locked. If changes are made to settings in the Layer Display Options dialog while working in a defined Layer Set, that Layer Set will be redefined. You can add, delete and choose the active Layer Set from the Layer Display Options dialog. To make a different Layer Set active, choose the desired Layer Set from the drop down list. If you have not created any Layer Sets, the only available set will be the Default Set.
Creating a New Layer Set

New Layer Sets are made by copying an existing Layer Set. To add a new Layer Set: 1. 2. Open the Layer Display Options dialog. Select an existing Layer Set.
3. 4.
Click Duplicate. The program asks you to name the new Layer Set. Enter a name and click OK.
129
Layers
A new Layer Set will be created which is identical to the set which was duplicated. The new set can be customized in the layer table.
Deleting a Layer Set

To delete a Layer Set, Select the layer set and click the Delete button. The current Layer Set will be deleted. You cannot undo this operation.
before clicking OK. The layer name and display attributes will be applied to all other layer sets. For example, if you change the color and linestyle for layer 20 of the "Electrical Set", you can check this box if you would also like to apply the same changes to layer 20 of the "Framing Set" of the same plan. This property is preserved between Chief Architect sessions.
Modify All Layer Sets

If you would like changes made in one Layer Set to be applied to all other layer sets in the current plan, check Modify All Layer Sets
Importing Layer Sets

Layer Sets can also be imported from other Chief files. This is a convenient alternative to re-creating a layer set that may already exist in another plan. To Import a Layer Set into the current plan, choose File> Import> Layer Sets. The Open Plan File dialog opens.
130
Open Plan File Dialog 1 2
4 5 1 The current directory displays here. 2 Use the navigational tools to move Import Layer Set Dialog
through the directories until you find the desired file.
3 Click on the File you want to import. 4 The name of the selected file displays
here. Click Open to import the selected Floor Plan. The Import Layer Sets dialog will open.
5 Files of type should be Floor Plan.
If any of the highlighted layer sets already exist in the current plan, you will be asked if you want to replace them or not. Click OK to make the set available.
131
Layers
Highlight the layer set you would like to import. Multiple sets may be selected while the Shift key is depressed.
132
Chapter 6:
Walls, Railings, & Fencing
Chapter Overview
Walls are the single most important building component in Chief Architect. By creating walls and defining the rooms or areas that are in between the walls, you are telling the program how you want the 3D model built. There are several ways that walls can be created in Chief Architect. The most common way is to create them manually by simply drawing them with the wall tools that are available. Most of this chapter covers the creation and modification of walls using these manual wall tools. Walls can also be generated automatically when a new floor is built by using the floor that is above or below the desired floor as a model. For more information, see Adding Floors on page 270. Walls can also be generated automatically by importing 2D CAD and converting the lines into actual Walls using the CAD to Walls tool. For more information, see CAD to Walls on page 160. Another tool that can be used to generate walls automatically is the Build House Wizard. This tool will allow you to define and arrange room spaces which the program will use to generate walls which separate them. For more information, see House Wizard on page 745.
Chapter Contents
Default Settings The Wall Tools The Curved Wall Tools Drawing Walls Drawing Curved Walls Displaying Walls, Railings, and Fences Selecting Walls, Railing, and Fences Deleting Walls, Railings, and Fences
133
Walls
Copying Walls, Railings, and Fences Moving Walls and Railings Resizing Walls Editing Walls Connecting Walls Aligning Walls CAD to Walls Wall Type Definitions
The Wall Type Definitions Dialog Importing Wall Definitions Exporting Wall Definitions Curved Walls and Roofs Special Walls The Wall Specification Dialog Wall/Railing Defaults Setup
Default Settings
Wall Defaults
The settings in the various wall defaults dialogs will determine what kind of a wall is drawn when the different wall tools are used. It is a good idea to be familiar with these settings and how they compare to your style of building. Select Edit>Default Settings>Wall Defaults>Wall to open the Wall Defaults dialog. You can also double click the Wall Tools parent button, the Exterior Wall button, or the Interior Wall button to open the Wall Defaults dialog.The Wall Defaults dialog will allow you to set which wall type will be drawn when using the Interior and Exterior wall tools. Select Edit>Default Settings>Foundation Defaults to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. You can also double click the Foundation Wall button to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. The Foundation Defaults dialog will allow you to set which wall type will be drawn when using the Foundation Wall tool as well as the size of the footings used and other default information used when building foundations. Select Edit>Default Settings>Wall Defaults>Pony Wall to open the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. You can also double click the Pony Wall button to open the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. The Pony Wall defaults dialog will allow you to set the wall type used for both the upper and lower portion of the pony wall as well as other data used when drawing pony walls. Select Build>Wall>Define Wall Types to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog. The Wall Type Definitions dialog will allow you to create and/or modify all wall types which can be created with the wall tools. You can also access the Wall Type Defintions dialog anywhere that you see a Define button next to a list of available wall types. For more information about Wall defaults, see Wall/Railing Defaults Setup on page 184. For more information about Foundation defaults, see Foundation Defaults on page 277. For more information about Pony Wall Defaults, see Pony Wall Defaults Dialog on page 185.
134
The Wall Tools
For more information about Wall Type Definitions, see Wall Type Definitions on page 162.
allow you to specify what type of railing is drawn using the Railing Tool. Select Edit>Default Settings>Wall Defaults>Fencing to open the Fencing Defaults dialog. You can also double click on the Fencing Tool to open the Fencing Defaults dialog. The Fencing defaults dialog will allow you to specify what type of Fencing is drawn using the Fencing Tool. For more information about Railing defaults, see Wall/Railing Defaults Setup on page 184. For more information about Fencing defaults, see Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 186.
Railing and Fencing Defaults

The settings in the Railing Defaults and Fencing Defaults dialogs will determine what kind of railing or fence is created when the rail or fence tools are used. Select Edit>Default Settings>Wall Defaults>Railing to open the Railing Defaults dialog. You can also double click on the Railing Tool to open the Railing Defaults dialog. The Railing Defaults dialog will
The Wall Tools

Click the Wall Tools parent button to display the Wall child tools. By default the Exterior Wall tool will be activated. Click anywhere on the screen in Plan View and drag to create a wall using the wall type specified for your exterior walls. All wall tools are also available in the Build> Wall menu. Whether the wall is an actual exterior or interior wall will be determined by the program based on the model and not by which tool is used to draw the wall. For more information, see Exterior and Interior Walls on page 137.
Foundation Walls
the Foundation Wall tool draws foundation walls according to the information specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog. Foundation walls normally have a footing and can be drawn on any floor of the model, not just the foundation floor. For more information, see Foundation Walls on page 137.
Exterior and Interior Walls

the Exterior Wall tool draws walls using the wall type specified for exterior walls. The exterior wall type is defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. the Interior Wall tool draws walls using the wall type specified for interior walls. The interior wall type is defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
135
Walls
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, or sometimes called a split wall, is defined as a wall with two separate wall types, one for the upper portion and another for the lower portion. The Pony Wall tool draws pony walls using the information specified in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. You can also convert a normal wall into a pony wall and vice versa from within the Wall Specification dialog. For more information, see Pony Walls on page 138.
For more information, see Deck Railings on page 141.
Fencing
The Fencing tool draws fences. Fencing is similar to railings but it is normally used outside of a building and will follow the shape of the terrain. By default fencing will not define room areas. For more information, see Fencing on page 141.
Hatch Wall
the Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch pattern to a wall that will display in Plan Views. You must click on the wall that you wish to apply the hatch pattern to. You can then select the hatch and resize it if you wish to only hatch a portion of a wall. For more, see Hatch Wall on page 142.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are walls used to define separate areas within a plan. They can display in Plan View, but they will not display in 3D views. Floors, ceilings and roofs will generate above and below the areas defined by these walls. For more information, see Invisible Walls on page 139.
Break Wall
the Break Wall tool applies a break in a wall. Once a wall is broken the 2 wall segments are separate walls that can be modifed independently of each other. For more, see Break Wall on page 143.
Railings
the Railing tool creates railings. The type and height of railings drawn with this tool are defined in Railing Defaults dialog, see Railing Defaults Dialog on page 185. For more information, see Railings on page 140.
Alter Default Wall

The Alter Default Wall tool is used to change the wall thickness used when drawing default walls. Each time this button is clicked the thickness will change to the next thickness until it gets to the highest one and then it will start over. Wall thicknesses available for default walls are 2", 4", 6", 8", and 12" or 50mm, 100mm, 150mm, 200mm, and 300mm. The wall
Deck Railings
The Deck Railing tool draws decks, complete with framing and bounded by a railing. If a foundation level exists, supports for the deck are also created.
136
The Curved Wall Tools
thickness can be set to any other value in the Wall Specification dialog.
The Curved Wall Tools

The Curved Wall Tools, the Curved Exterior Wall Interior Wall tool, the Curved tool, the Curved their corresponding Wall Tools child buttons. For more information see The Wall Tools on page 135. For information about drawing curved walls, see Drawing Curved Walls on page 146. For information on editing curved walls, see Editing Curved Walls on page 153.
Foundation Wall tool, the Curved Pony Wall tool, the Curved Railing tool, the Curved Deck Rail tool, and the Curved Fencing tool are all similar to
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls will be drawn using either the Exterior Wall tool or the Interior Wall tool. The only difference between these two tools is the wall type that is used to create the wall. You can specify the wall type you would normally use to draw exterior walls for the Exterior Wall tool and the wall type you would normally use for interior walls for the Interior Wall tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. To draw a wall using a different wall type, you can change the default type for either the Exterior Wall tool or the Interior Wall tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You can also draw a wall using the default type and then open it up for specification and change the wall type to the desired type. Whether the wall is an actual exterior or interior wall will be determined by the program based on the model and not by which tool is used to draw the wall. Any wall which is entirely surrounded by interior room areas will be considered an interior wall. Any wall which is exposed to the outside of the building will be considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are very similar to the interior and exterior walls but they also have a footing. Foundation Walls can either be created by the program automatically when a foundation floor is
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor of a plan and not just on the foundation floor. Any wall can be converted into a foundation
137
Walls
created or manually by drawing them using the Foundation Wall tool.
wall or vice versa by selecting it, opening it for specification, and checking the Specify Foundation option. The initial wall type and footing size used for foundation walls are specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog. These values can be changed at any time by opening up the Wall Specification dialog and modifying the settings. Normally the footing is centered around the wall but you
can also choose to center the footing about the main wall layer.
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, or sometimes called a split wall, is defined as a wall with two separate wall types, one for the upper portion and another for the lower portion. You can specify the height used for the lower wall portion to define how the pony wall is built. Pony walls can be drawn using the Pony Wall tool in the same method that the other walls are drawn. Pony Walls are created using the wall types and other information specified in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. System Default Wall Types are the only types of wall that cannot be specified as Pony Walls. You can convert a normal wall into a pony wall and vice versa by changing it in the Wall Specification dialog. You can also convert a normal wall into a pony wall in a Cross Section/Elevation View by clicking on the wall and opening if for specification. You can modify the height which is used to divide the upper and lower portion of the pony wall in a Cross Section/Elevation View. The upper and lower sections of the pony wall are linked. If either wall is modified along the division between the two sections, such as raking or the stepping of a footing, the other half of the pony wall will modify to match.
Creating a Pony Wall

To create a pony wall, double-click on the wall in Cross Section/Elevation View while in Select Objects mode. The Wall Height Specification dialog opens.
138
Invisible Walls
parts will match the wall type from which they were originally created.
Changing Wall Types for Pony Walls 1

Once a pony wall is created, both the upper and lower parts of the pony wall can be redefined as a different wall type. This is done in the Wall Specification dialog. 1. into a pony wall. Check the box. Click OK. (If the box does not have an option for pony wall, change the wall type from Plan View. Then try again.) When a pony wall is created, selecting the wall in cross section will show two separate sections of wall, one below the other. Both In Plan View, select the pony wall. Click the Open Object edit button to access the Wall Specification dialog. Click the Wall Type tab. The tab has two lists which allow you to specify a wall type for either part of the Pony wall.
1 You have the option to turn the wall
2. 3. 4.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or modify room definitions. For more information, see Room Definition on page 191. Invisible Walls are also used to define smaller areas within larger rooms. These smaller areas or rooms can have different floor or ceiling heights, allowing stepped areas to be created. Invisible walls are also used to divide the space in one large room into separate room areas. Common uses would be dividing the living and dining areas of a single room, or separating a kitchen from an adjoining nook. These examples are shown in the pictures below. They can display in Plan View, but they will not display in 3D views. Floors, ceilings and roofs will generate above and below the areas defined by these walls. An Invisible wall can be turned into a normal wall by selecting it, clicking the Open Object edit button, and clearing the Invisible check box on the General tab of the Wall Specification dialog. For more information, see General Tab on page 173.
139
Walls
Important Notes on Invisible Walls

Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calculated separately for rooms divided by normal or Invisible walls. Invisible walls do not have any affect on the Place Outlets tool. Cabinets, fixtures and furniture will freely move through an Invisible wall.
Invisible walls can be drawn through a cabinet to attach to the wall behind. Invisible walls do not produce a short wall section to cover the gap where the level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use an invisible railing for this. For more information, see Floor & Ceiling Heights on page 189.
Railings
Railings act just like walls in Plan View. Create and modify a railing just like you would a wall. Define the default type for new railings in the Railing Defaults dialog. Access this dialog by double-clicking on the Railing button. These settings will be used the next time you use the Railing or Curved Railing tool. For more information, see Railing Defaults Dialog on page 185. When first drawn, a railing has the No Locate attribute set. You may wish to set the No Room Def attribute for some railings if you do not want them to divide a room. Use a door to produce a break in a railing for a stairway or other access. This keeps the
140
Deck Railings
railing continuous to maintain room definition. A doorway in a railing appears in a 3D view as an opening, with newels or posts placed
on each side. Posts are evenly spaced between railing ends and breaks and can be specified at defined intervals.
Deck Railings
Deck Railing is used on the exterior of a house to create both framed and nonframed decks. Click and drag using the Deck Railing tool or the Curved Deck Railing tool to draw Deck Railing. Once you have established room definition, a deck is created within the area defined by the perimeter railing and its Room Type is set to Deck. For information, see Decks on page 192.
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect works much like railings. Create and modify a fence just as you would a railing or a wall. Railing are normally used to define decks or
141
Walls
to divide rooms within a structure when there is a difference in floor height. Fences, on the other hand, are normally used outside of a
structure to divide the terrain or detail an exterior. One of the main differences between fences and rails is that you have separate default settings for fencing so that you can use a style of fencing other than the style you would normally use for railings. Another difference is that fencing does not create room areas. Fencing will automatically follow the shape of the terrain. You can choose to have the fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to have each segment step as it follows the terrain. You can define the style of fence drawn by default in the the Fencing Defaults dialog. To open the Fencing Defaults dialog double click the Fencing tool or select Edit> Default Settings> Wall Defaults> Fencing from the menu. For more information, see Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 186.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool will fill any wall segment, except Invisible walls, with a tool single hatch pattern. The Hatch Wall superimposes the hatch pattern across all layers of the selected wall. It will cover up any hatch pattern that was previously specified for the given wall type. The spacing for the wall hatch can be adjusted by modifying the Wall Hatch Spacing value in the Plan Defaults dialog. This value is used for all wall hatch patterns including the patterns that are specified in a wall type. For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86. In general, it is preferable to use the wall type definition to control the display of a wall rather then to use the Hatch Wall tool. Wall hatching can be assigned to a particular layer of the wall type within the Wall Type Definitions dialog. This allows greater control of the pattern and you can use multiple hatch patterns in a single wall type if desired. For more information, see The Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 163. To apply a wall hatch, select the Hatch Wall tool, and click on the wall to be hatched. The default hatch pattern will cover the entire length of the selected wall segment. Select the hatch by clicking on it while in Hatch Wall mode. No other selection method will work with wall hatching. Delete the hatch pattern by selecting it in Hatch Wall mode, and clicking the Delete edit button or the Del key. Make sure you
142
Break Wall
have selected the hatch pattern and not the wall by noting that "Wall Hatching" is displayed in the status bar. This will delete the hatch pattern only and not the wall. You can resize the hatch area by selecting it and then dragging from an end handle. The hatch normally resizes about the center. To move only one end of a hatch pattern, hold down the control key before dragging the handle. When you have a hatch which does not cover a whole wall segment, you can move it by dragging the center handle. Another way of only applying a hatch pattern to a portion of a wall is to first use the Wall Break tool to separate the wall into two or more segments. When the Wall Hatch tool is applied to a broken wall it will only apply the hatch pattern to the selected segment.
Wall Hatch Dialog 1 2
The Wall Hatch dialog is used to modify the hatch pattern and color. To open the dialog, select the hatch while in Hatch Wall mode, then click the Open Object edit button.
check box to use layer color defined for wall hatching in the Layer Display Options dialog. pattern or the fill color when using a solid fill.
1 Select a hatch pattern from the list. 2 Plan default fill color - Select the
3 Fill Color - Select a color for the hatch
Note: Hatching and fills in walls are not written to DXF/DWG files. They are one of the few items displayed in a Plan View that cannot be exported in a DXF file.
Break Wall
A wall can be broken into two segments by selecting the Break Wall tool and clicking on the wall. This will place a break in the wall, creating two wall sections. The Break Wall tool can be used to create aligned walls across rooms.
143
Walls
Once in Break Wall mode, you can continue to place breaks into the same or other walls creating more sections. Pressing the Esc key or clicking the right mouse button terminates the Break Wall tool and returns you to the previous mode.
If a break is placed near the intersection of two walls, the break will move to the exact intersection. Once a break is placed, get out of Break Wall mode and check the break by selecting the original wall. If the handles stop near the break, the wall was correctly broken.
Drawing Walls
To draw a wall, click on one of the available wall buttons (Exterior Wall, Interior Wall, Foundation Wall, Pony Wall, etc.) to activate the tool. Click in Plan View, hold down the left mouse button and drag to draw a wall. Release the mouse button to end the wall. When you have let go the program will automatically build a wall of the specified type. You can continue drawing walls this way until you select another tool. Creating a floor plan with walls is simple if you keep a few things in mind. 1. Draw exterior walls first to define the buildings footprint. Next, you should draw the interior walls to finalize the layout. Once that is done you can add doors and windows and create the roof plan. Draw walls first and then place openings in them. Draw straight through a doorway, window or other opening. Put the opening in later. Walls should be drawn to create rooms, and then doors and windows are added to place openings in the walls. Do not draw short walls to represent wing walls on the sides of doors and windows. 3. Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction around the screen. Walls have an exterior side and an interior side. If you draw in the clockwise direction, the exterior side will face out. When you are drawing walls, think of it as a sketch. You can later enter dimensions and use other methods to accurately position your walls and define their lengths. When you are drawing a wall, the angle and the length of the wall will display in the status bar. Release the mouse button when the wall is close to the desired length. You can fine tune the floor plan later. When wall ends are placed close to each other, they will automatically attach to each other and the intersection is cleaned up. The lines you see in Plan View represent a three-dimensional wall. Generate a 3D view to see the results.
4.
5.
6.
2.
7.
Using Walls to Create Rooms

Shown below is a group of walls similar to what you could find in many floor plans.
144
Drawing Walls
Wall Specification dialog and adjusting
the wall angle. Select one of theWall tools. Click and drag the cursor to draw a wall. Note the red temporary wall showing the position and length of the wall. The length and the angle of the temporary wall display in the status bar at the bottom of the window. Drag the end of the temporary wall in a circular motion. In the status bar, note that the wall jumps at defined angle increments. Release the mouse button to draw the wall at the length and angle last displayed in the information window. The program will allow you to draw walls at any multiple of 15 or 7 1/2 degrees. If 7 1/2 degree allowed angles is selected, eight additional angles can be defined.
Two bedrooms are separated by a group of walls that contain three closets -- one for each bedroom and one for a linen closet facing into the hallway. Place doorways where marked.
Do not Break Walls and delete center sections when an opening like this is needed. Do not draw short stub walls from each side and try to line them up. It is better to draw a long wall and insert doorways and windows.
Wall Edit Preferences

Depending on the current settings on the Architectural panel of the Preferences dialog, one of two edit buttons will appear when a wall is selected. These edit buttons allow you to control how the edit handle at the end of a selected wall will behave by temporarily overriding the preference settings. For more information, see Architectural Panel on page 103. Click the Same Wall Type edit button to use the edit handle at either end of a selected wall to draw a new wall of the same type. Click the Adjust Wall Angle edit button to use the edit handle at either end of a selected wall to adjust the angle of that wall.
Build House Wizard

The Build House Wizard allows you to place and arrange room "objects" that can then be converted into a fully editable house plan. For more information, see House Wizard on page 745.
Allowed Wall Angles

Walls can only be drawn at the Allowed Wall Angles defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. You can modify the angle of a wall after it has been drawn by dragging the wall end to a new angle or by opening up the
145
Walls
Plan Defaults
Certain settings in the Plan Defaults dialog affect the way that walls draw. For
more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86.
Drawing Curved Walls

A curved wall is an arc or section of a circle. It is defined by a chord, a center, and a radius. To draw a curved wall, choose one of the curved wall tools available in the Build> Wall> Curved Walls menu or click the Curved Walls parent button and select one of the curved wall tools. Drag the curved wall from one end to the other, dragging along the desired curve. Do not worry about getting the correct curvature, as this is easily changed later. curved walls.) Its amount of curvature is also limited to these angles. For example, if you wish a horizontal wall (in Plan View) to smoothly curve into a vertical wall, you would begin by drawing a curved wall whose chord is at 45 (or maybe 135) degrees between them. Do not worry about the curvature of the wall.
Chord
The chord is the imaginary straight line between the two ends of an arc. When drawing a curved wall, the most important thing is to start and stop at the correct locations, since the angle of the curved wall's chord is harder to change later. If the chord angle is horizontal or vertical, it is pretty easy to drag the curved wall by eye. Otherwise, you may wish to watch the angle in the toolbar's status window or in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. When it is first drawn, the angle of the chord of a curved wall is limited to the allowed angles as set in the Plan Defaults dialog. (Choose 7 1/2 degree allowed angles for the most control and least jumpiness of the CAD line drawn at 45 degrees to show that the chord angle is the same. Then alter the curvature so that the curved wall is tangent to the two straight walls.
Center
A curved wall always has a center. The center displays as a small cross when you select the Show Arc Centers check box on the Line Properties panel of the Preferences dialog.
146
Displaying Walls, Railings, and Fences
Radius
The radius of a curved wall is measured from the center to one surface or layer of the wall. You may chose to display and define the radius on the General tab of the Wall Specification dialog. You may elect to define the radius to the exterior wall layer or the interior wall layer. If the layer definition does not make it obvious, temporarily change the color of the exterior edge so you can tell the inside edge from the outside edge.
Center is displayed. This center point acts like a CAD point in that a CAD object will snap to it.
Displaying Walls, Railings, and Fences

In Plan View
There are several options which can control how walls are displayed in plan views. In the Layer Display Options dialog, you can specify whether or not the walls will display. You have separate control over the display of various wall types such as Normal Walls, Railings, Invisible Walls, Attic Walls, Beams, No Locate Walls, Foundation Walls, Wall Footings, and Wall Hatching. In additon, you can also control the display of the wall layers specified in the wall type definition. If you turn off the display of Wall Layers then all wall types will only display the 2 lines that represent the inside and outside surface of the wall. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. Often it is desireable to display the walls from another floor so that they can be aligned. To do this, a reference floor can be selected and displayed. For more information, see Reference Display on page 273.
In 3D Views
There are several options which can control how walls are displayed in 3D views. You can control whether or not walls will display in a 3D view by changing the Walls checkbox in the 3D Display Options dialog. You can control whether or not any interior walls (as well as any other interior details) display in 3D views by changing the Interior checkbox on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. You can also control whether to display the wall framing instead of displaying the wall surfaces. For more information, see 3D Preferences on page 120.
147
Walls
Displaying Pony Walls in Plan View

Normally, the upper portion of a pony wall will display in Plan View. To show the lower pony wall in Plan View instead, open the Plan Defaults dialog. (Double-click the Select Objects button in Plan View, or choose Options> Defaults Setup> Plan Defaults.)
Select the Show Lower Ponywall check box to display the lower section of the pony wall in Plan View.
Note: A window or door that is completely contained by one part of a pony wall will not appear in Plan View if the other part of the pony wall is displayed.
Selecting Walls, Railing, and Fences

Click on the wall , railing, or fencing while any of the wall tools are active. You may also click on the wall, railing, or fencing in Select Objects mode, or right-click on the wall, railing, or fencing in any other mode when the Architectural tools are active. The selected wall will have five red handles, one at each end, one where selected, and one slightly away from each end. Drag from these handles to dynamically edit the wall. You cannot move multiple selected walls, but can open the Wall Specification dialog and edit them.
In Section/Elevation Views
Click on a wall in Select Objects mode within a Cross Section/Elevation View when the Architectural mode is active. The selected wall will display several red selection handles allowing you to modify the wall. Click the Open Object edit button, or another tool on the Edit toolbar to create a raked wall, a pony wall, or a stepped wall. For more information, see Creating Raked Walls on page 172.
Multiple Select In Plan View

Select the first wall using any method, then hold down the Shift key and click on each subsequent wall to add it to the selection set. To de-select a wall, click on it while holding down the Shift key.
Deleting Walls, Railings, and Fences

Select the wall, railing, or fence, then click the Delete edit button or the Del key on the keyboard. Another way to delete a wall or railing is to draw a wall or railing across the entire length of an existing wall or railing, from one end to another.
148
Copying Walls, Railings, and Fences
Copying Walls, Railings, and Fences

You cant use the standard cut, copy, and paste functions on any wall objects. The best way to make a copy of any walls is to use the Edit Area tools. For more information, see Edit Area Tools on page 750.
Moving Walls and Railings

extend wall offset extend wall offset
move
Click on a wall in Wall mode to select it. Five handles display. If you click too near the end of the wall, you cannot select it. It is best to select the walls between the two Wall Offset handles. You will see red handles appear when the wall is selected.
Curved Walls
If a curved wall is moved while it is attached to other walls, the chord expands or contracts and the radius is redefined to maintain contact with the adjacent walls. The ends of the straight walls lengthen or shorten, depending on how you move the curved wall. After the move, the curved wall still flows smoothly into the straight walls at either end.
In order to draw a room in the shape of a circle, you must draw two walls. Each wall must curve 180 degrees to complete the circle.
Straight Walls
The Move handle appears near where you clicked, between the two offset handles. You will know when you have found the move handle when the cursor changes to a fourheaded arrow Drag the Move handle perpendicular to the direction of the wall. Release the mouse button when the wall is near its proper location. As you move the wall, temporary dimensions will appear that update with the move. If a walls movement is obstructed by a cabinet object, holding down the Ctrl key while dragging will allow the wall to pass through the cabinet.
Consider moving the selected straight wall to the right in the first diagram. The curved wall lengthens along its chord as the radius, length and the position of the center point are adjusted.
149
Walls
the straight walls lengthen or shorten, depending on how you move the curved wall. After the move, the curved wall still flows smoothly into the straight walls at either end.
The curved wall moves and changes as if it were actually a straight wall stretched between its ends. Among the handles displaying is one centered on the chord between the two endpoints of the curved wall. This is equivalent to the move handle for a straight wall. Drag this handle to move the curved wall. For example, select the curved wall as shown.
Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a normal curved wall, the normal curved wall would extend or contract along its chord. For a normal curved wall, moving the straight wall to the right simply expands the curved wall, which remains a half circle.
Drag this handle
Drag the handle along its chord. As it moves, its chord expands or contracts to maintain contact with the walls it to which it connects, exactly as would a straight wall. The ends of
150
Moving Walls and Railings
Locked Center Combination

If you move a straight wall connected to a curved wall with a locked center, the curved wall will extend or contract along its arc to remain connected. The radius and the center will remain unchanged. The straight wall will break away once it has been moved beyond the tangent point of the arc.
Parallel to Chord Wall Combination

If you move a straight wall connected to a curved wall, with the straight wall parallel to the chord of the curved wall, both normal curved walls and lock center curved walls behave the same.
Move either straight wall, and the curved wall will extend along its curve, whether it is locked or not.
In the following illustration, the straight wall was moved far enough that it could no longer remain attached to the arc. The arc has been extended to show that, even when extended, it cannot reach the wall. This moving is not consistent with all the rules so far explained if the wall is a normal curved wall. In this case the wall's chord is parallel to the moved wall so there is no choice but for the moved wall to break away. In a situation like this, where a normal curved wall is connected to the moved wall, and the moved wall's only choice is to break away, the normal curved wall will temporarily act as if it is locked center. This occurs if the angle between the straight wall and the curved wall's chord is less than 22.5 degrees.
151
Walls
Moving Walls Using Dimensions

Moving a wall by editing Dimensions is the preferred way to precisely locate walls. Dimension lines perpendicular to a wall can be used to redefine its position. To change the length of a wall, you must relocate a wall adjacent to it. When using dimensions this way the floor plan is easily resized to exact dimensions. For more information, seeRelocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644. As you move a wall, dimension lines locating the wall change to give its current position. If there are no existing dimension lines, temporary dimensions appear when the wall is selected and remain there for the duration of the move. The dimensions which change when the wall is moved can be used to move the wall accurately. To move a wall using a dimension: 1. 2. Select the wall. Click on the center of the dimension line which you will use to move the wall. 3. 2. Click here.
1. Select this wall. The Set Dimension Line dialog appears. Type in a new value for the dimension. The dialog will assume you are entering inches unless you include the feet mark. Click OK. The wall will move according to the dimension, unless something interferes with the move. In the dialog above the wall will move 10-10, the difference between 17-2 and 28-0.
4. 5.
Resizing Walls
The two end handles, the Extend handles, can be used to extend the wall in the same direction, to rotate the wall at allowed angles, or to create a new wall of the same type. Select the wall and click on an Extend handle. The cursor will change to a twoheaded arrow . Drag the Extend handle in line with the wall to shorten or lengthen the selected wall. If the wall is shortened to less than the
Plan Defaults dialog, it will be deleted.
Unconnected Wall Min. Length set in the
You can also use the Extend handle to rotate the selected wall at allowed angles or to create a new wall of the same type. If you change your preference setting to Unrestricted Angles, you can rotate the wall at any angle. For more information, see CAD Panel on page 104. (You can also set
152
Editing Walls
the wall angle manually in the Wall Specification dialog.) Depending on the current settings on the Architectural panel of the Preferences dialog the Extend handle can also be used to draw a new wall of the same type. For more information, see Wall Edit Preferences on page 145.
To merge two colinear walls with the same wall layer definition, extend one of the walls to the other with these handles. If the walls do not merge automatically when the ends connect, move one wall very slightly and release it. The program will snap it into alignment and the walls will become one.
Editing Walls
Wall Heights
To change the height of a wall, you must specify a ceiling height in the Room Specification dialog. The program automatically adjusts the height of all walls surrounding the room. If you want to change the ceiling height for all rooms on the current floor, use the Options> Defaults Setup> Floor Defaults to make the change. All rooms on the floor will be updated unless their ceiling heights have been set individually. To change the ceiling height for a single room, the Room Specification dialog is used. Select any room in the plan, then click the Open Object edit button. The Room Specification dialog will open. The General tab is used to set the ceiling height for that individual room. The top or bottom edge of any wall may be adjusted in a Cross Section/Elevation View, independently of floor or ceiling heights. For more information, see Editing Walls in 3D on page 157.
Editing Curved Walls

Curved walls can have their centers either locked or unlocked. occur when selecting a wall and dragging from its curvature handle or from its center point handle as described below. A locked center wall seeks to maintain the same location for its center. It expands or contracts along its curvature. Otherwise its radius can change while its center remains locked in the same place. An exception to this occurs when selecting a wall and dragging from its center point handle, which
With Unlocked Centers

Unlocked center is the curved wall default type. It is also called a normal curved wall. It moves with its chord. When it, or walls adjacent to it, are moved, its chord expands or contracts just as a straight wall would. The angle of its chord and the subtended angle remain constant. Exceptions to this rule
153
Walls
is done specifically to move the walls center point. If you want the angle of the curved wall to remain tangent or consistent to the walls they meet, then you should leave the center unlocked. Most often you will use curved walls with unlocked centers and wait until the floor plan is complete to lock the centers.
other walls, it is a good idea to select curved walls and lock their centers.
Handles on Curved Walls

Select a normal curved wall to edit it. Seven red handles appear. Each of these has a specific purpose.
With Locked Centers

A curved wall that does not have a locked center moves expands and contracts along its chord, keeping the chord direction and its included angle constant. A locked center wall tries to expand and contract along its arc if possible. If this is not possible it at least tries to maintain its center in the same location, allowing the radius to change. To lock the center of a curved wall, select the wall and click the Lock Center button in the Edit toolbar. The curved wall remains selected, but its handles change according to its status. The locked status may also be changed in the General tab of the Wall Specification dialog. extend wall offset
1 center 2 move 3
curvature
4 extend 5
wall offset
handle to reposition the center of the arc. The radius and length of the arc will not change, but the location of the center and the angle of the chord will. The center handle is exactly at the curved wall's center and allows this center to be moved.
1 Center Handle - Drag the center
Locked vs. Unlocked Centers

The Lock Center button displays depressed for a lock center wall and up for a normal wall. You may click it to change the lock center status. In general curved walls without a locked center are easier to work with. They are easier to draw and edit while you are working on the floor plan. Once the floor plan is complete and the cuved walls are aligned and/or tangent to If the arc is connected to only one wall, the chord angle can only be adjusted to the point
154
Editing Curved Walls
that the arc is tangent to the attached wall. If the curved wall is attached to two walls, one end will become disconnected and the other will only move until it is tangent. If you tap the Ctrl key during the move, you can move the center without restrictions, even causing the moved wall to break away. There is one final thing that makes center moving of a curved wall so powerful. At the end of a center move, the wall's center may snap to a nearby point, CAD object, or other center cross point. The other center cross could be that for a curved stairway, a CAD arc or circle, another curved wall, or even a curved wall on another floor (if that floor is the reference floor.) handle between the wall's ends to move the wall's chord perpendicular to itself.
curvature handle to change radius and the length of the arc. The chord will retain its position, length, and direction.
3 Curvature Handle - Drag the
2 Move Handle - Drag from the move
The included angle is the angle created between the center point of the arc and its two endpoints. The included angle of the arc, as measured in degrees, will jump at increments set in the Plan Defaults dialog. If you select 7 1/2 degree allowed angles in the Plan Defaults dialog the length of the wall in degrees jumps at intervals of 15 degrees, since the angle between the center point and each end adjusts by 7 1/2 degrees. end handles to extend or contract the curved wall along its curve.
4 Extend Handle - Drag from one of the
155
Walls
This works just as if you were moving an imaginary straight wall that spans between the curved wall's ends. The adjacent walls will move to keep the walls connected. Except for location, the properties of the curved wall do not change.
An offset curved wall (or straight wall offset because of a connection to a curved wall) will snap back to being not offset if you edit it by dragging from any handle other than its offset handles. Make offsetting the last thing you do when you edit a wall.
Resize Handles
When a curved wall has a locked center, the only handle that is different is the Resize handle. The Move and Curvature handles do not display. The Extend handles reposition the ends of the chord, but restrict the movement along the radius of the arc. Neither the location of the wall's center nor its radius will change. wall offset handles increases the radius and length of the arc while keeping the center in place.
center extend wall offset extend
5 Wall Offset Handles - Dragging the
wall offset resize
The radius will increase in 1/32 inch increments to allow you to align the curved wall with walls of differing assemblies. It will not snap back to its former position when the move is complete.
handle in the middle of the arc to move the curved wall in or out about its center. The center location remains fixed while the wall's radius changes. If an end of the wall connects to another wall, that end expands or contracts and slides along the other wall to stay connected. Unless you tap the Ctrl key, you cannot move the wall beyond where it becomes tangent to a connected wall. This makes it easy for a curved wall to become tangent to a straight wall, while its center is not moved. Tap the Ctrl key and you can move it further, causing the moved wall to break away.
1 Resize Handle - Drag from the resize
156
Editing Walls in 3D
Editing Walls in 3D
Walls can be edited in the Cross Section/ Elevation View. Raked walls, stepped walls, pony walls, and other shaped walls can be created and edited only in this View. Cross Section/Elevation button in Plan View, and drag a cross section line from in front of that wall, right through it.
Where to use the 3D Wall Editor

The 3D wall editor is best at stepping the bottoms of foundation walls, changing or raking the tops of topmost walls (these may be attic walls), or managing the boundary between the top and bottom portions of a pony wall. Editing the top of a wall which has another wall above it, or the bottom of a wall having another wall below it, can be difficult because it is hard to edit the adjoining wall and line two walls up. This is often more trouble than it is worth.
Selecting the Wall

In Cross Section/Elevation View, click the Select Objects button and the select the wall near one of the edges. The resulting handles and dimensions which appear vary depending on which edge was selected. If the top or bottom edge was selected, a handle displays at the midpoint of the selected edge in addition to handles at all corners. If a side is selected, only the handles at the corners display. The handles are similar to that of a CAD polyline except that vertical edges have no midpoint handle and there are no movement or rotation handles.
Setting up the Cross Section View for Wall Editing

When you edit walls in the Cross Section/ Elevation View it is important to Back Clip the view. This will isolate the wall that you want to edit. Before generating the view, toggle the Back Clip button, or select the Back Clip Cross Sections check box on the Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Options Tab on page 121. A cross section which is not back clipped will generate everything from the camera through the building. Such a view can make it difficult to select the proper wall for editing. To edit a specific wall, click the
Adjusting the Top and Bottom

To adjust the top of a wall, select near the top of the wall in the Cross Section/Elevation View. Grab the center handle along the top of the wall, and drag up or down. To adjust the bottom of a wall, select the wall near the bottom. Grab the center handle along the bottom of the wall, and drag up or down. You can also use dimension lines to move the top or bottom of walls. Select either the top or bottom of the wall, click on the dimension value to open the Set Dimension Line dialog. Type in the new dimension value, and click OK. The wall will adjust.
157
Walls
Elevation View and click the Open Object edit button. The Wall Height Specification dialog opens.
1 2
Before using a dimension, be sure that it locates the proper objects.
Wall Height Specification

You can use the Wall Height Specification dialog to restore the default height of the top edge or bottom edge of a wall that has been edited in 3D. To open the dialog, select the wall in Cross Section/
box to restore wall top to default height and shape. check box to restore wall bottom to default height and shape.
1 Default Top Height - Select the check 2 Default Bottom Height - Select the
Connecting Walls
Curved Walls
The Connect Walls button works just like it does for straight walls. It extends the ends of the selected and another wall that are already very close (within about a wall's width) so that they meet. The only difference is that a normal curved wall will extend to the meeting point along its chord while the locked center wall will extend along its arc. If the lock center status prevents a curved wall from extending to a meeting point, a warning message will suggest changing the locked center status. Then try Connect walls again.
Automatic
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing wall and the program joins them together. The new wall will move, extend, or contract slightly to meet the existing wall. Walls join at the intersection of their main layers. Walls will automatically join when their centers are within five inches of each other. If one wall must move sideways to align with another, the most recently drawn wall will move. Existing walls do not move.
158
Aligning Walls
Fix Connections
Sometimes one or more walls do not properly connect in the plan. The Fix Connections menu item (Build> Walls> Fix Connections) will go through the plan and clean up all connections that it can. Select Build> Walls> Fix Connections to see if your intersections clean up. If you have only one connection to clean up it may be faster to use the Connect Walls Edit toolbar. button, from the
them. If the separation is too great, extend one towards the other and try again.
Repairing Broken Walls

When the end of a wall is placed near the end of another wall of the same type and in the same direction, the two walls appear to combine into a single wall. When selected however, it may appear to consist of more than one section, divided by breaks. A broken wall can be combined by selecting one of the walls, moving it away, and then back again. The broken pieces will snap together. When the wall is released, the break will mend as long as the two wall sections are identical in width and type. Once unified, the opening should move freely along the wall. If the walls do not mend, check the Wall Specification dialog for each and determine how they differ. When the walls have the same characteristics they will mend.
Connect Walls
You can use the Connect Walls button to clean up an intersection of two walls. To do this, select either wall and the Connect Walls button will display on the Edit toolbar. Click the Connect Walls button. If the unconnected wall ends are sufficiently close the program will connect
Aligning Walls
The Wall Offset handles are used for fine adjustment of walls. When you move a wall with these handles, the program does not snap the wall to adjacent walls or objects. Wall Offset handles can be used to adjust walls which are in-line, but are different wall types of different thickness. When you draw two walls with different thicknesses, the program aligns the walls to their centers. There will be a step on both sides where they meet.
If you need to override this feature, you can use the Wall Offset handles to specify which sides or layers of the walls are aligned. Drag from either of the two Wall Offset handles to offset the wall in 1/32 increments. When you move the wall with these handles the program does not snap the walls to a different location.
159
Walls
In the picture below, one of the walls has been offset so that the step is only on one side, and a third wall meets the other two on this side and hides this step.
Aligning Curved Walls Between Floors

Curved walls are aligned between floors using the same technique to align straight walls. If the centers and the radii of the walls are within a few inches of each other, the Align with Floor Above/Below check boxes appear on the General tab of the Wall Specification dialog for the selected wall. Check this box and the selected curved wall will take on the radius of the referenced wall as it moves into alignment with it.
In the illustration below, a siding wall and a brick wall are aligned by their interior surfaces. Normally, the centers of both walls would line up. To line up the studs, select one of the walls and drag from the offset handle. You may have to select and drag several times in order to move the wall sufficiently.
With Straight Walls

The Make Arc Tangent edit button displays if both ends of the selected curved wall are connected other walls, and if the angle each end makes with its connected wall is less than about 45 degrees. Click this to move and resize the wall so that both of its ends are tangent to its connected walls. The radius is usually changed by this, and if the wall was locked center its status automatically changes to normal. Once it is tangent, you may select it and drag its move handle until it is in the appropriate position.
If you move the wall using the center handle, the offset is lost and will need to be reestablished.
CAD to Walls
This feature allows CAD lines to be converted to Chief Architect objects. This is helpful when importing drawings into Plan View. Two or more parallel CAD lines can be converted to both straight or curved walls (or rails). CAD lines representing windows and doors can also be converted. All lines that you wish to convert to walls must be located on one layer. The same is true for windows, doors, and rails. It may be helpful to place like items on a single layer with unique layer attributes. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126. If you are importing the CAD lines from another system, do not check "Boxes" or "Polylines" in the Import Drawing Wizard. For more information, see Select
160
CAD to Walls
File on page 773. The Import Drawing Wizard is the best place to arrange the layers of the incoming lines for easiest CAD to Wall conversion. Once CAD objects are located properly Choose CAD> CAD to Walls. The CAD to Walls dialog displays.
reach the width of the wall type. Typically only two wall types are used in a plan and an interior and exterior wall type are specified. The conversion works better if lines representing windows and doors are on different layers. It should still be satisfactory if they are on the same layer. In either case, the arc indicating door swing helps in properly detecting a door. This swing arc should be on the door layer. When the proper source layers display, click OK to complete the conversion. Converted items can be found within the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog.
Allowed Angles
If the lines you want to convert came from an external plan file, it is likely that you will need to add more walls and/or generate dimensions from them. CAD lines which have been converted to walls may not be at allowed angles, keeping new walls from being made at the same angle and preventing the generation of automatic dimensions. For more information on Allowed Angles, see Plan Defaults on page 86. In order to add new walls at the same angle the plan must either be rotated so that its walls are at allowed angles, or new entries must be added to the allowed angle table in the Plan Defaults dialog. Either of these solutions can be accomplished with the Place at Allowed Angles dialog. If more than one percent of the straight walls selected with Edit Area or Edit Area All Floors marquee are not at an allowed angle, the Allowed Angles edit button will appear. Click this button to display the Place at Allowed Angles dialog.
1 Specify the source layer to be converted

to walls, windows, doors, or rails. layer containing the lines to be converted, click Select to view the Layer Display Options dialog. Highlight a layer in the Layer Display Options dialog to place it at step 1 when closed.
2 If you do not know the number of the
3 Specify wall types for the new walls.
One, two, or neither can be specified.
If you want to convert to a specific wall type, the lines must be within one inch (25mm) of that wall types width. If two wall types are specified, new walls are converted to the one having the closest width. The new wall expands or contracts about its centerline to
161
Walls
Place at Allowed Angles Dialog
(weighted by length) of the selected walls are in each category. table. This allows all new walls to be placed at the (new) allowed angles. Walls already at allowed angles will remain so. OK is the same as clicking Cancel.
2 Add new entries to the allowed angles
3 Do nothing. Checking this and clicking

of off angle walls move to an allowed angle. This may place this largest group at allowed angles, but has two disadvantages. First, other groups of off angle walls will remain off angle. Second, any walls that were at an allowed angle before will move off angle. The dialog will show how much
1 Rotate the plan so that the largest group
Often you will select one to rotate the majority of the walls to one of the normal allowed angles. Then use Edit Area to select everything again and select two to provide new angle entries to cover the remaining walls.
Wall Type Definitions

Once you are familiar with drawing and moving walls, you can begin to utilize the other information that is contained within the wall. When you draw a wall, the 2D representation is defined entirely by the Wall Type Definition. You can view, create, and modify wall types by opening up the Wall Type Definitions dialog. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Build>Wall>Define Wall Types or by selecting the Define button anywhere a list of wall types is displayed. The Wall Type Definition also defines material information that can be calculated for take-offs in the Material List or viewed in 3D and Render Views. The 3D component or height of the walls is defined by the Floor Defaults dialog and the Room Specification dialog. Before discussing the 3D aspects of walls it is important to understand the Wall Type Definition. There are two categories of walls in the program: System Default Walls and User Specified Walls.
System Default Walls

There are only two wall type definitions in the System Default wall set: Default (Wood frame 16" OC) and Default (Concrete). These two wall types behave differently from all other wall types. Default (Wood frame 16" OC) can be used for interior or exterior walls and railings. When you draw a Default (Wood frame 16" OC) it is placed on the Normal Walls layer on the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog.
162
The Wall Type Definitions Dialog
Default (Concrete) can only be used on the foundation plan. When you draw a Default (Concrete) wall in the Plan View it is placed on the Normal Walls layer. The 2D display of System Default walls is controlled by the settings in the Layer Display Options dialog. If you want these walls to appear differently in Plan View, or print differently, you must make changes to the Normal Walls layer on the Architectural tab. The program will assign materials and assume certain characteristics of these walls when the Material List is generated.
User Specified wall definitions are shipped with the program and can be customized. The 2D display qualities of User Specified walls are defined by the properties in the Wall Type Defintions dialog If the display of Normal Walls is turned off in the Layer Display Options dialog, all walls will be turned off in Plan View. If the display Normal Walls is on, and Wall Layers is turned off, User Specified walls appear just like System Default Walls, and will be represented by two lines at their exterior surfaces. User Specified walls can have up to ten layers defined, each representing a different material. All of these layers can be calculated by the Material List. Materials that are applied to the outer layers of the wall layer definition will also define how the wall displays in 3D and Render Views.
User Specified Walls

All other wall type definitions in the program are considered User Specified Walls. Some

The Wall Type Definitions dialog holds all of the information for wall type definitions in a plan file. It can be used to define new wall types and to redefine existing ones. Changing any of the information for a given wall definition will affect all walls within that plan using that wall type.
163
Walls
1 2
9 11
8 10
3 5 4 13 6 7
12
currently available wall type definitions. Select from the list to display the information for that wall type definition. The list always has at least one wall type, "Default" which cant be modified. You can change the name of a wall type by simply typing in the new name at the top of the list. To create a new wall type definition use either the New or Copy button. specify the main layer for the selected wall type. The main layer should be the layer that you want to dimension to. It is usually the structural component. The Main Layer is drawn longer than the other layers in the wall diagram if you have multiple wall layers defined.
1 The drop-down list contains all
Note: The Framing dialog uses the thickness of the Main Layer to size the studs if a framing manterial such as Fir Stud 16" OC, Fir Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16" OC, or Metal Stud 24" OC is assigned.
2 Main Layer - Select a radio button to
the wall. The wall layers will be listed in order from top to bottom. The exterior layer (or reference layer for interior walls) is always layer 1. floor or ceiling platform is built it will go to this layer. Only one layer can be specified as the layer that is used for platforms. By default, the main layer is normally checked. When you select this box for any other layer, it will be turned off for the previous layer it was turned on for.
3 Define the Thickness for each layer in
4 Build platform to this layer - When a
164
- Check this box to have insulation details generated in Cross Section views when the Autodetail tool is used. For more information, see Auto-Detailing on page 599. your wall type definition. If you change the total thickness, the program will automatically change the thickness of the Main Layer to account for the difference. the wall type definition. You will create a layer directly above the active layer. The arrow to the right of the wall assembly diagram points to the active layer. To insert a layer at the bottom you can click near the outside edge of the last layer until the arrow to the left of the diagram points to the last line. Delete - Removes the layer that is currently active. The arrow to the right of the wall assembly diagram points to the active layer. Weight, Color and Line Style for each line in the wall type definition. Click on the line to edit in the diagram. The arrow to the left of the diagram points to the active line. Any changes made in the dialog will immediately display in the diagram, illustrating how the wall will appear in Plan View. type definition. A new wall type will be created with a name such as "New Wall ##" and only one wall layer. You should specify a more descriptive name and all of the other information to define the wall how
5 Show as insulation in elevation
you desire. Simply type over the newly created name to specify your own name. wall type definition which is a copy of the currently selected wall type. This will name the new wall "Copy of ..." using the currently selected wall for the rest of the name. You can then rename the wall and modify the wall layer information however you like. Simply type over the newly created name to specify your own name. information regarding materials that will be calculated in the Material List, as well as any fill patterns that you may want to use in 2D. Click either of the two boxes and the Select Material dialog opens. Specify a Material for the active layer in the wall layer definition. If a material is applied to a surface layer, that material will display in 3D and Render Views. active layer. Select a Fill Color for the pattern.
10 Copy - Select Copy to create a new
6 Total - Displays the total thickness of
7 Click the Insert button to add layers to
11 Material - This area displays
12 Fill Style - Select a hatch pattern for the
8 Line - In this area you can define the
This Fill pattern is overridden if you use the Hatch button to fill your walls in the Plan View. assembly diagram will point to the active layer. To activate a layer, click on the layer in the diagram, or click in the thickness field assigned to it.
13 The arrow to the right of the wall
9 New - Select New to create a new wall
Only one layer in a wall type definition is defined as the Main Layer. Use the radio button to select the main layer. This is the
165
Walls
The Main Layer
structural layer, normally the framing layer. The Main Layer is used for many things: 1. Floor and ceiling platforms, as well as automatically built foundation walls, are normally built to the outer edge of the main layer. This behavior can be modified by specifying a different layer to build your platforms to. Exterior walls on different floors are aligned by the outer edges of their main layers. Roof baselines are placed at the outer edge of the main layer by the automatic roof generator. Roof base lines and gable/roof lines which are manually drawn will snap to the edge of this layer. Dimension lines can locate the outer wall surfaces, main layer surfaces, or wall centers (for interior walls).
Note: All of this information is reliant on the main layer, so creating your wall type definitions accurately and defining the Main layer is very important.
iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat

There are two .dat files in the Chief Architect directory named iwalllay.dat (Imperial units) and mwalllay.dat (Metric units). These files are .dat files that contain the default Chief Architect wall type definitions. If you open a .PL1 file which contains fewer than six wall types, the information from iwalllay.dat or mwalllay.dat is automatically imported. This will add new wall types to your plan file. If you do not want this information added to your plan files, rename or delete these files from your computer. They can always be restored from your installation CD.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Importing Wall Definitions

1
2 3
To import wall type definitions into the current plan, choose File> Import> Wall Definitions. The Import Wall Definitions File dialog will open.
166
Exporting Wall Definitions
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

wall definitions files.
2 Choose the desired .dat file. 3 The name appears here. Click Open.
When wall type definitions are imported, the names of the wall type definitions in the Import file are compared with those already in your plan. Files of the same name will not be imported.
Wall definitions can be made available for future use by following the same instructions and importing them into your default template plan. For more information, seeCreating Your Own Template Plan on page 72.
Your imported wall type definition is now available in your current plan and is visible in any list of wall types which appear throughout the program. For more information, see Wall Defaults Dialog on page 112.
Exporting Wall Definitions

1 2
3 4 5
Wall type definitions may be exported from one plan file into another Chief Architect plan file. This is a convenient alternative to re-creating a wall types that may already exist in another plan. The wall type definitions that will export from your current plan are listed in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. For more information, see Wall/Railing Defaults Setup on page 184. The File> Export> Wall Definitions option exports all wall type definitions in one .dat file. This .dat file can then be read into another Chief Architect plan file. To Export a Wall Type Definition, choose File> Export> Wall Defintions. The Export Wall Defintions File dialog opens.
1 The current directory displays here.
167
Walls
be saved to by using the navigational tools.
2 Specify where you would like the file to 3

All data files with a .dat extension located in this directory will be
displayed. You may see other .dat files in this directory that are not wall definitions.
4 Give the file a name. 5 Save as type should be *.dat. Be sure

list.
the file name is described as a wall type
Curved Walls and Roofs

Roof Over a Curved Wall
The Automatic Roof Generator will place a roof over a curved wall at increments you specify. The Build Roof dialog allows you to specify the degree increments for the roof over the curved wall. Any whole number from 7 degrees up to 90 degrees may be specified. The lower the number, the more roof sections will be created over the curved wall. Following are a couple of illustrations showing a roof created at two different curved increments, 30 degrees and 15 degrees.
Concave Curved Walls & Resulting Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof planes that follow them. If the concave area is too small, however, simpler roof planes are produced. To follow the curved wall, the section baselines must be longer than the Min. Alcove value in the Build Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the roof generator simplifies the roof by either:
168
Special Walls
1.
Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls on either side extended to their meeting point and the roof was produced accordingly.
2.
Spanning the concave curved wall with a straight baseline and produce a roof plane for it from that.
Special Walls
Creating Stepped Walls & Footings
A practical application for pony walls is a stepped foundation. The lower part of the pony wall is the concrete wall and footing, and the upper part of the pony wall is the stud framed wall going between the footing and the first floor platform. In the illustration, the lower pony wall is a single layer concrete wall and the upper part of the pony wall was faced with brick for contrast. The Break Wall tool makes it easy to create stepped walls and stepped footings. 1. 2. To add a step to a wall, select the wall in Cross Section/Elevation View. Double-click the Break Wall tool, then click on the top or bottom edge of the wall to place the break. In addition to the corner handles, two handles appear along the broken edge. Select one of these two handles, and drag up or down. A square step will be created.
3. 4. 5.
If you single-click the Break Wall tool, it only adds one break which adds an edge to the wall. You cannot break the vertical outside edges.
169
Walls
By default, any stepped foundation wall will have an "S" symbol displayed in Plan View where the step is located. You can control the display of the "S". For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86.
1.
Draw railings to enclose a room on the upper floor. Toggle on the Reference Floor to make sure the railings do not interfere with the area for the staircase below. The walls can be any combination of Invisible walls, railings and regular walls.
Creating Decks
An exterior deck is produced by enclosing an exterior area with railings just as you would draw a room. Open the "room" by doubleclicking in it in Select Objects mode to access its Room Specification dialog. In the dialog, name it Deck. For more information, see Decks on page 192. 2. 3. 4.
Select the room and click the Open Object edit button. In the Room Specification dialog, select Open Below as the room name. Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings. The room will have no floor, so you will be able to view the stairs from above. In the lower floor plan, drag a stairway upward until it stops. The staircase will stop when it reaches the upper floors stairwell railing or wall. Make a doorway in the wall or railing where the staircase meets the floor above.
Creating Interior Stairwells

Stairwells can be created automatically by first selecting the staircase, then clicking the Form Stairwell edit button. For more information, see Creating a Stairwell on page 316. To manually produce an interior stairwell that contains a staircase, you must create a room on the upper floor.
5.
6.
Resize the doorway to match the stair width, then move it toward the wall until its edge is at the wall. This will prevent any railing or post from displaying on the wall side of the doorway.
170
Special Walls
Creating a Nook
The picture shows how a kitchen nook can be extended out from the rest of the house using the Break Wall tool.
2.
Click on the wall that will separate the Kitchen and Nook area. You will see a short line across the wall indicating a break. Now do the same where the Nook and Family room meet. You do not need to be exact. You can make adjustments to it later when you dimension the walls. Select the middle section of the wall with the right mouse button. This both terminates Break Wall mode and selects the wall for moving. Move the cursor to the middle handle and drag the wall outward. Draw side walls to connect the wall back to the rest of the house.
3.
4.
5. 6. To perform this exercise: 1. Draw a room or Kitchen and select the Break Wall tool from the toolbar.
171
Walls
Finally, you can move these short walls to more accurately size the nook.
Creating Raked Walls

Raked walls can be created from any wall selected in the Cross Section/Elevation View. To create a simple raked wall: 1. Select the wall in Cross Section/Elevation View. Grab one of the corner handles, and drag that handle either up or down. To rake a wall at a specific angle, draw a line at that angle using the CAD tools. Align the edges of the raked wall to the line by selecting the raked edge, clicking on the Make Parallel button and then clicking on the CAD line.
walls have three angles across the top of the wall. To create a compound raked wall, breaks must be added to either the top or the bottom edges. Then each section of the wall can be adjusted separately. You cannot add a break to the vertical edges of a wall in Cross Section/Elevation View. To add a single break, select the wall in Cross Section/Elevation View, click the Break Wall tool, then click on either the top edge or the bottom edge. The new break point will now have a handle. Grab the new handle at the break, and drag it to angle the wall. To move a break freely without any restrictions, select the wall away from the break point to be adjusted. If you select too close to the break, you may be restricted in one direction or the other.
2. 3.
Creating Compound Angled Walls

The illustration to the right shows two walls meeting in a V. Both
The Wall Specification Dialog

The Wall Specification dialog specifies characteristics of selected walls only. To open the Wall Specification dialog, select a wall or group of walls and click the Open Object edit button.
172
General Tab
1
3
4 2 6
5
The options on this tab appear when they apply to the selected wall(s). The dialog will not display all of the options at once.
connected wall to become disconnected will usually not be allowed. wall angle is displayed, select the Num Style button. check boxes to modify the selected wall(s) accordingly. In most cases, multiple options may be selected. Select Invisible to specify the wall as invisible. Invisible walls can be displayed in a Plan View but not 3D views. Invisible walls are used to divide rooms that are not separated by a wall or railing, such as a nook from a kitchen. Select No Room Definition to display the wall in Plan View but not define or divide a room.
1 Thickness can be specified when the selected wall is one of the System Default wall types. 2 Select the Foundation check box to specify the selected wall(s) as a foundation wall. More settings for foundation walls are available on the Foundation tab.
the selected wall(s) as railing(s). Specify the railing on the Railing tab.
4 Num Style - To change the way the
6 Options - Select any of the following
3 Select the Railing check box to specify 3 Wall Angle - The current absolute
angle of the wall in a plan view is displayed. You can type in a new angle which will modify the wall by rotating about its center. Any angle which would cause a
173
Walls
Select No Locate to prevent Automatic dimension lines from locating a wall. No Locate walls can be used for any wall that you do not want dimensioned. Railings default to having the No Locate attribute set. Select Invisible Beam to have the wall display as two lines in Plan View. This does not create a beam when framing is built and does not appear in 3D views. Select Attic Wall to extend the wall up to the roof after it is moved or lengthened. Attic walls are normally built using the Build Roof dialog. All existing attic walls are deleted when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Ceilings . The Align with Lower floor or Align with Upper floor check boxes appear when the selected wall is very close, but not quite directly above or below a wall on the other floor. Check the option to precisely align the walls. If both options are available, you may choose one or the other, but not both. The wall you selected is moved until it lines up properly with the wall above or below. Sometimes the wall cannot be moved because of attachment to another wall. In this case the system then attempts to offset the wall, as if it were selected and you dragged from the offset handle near, but not at its end. Curved walls are aligned in a similar way. To align two curved walls, the center of the selected wall is moved to coincide with the center of the other wall. The wall is then moved radially until the main layer surfaces and centers match as previously described.
Walls align to the outer surfaces of the main layer of exterior walls, and to the centers of interior walls. Select Flip layers to reverse wall layers. Select Lock Center to lock the center of a curved wall. Select Retain attic wall to prevent an existing attic wall from being deleted when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . This should be selected for walls that you have drawn. Select to Retain Wall Framing for this wall, as seen in the wall detail view or in 3D framing, when the wall framing is globally rebuilt. Select Stop at Platform to make sure a wall does not go through a floor platform. Normally the program will use the wall type definition to determine whether the wall stops or goes through the floor platform and this control allows you to override this on a wall-by-wall basis. Select Go Through Platform to make sure a wall goes through a floor platform. Normally the program will use the wall type definition to determine whether the wall stops or goes through the floor platformand this control allows you to override this on a wall-by-wall basis. determine what part of a wall retains its position when the wall type has been changed and the width of the wall layer definition has been altered. This is a global preference which is valid for all walls in all plans.
7 Resize About - These radio buttons
174
Check Outer Surface to resize a wall layer definition from the exterior surface in. The exterior surface does not move. Check Main Layer Surface to resize a wall layer definition from the exterior side of the main layer in. The outer main layer surface does not move Check Wall Center to resize a wall layer definition from the center. Check Main Layer Inside to resize a wall layer definition from the interior side of the main layer out. Check Inside Surface to resize a wall layer definition from the interior surface out.
Outer - Select this radio button to display or modify the radius from the center of the curved wall to the outer surface of the wall. Inner - Select this radio button to display or modify the radius from the center of the curved wall to the inner surface of the wall. Outer Main - Select this radio button to display or modify the radius from the center of the curved wall to the outside of the main layer of the wall. Inner Main - Select this radio button to display or modify the radius from the center of the curved wall to the inside of the main layer of the wall. Radius - Displays the radius of the curved wall according to one of the above radio buttons. You can modify this value to change the curvature of the wall.
Default Wall Heights
These check boxes only appear if you have moved the top or bottom of the wall in a Cross Section/Elevation View. Check Default Top Height to reset the top of a wall to match the ceiling height in the room. Check Default Bottom Height to reset the bottom of the wall to the floor height for the room.
Lock Center - Select this button so that when the radius is changed the wall center remains locked and the wall ends will change. Lock Ends - Select this button so that when the radius is changed the wall ends remain locked and the wall center will change.
Radius To
This section applies to curved walls only.
175
Walls
Roof Tab
1 3 5
2 4 6
7 9
10
Any automatically generated roof style other than a hip requires roof information to be defined in the wall itself. Select the Roof tab to define the portion of the roof plan that rests on the wall. For more information, see Automatic Roofs on page 332.
check in this box and the selected wall will be divided by any roof section that overlaps it. The wall section below the overlapping roof plane will be removed. check box will appear for a selected wall which has an attic wall above it. Check this box to frame the upper and lower portions of this wall together as one when automatic framing is built. define the pitch of the roof plane over this wall. create a roof plane with two pitches. Define the 2nd pitch.
5 Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Place a
Full Gable Wall - Select the check box to create a gable end over the wall. box to model the high end of a shed
6 Combine with Above Wall - This
2 High Shed/Gable- Select the check

roof. define a wall as a knee wall. Only an interior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A knee walls height is defined by the roof plane, not the ceiling height. check box to continue a roof down over a bumpout in an exterior wall.
3 Knee Wall - Select the check box to
7 Pitch - Enter a value to individually
8 Upper pitch - Select the check box to
4 Extend Slope Downward - Select the
176
floor at which the second pitch starts when Upper Pitch is selected.
9 Starts at defines the height above the
roof - Designate a wall to be split into a pony wall. The upper portion will be defined in the Layer Specification tab, and the lower portion specified here.
10 Lower Wall type if split by butting
Foundation Tab
1 2 3 5 4
box to turn the selected wall(s) into a foundation wall. This produces a footing below the wall in the Foundation plan. System Default Wall types.
1 Specify Foundation - Select the check
foundation wall layer definition does not appear to be a foundation wall type. These are strictly informative.
5 Two warnings may appear if the
2 Thickness - Define wall thickness for

the size of the footing below the selected foundation wall(s).
3 Footing Width and Height - Define 4 Center Footing on Main Layer -
Select the check box to center the footing on the main layer instead of the entire stem wall layer definition.
177
Walls
Wall Types Tab
contains all currently available wall types. Select the desired type from the list and a preview will display below. Use the Define button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to create or modify any existing wall types.
1 Wall Type - The drop-down list
here. The exterior side of the wall is at the top of the drawing and the interior side is at the bottom.
2 A preview of the wall type displays
178
For Pony Walls
1 2 3 4
When you select a Pony Wall or when you turn a normal wall into a pony wall, the Wall Specification dialog has some additional options.
part of the pony wall is being defined in the diagram below. define at which point the Upper and Lower wall layer definitions will align.
3 Select a radio button to specify which
1 Pony Wall - Check this box to make the wall a Pony Wall using a separate wall type for the upper and lower portions of the wall.
down menu contains all currently available wall types. Select the desired type from the list for the upper portion of the pony wall
4 Align pony wall - Select the option to
2 Wall Type for Upper Wall - The drop-
Note: Pony Walls can specify how the two wall type definitions align. If the thickness of the main layers of the two wall type definitions are the same, the program may align the exterior side when the interior side is specified. This is okay since both sides are aligned.
179
Walls
Wall Type for Lower Wall - The drop-down menu contains all currently available wall types. Select the desired type from the list for the lower portion of the pony wall.
No change - Select radio button to leave the alignment as it was when dialog was opened. This should be used when multiple walls with different wall layer definitions are selected.
Outer surface - Select radio button to align wall layer definitions by their outer surfaces. Outer main - Select radio button to align wall layer definitions by the exterior edge of their main layer. Central main - Select radio button to align the centers of the main layers of both wall layer definitions.
Inner main - Select radio button to align the wall layer definitions by the interior side of their main layers. Inner surface - Select radio button to align wall layer definitions by the walls interior surfaces.
Railing Tab
1 3
2 14 15 16 18
4 5 6 7 9 11 13 8 10 12
17 19
to specify the selected wall(s) as a railing. Railings can be drawn directly using the Railing tool.
1 Specify Railing - Select the check box
Railing Type
- Select to create balusters.
2 Balusters
Select to create a solid, wall style railing. The wall will be of the type defined by the current wall layer definition.
3 Solid 2
180
Select to create a railing with only a top rail. Rail Select to create a railing with a top and a middle rail. Select to eliminate rails, leaving only pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if selected). The following options may be used in combination with each other, and with any of the Railing Types. Select to use a solid panel.
4 Open -
5 Middle
6 No Rail -
- Select the check box to have the newel posts continue up to an overhead beam placed just under the ceiling height. This option is often used in combination with other options to place a cross beam along the top of the railing. Ceiling Select the check box to change the square newel posts to round pillars, and to make them extend to the ceiling. If an overhead beam is also desired, check Post to Overhead Beam. box to make the balusters the same material as the rails, instead of having them be defined separately. You have more flexibility if you define materials for each part on the Material tab. Select the check box to raise the shoe (bottom rail) about 3-1/2 (87 mm) off the platform.
9 Post to Beam
10 Post to
7 Panels -
- This option is selected by default.
8 Post to Rail
11 Exterior Materials - Select the check
12 Raise Shoe -
181
Walls
Select the check box to eliminate the shoe altogether. Balusters go right to the floor.
13 No Shoe -
to use a square halfpost where a railing intersect with a wall.
17 Square Halfpost - Select the check box 18 Step Terrain - Select the check box to
14 A preview of the railing displays here. 15 Check this box to display the preview
in color. prevent the program from inserting a half width post when a railing intersects a wall.
have the railing or fencing follow the terrain in steps between each newel. Only used when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a building on top of a defined terrain. to have the railing or fencing follow the terrain smoothly. Only used when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a building on top of a defined terrain.
19 Follow Terrain - Select the check box
16 No Halfpost - Select the check box to
Newels/Balusters Tab
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 Railing Height - Enter the Railing

Height. each baluster. For a library baluster, this is its width or diameter at its widest point.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width of
each newel. For a library newle this is its widht or diameter at its widest point.
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of
4 Newel Height - This is the hieght from

the ground to the top fo the newel. each newel should be offeset from the center of the railing. Use this when creating
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount
182
a fence with the newels to one side of the fence boards. railing type has been specified as "Panels". Select Solid, Framed, or Library to select a symbol to be used as a rail panel. Baluster Type - Only available when the railing type is not specified as "Panels". Select Square, Round, or Library Balusters. Selecting Library from this drop
6 Panel Type - Only available when the
down list is the same as clicking the Library button to the imediate right and will allow you to select a symbol from the library to be used as a baluster. Newel Type - Select Square, Round, or Library Newels. Selecting Library from this drop down list is the same as clicking the Library button to the imediate right and will allow you to select a symbol from the library to be used as a newel.
Hand Rail Tab

The Hand Rail tab is available only in the Full Version of Chief Architect.
1 3
2 4 5 6
profile being used. Typically this will say "Default Handrail" unless a custom handrail profile has been selected.
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail
custom handrail that has been specified and use the default handrail. molding profile. No preview will display for the "Default Handrail" option, which is rectangular.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a 4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected
2 Select - Click this button to open the Select Library Object dialog and specify a profile from the library to be used as a handrail.
183
Walls
Note: Handrails are displayed on their side, rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
6 Height - Height of the handrail Materials Tab
molding. Defaults to 2 inches (5 cm).
Width - Specify the width of the railing.
For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Wall/Railing Defaults Setup

Wall Defaults Dialog 1 3
1 Exterior Wall Type - Select the wall

type to use when drawing walls with the Exterior Wall tool. All currently available Wall Types are displayed in the list. To create or modify wall types, click the Define button.
the Interior Wall tool. All currently available Wall Types are displayed in the list. To create or modify wall types, click the Define button. radio button to change the currently displayed wall in the preview area.
3 Exterior Wall/Interior Wall - Select a
2 Interior Wall Type - Select the wall

type to use when drawing walls with
184
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog 1 2 3 4 5
Pony Wall Defaults Dialog

the default wall type to be used for the upper portion of a pony wall. You must specify a wall type that is not "Default". the default wall type to be used for the lower portion of a pony wall. You must specify a wall type that is not "Defualt". default height of the lower portion of the lower wall. alignment option to use when drawing pony walls. For more information about aligning pony walls, see For Pony Walls on page 179. part of the pony wall is being displayed in the diagram below.
Railing Defaults Dialog

Select Edit> Default Setup> Railing Defaults to open the Default Railing dialog (or double-click the Railing button). Here you can specify the layer definition of the railing system that is modeled when you select the Railing button. The tabs in this dialog are the same as their respective tabs in the Wall Specification dialog.
1 Wall Type for Upper Wall - Specify
2 Wall Type for Lower Wall - Specify
3 Height of Lower Wall - Specify the
Deck Railing Defaults Dialog

Select Edit> Default Setup> Deck Railing Defaults to open the Default Deck Railing dialog (or double-click the Deck Railing button). The tabs in this dialog are the same as their respective tabs in the Wall Specification dialog. For more information, see The Wall Specification Dialog on page 172.
4 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default
185
Walls
5 Select a radio button to specify which
Fencing Defaults Dialog

Select Edit> Default Setup> Fencing Defaults to open the Default Fencing
dialog (or double-click the Fencing button). For more information about the options in this dialog, see Railing Tab on page 180.
186
Chapter 7:
Chapter Overview
When walls or railings create an enclosed area, "room definition" has occurred. Once this has happened, rooms can be selected just like other objects in Chief Architect, and opened for specification. Every room should have its Room Type defined. With a chosen Room Type comes predefined characteristics. Defining a room as Porch, for example, attaches certain attributes which are different than if it were defined as Kitchen. When a room is opened for specification: The Room Type can be specified which will control the default behavior for the room and the room label which can appear in plan views. Ceiling and floor heights can be defined room-by-room or for the entire floor. Baseboard, chair-rail or crown molding can be applied room-by-room or for the entire floor. Materials for walls, ceilings, floors and moldings can be defined room-by-room or for the entire model based on Room Type.
Chapter Contents
Room Defaults Room Material Defaults Floor and Ceiling Materials Wall Materials Floor & Ceiling Heights Room Definition Decks Selecting a Room Room Specification Displaying Room Labels Special Ceilings Room Polylines Select Same and Load Same for Rooms Room Specification Dialog Floor Defaults Setup
187
Rooms
Rooms
Room Defaults
Room default values can be specified in the Foor Defaults dialog, which can be opened by selecting Edit>Default Settings>Floor Defaults. The Foor Defaults dialog specifies important information that the program uses to create 3D models. Only the defaults for the first floor of a building can be set ahead of time. The program uses the setting from the first floor to create subsequent floors. Once a subsequent floor is built its floor defaults can be changed by selecting. Other information such as molding and finishes can also be set in the Floor Defaults dialog. For more information, see Floor Defaults Setup on page 209.
Room Material Defaults

The default materials that are used for rooms are specified based on the type of room. There are 4 separate room types which can have their default materials specified: General Rooms Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms Decks Garages and Other Concrete Rooms. Settings> Material Defaults> Room Materials. Once a room area has been defined and its room type has been assigned, the room will use one of the 4 defaults for its materials. The default material can be changed at any time by opening the room for specification and changing its materials to any value other than Use Default. If a room type has not been assigned, the room will get its default materials from the General Rooms defaults.
The Room Material Defaults dialog can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Floor and Ceiling Materials

You can specify 4 separate floor materials as well as a subfloor material for the floor. These can be specified in the Room Material Defaults dialog or in the Room Specification dialog. You can specify 3 separate ceiling materials for a rooms ceiling. Normally, only the Floor Covering and the Ceiling Covering will display in 3D views. If the covering is specified as No Material, then the material below it will be displayed. If no floor or ceiling material has been assigned then the program will display the default material for the floor or ceiling. All floor and ceiling materials will be used for the calculation of the materials list. Individual rooms can be assigned unique ceiling materials only when the checkbox Use Above Floors Platform for Ceiling is
188
Wall Materials
Wall Materials
There are several ways that walls can have their materials assigned to them depending on how the rooms and walls have been defined. If a particular wall has been opened for specification and had its interior or exterior wall surface material assigned to any material other then Use Default, this material will display in all 3D views. Use this method to assign a particular material to a particular wall surface. When the walls material is assigned to Use Default, then the program will look at the room specification. If the rooms material has been assigned any material other then Use Default, then the room material will display. Use this method to assign a particular material to all walls in a particular room (as long as the walls have Use Default as their assigned material). When the rooms material is assigned to Use Default, then the program will look at the Wall Type definition. If the Wall Type has a specified material assigned to it, then this material will display. When neither the wall nor the room has a material assigned to it, the program will get the room material using the general material for walls material in the Material Defaults dialog.
Floor & Ceiling Heights

The Floor Defaults dialog defines the default floor and ceiling heights for each floor, including the foundation. Use the Floor Defaults dialog to change these values on a floor-by-floor basis. Use the Room Specification dialog to set these values on a room-by-room basis. This accomodates split levels, sunken living room, bi-levels, and dropped garages. These two dialogs allow ceilings to be raised or lowered by floor, or by room, allowing one room to have a higher ceiling than the rest of the floor. Adjacent rooms can have a cathedral ceiling, a coffered ceiling, or no ceiling at all. Floor heights are always based on absolute zero being the default subfloor height of the first floor. Individual rooms may have their own floor height. To raise or lower a room, that room must have room definition. A room is a totally enclosed area defined by any combination of joined walls or railings, visible or invisible. For more information, see Room Definition on page 191. Railings (visible or invisible) work well to create room definition for this purpose as they will put a railing where the two rooms meet and will fill in the vertical space between the two levels with a short wall. An invisible wall will not fill in the vertical space between the two levels.
189
Rooms
unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog, see Floor Defaults on page 269.
Following is a cross section of a simple, twostory building. Several important observations can be made from this diagram.
The above diagram shows callouts A through H.

A = Floor Height, first floor B = Ceiling Height, first floor C = Platform Thickness upper floor D = Floor Height, second floor E = Floor Thickness, first floor F = Stem Wall Height G = Foundation Floor Height, (Always a
G = (A) - (E) - (F) + slab thickness
(Foundation floor ht = first floor ht - platform thickness - stem wall height + slab thickness). The Ceiling Height specifies the distance from the finished floor to the top plate. It is defined relative to the subfloor height. Once the Ceiling Height has been set, the floor height will adjust the ceiling height to compensate. In this case, the top plate height does not change. Example: The default ceiling height for the second floor is 96" which is 204" above the first floor. 1. If you lower the second floor by 8", in the Room Specification dialog, the
negative number.)
H = Ceiling Height, foundation
The following formulas apply:

D = (A) + (B) + (C) (Upper floor ht. =
lower floor ht + lower ceiling ht + platform thickness).
190
Room Definition
2.
If you go back to the dialog and specify a 96" Ceiling Height, the floor height remains the same and the ceiling height is 96", which makes it 196" above the first floor.
Ceiling heights are linked to the floor above. If the floor above is stepped, the ceiling below is also stepped. The illustration above shows a perspective view of a first floor room. The floor above contains several rooms with different floor heights. Those stepped floor platforms affect the ceiling below. 1. 2. 3. If you lower the floor, the ceiling below that room drops. If you raise the floor, the ceiling below that area is raised. If you adjust a ceiling, the floor above is adjusted as well.
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by any combination of joined walls or railings, visible or invisible. A room must have an unbroken perimeter to work properly in Chief Architect. Unless otherwise specified, a room automatically generates a floor platform and ceiling platform. The program also specifies that rooms are covered by the roof. There are exceptions to this, such as a room defined as a deck. The room definition disappears if you delete one of the surrounding walls. It is a good idea to get your walls in place before you spend a lot of time defining rooms with names and attributes such as floor height, ceiling height, finishes, etc.
191
Rooms
Ceiling Height increases to 104" which is still 204" above the first floor.
If you have a situation like this, you can make a false lowered ceiling to cover any steps made by different floor platforms above. Do this by entering its height in the Lowered Ceiling box in the Room Specification dialog.
Decks
A deck is a room whose Room Type is set to Deck on the General Tab of the Room Specification dialog. To create a deck, click the Deck Railing child button and click and drag in Plan View. Once you have established room definition, a deck is automatically created within the area defined by the perimeter railing and its Room Type is set to Deck. To create a deck manually you can select a room that was created using the Railing tool, manually set its Room Type to Deck, and then press F12 on your keyboard to Rebuild Walls/ Floors/Ceilings . For more information, see Room Specification on page 194. A deck will default to having no roof. If you wish to have a roof over your deck, select the Roof over this room check box on the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. Select the Post to Overhead Beam option on the Railing tab to give the roof a visible means of support. For more information, see Railing Type on page 180. Decks can have stairways going down into the yard. To create a stairway leading down from the deck, select Build> Stairs from the menu or click the Stairs Plan View toolbar. button on the
The only time you should ever draw stairs from an upper level down is when you are going from a floor platform (such as a deck) to the ground or finished grade. Whenever stairs are drawn between two floor platforms, they should always be drawn from the lower platform to the upper platform.
Deck Framing
There are two ways deck rooms can be framed in Chief Architect, Standard deck framing or Advanced Deck Framing. When a deck room is selected, one of two edit buttons will appear, either the Build Advanced Deck Framing edit button or the Remove Advanced Deck Framing edit button. If your deck has not had Advanced Deck Framing built, click the Build Advanced Deck Framing edit button to generate the advanced deck framing details. If your deck has had Advanced Deck Framing built, click the Remove Advanced Deck Framing edit button to remove the advanced deck framing details. Standard deck framing is created at the same time floor framing is generated by using the Build Framing dialog. If you have a deck on your second floor you must go to the first floor tab and generate framing for the platform above to generate standard deck framing. For more information, see F,1-10 (Floor) Tabs on page 371. Normally, standard decks will display as solid platforms in all 3D views. Standard deck framing will only display in 3D views if
Place the cursor at the edge of the deck, hold the Shift key down, and drag in the direction of the stairs. Holding the Shift key produces a stairway that goes down from the current floor instead of up. Place a doorway in the railing at the top of the steps, and your deck and stairs are complete.
192
Selecting a Room
you create a Framing Overview or if you have turned on the display of Joists on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. You can change the materials that the deck displays in 3D views on the Materials Tab of the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568. You can create Advanced Deck Framing details which will also include posts, support beams, and deck planking using the Build Advanced Deck Framing edit button. If a foundation level exists, supports for the deck will be created also. You do not need to build any other framing using the Build Framing dialog to create and display the Advanced Deck Framing details. If you wish to remove the Advanced Deck Framing
Details, select the deck room and click the Remove Advanced Deck Framing edit button. Normally, the advanced framing deck details will appear in all 3D views. You can control the display of the advanced deck framing details by turning off/on the Deck Framing option on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123. You can also control the display of the deck planking in Plan View by modifying the Deck Planking layer (System Layer 31) in the Layer Display Options dialog. Each of the individual framing objects created by the Advanced Deck Framing tool can be selected and edited like CAD objects to create custom decks. For more information, see CAD on page 675.
Selecting a Room
Select left room.
Select right room.
Select exterior room.
Note: The highlighted line indicating your selection will actually appear on interior or exterior surface.
1. 2. 3.
Draw four connected walls to create a closed area defining a room. Divide the room in half with another wall. In Select Objects mode, click in the middle of one of the rooms. The interior wall surfaces for the room will highlight, defining the perimeter of that room.
4.
Select the other room in the same way. It should now be highlighted.
The exterior room (defined by the outside of the house) can be selected the same way. 5. Click outside one of the exterior walls. The highlight should go completely around the exterior of the structure. The right mouse button can also be used to select rooms.
193
Rooms
Double-click inside a room, but not on a cabinet, furniture object, etc., in Select Objects mode to access the Room
Specification dialog for that room. This is the same as selecting the room, and clicking
the Open Object
edit button.
Room Specification
Once a floor plan has been developed, each room should be opened for specification and the Room Type should be assigned.
Note: Rooms created with invisible railings for the purpose of changing the floor or ceiling heights within a larger room do not need to be defined.
bathrooms. Only one outlet over each sink is added for a bathroom. Windows placed between interior rooms will generate a warning message. If you get this message when placing a window on what you think is an exterior wall, check to see if your walls are properly connected. Interior doors do not show a threshold. Interior rooms have a ceiling and a roof above them unless specified otherwise. Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to the outside and do not generate a roof above them. The Place Outlets tool does not place outlets in an exterior type room. Any outlet manually placed in an exterior room automatically becomes a waterproof outlet designed for exterior use. Moldings are not automatically drawn in exterior rooms. A window placed in a wall between an exterior room and an interior room always faces out toward the exterior. Open Below is a unique type of interior room. It can be used for defining stairwell openings or other areas which have no floor. The Open Below Room Type prevents a floor from being created.
The Room Type indicates the type of room to the program and in turn, each type of room will inherit appropriate properties. Once a room type has been assigned a label with the room name will appear in the plan view. Once a room is labeled, the text of this label can be edited in Plan View, but the type of room is linked to the original name until its type is changed.
Room Types
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen, Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, Bedroom, Room Types, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, Dressing, Storage, Laundry, and Utility Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, Attic All Interior rooms are used in Living Area calculations, exterior rooms are not. The Place Outlets tool adds outlets automatically to all interior rooms except
194
Room Specification
The enclosed area of an Open Below Room Type is not included in the Living Area calculations. Baseboards and chair rails in an Open Below Room Type do not show, but crown moldings will. An Open Below Room Type is treated as an interior room for window and door placement. Garage, Slabs, and Porches are hybrid rooms. They are treated like exterior rooms in all cases except that they generate a ceiling and a roof above them. The Place Outlets tool places fewer outlets in hybrid rooms. A garage is specified with a different type of foundation than other rooms. Plan Check uses the room type and its characteristics for basic plan checking. For example, a closet does not need a smoke detector, but a bedroom does. For more information, see Plan Check on page 747.
Threshold Line
Foundations and Room Specification

Once a room is defined, the program makes assumptions about the foundation below. Exterior walls of rooms default to create the foundation type specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog. Walls that define the garage have a foundation under them defined by the Foundation Defaults dialog with a concrete slab at the top of stem wall or grade beam. The garage floor displays in 3D with the foundation floor, not the first floor. Defining a room as Slab causes the floor platform thickness to equal the Slab thickness value in the Foundation Defaults dialog. Courts, decks and balconies do not generate foundations.
Threshold Lines
A wall between exterior rooms and interior rooms can contain windows. Doors in exterior walls and doors that open to exterior type rooms (such as a garage, porch, deck, etc.) have a threshold line across the opening in Plan View. If there is a problem with the threshold line, make sure the rooms are labeled properly and that all walls are correctly joined. Once the problem is solved, force the doors to recalculate for thresholds
195
Rooms
The Place Outlets tool does not place outlets in an Open Below Room Type.
by selecting the door and simply clicking once on the middle handle.
Displaying Room Labels

Room Labels are created based on the Room Type that is assigned in the Room Specification dialog. Room Labels display on the Room Names layer of the Architectural tab. Room Labels may move about or even disappear when room entries are revalidated. You can move a Room Label around the Plan View without affecting the room specification. If you delete the room label, the room type remains within the Room Specification dialog. To retrieve the label, select and open the room, and select the Show Room Label check box in the Room Specification dialog.
Room Sizes
Any defined room can have its size displayed with the Room Label in one of three ways. Room standard area - Measured from the outside surface of exterior walls and the center of interior walls. It does not include area within bay, box and bow windows. This is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm. Room interior area - Measured from the inner surfaces of all the room's walls. This is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm. Room interior dimensions - Measured again from the inner surfaces of the room's walls. This does include the area within Bay, Box, or Bow windows if these windows reach the floor. This is rounded to the nearest inch or mm. You can define how you would like the program to calculate floor areas in the Floor Defaults dialog. The program can measure to the exterior main layer surface, or the exterior surface of the wall layer definition. Room area and dimensions are not standard text entries. They cannot be edited or changed, but their display can be controlled from the Layer Display Options dialog. Their color and line weight is determined by the Layer properties. They move, resize, and rotate with the Room Label.
Editing Room Labels

The Room Label is a standard text entry and can be changed, moved and resized like any other text entry. Its display can be switched off and its color changed independently of other text entries using the Layer Display Options dialog. If you change the text in the label, you can still see the room's original definition by displaying its Room Specification dialog. The Room Label can be edited as a text object and changed to say anything you like, but the program remembers the originally specified Room Type until you delete and select another from the Room Specification dialog. The program determines the type of the room from this selection, not from the text that the label contains. It is reasonable to change the Bedroom label to Guest Room, since they are basically the same type of room. It is not reasonable to define a closet as a Living Room and then edit its label to say Closet. The program will still consider it to be a living room because this is the Room Type and this can lead to confusion.
196
Displaying Room Labels
Layer Display Options Dialog Rooms Living Area

The Living Area label appears near the center at the bottom of the plan the first time you Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings with at least one room. This value is recalculated every time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . You can choose not to display this label by clearing the Show Living Area check box in the Plan Defaults dialog. The Living Area label can be moved or deleted. Once deleted, the only way to have it reappear is to run Plan Check (choose Tools> Plan check or press F9 ). You may click the Done button immediately, without actually completing Plan Check. not included. Neither is any room labeled open below. The Living Area should not be mistaken for the actual footprint of the house. Living Area is measured from the outside surface or main layer surface of exterior walls, and to the center of walls or railings separating the living area from a garage, slab or Open Below area. The living area is displayed for each separate building if half or more of that building's area is living area. For example, a living area label would not appear for a detached garage that contains a bathroom or small shop. To find the actual footprint of any given floor: 1. Click outside a plan, near an exterior wall. This should select the exterior "room" surrounding the plan. Click the Make Room Polyline edit button. This creates a polyline surround-
Living Area vs. Footprint

Only true livable areas are included in the Living Area calculation. Exterior rooms labeled as garage, court, deck, and porch are
2.
197
ing the plan from the walls exterior surface. 3. You can edit the polylines shape if you want to measure portions of a home.
4.
Select the Polyline and click the Open Object edit button, a Polyline Area is shown in the Polyline Specification dialog. If no area is shown, the polyline is not closed.
Special Ceilings
Lowered Ceiling Height
You can define a lowered ceiling height to model a dropped ceiling without affecting the structural ceiling height. The above illustration shows a room defined within a
room, using an Invisible wall. The default ceiling height for the entire floor is 120". The smaller room has the lowered ceiling height
198
Special Ceilings
Once the room was modeled a new material with a 24x24 tile pattern was created to
Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling can be created by the underside of the roof above or by ceiling planes drawn in Plan View. To create a cathedral ceiling: 1. 2. Draw the roof planes. When the roof is in place, individually select every room which is affected, and open the Room Specification dialog. On the Structure tab, clear the check box for Ceiling over this room. 4. 5. 3. When all the rooms have been changed, Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to remove the flat ceilings. Normally this is done automatically when a 3D view or elevation is displayed. If there is a roof present, it is seen in a perspective view. If you want a pitch that is different from the roof pitch, use Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane to create a sloped ceiling.
Coffered Ceilings
Hip roof, w/ cathedral
Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling height raised and ceilings rebuilt. Full Camera view.
Coffered ceiling from Plan View. Note dashed lines for changed ceiling direction.
A coffered ceiling is usually based on a hipstyle roof. If a hip roof is used, and the ceiling is removed, then the new ceiling (after Rebuilding Walls/Floors/Ceilings) follows the entire hip roof line. Sometimes
only the lower part of the ceiling is supposed to follow the roof line, and then the rest of the ceiling should be flat. In this case, the ceiling needs to remain checked for that room and the ceiling height adjusted instead.
199
Rooms
set at 96". The dashed line in the dialog preview represents the lowered ceiling.
represent the ceiling tiles. The material was applied to the ceiling for that individual room. The camera shows the dropped ceiling 24" below the structural ceiling.
The roofs must be built correctly before adjusting the ceiling height for the coffered ceiling. Any attempt to rebuild the roof after adjusting the ceiling height results in the roof itself being raised to match the new ceiling height. Assuming a hip roof based on 8 ceilings. If, after the roof is built, the ceiling is raised to 10, the new ceiling follows the roof for 2, then becomes a flat ceiling. Floors and ceilings must be rebuilt after raising the ceiling height, but the roof should not be rebuilt. The Plan View shows where the ceiling changes from sloped to flat with a dashed line. This line is displayed on the Beams/ Soffits layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. More complex and varied ceilings are made using ceiling planes. These behave like roof planes except that where the top of a roof plane is viewed from outside the house, the bottom of a ceiling plane is viewed from inside the house.
Polyline Solids, framing members, or locked roof trusses may also be used for this.
Split Levels
Split Levels are created by adjusting the floors and ceiling heights for the various areas of the plan. Rooms can be either raised or lowered. In the example at right, the lowest floor was at level zero, the next at 24, and the next at 48 inches. The ceiling height in each room was set to 96 inches. The overview and cross section are shown.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits can be used in various ways to enhance the 3D model. The ability to have soffits automatically angle to fit the slope of the roof, combined with the ability to replicate groups of soffits at specified intervals offers unlimited possibilities. The illustration shows only one of the many possibilities.
Example
A close look at the front entry of this splitentry home shows that part of the upper floor was lowered to provide the entry platform. Note that the siding on the second floor follows the dropped floor height.
200
Special Ceilings
A perspective camera view of the entry is also shown. The floor plan for the Entry has room definition information showing the floor and ceiling heights for each of the different levels.
201
Rooms
The stairwell is a room named Open Below. This causes no floor to generate in the area. The stairs drawn on the floor below display from above, after floors and ceilings are rebuilt.
The surrounding rooms are standard rooms, with the floor height and ceiling height set to the floor defaults. Note that all the values are followed by a (D), indicating that they match the floor default.
As you walk into the house, the floor level of the Entry is halfway between the two floors. The floor height is set to 54" (which is 54 1/4 lower than the rest of the rooms on this floor). The ceiling height has also been raised so that it is higher than the rest of this floor. If the ceiling remained defaulted it would stay at the same height, which would be at 96" (the floor default) plus 54 1/4 (the amount the floor was dropped) for a total of 150 1/4.
Room Polylines
Select any interior or exterior room in a plan view, the Make Room Polyline edit button will appear. Clicking this button will create a standard polyline which matches the shape of the room. This polyline works like any other CAD polyline and can be used for a variety of things such as creating floor areas using the slab tool. The Expand Room Polyline edit button will appear whenever a room has been selected which is contained within a larger room area that has been divided by
202
Room Polylines
invisible walls or railings. Clicking the Expand Room Polyline will enlarge the current room selection to include all rooms that are continuous and only separated by invisible walls or railings. An Expanded Room Polyline can not be used to open the larger room for specification but it can be used to generate a larger room polyline or to create a room molding polyline.
1 3 5
2 4
Room Molding Polylines

Room moldings, either when using a default molding profile or a custom molding profile, can be converted into a molding polyline which can then be edited. When a room molding is converted into a molding polyline it is removed from the Room Specification dialog and is no longer part of the room. Room Polylines will not be altered when the room is altered. Room Molding polylines can be edited just like other manually created molding polylines. Their shape or height can be altered and the molding profile can be changed. Additional molding profiles can also be assigned.
You can use a room molding polyline to remove a portion of an existing room molding or to wrap a molding around an object which the molding would not normally wrap around.
rooms base molding into a molding polyline. This option is only enabled if the room has a base molding. When the rooms base molding is converted to a molding polyline, the rooms base molding will be turned off. the rooms chair rail molding into a molding polyline. This option is only enabled if the room has a chair rail molding. Once you convert the rooms chair rail molding to a molding polyline, the rooms chair rail molding will be turned off.
1 Base Molding - Select to convert the
2 Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
For more about molding polylines, see Molding Polylines on page 485.
rooms crown molding into a molding polyline. This option is only enabled if the room has a crown molding. Once you convert the rooms crown molding to a molding polyline, the rooms crown molding will be turned off.
3 Crown Molding - Select to convert the
blank molding polyline at the specified height. The polyline will follow the room perimeter and will have blank sections where
4 Blank Molding - Select to generate a
203
Rooms
Make Room Molding Polyline Dialog
the polyline crosses windows and doors if these objects are at the polylines height.
5 Height - Specify the height of the blank

molding.
Select Same and Load Same for Rooms

You can use the Select Same Type tool to select all rooms that have attributes set the same as the original room. This can be useful to quickly see which rooms in a plan all have the same floor and/ or ceiling heights. Click the Select Same Type edit button to open the Select Similar Objects dialog. Select all attributes which you want to match by putting a checkbox in the appropriate box. Click OK to select all rooms in the current plan which have those attributes the same as the original room. All rooms that match the orignal will be displayed as highlighted. The only edit button available will be the Load Values to Make Same . The Load Values to Make Same edit button can be used to load the selected attributes into any rooms that do not currently have the same values. Since multiple select is not available for rooms, the Load Values to Make Same tool can be used to quickly modify multiple rooms. Simply click on the rooms that are not highlighted and they will have their attributes changed so that they will match. For more information, see Select Same / Load Same on page 749.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog covers general information about individual rooms. The most important values are the Room Type, Floor Height and Ceiling Height. Rooms can be modified individually or globally. Individual settings are defined in the Room Specification dialog, global settings are defined in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. Access the Room Specification dialog by selecting a room and clicking the Open Object edit button. A value followed by (D) is a default value taken from the Floor Defaults dialog. If one of these settings is changed for a given room, it remains individually set for that one room. To return a value to the Floor Default value, type a "d" in its place in the text box. For more information about Floor Defaults, see Floor Defaults Setup on page 209.
204
General Tab Rooms 2 3 5 7 9 10 4 6 8 11

box to show the room label, or name, in Plan View. elevation above or below the default first floor height of zero. height. This value is the Top plate height for the walls. The Ceiling height is relative to the selected rooms floor height.
The General tab shows a cross section of the room, displaying the various heights and platform thicknesses, including foundations, for the floors below the room you selected. (This room has a foundation below.) What you see in the cross section depends on the current floor, and on the location of the cursor when you selected the room. Only two floors at a time display in the Room Specification dialog. If one large room on the current floor is positioned over a couple of smaller rooms, the position of the cursor (which of the two lower rooms you were above) determines which of the lower rooms display for the floor below.
2 Show Room Label - Select the check 3 Floor Height - Specify the relative
4 Ceiling Height - Specify the ceiling
5 Lowered ceiling - Specify the height

for a lowered ceiling. is a foundation you can specify the distance from the bottom of the floor framing to the top of the footing.
6 Stem Wall Height - If the room below
1 Room Type - Select the type of the room. This determines some of the rooms characteristics.
7 Floor Above Height - Specify the
finish floor height for the floor above.
205
the floor below is shown. It may be defined here, or in the specification for that room. The values are linked.
8 Ceiling below - The ceiling height for
line displays the Platform thickness for the floor framing assembly. This includes the thickness of the subfloor and joists. The platform thickness can be changed in the Structure tab. If the material for the current rooms floor is Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the Foundation Defaults dialog, if it was not explicitly set in the Structure tab.
9 Platform Thickness - An information
the room. For each set of rooms with the same Roof Group number, a complete roof plan is built. This roof plan is not influenced by any other parts of the structure where the rooms are in different roof groups. This number is nearly always left zero. Change this number to break off a structure so that the program does not automatically combine its roof system with the main building. The arrows indicate what part of the structure will move if changes are made in the corresponding box.
10 Roof Group - Specify a roof group for
11 A diagram of the room is displayed.
Molding Tab
Moldings (crown, chair rail or baseboard) can be defined for the room. Moldings are placed around the wall surfaces of a room.
They continue around the surface of any soffit or object that is attached to the wall at the molding height. This allows a crown
206
Crown Molding, and the Distance Above Floor to the top of the molding.
1 Crown Molding - Define a Height for 2 Chair Rail - Define a Height for Chair 3 Base Molding - Specify a Height and
Specifying Custom Moldings

If you only define a Height for the molding the program places a default molding profile for you that displays in 3D. If you want to define a custom molding click the Select button and the Library Browser opens in the Molding Library. Select a molding in the Browser. Once it is selected, click OK and the molding is assigned to the trim that you selected. Click Clear to remove a selected molding profile from the room.
Rail Molding and the Distance Above Floor to the top of the molding.
the Distance Above Floor to the bottom of the molding. You can set the Height of any of these to zero to specify no molding at all. Any molding Height can be specified in sixteenth inch (1 mm) increments. If the numbers are followed by (D), it signifies that it is a default value set in the
Structure Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
207
Rooms
molding at the top of wall and full height cabinets.
Floor Defaults dialog. If the number is not followed by a (D), replace it with "d" to reset one of these values to the default.
the room will have a flat ceiling. If unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside of roof or ceiling planes. roof automatically generates over the room. If unchecked, no roof generates. this box to change this rooms floor platform into a concrete slab. When this is selected the platform will get its thickness from the Foundation Defaults dialog. After exiting this dialog, rebuild floors and ceilings, and then select Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs. The room is then provided with a slab that displays with the foundation plan.
Note: This item is available only if there is no existing room or foundation room (made from one or more foundation walls) under the selected room.
1 If Ceiling over this room is checked,
current floor ("subfloor for floor "x"). This, along with the Floor Structure Thickness determines the depth of the platform under this room. thickness (or depth) of the selected structure under this room. This together with Subfloor Thickness, determines the depth of the platform under the room. of floor structure. Check Default to use the structure type specified on the appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing dialog. Insulation (Cross Sections Only) - Check these boxes to generate insulation details in Cross Section views when the Autodetail tool is used. For more information, see AutoDetailing on page 599.
2 If Roof over this room is checked, a
6 Floor Structure Thickness -Set the
3 Slab foundation for this room - Check
7 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
foundation room from the floor below - Check this box to make the current room similar to an Open Below room, deleting its own floor platform. The floor of the room below, which is often a room on the foundation floor, then supplies the floor of the current room. While the same thing could be accomplished by naming the current room Open Below, this method allows the current room to retain its normal designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is often used in situations where framed walls are built above concrete curb walls, such as in garages. of the subfloor under this room. The default value for this is set in the Build Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the
4 Floor for this room is supplied by the
Insulation Above Ceiling - Check this box to have insulation details generated above the ceiling in Cross Section views when the Autodetail tool is used. Insulation Under Floor -Check this box to have insulation details generated under the floor in Cross Section views when the Autodetail tool is used.
Fill Style Tab

For more information, see Fill Style Tab on page 692.
Materials Tab
5 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
208
Floor Defaults Setup

General Tab
1 3
4 5 7 6
change an intermediate floor height the ceiling heights above and below change. of the stem wall for the foundation. This is the height from the top of the footing to the bottom of the floor framing, including any mudsill. is set in the Framing dialog, see Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371.
Select Edit> Defaults Setup> Floor Defaults to open the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. The settings in this dialog are dynamic. They immediately affect every room on the floor unless rooms are modified individually. selected floor. If you are on the first floor, you cannot change this setting. The default height for the first floor is always 0. Zero is the first floor datum reference for the rest of the building. On upper floors, changing the floor height changes the ceiling heights on the current floor as well as the floor below. floor height. Once you set the ceiling height, the relation is not locked. If you
3 Stem Wall Height - Define the height
1 Define the Floor Height for the
4 The Platform Thickness displays. This
2 Define Ceiling Height relative to the
Ceiling - Check this box to set the ceiling height at the bottom of the floor joists of the next floor. Leaving this box unchecked is one way to allow the ceilings to be assigned unique materials in individual rooms. This box is normally left unchecked.
5 Use Above Floors Platform for
209
Floor Defaults Setup
to use open ceilings on all newly defined rooms.
6 Default to no Ceiling - Check this box 7 Living Area To - Defines what wall
arrows show how the model is adjusted when the various settings are changed.
8 A cross section diagram displays. The
layer the floor area is calculated to. This option is only set on the first floor.
Molding Tab
1 3
2 4
5
Molding can be defined per floor or per room. Specifying the molding profile in the Floor Defaults dialog defines them on the entire floor. This can be overridden by a setting in the Room Specification dialog. If you do not define a custom profile but you define the Height of the molding, the program places a flat molding profile that appears in 3D. Library Browser to the Molding Library. Select a molding profile from the
1 Crown Molding, Chair Rail or Base
Library and click OK. A view of the molding profile displays in the dialog.
3 Select Clear to delete the selection for

the custom molding profile. molding. The width does not resize. To reset the moldings to the floor defaults, type a "d" in the box. A zero width defines no molding. measurement to the top of molding. (Baseboard measurement is to the bottom of the molding.)
4 Height - Define the height of the
2 Use the Select button to open the
5 Distance Above Floor - Define the
210
Chapter 8:
Doors
Doors
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of interior and exterior doors. In addition, the library offers a full line of specialty Doors and Doorways including manufacturerspecific products. If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can save your door designs to your own library for use in other plans. Once doors have been placed in the model, a door schedule can be automatically generated. For more information, see Creating Schedules on page 852.
Chapter Contents
Door Defaults The Door Tools Displaying Doors Selecting Doors Deleting Doors Copying Doors Moving Doors Changing Door Swings Resizing Doors Special Doors The Door Specification Dialog Door Default Settings
Door Defaults
There are door defaults for both interior and exterior doors. It is most efficient to go over these settings before doors are placed to make sure they agree with the building style. The settings for both types of doors are similar and should both be defined. The program will automatically place exterior doors in exterior walls, and interior doors in interior walls. For more information, see Door Default Settings on page 231.
211
The Door Tools

To place a door, select the desired door type from the Build> Doors menu or by clicking the Door Tools parent button and clicking one of its child tools. Some shortcut keys are also available, see Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17 for more information. Once a door tool has been activated click on a wall to place the door. If the wall is an exterior wall or a wall that separates an interior room and a garage, porch, balcony, court, or deck, the program will place an exterior door based on the default settings for exterior doors. If the wall is an interior wall, the program will place an interior door based on the default settings for interior doors. For more information, see Door Default Settings on page 231. Doors can also be placed in curved walls. For more information, see Curved Options on page 224. Once placed, any door may be changed into any other type of door using the Door Specification dialog. For more information, see The Door Specification Dialog on page 221. automatically turn into a double door when its width is four feet or greater.
Sliding Doors
Click the Sliding Door child button and click on a wall in Plan View where you would like to place a Sliding Door. Sliding doors can be placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed on an exterior wall, the dimensions will be 5-0 x 6-8 with a 12" bottom frame and a 6" frame on the sides and top. If placed on an interior wall, the dimensions will be a solid 5-0 x 6-8 with two movable panels. A sliding door must be at least four feet wide.
Pocket Doors
Click the Pocket Door child button and click on a wall in Plan View where you would like to place a Pocket Door. The default pocket door dimensions are 2-6 x 6-8 high. A pocket door will become a double pocket door if its width is four feet or greater.
Hinged Doors
Click the Door child button and click on a wall in Plan View where you would like to place a Hinged Door.This button can also be set to place doorways (without doors) into which library doors can later be placed. Hinged doors can be placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged door will
Bifold Doors
Click the Bifold Door child button and click on a wall in Plan View where you would like to place a Bifold Door. The default interior single bifold door is 26 x 6-8. A bifold door will become a double bifold door if its width is greater than three feet.
212
Displaying Doors
Bifold doors always display closed in any 3D view.
You can also select a custom door from the Library and drop it into a doorway in Plan View or any 3D view. To place a door from the Library within a view: 1. 2. 3. 4. Go to Plan View or any 3D view. Open the Library Browser . Navigate through the Doors library until you find the custom door style desired. Select the door in the Library Browser, then click on the doorway in your view. The selected door will replace the original if one has already been placed. Continue clicking on other doorways until all changes have been made. You do not need to close the Library Browser while you are working.
Garage Doors
Click the Garage Door child button and click on a wall in Plan View where you would like to place a Garage Door. The default garage door is 8-0 x 7-0 high. A garage door must be at least two feet wide Garage doors can only be placed in exterior walls. A dashed line in Plan View shows the space occupied by the garage door when open.
The Library
Click the Doorway Library child button to access a library of special entryways and doorways. Select the desired doorway in the Library Browser and click on a wall to place it. To add a door to the doorway, select it and click the Open Object edit button. The Door Specification dialog displays and will allow you to add a door to the doorway.
5.
Creating Your Own Doors

If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can use the Create Symbol Wizard to create doors / doorways and save them in your own library for use in future plans. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Displaying Doors
Once placed, doors are visible in all views.
Doors in exterior walls and doors that open to exterior type rooms have a threshold line across the opening in Plan View. If the threshold line is not functioning correctly, the rooms may not be properly specified. For more information, see Threshold Lines on page 195.
213
Doors
In Plan View
The display of doors, door sizes, and headers in Plan View can be controlled separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. If the door sizes layer is set to display they will appear centered on the door that they represent. The labels are sized according to the Font settings in the Preferences dialog and the options selected in the Schedule dialog. For more information, see Creating Schedules on page 852. The size displays in the format 3068, which is width by height in feet and inches. A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door dimensions format is 900x2100 where the first number is the width in mm.
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog. This dialog allows doors to be turned off in that view. The jamb and casing will remain if either Windows or Doors is checked. If both Windows and Doors are unchecked, the jamb and casings will be turned off, leaving only openings in the walls.
Note: this capability is separate from the ability to suppress Windows/Doors in the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123.
Selecting Doors
Before any door or group of doors can be altered the door(s) must first be selected. Once selected, three red handles will appear which can be used to change the swing, move, copy, delete, resize, or otherwise modify it. There are four ways to select doors. 1. Click on the door while any door tool is active and only doors and windows will be selected. Walls or other objects which might interfere with selection will be ignored. 2. Click on a door in Select Objects mode. If your plan is crowded, this method may not select the door. If a nearby object is selected first, click the Select Next Object edit button or Tab press the key until the door is selected.
214
Deleting Doors
3.
Right-click on the door while in any drawing mode. This is a quick way to select a door without changing modes. This method is similar to using the Select Objects mode. If a neighboring object is selected instead, click the
Select Next Object edit button or the Tab key until the desired door is selected. 4. Once a door is selected, you can select multiple doors by holding down the Shift key and clicking on doors.
Deleting Doors
Select a door or group of doors to be deleted. Once selected, press the Del key on the keyboard or click the Delete on the edit toolbar. edit button
Copying Doors
Single/Multiple Doors
One or more doors can be copied from one location to another, either within the same plan or across plans. If multiple doors are to be copied simultaneously, they must be copied from the same, unbroken wall to another unbroken wall. To copy a door(s), first select one or more doors. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste edit button. If you are copying the door(s) to the same floor of the same plan, click on the wall to place a copy. If you are copying the door(s) to a different floor of the same plan or to a different plan, go to the new floor or new plan and select Edit> Paste from the menu which will make the cursor resemble the picture on the Copy/ Paste edit button. Click on a wall to place a copy of the selected door(s).
Stacked/Blocked Doors
Stacked door combinations, such as those created with a door, a transom window, and a couple of side lights, may be copied as a group. Since there is a window above the door, both occupy the same location in Plan View, making it impossible to group select them in that view. Stacked windows and doors can also be copied by blocking them first, which is best done in a Cross Section/Elevation View, see Blocked Units on page 237. The blocked unit can then be copied in Plan View. To select and copy stacked windows and doors: 1. Create a Cross Section/Elevation View where the doors and windows are visible. Select the first door, then hold down the Shift key and click on each additional door or window.
2.
215
Doors
3.
When all have been selected, click the Copy/Paste edit button. If you wish to block the units, see Blocked Units on page 237. Change to the Plan View where the copy is to be placed, and select Edit> Paste from the menu. When the cursor resembles the copy cursor, click on a wall to place a copy of the entire group.
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste edit button before pasting. The multiple copy requires that the receiving plan be open and visible so that you can toggle to that plan simply by clicking on screen. If using multiple copy across plans, open both plans first and select Window> Tile to place them side-by-side on screen.
4.
5.
Moving Doors
A single opening, a single door, or a group of doors and openings can be moved by either dragging from the center handle or by editing the dimension value.
When the door you are dragging gets close to its destination, you can temporarily change the moving speed of the cursor for more control. To do this press a number key along the top of the keyboard while the left mouse button is depressed. The mouse will move n times more than the cursor, where n is the number pressed.
Dragging
The easiest way to move doors in Plan and 3D views is with the mouse. 1. 2. Select the door(s) you want to move. Place the cursor over the middle handle (the cursor will change to the Move cursor). 3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the door(s) along the wall. Notice that the dimensions change as you move the door. Release the left mouse button when the desired location is reached.
Using Dimensions
Any object(s) located by either a temporary dimension or a regular dimension can be moved using the dimension value itself. This is the best method to precisely position an object. For more information, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644.
4.
Move Restrictions
A door (or window) moved against an intersecting wall will automatically stop when it is the casing distance from the intersecting wall. This is appropriate and desirable in most situations.
216
Changing Door Swings
There are times when this restriction needs to be removed. The restriction may be removed by placing a check in the Ignore Casing for Opening Resize check box in the Plan Defaults dialog. For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86. Sometimes breaks in walls restrict the relocation of an opening along an apparently empty wall. It is not always obvious when a wall has been broken, especially when the walls are the same type and in perfect alignment. To check for this situation, select the wall. Two red handles will appear at each end. For more information, see Repairing Broken Walls on page 159.
Centering Doors
If an opening (door or window) is selected, the Center Object edit button will display in the Edit toolbar. To center an opening:
2. 3. 4.
Click the Center Object
edit button.
Click in the plan on the side of the wall where the opening is to be centered. If you want to center it to the room, click inside the room. If you want to center it to the exterior of the house, click outside the house.
You can center a group of openings in the same way. You can also center openings along straight or curved walls.
Changing Door Swings

Hinged Doors
To move the hinges to the opposite side of the doorway for a hinged door: 1. 2. Select the door. Grab the triangular handle. 4. Release the mouse.
To change a doorway into a hinged door: 1. Select the doorway and grab the red handle on the side where the doorknob should be. Drag perpendicular to the doorway in the direction of the desired door swing.
3.
Drag the cursor along the path of the new arc.
2.
217
Doors
1.
Select the opening.
Sliding Doors
To edit the fixed half of a sliding door in Plan View: 1. 2. 3. When the mouse button is released the door swing indicator will appear. 3. Select the door. Grab the end handle near the fixed side of the door. Drag the cursor perpendicular to the wall.
Hinged doors are created with a 90 degree swing in Plan View. After the hinged door is created, the angle of swing can be adjusted in Plan View. To adjust the angle of swing: 1. 2. 3. Select the door and grab the triangular handle. Drag to change the amount of swing. Release the mouse.
4.
Release the mouse.
Pocket Doors
To change the direction of a pocket door: 1. 2. 3. Select the door. Grab the red handle where the door slides inside the wall. Drag the handle perpendicular to the door.
If you drag near the closed position, the door will snap to a closed position.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the swing as it appears in Plan View will have no affect on the 3D view. For more information, see Options Tab on page 223.
218
Resizing Doors
4.
Release the mouse. The pocket door will change so that the pocket is on the opposite side of the door.
1. 2. 3.
Select the door. Grab the end handle. Drag in the direction that you would like the Bifold door to open.
Note: There must be enough room for the entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the door will not change.
4.
Release the mouse.
Bifold Doors
To change the hinged side of a bifold door:
Resizing Doors
In Plan View
There are two methods for resizing a door. The easiest method is to resize the door with the mouse in Plan View using the selection handles.
cursor
doors height can be adjusted in the same way in 3D views. For more information, see Editing in a 3D or Render View on page 590.
cursor
To change a doors width using the mouse select it, then grab either of the two outside handles and drag along the wall to resize it. To move one side only, hold down the Ctrl key and drag. Release the door at the desired width. If resized too small, the door will be deleted. A doors width can be adjusted using this method in both Plan View and 3D views. A
Doors can also be resized with the Door Specification dialog. For more information,
219
Doors
see The Door Specification Dialog on page 221.
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped openings of various shapes are available in the Doorway Library . You may also create a wrapped opening by placing a doorway in the wall and checking Suppress Casing in the Frame and Trim tab of the Door Specification dialog. Note that the base molding wraps around the opening.
Adding Transoms Above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created the same as other stacked windows. For more information, see Stacked Windows on page 236.
Adding a Gable Over Doors

When an exterior door is selected, the Gable Over Door/Window edit button displays. Click this to produce a gable roof over the door. When automatic roofs are subsequently built, a small gable roof will appear over the door. You can manually edit or delete this gable line at any time. Your changes will take effect when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This can also be used with group selected doors.
Openings in Railings
Use a doorway to open up a railing for a stairway or other access. To open up a railing across an entire section, redefine the opening size of the doorway (in the Door Specification dialog) to a width which is greater than the length of the railing. The program will resize the opening to the maximum width possible for that space. The illustration has two doorway openings placed into the rail. These openings are noted by arrows.
Custom Muntins
Like windows, doors with glass can have custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
220
The Door Specification Dialog
from CAD lines. For more information, see Custom Muntins on page 246.
Blocked Doors and Windows

Combinations of Doors and Windows can be blocked. Blocked units are mulled together
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked units containing doors can be treated as either windows or doors for material list and schedule generation. For more information, see Blocked Units on page 237.

The second, more precise method for editing an individual door (or group of doors) and their attributes is within the Door Specification dialog. Door type, size, casing information, materials, divided lites, shape, etc. can all be specified within this dialog. If a group of doors is selected, and the Door Specification dialog opened for all of them, the changes specified will be applied to all of the doors. If interior doors need to be different than the exterior doors, you must select and edit them as a separate group. To open the Door Specification dialog: 1. 2. Select a door or group of doors. When the selection set is complete, click the Open Object edit button to open the Door Specification dialog for the selected door(s).
221
Doors
General Tab
1 2 3 5 7 4 6 8 9
glass, panel or library. Specify use default if you would like to use the default door style set in the Door Defaults dialog. For more information, see Door Default Settings on page 231. Select Library from the list and the Door Library opens. This is the same as clicking the Library button. Once a library door has been selected, that door is added to the Door Style list.
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab,
panels to be placed on garage doors, default is four. This option is only available for garage doors. Width and Height for the rough opening. The default value is set in the Framing dialog, see Framing Defaults on page 365.
4 Specify the Height. 5 Specify the Thickness. 6 Vert Panels - Specify the number of
7 R.O. - Specify the amount added to the
2 Door Type - Define as doorway,
hinged, slider, pocket, bifold, or garage.
8 Check Show Color to show the door in

color in the dialog preview. display in the preview.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not allowed as exterior door defaults.
9 Specify which side of the door to
3 Specify the Width.
222
Options Tab
1 Doors 4 Recessed - Check this box to recess the

door to the main layer. A door placed in a brick, concrete block, or stone wall may be recessed into the exterior of the wall. If the wall is a single layer, and it is thicker than a typical stud wall, this box would normally be checked. It cannot be set in the defaults, but it can be set for individual doors.
2 3 4 5 6
the selected door to be a single door, regardless of its width.
1 Single Door - Check this box to force
Double Door - Check this box to force the door to be a double door, regardless of its width. Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default to Single Door when less than four feet (1200 mm) wide. If the width is greater than four feet, Double Door is the default. These options are grayed out for the default settings, but can be set individually in the model.
5 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
to recess the door to the sheathing layer.
2 Draw Closed - Displays the door

closed in 3D views.
Doors cannot be recessed in a single layer wall. If it can be recessed it will be apparent in both Plan and 3D views. By default the exterior of a doorframe is flush with the exterior main layer wall surface, or with the sheathing over that surface. The door, along with its casing, is considered to be recessed into any additional exterior wall layers. For a framed wall, the
3 You may choose to add an Interior 2 Plinth Block and/or an Exterior Plinth Block to the default door style. Plinth blocks do not display in 3D views, but are counted in the Material List.
223
door is then recessed through any brick or stone veneer to the framing layer or the sheathing that covers it.
Curved Options
If a door is placed in a curved wall, you will have some additional options on the Options tab of the Door Specification dialog. and jamb can be constructed three ways in curved walls: Straight - Both the door and casing are straight. This can be used where the walls curvature is not too sharp and the opening is not too wide. This type of door or window is by far the least expensive.
Radial - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight wall has its plane pass through the wall's center of curvature. Parallel - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight wall remains parallel to the line from the wall's center through the opening's center.
Radial
6 Casing - Door (and window) casing
Parallel
Straight
curved walls can be specified as Curved or Straight for any of the Casing options.
7 Door - Doors in
Radial with Curved Door
Frame & Trim Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6
224
Style of glass or panel on the General tab, you may specify the dimensions of the rail and stiles. Frame Width includes the stiles and top or middle rails. Frame Bottom specifies the bottom rail. radio buttons switch all the values below as well as the view of the door. They do not appear for the interior door specification, which uses the same values for both sides of the door. configuration of the casings with these values. The active side (interior or exterior) is indicated by the active radio button. The view of the door updates with the current side. The width defines any custom molding as well as flat casings if no custom profile is defined. You can specify default by entering "d" for the value, which sets it to the
1 Frame - If you have specified a Door
specified value in the Door Defaults dialog. Width defines the width of the side or vertical casings. Top Width defines the width of the top casing. (This is only available when using lintels). Reveal is the starting point of the casings from the edge of the operable door. sides and the top casing instead of a mitre joint.
2 Specify Interior or Exterior. These
4 Lintel defines a butt joint between the
3 Casing - You can specify the size and
Extends defines the amount the top casing extends past the side casings. Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
casings. Its affect is noticeable only if a custom casing is defined for the lintel.
5 Sill - Check this box to create a sill. 6 Suppress Casing eliminates all
Lites Tab
The options on this tab are only available for glass doors. For more information, see General Tab on page 222.
225
Doors
1 3 5
2 4 6
horizontal divisions for the glazed area. In a normal style of divided lites, the Lites across specifies the horizontal number of evenly sized panes of glass. This value must be between one and eight. vertical divisions for the glazed area. In a normal style of divided lites, the Lites vertical specifies the number of evenly sized panes of glass vertically. This value must also be between one and eight.
1 Lites Across defines the number of
2 Lites Vertical defines the number of
Normal Diamond
Prairie
Craftsman
Normal style is the most common, with the muntin bars going horizontally and vertically. Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to divide up the lites. Prairie style is based on the normal style, but with all the central muntin bars removed, leaving only the two outside muntin bars both horizontally and vertically. To be effective, both the Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 6 and 8. Craftsman style is based on the normal style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
3
lites.
Muntin Width - Specify the width of the muntins that are used to divide the
divided lites from the list. There are four styles available: Normal, Diamond, Prairie or Craftsman.
4 Special Type - Choose the style of
226
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical muntin bars above it. To be effective, both the Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 4 and 8. defined as round top or one of the arch tops on the Arch tab, you may specify up to 10 rays. The rays specify the number of radial muntin bars; there is one more pane of glass than the number of rays specified. If rays are added, any Lites across and Lites vertical which are specified are confined to the part of the window below the circle top or arch top.
5 Round Top - Ray Count If the door is
rays may be defined as concentric. If it is not checked, the rays start at the center point of the arch and fan out. If concentric is checked, the rays start from the innermost concentric muntin bar. You must have at least three lites across for this to be used.
6 Concentric In round top doors only,
227
Doors
Arch Tab
1 3 5
2 4
1 Specify the Type of arch desired.

The choices are Round Top (Full Radius), Broken Arch (Eyebrow), Gothic, Elliptical, Flat top, Tudor, Double, Trifoil, Octagonal, Dog-ear.
be defined. This is the dimension of the top of the arch, (defined by the height of the door), down to the base of the arch.
2 Height - For most arches a height must
3 Radius - Some arches may also need

their radius to be defined. arch top to bottom. This is rarely used for doors, but can be specified for windows to create unique configurations.
4 Reflect - Checking this box reflects the
checking either Arch on Right or Arch on Left.
5 A half-arch door is specified by
228
Hardware Tab
1 Doors
from the bottom of the door where you would like the handle(s) to be located. the interior of the door. If use default is chosen (in the Door Specification dialog), the lock specified as the default in the Door Defaults dialog will be used.
Select Library Object dialog and specify
3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8
on the door. If the use default is chosen (in the Door Specification dialog), the handle specified as the default in the Door Defaults dialog will be used. Library - Click this button to open the Select Library Object dialog and specify a handle from the Library. a different handle for the exterior of the door. If unchecked, the handle specified at (1) will be used.
1 Handle - Specify a handle to be used
4 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
5 Int Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
2 Ext Handle - Check this box to specify
Library - Click this button to open the
a lock from the Library. This is the same as selecting Library from the drop down list. the exterior of the door. If use default is chosen (in the Door Specification dialog), the lock specified as the default in the Door Defaults dialog will be used. Library - Click this button to open the
Library - Click this button to open the a handle from the Library.
6 Ext Lock - Specify a lock to be used on
distance from the edge of the door where you would like the handle(s) to be located.
3 In From Door Edge - Specify the
a lock from the Library. This is the same as selecting Library from the drop down list.
229
from the bottom of the door where you would like the lock(s) to be located. Locks are usually located above the handles. The locks will assume the same distance from the doors edge from the handle at (3).
7 Up From Floor - Specify the distance
Library - Click this button to open the
a hinge from the Library. This is the same as selecting Library from the drop down list. distance from the top and bottom of the door to the Hinge center.
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the interior, or hinge side, door casing. If this is not provided the hinge is still placed and will carve out a portion of the casing.
9 In From Top/Bottom - Specify the
8 Hinges - Specify a hinge to be used on the door. If use default is chosen (in the Door Specification dialog), the lock specified as the default in the Door Defaults dialog will be used. Two hinges are placed for interior doors, and three for exterior doors. Hinges can be placed only into swing doors.
Molding Tab
1 2
This tab allows you to apply custom moldings to doors for casings and lintels. Once a custom molding is applied, it is sized from the values on the Frame & Trim tab.
Note: When you specify a custom molding profile, the lower left corner of the molding is placed towards the door panel or window sash. Keep this in mind when creating new molding profiles.
230
Choose a molding and minimize the browser to view your selection in this dialog.
1 Select opens the Library Browser.
Materials Tab
2 Clear returns the casing specifications

to flat. New moldings may be added to the library. For more information, see Adding a Molding Profile on page 532.
Label Tab
For more information, see Label Tab on page 461.
Door Default Settings

To open the Door Defaults dialog doubleclick the Door Tools parent button.
Specification dialog.
drop down lists as it is in the Door
Choose Interior Door or Exterior Door to open the Door Defaults dialog for interior or exterior doors. You can also select Edit> Default Settings> Door Defaults>Interior or Exterior Door. The Interior Door Defaults and the Exterior Door Defaults dialogs look almost exactly the same as the Door Specification dialog. There are only a couple differences: The rough opening increase size is not specified on the General Tab of the Door Defaults dialog. Rough opening defaults are set in the Openings tab of the Framing dialog. For more information, see Openings Tab on page 375. Since default settings are specified here, "Use Default" is not an option on some
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are initial values for interior or exterior doors. Individual doors can be easily edited by selecting and opening them for specification. Changes made to individual doors after they have been placed will not alter the default settings.
Door Defaults dialog before doors are
It is a good idea to go over the settings in the placed. The settings for both types of doors are similar and should both be defined. The program automatically places exterior doors in exterior walls and interior doors in interior walls.
A few, like the casing width in the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic specifications and will update globally when a new value is entered. When you change a dynamic default, existing doors in the model will update. For more information on these settings, see The Door Specification Dialog on page 221.
231
Door Default Settings
232
Chapter 9:
Windows
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window styles can all be created with the standard window tool, and even set as the default. The shape of a window can be angled or made into a round top or other arch styles. Chief Architect can also create Bay, Box, and Bow Windows at the click of a button. In addition, the library contains many mulled window combinations and manufacturer-specific products. If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can save your window designs to your own library for use in other plans. Once windows have been placed in the model, the program can automatically generate a window schedule. Select Tools> Schedules> Windows to create a window schedule. For more information, see Creating Schedules on page 852.
Chapter Contents
Window Defaults Window Types Window Levels Displaying Windows Selecting Windows Deleting Windows Copying Windows Moving Windows Resizing Windows Centering Windows Windows in Curved Walls Custom Muntins Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs Window Specification Dialog Window Default Settings
233
Windows
Window Defaults
Default window settings can be adjusted before the window tool is used, allowing for the universal application of a particular type of window throughout the plan. To access the Window Defaults dialog double click the Window Tools parent button or select Edit>Default Settings> Window Defaults from the main menu. For more information, see Window Default Settings on page 267.
Window Types
Use the Build> Window menu or click the Window Tools parent button to activate the window child buttons.
Bay Windows
If a Bay Window , Box Window , or
Standard Windows
Standard window is simply a name for a window that is not one of the special types such as bay, box, bow, corner or blocked as described below. All these special types are made up of multiple standard windows. Click on a wall in Window mode to produce a new window. The type for this window is taken from the Window Defaults dialog. Its size can be easily adjusted after it is created. Most or perhaps all the windows in a typical plan will be standard windows, so that these will hereafter usually be called just "windows". When a standard window is part of a special window it is often called component or component window.
a Bow Window is used, the roof will be affected. Any of these windows should be placed before the roof is built.
A Bay Window is composed of three wall sections. The two side walls are at an angle to the main wall. Each of the three sections or components is a wall with a single window. Click on a wall in Bay Window mode to produce a bay window. The type for its component windows is taken from the Window Defaults dialog.The size of the individual windows adjust to fit the available space. The initial bay window goes from 22 across at the front to 4-2 across at the back, and is 1-0 deep.
234
Window Types
Box Windows
A Box window is simply a Bay window with side angles set to 90 degrees. Click in a wall in Box Window mode to produce a box window. The type of its component windows is taken from the Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust to fit the available space. The Box window is created at 4-2 wide with a depth of 1-6. Note that, for a bow with an odd number of sections, the radial dimension is from the center of the arc to an outside corner where two window sections join. The depth (11 ) is measured to the flat area of the center section, not to a corner. That is why the radius is a bit greater in value than the sum of the depth and the distance from the center of the bows curve to the exterior of the wall.
Note: Bay, Box, and Bow window areas are not included in the living area or in room standard area calculations. They are, however, included in room interior area calculations.
A Box window is sometimes used to create a dormer window by removing the windows on either side, leaving only the central one.
Bow Windows
A Bow window is a group of wall segments that create a segmented curve. Bow windows may be composed of two to twenty identical sections. Click in a wall in Bow Window mode to produce a 5-section bow window. The type of its component windows is taken from the Window Defaults dialog. The individual window size adjusts to fit the available space. The 5-section Bow in the picture has a 4-10 radius centered 3-9 inside the wall, giving an opening 5-10 across and a depth of 11.
The number of bow window components can be changed from two to twenty in the individual Bow Window Specification dialog. To open the dialog, select the Bow window to be changed and click the Open Object edit button.
Creating Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually

It is not necessary to use only the window tools provided to create bay, box, or bow windows. Sometimes it is easier to draw the bay using walls. Bays created using walls may have more than one window per section, which is not possible using a bay window unit. Moving the bay is more difficult since it is formed from individual walls, although the Edit Area option can sometimes help with
235
Windows
this. The same holds true for box and bow windows.
corner until it stops. Repeat with the second window. A corner window will result. Slant top, or shaped windows can be components of corner windows as long as their heights are equal at the corners. Windows with single or two segment tops can be used. Windows with three cannot. If a two segment window is used, the segment nearest the corner must be flat.
Note: Windows will correctly stop in the corner if dragged in Plan View using the
Ctrl
Windows Library
key.
Click the Windows Library tool to access a library of special windows. Select the desired window, then click on a wall to place the window. If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can use the Symbol Development tools to create windows and save them to your own library.
Once the corner window is formed, its components and corner post size can be adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked units can also meet at a corner this way.
Stacked Windows
Stacked Windows are easy to 2 create with 1 Window Levels. 0 Window levels are used to specify the relative height of each new window placed in Plan View. The door and windows in the illustration above were organized in the Window Specification dialog by setting the Default level for each window. For more information, see General Tab on page 252. To create this entry set the two windows on either side of the door to level zero. A door
Corner Windows
Corner windows are produced when each window has one edge at or past the interior side of the adjacent wall. To create a corner window, first create the desired window on each side of the corner. The header height and the sill height of both windows must be the same. In Plan View, select the window, hold down the Ctrl key, and drag the window into the
236
Window Types
will always be on level zero. The three windows above the door and the level zero windows are placed on level one, and the round top window is placed on level two. If you select a window in Plan View (by clicking on the stacked windows while in Window mode), you will select the window which is on the same level as your current Default Level setting. For example, if the Default Level is set to 2, you will select the round top window shown in the illustration. Windows whose level matches the Default Level will display in Plan View according to the color specified on the windows layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. Windows on other levels will display light gray. These colors will affect printouts. Always set the Default Level to 0 before printing so that windows and doors will print as desired. Notice how the windows and door in this example are separate, with a thin wall showing between them. The next section explains how the same door and six windows can be organized into a mulled unit. The casing will connect the windows and door so that no wall surface shows between them.
remain separate objects for dimensioning and the Material List. The Min. Separation value in the Window Defaults dialog will specify how close the windows can be to each other. Define a value that specifies the desired width for the shared casing. Windows can be automatically mulled to doors if the bottom of the window is at the elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of the door.
Automatically Mulled Units

To form a mulled group of windows and/or doors, move them close enough together so that their casings touch. Once the casings touch, the windows will be mulled together with one casing between the two of them. The sill of each window in the group must be at the same level for them to share the middle casing. The casing tops do not have to be at the same level. The casings will be modeled as if they are one unit but the windows will
Blocked Units
Blocking windows and doors together gives you added flexibility when mulling units together. It creates a combination of units which move and copy as a single unit. It allows you to list the doors and windows in the Material List either as a single unit or as the components, and it enables you to define a single opening or separate openings in the wall framing for the blocked unit. To create a Blocked Unit, group select several openings, doors and windows that are
237
Windows
The picture shows two triple hopper windows grouped with a door.
on the same wall and within 24 inches (sideto-side or top to bottom) of each other. Click the Make Block edit button to create a block. Once doors and windows are combined in a block they can be moved and copied as a single unit. The group selection can be done in Plan View or in any 3D view. Plan Views work fine for blocking windows that are positioned side-by-side, but you will want to use an elevation view for blocking objects which are stacked vertically. Once the unit is formed the components may not be moved relative to each other without first unblocking and repositioning them before blocking them once again. Windows, doors and other blocked units may be components of a new blocked unit. In one blocking operation you can block windows and doors that are either side-byside or over-and-under each other. You may not simultaneously block both horizontally and vertically. Complex units are formed by mulling several blocks together. To create a Blocked Unit from windows and doors on various levels you must use a 3D view to select the many different components. 1. In a Cross Section/Elevation View (like the one above), select the door and the windows on level 1 and 2 above it, then click the Make Block button. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the right and the window above it. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the left and the window above it. Group select the three vertically joined units and click the Make Block edit button to join them side to side.
2. 3. 4.
If you form a blocked unit by first blocking objects vertically, the vertical mullions will extend continously from the bottom to the top of the entire unit. The horizontal mullions will be interupted by the vertical mullions. A second method would be to first block the door and its two sidelights as one unit, and then block the three rectangular windows above the door as another unit. These blocked units, along with the top half-round
238
Window Levels
window, can be mulled together, top to bottom, to complete the final unit. Since this unit was blocked together horizontally first, the horizontal mullions extend continuously to the outside edges of the entire unit, while the vertical mullions are interrupted by the horizontal mullions. In order to block doors and windows, the component edges that are to be in contact must be straight and parallel to each other. Unlike automatic mulling, they do not need to be the same length. Openings with adjacent sides that are curved cannot be blocked. The blocked unit will move as a single standard window in both Plan and 3D views. While blocked the unit cannot be resized. It
can however be unblocked, resized and blocked again. The components on the lowest level will appear in Plan View.
Place Gable Over Window(s)

If a window or group of windows on the same wall is selected, the Gable Over Window edit button will appear. Click this if you want a gable roof over the window.
Window Levels
Levels are used to create and organize stacked windows within the same floor. On a wall within one floor level, you can place and define windows at varying Levels. Window Levels can be used to organize these windows for simplified editing. Window Levels do not define the height of a window, just the appearance and editing of a window in Plan View. When a new plan file is opened, the window Level is set to zero. Window Level 0 contains all doors, all bay, box and bow windows, and the first level of standard windows. Unless the Def. Level setting in the Window Defaults dialog is changed, the windows you place in Plan View will be on Level 0. The first row above on the same floor is represented by Window Level 1 and contains any windows stacked above a single window or door. The second row is represented by Window Level 2 and contains all windows stacked above two stacked windows, etc. When you place a window in Plan View on a Level greater than zero, the program attempts to locate it over windows on lower levels. Once it is placed, you can move it to the desired height in the Cross Section/ Elevation View or within the Window Specification dialog. When you specify the Def. Level to a value other than zero, the initial window type changes to be fixed glass. The Width of the window will match your default Window Type and the Height to the window will be 12". Once the Window is placed in the plan, and opened for specifications, its parameters can be changed.
239
Windows
When automatic roofs are subsequently built, a small gable roof, or dormer, will appear over the window. For more information, see Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors on page 349.
In addition to defining the Level on which windows will be placed, the Def. Level number affects how windows display in Plan View. All objects on the default level display normal color in Plan View. Windows and doors on other levels will display in gray. If window and door sizes are set to display, the sizes show only for windows and doors on the default level. The Def. Level also defines which of the stacked windows are selected first when you
click on the windows in Plan View. The windows on the current Default Level are selected first. Always reset the Def. level to zero before printing. Otherwise the doors and some windows may print in a light gray color and window and door sizes will not be those for level zero. Instead of using levels to manage stacked windows, you may wish to combine them into blocked units.
Displaying Windows
In Plan View
The display of windows, window sizes, and headers in Plan View can be controlled separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. If the window sizes layer is set to display the size labels will appear centered on the window that they represent. The labels are sized according to the Font settings in the Preferences dialog and the options selected in the Window Schedule Specification dialog. For more, see Creating Schedules on page 852. The size displays in the format 3068, which is width by height in feet and inches. A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide and six feet, eight inches high. Metric window dimensions format is 900x900 where the first number is the width in mm. These formats can be changed in the Label tab of the Window Schedule Specification dialog.
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog, which allows windows to be turned off in that view. The jamb and casing will remain if either Windows or Doors is checked. If both Windows and Doors are unchecked, the jamb and casings will be turned off, leaving only openings.
Note: This capability is separate from the ability to suppress Windows/Doors in the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123.
240
Selecting Windows
Selecting Windows
Individual Windows
The simplest way to select a window is to click on it while in Window mode. Once a window is selected, click the Open Object edit button to access the Window Specification dialog. In this dialog you can resize the window, change its type, or modify its trim or other features. If you just want to resize the window you can adjust it using the red handles.
Selecting Components of Blocked Units

Blocked units are made up of individual doors and windows. To select an individual component of a blocked unit, first select the blocked unit. The press the Tab key on your keyboard and the component whose center is closest to where you clicked will be selected. This selection technique can be used in Plan or 3D views. The selected component may be on any Level in the blocked unit. If you have multiple Levels, it is easiest to select the components in a 3D view. When you have selected an individual component of a blocked unit, you can change its parameters in the Window Specification dialog. If the component is not itself a blocked unit and has no components above it, its Height and Arch parameters can be changed. Changing the Height will cause the components top to move. Its bottom will remain stationary. You can use the Shift + Click method to group select objects within the blocked unit. Select the first component and then hold the shift key and click near the center of each of the others.
Multiple Windows
Multiple windows may be selected and edited simultaneously. Once one window is selected, hold down the Shift key while clicking on other windows to add to or subtract them from the selection set. If multiple windows are selected along the same wall, they may be moved or copied as a unit to another wall. If multiple windows are selected from different walls, they may still be edited together using the dialog, but not moved or copied.
Selecting Blocked Units

You can select a blocked unit by clicking on it in Plan or 3D view. The Explode Block button will display on the Edit toolbar. Click this to separate the unit back into its components. Once a blocked unit is selected, it can be copied or moved just like an individual window.
241
Windows
Deleting Windows
Select any window. Press the Del key or the click the Delete edit button to delete the window from the plan. A group of standard windows and/or bay, box and bow windows may be deleted simultaneously by group selecting them (select the first window, then hold the Shift key down while clicking additional windows and adding them to the selection set) then press the Del key or click the Delete edit button.
Copying Windows
Any window or group of windows may be copied except bay, box or bow window units. Select a window or several windows along the same unbroken wall. For a single copy, click the Copy/Paste edit button, then click on a wall to place a copy of the window(s). To place multiple copies, select the window(s), and double-click the Copy/ Paste tool. Click on walls to place as many copies as needed. You may copy a window or group of windows to another plan. If the two plans are side-by-side on screen, select the window(s), and click the Copy/Paste edit button. Click anywhere in the second window to activate it, and click on a wall to paste the copy. If the plans are not tiled, move to the new plan after clicking the Copy/Paste tool. Choose Edit> Paste from the menu and then click on a wall to place the window. Multiple windows may also be selected in a 3D view for copying. This makes it easy to copy stacked windows. Hold the Shift key down while clicking on each window in Select Objects mode. When the windows are selected, click the Copy/Paste tool. To copy along the same wall in the 3D view, grab the center handle and drag the copy away from the original. Windows can be selected in 3D view copied into other walls, or between plan files in plan or 3D views. Once the windows have been selected and copied, go to the other Plan View and choose Edit> Paste. Click on a wall to paste a copy of the entire set of windows. Creating blocked window units simplifies the process of copying multiple windows. For more information, see Blocked Units on page 237.
242
Moving Windows
Moving Windows
A window or group of windows may be moved by selecting them and then dragging from the center handle. They may also be moved by changing a value in a dimension line. Note that when a window is selected, the window size displays. If the window is not already located by regular dimension lines, temporary dimensions also appear. Dimensions are critical when positioning a window or any other object.
Move Restrictions
A window moved against an intersecting wall automatically stops when it is the casing distance from the intersecting wall. This restriction is disabled by checking Ignore Casing For Opening Resize within the Plan Defaults dialog. A window moved against a break in the wall automatically stops. To verify a wall is broken, select the wall. The selected wall has two red handles near each end. In the following picture the window will not move any more to the right. Selecting the wall reveals that the wall is broken, and the window has been moved as far right as it can within the wall.
Using the Mouse

To quickly move a selected window(s), use the middle handle. When the pointer becomes a , use the left mouse button to drag the window(s) along the wall. Notice that the dimensions update as the windows move. Release the mouse when the dimensions display the desired value.
Using Dimensions
Any object, located by either a temporary dimension or a regular dimension can be moved by editing the dimension itself. This is the recommended method to precisely locate windows and other other objects. Select the window(s) to be moved, drag it along the wall, and observe which dimensions update. These are the dimensions which can be used to move the window(s). For more information, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644. To fix a break in the wall, select one of the colinear walls, grab the move handle and move it slightly (an inch or so). When the wall is released, it will snap back and the break will heal if the two wall sections have the same thickness and type. A window moved vertically in a 3D view is stopped by the ceiling height and/or the floor height. To override this restriction, hold down the Ctrl key, grab the Move handle and drag the window(s) past the restriction.
243
Windows
Resizing Windows
When you select a window, the window size displays. This label displays the width (in feet and inches) followed by the height (in feet and inches). For example, a 3040 window is 3-0 wide by 4-0 high. There are two methods of resizing windows. when the size is changed. The height resizes from the sill height. In Plan View, you may change the height of a window by dragging the center handle toward the interior of the plan (to raise the bottom of the window), and toward the outside of the plan (to lower it). The top of the window stays fixed.
Using the Mouse

The quickest method is to drag the selection handles in Plan or 3D view. This is the only method available for resizing bay, box or bow window systems. When a window is selected, grab either of the two outside handles and drag along the wall to change the width. Drag the center handle perpendicular to the wall to change the height. Drag away from the center to widen the window. Drag toward the center to narrow the window. To resize the window on one side only, hold down the Ctrl key and drag. The label displaying the size updates as the handles are dragged. Release when the desired size is displayed. The width always resizes around the center of the window if the Ctrl key is not down
In the Specification Dialog

The second method is to type in the size on the General tab of the Window Specification dialog. This method will only work for standard windows and individual component windows within a bay, box or bow window system. Select a window(s) and click the Open Object edit button to open the Window Specification dialog. Select the General tab to change the height and width for the selected window(s). You cannot type in values to change the size of a bay, box or bow window unit. To do that, drag from the appropriate handle in Plan View.
Centering Windows
When a window or door is selected, the Center Object the Edit toolbar. tool displays in
Along a Wall
To center a window along a wall, click the Center Object tool, then click in Plan View on the side of the wall where the window is to be centered. If you want to
244
Windows in Curved Walls
center it to a room, click inside the room. If you want to center it to the exterior of the building, click outside the building. A selected group of openings on the same wall may be centered in the same way.
Centering To Fixtures
The program can also center windows to sinks and appliances. Select a window and click the Center Object tool, then click on a cabinet which is positioned against the wall and which contains a sink or cooktop. The window will become centered above the sink or cooktop.
Windows in Curved Walls

If a window is in a Curved wall, additional options can be specified for the Casings and Sash. These options are included on the Options tab of the Window Specification dialog:
Radial
Parallel: The sides of the casing are inserted in the wall at a right angle to the line tangent to the curved wall at the center of the window.
Parallel
Casing: Window casings display three ways in curved walls: Straight: Both window and casing are straight.
Straight Because the casing is straight, it will not properly fit in the wall opening if the window is too wide or the curve of the wall is too extreme. In these cases use one of the other two window types described below.
The window sash can be curved or straight for the Radial radial and parallel casing options. Normally a par& Curved allel casing will have a straight sash. A radial casing is more like traditional curved windows, and may have a curved sash.
245
Windows
Radial: The sides of the casing or jambs are inserted in the wall at an angle that passes through the center of the curve.
Custom Muntins
You can design your own muntins for the glazing of a window or door. Muntins are formed from a CAD block composed of lines and arcs drawn over window or door glass in a Cross Section/Elevation View. The CAD block should cover at least half the glass horizontally and one quarter of the area vertically, but should not overlap it in either direction by more than five percent. and the CAD block will disappear. Muntins will appear in place of the CAD block. If you wish to cover several glass areas in a window or double door, produce a separate CAD block for each. They will all load together. Custom muntins move with the opening and will copy with their opening. They will also stretch or compress when the glass area is resized. This stretching may not be perfect for non-rectangular glass areas that are resized by a large amount.
Creating Muntins
To create custom muntins, take a Cross Section/Elevation View of the wall that contains the window or door and zoom in on the window or door to receive the custom muntins. Toggle to CAD mode and draw lines and arcs to represent the desired muntins. Try to make them start and end as close to the edge of the glass as possible. If the lines are slightly over, the program will clip these ends so that they exactly fit. When the muntin design is complete, group select all lines and arcs and define them as a CAD block. (To group select lines and arcs, drag a marquee around them while holding down the Shift key.) If your window has more than one glazed sash, (i.e. a double-hung has two), you must create one block for each pane. Toggle out of CAD mode and select the door or window in the Cross Section/Elevation View. The Load Muntins button will appear on the Edit toolbar. Click this button
Muntins in Special Windows

You can place custom muntins into component windows for bay and bow windows and blocked openings. Start by making an Elevation View of the component to be changed. The view should look directly at the component window. Make a CAD block in each pane of the component window, and toggle out of CAD mode. Click in the center of the component window. This selects the entire containing window. Next press the Tab key until the desired component is selected. The Load Muntins button should appear in the edit toolbar. If it does not, the camera may not be directly pointed at the component window (must be within 6 degrees), or the component may not be selected. Click on the Load Muntins button. You must do this to receive muntins into each component. In a bow window however, place muntins into one component and they will show in all.
246
Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Removing Muntins
Remove custom muntins from a door or window by selecting the opening in Cross Section/Elevation View and clicking
on the Unload Muntins button on the Edit toolbar. The muntins will disappear and the original CAD block will take their place. You may explode and edit these blocks and reload them.

Components
Click on a bay, box, or bow window to select it. Drag the side handles to change the width. In Plan View, drag the center handle outward to increase the depth, or inward to decrease the depth of the unit. A component window selected within a bay, box or bow window is resized like any other standard window. To select it,click on it in Window mode or click on the appropriate component, selecting the bay unit. then click Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key and the component is selected. Windows and bay, box and bow windows may also be selected in 3D views. The entire unit is selected first. To select an individual component within the unit, click tthe Select Next Object edit button until that window is selected. In a bow window, all components are identical, so only one component can ever be selected. Changing this component will change them all.
If the desired window is not offered as a selection, you may be at too much of an angle to the window. Change your angle so you are facing it more squarely, then try again.
Resizing Components
If you select the bay and then use the Tab key to select the individual component windows on which you clicked, you can resize that component either by selecting it and dragging from a side handle, or by selecting it and clicking the Open Object edit button in order to modify it using the Window Specification dialog. You can change the size of the component. Once a component is resized in this way, it will retain its size while the bay is resized. If the bay is decreased in size to the extent that the component becomes too large to fit, the component will return to its default size based on the bay size, and will resume automatically resizing as the bay or bow window is resized.
Bay Window Specification Dialog

The Bay Window Specification dialog is opened when you select a Bay Window in Plan View and click the Open Object edit button. There are many options in this dialog that can be set for the individual item. They cannot be set as defaults. Many of these same options are available for Box and Bow windows.
247
Windows
1 3 5 7 9 11 2 4 6 8 10 12
the label in Plan View and to prevent the Bay window from being included in the Material List or Window Schedule. this box to create one label to list the Bay window in the Material List and schedules.
6 No Labels - Check this box to suppress
7 Single Label for Entire Bay - Check
normal window has two framing studs on either side. The trimmer stud is against the window and ends where it butts to the bottom of the header. Check this box to eliminate the trimmer stud for bay components, which allows the component width to increase. Check this box to remove both studs between the bay components.
8 No Trimmers for Components - A
1 Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the side components of the bay window. This value is in degrees. Enter 90 degrees to create a box window.
the bay will fit under the existing roof, and the roof needs no changes to accomodate it. this box to extend the existing roof plane to cover the bay window below.
9 No Framing Between Components -
2 Use Existing Roof - Check this box if
box if the window is placed in a brick wall and you want to recess the exterior casing to produce a brick molding. Bay window components default to a size that allows one standard trimmer when a bay is first created. When the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its components automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer. to recess the components to the sheathing layer instead of the outside layer (typically brick) as in step 10.
10 Components Recessed - Check this
3 Extend Existing Roof Over - Check 4 Rectangular Roof Over - Check this
box to create a roof over the Bay window which is square across the end instead of following the profile of the roof. For more information, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on page 250.
11 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
5 Suppress Dimension - Check this box to suppress the dimensions that are automatically placed to the Bay window.
box to have the exterior casing surround all three bay component windows together, not separately, on the exterior. Mullions are provided between components.
12 Connect Outer Casing - Check this
248
This is how casing is always done for the interior.
Ceilings
When originally created, the ceiling within a bay, box, or bow windows is the same height as the default ceiling for that floor. Both the top and bottom heights of these window units may be adjusted from a 3D view. Use the following techniques for modifying any bay, box, or bow window.
Bow Window Specification 1
Lowering the Ceiling

increase or decrease the number of components in the window. the check box to suppress the dimensions showing width and depth of the bow. the check box to suppress the radial dimension. For more information, see Bay Window Specification Dialog on page 247.
1 Define the Number of sections to
2 Suppress standard dimension - Select
To lower the ceiling and the wall heights, select the window in a 3D view. When the window is selected, grab the top handle and drag toward the floor. The ceiling will be lowered, which will lower the height of the walls. Any roofs which are subsequently built will be affected.
3 Suppress dimension to center - Select
Creating a Bench Seat

To create a bench seat or garden window, follow the same step as lowering the ceiling except this time drag the lower handle toward the ceiling. When you raise the bottom of the window to create a bench seat, the exterior walls that create the window will not reach the ground. When you build a foundation, the foundation will not be produced under a window unit that has bench seats.
249
Windows
2 3
Displaying Bay and Bow Windows

The color and display of Bay and Bow windows in Plan View is controlled by the
manual dimension layer. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128.
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

Several different roof styles are available for bay, box and bow window units. Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the changes.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip roof will be built above the unit by the automatic roof generator.
For this roof style to work successfully, the ceiling heights of the window unit and the room containing it must be the same. This will not work if you have lowered the ceiling for the window unit. If a different style of roof is desired, the Bay / Bow Window Specification dialog can be used to change the style of roof which will be generated over a bay, box or bow window. Select the bay, box or bow window, then
Bay (or Bow) Window Specification
click the Open Object dialog will display.
edit button. The
If a header is desired over the bay, box or bow window, first build the roof correctly, then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered, select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . This will fill in the area between the header and the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if you do, a lower hip roof over the window unit will be created.
Place Under Roof Slope

To have the main roof plane extend down over the window unit while following the shape of the unit, select Extend Existing
Use Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof with no allowances made for bay, box, or bow windows below, check Use Existing Roof.
250
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
With this option the bay, box, or bow windows should be tucked under the roof eave.
Gable Roof Windows

A gable roof is not one of the automatic options for the roof above a bay, box or bow window. They can be created by manually editing the rectangular hip roofs that are automatically created. For more information, see Manual Roofs on page 341. 1. Select each side hip sections on the front angled edge. Grab the front ridge corner handle and drag the roof section forward until the fascia is straight and let it snap to the edge of the front hip section. Delete the front hip section. Select each side roof plane at the gable end and drag it out to set the overhang. Once the roof planes are shaped properly, open the Build Roof dialog and select the Build Fascia/Gutters option to complete the roof. Do not select Build Roof Planes.
Place Under Roof - Rectangular

To extend the roof plane down over a bay, box or bow window with a rectangular roof, ignoring the shape of the unit, select both Extend Existing Roof Over and Rectangular roof over in the specification dialog. The Rectangular roof over option will not work in combination with Use Existing roof since the existing roof does not cover the window unit. See the previous section for directions on extending the roof down over bay, box or bow windows.
2. 3. 4.
Rectangular Hip Roof

To create a rectangular hip roof, select only Rectangular roof over. Then rebuild the roof.
251
Window Specification Dialog

When you place a window in Plan View, the program models a window based on the settings in the Window Defaults dialog. For more information, see Window Default Settings on page 267. Once a window is placed it can be edited with the Window Specification dialog. You can use this dialog to define unique features for a group of windows or an individual window. You can access it by double-clicking on the window in Window mode, or by selecting the window and clicking the Open Object edit button. The tabs in the Window Specification dialog are the same as the tabs on the Window Defaults dialog. Anything that can be set as a default can also be specified individually in the specification dialog.
General Tab
1 2
3 4 5
252
window from the list. The first entry in the list is the Window Type set in the Window Defaults dialog. The various window types are shown above. Sliding and Casement windows can be distinguished in Plan View, as shown below. Double Hung Left Sliding Triple Casement
1 Window Type -Select the type of
is at the bottom, and the other two thirds is at the window top. Floor to Top - Specify the height to the top of the window as measured from the subfloor. This falls under the bottom of the header by two thirds of the rough opening amount. Movable Size - If applicable, define the dimension (in inches or mm) of the movable portion of the window. A value of 0 will default the movable size to whatever is normal for that type of window. define which row the window appears on if there is more than one row of windows in a stacked set. Enter a number to change which level the window is on. Window Level onto which new windows should be placed. Unless you are placing windows upon already existing windows, leave the Def. Level set to 0. Windows on the default level display black, windows on other levels are grey.
3 Level - The Level value is used to
represent the overall dimension of the window unit, including frame. You can also specify a rough opening dimension for the window. These R.O. values for an individual window override the default values set in the Framing dialog. The value for the rough opening height is split so that one third of it
2 Width and Height - Enter values that
4 Def. Level - Specify the current
253
Windows
Note: The window that is on the default level will be the one selected when you select a window from a set of windows in Plan View.
display the window in color in the dialog preview.
5 Show Color - Select the check box to
Check Interior or Exterior to change which side is displayed in the dialog preview.
Options Tab
1 3
check box to count interior corner blocks in the Material List. These will not display in 3D views. check box to count exterior corner blocks in the Material List. These will not display in 3D views. the window as an egress window in the Window Schedule. The letters eg will be appended to the value in the Size column. The Egress check box can designate that the entire area of the window is used for egress, not just the movable section. To use this specification on an undersized window, most or all of the window's total area should be able to open for escape in case of fire.
1 Interior Corner Block - Select the
2 Exterior Corner Block - Select the
The Plan Check calculations for egress are only an approximate guide. Consult your local building and fire code authorities for your regional egress window requirements.
3 Egress -Select the check box to label
the check box to recess the casing inward to the main, or framing layer of the wall. This check box will only appear if the window is in a multi-layered wall. A window or mulled unit placed in a brick, concrete block, or stone wall is often recessed into the walls exterior. In the illustration above, Recessed which is a 3D view, the window to the right is recessed, so the brick wraps the opening. The window on the left is
4 Recessed - Select
Typical
254
not recessed, so the casing is outside the brick. box to recess the window to the sheathing layer (next out from the main layer). The wall layers in the following illustration have been exaggerated to show how the different options display in Plan View.
5 To Sheathing Layer - Select the check

Not Recessed
Recessed (to Main Layer)
Options Tab for Blocked Units

You can select a blocked unit and open it to display its Window Specification dialog. A number of options appear grayed out and cannot be changed. Boxes that move the entire opening can be changed in the General tab. Three new check boxes appear in the Options tab:
1 3
selected window is a mulled unit. Check the box to have the mulled unit appear in the door schedules and in the materials list. Otherwise it would appear in window schedules and in the window category of the materials list.
1 Treat as Door - This appears when the
treat the blocked unit as a single object for labeling in Plan View. It will produce a single entry in the Material List and window schedule. Clear the check box to produce labels and entries for each component of the mulled unit.
2 Single label - Select the check box to
255
Windows
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
To change Single label for a component, click in the middle of the component in an elevation view, press the Tab key until the component is selected, and then open the Window Specification dialog. to direct the wall framer to produce a single opening with a single header for the entire blocked unit. Clear the check box to model studs between, and individual headers for, the components of the blocked unit. The Sash & Frame tab only defines the casing surrounding the blocked unit. It does not specify the casing appearing between the components.
3 Single wall hole - Select the check box
The Arch tab lets you define the overall shape of the blocked units top. If you intend to arch the top of a blocked unit, the top components should be constructed with rectangular top openings whose tops are at the same height. The Molding tab specifies the surrounding casing, sill and lintels. It does not currently allow you to specify a custom molding for the casing appearing between components. Settings made on the Material tab for a blocked unit apply to all components of the blocked unit. The settings will override any settings made for individual components of the blocked unit.
Sash & Frame Tab
1 3 2
4 5
6
settings in the default Window Defaults dialog. To reset any value to its default setting, type a "d" in the field. If an error results then that setting has no default value assigned to it.
The (D) notation that follows some values indicates that they are default values taken from the Window Defaults dialog. These values can be changed individually by typing in a new number or globally by changing the
256
four sides of the window sash. Increasing the size of the sash decreases the size of the glass. The Side value sets the width of all vertical sash members, those at the window sides as well as central members for casement and sliding windows. It also sets the width for the top portion of the window when any arch is specified. The Top and Bottom values set the width for the top and bottom sash of all windows, except that the Top value is not used if the window has an arch. The Mid value sets the width for horizontal components between the top and bottom sash in double hung, double and triple awning and double and triple hopper windows. It does not affect casement and sliding windows. If any sash width is set to zero, no sash is produced. The window will have no glass and will not support divided lites. Since there is no glass, the window will be transparent even when the rest of the windows are set to be opaque from the exterior. sash stock measured from the exterior to the interior.
1 Sash Width - Enter the width for all
the Side, Top and Bottom widths of the window frame. When these are set to zero (the default), the frame will not display. These values are usually left at zero unless you are replacing older windows with new windows, and you intend to simply drop a new, framed window into the original windows jamb. If this value is set to zero, the walls main layer thickness is used as the frame depth.
4 Frame Width - Enter
is inset from the exterior of the walls main layer. Normally the outer surface of the frame is at the outer surface of the walls main layer. Setting a non-zero value in Frame inset moves the frame into the wall.
6 Inset - Enter the distance that the frame
2 Sash Depth - Enter the thickness of the 3 Inset - Enter the distance between the
frame and the outermost sash. If there is no frame, then the inset is measured from the outer surface of the walls main layer.
257
Windows
5 Frame Depth - Enter the frame depth.
Sash & Frame Tab for Blocked Units
1 2
1 Inside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the interior of the house.
2 Outside - Specify the depth of the
mullion on the exterior of the house.
Casing Tab
1 2 3
5 7
4 6
258
Changes made on the Casing tab display only in 3D views. construction of the window itself, not the casing. This will most often be left at zero. A positive value in these fields decreases the size of the window, but does not change either the nominal size or the rough opening size specified on the General tab. The Side value is used for both sides, and also for the top if an arch type window. button to choose whether you are defining the values for the inside or for the outside of the window. The picture to the right will also switch to show the window from the selected side. Unless a separate Lintel is defined, this setting will affect both sides and top. This also affects the bottom if no sill is used and the width of the apron if one is being used. Top Width - If Lintel is also checked, enter the width of the Lintel casing. Reveal - Enter the dimension from the outside edge of the frame, or sash if no frame is present, to the inside edge of the casing.
Note: Unless the selected window(s) have a different size casing or reveal than the rest of the windows in the model, the three values in the Casing section should be changed in the Window Defaults dialog.
1 Mfr. Offset - This section refers to the
box to place a separate casing across the window top. Its width is set in Top Width. This creates a butt joint between the Side casings and the Lintel. Extends - Enter the amount the top casing extends on either side. The default value of 1 inch (25mm) usually extends it to the edge of the vertical casing. Wrap - Check this box to model the head casing with returns at the ends. Thus the ends of the top casing can be cut square, or mitered to return to the wall. The affects of Wrap are seen only if a custom molding is specified for the top casing, as shown in this illustration. to specify a sill. Clear the check box to remove the sill, causing the specified Side casing to be used for the bottom of the window. Extends controls the amount the sill extends to either side. One inch (25 mm) will usually make the ends of a non-wrapped sill even with the outer edge of the casing.
4 Lintel - Select the check
3 Width - Enter the width of the casing.
5 Sill - Check this box
Wrap - Select the check box to miter the sill ends and return them to the wall. Clear the check box to cut the ends of the sill square.
259
Windows
2 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
check box to remove the apron. Select this box to add an apron below the sill. The Extends value will
6 Apron - Clear this
extend the sill and apron together. create a window with no trim details. The sill remains if you have specified one. If casing and sill are both suppressed, only the frame and sash remain.
7 Suppress Casing- Check this box to
Lites Tab
3 4
The Lites tab allows you to add muntin bars or grids to various window styles. It also allows you to add shutters to windows. There are four possible styles of muntin bars for regular windows, plus two additional options for arch top or round top windows. A window which has been modified using the Shape tab cannot have divided lites or shutters added. A maximum of 8 lites may be specified in either direction for any of the Special Types.
Lites Vertical - Enter the number of vertical lites in each portion of the sash. Muntin Width - Specify the width of the bars that divide the panes of glass. Lites in Fixed and Lites in Moveable Select or clear these check boxes to specify either one or both of the sashes to have divided lites. Shutters - Check this box to place working shutters on the exterior of the window. These will each be half of the windows width, excluding the casing. If one side of the window does not have enough
1 Lites Across - Enter the number of

horizontal lites in each sash.
260
room for the shutter (such as when a window is close to another window or corner), that side will have no shutter. Default shutters resize with the window. Set Width By Window - Check this box to make the shutters half as wide as the window (so they meet in the middle when shut). Specify Width - Enter the width of the shutters. A minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) applies. For decorative shutters, enter a nonzero width. Outside Casing - Select the check box to place the shutters at the outside edge of the side casing. Normal operating shutters overlap the casing except for the innermost one inch. Decorative shutters usually attach to the house outside the casing. Circle Top Shutters - Select the check box to match the geometry of the shutters to an arched window. Louver - Select the check box to place louvers in the central portion of each shutter. Clear the check box to model shutters with solid panels. If Outside Casing is checked, the louvers are positioned to shield the sun when the shutters are closed. When the shutters display open, the louvers will appear backwards.
Note: All the window types default to having 1 lite across and 1 lite vertical, in both movable and the fixed. Because the fixed window in a Triple Sliding window is twice the size of the movable windows, the fixed section has a vertical muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the Lites in fixed check box for a triple sliding window.
lites from the list. When selected, a preview of each displays in the dialog. Normal style is the most common, with muntins going horizontally and vertically. Colonial windows are an example of the normal style. Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to divide up the lites. French windows are an example of the diamond style.
3 Special type - Select a configuration of Windows 261
Prairie style is based on the normal style, but with all the central muntin bars removed, leaving only the two outside muntin bars both horizontally and vertically. To be effective, both the Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 6 and 8. Federal or Federation windows are an example of the Prairie style. Craftsman style is based on the normal style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical muntin bars above it. To be effective, both the
Lites in fixed
Lites in moveable
Lites across and the Lites vertical should be set between 4 and 8. active only when the window is defined with a round top on the Arch tab. Ray Count - Enter the number of radial muntin bars. A round or arch top window may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added, any Lites across and Lites vertical which are specified will be confined to the part of the window below the arc of the window. Concentric - In round top windows only, rays may also be defined as being concentric. Select the check box to start the rays from the innermost concentric muntin bar. Following is an example of a 3040 fixed glass window. In all cases, Lites across = 3, and Lites vertical = 3. The round top window is shown first with no rays, then with regular and concentric rays. There is also a 3040 fixed glass arch top window (arch height 12)
4 Round top - This section becomes
with regular rays. The arch top window cannot have concentric rays. If the window height is changed to half the width for round top windows, or changed to match the arch height for arch top windows, many styles of transom windows may be created. It is possible to stack windows above other windows or doors. All these transoms have had the sill removed.
262
Shape Tab
1 3 2 4
7 Windows
Any type of non-library window may be shaped. All shaped windows are defined as fixed glass on the General tab.
Height - Enter the height of the right inside corner, and its distance From Left (not from right). Click to have the program match the angle of the top of the window to the pitch of the roof on a gable end. The window will maintain the angle even when resized and repositioned. Top Left Corner and Top Right Corner must be unchecked for this to work. Revert - Select the check box to restore the window to its original window type and special arch type settings. Both the left and right heights will be reset to the same value, which will be the higher of the two sides before it was restored.
1 Window Width is displayed. It may be

changed in the General tab. left upper corner. Unless changed, this will match the window height.
6 Match Roof -
2 Left Height - Enter the height of the
3 Right Height - Enter the height of the

upper right corner. to add an inside left corner or single center peak to the window.
4 Top Left Corner -Select the check box
Height - Enter the height of the inside left corner, and its distance From Left. box to add an inside right corner to the window.
5 Top Right Corner - Select the check
263
value to raise one bottom corner of the window by that amount. Select At Left or At Right to specify which corner to raise. The illustration shows the window with and without Raise bottom specified.
7 Raise Bottom - Enter a
Examples of Shaped Windows

On a shaped window, there must be two vertical sides. They may be as short as 1/4. The diagram shows solid black circles where the left and right heights are, and open circles where additional corners have been placed. A has different left and right heights with no corner added.
B C D
B has matching left and right heights with an added corner. C is the same as B, except that the left and right heights have been shortened to 1/4. D is the same as B except it has two added corners. E is the same as A except that Raise Bottom at right has been defined.
264
Arch Tab
1 3 5
2 4
each type are shown above. All were created from the same 3050 fixed glass window.
1 Type -Select a type of arch. Samples of
restrict the shape of the arch to the left side of the window. The right leg will be straight. Arch on Right - Select the check box to restrict the shape of the arch to the right side of the window. The left leg will be straight.
5 Arch on Left - Check this box to
types except Round Top and Octagonal Arch require a height value.
2 Height - Enter the arch height. All
3 Radius - Enter the radius for the Tudor

Arch or the Double Arch. Reflect - Select the check box to reflect the arch from top to bottom. Reflect can be used to create circular and octagonal windows from square windows. It can also be used for decorative fixed glass.
Treatments Tab
The Treatments tab of the Window Specificaiton dialog is similar to the Hardware tab of the Door Specification dialog. For more information, see Hardware Tab on page 229.
265
Windows
Molding Tab
button to specify which side of the window will receive the molding. The window detail in the dialog box changes to reflect your selections. casing molding from the Library. Click Clear to clear any previous choices and restore the default molding. The width of the molding is defined on the Casing tab. The casing depth is always one inch (25 mm) and cannot be changed.
1 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
Sill - Click Select to select a custom molding for the sill. Click Clear to delete any previously specified moldings.
2 Casing - Click Select to select a custom
New moldings may be added to the library. For more information, see Adding a Molding Profile on page 532.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Framing Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
is checked in the Casing tab. Click Select to select a custom molding for the head casing. Click Clear to clear any previously specified moldings and restore the default molding. The width of this molding is defined by the Top Width on the Casing tab.
3 Lintel - This is used only when Lintel
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Window Specification dialog is the same as the Label tab of the Cabinet Specification dialog. For more information, see Label Tab on page 461.
266
Window Default Settings

The Window Defaults dialog specifies what type of window is placed in the model when a window is added in Plan View. Select Options> Defaults Setup> Window Defaults, or double-click the Window child button, to open the Window Defaults dialog. There are three types of values set in the Window Defaults dialog: 1. Dynamic Defaults: These values affect all existing and new windows which are still set to the default specification. The default setting is signified by a (D) following a value in the Window Specification dialog. These settings are: Window Type Sash Width Sash Depth Casing Width. 2. Initial Values: These only affect new windows, and changing the value has no affect on existing windows. These are: Width, Height Floor to Top Default Level Editing Limits: This affects both the creation of new and the modification of existing windows/doors. There is one only: Min. Separation
3.
Set the Window Defaults dialog to define the type of window that represents the majority of windows in your model. Just like doors you can easily customize any window or group of windows in the Plan or 3D view.
Window Defaults Dialog, refer to the
For information about settings in the
corresponding tabs in the Window Specification Dialog on page 252.
267
Window Default Settings
268
Chapter 10:
Multiple Floors
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in a plan. Floors which are based on the first floor footprint can be easily added at any time. Floors can also be deleted at any time. Only one foundation level can exist in a plan. Only one floor can be active at a time (the current floor) but one other floor of your choice can be turned on and displayed for reference at the same time.
Chapter Contents
Floor Defaults Floors and File Extensions Adding Floors Deleting Floors Copying Floors Current Floor / Reference Floor Reference Display Swap Floor/Reference Floor Up/ Floor Down Reference Floor Color Display Objects in Reference Floor
Floor Defaults
The Floor Defaults dialog is very similar to the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Room Defaults on page 188.
Floors and File Extensions

When Chief Architect starts, it opens into a blank, first floor plan. The plan name is Untitled.PL1:Plan.
269
Floors
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar displays filename.PL1:Plan, indicating that: The active drawing file is filename. The active floor is the first floor (.PL1). The active view is the Plan View.
Even though each floor is saved as a separate file, the program opens all related floors anytime one of them is opened. All floors are seen simultaneously when any of the multifloor views are created (Perspective, Section/ Elevation, or Overview ). When a multi-floor structure is open, the Current Floor is the .PL* file that was opened, and the program automatically assigns the floor below as the Reference Floor. If there is not a .PL0 file and a .PL2 file exists, the second floor is the Reference Floor for the .PL1 file. The Current Floor is the active floor, the one in which you can actually edit. There can be only one active floor at a time. The Reference Floor is a single floor, other than the Current Floor, which can be displayed for reference, similar to an overlay. The Reference Floor is visible but not editable. All other floors are saved in memory and are shown in 3D views but not Plan View.
Any model can have up to 10 floors, plus a foundation and attic. All floors and the foundation are visible in 3D views. The program saves each floor and the foundation as separate files, in the same directory, and with the same file name but with a different extension. If you move one of the floor files out of that directory, the program cannot find it. If the directory is renamed, but the files remain in it, there is not a problem. The foundation file ends in .PL0, the first floor in .PL1, the second floor in .PL2, the third floor in .PL3 and the fourth floor in .PL4, etc. The tenth floor is named .PLA and the attic, if there are 10 floors is named .PLB. These different file extensions are applied automatically by the program and should not be changed.
Adding Floors
The New Floor dialog opens, which is used to build an additional floor, two options are available.
Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor, the foundation/basement, below the first floor. Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built or plan for a multi-story building.
To create a new floor, click the Floor Tools parent button and click the Build New Floor child button, or select Build> Floor> Build New Floor from the menu.
Most often, Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st floor plan is used.
270
Deleting Floors
This option creates an upper floor with exterior walls which duplicate the exterior walls of the lower floor. The wall layer definition of the upper floor matches the lower floor. These walls can then be easily modified. Interior walls are not duplicated. Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd floor Select this option if none of the exterior walls are directly above the existing walls on the lower floor. This creates an upper floor plan file, with nothing drawn in it. Once you have made a selection, click OK. A new floor will be added based on the settings in the Floor Defaults dialog. For more information, see Floor Defaults on page 269. The new floor is the Current Floor in the window. Note that the name in the title bar at the top says filename.PL2:Plan, indicating the active plan is the second floor plan. Creating third, fourth and subsequent floors, is identical to creating the second floor.
Floors can be inserted between two existing floors. To insert a floor, select Build> Floor> Insert New Floor. The Insert Floor dialog opens. Select one of the two options available and click OK. The existing floor is moved up, (with all floors above it) and a new floor is created below. Derive new 3rd floor plan from the 2nd floor plan - Select this option to insert a new floor, based on the exterior walls of the existing floor. Click OK to create a new floor. Any existing fifth floor is moved up and the new floor is inserted. All floors above the existing floor are moved up by one floor. Make new (blank) plan - Select this option to insert a blank floor. The current floor is moved up and all floors above increase by one. The program renames any existing Fifth floor from a .PL5 to a .PL6.
The first floor stores important information for the entire model. Chief Architect does not allow you to insert a floor between the foundation and the first floor.
Adding Floors Between Existing Floors
Building a Foundation
To build a foundation select the Build Foundation child button or choose Build> Floor> Build Foundation. For more information, see Building a Foundation on page 279.
Deleting Floors
To delete a floor, select Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor. The current floor is deleted. If there is a floor above it becomes the current floor. Chief Architect does not allow you to delete the first floor.
271
Floors
Copying Floors
If you would like to make a copy of an existing floor to be used on a new floor, the Edit Area tools may be helpful. For more information, see Edit Area Tools on page 750.
An exact replica of an existing floor can also be created by copying the file and simply changing the extension. For example, Johnson.PL1 could be changed to Johnson.PL2 and saved to create a second story exactly like the first.
Current Floor / Reference Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given time. The active floor is called the Current Floor, and is the only floor which can be edited in Plan View. Once you have more than one floor in your model, you may want to see how the floors relate to each other. When you have multiple floors, it is possible to display any floor as a Reference Floor. The Reference Floor is visible but you cannot edit it. By default, Chief Architect defines the floor directly below the Current Floor as the Reference Floor, but you can define any floor as the Reference Floor in the Change Floor/Reference dialog. To open the dialog click the Change Floor/Reference button on the toolbar, which is the button displaying the number between the Page Up and Page Down buttons.
To display the Reference Floor select Tools> Reference Floors> Reference Display On (or click the Reference Display On button.) The Reference Floor becomes visible. If the Current Floor is stacked above the Reference Floor, the exterior walls change color, due to the layering of lines on the monitor, when the Reference Floor is active. You can define the color of the Reference Floor in the Preferences dialog on the Colors panel. When both a Current Floor and a Reference Floor are defined, two buttons, Reference Display On and Swap Floor/Reference become available in the toolbar. These two buttons display on the Utility toolbar.
272
Reference Display
Reference Display
Whenever a floor is defined as the Reference Floor, its display can be toggled on or off. Click the Reference Display On button once to have the Reference Floor become visible in Plan View. The Reference Floor remains visible, and the Reference Display On appears as though it is depressed, until clicked again. When the Reference Floor is visible, that entire floor displays in a single color. This color is defined in the Preferences dialog and the Color Panel dialogs. Selecting a contrasting color helps you quickly identify which walls are in the Reference Floor.
Swap Floor/Reference
When laying out one floor, it is often necessary to make a change on a different floor, but changes can only be made in the Current Floor. To make a change to your Reference Floor you must make it the current floor. If one floor is defined as the Current Floor, and another floor is defined as the Reference Floor, the Swap Floor/Reference button can be used to switch the status of the two plans. This provides a quick method of switching back and forth between any two floors.
Floor Up/ Floor Down

If you are working with more than two floors you may want to use the toolbar display to change between them. The current floor number displays between the arrows in Architectural mode. Click the arrow on either side of floor number to move up or down through the available floors. Floors become available once they have been actively built. The Attic plan and the foundation are also accessible.
Note: These three buttons perform different tasks in different views. In Architectural mode it is a floor control, in CAD mode it is a layer control, and in a Layout file, it is a page control.
Change Floor/Reference
If you have many floors, click directly on the number and the Change Floor/ Reference dialog opens. For more information, see Current Floor / Reference Floor on page 272. Click on a floor name from the Current Floor list to be the Current Floor. Click on a
273
Floors
floor name from the Reference Floor list to be the Reference Floor. Click OK to return to Plan View with the changes in place. If the
Reference Toggle was on, it remains on. If the Reference Toggle was off, it remains off until you toggle it on.
Reference Floor Color
Select the Colors panel of the Preferences dialog to change the Reference Plan Color by selecting a new color from the list. When a Reference Floor is visible, the Current Floor displays in the colors defined by layer settings. The Reference Floor displays in the defined color.
Where the Current Floor and the Reference Floor have edges which line up, there is a discoloration caused by the fact that lines of two different colors are superimposed upon each other. This discoloration occurs when any two lines of a different color are superimposed on the monitor.
Display Objects in Reference Floor

When the Reference Floor is visible, walls, railings and windows are automatically set to display in the Layer Display Options dialog. To display other layers in the Reference Floor, click the Display Options button. Layer settings affect all floors in the model. When a layer is defined to display in Reference Floor, it displays with the color defined for the Reference Floor on the Colors panel of the Preferences dialog. A red R in the Ref. column indicates that all objects on that layer display with the Reference Floor. Remove the R in this column and objects on that layer wont
274
display on the Reference Floor. For more information, see Layers on page 125.
275
Display Objects in Reference Floor
276
Chapter 11:
Foundations
Chapter Overview
There are three foundation types, footing, piers, and slab. All three can be generated automatically or manually. The foundation type can be determined and selected when the foundation is built in the Foundation Defaults dialog. The foundation plan always has a .PL0 extension. This is appended automatically by the program when the foundation is created. Foundation walls can also be drawn on upper floors using the Foundation Wall tool.
Chapter Contents
Foundation Defaults Automatic vs. Manual Foundations The Slab Tools Building a Foundation New Floor Dialog Displaying Foundations Deleting Foundations Aligning Stem Walls and Footings Resizing Stem Walls Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations Editing Pier and Grade Beam Foundations Editing Piers & Pads Foundations and Room Specification Slab Specification Dialog
Always consult registered geotechnical and civil engineers for information regarding the proper foundation for your lot.
Foundation Defaults
There can be only one foundation floor per plan. The foundation file ends in the extension .PL0. Because the settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog determine the type of foundation that will be built, this dialog is opened automatically whenever the Build Foundation child button is clicked. For more information about the Foundation
277
Foundations
Defaults, see Building a Foundation on page 279. The Foundation Defaults dialog allows you to build many different types of
foundations. Foundation dimensions can be specified and set to include footings and mudsills. Monolithic slab and pier and grade beam foundations can also be specified here.
Automatic vs. Manual Foundations

If you would like the foundation to follow the footprint of the first floor plan, automatically generated foundations are preferable. Automatically generated foundations will update if walls have been moved and you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . Foundation walls can also be drawn manually with the Foundation Wall the Curved Foundation Wall child buttons. For more information, see Foundation Walls on page 135. Simple slabs can also be drawn manually with the Slab or the Slab With Footing tools. and
The Slab Tools

Slabs created with the slab tools are typically used for more generic purposes and should not be substituted for a foundation plan. The settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog will not have an affect on slabs created with the slab tools. Slabs can be selected and opened for specification. For more information, see Slab Specification Dialog on page 287. To access the slab tools select Build> Structure> from the main menu or click the Slab Tools parent button. can be edited as a rectangular polyline in Plan View. For more information on editing the shape of slabs, see Editing Polylines on page 689. To edit its height and thickness, select the slab and click the Open Object edit button to open the Slab Specification dialog. For more information, see Slab Specification Dialog on page 287.
Slab Holes
A hole can be placed in a slab foundation or in the floor of a foundation with footings. Click the Slab Hole or the Slab Hole With Footing child button and click and drag within an existing slab in Plan View to create a hole within it.
Slabs
Click the Slab or the Slab With Footing child button and click and drag in Plan View to create a slab. The slab appears and
278
Piers & Pads

Piers and pads can be manually placed under walls, railings, or beams on any floor. Click the Round Pier or Square Pad child button and click beneath a wall in Plan View to place a Pier or Pad. The Pier or Pad that is placed uses the sizes from the Foundation Defaults dialog. For information on editing Piers and Pads, see Editing Piers & Pads on page 285.
toolbar, see Adding Tool Buttons on page 18), and draw a rectangular polyline to place a hole in the ceiling or floor platform above the current floor. If the foundation level is currently displayed in Plan View, a hole will be placed in the platform above, the floor platform for the first floor.
Slabs and the Materials List

If a volume type material such as concrete is used for the slab the materials list will calculate the total volume of the slab and all footings.
Platform Holes
Click the Platform Hole button (you may have to add it to your
Foundations are built based on the layout of walls in the first floor plan file. There must be at least one room on the first floor before a foundation can be built automatically. General foundation settings are defined prior to building a foundation. To build a foundation select the Build Foundation child button or choose Build> Floor> Build Foundation or Edit> Defaults Settings> Foundation Defaults to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. The Foundation Defaults dialog is divided into two tabs. It is used to define the general parameters of the foundation system before the foundation is built.
The Foundation Defaults dialog cannot be used to edit the foundation after it has been built. The foundation must be deleted and rebuilt. For more information, see Deleting Foundations on page 283.
279
Foundations
Foundation Tab
1 3 5
2 4 6
10 11 12
7 13
There are three types of foundations which may be created: Footings, Monolithic Slab, or Piers. Choose the desired type by selecting the radio button next to its name (at 4,5, and 10). Each foundation type has different settings, options, and behaviors. set to Default (concrete) this value defines the thickness of the stem wall. Any other wall type will define its thickness on the Layer Spec tab in the Wall Specification dialog. wall height. If the min. wall height is at least 6 (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated above the footing and a Basement ceiling height notation appears, displaying the distance from the top of the slab floor to the basement ceiling. It is the same as the Min. Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness. You must adjust theses values to get the desired
Basement Ceiling Height. The Ceiling Height can be changed later, see Room Specification Dialog on page 204. To delete the slab, specify the rooms in the basement as Open Below in the Room Specification dialog. of the slab produced above the footing or at the top of the stem wall. The Basement Ceiling Height is the Min. Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness. You must adjust theses values to get the desired Basement Ceiling Height. The Ceiling Height can be changed later, see Room Specification Dialog on page 204.
1 Wall Thickness - If the Wall Type is
3 Slab Thickness - Defines the thickness
2 Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem
Footings
Spread footings are used in conjunction with a stem wall. The footing is typically
280
wider than the stem wall and runs continuously under the base of the wall. generate a foundation system with a stem wall centered on a spread footing. Footings will automatically center below the stem wall. Individual footings may be centered differently, see Foundation Tab on page 177. Footing Size - Specify the Width and Height of the footing. The top of the footing is at the bottom of the slab. The exterior edge of the footing is at the exterior edge of the slab which lines up with the exterior main layer surface of the wall above. box to raise the slab floor so its top is flush with the top of the stem wall. The slab thickness can be defined. If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all rooms on the first floor are automatically set to Floor for this room is supplied by the foundation room from the floor below, as noted in the Structure tab in the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207.
4 Footings - Select the radio button to
Define button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog, allowing you to define new wall types that will appear in the drop down list.
8 Foundation Wall Type - Click the
9 All wall layer definitions listed in the

drop down list.
Default Wall Type dialog are in this
If the Default (concrete) wall type is selected, the thickness can be defined by the Wall Thickness field in the dialog. If you define any other wall type, the thickness is defined by the wall layer definition.
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall into a pony wall, you must define a wall type other than Default (concrete).
5 Slab at top of Stem Wall - Check this
Monolithic Slab
build a slab foundation with a perimeter footing. This foundation is the floor platform for the first floor. It is visible in the foundation plan and can be selected and edited with the Slab Specification dialog. When a Monolithic Slab foundation is selected, the program designates every room on the first floor as Slab foundation for this room in the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207.
Note: Monolithic slabs will be rebuilt whenever you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
10 Monolithic Slab - Select this option to
6 Footing Size - Specify the Width and

Height of the footing. To generate a foundation with a stem wall and no visible footing, set the footing width to the same dimension as the stem wall.
Mudsills
Height for the mudsill. If either value is set to zero, no mudsill will be produced.
7 Mudsill Size - Enter a width and
Piers 11 Piers - Select this option to generate a

pier and grade beam foundation. The
281
Foundations
floor framing rests directly on top of the grade beam. The height of the grade beam is defined by the Min. Wall Height. The thickness of the grade beam is defined by the Wall Thickness. The size and spacing of the piers are specified in the Piers section of this tab. If you have selected a wall type, only the Min. Wall Height is used to size the grade
beam, and the thickness comes from the wall layer definition. If you select Default (concrete) the grade beam is sized according to the Wall Thickness and the Min. Wall Height.
12 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
Maximum Separation of the piers. height for the basement displays here.
13 Basement Ceiling Height - The ceiling
Materials Tab 1 2 3
4 5
The Materials tab can be used with any type of foundation. Some options may be unavailable depending on the foundation type.
rebar are used per pier. The rebar does not display in Cross Section/Elevation Views, but will be added to the Material List. Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing for the rebar in the stem wall. If using rebar in a slab instead of mesh, the spacing applies to both directions.
1 #bars/course - Specify the number of supporting rebar in the Footing, and the number of courses of rebar in the Stem Walls. If piers are used specify how many
2 Course Spacing - Defines the Wall
282
New Floor Dialog
inches) for the rebar. In this illustration, 4 represents 4/8, or 1/2.
3 Bar size - Defines the size (in 1/8th
When Use Mesh is unchecked, the rebar specification for slab becomes available. These are added to the Material List, but do not display in the model.
4 Use Mesh - Select the check box to reinforce the slab floor with mesh instead of rebar. Uncheck this to use rebar.
5 Select any additional Options desired.
New Floor Dialog

Once you have finalized the settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog, click OK to open the New Floor dialog. the 1st floor plan - Select this option and click OK to build a Foundation floor based on the 1st floor plan. Foundation - Select this option and click OK to create a Foundation floor with no foundation, allowing you to manually draw foundation walls.
1 Derive new Foundation plan from
1 2
2 Make new (blank) plan for the
Displaying Foundations
Foundations
The foundation wall and the footing are drawn on the Architectural layers Foundation Walls and Footings. The Footings layer also controls the display of foundation piers, if they are present. In Plan View, footings are drawn with dashed lines and the wall is drawn with solid lines. Automatically generated Piers are drawn using a dashed line style. They are centered on the grade beam. The grade beam is represented by two solid lines. It aligns with the wall above unless specified otherwise.
Deleting Foundations
Once you have built your foundation plan, it is separate from the first floor plan from which it was created. If you change the position of the exterior walls on the first floor plan, the foundation is not updated. You must either edit the walls in your foundation plan to match with those above, or you can delete the foundation and rebuild it. You must delete and rebuild the foundation if you decide to change the foundation type. Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation to delete the current foundation plan. This will delete the .PL0 file from your disk. To
283
rebuild the foundation plan to match the new first floor plan, select Build> Floor> Build Foundation. The Foundation Defaults dialog will open allowing you to set the
general parameters for the new foundation plan. When you click OK the new foundation plan, .PL0, will be created.
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings

By default, the exterior surface of the main layer of the stem wall aligns with the exterior surface of the main layer of the wall above. If there is only one layer for both the stem wall and the first floor wall above it, the outsides of the walls will line up. The footing is centered on the stem wall unless specified otherwise on the Foundation tab of the Wall Specification dialog. For more information, see Foundation Tab on page 177.
Resizing Stem Walls

By Room
When the foundation plan is created, the foundation is built with a stem wall height specified in the Min. Wall Height field in the Foundation Defaults dialog. Once built, the height of the foundation stem wall (measured from the bottom of floor framing to top of the footing) can be set individually by room. Stem wall height can also be set independently of the basement floor height.
If adjacent rooms have different stem wall heights set, the stem wall that separates them will use the larger of these two values. This will only work if their floor heights are different by at least 1/16 inch.
stem wall the next time you Rebuild Walls/ Floors/Ceilings .
In 3D Views
Once the foundation is built, you can select individual stem walls in a Cross Section/ Elevation View to move the footing up or down. This method should only be used for detailed changes or for stepping the bottom of the foundation wall. For more information, see Creating Stepped Walls & Footings on page 169.
To set the stem wall height individually, select a room and click the Open Object edit button. The Room Specification dialog will open. On the General tab, enter a value in the Stem Wall Height field. This will redefine the height of the foundation
284
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations

If you have built a monolithic slab foundation or defined a room to have a slab foundation, you can use the Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs command to update the slabs. When you select this from the menu, the existing slabs will be deleted and rebuilt to match the current footprint of the walls that originally defined them. This allows you to quickly update the slab foundation after walls have been moved. It does not delete the .PL0 file. If you have manually edited the slab and changed it, these changes will be lost when the slab is rebuilt.
Editing Pier and Grade Beam Foundations

Once the piers are in place, they can be selected and moved by selecting Build> Structure> Round Pier and clicking on the pier. In this mode you can easily position the piers along the grade beam or adjust their diameter.
Editing Piers & Pads

You must be in either Round Pier or Square Pad mode in order to select a pier or pad. Choose either option from the Build> Structure menu or click the Round Pier or Square Pad child button to activate that mode. Click on an existing pier or pad to select it. When the three red handles display, several options will be available. Delete the selected pier or pad by selecting it and clicking the Delete edit button or pressing the Del key. You can also drag a side handle past the center and release the mouse. Resize the selected pier or pad by dragging in or out from either of the two side handles. To resize a pier or pad if one side is all the way against an outside wall intersection, select the pier or pad, hold down the Ctrl key and drag using the inside handle. Move the selected pier or pad by grabbing the center handle and dragging it along the wall. It stops automatically underneath an exterior corner.
285
Foundations
Move any pier or pad using a Dimension which locates an edge. If no such dimension exists, click Manual Dimension child button, and drag a dimension parallel to the wall containing the pier, within a couple feet of the wall. Select the pier or pad first and then click on the dimension. The Set Dimension dialog opens.
Change the value in the box to move the pier or pad accordingly. For more information, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644.
If you move a foundation wall or beam, any piers or pads it contains will move with it.
Foundations and Room Specification

When a foundation plan is created, any room included in the Living Area calculation generates a spread footing, grade beam, or slab foundation below it. Garages will generate a foundation as well. Exterior rooms do not automatically generate a foundation below them.
Note: To remove the concrete slab in the basement area, select a room and define it as Open Below in the Room Specification dialog.
These settings cause a 4" slab to sit on top of the footings, with a short stem wall around the garage. The stud walls are built on top of the stem wall. If Floor for this room is supplied by the foundation room from the floor below is selected, a Floor Overview on the foundation plan will include the slab. A Floor Overview on the 1st floor shows no garage floor. The floor height of the garage and the Top of Stem Wall need to be properly defined relative to the zero level of the first floor. Typically, the garage area in the foundation will need to be selected and the floor height or slab to stemwall top raised if it is to be less than 24" below the zero level of the main floor.
Garages
A room labeled Garage on the first floor produces a separate room in an automatically produced footings or pier foundation plan. The Structure tab in the Room Specification dialog for the Garage foundation "room" displays the following settings: Ceiling over this room is not checked. This foundation room supplies the floor for the room above is checked. The Garage is open below to use the floor from the room below.
Structure Tab
Two of the options on the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog affect the foundation. Slab foundation for this room and Floor for this room is supplied by the foundation room from the floor below. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207.
286
Slab Specification Dialog
Slab Specification Dialog

Select a slab and click the Open Object edit button to open the Slab Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 2 3 4
convert the selected slab into a slab hole. A slab hole must be contained within a larger slab.
1 Hole in Slab - Check this box to
Polyline Tab
2 Top Height - Set the top height of the

selected slab. selected slab.
3 Thickness - Set the thickness of the 4 Has Footing - Check this box if you would like the slab to have footings of the set height and width for the selected slab.
The total area of the selected slab displays here.
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab of the Slab Specification dialog is the same as the Selected Line tab of the CAD Polyline
287
Foundations
Specification dialog. For more
information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Slab Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to the terrain surface in 3D views. This material is not calculated in the Material List. The Materials tab of the Slab Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Slab Specification dialog is the same as the Fill
288
Chapter 12:
Stairs
Chapter Overview
Stairs may be either straight or curved. Any stair section may be flared. Up to two starter treads may be defined per staircase. Staircases can be composed of one or more stair sections (straight or curved) and landings, in any combination. Curved sections can be turned into winders. The stair components can be edited individually or together. Landings can be created automatically or manually. Their shape can be customized. You may adjust an existing landing, or create one from a closed CAD polyline. Landing heights are definable, or you can let them automatically adjust as needed. Local building and fire authorities should be consulted for specific stair construction codes and access requirements.
Chapter Contents
Stair Tools Stair Direction Displaying Stairs Selecting Stairs Deleting Stairs Resizing Stairs Moving Stairs Rotating Stairs Copying Stairs Stair Landings Merging Stair Sections Curved Stairs Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs Maintaining Tread Width Creating Winders Flared Stairs Starter Treads Other Special Stairs & Railings Creating a Stairwell Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases Staircase Specification Dialog Stair Landing Specification Dialog
289
Stairs
Stair Tools
Straight Stairs
To create a staircase, click the Stair Tools parent button and select one of the child tools. Click the Straight Stairs child tool to draw straight stairs. Click in the center of the first riser and, while holding down the mouse button, drag upstairs in the direction of the run. Straight Stairs: If you drag the stairs parallel to a nearby straight wall, straight stairs will be created against the wall. Straight stairs will also be created if you drag the stairs out in the open, away from any walls.
Curved Stairs
Click on the Curve to Left the Curve to Right curved staircase. child tool or child tool to place a
Drag near a curved wall using the Straight Stairs child tool and curved stairs will be created against the wall.
Stair Direction
When you drag to create a set of stairs, the stairs are created going UP, so stairs are normally created on the lower floor. Stairs drawn in the UP direction respond to floor heights and will adjust to connect between two defined floor heights. This is most easily illustrated by showing the cross sections of the straight and curved stairs just created. (Floor framing is also displayed to make the floors stand out more.)
290
Stair Direction
the upper floor after the stairwell (an Open Below room) has been created. Stairs will read DN in Plan View when seen from the upper floor. Before stairs are created, make sure that both the lower floor and the upper floor are correctly defined for height, and that the floors and ceilings have been updated. To update the floors and ceilings click on the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings child button. Stairs may be created from an upper level and drawn down, but these stairs are only aware of their current (upper level) floor height. To create a down staircase, you must hold down the Shift key and drag in the direction of the run. Since these stairs do not sense the lower level, they are used only when creating stairs from a specific platform (such as a deck or porch) down toward an unknown ground level or undefined grade. If the finished grade is known you can create a "room" using Invisible walls and establish the floor height for that area to match the finished grade. Click Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Ceilings to have the floor platform calculated at the lower elevation. Then draw a normal stair from the lower platform up to the upper platform. It will correctly link the two heights.
Notice that, in both cases, the staircase starts at the lower floor and automatically stops at the correct height on the upper floor. The rise and run may not automatically be what you want, but the stairs will reach the next level if enough risers are created. After the stairs are created, the stair specifications can be adjusted. Stairs will read UP in Plan View when seen on the lower floor. They will be visible from
291
Stairs
Displaying Stairs
In Plan View
Each line across the width of the stairs in Plan View represents a riser. This riser height is commonly called the "rise". The space between the two lines is the tread. The distance between the two lines is the tread width, commonly called the "run". Stairs are often described in terms of rise and run. The rise is typically between 6" and 8" and the run is between 10" and 12". A good rule of thumb is that the rise plus the run should equal 18" for the stair to be comfortable. Any rise over 7 1/2 is considered to be steep, regardless of the run. For metric plans, the riser height would be 177 to 190 mm and the tread width about 250 mm.
In 3D
Since stairs are not on the same floor as the stairwell opening, only the multi-floor cameras will simultaneously show both the upper floor with the opening and the lower floor with the stairs. Use the Full Camera , Cross Section/Elevation or Full Overview camera to generate a View displaying stairs. If the Full Overview is used, turn off the display of the roof and the ceiling in the 3D view in the 3D Display Options dialog or use Delete View Surface to open up the model.
Selecting Stairs
In Plan View, click on a stair section in Straight Stairs mode or Select Objects mode to select the stairs. When selected, the stair section is marked with several red handles. If a nearby object is selected instead of the staircase, click tthe Select Next Object edit button until the stair section is selected. When stairs are selected, the handles can be used to modify the stairs in many ways. A stair section can be resized, moved, deleted, rotated, or merged with another stair section. Its shape can be modified. A stair section can be turned into a winder and have its first two treads made into starter treads. A straight stair section can also be turned into a curved section and vice versa.
Handles for Straight Stairs

A single straight stair section, when selected, will display six handles. Each is defined in the diagram. End handles are used to stretch the stairs, but may also be used to merge stairs or to change the straight section into a
292
Selecting Stairs
curved section. (This is done by dragging the end handle while holding down the Ctrl key.) Move Side Extend End Extend End Move Stairs Move Side Rotate Stairs
Handles for Merged Stairs

When stair sections are Selected on Curved Subsection merged, the handles change. The handles available will depend on which subsection is selected. To the right is an illustration of a staircase composed of a straight stair section and a curved stair section. The staircase was selected on the curved subsection. Notice that the Move Side handles appear only on the selected section. To the right is the same stair system which was selected on the straight section. Note that the handles have changed from the previous illustration. Again, the Move Side handles appear only on the selected section. Selected on With combination Straight Subsection stairs, the stair section you select will directly affect your editing options.
Note: All handles will not be available for staircases composed of a single stair section. Handles on single stair sections may have different functions than the handles on a staircase composed of multiple sections.
Handles for Curved Stairs

A single curved stair section, when selected, will display eight handles. They are defined in the following diagram. The end handles may also be used to merge or straighten stairs (This is done by holding down the Ctrl key and dragging the end handle.)
Move Side Radially Extend End Move Side Center point Move Stairs Extend End Rotate Stairs Move Radially Change Curve
293
Stairs
Deleting Stairs
Select a stair section or landing. Click the Delete edit button or press the Del key. To delete a subsection on one end of a staircase composed of multiple stair sections, select that stair subsection and drag the end handle back until the subsection length is zero or less. Release the handle and that stair section will be deleted. When dragging back a curved subsection, be careful not to drag too far back or the curve may change into a subsection going a different direction.
Resizing Stairs
To resize by dragging, select a stair section. You will be able to stretch the end which was selected, and the unselected end will remain locked in place. Drag the Extend handle to lengthen or shorten the section. If the move is slight, the width of the treads will be adjusted and treads will not be added. Drag from either side handle to change the width of the stair section. When changing the width, the command box in the toolbar will display the current dimension. When dragging the top of the stair section to resize, movement can be stopped by a wall or railing on the same floor or the next floor. The top of a stair section can be stopped when it meets a wall on the next floor if the stairway reaches above 54" high. If the stairwell area has already been defined on the next floor, the top of the stairs can be dragged until it stops at the railing or wall defining the stairwell. If the stair section end is connected to a landing, and you resize the section from this end, it will move the landing and all connected sections.
The most accurate method of resizing stairs is to use the Staircase Specification dialog, see Staircase Specification Dialog on page 318.
Moving Stairs
Two methods exist for moving stairs. The first method is to drag the stairs using the Center Move handle. This movement is typically restricted to directions perpendicular to any side or end, but can be overridden whenever necessary. This method is fast and often accurate enough. The second, more precise method is to move the stairs by changing the actual dimension value in a dimension line which locates the stairs.
Move By Dragging
Select the stair section. Several red handles will appear. Use the handle that displays the
294
Moving Stairs
Move cursor when the mouse is placed above it, and drag the stairs to a new location. The stairs will move perpendicular to the sides and ends of the selected stair section, and will stop when they bump into a wall or rail. Continue until the stairs are positioned properly. Other stair sections merged to the selected section or attached by landings will typically move with the selected section. A stair section will stop when it or any stair section moving with it is moved into a wall. If it is moving along its length it will also stop upon one of its ends hitting a landing or the end of another stair section. If you move a stair section within a couple inches of a parallel wall, the stairs will automatically snap against it. Although stairs will stop when moved into walls, walls will not stop when moved into stairs. Walls can be accidentally moved through stairs. If a wall is moved into a staircase, reposition the staircase so it is properly aligned with the wall again. Moving stairs may appear to be slightly jerky. They usually move in 1" increments. This movement increment is defined in the Dimension Default dialog under Wall & Opening Snap Unit (double-click the Dimension Tools parent button).
are done, since it also affects the creation and the moving of many other objects in the plan.
Unrestricted Movement
Like most other objects, you can override the restrictions on moving stairs if necessary. This is helpful when trying to move one stair section next to another before creating a landing. To move the stair section freely, select the stairs, hold down the Ctrl key, and then grab the middle handle (which changes to a Move cursor) and drag the stairs to the new location.
Move Using Dimensions

Dimension may be used to position a stair exactly with the Set Dimension Line dialog. Drag a dimension line in Manual Dimension mode between the staircase and the wall or other reference item. Reposition the dimension line if necessary so that it properly locates the objects being used for locating the stairs. Select the staircase and click in the middle of the dimension line segment. The Set Dimension dialog will open. Type in the desired distance. Unless the feet mark (i.e. 36) is used, inches will be assumed. Click OK or press Enter . The stair will move accordingly.
affects creation and moving of stairs. If this is changed, reset it back to 1" when you
1 The Wall & Opening Snap Unit
295
Stairs
Rotating Stairs
Any stair can be rotated after it is created by dragging the triangular handle located outside the stair section. Dragging this handle in a circular motion will rotate the stairs around their center point, unless Rotate/Resize About Current Point is defined on the CAD page of the
Preferences dialog, see CAD Panel on
page 104. The stairs will rotate according to the Allowed Angles in the Plan Defaults dialog, see Plan Defaults on page 86.
Copying Stairs
Stairs do not copy in the traditional sense. Stairs may only be copied using the Edit Area tool. For information regarding Edit> Edit Area, see Edit Area Tools on page 750. To copy stairs, choose Edit> Edit Area. Draw a marquee around the stairs to be copied. Click the Copy button. Go to the plan or floor where the stairs are to be placed, and choose Edit> Paste. Click on the plan to place the copy. You will probably want to paste the copy of the stairs in an area outside the building. This allows you to move the stairs into position using the normal move tools, and leave behind anything else that copied along with the stairs. Edit Area copies everything inside the marquee. After moving the newly pasted stairs into position, Edit Area can be used to delete objects in the area into which the stairs were brought.
Stair Landings
To create a landing between stair sections: 1. Move the stair sections so that they are in the correct relationship to each other. Notice that 2. both are going the same direction...UP. Click between the two sections in Straight Stairs mode to create a landing. Notice that there is now only one direction arrow.
296
Stair Landings
Up to five stair sections may be connected to one landing. To be linked by a landing, all sections must be drawn in the same direction UP or DOWN, and the top of one section must be near the bottom of the next. Multiple stairs can be connected to the same landing. For example, you could have two or three stair sections meet at the same landing, with a single stair section continuing to the next level from there. A curved landing will create curved railings. To delete a landing, select it by one of its edges and click the Delete edit button or Del the key on the keyboard. Landings can be edited like CAD polylines. You can add or remove edges, convert an edge from straight to curved, or vice versa. A landing formed between two stair sections having less than a 90 degree angle between them will be created with a short edge not less than 6 inches (150 mm). This is because it might be considered a tread, and most codes require the shortest tread to be at least 6 inches. This short edge may be manually edited to less than 6 (150 mm).
3. 4.
Select the Landing radio button and click OK. The Stair Landing Specification dialog will appear. Define a Height and Thickness for the landing. If the Height is defined, the stair will meet the landing. If a "d" is typed in the Height value, the Height will be determined by connected stairs. Stair section ends will normally connect to a landing. To connect a stair section, drag the end handle of a stair section and drop it on the edge of the landing. You can also move the edge of a landing and drop it on the end of a stair section. Either method will connect the section and set the landing height accordingly.
5.
Landing Height
Landing heights may be controlled by the program or they may be user defined. A landing whose height is controlled by the program is said to be "unlocked". An unlocked landing adjusts in height as its attached stairs are modified. If, however, you specify a height for a landing, that landing is said to be "locked". A locked landing will maintain that height no matter how you adjust the stairs connected to that landing.
You can turn a closed polyline into a custom shaped landing with the Convert Polyline edit button. 1. 2. Draw a closed polyline. Select the closed polyline and click the Convert Polyline edit button and the Convert Polyline dialog will open.
Normally, the stair sections attached to a landing will determine the height of the landing. In this example, two stair sections are connected by a landing. Both stair sections have 7 treads. Notice that the tread width is the same in Plan View, because the
297
Stairs
Custom Shaped Landings
Unlocked Landings
landing height is set automatically according to the number of treads. All treads have the same tread width and riser height. Since both stair sections are the same length, the landing height is a half of the total height between the two connected floors. Unlocked Landing heights are set automatically when the stairs and landings are connected.
relationship between them becomes more complex. In this situation, you may wish to define the exact height of the landing instead of letting the program define it for you.
Locked Landings
Locked Landings have the landing height specifically defined, so the landing does not adjust automatically when there are changes in the stairs attached to that landing. Instead, the stairs automatically adjust to the landing. For example, start with the same staircase used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one single change: The landing height is now defined at 75". Notice that, instead of 7 treads per section, the program was forced to subtract a tread at the top and add treads at the bottom, just to keep the riser heights within a reasonable range. To "lock" a landing by defining a fixed height for that landing :
If the entire staircase forms a single path from the lower to the upper floor, with each landing connecting only two stair sections, the program can set landing heights without any difficulty. Since the stairs and landings are basically a single unit, a change in any stair section will affect the height of connected landings as well as the other stair sections. The stairs are defined, and the landing adjusts in height so that the entire stair system has the same riser height, regardless of how many stairs are placed on each side of the landing. This works well in most cases. If more than two stair sections meet at a landing, the
1.
Select the landing in Plan View and click the Open Object edit button to open the Stair Landing Specification dialog. The Height value will display with a (D), indicating that the landing height is defined by the stair sections.
2. 3.
Remove the (D) and enter the desired height. The landing will move to that height. Once you have defined a height for the landing, all stairs that meet that landing will be redefined.
The stair sections no longer relate to each other since they are attached to a locked
298
Merging Stair Sections
landing. Changes to one stair section will not affect the other.
landing. Since the landing is specifically positioned above the halfway mark, the upper stair section has very shallow (5") riser height, and the lower section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height. When you move a stair section, you move all other connected non-locked landings as well as the stair sections connected to those landings. A locked landing, however, will not move when you move attached stairs. The Staircase Specification dialog will display only the selected stair section and those connected to it by non-locked landings. Basically, a locked landing serves to break up what may be a complex network of stairs and landings into smaller pieces whose starting and ending heights are known. To unlock a landing and allow the landing height to be determined by the stair sections, follow the procedure for locking and enter a "d" in the height value box instead. The current height will reappear with "(D)" once entered. It will change to the appropriate height when the dialog is closed. For more information, see Dynamic Defaults on page 86.
In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted so it bridges the height from the floor to the
Any combination of straight or curved stair sections may be merged to create a single stair section. The resulting stair section is made up of subsections. It functions as a single unit if there are no landings. Stair subsections to be merged must all be created in the same direction. Multiple stairs drawn in the UP direction may be merged,
and multiple stairs drawn DOWN may be merged, but combinations of UP and DOWN stairs will not merge.
299
Stairs
Merging Stair Sections
To merge stairs together, position them so they are in the desired relationship to each other. Stair subsections will merge at the center points of the upper or lower risers.
misalignment is slight, the first tread of the higher section is reshaped to fit and the subsections connect nicely.
To merge two subsections, select either stair, grab the handle on the end to be merged, and drop that end on the point where the two stairs would meet. You may need to repeat this step with both subsections if they were not originally positioned correctly. Once merged, you have a stair section with two subsections. A stair consisting of merged subsections resembles a single stair section in Plan View. The UP (or DN) arrows will join, becoming a single direction arrow. Selecting any subsection will result in the entire merged section being selected. Most of the handles will appear within the boundaries of the selected subsection.
If the misalignment is greater, the sections still connect, but the stairs will not be correct unless edited.
Subsections can be joined into a single stair section without being aligned. If the
Be sure to position the stairs before merging, since stair editing capability changes when stairs are merged. For example, once merged, straight sections may not be individually rotated. Some new editing options become available while other options are lost.
300
Curved Stairs
Locked Tread Width

When dragging the end handle to lengthen or contract a section with Lock Tread Width selected, the length will change in jumps, one tread at a time. This makes it very difficult to merge the section to another section or landing. Instead, set the section length as you
wish and approximately align it with the other section. Now move the section into the other section or landing until it hits and stops. This will align and connect the two sections. You can then select the merged section and use the dialog to reset and lock the tread width.
Curved Stairs
Curved Stairs can be created by dragging along a curved wall in Stair mode or they can be created from a straight stair section. Once a stair section is curved, it can be manipulated and edited to the correct size and position. You can also use either the Curve to Left or the Curve to Right child buttons to place a 90 degree curved stair section that can then be edited. To create curved stairs from straight stairs: 1. Click the Straight Stairs child button and drag to create a straight stair section of any length. The length or width of the section is not yet important, it can be adjusted later. Select the section near the end you want to curve. 3. Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the end handle, and drag the section into a curve.
4.
Release the mouse when the stair section is approximately the shape desired.
2.
Aligning Ends of Curved Stairs

The top and bottom edges of curved stair sections may be aligned to walls, CAD objects, or other stair sections using the Make Parallel edit button. This is useful for making a curved staircase begin or end perpendicular to a wall or aligning the top of one section with the bottom of another. This process works only if the end of the stairs is not attached to a landing or another stair section.
301
Stairs
The following pictures show how to create a curved stair section from three straight subsections. 1. Draw three straight stair sections and connect them end to end.
1. 2.
Select the stairs near the end that you wish to realign.
edit button, Click the Make Parallel then click the wall, rail stair section or CAD object to reference. (Make sure the end of the stair section is within 20 degrees of parallel or perpendicular to the object.)
2.
Select the middle subsection and click on the Change Line/Arc button to change it into a curved subsection.
3.
The section will extend or contract from this end and along its curve to achieve the alignment.
The Make Parallel edit button can be used to align straight sections which may have shifted during a merge
Curving Enclosed Sections

Stair subsections bounded on both ends by other subsections do not have a free end which can be dragged into a curve using the Ctrl key. Other editing tools are available in this situation.
3.
The center section is turned into a curved stair section.
302
Curved Stairs
The Change Line/Arc edit button becomes available when any totally enclosed stair section is selected. The stair must be bounded on both ends by stair sections, not landings. If the selected stair section is straight, this tool will make it curved. If the selected stair section is curved, this tool will make it straight. Notice that, although the center stair section is curved, it does not flow smoothly into the straight sections. The technique for making any curved stair tangent to its neighboring stair is described in the following section.
3.
The enclosed curved stair section is made tangent to the stair sections on both ends.
Curved Stairs Made Tangent

Curved subsections can be made tangent with the subsections to which they connect
1. 2.
Select the middle subsection. Click on the Make Arc Tangent edit button to smooth the connections between it and the two outer subsections.
Aligning Curved Stairs Between Floors

You can align curved stairs between two floors if the one floor is displayed as the Reference Floor and Show Arc Centers, Ends is selected on the CAD Line
303
Stairs
using the Make Arc Tangent
edit button.
Editing curved stairs is similar to editing arcs with the CAD tools.
Properties page of the Preferences dialog. 1. Display the arc centers by selecting Show Arc Centers, Ends on the Line Properties panel of the Preferences dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Select the stairs to be moved. Click the Point-to-Point Move button to move the center point. edit
Click on the center mark of the stairs, then click on the center mark of the stairs shown on the Reference Floor.
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs

Single Section Stairs
For a curved staircase made up of a single section, select the stairs and grab the red handle which lies along the center curve of the stairs and drag the handle perpendicular to the stair. If you drag towards the center, the radius will decrease. If you drag the handle away from the center, the radius will increase. As the radius is adjusted, the length of the stair and the number of treads or the tread width will change depending on your selection in the Stair Specification dialog. You can drag any of the 4 handles along the edge of the stairs in order to stretch the stair sides just as you would a straight stair. Do not move the triangular handles or the center point handle or else the center of the stair will be moved.
Multiple Subsections
If a curved subsection is merged end-to-end, to a straight subsection, moving the handle which lies along the center of the up arrow will adjust the radius opposite the way it adjusts a single section curved stair. Dragging the handle away from the center will straighten the curve along the path of the straight subsection. Dragging the handle towards the center will move the center even faster in the same direction, increasing the radius and size of the curved portion, while decreasing the length of the straight portion of the stairs. The best way to adjust the radius of a curved section is to drag from the handles on its sides. This works consistently, whether or not the section is connected to other sections. When this is done, the center point will not move. Drag one side of the stairs to the correct radius. Once that side is positioned, drag the oppposite edge to define the desired width. If one side of the stairs is attached to a
304
Maintaining Tread Width
wall, you may also specify the width of the stairs in the Stair Specification dialog and only the unattached stair edge will adjust. If neither stair edge is attached to a wall, both will adjust if you use the dialog to specify the width. In this case, it is better to drag the edge to define the stair width.
1.
Display the arc centers by selecting Show Arc Centers, Ends on the Line Properties panel of the Preferences dialog, see Line Properties Panel on page 111. Select the stairs to be moved, then click the Point-to-Point Move edit button. Click on the center mark of the stairs, then click on the center mark of the curved wall, curved railing, arc or circle. The staircase will move so that the center of the radius is aligned with the center of the other curved object.
2. 3.
Matching the Center & Radius

The easiest way to match the radius of the stair to the radius of a curved wall is to create the stair by dragging near one side of the curved wall. The stair will snap to the wall, and the radius of the new staircase will be defined. If there is no curved wall, you can align the radius of the stair to a CAD arc or circle. To do this, you must first align the centers of the CAD object and the staircase. Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an existing curved wall by aligning their centers.
4.
Once centers are aligned, select the curved stairs and move the appropriate side to the wall surface by dragging from one of the side handles. Finally, fix the width by dragging from the other side handle or using the stair dialog.
Maintaining Tread Width

Walk Line
Most national and international building codes require staircases to maintain consistent tread width. By default Chief Architect measures the Length and Tread width of a stair section along a walk line. The walk line is typically located 12" (30 cm) from the edge of the stair section. On curved stairs it is measured from the edge nearest the center of the curve. You can specify the distance a walk line is measured from the stair edge or choose to turn off the walk line feature altogether, basing stair measurements from the treads center. For more information, see Staircase Specification Dialog on page 318. When the Walk Line is used, the number and/ or width of treads in a section or subsection changes when the inner edge of a curved stair is moved, since the walk line is measured from this inner edge. It is recommended that you set the stair section width as early as possible to its final value.
305
Stairs
Once locked, any lengthening or contracting of the stair section will be made one tread at a time, maintaining the specified tread width.
11"
11"
Ignore Subsection Boundaries

Uniform tread width can also be maintained without locking by selecting Ignore Subsection Boundaries in the General Tab of the Staircase Specification dialog. This will maintain a consistent tread width throughout a stair section, without regard to subsection boundaries. The tread width value may change when the stair section is edited, but will be consistent throughout all subsections. Since the program is ignoring the boundaries where one stair section merges with another, this may result in having the treads where a straight section joins a curved section become angled slightly to accomodate the adjustment.
Measured at Center of Tread
Measured at Walk Line
There are two ways to keep tread width even throughout a stair section made of multiple subsections.
Lock Tread Width

The first is to Lock Tread Width to a specified value in the general tab of the Staircase Specification dialog. A stair section consisting of multiple subsections must have the tread width locked for each.
These are the subsection boundaries. Note that they are straight, exactly as created. The walk line around the center treads, however, is too narrow.
Check "Ignore Subsection Boundaries" to have the program adjust all the treads of a stair system so that they maintain consistent width along the walkline. Note that it had to adjust the boundary lines to accomodate the walk line along the center stairs.
306
Creating Winders
Creating Winders
Both curved and straight stairs may be turned into winders. When defined as a winder, the stairs will extend to fill in any gap between the side of the stairs and nearby walls. 1. In this illustration, the staircase is composed of two straight sections with a curved section in the middle. Select the stairs on any section, and click the Open Object edit button. 3. Select the Winder check box in the Staircase Specification dialog and click OK. Note how the curved section extends to the corner after the stair has been changed to a winder. Turning the stairs into winders may cause the interior edge to snap to the inside edge of the walls underneath the stairs, as shown below.
2.
4.
Winders MUST be in a room with valid room definition before they will work. You cannot create winders in an area composed of only 2 corner walls. If this configuration is needed, close the area in with Invisible walls so that a room is established.
Troubleshooting Winders
Winders may exhibit unusual behavior in the specific situation where walls are used to create a "room" below the stairs.
When a stair is defined as a winder, the curved stair section will always expand to fill in the gaps between the stair and the wall. A problem may occur when one side of the staircase overlaps the walls used to create a room underneath the stairs. In this case, you do not want that stair edge to contract until it is against the inside edge of the wall below.
307
Stairs
In the following illustration, the dark stair lines represent the stairs before they are turned into winders. They do not fill the corner gap. The inside edge of the stairs extends well beyond the walls below. (The walls are also shown.)
.
the edge of the stairs would have to move inward more than this defined amount (between its current position and its new position against the inside wall), the stairs will not contract and snap to the inside edge of the underlying walls. Following is a closeup view of a staircase which has a "room" beneath it. (The linetype for the stairs layer was changed to a dashed line so the walls beneath the stairs would display in Plan View.)
The shaded area shows what happens when these stairs are turned into winders. The winder treads expand to fill the corner gap. The edge of the stairs which originally overlapped the wall contracts until it lies against the inside edge of the walls which define the room below the stairs. This problem is easily corrected by limiting the distance the stair edge is allowed to move inward when the stairs are turned into winders. This limitation is called the Max Tread Contraction. This value is defined in the Style tab of the Staircase Specification dialog. The Max Tread Contraction defines the largest distance that any section of the stair system is allowed to move inward when the stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
If the distance (E) from the inside corner of the stair (C) to the inside corner of the walls under the staircase (D) is less than or equal to the Max Tread Contraction, then the stair will snap to the inside edge of the wall. If the distance (E) is greater than the Max Tread Contraction, the staircase will remain unaltered.
308
Flared Stairs
To correct the problem with the staircase, select the stairs in Plan View. Then click the Open Object
Stair Specification dialog. On the Style
edit button to display the
tab, change the Max Tread Contraction to a non-zero value less than any known distance that any stair edge would have to contract if it were to move to the inside edge of the wall beneath the stairs. Since the stair extends slightly beyond the wall, you could safely use a value up to the thickness of the wall. In this case, the wall is 3-1/2" wide, so the Max Tread Contraction was set to 2.
To prevent this type of situation from occurring, always set the Max Tread Contraction to a small, non-zero value. A value of zero is the same as setting a high value. It will not limit the snap distance the stair edge will contract.
Flared Stairs
Any stair section can be flared using the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button that appears when a stair section is selected. When this button is selected, many new handles display for editing the stairs.
309
Stairs
Creating a Flared Stair

1. 2. Create the stairs. Select the stairs, then click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. New handles will display on the stairs. Notice that all four corners of the stairs now have a flare handle. Drag one of the corner handles to flare that corner. Observe the toolbar window or the status bar as you drag the flare. These will show the amount the side handle moves outward. This information is important if you plan to move the opposite handle the same amount.
3.
These are the main handles used for flaring or curving stair treads. Below each picture is an example of how the handles may be used to adjust the stairs. One additional set of handles is provided. For more information, see Selecting Stairs on page 292.
310
Flared Stairs
Symmetrically Flared Stairs
dragged up or down. The illustration above shows curved treads added to a curved staircase. Other stair editing has been done as well, but the focus of this section is the curving of the treads.
1.
Select the stair which already has one side flared. Click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. Drag the flare handle on the opposite side until it has been moved outward the same amount as the first handle.
1. 2.
2.
Select the stairs. Click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. Drag the handle positioned in the center of the bottom edge. Drag a small amount. The treads will curve accordingly.
Curving the Treads
Softening the Flare Radius

The four handles at the sides, and the four handles at the corners flare the stair section when dragged outward from it. The two handles in the center of the section move the starting point for flaring along the stair section. After the flare has been created, you may want to soften the radius of the flare.
The handles at the center of the top and bottom riser will curve the treads when
311
Stairs
1. First, adjust the flared sections curvature: 2.
Select the flared stair and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to display the flare handles again. This time, drag the lower of the two central handles upward. The handle above it will move with it. This moves the start point for the bottom flare from the middle of the section toward its top, making the flare even more gradual.
Treads Perpendicular to Flare

A stair section often looks better if the treads curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to the radius.
1.
Select the flared stair and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to display the flare handles again. Select the handle along the side of the stair, on the edge having the flare. Drag this handle outward very slightly. This forms a more gradual flare.
2.
Then adjust the starting point of the flare:
312
Starter Treads
To create this effect, drag the lower left handle upward a tread width or less. This type of tread curving works only for a flared edge and concentrates the curvature at that edge. You could also choose to curve the tread more uniformly by dragging downward from the center bottom handle.
Drag just a few inches to create the curve shown in the picture. The section does not need to be flared to have this type of curvature and the curvature affects all treads in the section, each one less as it gets further from the curved end until no curvature is given to the tread at the other end of the section. You can, if you wish, impose a curve on the other end as well.
Starter Treads
The first and second tread of a staircase can be modeled with rounded ends, also known as starter treads. This is common with traditional staircases. Starter treads can be specified on one or both sides of the stair with the Starter Tread edit button. This rounded tread can be added to one or both sides of a stair section. If the stair section is against a wall, only the tread away from the wall is changed.
313
Stairs
4.
Drag either of the handles outward from the stair section. If the stair section is against a wall, only one handle will appear on the side opposite the wall. The ends of the tread will become rounded and the width of the tread will increase as you drag. Once the first tread is edited in this way, two handles will display on each side. Drag either of the outer handles away from the stair to extend the tread further out, or push it back in to change the starter tread back to normal. Drag either of the two inner handles upward to increase the width of the rounded ends of the tread. Repeat the steps to modify the second tread. Handles for the second tread are displayed by selecting the stair on the second tread before clicking on the Starter Tread edit button.
5.
6. 7. To radius the starter treads: 1. Select a stair section by clicking in the lowest tread. The Starter Tread edit button will appear. 8.
9.
Note: You must select either the first or the
edit second tread, or the Starter Tread button will not display. The tread selected will
be the tread modified.
2. 3.
Click the Starter Tread
edit button.
10. Both the first and second treads have been modified.
One red handle will appear on the ends of the first tread.
314
Other Special Stairs & Railings
Other Special Stairs & Railings

Solid Railings
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create the solid rail and drag it up against (but not underneath) the stairs. The solid rail will sense the adjacent stairs and will climb alongside the stairs.
Concrete Stairs
To make a simple solid concrete staircase: 1. 2. 3. Set the Tread overhang to zero. Set the Tread thickness to zero. On the Material tab, set the Tread and the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.
Steel Stringer
1. 2. 3.
Setting Tread Thickness to 2-inches or more. Select the Single Stringer check box. On the Material tab, set the Tread material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim material to steel.
315
Stairs
If any balusters show beyond the railing, eliminate them by clearing the checkbox for Left railing or Right railing. These settings are found in the Style tab of the Staircase Specification dialog.
To make a steel central support with pre-cast concrete treads:
Masonry Stairs
To make a set of masonry stairs: 1. 2. 3. Set the Tread Overhang to zero. Set the Tread Thickness to the thickness of the masonry. On the Material tab, set the Tread material to the masonry material and the Riser/Trim material to concrete.
Creating a Stairwell
A staircase needs to be located in a stairwell. This opening is actually created on the floor above by defining an area to be Open Below (named in the Room Specification dialog), which will eliminate the floor in that location. For more information, see Room Types on page 194. ing are step-by-step instructions for creating a stairwell manually. 1. 2. Draw a two-story building. Create the staircase on the first floor. Make the second floor the Current Floor and the first floor the Reference Floor. Click the Reference Display On to show the Reference Floor. The stairs will show in the Reference plan. If they dont show, make sure they are checked in the reference table, see Displaying Objects on page 128. On the upper floor, use the Railing tool to lay out a room around the stairs. It is easiest to draw the room larger than the stairs and then move the railing into position.
Creating a Stairwell Automatically

To create a simple stairwell that matches the perimeter of the staircase, select the staircase and click the Form Stairwell edit button. This will automatically create a room on the floor above and set it to Open Below in the Room Specification dialog. The room can then be selected and edited like any other room.
3.
4.
Creating a Stairwell Manually

Stairwells can also be created manually, allowing you to create an opening that does not match the shape of the staircase. Follow-
316
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases
5.
Select the railings one at a time and drag them into position.
9.
Click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings button to generate the hole in the upper floor. The stairs will now show through and will be labeled DN.
6.
When the railings are positioned properly, turn off the visibility of the reference floor by pressing the Reference Display On . Select the room by clicking inside it in Select Objects mode, then clicking Open Object edit button. In the Room
Specification
10. Place a Doorway in the railing at the top step for an opening. 11. Select the doorway and define a large width in the Door Specification dialog. If the doorway is specified larger than the railing, the door will maximize to fit the available space.
7.
8.
The results in 3D.
dialog, change the room name to Open Below.
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases

Walls are drawn below the stairs.
To define a room beneath a staircase with walls: 1. 2. Draw a staircase. Select the staircase and click the Open Object edit button to open the Staircase Specification dialog. If Winders were specified, set Max Tread Contraction to 2" to allow for walls defining a room under a winder. Draw the walls on the same floor as the stairs, following the shape of the stairs. It is easiest to draw the walls outside the
3.
Change linetype to see items below stairs.
4.
317
Stairs
stairs. Draw all walls needed to create a room under the stairs. 5. Select each wall in turn and drag it just underneath the stairway, making sure that it does not stick out beyond the stairs. When you release the wall, it will disappear in Plan View because it is blocked by the staircase. Stairs are opaque in Plan View. Stairs block the visibility of the walls or other objects placed below the stairs. The wall at the foot of the stairs should be placed no closer to the bottom than halfway through the second step. If it is placed too close to the bottom step, 7.
pieces of wall will shoot up through the stairs rather than being chopped off. When the walls are located properly, click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings child button and the walls will be cut off cut by the stairs. When the room under the staircase is properly defined, base molding will follow the walls. Doors can be added.
8.
6.
To see the walls and other objects under the stairs, open the Layer Display Options dialog and change the linetype of the stairs to anything other than solid line. Both the stairs and the walls below will display.
Staircase Specification Dialog

The highest accuracy in defining a staircase is available through the Staircase Specification dialog. If more than one stair section attaches to landings, information about all the linked stair sections is displayed in the specification dialog. If a stair section is composed of multiple subsections, the complete section may be adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its individual subsections. Any section or subsection can be used to open the Staircase Specification dialog for the entire stair system.
It is important that all floor heights, ceiling heights, floor thickness and ceiling thickness be established correctly before using the Staircase Specification dialog.
There are five main divisions in this dialog, each represented by a tab at the top. The tabs are labeled General, Style, Newels/ Balusters, Handrail, and Material. Any changes made in any of the tabs will be applied when you click OK. Select any stair section and click the Open Object edit button, or double-click on a stair section in Straight Stairs mode or Select Objects mode. The Staircase Specification dialog will appear. You may also double-click the stairs in a 3D view while in Select Objects mode.
318
General Tab
2 5 7 4 6 8
3 9 11 10 12
13
14
15
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it does not reach, click the Make Reach button which appears, and risers are added. The bottom edge of the stair section extends until the staircase is able reach the next floor. the values as they were when the dialog was first opened. Revert only works within the same editing session. If you select and then clear one of the Retain # treads in check boxes, the settings will also revert. staircase. This information cannot be edited directly, but will update with changes made in the dialog.
1 The comment line tells whether or not
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to see the information update to the new settings. requires ___ risers to reach ___ inches to next floor. This area explains the extent of the stair. Always check the number of inches (mm) to the next floor. This number is usually comprised of the ceiling height of the room plus the platform thickness of the floor above. If a locked landing is used, the height of that landing will be used to calculate this information. For more information, see Locked Landings on page 298.
4 Best riser height of ___ inches
2 Click the Revert button to restore all
3 This section lists information about the
5 Select Stair Sections Move Separately

to move each section separately. This
319
Stairs
will break apart a staircase at the landings when they are moved. It will not break apart sections into the individual subsections. If this option is grayed out, no landings exist. box to lock the tread width to the value set in the Tread Width area. If subsections are not displayed, the tread width displayed for each section is the average of all subsections. Checking Lock Tread Width or Ignore Subsection Boundaries (below), ensures that the tread width shown is really the true tread width throughout the entire section. Select the check box to maintain tread width throughout a stair section composed of merged subsections, without regard to subsecton boundaries. For more information, see Ignore Subsection Boundaries on page 306. the check box to lock the number of treads in the stairs section as a whole. This does not include landing. It does not define the distribution of those treads throughout the different stair subsections.
section will expand to show stair sections and subsections. All stair sections linked by unlocked landings to the selected stair section will display in the lower part of the dialog. If you select Retain # Treads in: Subsection, then all subsections will display. You can modify a stair section as a complete unit or you can modify each subsection. There are five values which can be changed. A change in one value usually affects other values in the same row. You may need to reposition the staircase after the changes.
6 Lock Tread Width - Select the check
7 Ignore Subsection Boundaries -
horizontal length of that stair section as seen in Plan View. This is calculated automatically by multiplying the number of treads by the tread width. It may by defined with a specific value. For a curved section or subsection, this length is measured along the walkline. Before you change the length, you may wish to first select Retain # Treads. When the length of a section changes, the selected end of that section (a handle displays at that end) will move. All other stairs and landings connected to that end must also move. individual tread. Enter a value to specify the desired Tread width. To lock this value, select the Lock Tread Width check box. If you do not specify the tread width for each subsection, you will be specifying the tread width for the whole section.
9 Section # - Identifies the stair sections. 10 Length defines the total run, the
8 Retain # Treads in: Sections - Select
Retain # Treads in: Subsection - Select the check box to specify the number of treads in each subsection. If you have selected either checkbox, any change in the length of a stair section will be evenly distributed among the treads in that section (or subsection). No new treads will be added. The lower section of the dialog is used to define the parameters of the stair. This
11 Tread Width is the run of each
320
Note: You cannot lock both the Tread Width and Retain the Tread Count in a stair section. If a landing is created between two stair sections, one of which has locked tread width, the staircase formed will have locked tread width.
section. This can be changed directly, but the maximum angle you can enter is 42 degrees.
14 Rise Angle defines the steepness of the
If a landing is created by clicking between two stair sections, one of which has locked tread width, the staircase formed from them will have locked tread width. When the landing forms, the sections to which it connects will not contract or expand as for unlocked tread width. Instead they, and all landings and sections connected to them will move as necessary to line up with the new landing. If the portion above the new landing is not connected to an existing landing, it will move. Otherwise, the sections and landings below the new landing will move. treads for the stair section or subsection. If you enter a value and want to keep the value from changing, you must check Lock # treads to lock the value.
To model a steeper angle and exceed the 42 degree limit, you can decrease the Length, Tread Width and/or # Treads. section. Only one width can be defined for a section. All subsections in the same section will have the same width.
15 Sec. Width defines the width of the
12 # Treads defines the specific number of
321
Stairs
the selected section into winders. This affects the section as a whole, even if it is defined by subsections. If there are multiple sections in a staircase, separated by landings, each section can be individually defined as having winders.
13 Winders - Select the checkbox to turn
Style Tab
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10
13 15 17 19
12 14 16 18
The Style tab redefines the style of the staircase. It will affect all sections and subsections equally. These options can be used in any combination.
2 inches (50 mm) or greater when this is checked. box to add a skirt below the staircase along the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it has only a single face. Baseboard will not generate along the bottom of the skirt, and doors cannot be placed in the skirt. The preferred way to enclose the area beneath stairs is by using walls. For more information, see Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases on page 317. eliminate the riser beneath the front of each tread. The stringers will be exposed unless Closed Sides is also selected. In that case, the stair section sides are considered to be the stringers and no central stringer is supplied. box to widen the stringer at the foot of the staircase. Check this if using walls to
4 Open Underneath - Clear the check
1 Closed Sides - Select the check box to raise each exposed stringer to cover the sides of the treads. If this is checked, no central stringer is applied to open riser stairs. This setting only affects those stringers which are not against a wall.
to produce a baseboard trim (raised stringer top) at the sides of the stair sections that are against walls. This baseboard follows the slope of the stair.
2 Stringer at Wall - Select the check box
5 Open Risers - Select the check box to
to form a single 5-inch (125-mm) thick stringer in the center of the staircase. Selecting this checkbox automatically checks the checkbox for Open Risers and clears the checkbox for Closed Sides. You will usually want to increase the tread thickness to about
3 Single Stringer - Select the check box
6 Large Stringer Base - Select the check
322
create a room below the stairs so the walls baseboard will better meet the stringer.
This does not go to the Material List. See the following illustration. top stringer where stairs run along a wall, or where "Closed Sides" is specified. This is measured from the top of the tread along the riser face to the top of the stringer. It must not be less than 2 inches (5 cm). See the following illustration.
14 Stringer Top - Specify the height of the
check box to have the entire staircase use the same material defined by the railing. Individual materials can be defined for the various parts of a staircase if this is not checked. to use the walk line for tread width calculations. For more information, see Walk Line on page 305.
7 Use Exterior Materials - Select the
14 13 12
8 Use Walk Line - Select the check box

of the bottom stringer. This is measured from the top back corner of the tread down to the bottom edge of the stringer. It must be equal to or greater than the riser height. a carpet runner on the stairs. This is defined for all sections connected by nonlocked landings. The default value of 0 will not create a runner.
15 Stringer Bottom - Specify the height
box to make the Walk Line visible in Plan View. make the up arrow or down arrow visible in Plan View.
9 Show Walk Line - Select the check
10 Show Arrow - Select the check box to 11 Runner not Tucked - Normally a
16 Runner Width - Specify the width for
carpet runner is tucked under the tread overhang. Check this and the runner will span directly from the tread front to the bottom of the riser below. that the Tread overhangs the riser. See the following illustration.
far from the edge of the stairs the Walk Line is measured. This is normally 12 inches. - Define the amount a tread will contract to create a winder. For more information, see Troubleshooting Winders on page 307. be specified here in Base versions of
12 Tread Overhang - Specify the amount 13 Tread Thickness - Specify the
18 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)
thickness of the material for each tread.
19 Railing Width - The railing width can
323
Stairs
17 Walk Line from Edge - Specify how
Chief Architect. If you are using the Full version of Chief Architect this setting can be found on the Hand Rail tab.
Newels/Balusters Tab
1 3
2 4
10 11 12 13 14
5 7 9
6 8
railing top from the tread surface, directly over the riser. landing rail top from the landing surface.
1 Stair Rail Height - Height of the
2 Landing Rail Height - Height of the 3
Newel Type - Select Square (four sided), Round, or Library Newels. Selecting Library from this drop down list is the same as clicking the Library button to the immediate right and allows selection of a Newel from the library.
Baluster Type - Select Square (four sided), Round, or Library Balusters. Selecting Library from this drop down list is the same as clicking the Library button to the immediate right and allows selection of a Baluster from the library.
Newel Width - Width of each Newel. For a Library Newel this is its width, or diameter, at its widest point.
Baluster Width - Width of each Baluster. For a Library Baluster this is its width, or diameter, at its widest point.
Newel Height - This is the height from the landing surface to the top of the Newel. This is used only when Rail passes over Newel at (14) is unchecked.
324
Bracket - Select Library to apply a quarter inch thick Bracket to the side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets are applied only where the side of the stairs is not against a wall. The stringer on that side is moved in 1/ 4 inch to accomodate the Brackets.
Library - Click this button to display the Library Browser, allowing you to select a Baluster, Newel, or Bracket.
10 Railing - Select either or both check boxes to include railings on that side of the stair sections and landings where they are not against a wall.
Railing at Wall - Check to provide a railing attached to a wall to which the side of the stairs is also attached.
Checking both Railing Transitions and Smooth Transitions will produce a handrail like this:
Smooth Transitions - Check to produce a smooth connection between stair and landing railings.
325
Stairs
Railing Transitions - Check to produce "gooseneck" connections between stair and landing railings.
No Shoe for Rail - This option applies only to landing rails. Uncheck this to place a low rail on the landing surface. This rail recieves the Baluster bottoms.
11
to instead cut off the top to make shorter Balusters. Newels at First Tread - Check this box to place a Newel where the rail starts at the base of the stairs. A Newel is placed only on a side where the stairs are not against a wall.
13
Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally has two to three Balusters, growing longer toward its back. The default is to use the same Baluster and cut it off at the bottom to shorten it toward the tread front. Check this
12
Rail Passes Over Newel - The Newel Height is adjusted to reach the bottom of the rail, which passes over it. Checking this causes the Newel Height at (7) to be ignored.
14
Handrail Tab
The Handrail tab is available only in the Full Version of Chief Architect
1 3
2 4 5 6
profile being used. Typically this will say "Default Handrail" unless a custom handrail profile has been selected.
1 Molding - Displays the current handrail
specify a profile from the library to be used as a handrail. custom handrail that has been specified and use the default handrail.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a
Select - Click this button to open the Select Library Object dialog and
326
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
molding profile. No preview will display for the "Default Handrail" option, which is rectangular.
4 Preview Pane - Displays the selected
5 Width - Specify the width of the

railing.
Materials Tab
Note: Handrails are displayed on their side, rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open Object edit button to open the Stair Landing Specification dialog.
Polyline Tab
For more information, see Polyline Tab on page 690.
General Tab
Selected Line Tab

For more information, see Selected Line Tab on page 691.
1 2 3
Line Style Tab

For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681.
Fill Style Tab 1 Height - Specify the height of the landing. Enter a "D" to default this. If defaulted, the height is determined by corrected stair sections once you exit the dialog. 2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the
landing. Enter a "D" to default this. railing on the edge nearest which you clicked whe originally selecting this landing. For more information, see Fill Style Tab on page 692.
Materials Tab
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress
327
Stairs
328
Chapter 13:
Roofs
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects roof tools allow you to create almost any roof style manually. Many roof styles can also be created automatically. Any roof plane can also be edited using a variety of tools and the Roof Plane Specification dialog. The manual roof editing tools allow you to create new roof planes and modify existing roof planes. A proficiency with roof tools is very valuable and can be attained only through practice. Mastering these tools will save you time and effort in plan development.
Verify that all roof planes join as intended. The program will not confirm correct geometry between manually designed or edited roof planes. It is possible to design and edit roof planes whose hips and valleys do not meet properly.
Roof Defaults The Roof Tools Skylights
329
Roofs
Chapter Contents
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs Automatic Roofs Automatically Generated Roof Styles Roof Baselines Editing Roof Baselines Gable/Roof Line Manual Roofs Roof Planes Displaying Roof Planes Selecting Roof Planes Deleting Roof Planes Editing Roof Planes Locating Roof Plane Intersections Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors Ceiling Planes Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings Build Roof Dialog Roof Baseline Specification Dialog Roof Plane Specification Dialog Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog Roof Pitches in Degrees
Roof Defaults
Once roof information is specified in the wall or automatically produced roof baselines, it is saved until you edit the information. Every time you Build Roof Planes from the Build Roof dialog, the information is referenced. If the information needs to be edited, there are a couple of options available. Any individual wall, or roof line segment, can be defined with default settings, or redefined with new roof information, by changing the information defined in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog or in the Roof Baseline tab of the Roof
Baseline Specification dialog for the
roof line. To return a roof plane to the default settings, you must clear all of the check boxes on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Also, type a "d" and press the Tab key to replace numeric values with their defaults. To restore defaults for all roof sections choose Edit> Default Settings> Reset to Defaults. Place checks in the appropriate boxes. For more information, see Reset to Defaults on page 89.
The Roof Tools

Click the Roof Tools parent button to enter Roof mode and display the Roof Tools child buttons.
Gable/Roof Line
Use the Gable/Roof Line child button to draw a roof base line that defines the location of a gable when it is part of a longer bearing wall. Use the Gable/Roof Line child button to place a gable within a roof plane. The Gable/Roof Line child button can also be used to continue a base line to extend a continuous roof even though there is no wall below.
Roof Plane
Click the Roof Plane child button to draw a roof plane manually. Double-click the Roof Plane child button to display the Build Roof dialog and specify the settings for the Automatic Roof Generator.
Ceiling Plane
Click the Ceiling Plane child button to draw a ceiling plane manually. For more information, see Ceiling Planes on page 350.
Skylights
Click the Skylight - child button to draw a skylight and skylight shaft. For more information, see Skylights on page 331.
330
Skylights
Fix Roofs
Use the Fix Roofs child button to move broken roof edges at ridges, hips, or valleys into a clean edge.
Delete Roof Planes

Use the Delete Roof Planes child button to delete all roof planes.
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting Build> Roof> Skylight from the menu or clicking the Skylight child button and drawing a rectangular polyline within a single roof plane. By default the skylights shaft surfaces are automatically produced. If a ceiling is present below, placing a skylight will automatically build the ceiling platform hole, which can be edited separately to control the shaft. Select the skylight and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. For more information, see Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog on page 362. The polyline that defines the shape of the skylight can be moved and reshaped like a standard polyline, but it must remain contained by its roof plane. If you clear the Skylight check box in the Roof Hole/ Skylight Specification dialog, the curb and glass for the skylight will be removed and the opening will remain. By default the ceiling plane hole does not display seperately, it can however be displayed and edited seperately, and even deleted from the roof plane entirely. For more information, see Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog on page 362. If the roof plane is deleted, any holes it contains will also be deleted. The system maintains the opening as a closed polyline. The Break Line tool will form a joint in an edge of the roof opening just as it would in a roof plane edge, but will not sever the edges at the joint. Placing a skylight does three things. A flat panel skylight is placed into a roof hole, a hole is produced in the ceiling platform below, and the skylight shaft between these two holes is automatically produced.
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can accomodate many different roof styles. Most common roof styles such as hips and gables can be generated automatically. More complex roof styles can be created manually and saved. The manual roof editing tools allow you to create virtually any roof system which is representable by roof planes. There are several ways to produce a roof for your plan. First and easiest, specify your Pitch, Roof Overhang and simply check Build Roof Planes in the Build Roof dialog.
331
Roofs
Here you can specify things like the pitch, boxed eaves This will build a default hip roof. With a little more work, you can select exterior walls from which the roof will rise, and in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog specify a Full Gable Wall, or that the roof can push down and pass over an interior Knee Wall, etc. Next, use the Build Roof dialog to Make New Roof Baselines instead of a new roof. Each line can be selected and loaded with the same (gable, kneewall, etc.) information you
can load into walls. In addition, the baselines can be moved and reconfigured as desired. Then select Use Existing Baselines from the Build Roof dialog to build your roof. Any additional customization must come from using the manual roof plane creation and editing tools. With the manual tools you can start from scratch, or you can go as far as possible using the automatic roofs as outlined above, and then edit and change some of the automatically produced roof planes as well as create new ones.
Automatic Roofs
The Build Roof dialog creates a roof plan from basic user established parameters, such as pitch, overhang and shape. The type of roof plane that each wall supports is set through the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. The program then models the roof planes and joins them precisely at ridges and valleys. Roof information is stored in the wall itself, which is used to automatically generate different roof styles. A wall may be defined as a Full Gable Wall, a High Shed/Gable Wall, a Knee Wall, or an Extend Slope Downward Wall on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Pitch can be defaulted for the whole house in the Build Roof dialog or defined for individual roof planes in the Wall Specification dialog. A double-pitched roof (such as used for a mansard roof) can also be specified. As several walls are individually defined, the combinations can create a wide variety of roof plans. Bay, bow and box windows will produce additional roof surfaces automatically. For information on these windows and the roof styles that can be used with them, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on page 250.
332
Automatic Roofs
Wall Specification Dialog
1 3 5
2 4
6 8
9
The type of roof built is defined on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Automatically generated roofs over exterior walls place hip roofs by default. Any automatically generated roof style other than a hip requires roof information to be specified in the wall. In some cases this information can also be specified in the Baseline Specification dialog for a selected baseline. To specify the roof information, you must select the wall(s) and click the Open Object edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog. Click the Roof tab to specify the roof information.
Group select and change multiple walls simultaneously. Select the first wall, then hold down the Shift key and click on additional walls. Then click the Open Object edit button.
It can produce ridges, but it may also be used for gable ends that have a raked wall. interior wall whose height is defined by the roof plane, not the ceiling height. to extend the roof plane downward over a bumpout, instead of creating additional roof sections. this and the selected wall will have both its top and bottom clipped by two roof planes that overlap each other. An example would be the wall at the side of a dormer. the roof plane to rise from this wall does not match the default roof pitch for the structure. roof plane with two pitches. Use this tool to create Gambrel roofs.
3 Knee wall - Check this to define an
4 Extend slope downward - Check this
5 Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom - Check
6 Pitch - Enter a value here if the pitch of
gable roof over the entire wall. This places a ridge over the middle of the wall.
1 Full Gable wall - Check this to create a 2 High Shed/Gable - Check this for the
7 Upper Pitch - Check this to define a Roofs 8 Starts at - If you check 2nd pitch, you
wall under the high side of a shed roof.
must define the height at which the second pitch starts. You may need to create a
333
Cross Section/Elevation View to find this height.

Note: Normally hip roof planes are built over bay, bow, and box windows. You cannot edit the wall segments making up these windows as described above. You may select one of the windows and open the Bay Window Specification dialog or the Bow Window Specification dialog. There you will have several roof generation options.
Roof - Designate a wall to be split into a pony wall. It will be split by roof sections that butt into its outside surface. The upper portion will be defined in the Layer Specification tab, and the lower portion specified here. For more information, see Build Roof Dialog on page 352.
9 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting
Automatically Generated Roof Styles

Hip Roofs
By default hip roofs are built over all exterior walls. Hip roofs can be applied equally to all walls without causing conflict. To define a wall with a Hip roof, make sure all Options check boxes are cleared on the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
Gable Roofs
A gable roof, with a ridge is produced if the two opposite walls, or roof baseline seg-
ments, are defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
334
Automatically Generated Roof Styles
1. 2. 3. 4.
Draw four walls to create a one room house. Select the two end walls (shown solid for visibility). Click the Open Object edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog. On the Roof tab select the Full Gable Wall check box. Be sure both walls are specified the same.
Knee Walls
A Knee wall is an interior wall on an upper floor whose height is defined by the roof plane. A knee wall is shorter than the defined ceiling height for a room. Its height is defined by the roof plane above it, not the ceiling height. A knee wall should be toward the interior of a structure. Knee walls are usually found in top floor attic areas.
Defining the pitch for a Full Gable wall has no effect unless the Upper Pitch is specified. A roof plane would then start at the assigned height.
High Shed/Gable Wall

The High Shed/Gable Wall is often interchangeable with Full Gable Wall, but should be used when raked walls are desired. If three adjacent walls are defined as High Shed/Gable wall, the building is modeled with a shed roof. The High Shed/Gable wall will be the tall side.
Extend Slope Downward

Select the Extend Slope Downward check box to extend a roof plane over a bumpout. The two connecting walls that create the bumpout must be specified as Full Gable walls.
335
Roofs
In the picture below, the outer bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Downward check box selected. The two short connecting walls have the Full Gable wall check box selected.
Before
After
Specifying Pitch
Any exterior wall can define the pitch of the roof plane built above it in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. If the Pitch value is followed by a (D) the value is the default pitch for the entire building. The default pitch is set in the Build Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is in 12" or 20 mm in 1000 mm. If a roof plane is specified with two pitches, this type-in box controls the lower pitch.
Roof Planes with Two Pitches
2
3
Upper Pitch - Select the check box if you want the roof plane above this wall to have two pitches.
Both the Pitch and Starts at boxes are grayed out until the Upper Pitch check box has been selected.
Pitch begins. The height value is measured above zero (default floor height of first floor).
2 Define the slope of the Upper Pitch. 3 Starts at - Specify where the Upper
336
Roof Baselines
You can determine this height from a Cross Section/Elevation View as follows: 1. 2. Create the house to the desired dimensions. Generate the roof using only the first pitch. Be sure to define all the roof information properly for each wall, gable, hip, different first pitch, etc. Click on the View Tools ton then the parent butCross Section/Eleva-
4.
Toggle into CAD mode. Draw a vertical or horizontal line which intersects the roof at the point you want the Upper Pitch to start. Select the End-to-End Dimension child button and drag a dimension line, from the first floor 0-0 to the intersection of the line and the roof to determine the elevation at which to start the Upper Pitch. Close the Cross Section View. Define the Upper Pitch and enter the correct elevation in the proper walls. Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings and Build Roof Planes.
5.
3.
6.
tion child tool to generate a cross section of the house, including the roof plane which will have the second slope defined.
Examples of roof style using two pitches are mansard, gambrel, gull wing and half-hip roofs.
Roof Baselines
Typically, the program models the roof plan based on settings in the Build Roofs dialog as well as the layout of the exterior walls and any roof information defined in those walls. If you want a roof plan that diverges from the footprint of your building, you can use automatically generated Roof Baselines to lay out the roof plan. Use the Automatic Roof Generator to create the roof baselines. Select Make New Roof Baselines (this causes Build Roof Planes to be also selected) in the Build Roof dialog. Click OK. The automatic roof building process stops before actually building the roof planes. A continuous set of Roof Baselines is created along the outside edge of the main layer of the exterior walls. Once created, Roof Baselines can have their shape changed. When reshaped, new roofs built from these roof baselines will follow the new shape even if that shape no longer follows the exterior walls. Just as roof information may be defined in individual walls, roof information may be defined in each Roof Baseline edge. When roofs are built from the Roof Baselines, the settings in the roof baselines will override the settings in the corresponding walls. To create the new roof based on the modified Roof Baselines, check Use Existing Roof Baselines in the Build Roof dialog.
337
Roofs
Editing Roof Baselines

Roof baselines may be edited and used as the basis for the generation of a new roof plan. They may be reshaped in 2D like CAD polylines. Like walls, edges can have roof information defined in them. When edited, attached Roof Baselines will stay at the same baseline height. If roof planes exist at more than one baseline height, each height will generate its own set of Roof Baselines. Roof baselines will always form a closed area. They cannot be severed, but may have additional joints or corners added. In addition to length and direction, each segment of a roof baseline has embedded roof information that the program uses when modeling roof planes. To edit this information 1. 2. Select the roof baseline at one edge. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.
An Example
For a simple example of roof baseline editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a rectangular roof. The inner part of the L is a patio that is covered under the same roof.
The left side shows the roof baseline as it was originally produced and the roof plan it creates. To model the roof plan shown on the right: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the roof baseline by the bottom segment. Click the Fillet Two Lines ton. edit but-
The settings in the dialog apply only to the selected baseline edge. A baseline may be designated as a Full Gable Wall, a High Shed/Gable Wall, or a Knee Wall. You may also choose to Extend Slope Downward, or specify that a particular baseline ends Against Wall. Against Wall means that the high edge of a roof plane will butt into a wall which continues upward. Roof information is displayed along the roof baselines. Abbreviatons used are: V - vertical (against wall), G -gable/shed, K - kneewall, and L - lower (extend slope downward)
Click on the leftmost segment to fillet the two lines. A message box appears informing you that The system must delete intervening lines (those on the inside of the L) to join the two selected lines. Click OK. You should see the roof line shown in the right side.
5.
Open the Build Roof dialog and select the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing Roof
338
Gable/Roof Line
Baseline check boxes to model the roof plan shown in the picture.
Gable/Roof Line
The Gable/Roof Line tool is used to draw a roof base line that defines the location of a gable when it is part of a longer bearing wall. Use the Gable/Roof Line tool to place a gable within a roof plane, as in the case of a dormer. If an entire wall supports a gable end, the wall is defined as a Full Gable wall. If only a portion of the wall is gabled, then the Gable/ Roof Line tool is used to draw the line defining the width of the gable or dormer. A gable line can also be used (like a partial roof baseline) to maintain a base line to create roof planes even though there is no wall below. For example, a house may have a large alcove and you want the roof plane to extend across the alcove, rather than wrap into the alcove. A gable line drawn across the alcove, inline with the wall main layer, causes the roof to span across the alcove, which is ignored for roof calculations. The program models a hip in that area.
Dormers
Original gable line
Replicated Copies The Gable/Roof Line tool allows you to place a gable line along a wall to specify where a gable roof should be built. This eliminates the need to break walls and later join them. Gable lines should be outside the wall, within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable line is placed on the wall it will not work. Position a gable line of the correct length to represent the portion of wall above which supports a gable roof. Since the gable line is
Gable/Roof Lines are NOT used to define an entire wall as a gable wall. If the entire wall is a gable wall, define it as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. You can break a wall and define only part of it as gable. If this method is used, once the roof is correct and locked, the wall should be restores as continuous. Chief Architect functions better if long walls are single units instead of broken into multiple components.
339
Roofs
a CAD line, it can be selected and modified using the Line Specification dialog. Length and position can be specified with dimensions typed in this dialog. The Multiple Copy and Replicate Objects toolbar buttons also allows you to make multiple copies of a selected gable line at defined increments, as shown in the above illustration. The leftmost gable line was created, then 5 copies were made at 6 increments. Following is a close up view of a gable created using the Gable/Roof Line tool. Notice that the ends of the gable line align with the point where the gable valley intersects the base line for the main roof.
Gable Line
Another application of the Gable/Roof Line tool is to generate a gable roof on an Lshaped house. The Gable/Roof Line tool can also be used to create roof lines in areas not laid out with walls or railings.A roof line is created the same as a gable line, but has the different name because of its different usage. A roof line drawn across space generates a hip roof. If several roof lines are combined, they must be attached to each other forming a non closed polyilne in order to automatically produce one set of roof baselines. Both free ends of the roof line or polyline must meet a wall at the main layer for them to produce roof planes. The following shows several applications for roof lines. In this, the free ends of each line or polyline reach the wall main layer, except for the line that makes the normal gable.
340
Manual Roofs
To have hip roof ignore alcove. To have hip roof ignore inside corner. For cantilever. For normal gable. For cantilever. For cantilever.
Manual Roofs
Before utilizing the Automatic Roof Generator it is important to understand how the Manual Roof editing tools create and edit roof planes. Manual Roof editing tools take advantage of the parameters of neighboring roof planes and walls to partially automate the process of drawing a roof plan. Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once created it can be edited in two ways. First, the shape of the roof plane can be changed. The shape of a roof plane is edited in 2D just like a CAD polyline. Second, the orientation of the roof plane can be edited in 3D. As a roof plane is stretched and reshaped in 2D, the program maintains the 3D orientation of the plane being edited. The location of this plane can be redefined using the Roof Plane Specification dialog. This dialog allows the roof planes location and direction to be adjusted.
An understanding of these two concepts will allow you to design almost any kind of roof.
Roof Planes
The first step in creating a roof plane is drawing the base line. To draw a base line:
341
Roofs
1. 2. 3.
Click the Roof Tools parent button then the Roof Plane child tool. In the example below, click and drag a base line from point 1 to point 2. Click at point 3 to define the upslope direction of the roof plane.
extend upward to intersect the top of the roof framing member. When drawing the base line of a roof plane, here are some things to consider: 1. 2. 3. A base line does not have to be drawn over a wall, although it often is. The roof plane overhangs in the downslope direction from the base line. A base line drawn along a wall should be drawn over the outer edge of the walls main layer. It will try to snap to that. The height of a base line is determined by the following formula:
Once you have clicked at point 3 the roof plane is built. The base line (line 1-2) appears with an upslope tick in the middle of the line. The upslope tick point indicates the direction that the roof plane slopes up to. You cannot redefine the direction of the slope. If the upslope tick is pointing the wrong direction, delete the entire roof plane and begin the process over. The base line can be used by the program as the pivot point for the roof plane. In a cross section, the base line is the point where the outside main layer surface of the wall would
4.
Height of base line = elevation top plate + the vertical depth of the rafter - the vertical depth of the rafters birdsmouth cut. The elevation of the top plate is defined by the ceiling height in the room. 5. If a base line is drawn over the top of any other roof plane, the base line height equals the height of the existing roof plane at the point where you started drawing.
Displaying Roof Planes

Following is a portion of a hip roof shown in Plan View:
342
Selecting Roof Planes
the overhang. It is defined in the Build Roof dialog.
1 2 3 4 5
The eave is represented by a dashed line. layer to the end of the roof framing is
located over the outer main layer of the wall. Typically the line is displayed as green. When you use the Automatic Roof Generator, the program constructs the base lines. The base line is defined as the line, across the top of the rafters, directly above a walls outside main layer. It can be used as pivot for the roof plane as you alter the pitch. up direction for this roof plane. The angle of the slope is controlled by the pitch defined in the Build Roof dialog. Layer 10. Each roof plane is a closed polyline.
3 The Base Line of the roof plane is
4 This is the upslope mark. It marks the
2 The distance from the walls outer main
5 Roof planes are drawn on System
Selecting Roof Planes

If multiple roof planes are selected they can be moved together in plan view. Click on the Open Object edit button to open a special Roof Plane Specification dialog. A group of roof planes can be raised or lowered together.
Selecting at a Corner
To select a corner, click inside and near the corner of the roof plane. When you have selected the corner correctly there will be a handle in the middle of each adjacent edge and at the corner. This allows you to move any corner of the roof plane without restriction.
Deleting Roof Planes

Select any roof plane. Press the Del key or the click the Delete edit button to delete it from the plan. A group of roof planes may be deleted simultaneously by group selecting them (select the first roof plane, then hold the Shift key down while clicking additional planes
343
Roofs
and adding them to the selection set) then press the Del key or click the Delete edit button.
Editing Roof Planes

When the roof plan is correct, roof planes can be locked to prevent accidental changes. The Build Roof dialog has a Lock Roof Planes check box to prevent accidental rebuilding. You can also protect roof planes from accidental changes in Plan View by locking the Roof Planes layer (CAD layer 10).
The selected roof plane contains six handles and usually one dimension. These can be used to reshape it. When you select an edge, certain capabilities and restrictions are applied to each handle. The middle of the selected edge has a red handle. Click this handle and drag to move the edge parallel to itself, adjacent edges will extend or contract. At the center of the roof plane is a red square handle. This can be used to move the entire roof section to a new location. Move the section with caution, it can be difficult to return to its original location.
The shape of a roof plane can be edited in Plan View with the mouse in the same way that a CAD polyline is edited. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690. Roof planes are drawn and edited in 2D. The Roof Plane Specification dialog defines the 3D orientation of a roof plane. There are three height values and one pitch value that define the 3D orientation of the roof plane. Ridge/Top, Base Line, and Fascia Top can have their height specified or can be used as a pivot point. Pitch determines the slope of the roof plane. To access the Roof Plane Specification dialog, select a roof plane and click the Open Object edit button. You can only access the dialog for one roof plane at a time. For more information, see Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 357. Draw a roof plane like the one below and select it by clicking on edge BC.
Each of the corners has a red handle. Dragging from a corner handle has different results depending on which edge was selected.
It is a good idea to work on your roofs, before you spend too much time designing your interiors. If you have too much information in your model when you are designing roofs, the task can become more complicated
344
Editing Roof Planes
Dragging the Corners

When an edge of a roof plane is selected, handles appear at each of the roof planes corners. You may drag from any of these handles to move the roof planes corner with some restrictions.The edges adjacent to the selected edge will only extend or contract and will not otherwise move. Drag from handles at any other corner and the corner moves freely in any direction. This is illustrated in the next sections diagram.
Moving an Edge
The selected edge moves parallel to itself.
These corners move freely.
These corners only move in line.
Edge BC is the selected edge. the midpoint handle and the selected edge will move parallel to itself. The two adjacent edges do not move except to extend or contract. They may diverge or converge if they are not parallel.
Click on the edge of a roof plane to select it. If roof planes are adjacent and you select the wrong one, hit the Tab key until the correct one is selected. The selected edge, in this case BC, is the only edge with a handle at its midpoint. Drag
Adding an Edge
To add an edge to a roof plane use the Break Line edit button, which appears when you have selected a roof edge. You can use this tool to divide the edge of a rectangular roof plane into two edges. Following is an example of adding an edge to a roof plane: 1. Select the roof plane.
2.
345
Roofs
Click the Break Line edit button, then click on one edge of the roof plane. A new diamond handle appears in the location of the new break.
3.
Drag any handle to change the shape.
handles appear in the center of these edges on either side of the break. Drag from one of the handles and the edge moves perpendicular to itself while remaining parallel to its original direction. Another edge forms connecting the moved edge with the one on the other side that does not move. So one edge is turned into three, with two of them parallel to the original, and one perpendicular.
4.
Release the mouse button. The roof plane has five sides.
Joining Roof Planes

Two roof planes can be joined at adjacent edges using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To use this tool you must first be able to identify which edges of the roof planes can be extended to meet at a ridge, hip, or valley. The program does not join roof planes that are parallel to each other, even if they are in the same plane. Select the first roof plane, on the desired edge, click the Join Roof Planes edit button, then select the second roof plane on its desired edge. The two planes stretch to meet at a ridge, hip or valley. If the roof planes are not close enough, or their shape is not correct, they may need to
To remove a roof edge, on one of its ends, grab the handle that appears at this end and drag it to the handle at the other end. Release the mouse button and the edge is deleted.
Adding a Step to an Edge

You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a roof plane by selecting it, double clicking on the Break Line edit button and then clicking on the roof edge where the step is to be. The edge is broken into two edges, and
346
Editing Roof Planes
be edited so each has an edge which is expected to join to the other. When roof planes adjust, the program joins the planes at the proper location and the adjacent edges will extend or contract to remain connected. If the joining of the two will completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent edge, the connection cannot be made. A message displays, informing you of the problem.
Note: The roof plane edge or CAD line that is being adjusted must be within twenty degrees parallel or perpendicular to the second line or wall edge specified for the Make Parallel
edit button to function properly. The second edge can be moved close by eye and then made exact with this tool. Sometimes breaks in roof edges occur, which can create problems when trying to align them with other planes. What appears to be a single straight edge may actually be broken into two or more edges, a condition which can be verified by the number of handles that display when a plane is selected. These breaks can be removed manually by dragging an unneeded handle into another, or the Build> Roofs> Fix Roofs menu item or the Fix Roofs child button can be used.
Aligning Roof Edges

If opposite sides of a roof section are parallel, selecting one edge automatically gives you a dimension line. If you do not see that dimension line, the sides are not parallel.
After moving a corner handle, it can be difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave or a wall. To square the roof plane up again, select the edge that is slightly out of alignment. Click the Make Parallel edit button, (which only appears after you have first selected an edge of a roof plane). Then click on a line or wall edge to which the selected edge should be parallel or perpendicular. This function is very useful when manually editing roofs. Where you click to select an edge determines which end of the roof edge is fixed and which one moves.
Move to be Coplanar
This edit button allows you to move the selected roof plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with the next selected roof plane. The results can be easily seen in a cross section view.
347
Roofs
Change Roof Pitch or Height Dialog 1
1 The amount of vertical displacement 2

Pivot Roof Plane About - Select
between the two roof planes displays.
which part of the roof plane to use as pivot point when pitch is adjusted to meet the other roof plane. option to maintain the current pitch and raise or lower the entire plane to connect the roofs. This may affect plate heights of the walls below. so the roofs meet. The roof plane either changes the pitch or is raised or lowered.
2 4 5 3
Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this
4 Click Yes to make the selected change 5 Click NO to leave the roof plane
This warning dialog appears when you attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a roof plane near another roof plane which does not match vertically. The Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog gives you the option to move the roof plane vertically, pivot it about a point and change the pitch, or do nothing at all. Most times you click NO, to do nothing at all. In this case, the current roof plane would have to lower its pitch or height in order to meet the second roof plane at the corner that you moved.
unchanged. The roof planes will not meet vertically. This is the typical choice.
Always choose NO unless you have a specific reason to adjust the roof plane this way. To prevent this dialog from displaying, check Dont show again during this session. The dialog will not appear again until you have terminated and restarted the program. In the mean time, the system will always act as if you checked NO.
Locating Roof Plane Intersections

When roof planes of differing slopes meet,they create a ridge, a hip, or a valley. While the Join Roof Planes edit button is normally used to move edges to make the planes meet, these edges can also be moved by an alternate process that places snap points where the ridge, hip or valley is to be. Once you know where the planes will meet, you can drag edges or corners to those points, thus joining the roof planes. To have the program help you locate roof plane intersection points:
348
Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors
1.
Select Roof Plane 1. (The first plane that you select should be higher or at least equal in height to the other roof.)
2.
Click on an edge of Roof Plane 2 or 3 that, if extended, would intersect Roof Plane 1. The program places a red X at the spot that the edge would meet the roof plane. If the two roof planes lie at right angles to each other, the intersection point indicates where the valley or hip begins. Select side AX and point B is created.
4. 5. 6.
Click on side CY and point D is created. Click on edge EZ and point F is created. To align line AC with line BD select Roof Plane 3 by the edge AC. Select corner C and drag it to point D. Select Roof Plane 3 once again. Select corner A and drag it to point B. To align CE with DF repeat these steps for Roof Plane 2 and points D and F.
3.
7.
Gable Dormer Over Windows & Doors

If a window or an exterior door is selected, the Gable Over Window edit button displays. Click this to add a gable line over the selected window or door. The Gable/Roof line will appear in Plan View, about 12 inches (300 mm) out from the wall and extending a foot to either side of the opening. This gable line signals the roof generator to produce a gable. When automatic roofs are built, a small gable dormer will appear over the window or door. Once produced, the gable line can be moved, stretched, and edited. To remove the gable line, select the window or door and click the Delete Gable Over Opening edit button or select the gable line and click the Delete edit button.
349
Roofs
If you move or resize the window, the gable line will not update automatically. A new gable line can be produced by using the Gable Over Window edit button. This will automatically delete the old gable line if it is still near the window. If the window has been relocated significantly, the old gable line must be selected and deleted manually. A gable line will produce a gable only in an area where an eave would otherwise appear. Do not add this gable line to a wall already designated as a Gable Wall. If a gable is already present then the automatic roof
generator may return the Cannot produce a roof section error message and fail to produce some roof planes properly. If this is the case, select the gable line and delete it. The Gable Over Window tool will also place a gable over a group of selected windows and doors, provided they are all in the same wall and contain no bay or bow windows. For more information on building roofs over Bay, Bow, and Box windows, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs on page 250.
Ceiling Planes
Choose the Ceiling Plane - child button or the Build>Roof>Ceiling Planes menu item to create custom sloped ceilings. Ceiling planes are underneath and separate from the roof planes. They act independently from the roof planes above. Select a Ceiling Plane and click the Open Object edit button to access the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. For more information, see Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog on page 360. The baseline of a Ceiling Plane should be drawn along and directly on top of the outer surface of the walls main layer. This allows the ceiling plane to extend over and be supported by the wall. The sides of a ceiling plane butt against the walls inside surface.
350
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
Ceiling Plane Example

Shallow ceiling plane drawn manually. Main, exterior roof at steeper pitch.
Roof underside Ceiling underside.
Cross Section through roof with ceiling planes. Here is an example of a steeper pitched (12:12) exterior roof with a shallow pitched (6:12) cathedral ceiling inside. The shallower pitched ceiling planes are drawn manually, with the base line drawn along the outside of the main layer of the wall. The ceiling plane would normally cover the entire room, but the illustration was left incomplete to show how they were placed. While the baseline for a ceiling plane is at the walls outer main layer so its framing would be supported by the wall, a sloping edge at the side of a ceiling plane should just butt to the inside of the wall.
Note: Use the Layer Display Options dialog to lock the Roof Planes layer or turn off its display when working with ceiling planes. When not working with roof or ceiling planes, their layers, CAD 10 and 11, should remain locked to prevent modification.
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings

Floor and ceiling platforms do not move or resize immediately when walls are moved or room floor and ceiling heights are changed. When you do make a change to your plan that would require the floors and ceilings to be rebuilt, the system will detect it. The next time you display a 3D view or Section/ Elevation floors and ceilings will be rebuilt. If you do not want the program to automatically rebuild floors and ceilings, clear the Auto Rebuild Floors & Ceilings check box on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. Then when you want to rebuild floor and ceiling platforms you can click on the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings button.
351
Roofs
Build Roof Dialog

Build Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13
14
Double-click on the Roof Tools parent button to display the Build Roof dialog. This dialog is used to automatically produce roof planes and roof baselines. Check this to construct the floor and ceiling platforms of your model. It is independent of Build Roof Planes.
Note: The first time you generate a 3D view for a new plan, walls, floors and ceilings are automatically built. After that you can initiate the process by clicking the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/Ceiling button on the toolbar or checking Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Ceilings on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog or by pressing the F12 key on your keyboard.
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings -
model a new roof structure over the entire model. Unless you specify otherwise, the existing roof planes are discarded and new roof planes are produced. this to delete any existing roof and to create roof baselines (based on the exterior wall layout and roof information defined in those walls). Roof baselines can then be edited to customize the roof plan in the same way that CAD polylines are. this to produce a roof plan based on your edited roof baselines instead of the exterior wall layout.
2 Build Roof Planes - Check this to
3 Make New Roof Baselines - Check
4 Use Existing Roof Baselines - Check
5 Build Fascia, Gutters - Check this to
regenerate the fascia and gutters. Often
352
Build Roof Dialog
you need to select only this option to clean up roof planes that have been edited. This function is automatically invoked after you manually edit roof planes or draw new roof planes if you check Auto Rebuild Walls/ Floors/Ceilings on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. Gutters and fascia display in the 3D views and also appear in the Material List. If you do not want gutters built, open the Build Roof dialog, select Build Fascia, Gutters and then clear Supply Gutters on the Display tab. The fascia is rebuilt but not the gutters. Any existing gutters are deleted. To delete a gutter for a specific roof plane, select the roof plane. Click the Open Object edit button to display the Roof Plane Edit dialog. Clear Gutters and click OK. The next time Build Fascia, Gutters is selected, the gutter does not appear. If you delete a roof plane, the gutter remains in 3D views until you rebuild roof planes. a roofs exterior underside surface will appear inside the building instead of the appropriate interior sloped ceiling.. Check this box to fix this. This should be used only as needed, as it may cause side effects in exterior roof underside surfaces.
the rafter. It does not include fascia thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding. Normal is the overhang at the eaves. Gable is the overhang dimension at gable ends or rake walls. roof plan. This prevents accidentally selecting Build Roof Planes and having the roof rebuilt, resulting in the loss of manual editing. When Lock Roof Planes is selected, selecting Build Roof Planes results in an error message warning that roofs are locked. You must clear Lock Roof Planes before you can select Build Roof Planes. To prevent the accidental deletion or moving of roof planes in a Plan or 3D view, checking Lock Roof Planes automatically locks System layer 10 in the Layer Display Options dialog. Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof Planes to retain those roof planes when the roof plan is rebuilt. They will not be deleted, but automatic roof planes can be superimposed in the same area. You must select the unwanted roof planes and delete them.
Once a roof is correct, do not build roof planes again. From that point forward, only Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and perhaps Fascia and Gutters, to keep the plan updated.
9 Lock Roof Planes to lock the existing
6 Allow Low Roof Planes - In rare cases
10 Check Retain Manually Built Roof
7 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all newly built roof planes. It does not update existing roof planes. For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 363. 8 Roof Overhang - The overhang is measured from the exterior main layer surface horizontally to the end of the top of
353
Roofs
so that the bottom edge of the truss top chord (rafter) will be flush with the top of the wall. You must Build Roof Planes after
11 Check Trusses to have the roof raised
checking Trusses for this change to take effect.

Incorrect--Trusses is not checked.
Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off Plate is set to zero, the program generates a birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least 1/ 16 (1 mm).
Correct--Trusses is checked.
radial dimension for each plane of roof. Set at 15 d, it uses 24 roof planes to cover a complete circle. width of an alcove (depression into an otherwise straight exterior wall) which is noticed by the Automatic Roof Generator. Any alcove less than the specified width is treated as though the exterior wall continues straight across. Alcoves that measure wider than this value are not roofed over. They cause a change in roof planes. Following is an example showing this difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" deep alcove requires a change in the roof line. Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the right, the alcove is less than the 36" minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
13 Curved Roof Plane Angle - Enter the
14 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof rafter framing is the Top Chord size from the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog. When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out without selecting the Trusses box, the roof will use the rafter size instead. The Incorrect diagram displays this problem. in this field to produce the trusses with an energy heel to allow for more insulation. The dimension is measured from the top plate, up the outside main layer of the wall, to the bottom side of the top chord.
12 Raise Off Plate -Enter a positive value
354
Build Roof Dialog
Display Tab
1 3
to display a line along all ridges and valleys in elevations and 3D views. This includes the hip ridges between roof planes forming the curved roof above a curved wall.
1 Show all ridges - Select the check box
in 3D views. This value does not go to the Material List.
Supply
these items are calculated for the Material List. Selecting the check box does not control the display in 3D except for Gutters. Select each check box in this section that applies.
2 Boxed eaves - Select the check box if you want the program to produce horizontal soffits at the eaves. This change appears only after you have rebuilt roofs. You can instead change this for an individual roof plane in the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
either option to determine how the rafter tails are cut. This change appears only after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof planes can have this defined in their own Roof Plane Specification dialog. Eave Fascia Width - Enter values to define the width of the material that appears
5 This section defines whether or not
Materials Tab
3 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select
4 Fascia Width (at gable or rake walls),
355
Roofs
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog

Like walls, each line of a roof baseline polyline contains roof generation information. You can select any of these lines and open the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.
Roof Baseline Tab
3 1 2 4
Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are the same as the first four items in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
1 The first four checkboxes, Full Gable
the default pitch set in the Build Roof dialog. For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 363. baseline. This will be the top of rafter height where it crosses the baseline. Changing the previous items affects the line that was selected in the baseline. Changing the height affects all lines in the baseline polyline.
4 Base line height holds the height of the
2 Against Wall - Check this if the roof plane rising from this baseline will butt against an exterior wall. This will act similar to checking High Shed/Gable Wall, in that the up slope direction will be toward or along the exterior wall.
Again, the Pitch, Upper pitch and Starts at entries are the same as for he Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
3 Pitch - Change the pitch for the
The Polyline, Selected Line, Line Style and Fill Style tabs are the same as for the Polyline Specification dialog. They affect how the roof baseline polyline appears and edits in plan view.
selected roof baseline. This overrides
356
Roof Plane Specification Dialog

While default values for all roof planes are specified in the Build Roofs dialog, values can be specified for each individual roof plane by selecting it and opening the Roof Plane Specification dialog. While this dialog consists of several tabs, only the General tab is different from tabs in other dialogs. The Polyline, Selected Line, Line Style and Fill Style tabs are the same as for the Polyline Specification dialog. They affect how the roof baseline polyline appears and edits in plan view. The Materials tab is also similar to that for other objects in your plan, but is still described below.
General Tab
1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10
11
357
Roofs
values defines that value as the pivot point for the plane. Each of these dimensions is measured from the first floor elevation of 0-0. There are four values that define the height, or 3D orientation of a roof plane: Ridge/Top, Base Line, Fascia Top and Pitch. These values are related. If one is changed, the others will change as well, unless locked. Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the roof plane. Lock one of these three values, and change any other and the roof plane rotates about that point as shown in the diagram. Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the highest point of the selected roof plane.
1 Locking any one of the first three
If you lock the pitch and change one of the other values, the roof plane moves vertically keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 363.
2 Base Line - Define a new base line

height.
depth for the selected roof plane. The default rafter depth for the roof is set in the Framing dialog. If you want to set the rafter depth to the default, type a "d" in this field. by measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The degree of pitch affects the Vertical rafter width. The greater the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth. is defined by the ceiling height for the room.
7 Rafter Depth - Specify the Rafter
3 Fascia top - Define a new height for

the fascia top. depth of the birdsmouth cut is shown for reference, it cannot be edited directly. To change it you must move the roof plane some other way. For example, if you lock the pitch and then raise the roof plane by one inch, you will decrease the birdsmouth depth by one inch. Birdsmouth is zero if the Trusses check box has been selected in the Build Roof dialog.
8 The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined
4 Birdsmouth - The plumb or vertical
9 Top of Plate is shown for reference. It
10 Overhang from Base Line is shown

be available.
for reference, it cannot be edited here.
11 Options - The following options may

Square Cut/Plumb Cut - You can specify the rafter tails to be square cut or plumb cut in this dialog. This overrides the setting on the Display tab of the Build Roof dialog. Gutter - Check this to remove gutters from the selected roof plane.
5 Raise/Lower - Enter a positive value to raise or a negative value to lower the selected roof plane.
selected roof plane. This overrides the default pitch set in the Build Roof dialog.
358
Boxed Eave - Specifies boxed or sloping eaves. This overrides the setting on the display Tab of the Build Roof dialog. Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected roof plane contains more than one eave, check this box to box the higher eaves as well.
Show Pitch as Degrees - Select the check box to have the pitch value in this dialog displayed as degrees. Display this Plane One Floor Up/Down Check one of these to change the floor in which this roof plane displays in Plan View. Related roof planes will move with the one you are editing. This is especially useful when two roof planes you wish to join or otherwise edit together were placed on different Plan View floors by the Automatic Roof generator.
With Boxed Eave checked
With Higher Eaves Boxed checked Mark as Edited - When you select a roof plane and move or reshape it, the system will mark it as "edited". When you rebuild roofs from the Build Roof dialog, check Retain Edited Roof Planes to prevent these marked planes from being deleted. Checking Mark as Edited also marks a roof plane, even if it has not been edited. Edited planes can also be unmarked. This checkbox is not available for manually produced roof planes.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

359
Roofs
Line Style Tab
Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 3 2 9 11 4 5 6 7
The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog is similar to the Roof Plane Specification dialog, see Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 357. There are three values that define the height, or 3D orientation of a ceiling plane: Bottom at Ridge, Inside Bottom, and Outside Bottom. These values are related. If one is changed, all but one of the others will change as well. Select one radio button to the right to lock that value. defines that value as the pivot point for the plane. Each of these dimensions is measured from the first floor elevation of 00. Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the ceiling plane.
8 10
Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point on the underside of the ceiling plane. ceiling plane underside at the inside surface of the walls main layer. If the bottom of the plane does not rest on a wall, this is the underside height at the lowest point on the ceiling plane. the ceiling plane was drawn over a wall (Its baseline should be over the outside main layer surface and floors and ceilings should have been built at least once). It is the height the ceiling rafters underside would have at the walls outer main layer if it were not clipped. This value plus Clip End should be
2 Inside Bottom - Set the height of the
3 Outside Bottom - This appears only if
1 Locking one of these three values
360
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
the same (within 1/16") as the Top of Plate value. the ceiling rafter underside at its lower end must be clipped to rest on the wall top plate. It appears only for ceiling planes drawn over a wall. This is normally equal to the amount of rise in the slope of the ceiling plane over the Overhang from in. bottom (wall main layer thickness), distance, which means that the bottom edge of the ceiling plane rafter just reaches the top surface of the walls top plate at the walls inside main layer surface. raise or a negative value to lower the selected ceiling plane.
layer surface. Typically this is the walls main layer thickness. A custom sloped ceiling plane can be produced as you would a manually drawn roof plane. All of the instructions for drawing and editing roof planes apply to ceiling planes. 1. When drawing a new ceiling plane that will extend into the house or over a room, draw the base line at the exterior edge of the main layer, or on the main layer edge away from the room into which the ceiling will extend. This base line would be in the same location as you would draw a roof plane if it were necessary. This allows the joists comprising the ceiling plane to pass over the wall so as to be supported by it. Do not draw the base line on the inside edge of the wall. Normally their pitch should be less than that of the corresponding roof plane. Often they are used in conjunction with roof trusses. Like roof planes, ceiling planes must extend over the walls where they are supported. While the eave, or low edge of a ceiling plane should extend over its supporting wall, the sloping sides normally butt up to the wall's interior main layer, and not extend across it. Ceiling planes should be created over rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room, cleared in the Room Specification dialog.
4 Clip End - This displays the amount
5 Raise/Lower - Enter a positive value to 6 Pitch - Change the pitch for the
2.
selected ceiling plane. For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 363. check box to display the pitch value in degrees.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7 Show Pitch as degrees - Select the
8 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth

for the selected ceiling plane. by measuring a plumb line across the rafter. The degree of pitch affects the vertical rafter width. The greater the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth. reference. It is defined by the ceiling height for the room.
9 Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined
7.
10 Top of Plate - This is shown for
8.
11 Overhang from in. bottom - This appears only when the ceiling plane was created over a wall. It is the horizontal distance from the baseline to the inside main
361
Roofs
9.
Ceiling planes can be joined together with each other exactly like roof planes.
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

General Tab
Plumb Sides - The framing for the skylight is plumb. Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is plumb, the top edge is square.
1 2
Ceiling Hole- Select this option to generate ceiling holes for skylights automatically.
4 Skylight Automatically Generates
Select this option if you would like to edit the ceiling hole polyline manually. Click OK to return to Plan View and edit the ceiling hole polyline. When this option is selected, the ceiling hole polyline and the skylight can be selected seperately in Plan View.
5 Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Polyline -
Polyline Tab
this polyline as a skylight. If you uncheck this box, the curb and glass for the skylight will be removed and the opening will remain. Define the width and height of the frame, or curb, of the skylight.
1 Skylight - Check this box to specify
See Polyline Tab on page 690.
Selected Line Tab

See Selected Line Tab on page 691.
2 Frame Width and Frame Height 3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines
Line Style Tab

See Line Style Tab on page 681.
the shape of the skylight well where it passes through through the roof plane. Square Sides - The framing for the skylight is square to the pitch of the roof.
Fill Style Tab

See Fill Style Tab on page 692.
362
Materials Tab
See Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Roof Pitches in Degrees
363
Roof Pitches in Degrees
364
Chapter Overview
Chapter 14:
Framing
Chapter Overview
Manual Framing members are produced by clicking and dragging a new framing member, like drawing a wall. Automatic Framing is produced by selecting the various Build Framing check boxes on the appropriate tabs of the Build Framing dialog. Trusses are covered in their own chapter. See Trusses on page 397.
Automatic Framing Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog Framing Reference Markers Bearing Lines Joist Direction Lines Wall Framing Details Drawing Wall Framing Members Displaying Framing Editing Framing Regenerating Framing Framing and the Material List Framing Specification Dialog Beam Specification Post Specification
Chapter Contents
Framing Defaults Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing The Framing Tools
Framing Defaults
When framing is automatically generated the program references the settings in the Build
Framing dialog. To edit automatic framing you must change the settings in the Build
365
Framing
Framing dialog and regenerate framing. For this reason the Build Framing dialog and the Framing Defaults dialog are one in the
same. For more information, see Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371.
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing

Platform framing, roof framing and wall framing can be produced manually or automatically. In most cases automatically generated framing is preferable. If you want a framing member that is not affected by automatically generated framing, then a manually drawn framing member is desirable. For more information, see The Framing Tools on page 367. It is common for both types to be found in most plans; the framing for roof planes and floor platforms can be automatically generated, and then additional framing can be manually moved or added. components. Framing objects can be added, deleted, resized and repositioned within the model. Once you have made changes to the model that affect framing and have Rebuilt Walls/ Floors/Ceilings, the Build Framing dialog must be opened and any framing areas that are affected must be rebuilt. For example, if a window is moved or resized, the wall framing must be rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged, the wall framing and any roof or platform framing that is affected must also be rebuilt.
Wall/Floor/Ceiling Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs of the Build Framing dialog are referenced by the program to determine how wall framing will be automatically generated. It is a good idea to set up your framing specifications in the Build Framing dialog before drawing. Although these settings can be changed, finalizing these as early as possible will save time. Framing is not built until the Build Framing dialog is opened and the check box on each tab that says Build Wall Framing, Build Ceiling Framing etc. is selected. Once a framing model is built, changes can be made to individual
Roof Framing
Rafters and Trusses or a mixture of the two, are supported for roof framing. Trusses are manually drawn and are covered in the following chapter. For more information, see Trusses on page 397. Rafters can be automatically produced from the Roof tab in the Framing dialog. Rafters can also be drawn manually.
If you are going to have both truss and automatically produced stick framing, you should draw the trusses first, and then use this dialog to produce the stick framing. The reason for this is that stick framing will be placed only in areas not supported by trusses, and will be cut and butted to the trusses where appropriate.
366
The Framing Tools
To place a framing member, select the desired framing tool from the Build> Framing menu or by clicking the Framing Tools parent button and clicking one of its child tools. Some shortcut keys are also available, see Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17 for more information.
Roof Beam
Click the Roof Beam child button and click and drag in Plan View to manually draw a Roof Beam. This will normally be drawn across and placed directly under the rafters. Beams can be selected and opened for specification. For more information, see Beam Specification on page 394.
Rafter
Rafters are different than joists, in that, in addition to having a size specified, they are also placed at the proper pitch and elevation to fit under the roof plane in which they are drawn. To draw a rafter, select Build> Framing> Rafters from the menu, or click the Rafter child button. The rafter will have its height, depth and pitch set so that it fits under the roof plane that contains it. Rafters are edited just like framing members, except that you cannot set the height. If a rafter is moved, its height and slope are automatically reset to fit under the roof plane at its new position.
Joist
Ceiling and floor joists can be manually drawn as well. To draw a ceiling joist, select Build>Framing>Joist from the menu, or click the Joist child button that appears in the Framing Tools child toolbar. The height and depth of the joist will be defined so that it fits the floor or ceiling platform that contains it. This will be the platform that displays for the current floor. For the first floor, this is the ceiling over the first floor, or the second floor platform. To draw framing for the first floor subfloor, the foundation (.PL0) plan must be active. Joists are edited just like manually drawn framing members.
Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters have their own layers. Proper layer assignment will maximize display and materials flexibility.
Roof Truss
Click the Roof Truss child button and click and drag across two walls in Plan View to manually draw a Roof Truss. Roof planes must be present before a Roof Truss can be manually drawn. For more information, see Roof Trusses on page 398.
367
Framing
The Framing Tools
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Click the Floor/Ceiling Truss child button and click and drag in Plan View to manually draw a Floor/Ceiling Truss. For more information, see Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 398.
Post
Click the Post child button and click in Plan View to manually place a Post. Posts can be selected and opened for specification. For more information, see Post Specification on page 394.
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Click the Floor/Ceiling Beam child button and click and drag in Plan View to manually draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam. Beams can be selected and opened for specification. For more information, see Beam Specification on page 394. In the Posts/Beam tab of the Build Framing dialog you can set two ways a beam can be drawn: Under Joists places the beam underneath the joists so the joists can bear on it. With Joists places the top of the beam even with the tops of the joists it supports. The joist will then butt against it. For more information, see Posts/Beams Tab on page 378.
Beams should be drawn before joists are produced by automatic framing. If With Joists is specified the joists will be cut by and butted against the beam.If Under Joists is specified then the joists will be automatically butted or lapped over the beam.
Framing Reference Marker

Click the Framing Reference Marker child button and click in Plan View to place a Framing Reference Marker. The Framing Reference Marker is essentially a shortcut tool that saves the additional step of opening a marker to specify its type. For more information on Markers, see Markers on page 671. For more information on Framing Reference Markers, see Framing Reference Markers on page 382.
Bearing Line
Click the Bearing Line child button and click and drag on Plan View. For more information, see Bearing Lines on page 384.
Joist Direction
Click the Joist Direction child button and click and drag in Plan View. For more information, see Joist Direction Lines on page 385.
368
Blocking and Bridging
Blocking, also sometimes referred to as bridging can be drawn manually for floor and ceiling platforms. Wall bridging can be created automatically. Both blocking and bridging can be selected and edited an a variety of ways.
If you open the Build Framing dialog by double-clicking on the Rafter child button you will go into Rafter mode. Be sure that the Joist Blocking or Roof Blocking tool is active before drawing blocking.
Joist and Roof Blocking

Blocking for floor and ceiling joists and rafters can be manually drawn in Plan View.
Note: The Joist Blocking button and the
You can create a Framing Overview and view your blocking in 3D. Rafter blocking will be tilted in 3D to be perpendicular to the roof plane. The Plan View position corresponds to the top of the rafter blocking.
Wall Bridging
Bridging for walls can also be created when your walls are framed. Exterior or Interior bridging must be checked on the Wall tab of the Build Framing dialog (see Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371). You can specify In Line or Stagger bridging. This will determine both automatically and manually drawn bridging. Automatically created wall bridging can be viewed in a wall detail and edited just as joist blocking is edited in Plan View. You can also draw new bridging manually in CAD mode by selecting CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall blocking from the menu (or by clicking the Wall Bridging child button that appears as one of the Box Tools ). Wall bridging must be drawn perpendicular to the studs, therefore it is always drawn horizontal in a wall detail. Bridging should start and end at a stud surface. For more information, see Wall Framing Details on page 388.
Roof Blocking button are not on the default toolbar but can be added. For more information, see Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 18.
To add Joist Blocking or Roof Blocking to your plan you must first generate the framing for that platform (see Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371). Once your framing is displayed, select Build> Framing> Joist Blocking from the menu or click the Joist Blocking button and click and drag to draw blocking. Blocking must be drawn perpendicular to and across joists or rafters. You can add blocking to your whole plan, or to just a portion of your plan. Blocking should start and end at a perpendicular joist or rafter. Blocking behaves as a single object in Plan View. You can choose between In Line, Stagger blocking and Cross bridging on each numbered Floor tab of the Build Framing dialog.
369
Framing
Blocking and Bridging
Automatic Framing
Joists and Rafters
Joists and rafters may be automatically produced by the program to fill the ceiling platforms, floor platforms and roof planes. These are generated by selecting the Build Framing check box on the appropriate tab in the Build Framing dialog. For more information, see Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog on page 371. Automatically produced joists have the height and depth defined by the settings on these same tabs. The top of floor joists are set below the Floor height by a distance equal to the subfloor sheathing thickness. The subfloor thickness is detailed on each numbered Floor tab of the Build Framing dialog. The subfloor thickness can be set individually for rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Tab on page 207.
Rafters and Trusses

If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters and/or ceiling joists, you can save time laying out framing by: Check the Trusses box in the Build Roof dialog before checking Build Roof Planes in the Build Roof dialog to automatically build a roof. This also affects positioning of manually drawn roof planes if their baseline is drawn over a wall. Draw and position all roof trusses before using the automatic framing generator to produce rafters and ceiling joists. For more information, see Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 398. The program will not produce rafters and joists that are parallel to a roof truss closer than 14 inches (350mm) to the truss. Automatically produced rafters and joists will not cross an existing truss, but will generate from the eave inward until they butt into a truss. Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a drop hip truss. See Drop Hip on page 411. Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable truss. See the graphic in Truss Base on page 404. When the program creates rafters parallel to trusses, it places the top of the rafter in line with the top of the truss. Since the depth of a rafter is normally greater than
Some other important things to remember:
Joist Orientation
If a Joist Direction line exists somewhere in the platform, this will dictate the direction of the floor or ceiling joists when automatic framing is generated. If there is no Joist Direction line, then automatically generated joists will run perpendicular to and across any Floor/Ceiling Beam or Bearing Line you have drawn. If there are no Floor/Ceiling Beam or Joist Direction lines then automatically generated joists will run across the shortest distance on a platform.
370
Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog

The type of framing, its size and spacing, and other details are specified for the major components of the 3D model in this dialog. The components are the floor platforms, the ceiling platforms, the walls, and the roof assemblies. When automatic framing is generated, the program uses the information in the dialog to model framing correctly. Automatic framing is built by selecting the Build check box on the appropriate tabs of the Build Framing dialog, then clicking OK. When automatic framing is built, any previously existing automatically produced framing of the same type for the same floor is deleted and replaced with new. Floor or ceiling framing that you manually drew will remain with the newly produced automatic framing. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing or double-click the Joists Framing Tools , Rafters , or parent button to open the
Build Framing dialog. The number of tabs
in the dialog will vary depending on how many floors are in your model. There will be a tab called "F" for foundation, a tab called "1" for first floor and so on. For more information, see F,1-10 (Floor) Tabs on page 371.
F,1-10 (Floor) Tabs

The Build Framing dialog opens at the current floors framing tab. Each tab specifies framing that corresponds to specific floors or assemblies. You can switch between tabs to define all settings. Each floor can have a ceiling or a floor platform framed above it. Since framing is drawn over the walls that support it in Plan View, there are two options for each floor. The floor below must exist before you can build framing over it. For example, if you have a first floor plan and have built floors and ceilings, but have not yet created a foundation plan, the Build Floor Framing check box on the "F" (for foundation) tab will not be available, since floor joists for the first floor display with the foundation plan.
371
Framing
that for a truss's top chord, this causes the lower rafter edge to be below the top plate of the supporting wall, forcing a birdsmouth cut in the rafter. If the truss
has been raised to provide space for insulation, the rafter may not need to be cut at all. But if the truss is raised too much, the rafter may not rest on the top plate at all.
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
9 10 11 12
Framing for platforms is defined on tabs that correspond to floors in the model. There are two sections for each floor, Ceiling above and Subfloor for floor above. box and ceiling framing will be regenerated when the OK button is clicked. of joists. If the platform is a floor assembly, you can specify a rim joist with the check box.
1 Build Ceiling Framing - Check this
point for laying out framing is the Framing Reference Marker. If a reference has been placed, the center (surface if joists are lapped) of the first joist is placed at this point and spacing goes from there. For ceiling joists, the starting point for spaced joists will be the Framing Reference Marker if you select the Use Framing Reference check box. If the check box is cleared, the system will attempt to position ceiling joists so that they overlap rafters. (Be sure to build the roof framing first if you are doing this.) The Framing Reference Marker is usually not used both for ceiling joists and nearby rafters that run the same way, because one is then placed on top of the other. For floor joists, the starting point for a joist layout is always the Framing Reference Marker. For more information, see Framing Reference Markers on page 382.
2 Spacing - Enter a value for the spacing
butt over a bearing wall. The lap is eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the support. When the Framing Reference Marker is used and butt over support is checked, the joists are placed at reference spacing. If lap over support is checked, the surface where the joists lap is placed at the reference spacing locations, so that joists will appear to either side of the framing reference locations.
3 Specify if the framing members lap or
5 The Joist width box determines the

joist's actual thickness.
4 Use Framing Reference - This applies

to ceiling framing only. The starting
372
This is a default depth that can be overridden by specifying Floor Structure Thickness on the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207.
framing only. Check this to automatically produce a rim joist across the ends of the floor joists. If this is not checked you will probably want to manually draw in line blocking across the ends of the floor joists later. butt over a bearing wall. The lap is eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the support. When the Framing Reference Marker is used and butt over support is checked, the joists are placed at reference spacing. If lap over support is checked, the surface where the joists lap is placed at the reference spacing locations, so that joists will appear to either side of the framing reference locations. floor framing only. It is the actual thickness for the floor sheathing.
11 Specify if the framing members lap or
7 Type - Select the type of joist from the menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type does not affect how the framing is placed. It does, however, change how it appears in cross section and 3D views and the Material List entries for this framing.
This is a default type that can be overridden by specifying Floor Structure Type on the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207. blocking will be manually drawn after the joists have been placed. Blocking is produced as a single object, but appears as separate pieces chopped up by the joists. It is moved and edited as if it were a single framing object, however. In Line produces blocking pieces that align with each other. Stagger produces blocking that alternates on either side of the line you draw. Cross produces cross bridging that looks like in line blocking in plan view, but shows as cross bridging in 3D views and the materials list.
12 Subfloor thickness - This applies to
8 Blocking / Bridging specifies how
The program adds the joist depth to the subfloor thickness to determine the default platform thickness in the Floor Defaults dialog. This is a default thickness that can be overridden by specifying it in the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Structure Tab on page 207. If the material Concrete has been applied to the floor, the program gets the platform thickness from the slab thickness in the Foundation Defaults dialog. For more information, see Building a Foundation on page 279.
373
Framing
joist's actual depth, which also determines the thickness of the floor or ceiling platform.
6 The Joist depth box determines the
9 Specify the Spacing. 10 Rim Joist - This applies to floor
Wall Tab
1 3 5
2 4 6
7 9 11
8 10
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all referenced by the program to determine how walls are framed. The settings on these three tabs define how automatic framing generates and how wall framing is calculated for the Material List.
You can still make changes to your plan once you have framed your model. If your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceiling were moved for instance, you will need to rebuild framing to update the model.
its material is set to one of the Framing materials, the depth of the stud is set by the wall's main layer thickness. spacing starts from the framing reference mark, if one is present.
2 Specify the actual Stud Thickness. If
3 Specify the actual Stud Spacing. This 4 Build Wall Framing Details from
Exterior - Select the check box to display wall framing details from the exterior.
Wall
to build wall framing for the entire model. Framing will be built only in walls whose main layer materials type is framing. For more information, see Wall Type Definitions on page 162.
1 Build Wall Framing - Check this box
bridging will be produced. Bridging is produced as a single object, but appears as separate pieces chopped up by the studs. It is moved and edited in the Wall Detail view as if it were a single framing object, however. Exterior - Check this to automatically produce bridging on external walls when wall framing is build.
5 Bridging - specifies how and where
374
align with each other. This applies to bridging produced automatically or manually drawn in the Wall Detail. Stagger produces bridging that alternates on either side of a center line along the wall. This applies to bridging produced automatically or manually drawn in the Wall Detail.
6 In Line produces bridging pieces that
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls

box to mitre the ends of the top and bottom plates and corners that are not right angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates will be butted together. box to have the studs closest to the mitre end be rotated to the angle of the mitre cut. If it is cleared, the studs will remain perpendicular to the angle of the walls. check box to specify the horizontal walls in Plan View to frame through, butting vertical walls against them.
9 Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
10 Rotate End Studs - Select the check
Plates 7 Specify The Number of Top Plates. A

single bottom plate is always provided.
11 Horizontal Frame Thru - Select the
Openings Tab
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 9
Add for Rough Opening

Sets the default amount to add to nominal opening sizes to produce the rough opening size.
Entering a value here defines the default value for rough opening displayed on the General tab of the Window or Door Specification dialogs.
375
Framing
Interior - Check this to automatically produce bridging on internal walls when wall framing is built.
8 Specify the Thickness of top and

bottom plates.
These can be overridden for any specific window or door in the General tab of the Window or Door Specification dialogs. The Window and Door Specification dialogs show these values differently in that they show the total amount added to the opening for both height and width. For the width, if defaulted, this would be twice the Each Side value in the Build Framing dialog, and for the height it would be the sum of the Top and Bottom values. the top of the opening to the bottom of the header. from the bottom of the opening to the top of the sill plate. from each side of an opening to the side of the trimmer or stud nearest it.
Double Trimmer At and Triple Trimmer At values used above. A bay window whose top is lower than the top of the wall in which it is placed will usually contain a header spanning the entire bay. Trimmers are usually not needed for this header since the trimmers in the wall will support it. The same is true for most bow windows. dimensions for a thinner trimmer which is used if a standard trimmer does not fit. Space can be tight in a bay or bow window, and the desired size of component window may not fit into the bay or bow if standard size trimmers are used. If this is the case, the program will omit the trimmers, assuming that a metal bracket or other means is used for header support. You may enter the dimensions for a thinner trimmer into Bay Component Trimmer, which will be used if it will fit but a standard trimmer will not. The default for this is 3/4 inch (20mm). Bay window components default to a size that allows one standard trimmer when a bay is first created. When the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its components automatically resize to fit a standard trimmer. If you select the bay and then use the Tab key to select the individual component window on which you clicked, you can resize that component either by selecting it and dragging from a side handle, or by selecting it and clicking the Open Object edit button in order to modify it using the Window Specification dialog. You are allowed to resize it larger, until there is only room for the thinner trimmer or for no trimmer at all. Once a component is resized
7 Bay Component Thickness - Enter the
1 Top - Specify the space to allow from 2 Bottom - Specify the space to allow
3 Each Side - Specify the space to allow
Trimmer
Normally one trimmer (stud that supports headers) is placed on each side of an opening. The values below allow this number to be increased based on the width of an opening. wide as this value will have two trimmers on each side.
4 Double Trimmer At - Openings as 5 Triple Trimmer At - Openings as wide

as this value will have three trimmers.
overall bay or bow window may be suppressed by entering zero into Max Bay Trimmers. Enter 1 to have one trimmer on each side, and a greater number to have the number of trimmers determined by the
6 Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for the
376
in this way, it will retain its size if at all possible while the overall bay is moved or resized. If the bay is resized in such a way that the component becomes too large to fit, the component resumes its default behavior, resizing as its containing bay window is resized.
Sills
the sill here. This is the size of the framing below the window, not the window sill itself. a Double Sill for all windows. The sill settings are for the framing members below the window, not the window sill itself.
8 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
9 Double Sill - Check this box to specify
Headers Tab
3 5 2
4 6
Chief Architect is dependent upon user input and does not attempt any structural analysis. The program does not calculate loads or bearings. Always consult your local building authorities, or contact a licensed engineer for structural calculations.
precut headers in the Material List. Precut headers are shown only if the walls have been framed.
2 Precut - Select the check box to show
the opening width. These values should be set so that the wider the opening, the deeper the header.
1 Specify the header depth dependent on
If this is unchecked, the Material List produces a total footage for all headers. When checked, each different length of precut header is listed separately. (Note that the total number of headers will be twice the number of openings if Count is set to 2).
377
Framing
required to make the header. Using this number, the program generates a count of header stock for you in the Material List. When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches, headers are usually doubled or laminated, so the default number of boards making up a header in Count is 2.
3 Thickness - Specify header thickness. 4 Count - Enter the Count of boards
opening is closer to the top plate than the value in Max Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the entire area. This disables the building of short cripple studs between the top of the header top and bottom of the plate. The default of 12 1/16 inch works well for 68 headers in 80 walls.
5 Max Depth - If the top of the rough
6 Type - Specify the type of material

used for headers.
Posts/Beams Tab
3 2 6 5
7 8 9 11 10
All beams are drawn manually. They are not produced with the automatic framing.
which displays as the width of the beam in plan view. menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and
1 Depth - Enter the depth of the beam. 2 Thickness - Enter the beam thickness
steel box. Changing the type can affect how the beam appears in cross section and 3D views and in the Material List. be drawn under the joists or up in the floor platform with the joists. If the joist depths and subfloor thickness have been set in the Build Framing dialog, the beam height will be properly positioned even if the joists have not yet been produced. If With
4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can
3 Type -Select the type of beam from the
378
beam is drawn along and over an exterior wall, its outer surface will snap to either the walls outer layer or outer main layer, as specified here. Posts are produced manually in Post mode by clicking in Plan view where a post is desired. square with each side having this dimension. It can be subsequently edited to have a rectangular shape with any dimensions.
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
automatically produced when a post is created on the lowest floor. The top of this footing will be this distance below the floor surface.
8 Top (from floor) - A footing is
9 Width - Width of the automatically

produced footing under a new post. produced footing under a new post.
6 Dimension - A post is created initially
10 Height - Height of the automatically 11 Square/Round - The new footing is

view. created either square or round in plan
7 Type - Select the type of post from the
menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist,
Roof Tab
1 3 5
2 4 6
379
Framing
Joists is specified the beams should be drawn before framing is automatically produced. Then the joists will be broken and butted to the beam.
glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type can affect how the post appears in cross section and 3D views and in the Material List.
once roof planes have been built to build roof framing for the entire model.
1 Build Roof Framing - Check this box 2 Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.
This spacing is used when automatically producing rafters. It also sets the initial offset value for laying out rafters using the Multiple Copy edit button. Use Framing Reference - Select the check box if you want to use a defined starting point for rafter layout.
Note: The disadvantage of using the framing reference is that common rafters on either side of a hip rafter will not meet in the same place. If the framing reference is not used the automatic framing utility starts common rafter spacing from each end of the horizontal ridges, which results in common rafters on either side of hip jacks meeting each other. You often want this checked for a gable roof, but may not for a hip roof.
If the Angled Dormer Hole check box is cleared, a rectangular hole is framed to contain the dormer area, with its double headers placed where the peak of the dormer roof meets the main roof plane. Rafters are placed within this hole at the top along the valleys formed by the dormer roof sections. If the top cross headers do not fit within the roof plane, angled headers are produced regardless of the state of the check box. Rafter Type - Select the type of rafter from the menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. This changes the type for rafters, but not for ridges or fascia. These can be changed manually after the roof framing is produced if desired.
Dormer Hole is checked, a gable roof dormer creates a five sided hole in a roof plane, with the two top edges formed by the valleys of the dormer. An angled doubleheader runs between the doubled rafters on one side to the ridge. On the opposite side, a shorter angled doubled header frames the other valley.
4 If Angled
Changing the type does not affect how the rafters are placed. It does, however, change how they appear in cross section and 3D views and the Material List entries for this framing. blocking will be manually drawn after the rafters have been placed. Blocking is produced as a single object, but appears as separate pieces chopped up by the rafters. It is moved and edited as if it were a single framing object, however. Blocking is produced perpendicular to the roof plane, so blocking as seen in plan view represents the position of the top of the blocking.
6 Blocking/Bridging - specifies how
380
Stagger produces blocking that alternates on either side of the line you draw. Cross produces cross bridging that looks like in line blocking in plan view, but shows as
Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and Lookouts may all be set in the Roof tab.
7 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
Trusses Tab
1 3
5 6
The parameters set in this tab apply to any subsequently drawn trusses. They can be overridden for any selected group of trusses using the Truss Specification dialog. The program uses these values to model Trusses for graphic representation only. These are not engineered trusses. You should consult an engineer or truss company to have your trusses designed.
3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the

Webbing. Kingpost to require a vertical member from the roof peak to the bottom chord. If this is not checked, a vertical member may still be supplied, depending on what is needed to support the chords at or closer than the specified maximum spans. maximum length between junctions of the supporting webbing to the Top Chord and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
4 For triangular trusses, check Require
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the

Top Chord.
5 Under Maximum Span, set the
2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of

the Bottom Chord.
381
Framing
In Line produces blocking pieces that align with each other.
cross bridging in 3D views and the materials list. Cross bridging is seldom used with rafters.
may cause different truss configurations such as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan, double fink, double howe etc. to be represented. You can experiment to see what type of truss is possible. These distances are measured horizontally for both rafters and joists. In some circumstances, especially with more complex trusses, making these spans equal may result in the webbing appearing more normal or standard. For more information, see Trusses on page 397. whether the settings apply to Roof trusses or Floor/Ceiling trusses.
displays but cannot be set in this dialog. These spacings are set in the Build Framing dialog.
6 Roof and Floor/Ceiling - Specifies
Materials Tab
The Material tab sets the default materials used for framing objects appearing in 3D and Render Views. These material specifications are not used for material take-offs. Materials List information, is derived from the structure type of each framing object. The Materials tab of the Build Framing dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many other specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Truss Spacing
To set the truss spacing, select any truss, framing object, or CAD object in Plan View, then click the Multiple Copy edit button. The Multiple Copy dialog will open when the Multiple Copy edit button is clicked again. This dialog sets the truss spacing as well as spacing for CAD objects. The spacing for joists, rafters and wall studs
Framing Reference Markers

Framing Reference Markers are reference points set by the user that tell the program how to lay out automatically produced framing. Layout for wall, ceiling and floor framing will be started from the closest Framing Reference Marker as measured from the center of the area to be framed. If no Framing Reference Marker is found on the floor being framed, the closest Framing Reference Marker on the first floor is used. Normally a single Framing Reference Marker on the first floor plan is used for the entire house. Wall framing and automatically produced floor joists are always positioned by the program using the Framing Reference
382
Framing Reference Markers
Note: If no Framing Reference Markers exist in your plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the Framing Reference Marker location.
If no Framing Reference Markers exist in your plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the Framing Reference Marker location. To find this point: 1. 2. Toggle to CAD mode in Plan View. Click the Point child button, and double-click in Plan View to produce a new point. The Move Point dialog will open. Select the Absolute Location check box and enter 0 in each of the X Distance and Y Distance boxes. Click OK and the point will be moved to the (0, 0) location.
A Framing Reference Marker can be moved by selecting it and dragging from the handle that appears. When moved, the marker will snap to a CAD point, a wall main layer, or a corner. A Framing Reference Marker is a specific kind of marker that can be modified just like other markers. For more information on markers, see Markers on page 671.
Using Framing References

Manually drawn joists, rafters, trusses and studs can be moved a proper distance from a Framing Reference Marker. Any selected group of framing objects that are all parallel to each other can be moved using the Move to Framing Ref button. These should have the proper spacing relative to each other before the move. Only one of the objects is compared to the Framing Reference and moved. The remaining objects are simply moved the same amount as the first object. To move a group of framing objects to a Framing Reference marker, you must: 1. 2. 3. Group select the framing objects. Click the Move to Framing Ref button that appears in the Edit toolbar. The framing members will be moved to the nearest Framing Reference Marker.
3.
4.
Typically, this point is not near the floor plan. It is a good idea to place at least one Framing Reference Marker on the first floor.
Placing Framing Reference Markers

To place a Framing Reference Marker, click the Framing Reference Marker child button, or select Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker from the menu. Click in Plan View to place the marker. The Framing Reference Marker will appear in the plan. A corner of the first framing member will snap to this point and all other framing members will be laid out from there.
383
Framing
Marker. You can elect not to use the Framing Reference Marker for positioning rafters and ceiling joists in the Framing dialog.
Framing Reference Markers will snap to CAD objects first, and then to a wall main layer surface or corner if possible. One way to accurately position a marker is to position a CAD point first, then create the marker on top of it.
The Move to Framing Ref button references the on center spacing distance set in the Build Framing dialog, when it positions a joist relative to the Framing Reference Marker. The first Joist will be this distance from the Reference marker. The spacing that will be used for moving any framing object can be viewed by selecting the object and double-clicking on the Multiple Copy edit button. The Copy
Layout Distances dialog that displays
will show the spacing for each framing object type. The initial spacing for floor and ceiling joists depends on the platform containing them. The default spacing for a platform is set in the Build Framing dialog. A spacing specific to a particular floor or ceiling platform is set in a Joist Direction Line contained within the platform. For more information, see Joist Direction Lines on page 385.
Bearing Lines
The Bearing Line tool can be accessed from the Framing Tools child toolbar or by selecting Build> Structure> Bearing Line. Once the mode is active you can draw a Bearing line just like you would draw a line or a wall. It can be one straight line, or it can jog and be drawn in segments as a polyline. Bearing lines can be modified just like CAD lines and polylines. For more information, see CAD on page 675. Bearing lines will snap to the center of nearby walls when framing is built. The following illustration of a single bearing line and of a polyline bearing line demonstrate the effect on Automatic Framing.
If a Bearing Line exists the program will lap or butt the joist and/or rafters over the line, depending on the option selected in the
Build Framing dialog. For more
information, see F,1-10 (Floor) Tabs on page 371.
384
Joist Direction Lines
A platform can be split into two with a Bearing Line. Then the joist direction and/or depth can be specified on each side of the Bearing Line. Each new platform takes on
Note: Always Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings and build framing after drawing the Bearing Line in order to update the model using the new information.

Tthe Joist Direction tool can be accessed from the Framing Tools child toolbar or by selecting Build> Structure> Joist Direction. Draw a Joist Direction Line as you would draw a CAD line or a wall. A Joist Direction Line defines the direction joists will be laid out. Every floor platform can have its own joist direction defined by a Joist Direction line. If a direction line is not specified, the joists are run the way that makes them shortest. The Joist Direction Line shows the joist depth and spacing for the platform that contains it. The text along the Joist Direction Line gives the joist size and spacing for the platform. Unless redefined in the individual Joist Direction Line, these values reflect the settings specified on the appropriate tab of the Build Framing dialog.
385
Framing
A Bearing Line should start outside the floor or ceiling platform and end outside of it, passing completely through the building.
properties given by the Joist Direction Line it contains, as described below.
Joist Direction Specification Dialog

The Joist Direction Line contains the joist depth and spacing information for the floor or ceiling platform containing it. To change this information: 1. Click on the Joist Direction Line and click the Open Object edit button. The Joist Direction Specification dialog will open. Define the Spacing of the joists in the platform. You can also define the Depth for these joists, but that is no longer recommended for floor platforms since version 9.0. You should instead use the Floor Structure Thickness and Subfloor Thickness boxes in the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog for the rooms over these platforms.
Note: For the Depth value to take affect you must first Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to regenerate the platform with the proper thickness.
Using Joist Direction Lines

Two Joist Direction Lines, one on either side of a Bearing Line, can split a platform into two for the purpose of defining different framing specifications for each area. A less common application would be to use a single Joist Direction Line across two separate platforms in order to define a single framing specification for both platforms. This is illustrated by the following example: A 1 1/2 story house with an upstairs room partially under the eave is shown in cross section in the diagram.
2. 3.
Ceiling platform
Floor Platform
The Joist Direction Line will change the joist specification for the entire platform, but it will not change the setting in the Build Framing dialog. Settings in the Joist Direction Specification dialog will affect any subsequently produced framing for this platform only.
The program produces a floor platform under the second floor living area and ceiling platforms under the attic eave area. This is fine if the first floor has supporting walls or a large beam under the second floor kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform should extend to the first floor outside supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
386
With Joist direction lines, you can define separate floor platforms under the second floor living area and ceiling platforms under the attic eave area, or you can define one continuous framed platform across both spaces. To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a single platform, draw a Joist Direction Line that crosses the boundary between them. Following is a diagram of the original framing with the new Joist Direction Line spanning the knee wall area. New Joist Direction Line
You must click the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/ Ceilings button after placing a Joist Direction Line before the changes will take effect. Then rebuild the floor framing for the second floor and the ceiling framing for the first floor. The floor framing now spans into the area which was previously framed using ceiling joists.
Original Framing
Knee Wall on 2nd Floor shown in reference.
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the change. (Note: Several framing members have been deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line more visible.) Although the second floor framing is being edited, the joist direction is drawn on the first floor. The affected floor and ceiling framing displays with the first floor because the first floor walls are supporting the framing, so its
387
Framing
joist direction information must appear there as well.
Floor and Ceiling Joists are combined.
Floor platform extends across area. The following is the cross section showing the same result.
Wall Framing Details

Wall framing is produced when you select the Build Wall Framing check box on the Wall tab of the Build Framing dialog. Wall framing will appear in Plan View, 3D views and Cross Section/Elevation Views when framing is displayed. When the program models the wall framing, it also creates a Wall Detail for each wall in the model. Wall Details are special elevation views of the wall framing. Unlike CAD details, a Wall Framing Detail cannot be opened from the CAD Details dialog. To open a Wall Framing Detail from Plan View, select a wall and click the Open Wall Detail edit button. If no framing has been produced for a particular wall, the Open Wall Detail edit button will not appear when the wall is selected. The Wall Framing Detail is comprised of a polyline that forms the boundary of the wall and the framing objects that are in the wall. The framing objects are the studs, plates and headers of the wall. These are standard framing objects and are placed on System layer 4, which is named Wall Framing. When you open the detail, inspect it and carefully compare the framing layout to your model. The Wall Framing Detail shows the wall as it would appear if viewed from the inside. This can be changed by selecting the Build Wall Framing Details from the Exterior check box on the Wall tab of the Framing Dialog, See Wall Tab on page 374. Wall Framing Details for interior walls are displayed from the inside as well, but it can sometimes be difficult to tell which is the inside edge. Temporarily change the line color of the bottom line for the interior wall type on the Layer Spec tab of the Wall Specification dialog, and the inside edge will become obvious in Plan View. If you want to display the Wall Detail from the opposite side for any interior wall, select the wall, open it and select Flip Layers on the
388
Drawing Wall Framing Members
Most framing objects occupy the entire thickness of the wall main layer. Some, such as a component of a doubled header or a corner sheetrock nailer, may be turned flat and oriented to one side of the wall. Doubled headers appear one behind the other in the Wall Framing Detail. Access doubled objects by clicking on one, then pressing the key or Next other.
Tab
If any wall framing has been produced, the framing objects in each wall are included in the Material List, displaying an accurate accounting of each type, amount, and length of the required framing objects.
Note: If you make any modifications to a wall or an opening, your framing detail will not be updated automatically. You must rebuild wall framing to show the changes. If no wall framing has been produced, it is only estimated for the Material List.
edit button to select the
The boundary of a Wall Detail is a polyline that marks the boundary of the wall framing. The polyline is on System layer 5, Wall Framing, in the Layer Display Options dialog when in a Wall Detail view. This polyline is typically not displayed but you may wish to display it for reference if
Any edits made to wall framing in the Wall Detail will be lost if you rebuild the wall framing from the Build Framing dialog. To prevent this for a particular wall or group of walls, select them and display the Wall Specification dialog. Check Retain Wall Framing on the General tab.
Drawing Wall Framing Members

Before building any framing, you should review the settings defined on all of the tabs of the Build Framing dialog.
Select CAD> Boxes and Framing> Framing from the menu (or click the Framing child button which displays with the Box Tools in CAD mode) to draw studs and plates in wall details. You can also use it to draw a general framing object in Plan View, although these framing objects are seldom used.
Once in Framing mode, produce a framing object by dragging as you would a line or a wall. By default a framing object will measure 1 1/2 inches (38mm) thick. The depth is determined by the width of the walls main layer. When drawing in a Wall Detail, the framing member is placed in the wall. If you draw a general framing member in Plan View, the top of the framing member will be placed at height 0.
389
Framing
General tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Then rebuild wall framing. The Wall Framing Detail will now display from the desired side.
you are extensively editing the wall. The layer should remained locked.
Displaying Framing
In Plan View
Joists and rafters are represented in Plan View by 2D CAD objects that are essentially long, thin rectangles. If you prefer, framing/ trusses can be represented by a single line by checking Use line for framing under Line Properties in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Line Properties Panel on page 111. Elevation View, framing objects that are cut by the cross section plane appear as boxes containing an X. You must have the desired framing types set to display in 3D views in order to see the cross boxes. These are set in the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123. Framing objects can be moved and edited in Cross Section/Elevation and 3D views. Most editing of platform and roof framing objects should still be done in Plan View, however wall framing can be edited only in a Framing detail view.
In Cross Section/ Elevation Views

Framing objects can appear in Section/ Elevations and 3D views. In a Cross Section/
Editing Framing
Once you have made changes to the model that affect framing and have Rebuilt Walls/ Floors/Ceilings, the Build Framing dialog must be opened and any framing areas that are affected must be rebuilt. For example, if a window is moved or resized, the wall framing must be rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged, the wall framing and any roof or platform framing that is affected must also be rebuilt. Once these things have been done you can edit individual or groups of framing members. as any CAD box is changed, by selecting and dragging it from the appropriate handle. There are three handles very close together at the center of the object; a Resize handle in the middle of each edge, and a Move handle at the center of the framing member. Sometimes the program will locate the Move handle off to one side for easier access. Due to the narrowness of the framing member, all three handles are in approximately the same location unless you zoom in very close to the center of the framing member. The cursor changes to a two-headed arrow when over a Resize handle. It changes to a four-headed arrow when over the Move handle.
Moving and Resizing Framing

The length or thickness of any framing member can be changed from plan view just
390
Regenerating Framing
In Plan view, drag from the Move handle and the framing member will move either along or perpendicular to its direction. It will stop when it hits against another framing object or slab. To continue moving through such an object, hit the control key during the move and continue.. In Plan view, to change the length by dragging: 1. Select the framing member by clicking on the end you wish to drag. A handle will appear at that end.
2.
Because it is sometimes difficult to select a handle, it may be preferable to change the width of a framing member in the Framing
Specification dialog, or Zoom In
for
more detail.
Moving and Resizing Framing in Elevation and 3D Views

Framing objects can be selected, moved and resized in Elevation and 3D views similar to the way a cabinet or soffit is edited.
Regenerating Framing
If you modify your plan, move walls, raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, you must Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings and also regenerate automatically produced framing. When floor, ceiling or roof framing is regenerated, all automatically produced framing objects and any copies of them are deleted and new framing will be calculated. Any manually drawn framing objects and copies of them will be retained. When wall framing is regenerated, all objects in each wall Detail are deleted and regenerated unless Retain Wall Framing is checked in the General tab of the Wall Specification dialog for that wall. If the floor plans are not final, do not spend a lot of time altering or copying automatically produced framing objects. It is best to wait until your design is final before doing any detailed framing work.
Framing and the Material List

Each framing object created in the model is counted in the Material List. This list is as accurate as the framing in the plan that produces it. Depending on the type of framing member, it may show as R (Roofing), SF (Sub Floor), or F (Framing general). R (Roofing) contains trusses, rafters and sheathing . framing joists including sheathing.
SF (Sub Floor) contains all floor and ceiling
391
Framing
Drag the handle to resize the length. The length can be changed more precisely in the Framing Specification dialog.
F (Framing general) contains all wall framing and the framing members created by a CAD framing box. It is important to note that the Material List can be produced two ways. 1. If no framing has been produced in the model, then the amount of framing that would be produced is estimated as accurately as possible. Total lineal footage for various depths of rafter and joist material is given, rather than a quantity of specific lumber lengths and sizes.
2.
If framing objects exist, then the framing members are counted instead of estimated for the Material List.
Roof framing is treated the same way. 1. If no roof framing objects are found, an estimation is done.
If even one rafter is created, the program assumes roof framing has been produced and the Material List produces a count of the rafters found in the model. For more information, see Materials List on page 859.
Framing Specification Dialog

Select a framing member and click the Open Object edit button to open the Framing Specification dialog.
General Tab
5 6 1
2 3 4
1 Changing one of the following three
objects can cause changes in the other
392
Framing Specification Dialog
Top Height is the height of the top of the framing object. This is an absolute height, where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter this is the top height at its low end. Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of the framing object. This is an absolute height, where 0 is the first floor. For a rafter this is the bottom height its low end. Depth is the depth of the framing object. For a rafter this is the depth measured perpendicular to the roof plane. Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower the framing object from its current position. Once a value is entered, the other controls are disabled. The amount is added to both the top height and the bottom height when you click OK, and will not affect the depth. rafter this length is measured along the top of the rafter, and so is greater than the length measured in plan view. Changing this expands or contracts the framing object about the location specified by the radio buttons described below. view. Changing this rotates the object about the location specified by the radio buttons descirved below. framing object will expand or rotate. Start refers to the location from which you started drawing the framing object. which appears as its width in Plan View.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Framing Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Framing Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
2 Length of the framing object. For a
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Framing Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
3 Angle of the framing object in plan
4 Set the location about which the
5 Set the framing objects Thickness,
393
Framing
two. Checking the radio button in front of one of the following three objects will prevent that objects value from changing.
menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type does not affect how the framing is placed. It does, however, change how it appears in cross section and 3D views and the Material List entries for this framing.
6 Type - Select the type of joist from the
Beam Specification
Select a beam and click the Open Object edit button to open the Beam Specification dialog. Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
General Tab
The General Tab of the Beam Specification dialog is the same as the General Tab of the Framing Specification dialog for joists. For more information, see Framing Specification Dialog on page 392.
Note: If a beam structure type is specified as concrete, the beam will not appear as such in the materials list. Instead, the amount of concrete required for all such beams and for all such posts will be listed. In addition, the square footage required for beam forms, and for post forms is also listed.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Beam Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Beam Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Beam Specification dialog is the same as the
Post Specification
Select a Post and click the Open Object edit button to open the Post Specification Dialog.
394
Post Specification
General Tab Framing 395
4 1
2 3
four items can cause changes in the other three. Checking the radio button in front of one of the following four items will prevent that items value from changing. the post. This is an absolute height, where 0 is the first floor.
1 Lock - Changing one of the following
3 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post

width in each dimension. Angle - Specify the angle of the posts rotation. down list. Choices include lumber, Ijoist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and steel box. Changing the type does not affect how the post is placed. It does however change how it appears in cross section, 3D views, and Material List entries.
Note: If a post structure type is specified as concrete, the post will not appear as such in the materials list. Instead, the amount of concrete required for all such beams and for all such posts will be listed. In addition, the square footage required for beam forms, and for post forms is also listed.
2 Top Height is the height of the top of
4 Type - Select a type from the drop
Bottom Height is the height of the bottom of the post. This is an absolute height, where 0 is the first floor. Total Height - The height of the post, or the difference between the top height and the bottom height. Raise/Lower - Enter a value to raise or lower the post from its current position. Once a value is entered, the other controls are disabled. The amount is added to both the top height and the bottom height when you click OK, and will not affect the total height.
396
Chapter 15:
Trusses
Trusses
Chapter Overview
There are two basic ways to frame a roof, the first is commonly called "stickframing", which is also sometimes referred to as "handstacking", or "cut-and-stack". This type of roof incorporates framing such as rafters, ridges, ceiling joists, etc. For more information, see Framing on page 365. The other alternative is to use prefabricated engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect allows you to design and display a wide variety of trusses.
The truss design you use to build must be approved by a licensed engineer.
Chapter Contents
Floor and Ceiling Trusses Roof Trusses Deleting Trusses Copying Trusses Moving Trusses Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View Truss Details Truss Labels Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing Truss Base Hip Trusses Girder Trusses Scissors Trusses Truss Base Specification Dialog Roof Truss Specification Dialog Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
Disclaimer
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are for illustrative purposes only. They can be used to show how trusses will be used in your plan, and to show the licensed engineer who produces your final truss design where you want your trusses and how you would like them to work with your plan.
397
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses may be used instead of joists to frame platforms. Like manually drawn floor and ceiling framing, the platform type at the tops of the walls visible in Plan View will determine whether the drawn truss is a floor or ceiling truss. For example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a single story home will produce a Ceiling Truss. A truss drawn on the first floor of a two story building will produce a Floor Truss. To access these tools, click the Framing Tools parent button, and select the Floor Truss child tool. You may also access these tools through the Build> Framing> menu. Once in the desired mode, simply click and drag to create a floor/ceiling truss. Floor trusses, unlike roof trusses, do not adjust their length to automatically seek the exterior wall. However, if you start or end your truss close to a wall surface, or CAD object, the truss will snap to the surface or object. The Trusses tab of the Build Framing dialog contains default settings for floor and ceiling trusses. For more information, see Trusses Tab on page 381. These default settings can be overridden by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification dialog. For more information, see Floor/ Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog on page 419.
Roof Trusses
After roof planes and ceiling planes have been modeled, roof trusses may be built. To get into truss mode, select Build> Framing> Truss or click the Roof Truss child tool. Roof Trusses can be selected and opened for specification, for more information, see Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 415. Draw a truss as you would a CAD line, dragging from the start of the truss to the end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable end wall or at the ridges end of a hipped roof. The program will shape the truss so that it fits properly between the roof plane and the ceiling plane. This may include truncating one or both of the ends if they come against existing roof trusses. If a truss is drawn across another truss, it will terminate exactly on the surface of the existing truss. The resulting truss is considered to be a girder truss. If the roof or ceiling planes vary, so will the trusses. The ends of a truss may expand or contract based on the roof and ceiling planes that define it. Trusses can end on interior walls. You can draw a truss that partially crosses the building by starting and/or ending it at an interior wall. The end must be within two feet (600mm) of the interior wall. The truss will extend over the wall's main layer. Its end
398
Roof Trusses
will line up with the main layer surface on the far side of the wall. A roof truss can exist only between roof and ceiling planes. You cannot draw a roof truss above an area where you have cleared the Ceiling over this room on the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog, If you have cleared this check box, you must manually draw a ceiling plane before a roof truss can be drawn over that area. The placement of webbing inside a newly drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing dialog. For more information, see Trusses Tab on page 381. If you intend to use roof trusses, you should select the Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the Build Roof dialog. When this is selected the rafter depth that determines the roof plane thickness is taken from the Top Chord depth on the Trusses tab of the Framing dialog. If it is not checked, the roof plane thickness is determined by the rafter Depth setting on the Roof tab. When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge of the top chord will bear on the top of the exterior supporting wall at the outside edge of the main layer. No birdsmouth is provided. The truss top chord can be raised by entering the distance from the top plate to the bottom of the chord in Raise Off Plate in the Build Roof dialog. If the program does not have enough information to model the trusses, there will be an error message. For example, a truss that is under the roof overhang but not over a ceiling will produce this message:
Roof and ceiling surfaces too close together or cannot be found, so cannot make truss. The incorrect truss may still appear in Plan View with a label of the form TR-*. If so it should be deleted or moved. For more information, see Deleting Trusses on page 400.
Attic Trusses
Attic trusses, a useful variation of roof trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an attic area to either side and above an upstairs room, such as in a cape cod style home. Certain conditions must be met before an attic truss can be built. Building must be of sufficient width to allow for attic space. Walls which will be raked under the roof must be designated as full gable walls in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Walls whose height will be cut down by an overriding roof section must be designated as knee walls in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog. The pitch, designated in the Build Roof dialog, must be sufficient to allow appropriate ceiling height for storage or living space. The goal is to create a continuous plane from the roofs ridge to the first story baseline. Typical pitches for such a condition range from 8 in 12 to 12 in 12, or greater.
Here is a typical cross section view of a building with attic trusses:
399
Trusses
1.
Select the roof truss in Plan View, and click the Open Object edit button. The Roof Truss Specification dialog appears.
2.
Select the Attic Truss check box and then click OK to complete. For more information, see Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 415.
Once these conditions have been met, a roof truss is ready to be designated as an attic truss.
The final product can be scrutinized as a CAD detail, see Truss Details on page 402.
Deleting Trusses
Trusses of any kind can be individually or multiply selected and deleted with the Delete edit button, or by pressing the Delete Del key on your keyboard. Trusses can also be deleted entirely through the Delete Objects dialog box. For more information, see Delete Objects on page 754.
Copying Trusses
When the first truss has been created and edited to suit your needs, the Multiple Copy tool can create duplicates at specified intervals. 1. 2. 3. Select the truss to be copied in Plan View. Click the Multiple Copy edit button. Once in Multiple Copy mode, click the Multiple Copy edit button again to open the Copy Layout Distances dialog.
4. 5.
Enter the correct spacing in the All Trusses box. Once set, click OK. Select the truss on its Move handle and drag perpendicular to the truss. (The cur-
400
Moving Trusses
sor becomes a four-headed arrow when it is over the move handle.) 6. Trusses will appear on screen. Drag far enough in the desired direction so that all desired trusses are visible. When the mouse button is released trusses will be produced at the specified intervals. Each truss is built according to
the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss Base planes above and below it. Copied trusses may become different from the original if they are placed where the roof/ ceiling configuration is different. In this case their label will be different from that of the original. For more information, see Truss Labels on page 403.
7.
Moving Trusses
In Plan View
You can move a truss as you would a rafter, joist or any other framing object. When a truss or framing object is selected, one of the handles displayed is the Move handle. It is unique because the cursor changes to a fourheaded arrow when over it. Often the Move handle displays off to the side of the truss rather than exactly in its center, in order to distinguish it from other handles. The truss can be dragged perpendicular to its direction. Edges and corners of roof planes, as well as other trusses and framing objects, can block this movement. Just tap the Ctrl key when this occurs and the truss can be moved past the obstruction. When a roof truss is moved or drawn, it will snap to two things. 1. If drawn along an exterior wall, it will snap so that its outer surface is flush with the outer surface of the wall's main layer. The center line can snap to the edge or corner of a nearby roof plane. To prevent a truss from snapping to a roof plane edge or other object, zoom in closer while moving it, or press the Autosnap off button. When the move is finished, the truss is updated and will conform to the roof or ceiling dimensions in its new location. You may see it lengthen or shorten in Plan View. The truss is created as if you had drawn it in the new location. If the truss(es) have been locked, the size of the truss will not update but will maintain its original settings. For more information, see Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 415. Trusses can be moved to the proper distance from the Framing Reference Marker spacing by selecting them and clicking on the Move to Framing Ref edit button that appears in the Edit toolbar. A selected group of trusses that are all parallel to each other can be moved by the Move to Framing Ref edit button. These should have the proper spacing relative to each other before the move, because only one of the trusses is compared to the framing reference and moved. The remaining trusses
2.
401
Trusses
are simply moved the same amount as the first one. For more information, see Framing Reference Markers on page 382.
In 3D and Render Views

You can select and move a truss in a 3D view the same as you would a floor or ceilng joist.
The only difference is that the Lock Truss and Webbing attribute (refer to the Roof Truss Specification dialog) is set so that the truss will not move back to between the roof and ceilng planes the next time it is edited or otherwise changed.
Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View

When a truss is viewed at a 90 degree angle in a Cross Section/Elevation View, its shape can be edited. Click on the truss to select it and a surrounding polyline will display with handles. Move and alter this polyline and the truss will regenerate inside it. Normal use for this will probably be to change overhang and truss end details rather than overall shape changes. The Lock Truss and Webbing attribute (See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 415) is set after editing so that the truss will not reshape itself back between the roof and ceilng planes the next time it is edited or otherwise changed.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss the program automatically creates a CAD Detail named Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by selecting CAD> CAD Detail and selecting it from the list. All the trusses used in your plan will be in this detail. If several trusses are identical, only one diagram is given. The label to the lower left of the diagram gives a number that designates this truss type in the Plan View and in the Material List. The quantity of each type is also listed. The Truss Detail is for display of trusses only. Editing the members that make up the trusses in the Truss Detail is not recommended. If you edit a Truss Detail and then wish to restore it you must: 1. Delete any new members you have drawn in the detail view.
402
Truss Labels
The Roof Truss Specification dialog will open. 3. Click OK and the truss will regenerate, along with its Truss Detail diagram.
2.
Go to the Plan View, select the truss, click the Open Object edit button.
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in Plan View in the format TR - xx. Floor and ceiling trusses are labeled FTR - xx. The xx follows the consecutive order in which each distinct truss type or configuration was created. For example the first truss type created will be labeled TR-1, and the second will be labeled TR-2 and so on. Truss labels also appear in the Truss Detail and the Material List. A copied truss will have the same label as the original if the conditions of the new location are the same as before. If conditions are different, the copied truss will be built differently, and will display a different label. Truss labels are centered on the truss that they represent. Click on the label to select it and move it. If the truss is moved, the label will move with it. Deleting the truss will delete its label. You may move a group of truss labels together. Select the first label, hold the Shift key and click on other labels to select them. Click on an already selected label to deselect it. Once all the labels to be moved are selected, return to the originally selected label and drag from its handle.
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After you have laid out all the trusses for your roof the Build Framing dialog can be used to create roof framing that will fill in areas not framed by the trusses.
403
Trusses
Open the Framing dialog and select the Build Roof Framing check box on the Roof tab. Check that the on center spacing of the rafters is correct. The framing produced will be extended or truncated where it runs into a truss. The exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
and common rafters at the end of a hip roof can pass over a drop hip truss. Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass over a truss at the gable and end at the next truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are chopped into blocking between the trusses.
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary separating the tops of normal roof trusses and valley fill roof trusses that lie across and above them. To define a Truss Base, click the Truss Base button, or select Build> Roof> Truss Base. Create the Truss Base as you would a roof plane or ceiling plane. No overhang is produced. The Truss Base is very similar to a roof plane in its creation and definition. If you select it and click the Open Object edit button the
Truss Base Specification dialog will
open. For more information, see Truss Base Specification Dialog on page 413. Truss Bases are used to create valley fill trusses. The best way to understand valley fill trusses is the example of an L shaped house with a gable roof. The wider wing of this house is trussed through from end to end. Call these normal trusses. Starting at its outside end, the narrow wing is trussed with normal trusses until the wider wing is reached.
404
Truss Base
Where the valley begins, valley fill trusses are placed over the top of the main roof until the peak of the narrow wing's roof is reached.
Only three valley fill trusses, TR-2, TR-3, and TR-4, are used in the following example.
Truss Base (triangular - shown hatched) Valley Fill Trusses (shown darker)
Normal Trusses
Valley Fill trusses climb up roof made using normal trusses The Truss Base defines the footprint of the valley fill trusses on the main roof. In order for the program to model the trusses correctly, you must draw the Truss Base. If drawn correctly, a Truss Base should be in the same plane with, and its baseline should be collinear with its surrounding roof plane. The purpose of a Truss Base is to form a boundary separating normal trusses below from the valley fill trusses above. You already know that trusses are built between roof planes and ceiling planes. A truss passing through a Truss Base will be placed below the plane of the base if it is more
405
Trusses
perpendicular to the baseline of the Truss Base. It will be built above the plane of the base if it is more parallel to the baseline. To create a Truss Base: 1. Create an L-shaped house with the roof plan shown below.
2. Click here
1. Draw Truss Base baseline
3. 4.
Move the cursor and click on the point where the gable intersects the main roof. The program will create a triangular Truss Base.
The Truss Base is shown hatched in the diagram below.
The triangular area of overlap between the main roof and the gable must be defined as a Truss Base. 2. Choose Build> Roof> Truss Base, then draw a baseline along the outside edge of the wall from valley to valley.
The baseline is darkened in this diagram.
406
Truss Base
Once the Truss Base has been created you can lay out the trusses. 5. 6. 7. Draw the first truss. Select the truss and click the Multiple Copy tool. Drag from the Move handle to create copies at the defined intervals.
The trusses placed for the main roof will generate right through the Truss Base, stopping on top of the wall, eliminating the overhang in that area.
Select the truss
10. Drag the normal truss up into the Truss Base. Copies of the truss will appear as you drag the cursor. Note: No overhang in this area. 8. After the main trusses are in place, position the first truss on the gable. Draw the first truss in a position where it will be full length. Select the truss and click the Multiple Copy edit button on the Edit toolbar.
Note: Trusses which run perpendicular to the baseline of a Truss Base will go under the Truss Base. Trusses which run parallel to the baseline of the Truss Base will climb the Truss Base.
9.
As you drag the truss copies will appear to all be full length.
407
Trusses
the three valley trusses which are darker in the diagram below.
Drag the truss
11. Release the mouse button, the copies will be clipped by the Truss Base. Note
Hip Trusses
The program can model a hip roof with various truss applications. It can model step down hip trusses, sub-girder hip trusses and drop hip (California) trusses. You will have to decide which method you will use and manually place your trusses accordingly. The program will model them once they are in place.
Step Down Hip

The first illustration shows a step down hip. The flat topped trusses are called hip trusses. Alternating hip trusses have been colored differently in the diagram below.
408
Hip Trusses
Jack Trusses Hip Trusses (4) Step Down Hip 3. 4. Draw hip jacks along the hip ridge from the last truss out into the overhang. Finally, draw a jack truss from the intersection to make sure it is properly positioned. Select the jack truss, click the Multiple Copy button, and lay out jack trusses up to the other hip jack.
This is the quickest hip truss framing to produce. First, draw a truss crossing the apex of the triangular hip roof plane. It should snap exactly into position. 1. Select the truss, click the Multiple Copy button and drag copies down into the hip. Stop when the height of the hip truss reaches a reasonable minimum.
5.
2.
Subgirder Hip
This illustration shows a subgirder hip system. The subgirders are the partial trusses that butt into the doubled truss at the end of the main run. In the following illustration, the double truss has had one face colored dark gray, and several subgirders have been colored light gray.
409
Trusses
Double Truss Subgirder Hip Subgirder Trusses (11)
To produce a Subgirder truss system: 1. 2. 3. Draw a truss where the hip apex meets the ridge. Double it by drawing a second truss on the far side from the hip section. Draw the first subgirder from the hip apex out to the eaves.
4.
Select it and using the Multiple Copy button, make copies in both directions. Stop when the height of the subgirder reaches a reasonable minimum.
5.
Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses as before.
410
Hip Trusses
Drop Hip
This illustration shows the Drop Hip (or California Hip) system which uses the drop hip trusses to support stick frame hip ridges and common rafters. A couple of the drop hip trusses have been colored gray to help distinguish them. Notice that the common rafters are all supported by the drop hip trusses.
Drop Hip Trusses (4) (deepen the joist for this truss) 1. 2. Start this system as you would a step down hip system. When the hip trusses are drawn, group select them, display the Truss Specification dialog and select the Drop hip truss check box. Do not produce any hip jack or jack trusses. Instead, use the Build Drop Hip (or California Hip)
Common Rafters
Framing dialog to produce the com-
mon rafters, and the short joists at the hip end.
3.
411
Trusses
Advantages and Disadvantages of the Different Hip Systems

Each of these three methods has its advantages. With both the step down hip and the subgirder hip system you can get almost everything you need from the truss company. You will need to get small corner jack and end jack trusses in addition to the larger trusses. With the step down hip, if the hip trusses are placed according to your standard on center spacing, the space measured down the hip between the trusses will be larger than the standard.
Spacing is larger down the roof sections on either side of the hip.
Subgirder Hip The drop hip system eliminates the spacing problems because the roof sheathing is nailed to common rafters that pass over the drop hip trusses. The disadvantage to this system is that it requires the rafters in addition to the trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the drop hip truss may not be deep enough to give sufficient strength. The first two methods normally require blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as common rafters that run over the drop hip trusses. Blocking and rafters can be drawn in manually, but are often supplied by the automatic framing generator. For more information, see Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing on page 403.
Spacing is larger down the hip Step Down Hip With the subgirder system, spacing measuring down the roof sections on either side of the hip, near the hip will be too large.
412
Girder Trusses
Girder Trusses
Trusses may not cross each other. If a newly drawn truss ends near a truss crossing its path, the system automatically extends it until it butts into the existing truss. You can draw a new truss from an existing truss to the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or end jack truss. You can also draw a truss between two trusses, forming a girder. This may be necessary for a large opening, such as a skylight. Trusses supporting girder ends would normally be doubled.
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are called Scissor trusses. You can draw ceiling planes just as you would manual roof plane by selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane. The picture above is a simple example of a room with a 6 in 12 pitch gable roof and 3 in 12 pitch ceiling planes.
Truss Base Specification Dialog

The Truss Base Specification dialog is almost identical to the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Although Truss Bases are not the same as Roof Planes, Chief Architect handles the positioning of the two in a similar manner.
413
Trusses
General Tab
1 2 3 5 7 9 4 6 8
height, or 3D orientation of a Truss Base: Ridge/Top, Base Line, Fascia Top and Pitch. These values are related. If one is changed, the others will change as well. Select the radio button to the right of each to lock it. Locking any one of the first three values defines that value as the pivot point for the Truss Base. Each of these dimensions is measured from the first floor elevation of 00. Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the Truss Base. Lock one of these three values, and change any other and the Truss Base rotates about that point as shown in the diagram. All of these values should be set identical to those for the roof plane that surrounds the truss base.
1 There are four values that define the
highest point of the selected Truss Base.
2 Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the
Base Line - Define a new base line height. Fascia top - Define a new height for the fascia top.

selected Truss Base. If you lock the pitch and change one of the other values, the Truss Base moves vertically keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. just plane used by the system to place trusses it will have no rafters. This will show the same value as that for the surrounding roof plane in order to align the truss base with it.
4 Rafter Depth - Since the truss base is
5 The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined

by measuring a plumb line across the
414
Roof Truss Specification Dialog
rafter. The degree of pitch affects the Vertical rafter width. The greater the pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth. is defined by the ceiling height for the room.
6 Top of Plate is shown for reference. It 7 Overhang from Base Line is shown
Selected Line Tab of the CAD Polyline Specification Dialog. For more information, see Selected Line Tab on page 691.
Line Style Tab Trusses

The Line Style tab of the Truss Base Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
for reference, it cannot be edited here.
to lock the selected roof plane when rebuilding roofs automatically. If not checked, this roof plane is discarded and replaced with a new roof plane.
8 Mark as Edited - Select the check box
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Truss Base Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
9 Show Pitch as Degrees - Select the check box to have the pitch value in this dialog displayed as degrees. Polyline Tab
The Polyline Line Tab of the Truss Base Specification dialog is the same as the Polyline Tab of the CAD Polyline Specification Dialog. For more information, see Polyline Tab on page 690.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Truss Base Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line Tab of the Truss Base Specification dialog is the same as the

Select a Roof Truss and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Truss Specification dialog.
415
General Tab
1 2 3 5 7 9 4 6 8 11 13
10
12 14
The Roof Truss Specification dialog allows you to redefine parts of an existing truss (or group of trusses). Some of these settings affect individual trusses only, like a gable truss, and others will affect the whole group. The shape, or volume of a roof truss is controlled by the roof planes above it and the ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed from this dialog. Display this dialog for one or a group of selected trusses in plan view. You can also display this dialog for a single truss by double clicking on it in any elevation or 3D view.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may still be supplied, depending on what is needed to support the chords at or closer than the specified maximum spans. Following is a Truss Detail. The lower truss was a copy of the upper truss, with Require Kingpost checked.
Kingpost
Check Require Kingpost to require a vertical webbing member from the roof peak to the bottom chord.
1 2 3 4
Top Chord - Specify the depth. Bottom Chord - Specify the depth. Webbing - Specify the depth.
replace the webbing with vertical members positioned and spaced on center the same as the wall studs below. The framing reference is used for this exactly as it is for wall studs. If an end truss is in the same position as a gable attic wall, it will replace the framing that would otherwise be produced for that wall.
5 End Truss - Select the check box to
416
to lower the flat top of a truss in the hip area of a roof. The flat top is lowered so common rafters and hip ridges may pass over and be supported by it. The amount that the top chord is lowered is derived from the rafter Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing dialog. Because both common rafters and hip ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge Depth should be set equal to that of the rafter Depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip Truss, see Drop Hip on page 411.
6 Drop Hip Truss - Select the check box
will remove the bottom chord from the overhang area. In order for this to be modeled, the Raise Off Plate value in the Build Roof dialog must be greater or equal to eight. In order to provide more space for ceiling insulation at the exterior walls, the roof is sometimes raised off of the top plate with an Energy Heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a vertical member is added over the supporting wall. Otherwise the truss's bottom chord extends into the overhang area as far as the end of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter if that happens first.
7 Energy Heel - Select the check box to

Without Energy Heel
model a truss with an energy heel. This
With Energy Heel
417
Trusses
lower the top chord of the gable truss so that lookouts may pass over the truss. Any overhang is removed from a reduced truss. You can supply this overhang with short rafters drawn at the ends of the truss.
8 Reduce Gable - Select the check box to
dialog. The webbing is for representational purposes only, not for engineering. truss width. This setting overrides default settings.
11 Thickness - Select the thickness, or 12 Maximum Height - Specify the
maximum height of selected truss.
box to update trusses with the new settings in this dialog when you click OK.
13 Force truss rebuild - Select the check 14 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
Reduce Gable End Truss Lookouts
box to lock size and configuration of truss. A locked truss which has been relocated will maintain its original settings, and so may no longer fit properly if roof and ceiling conditions are different.
Line Style Tab

9 Attic Truss - Check this box to specify

an attic truss maximum horizontal distance between supports along the Top Chord and along the Bottom Chord. If these are equal, the truss webbing often appears more regular. The placement of webbing inside a newly drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom Chord settings under Maximum Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing
10 Maximum Span - Define the
Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
418
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
1 2 3 4
A floor truss can be created when a floor platform exists. Floor platforms are created when walls forming closed rooms are present by clicking Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . To open the Floor Truss Specification dialog, select a floor truss in Plan View and click the Open Object member. edit button.
5 7 9 6 8 Trusses 419
7 Webbing Thickness - Specify

thickness for the webbing. box to update existing trusses with the new settings in this dialog when you click OK. box to lock the size and configuration of the truss. A locked truss which has been relocated will maintain its original settings.
8 Force Truss Rebuild - Select the check
9 Lock Truss & Webbing - Check this
1 Top Chord - Specify the depth of the 2 Bottom Chord - Specify the depth of
the member. member.
Line Style Tab

3 Webbing - Specify the depth of the 4 Vertical Supports - Select the check
box to use vertical supports.
Fill Style Tab

5 Maximum Span - Define the maximum horizontal distance between supports along the Top Chord and Bottom Chord. 6 Overall Thickness - Specify the
overall floor truss thickness.
Materials Tab
420
Chapter 16:
Electrical
Chapter Overview
The electrical plan shows the location of all electrical objects such as lights, switches, outlets, smoke detectors, vents, etc. Basic wiring diagrams show which objects are on the same circuit and where the controlling switches are. The display of electrical objects can be controlled in 2D and 3D. Some electrical symbols such as lights also affect rendering. For more information, see Electrical Library on page 540. Usually the electrical plan is one of the last additions since the positioning of most electrical objects is determined by the location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
Observe the requirements of the building code for your area. Building requirements vary throughout the country and around the world. It is your responsibility to comply with your local codes.
Chapter Contents
The Electrical Tools Outlets Lights Switches Creating Wiring Schematics Place Outlets Electrical Library Selecting Electrical Objects Deleting Electrical Objects Copying Electrical Objects Moving Electrical Objects Rotating Electrical Objects Adjusting the Height Other Edit Tools Displaying Electrical Electrical Service Specification Dialog Electrical Defaults
421
Electrical
The Electrical Tools

Click the Electrical Tools parent button to access the electrical child tools. When you select the Electrical Tools parent button, the 110V Outlet mode is active. If you want to insert other electrical objects into the model click the appropriate button. Click in Plan View to place an electrical object. Some can only be placed against walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and some will automatically change as needed. If you click within 12" of the wall, the selected object will be placed on the wall. Electrical options are also available through the Build> Electrical menu. Once an electrical object is created, it can be selected in Plan View and modified. The red handles which appear may be used to move, rotate, or delete it. Electrical objects will be placed according to the settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. For more information, see Electrical Defaults on page 435.
Outlets
The 110 Outlets child button places a 110V duplex outlet on the wall or floor. The 220 Outlets child button mode places a 220V outlet. The height it is placed on the wall is controlled by the Electrical Defaults outlet height. If it is placed above a counter, the counter default will be used instead. For more information, see Electrical Defaults on page 435. The dimension to the outlet is measured from the center. Certain room types and/or situations will cause a different type of outlet to be placed instead. To take full advantage of the programs abilities, make sure that the rooms are properly defined before placing electrical objects. In a room defined as Bath or Master Bath, the program will place a GFI (Ground Fault Interrupt) type of outlet. If outlets are placed prior to labeling the room as a Bath, outlets will be placed and will have to be deleted and reestablished to have them be GFI outlets. Any outlet placed outside the building or in an exterior-type area such as one defined as deck or porch will be labeled as WP (Water Proof). An outlet placed on the wall behind a base cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink will come in at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the floor. Other types of outlets (such as floor outlets) are available in the Electrical Library .
422
Lights
Lights
Light mode will create a light based on the Electrical Defaults. Depending on where you click in Plan View, the light may be mounted on the ceiling or on a wall. All lights placed in plan with this tool will also place a light source that will be seen in rendered views. Click near a wall to place the light on a wall. The height at which it is placed is set within the symbol itself. Click away from the wall to place the light on the ceiling. You can adjust the height and location of the light with the Electrical Service Specification dialog. If the flat ceiling has been removed so that the ceiling follows the roof line, a ceiling light will be created at the ceiling height but will sit perpendicular to the floor as though it were attached to a flat ceiling. Many other types of lights are available in the Electrical Library . All lights from the Library will create a light source in a Render View.
Light Render Data

Lights added with the electrical symbol can be specified with certain rendering characteristics. Select the symbol in Plan View and click the Open Object edit button. The Electrical Service Specification dialog will open. Adjust the settings on the Render Data tab to specify how the light will display in Render or Raytrace views.
Switches
Switch mode will place a wall switch based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. For more information, see Electrical Defaults on page 435. Like outlets, the height of switches is measured from the floor to the center of the object.
If you connect 2 or more switches in a circuit, they will update to 3-way or 4way switches automatically.
Switches placed from the Electrical Library will not automatically update by default, but can be specified to do so. For more information, see Electrical Service Specification Dialog on page 430.
If two or more switches or outlets are close enough 3D view in Plan View, they Plan View will appear to merge in 3D. Zoom close enough in Plan View to manipulate the two switches close enough together to overlap. The switches and/or outlets must be within 9 inches, at the same height on the wall, and of the same dimensions. Up to 32 switches can be merged together. Switches and outlets appear separately in the materials list.
423
Electrical
Creating Wiring Schematics

There are a couple ways you can create electrical diagrams. Using the Connect Electrical tool is quick and easy. If you need detailed schematas, you may prefer to create your own wiring diagrams using the CAD tools. same circuit. This number will appear with the switch symbol in Plan View. Connections that have been created with the electrical connection tool may be modified. To move or shape the connecting arc between two electrical objects, click anywhere along the arc to display two handles. Drag from the middle handle to change the curvature of the arc. Drag from the other handle to change the shape of the arc so it has a straight or less curved portion and a more curved portion, or to make it an S-curve. The middle handle can be dragged along the arc to make one of its portions longer than the other.
Connect Electrical
Connect Electrical mode is used to lay out circuits, such as showing which lights and outlets are attached to any given switch. To create a new circuit or to add to an existing circuit, press the left mouse button on one electrical object while in Connect Electrical mode, then drag to the next object, and release. Remove any electrical object from the circuit by clicking on it while in Connect Electrical mode. New connections can only be created on either end of any given circuit. Two objects already part of the same circuit cannot be connected together. New connections cannot be added to the middle of a circuit. Any additional connections which are needed but which cannot be done using the Connect Electrical tool may be created in CAD mode ( or F2) by using the Arc tool (and changing the line style and color to match the regular electrical connections.) It is possible to have more than one switch controlling an object or group of objects. If two switches control the same object(s), each is a three way switch. If three switches control the same object(s), each is called a four way switch. The number of ways is one more than the number of switches in the
Drawing Your Own Electrical

Any given electrical object may have at most two connections attached to it using Connect Electrical mode. Sometimes additional connections are desired. Before adding extra connections: 1. Click the Display Options button to open the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126. Set up an electrical layer on the User tab in the Layer Display Options dialog. Choose a layer above 100, click in the name area, and give the layer a name. Specify the line color and linestyle to match the Architectural layer "Electrical". Change the Current CAD Layer to the layer you have defined.
2. 3. 4.
5.
424
Place Outlets
All future CAD objects will be drawn on the CAD layer that you have defined in the Current CAD Layer field. They will have the attributes defined for that layer.
Note: It is a good idea to Select Unrestricted Angles . Arcs will draw smoothly only when the angles are unrestricted.
When everything has been set up properly, you can activate the Arc tool in CAD mode and draw additional electrical runs. The arc will replicate the movement of the cursor. For more information, see Arcs on page 684.
Place Outlets
Automatically Place Outlets by clicking this button, then clicking in a room. Outlets (usually 110V) will be located around the room at intervals not greater than twelve feet so that no wall position is greater than 6 (1800mm) from the nearest outlet. Outlets will be placed based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Electrical Defaults on page 435. Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as ranges, washers, dryers, etc. will each have its required outlet placed automatically (110V or 220V). Lights are always placed above sinks. Place Outlets requires that the room have a door before outlets will be automatically
Outlets tool or by selecting an outlet from the Electrical Symbols Library . Railings or Invisible walls will not separate the rooms for Place Outlets . Instead, all rooms divided by Railings or Invisible walls will have the outlets placed when Place Outlets is used in any one of the rooms. Any outlet, once placed, can be moved or deleted. Outlets can be merged with other outlets or switches. For more information, see Switches on page 423.
Electrical Library
The Electrical Library button accesses a library full of various electrical symbols. Select a symbol, then click in your plan to place it on a wall, floor, or ceiling. The Electrical Library contains many electrical objects, divided into various categories. It has a smoke detector, thermostat, bath vent fans, a ceiling fan, electrical panel, fluorescent lights, can lights, porch lights, chandeliers, and more.
425
Electrical
placed in that room. Place Outlets will not work in any room defined as any exterior type room. Exterior rooms require that the outlets be placed individually using the Place
If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can use the Symbol Development tools to create Electrical symbols and save them to your own
library. For more information, see Create Symbol Wizard on page 787.
Selecting Electrical Objects

Electrical objects may be selected in Plan View, 3D views, and Cross Section/Elevation views. The easiest way to select an electrical object in Plan View is by clicking on it while one of the electrical tools is active. Only electrical objects will be selected. Electrical objects can also be selected by clicking on them in Select Objects mode. If nearby objects are selected first, click the Select Next Object edit butTab ton or key until the electrical object is selected. You can also right-click on the object to select, and use the Select Next Object edit button until the desired electrical object is selected. Electrical objects cannot be group selected.
Deleting Electrical Objects

First you must select an electrical objector a connection between electrical objects. When it is highlighted, click the Delete edit Del button or press the key on the keyboard. Depending on what type of electrical object was selected, the object will be deleted.
Note: When an electrical object is deleted that is connected to another object, the connection is deleted as well.
Copying Electrical Objects

Select the electrical object. To make a single copy, click the Copy edit button and then click in a view to place the copied object. To make multiple copies (such as for placing smoke detectors) double-click the Copy edit button when the object is selected. Then click as many times as desired. You can also copy between plans. If both plans are open and tiled, after the Copy edit button is pressed, click the other plan to activate it, then click again to place the copy. If the other plan is not tiled you will have to select Edit> Paste from the menu to load the object for pasting into the new plan. You can create multiple copies of the selected electrical object.
426
Moving Electrical Objects
Moving Electrical Objects

By Dragging
Select an electrical object. Then grab the square handle when the cursor changes to a Move cursor, and drag the electrical object to the new position. If the object is limited to being placed on walls, the new position must be against a wall or the move will be ignored. move that electrical object. First, select the electrical object to be moved, then click on the dimension value that locates that object. When the Set Dimension dialog displays, replace the current dimension with the desired value.
Using the Move Tools

Electrical objects can be moved with more precision wuth the edit tools. Select an electrical object and click the Move Object edit button. The Move Object dialog will appear. To move without copying, check the box Relative to Itself, then specify the distance and/or angle to move the selected objects. For more information, see Move Object on page 716.
To dimension to electrical objects, you must first choose to have the program locate electrical objects, on the Locate Items tab of the Dimension Defaults dialog. Check the box to have electrical objects be located by manual dimensions. Make sure that the dimension is actually locating the correct objects before using the dimension to manipulate the electrical object. If needed, adjust the dimension first, such as moving the extension from the outside of the wall to the inside of the wall. Once dimensions are set to locate electrical objects, drag a dimension line through the electrical objects using the Manual Dimension tool. The dimension which locates the electrical object can be used to
Using the Replicate Object Tool

Any object may be replicated along an array using the Replicate Object dialog. First select the object and click the Replicate Object edit button. The Replicate Object dialog will appear. For more information, see Replicate Object on page 720.
Rotating Electrical Objects

Any electrical object not attached to a wall may also be rotated. Select the object. Move the cursor above the triangular handle, and click down when the cursor changes to the Rotate cursor. Drag to the new position and release. An electrical object can also be rotated by accessing the Rotate Object Dialog via the Rotate Object edit button. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
427
Electrical
By Using Dimensions
Adjusting the Height

The heights at which electrical objects appear in 3D and elevation views are set when you create or move them in the plan. An outlet placed where base cabinets are present, or where a cabinet meets the wall, will be placed based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog unless the cabinet contains a fixture or appliance other than a bathroom sink. The fixture causes the outlet to remain behind the cabinet, where it can supply power to the fixture or appliance. For more information, see Electrical Defaults on page 435. An outlet is not placed above the back of a module containing a fixture or appliance, but will instead be placed at normal wall height behind the module if the fixture requires electricity. All kitchen sinks are assumed to require electricity since they may contain a garbage disposal, so the outlet will be created at 12" (300 mm) above the floor. A dishwasher is not considered to require electricity since it is usually plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is needed above the counter containing a kitchen sink, place the outlet before adding the sink.
Other Edit Tools

Reflect Tools
An electrical object can be reflected by accessing either the Reflect Object Dialog or by using the Reflect About Line edit button. To reflect the electrical object via the Reflect Object dialog, select the electrical object and click the Reflect Object edit button. See Reflect Object on page 719 for a more detailed explanation of the Reflect Object dialog. In order to use the Reflect About Line tool, you must create a CAD line that will be used as the line of reflection. Select the electrical object. Click the Reflect About Line edit button, and click the line of reflection. See Reflect About Line on page 718 for a more detailed description.
Symbol Editing
The underlying 3D symbol data, CAD block, and other properties of an electrical symbol can be modified in the Open Symbol dialog. To access the dialog, select the electrical object and click the Open Symbol edit button. See Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804 for a more detailed description.
Add to Library
Electrical symbols can be saved in the Elictrical Library. Select the electrical object and click the Add to Library edit button. The Add to Library dialog will appear, allowing you to add the object to a specific library under the
428
Displaying Electrical
Electrical category. For more information see Adding to the Library on page 531.
through the Components dialog. To open the dialog, select the electrical object and click the Components edit button. For more information, see Editing Columns on page 865.
Edit Components
You can view and/or modify the Material List record for a given electrical object
Displaying Electrical
Click the Display Options button to modify the display in Plan, Cross Section/ Elevation, 3D, or Render Views.
In 3D Views Electrical
Electrical objects may be viewed in any 3D view so long as they are displayed in 2D. If the 2D does not show electrical objects, 3D will not either. If electrical objects display in 2D but not in 3D, select 3D> 3D Preferences to display the 3D Preferences dialog, then go to the Include tab. Check Electrical to display electrical objects in 3D. Any newly created 3D view will now display electrical objects. This is a global setting affecting all future 3D views and remains set in this plan until changed.
In Plan View
The Layer Display Options dialog governs all 2D display. Objects checked under Disp. will show, those unchecked will not. Check to have Electrical display in 2D Plan View. If you have created an additional CAD layer for electrical wiring, it will also have an option to display. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
429
In Individual 3D Views
individual 3D views. From the 3D view access the Display Options dialog Clear the Electrical check box to have electrical objects not show in this 3D view. You can always restore the check in this box to display electrical objects in this view once more. If Electrical is dimmed, it means electrical was not checked in the 3D Preferences dialog, Include tab. Since that is a global setting, you cannot override it within an individual view. In that case, close the view, change the setting in the 3D Preferences dialog so that electrical is included, then create a new view.
Individual 3D views can have electrical suppressed without affecting other views. As long as the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog does not have electrical suppressed, it can be suppressed in
Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Select the electrical object and click the Open Object edit button to open the
Electrical Service Specification
you to specify how lights appear in Render Views. The Materials tab allows you to change materials on electrical objects. Depending on the electrical symbol that was selected only some of the tabs will be available. For switches and outlets only the Service Data and Material tab are available.
dialog. The Electrical Service Specification dialog consists of three tabs. The Service Data tab allows you to relocate individual electrical objects. The Render tab allows
430
Service Data Tab
1 2 3 4
1 Name - This is the name that will be

sent to the materials list. to the center of the switch, outlet or wall light.
in the edit box or press select to choose the layer from the Select CAD Layers dialog.
2 Height to Center - Specify the height
Offset From Floor - This option will display for electrical objects that are on the floor. Offset From Ceiling - This option will display for electrical objects that are on the ceiling. from the wall for the switch, outlet or wall light.
3 Dist From Wall - Specify the distance 4
Check this box to Automatically Change Switch Type When Wiring. This option is only available for switches. Switches placed from the toolbar will have this box checked by default. Switches placed from the Electrical library will not.
5 Layer - Change the layer for this
object. You can type the layer number
431
Electrical
Render Data Tab
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 15 12 14 4 11
The Render Data tab of the Electrical Service Specification dialog is similar to the Light Specification dialog. For more information, see Light Specification Dialog on page 622. Depending on the type of light selected, the options available will vary. Available source types are Point Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections in the dialog are affected by the Type that you select. Each type of light source behaves differently but they have some rendering properties in common.
Available source types are Point Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections in the dialog are affected by the Type that you select. Each type of light source behaves differently but they have some rendering properties in common. For more information, see Defining Light Types on page 618. to have the program set intensities for each light in the Render View. When you select Auto Intensity the program provides an average intensity to render with reasonable lighting effects. If you clear the
2 Type - Select a source type for the light.
3 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
432
check box, the slider bar controls how bright the light appears in the Render View. Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the same as lights that are turned off. Lights that have an intensity of 100% have the maximum brightness allowed. If you have multiple lights in a room all set to maximum intensity, it is possible to have too much light for a realistic View. Colors and textures become washed out if there is too much light. the color of the light being modeled. Colored lights may be used to achieve special lighting effects. They alter the appearance of your material colors and textures. The default color of light is pure white, which has the least affect on the material colors and textures. how the quickly the light intensity drops off as a result of the distance from the light source. Only Spot and Point Lights can have attenuation values set.
the fixture base. The fixture base is determined by the surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling). Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only available when you are editing a wallmounted fixture. These allow you to set the lights distance up/down the wall, and left/ right along the wall. Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available when you are not editing a wall-mounted fixture. These allow you to position the light relative to the center of the fixture, along the floor/ceiling. control the angle of the light with respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees means that the light is pointing straight down and a value of 90 degrees means that the light is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to the horizon. Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along. Zero degrees is measured horizontally on your screen pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees. If you enter a negative value, the program uses Zero. Direct a Spot Light in Plan View by selecting and dragging the rotate handle. controls the angle of the cone of light for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180 degrees would create a Spot Light that shines on one side of the lights position, representing a half sphere. A small cone angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very narrow cone of light. The cut off angle should always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
4 Color - Click on the rectangle to define
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
5 Attenuated - Check this box to control
8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
The three edit values represent the three coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression: 1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance from the light source. Increasing any of these values results in the light intensity dropping off faster (the light does not travel as far). Decreasing any value results in the light intensity dropping off slower, (the light travels farther). Small changes in these coefficients can have significant impact on lighting effects. Some experimentation should be done to fully understand how to use them.
9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
6 Offset From Base controls how far the
light source is relative to the position of
433
Electrical
The cut off angle for an added light can be defined in the Plan View by dragging the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or out. the light intensity drops off from the center of the cone of light to the outside edge. This is only available for Spot Lights. The default value for this is set to 7.5 which means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is not useful to set this value too low because there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting model which result in jagged looking circles of light when they are shining on large flat surfaces. Appearances can be improved by decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and increasing the Drop off Rate but it is impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light using current methods under OpenGL. allows you to set how a light will cast soft shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the Light Size will set how big the light should appear. A size of zero indicates a true point light source, while a size of 3 indicates a larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting the Softness determines how many iterations the raytracer should go through to soften the light. This value determines the quality of the raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It is not recommended to use values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very large. light should be used for lighting effects in the Render View. The default is On.
not the light casts shadows when Shadows are turned on in a Render View.
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
It is recommended that you only use one, or at most two lights to casts shadows at a time. Shadow calculations are very complicated and can slow rendering significantly. this box to display an indicator where a light source is actually positioned in a Render View. The light position indicator is only drawn when the light is "On" and only for positional lights such as "point" or "spot" lights. This tool can be used to determine if your light source is positioned correctly.
14 Show Position in render View - Check
11 Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This
Raytracing/Use in Both - These options allows you to specify whether a light is used only in a raytrace view, only in a Render view, or used in both views. Raytrace views can handle many more lights than Render views, and some fixtures may have four or five lights in a raytrace view while only one in a Render view. Be warned that the more lights you use in either view, the slower the time to generate that view.
15 Use in Real-Time Rendering/Use in
Materials Tab
Materials can be changed or new materials can be defined for electrical objects. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
12 On - This controls whether or not the
434
Electrical Defaults
Electrical Defaults
The Electrical Defaults dialog can be accessed by double-clicking the Electrical Tools parent button or by choosing Edit> Defaults> Electrical from the menu. Default settings can be overridden for Individual outlets using the Electrical Service Specification dialog. For more information, see Electrical Service Specification Dialog on page 430.
1 Electrical
placing outlets, phone jacks and television outlets. placing switches, doorbells and thermostats.
3 5
2 4 6
from the list. These are the items that will get used when electrical items are automatically generated or placed from the toolbar.
1 Default Library Items - Select an item
4 Outlet - Specify Default Heights for 5 Switch - Specify Default Heights for 6 Above Cabinet - Specify Default
2 Library - Click to open the Electrical Library of the Library Browser to select a new default library object. For more information, see Electrical Library on page 540.
to use these settings on certain electrical objects by default. Settings can be set for individual objects, see Electrical Service Specification Dialog on page 430
3 Use Default Heights - Check this box
Heights for placing switch or outlet objects on a wall that has a cabinet attached below it. The symbol will be placed above the top of the cabinet by this much.
435
Electrical Defaults
436
Chapter 17:
Cabinets
Chapter Overview
Cabinets
Cabinets are very versatile, allowing a wide range of customization. Base and wall cabinets can be moved and positioned below or above each other. Wall cabinets can be placed on a wall or hung from the ceiling. A cabinet placed adjacent to another of the same type will face the same direction and merge with it. If a cabinet is created at the back of another of the same type, the two cabinets will merge back-to-back. When cabinets are merged, the toe kick, back splash, and counter top will be continuous. You should place range tops and sinks into cabinets early, so that any resizing can be done before too many cabinets are placed. The Plan View appearance of base, wall, full height cabinets, soffits, and shelves/ partitions can be controlled individually by modifying the display properties of the corresponding layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can add your own custom cabinets to the library for use in other plans.
Chapter Contents
Cabinet Defaults The Cabinet Tools Selecting Cabinets Displaying Cabinets Cabinet Labels Deleting Cabinets Copying Cabinets Moving Cabinets Rotating Cabinets Resizing Cabinets Editing Cabinets Editing the Cabinet Door Style Editing Custom Countertops Attaching Cabinets Special Cabinets Cabinet Specification Dialog Custom Countertop Specification Dialog Cabinet Defaults Setup
437
Cabinet Defaults
Each type of cabinet has a default definition for height, width, depth, distance from floor, etc. These settings are defined in Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults for each of the various cabinet types. General cabinet settings, as well as the default settings for Base Cabinets, Wall Cabinets, Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and Partitions, are defined here. You can open the Cabinet Defaults dialog for easy access to each by double-clicking on the Cabinet Tools parent button. Click the appropriate button in the Cabinet Defaults dialog to set the proper defaults. To allow the maximum range of sizes, modify the General Cabinet defaults so that Minimum Width is 1" and Width Increment is 1/16". For more information, see Cabinet Defaults Setup on page 463.
The Cabinet Tools

Click the Cabinet Tools parent button on the plan toolbar to activate Cabinet mode and display the cabinet child tools. To create a corner cabinet, click as close to the inside wall corner as possible in either Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinets ,or Full Height cabinet mode. A corner cabinet will remain a corner cabinet when it is moved, edited or copied.
Wall Cabinets
To place a wall cabinet, select the Wall Cabinets child button and click. Wall cabinets can be positioned above base cabinets. You may click directly over a base cabinet to place a wall cabinet. The base cabinet will not interfere with the placement.
Full Height Cabinets

To place a Full height cabinet, select the Full Height child button and click. A full height cabinet cannot be placed on top of a base or wall cabinet. Full height cabinets will generate a toe kick by default.
Base Cabinets
Clicking the Cabinet Tools parent button automatically activates Cabinet mode to place base cabinets. To place a base cabinet, select the Base Cabinet child button. Click near a wall to attach the cabinet to it. Base cabinets will generate a counter top and a toe kick by default.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between cabinet tops and the ceiling. Soffits can also be used to create posts, beams, and any other object than can be modeled as a 3D
438
The Cabinet Tools
box. To place a soffit, click the Soffit child button and click in any view. Soffits appear in both 3D view and 2D views. They can be assigned materials (that will be calculated in the Material List) but by default they will use the material assigned to the default wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have custom molding profiles specified for them. The default size for Soffits cannot be changed. Soffits are sized to be the same width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the default wall cabinet. Its height automatically adjusts to fill the space between the ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets. Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m). Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm). For a more detailed description of soffits, see Other Objects on page 465.
click the Open Object edit button to display the Partition Specification dialog. Specify its dimensions, position, and material. Partitions can be used with shelves to create complex storage systems.
Custom Counter Tops

Choose Build> Cabinet> Custom Counter Top from the menu or click the Custom Counter Top child button to create a custom counter top. Click in Plan View and drag a rectangle from one corner to the opposite corner. The rectangle is a closed polyline defined as a counter top. You can continue creating custom counter tops until a different mode is selected.
Shelves
Select the Shelf button and click in Plan View to create a shelf based on your default settings. Once created, shelves can be modified. Select the shelf and click the Open Object edit button to display the Shelf Specification dialog. Specify its dimensions, position, and material. Corner shelves are created by placing one shelf on each wall, then moving or stretching them until they touch.
The counter top takes its thickness and height and from a base cabinet below. If there is no base cabinet below, the custom counter top will take its thickness from the base cabinet defaults. The counter top initially takes its material from the default base cabinet. You may define the height, position, and material in the Countertop Specification dialog. For more information, see Custom Countertop Specification Dialog on page 461.
Partitions
Select the Partition button and click in the Plan View to create a vertical partition. Once created, partitions can be modified. Select the partition and
Custom Counterholes
Choose Build> Cabinet> Custom Counter Hole from the menu or click the Custom Counter Hole child button to create a custom counter hole. Click in Plan
439
Cabinets
Note: Cabinets will generate their own counter top which is defined in the Cabinet Specification dialog. When a custom counter top covers any portion of a base cabinet, it will eliminate the default counter top.
View and drag a rectangle from one corner to the opposite corner. The rectangle must be contained within a custom counter top in order to generate a hole. The rectangle is a closed polyline defined as a counter hole. You can continue creating custom counter holes until a different mode is selected.
dialog will open, allowing you to edit the cabinet.
Cabinet Door Library

Click the Cabinet Door Library child button to access a library of special Cabinet doors. Select the desired object and click OK. Click on an existing cabinet to place a door from the library. If you own the Full Version of Chief Architect you can use the Symbol Development tools to create cabinet doors and save them in your own library for use in future plans. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Cabinet Library
Click the Cabinet Library button to access a library of special Cabinets. Select the desired item and click OK. Click to place a cabinet. Once placed, Library Cabinets can be edited. Select the cabinet object and click the Open Object edit button. The Cabinet Specification
Selecting Cabinets
Cabinets may be selected for editing in the Plan, 3D view, Render view, or Cross Section/Elevation view. When working with multiple cabinets on a single wall, it is often easier to work in a Wall Elevation View.
Cabinet Specification dialog for that object. There is one exception; Full Height mode will allow you to select base, wall, or full height cabinets.
In Cabinet Mode
If a base cabinet, wall cabinet and soffit are stacked in Plan View it may be difficult to pick the correct object. To select only a particular cabinet type, click on it while that cabinet mode is active. For example; choose the Base Cabinet tool to select only base cabinets, or the Wall Cabinets tool to select only wall cabinets. This method limits the selection set to that type of cabinet. When the proper mode is active, it is easy to double-click on a cabinet to open the
In Select Objects Mode

You can select cabinets by clicking on the cabinet in Select Objects mode. This method may not select the desired cabinet the first time. If another object is selected, click tthe Select Next Object edit button (or Tab press the key on the keyboard) until the desired cabinet is selected. It may be difficult to double-click on a cabinet in Select Objects mode and open the correct cabinet for specification.
440
Selecting Cabinets
Right-click
You can right-click on a cabinet while in any drawing mode to select it. You do not need to change modes before selecting a cabinet or any other object with a right-click. Any object can be selected using this method, so it is not always exact. Using a right-click, you may at first select an adjacent object and need to click tthe Select Next Object edit button or use the Tab key until the proper cabinet is selected. The right-click may be used in any 3D view as well. Once selected with this method you can use the Contextual menu to open it for specification.
Once the first cabinet is selected, only cabinets can be added to or subtracted from the selection set. When multiple cabinets are selected, the Edit toolbar will show different options.
Selecting Stacked Cabinets

To select a group of stacked cabinets in Plan View, hold down the Shift key and drag a marquee around the cabinets. This will select any free-standing objects including cabinets. You can limit the selection set to cabinets if you first activate Full Height mode before group selecting. The marquee select will never select doors, walls or windows. To de-select an object from the selection set, hold down the Shift key and click the object. If one object is selected, you cannot drag a marquee to group select. You must use the Shift +click method to add to the selection set. If the Select Objects tool is active, everything which can be selected is selected. If Base Cabinet is the active mode, only base cabinets can be selected. If Wall Cabinet is the active mode, only wall cabinets can be selected. If Full Height cabinet is the active mode, all cabinets (base, wall and full height) can be selected. This allows you to select all cabinets as a group for editing and/or moving. Since only cabinets can be selected, an entire kitchen cabinet group can be selected this way.
Cabinet Handles
Select a cabinet. Notice the various handles which appear on a selected cabinet. Each handle has a specific purpose. Handles on corner cabinets appear differently than other cabinets. Triangular handle at back rotates the cabinet. Side handles change the cabinet width. Center handle moves the cabinet. Front handle (with v) changes the cabinet depth and indicates
Selecting Multiple Cabinets

Once a cabinet has been selected, additional cabinets may be added to or subtracted from the selection set by holding down the Shift key and clicking on additional cabinets.
441
Cabinets
If Soffit is the active mode, only soffits can be selected. If Shelf is the active mode, only shelves can selected. If Partition is the active mode, only partitions can be selected.
Selection Restrictions
Cabinets cannot be selected in CAD mode. Click the CAD Toggle button, F2 , or choose CAD> CAD Mode Off to return to the Architectural mode and select cabinets.
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinets can be placed in all views, and are visible in all views.
Displaying Cabinet Module Lines

When cabinets merge, the delineation line between the cabinets disappears in Plan View. Cabinet module lines, the lines between individual cabinets, may be displayed in Plan View using the Layer Display Options dialog. When it is necessary to identify individual cabinets in Plan View, check the box to display Cabinet Module Lines in the Layer Display Options dialog. The lines will display in Plan View. If two cabinets are merged, the center of the line between them is blanked.
In Plan View
The display of cabinets in Plan View can be controlled separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128.
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog and turn off the display of cabinets. For more information, see 3D Display Options on page 588.
Cabinet Labels
Cabinet labels will display in Plan View if they are set to display in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. Cabinet labels can also be created individually, for more information, see Label Tab on page 461. Cabinet labels do not display fractional information. The label for a 30 3/8 inch wide base cabinet will appear as BD30. The fractional width will show in a dimension line that marks the cabinets sides. The format for a cabinet label is the same as the Material List entry. Example labels are: BDR24: Base cabinet, twenty four inches wide, one right opening door, one drawer. B30-4: Base cabinet, thirty inches wide, four drawers.
442
Deleting Cabinets
W3030: Wall cabinet, thirty inches wide, thirty inches high. BLPW3318x24: Blind peninsula wall cabinet, thirty three inches wide, eighteen high, twenty four inches deep.
The five parts are: 1. [ [BL] [P] | [P] R | [R] E | C ] BL: blind P: peninsula R: radius E: end C: corner Some allowed combinations are thus blind peninsula or radius end. 2. { B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R] B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right L and R can appear only if D (door) appears, and it does not appear for double doors. 3. 4. width [height] [x depth] [ OV | RF ] [G] OV: oven RF: (built in) refrigerator G: glass doors 5. [PO] [CB] [-drawers [D]] PO: pull out shelves CB: cutting board D: double drawers drawers: number of drawers
Labels consist of letters designating a type or style, and numbers for dimensions or drawer counts. Objects are omitted if they are standard values. These are: Standard number of drawers is one for a base cabinet, none for full height or wall. Standard depth is twenty four inches for base and full height, twelve for wall. Standard height for base cabinets is thirty six inches, including counter top. Wall cabinets are assumed to have doors, so these (D) are not mentioned. The R or L is still included for a right or left door.
A cabinet label can have up to five parts, the second and third of which are always present. The other parts are optional. These can be diagrammed with the aid of brackets ([ ]), braces ({ }) and bars (|). Something enclosed in braces is required. It is optional if enclosed in brackets. Choose one of a list of objects that is separated by bars. Here is a simple diagram, with four examples drawn from it. [B|P]{B|U|W} B U BB PW
Moving Cabinet Labels

Cabinet labels may sometimes appear on top of each other. You can move a label to correct this problem. In Text mode, select a cabinet label by clicking on it, then drag from the handle to move the label toward the front or back of the cabinet.
Deleting Cabinets
Select the cabinet(s) and press the the keyboard or click the Delete button on the toolbar.
Del
key on edit
You can delete all cabinets by using the Delete Objects dialog. For more information, see Delete Objects on page 754.
443
Cabinets
Copying Cabinets
In Plan View
One or more cabinets may be copied from one location to another, either within the same plan or across plans. If you are copying across plans, both plans must be open during the operation. To copy one or more cabinets, first select the cabinet(s) to copy. When the selection set is complete, click the Copy edit button. The copy cursor will appear. If copying the cabinet(s) within the same plan, click to place the copy. If copying the cabinet(s) to a different floor of the same plan or to a different plan altogether, click in the new floor or new plan. Then select Edit> Paste from the menu. The copy cursor will appear. Click to place a copy of the selected cabinet(s).
3D View
To make copies in any 3D view, select the cabinet or group of cabinets in any 3D view using the Shift + click method. Click the Copy edit button. Click and drag from the center handle of the cabinet or group to create the copy and release the button.
Multiple Copies
To create multiple copies of the same object(s), double-click the Copy edit button when the selection set is complete. Then click in the plan to place a copy. Continue clicking to place copies. Select a different tool to exit Copy mode. Multiple copy requires that the receiving plan be open so that you can toggle to that plan by clicking on screen. If using multiple copy across plans, open both plans first and select Window> Tile to place them side-byside on screen. For more information, see Multiple Copy on page 715.
Copying Groups
Stacked cabinet combinations, created with a row of base cabinets, wall cabinets and full height cabinets, may be copied as a group. In Full Height mode, drag a marquee to select them in Plan View. When the selection set is complete, click the Copy edit button. The copy cursor will appear. Then move to another location in the same plan, or even in a different plan, choose Edit> Paste, then click in Plan View to place a copy of the group of cabinets.
Using the Replicate Object Tool

Any object or objects which have been group selected may be replicated along an array using the Replicate Object tool. For more information, see Replicate Object on page 720.
444
Moving Cabinets
Moving Cabinets
Select the cabinet(s) to be moved and place the cursor above the middle handle. When the cursor changes to the Move cursor, click the mouseand drag the cabinet(s) to the new position. If a single cabinet is selected, and a side of the cabinet is already against the side of another cabinet of the same type (base, full or wall), moving the first cabinet toward the second pushes them together. Multiple cabinets can be moved in this way provided that they face the same way, touch side-toside, and that the last cabinet in the group is not obstructed. The group will be stopped by an obstruction.
Move Object dialog will appear. To move without copying, check the box Relative to Itself, then specify the distance and/or angle to move the selected objects. For more information, see Move Object on page 716.
Cabinet(s) can also be moved with more precision using the Pt-to-Pt Move tool. For more information, see Point-to-Point Move on page 714.
Move Restrictions
Cabinets will move side to side and front to back. Groups of cabinets will move horizontally or vertically across the screen. To override either restriction, press the Ctrl key after completing the selection set and before grabbing the center handle. This will override any restriction imposed. It works in 2D and in 3D. A single cabinet will stop moving when it meets a wall. To enable the cabinet to move freely through the wall, press the Ctrl key after the cabinet has stopped against the wall, while you are still dragging the cabinet. This will enable the cabinet to be moved through the wall, but will still maintain the directional restriction.
In 3D Views
When moving a cabinet in 3D views, movement stops when another object (such as a cabinet, soffit, wall, ceiling or floor) is hit. You can force movement through another object by holding down the Ctrl key and then making the move. It is possible to move one cabinet over another object when the Ctrl key is held. Base cabinets, wall cabinets, and full height cabinets cannot be moved down through the floor in a Cross Section/Elevation View, even using the Ctrl key. Soffits and shelves may be moved through the floor if the Ctrl key is used.
Using the Move Tools

Cabinets may be moved with more precision with the edit tools. Select the cabinet(s) and click the Move Object edit button. The
445
Cabinets
Rotating Cabinets
When a cabinet is selected, five handles or grips appear. Grab the triangular handle at the back of the cabinet and drag it to rotate the cabinet. To rotate multiple cabinets selected as a group, drag from the triangular handle representing the group as a whole. Cabinets will rotate in either 15 degree or 7 degree increments, or at any allowed angle defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Using the Rotate Tool

Cabinets may be rotated by using the edit tools. Select a cabinet or group of cabinets. When the selection is complete, click the Rotate Object edit button. The Rotate Object dialog will appear. Choose the desired parameters and click OK . The selected object(s) will rotate the specified angle. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
Resizing Cabinets
Individual cabinets may be resized by dragging from any of the outer selection handles, by typing new values into the Cabinet Specification dialog, or with the Resize Object edit button. and the ceiling by holding down the Ctrl key, then stretching or moving the cabinet. Base cabinets, wall cabinets and full height cabinets cannot be moved or resized through the floor, but soffits and shelves can
By Dragging
In Plan View, select the cabinet to resize. Drag from either of the two side handles to increase the width. Drag from the front handle (indicated by a red v when selected) to increase the cabinet depth. Temporary dimension numbers will appear, and will change according to the resize increment set in the Cabinet Defaults dialog, as the size is changed. When resizing a cabinet its movement stops when another cabinet, soffit or other object is hit, or when the floor or ceiling is reached. You can force movement or resizing through cabinets, walls
Using the Resize Tool

Cabinets may be resized by using the Resize Object edit tool. Select a cabinet or group of cabinets and click the Resize Object edit button. The Rotate Object dialog will appear. For more information, see Resize Object on page 718.
Corner Cabinets
To resize a corner cabinet, select it. Then drag from the side handle to increase the overall size of the cabinet without increasing the depth where it joins to other cabinets. Drag from the front handle to change the cabinet depth.
446
Editing Cabinets
Editing Cabinets
Individual Cabinets
A cabinet can be selected and opened for specification by clicking the Open Object edit button. For more information, see Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 453. dimensions will update as the size increases or decreases. For example, a wall cabinet created above a refrigerator can actually hang down into the space also occupied by the refrigerator. To fix the problem, select the wall cabinet in the 3D view. Grab the lower handle and drag upwards to raise the bottom of the wall cabinet up until it is above the refrigerator. Then release the wall cabinet. If the numbers are difficult to see when the View is in color, select Tools> Color On/Off to turn off the color and display the view as a line drawing.
Multiple Cabinets
When cabinets are selected as a group they may be modified as a group with the Cabinet Specification dialog. Any specifications that the selected objects share, can be edited when a group is selected. When you group select cabinets of different types, some specification will not be available in the Cabinet Specification dialog. For example, you will not be able to redefine the crown molding on a full height cabinet if it was selected with a base cabinet that does not have crown molding. Soffits, shelves, and partitions may be changed as a group using their corresponding specification dialog when they are group selected. It is important that only soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be a part of the selection set in order to access the related specification dialog. For more information, see Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 453.
Reflect Tools
A cabinet or group of cabinets can be reflected by accessing either the Reflect Object Dialog or by using the Reflect About Line edit button. To reflect a cabinet using the Reflect Object dialog, select the cabinet and click the Reflect Object edit button. For more information, see Reflect Object on page 719. In order to use the Reflect About Line tool, you must create a CAD line that will be used as the line of reflection. Select the cabinet, click the Reflect About Line edit button, then cllick the line of reflection. For more information, see Reflect About Line on page 718.
In a 3D View
Cabinets can be resized by dragging their edges in a 3D view. Temporary dimensions will appear in a 3D view when a cabinet is selected. As you drag one edge the
Symbol Editing
The Open Symbol tool is only available for cabinets that contain library symbols such as sinks, cooktops, or dishwashers. To use the
447
Cabinets
Open Symol tool, select the object and click the Open Symbol edit button. The Symbol Spoecification dialog will open, allowing you to modify the 3D data, CAD block, and properties of the appliance symbol. For a detailed description of the Symbo Specification dialog, seeSymbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Edit Components
You can view and/or modify the Material List record for a cabinet or group of cabinets through the Components dialog. To open the dialog, select the cabinet and click the Components edit button. For detailed information about the specific fields and uses of the component list, see The Components Dialog on page 869.
Add to Library
Cabinets can be saved in the Library Browser. Select the cabinet and click the Add to Library edit button. The Add to Library dialog will appear, allowing you to add the cabinet or cabinet components to specific libraries under either the Cabinet Modules, Cabinet Doors, or the Fixtures (Interior) category. If you choose a library under the Cabinet Doors category, only the cabinet door will be saved. If the library is from the Cabinet Modules category, the cabinet will be saved along with the cabinet door and any drop-in appliance. If the cabinet contains a drop-in appliance, the Fixtures (Interior) category will be available. If a library from this category is chosen, only the drop-in appliance will be saved to the libray. For more information see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Select/Load Same Type

The Select Same Type tool allows the user to select cabinet objects that have attributes common to the selected cabinet. Select a cabinet and click the Select Same Type edit button to access the Select Similar Objects dialog. This dialog provides a list of attributes to use for filtering the selection process. Select the attributes that you would like to match on and click OK. The cabinets that have the same attributes that were entered will now be selected. At this point you can access the Load Values to Make Same tool from the edit toolbar. Click the Load Values to Make Same edit button and then click on a cabinet in the plan. The loaded attributes will then be applied to the selected cabinet. For a more detailed description see, Select Same / Load Same on page 749.
Editing the Cabinet Door Style

There are several ways to specify the cabinet door style. If the desired cabinet style is known before cabinets are placed, the door style can be set up in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults to specify the default door style to use for each new cabinet. Once cabinets have been placed, you may group select the cabinets and click the Open
448
Editing Custom Countertops
Object edit button and choose a new door style from the Cabinet Specification dialog. If a door style is specified from the Library, the Library Browser may be used to change the cabinet doors in the Plan View or in any 3D view.
Open the Library Browser (Build> Library> Library Browser). Navigate the Library Browser until the desired door style is found and click once to select it. Then, click on cabinets one-by-one in that View to drop the selected door into that cabinet. If you are in a 3D view, you will see the door style change immediately. Select a different tool to exit this mode.
Editing Custom Countertops

Use CAD tools to alter the shape and size of a selected counter top. Add edges using the Break Line button. Convert straight edges to curved edges using the Line to Arc button. Use Chamfer or Fillet tools on the corners. You can also use Polyline Union , Polyline Intersection , and Polyline Subtract to create or modify countertops using multiple custom countertops. For more information on these and other tools, see Polyline Edit Tools on page 693. The following illustrates the use of a custom counter top to fill in a corner behind an angled sink. Select Build> Cabinets> Custom Counter Top and draw a rectangular CAD polyline to place the counter top.
Cabinet modules (3) Custom counter top Then edit the polyline with the CAD tools to define the shape of the counter top. When a sink or built-in appliance is added, the hole for the Fixture will automatically be cut in the custom counter top. To create a circular counter top, draw a rectangular polyline and fillet the corners as much as possible. You can also edit the line segments that define the polyline with the Line to Arc edit button. To create a hole in a custom counter top, click the Custom Counter Top Hole child button. Click and drag inside of the countertop to define the counter top hole. Once created, the hole can be modified by using cad tools.
449
Cabinets
Attaching Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the Cabinet Module line.
Cabinet faces are marked with a v. Cabinets of the same type (base, wall, etc.) which have the same height automatically join when placed side-to-side or back-toback. When attached, the line between them will disappear in Plan View, and the counter top will be continuous in the 3D view. Cabinets will merge when two of them face the same direction, meet at an angle, and touch at only two corners. When angled cabinets are merged, fillers are modeled to display the cabinets as continuous in 3D and Render Views. A group of attached cabinets move when a cabinet at one end is pushed into the others. If the side or back of a cabinet moves against another cabinet side or back, or against a wall, it attaches to that object. Two cabinets cannot merge with the same side of another cabinet. The picture shows two instances when cabinets are placed backto-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces are displayed.
Moving Walls with Cabinets Attached

When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets move with it. Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will not attach the cabinet to it. The cabinet must be moved to the wall. It can also be attached to the wall when Plan Check is done. When wall layers are resized or the wall layer definition redefined, the cabinets may become unattached. To reattach, select them, drag them away, and then drag them back again.
Kitchen Island
To form a kitchen island, you can attach several cabinets back-to-back as well as sideto-side. Try to match the widths so that each cabinet back or side meets the back or side of only one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
450
Special Cabinets
Special Cabinets
Special Shaped Cabinets
There are several special cabinet shapes which may be specified. Certain requirements must be met before you can turn a cabinet into these shapes. 4. Peninsula Radius cabinets have a semicircular front. A cabinet cannot be changed to a Peninsula Radius cabinet unless the back is against a wall or other cabinet, and both sides are free. It is easiest to isolate the cabinet along a wall. Once changed to a Peninsula Radius, the cabinet can be relocated and stretched without losing its characteristics. 5. Angled Front cabinets allow the length of both the left side and right side to be defined. If different, the face will be at an angle. When angled front cabinet is selected under Special, the dialog itself changes. A new option appears so that two depths may be defined--that of both the left and right sides of the cabinet. A value of zero in one or the other will cause a triangular cabinet to be created.
1.
Normal style cabinets are rectangular. This is the default shape. End Cabinets have an angled front and side. This angle is fixed. Radius End cabinets are a quarter-round, arched on one side. A cabinet cannot be changed to either an End Cabinet or Radius End cabinet unless the back and one side are against a wall or other cabinet, and the second side is free. Drag a normal cabinet into a corner before changing it into an End Cabinet or Radius End cabinet. The front and unattached side are reshaped. The attached back and side remain flat. Once the cabinet has been changed, it can be moved or even stretched without losing its End Cabinet or Radius End cabinet definition.
2.
3.
451
Cabinets
Fillers
Chief Architect models a continuous counter top and fillers if two cabinets meeting in a corner are separated from each other by nine inches or less. Where two walls meet at an inside corner, a counter top often flows continuously across base cabinets on one wall to those attached to the next. A filler is used to separate the front of one of these cabinets from the one it meets so that drawers and doors have room to operate.
Filler cabinet with and without module lines displayed.
Blind Cabinets
Often when two cabinets meet in a corner, one is run on through. The portion of this cabinet covered by the other cabinet's side is called a blind cabinet. It cannot be seen. Blind cabinets are handled the same as other cabinets that meet in a corner.
Blind Cabinet with and without module lines displayed.
Creating a Bar
The picture shows a 42" wrap-around bar attached to 36" kitchen cabinets. In order to create a bar that appears attached to the cabinets, small base cabinets need to be modeled to place the higher counter and provide the apron. The bar cabinets are specified with a height of six inches, a depth of 12 inches and a Floor to Bottom dimension of 36" Since the counter tops are at different heights, the line between the bar and the standard base counter top remains visible in Plan View.
To allow a continuous counter top, wall and full height cabinets will also attach to each other in this way.
452
Cabinet Specification Dialog
This example utilizes the standard counter top and corbels from the Library. You can also create a custom shaped countertop using the Build> Cabinet> Custom Counter Top tool. In the case of the bar cabinets, their outside corners were attached by the program. When two cabinets have rear or front corners that touch, the program will model a filler to attach the opposite side of the cabinets. Corner attaching works for outside corners where the corners angle is greater than 90 degrees. No doors, drawers or other cabinet face items may be placed into the additional cabinet front surface area formed by outside corner attaching.

The Cabinet Specification dialog allows you to customize individual cabinets and cabinet groups. The options in the dialog are similar to the Cabinet Defaults dialog. When a value in the dialog is followed by a (D), it means that it is a dynamic default and it can be changed globally by making the change in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. Select a cabinet and click the Open Object edit button to open the Cabinet Specification dialog.
453
Cabinets
General Tab
1 3 2 10 4 5 7 9 8 6 11 12
available styles. This is the door style only. All cabinet drawers are plain slab drawers. For more information, see Editing the Cabinet Door Style on page 448. More door styles are available in the Cabinet Door Library. Once a Cabinet door style is selected from the library it will appear in the drop down list. The picture of the cabinet in the dialog will change as the Door Style is changed. the shape of the selected cabinet. The options are normal, end cabinet, radius end, peninsula radius, or angled front. Library doors cannot be used with radius end or pen. radius cabinets. For more information, see Special Shaped Cabinets on page 451.
1 Door Style - Select from the list of
edit box or press select to choose the layer from the Select CAD Layers dialog. When the layer is specified as "NONE", the architectural layer for that cabinet type will be used. Fractional cabinet widths, depths and heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch. Height - This is the measurement from the bottom of the cabinet to the top of the cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension includes the Counter Thickness.
Note: Height defines the height of the entire cabinet. The height of the cabinet face, the counter top and the toe kick are all included in this value. If you change either the Counter Top Thickness, or the Toe Kick Height, the cabinet face height will be altered which will change the heights of your face objects.
4 Define the size of the cabinet.
2 Special - Select a special type to define
3 Layer - Change the layer for this item.

You can type the layer number in the
454
Width - This is the dimension across the cabinet as you view it in elevation. This does not include the counter top overhang. Depth - This is the dimension from front to back on the cabinet. This does not include the thickness of 3/4 for overlay doors or the counter top overhang. For base and full height cabinets, this is usually 0. Increase this value by at least 1/ 16 to eliminate the toe kick. If a toe kick height has been changed from the default values, raising a cabinet off the floor will not remove the toe kick. Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside of a room, this option indicates that the cabinet will be placed relative to the terrain height. enter a positive value in the Backsplash Height. If you set the Backsplash Height to zero, the backsplash will not be generated.
cover the wall from the bottom of the cabinet to the countertop or backsplash below. Cabinets must be against a wall or a taller cabinet for the backsplash to display. If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall cabinet will extend down to the top of the base cabinet backsplash. Electrical switches or outlets which are placed within the backsplash area will display in front of the backsplash in a 3D view, when electrical is set to display in the 3D Preferences dialog. Overhang - Specify these values for base cabinets. The Counter Overhang is used for any side of a cabinet that is not against a wall or another cabinet. Changing the counter thickness will not alter the cabinet height but it will affect the height of face items. - Specify these values for base or full height cabinets. If a Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is defined, it becomes part of the cabinet and will not be deleted if the cabinet is raised off the floor. Changing the Toe Kick Height will not alter the cabinet height but it will affect the height of face items.
5 Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance.
8 Counter Thickness and Counter
9 Toe Kick Height and Toe Kick Depth
Side - Check this box to have the same height backsplash added to the side of the base or wall cabinet which is against a wall or taller cabinet.
7 Backsplash Thickness - Specify the

thickness of the backsplash material. Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a backsplash defined. The backsplash for a wall cabinet will extend from the bottom of the cabinet down to the base cabinet. The backsplash for a base cabinet is measured from the countertop up. Wall cabinets simply offer a check box for Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash is added to a wall cabinet, it will completely
10 The picture of the cabinet will update as

the cabinet changes.
11 Show Color - Check this box to display

the cabinet preview in color.
12 The automatic Cabinet Label is
printed below its picture in the dialog.
The cabinet label defines the type and size of the cabinet; it is not editable but you can specify a custom label on the Label tab.
455
Cabinets
6 To add a backsplash to a base cabinet,
The labels will display in Plan View if Cabinet Labels are set to display in the
Layer Display Options dialog. They also appear in the Materials List.
Cabinet Front Tab

The appearance of the cabinet front is specified on the Cabinet Front tab. Most of the settings can be set globally in the
Cabinet Defaults dialog, but individual cabinets can be customized.
1 3 5 2 4
6 7 8 1 The cabinet diagram on the Cabinet

selection box, an item is selected. The Item Type and Item Height will identify the selected part. Sinks (with fixtures) and cooktops can also be selected and deleted from this diagram.
Front tab is used to modify the configuration of the cabinet. Click on the various face items in the diagram to select them. When the diagram shows a red
456
Click here to select the backsplash or an appliance that sits on top of a cabinet Click here to select the countertop Click here to select the toe kick
Click here to select the drawer Click here to select the rail between drawer & door Click here to select the door (as shown)
double drawer (side-by-side with a separation shown) cutting board left door right door double door (side-by-side, no separation, or Stile Between Doors) opening shelves appliance (cannot be chosen from the list, but is automatically defined when builtins are added.) separation
Note: The program will make sure that the height of your face items will always be the same as your cabinet face height. When necessary, the program will insert a blank area at the bottom to fill in any gaps or delete the lowest face item when there is not enough room.
When the height of a cabinet is changed, or the height of a face item is changed, the height of the lowest face item is altered to make up the difference. If you modify the lowest item, the item directly above will be adjusted. It is recommended that you set the counter top height and the toe kick height first, and then work from the top to the bottom when adjusting face items. item above the new item, then click the Add New button. If you click the Add New button and no face item is selected the program will add the new face item at the bottom of the cabinet face. When a face item is added to the cabinet front, the program will shrink the lowest item on the cabinet front to make room for the new item.
A cabinet may have any number of face items, but there is a limit to the number of items that can actually fit on a cabinet front. Cabinet fronts may be composed of any combination of the following face items: blank area panel drawer
3 To add a new face item, select the face
457
Cabinets
Doors, drawers, shelves and appliances that appear in the face of a cabinet are called Face Items. Each face item is separated by a face frame piece. The exposed portion is defined as the separation. There will be a separation at the top and bottom of the face frame and to the sides to represent the cabinet rails and stiles.
selected item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
2 Item Height - Define a value for the
After clicking on the Add New button the New Cabinet Face Item dialog will appear.
using the glass material. The entire door will be glass on plain doors. Flat Sides may be added to base and full height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides eliminates the counter overhang and toe kick area on the exposed sides of the cabinet. Stile Between Doors - Select the check box to have double doors and double drawers separated by a stile. This has no effect on other item types. A Reverse Appliance check box appears if a sink, appliance or other fixture is placed into the cabinet. Select Reverse fixture to reverse the fixture from left to right. This feature can be used to change a left hand door on a built-in refrigerator to a right hand door.
Define the Item Type and Item Height. the Delete button. When you delete a face item, the height of the lowest item is usually increased to make up the difference.
4 To delete a face item, select it and click
of the Cabinet Specification dialog set features for the cabinet. The available options may vary depending on the cabinet specifications. Inset Doors may be selected for all cabinets. This option will make all door and drawer faces flush with the cabinet face instead of overlaying it. Doors On Back may be selected if the cabinet back is not attached to anything. This back will match the front. Roll-out shelves may be defined for base and full height cabinets attached to a wall. These do not display but are reflected in the cabinet label. Lazy Susan may be added to corner cabinets. These do not display but are reflected in the cabinet label and how the cabinet is drawn in Plan View. Glass Doors may be defined for any cabinet that doesnt use a library door. When selected, the door panel will be created
5 The check boxes in the Options section
Bevel - Type in a value to apply beveled edges to drawers and plain doors. This affects all of the cabinet drawers and slab doors. It does not affect framed or library doors. The bevel width, as viewed from the front has a maximum value of 3. Separation - Defines the exposed space between doors, drawers, and face items. A European style cabinet has a zero separation.
Note: The program will try to maintain a single separation between all face items. When you add or delete a face item, separations will usually be added or deleted with them.
Left and Right Stile - Define the exposed width to the left or right of all face items. These can be set independently.
6 Cabinet Fill - These controls effect
how a cabinet displays in Plan Views.
458
Plan Fill Color - Define a fill color for the cabinet. No Fill (Transparent) - Select the check box to have the cabinet be transparent. The background color will show through. Use Default - Select the check box to use the fill style of the corresponding default cabinet. appear if the cabinet that you selected contains a Fixture or an Appliance from the Library.
Plan Fill Color - Define a fill color for the Fixture inserted into the cabinet. Transparent (no fill) - Select the check box to have the Fixture be transparent. The background color will show through. Use Original Plan Colors - Select the check box to use the original colors for the fixture inserted into the cabinet. is available for cabinets with topmounted fixtures, such as sinks and cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of the counter surface between the counter edge and the fixture.
7 Appliance Fill - These items only
8 Appliance Front Offset - This option
Hardware Tab Cabinets 2 3 4 5

handles horizontal offset from the outer edge of the cabinet door. Down from Door Top - Specify the handles vertical offset from the top of the cabinet door. For Wall Cabinets, this value is Up From Door Bottom.
down list of available styles. Click the Library button to access a library of hardware styles. Choose a door handle from the Library. The picture of the cabinet in the dialog will change as the door handle is changed.
1 Door Handle - Select from the drop
2 In from Door Edge - Specify the
459
of available styles. Click the Library button to access a library of hardware styles. Choose a drawer handle from the Library. The picture of the cabinet in the dialog will change as the drawer handle is changed.
3 Drawer Handle - Select from the list
button to access a library of hardware styles. Choose a hinge from the Library. The picture of the cabinet in the dialog will change as the hinge is changed. You will get 2 or 3 hinges, depending on the height of the door. the vertical offset from the top/bottom of the cabinet door.
Hinges - Select from the list of available styles. Click the Library
5 Up/Down from Door Edge - Specify
Moldings Tab
You can specify multiple moldings for each type of cabinet. For example you may want a wood edge around counter tops of base cabinets and a crown molding that ties together the tops of the wall cabinets and full height cabinets.
1 3
molding for the cabinet that you have already specified. If you have assigned moldings to your default cabinet, the list will have some choices. These moldings are stored with individual cabinets in all other cases. selected, or if you want to specify a new molding, click the button to open the
1 Molding - Use the menu to select a
Molding Library. This will add a new molding to the list. Select - Click here to open the Library Browser to the molding library. If you select a molding using the Select button, you will replace the current molding in the list. This option substitutes one molding for another; it does not add a new molding to the list. Delete - Click here to delete the current selection of molding from the cabinet.
2 Add New - If no moldings have been
460
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
allows you to modify a particular molding profile.
3 Molding Specification - This section
Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Height - This is the vertical dimension for the molding profile that will attach to the cabinet. This value is initially set from the molding profile that was selected but may be adjusted to resize the molding vertically. Your molding profile will be altered. Width - This value can be used to resize the molding profile horizontally. Offset - This value defines the distance that the molding is offset from the top or bottom of the cabinet. Where it is measured from depends on which option is selected below. You can enter positive or negative values in this field. The molding will not be displayed if it is completely above or below the cabinet. Once an offset is defined, select From Top or From Bottom to specify a reference point. From Top will be measured between the top of the cabinet and the top of the molding. From Bottom will be measured between the bottom of the molding and the bottom of the cabinet.
Label Tab
1 3
2 4
suppress display of the label for this object. is selected labels will be controlled by either the default schedule or the schedule that the cabinet is currently in. Refer to the schedule label tab for more information. default label for this object with the component code. Refer to the components dialog for more information. label for this object with whatever is typed into the edit box.
1 Suppress Label - Check this box to
3 Use Component Code -Replaces the
4 Specify Label - Replaces the default
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Cabinet Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting
Note: If you choose a shape for your labels in the schedule label tab, it will override all of these options and display the schedule label instead.
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the Open Object edit button to open the
Custom Countertop Specification
dialog.
461
Cabinets
2 Automatic Labels - When this option
General Tab
more information, see Selected Line Tab on page 691.
Moldings Tab 1 2 3
Add moldings to the countertop polyline. It is the same as the Moldings tab of the Molding Specification dialog. For more information, see Moldings Tab on page 487.
Line Style Tab

to convert the polyline into a countertop hole. In order to use this option, the selected polyline must be contained within a custom countertop.
1 Hole in Countertop - Click the button
2 Top Height - Specify the height of the

top of the custom countertop. the countertop.
The Line Style tab of the Countertop Specification dialog allows you to modify the line style of the countertop polyline. It is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness of Polyline Tab

The Polyline Line Tab of the Countertop Specification dialog displays the area of the countertop polyline. It is the same as the Polyline Tab of the CAD Polyline Specification Dialog. For more information, see Polyline Tab on page 690.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Countertop Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Countertop Specification dialog allows you to modify the countertop and countertop molding materials. It is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line Tab of the Countertop Specification dialog allows you to edit the selected line within the countertop polyline. It is the same as the Selected Line Tab of the CAD Polyline Specification Dialog. For
462
Cabinet Defaults Setup

Most of the values in the various Cabinet Defaults dialog(s) are initial values. Once placed, cabinets can be easily edited by selecting and opening them for specification. Cabinets may be modified individually or in a group after they are created. Changes made to cabinets after they have been placed will be retained and will not alter the default settings. It is a good idea to go over the settings in the Cabinet Defaults dialog(s) before cabinets are placed. Most cabinet default settings are not dynamic. The following values are dynamic, and will change whenever the default cabinet is changed: Separation, Splash Height and Thickness, Counter Top Overhang and Thickness, Toe Kick Height and Depth, and all Materials. For more information, see Dynamic Defaults on page 86. To open the Cabinet Defaults dialog double-click the Cabinet Tools parent button or select one of the cabinet types under Edit> Default Settings> Cabinet Defaults> General from the main menu. Choose General to display the General
General Cabinet Defaults
You may want to set both of these values specifically for particular manufacturers. This helps you place and resize cabinets with your mouse quickly.
Base, Full Height, Wall Cabinets, Shelf, Partition

The default dialogs for these types are very similar in appearance to their corresponding specification dialogs. For a description of the settings in these dialogs refer to the documentation in this chapter for their respective specification dialogs.
Cabinet Defaults dialog.
The other buttons access settings for each particular cabinet type. When finished with each, you will return to this dialog. Click Done at the bottom of the dialog to exit.
463
Cabinets
The General Cabinet Defaults apply to all cabinets. It allows you to set the Minimum Cabinet Width and the Width Increment that cabinets snap to. The Width Increment is 1 inch and the Minimum Cabinet Width is 1/16th of an inch (or 1 mm). These settings apply only when you select a cabinet and resize its width using one of the side handles.
464
Chapter 18:
Other Objects
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect has many additional objects that can be used to customize your design.
Quoin Specification Dialog Architectural Blocks Displaying Architectural Blocks Selecting Architectural Blocks Exploding Architectural Blocks Deleting Architectural Blocks Copying Architectural Blocks Moving Architectural Blocks Rotating Architectural Blocks Editing Architectural Blocks Architectural Block Specification Dialog Molding Polylines Displaying Molding Polylines The Molding Polyline Specification Dialog Polyline Solids Displaying Polyline Solids The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
Chapter Contents
Soffits Special Applications for Soffits Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits Soffit Specification Dialog Fireplaces Fireplace Types The Fireplace Specification Dialog Library Fireplaces Chimneys Corner Boards Wall Corner Specification Dialog Quoins
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between cabinet tops and the ceiling. Because they are so versatile, Soffits can also be used to create any other object than can be modeled as a 3D box.
465
Other Objects
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m). Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
Soffit Defaults
The default size for Soffits cannot be changed. Soffits are sized to be the same width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the default wall cabinet. Its height automatically adjusts to fill the space between the ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets. The General Cabinet Defaults apply to soffits. It allows you to set the Minimum Cabinet Width and the Width Increment that soffits snap to. The Width Increment is
1 inch and the Minimum Cabinet Width is 1/16th of an inch (or 1 mm). These settings apply only when you select a soffit and resize its width using one of the side handles.
Placing Soffits
Soffits appear in both 3D view and 2D views. They can be assigned materials (that will be calculated in the Material List) but by default they will use the material assigned to the default wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have custom molding profiles specified for them. For more information, see Moldings Tab on page 460.
Special Applications for Soffits

Anything which may be represented by a three dimensional box of any size or angle may be represented by a soffit. They can be resized to as small as 1/16"x1/16"x1/16" or as large as 135 feet (32m). Soffits can have material applied to them. Many people use soffits to represent simple mirrors, beams in exposed ceilings, posts, fences, chimneys, etc. Following are illustrations showing some possibilities.
Brick Veneer
On exterior walls, represent brick that extends only halfway up the wall using four inch (100mm) deep soffits placed around the base of the house.
466
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits
Non-Rotating Images
Soffits automatically stop at the floor platform when moved downward. To place a soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross Section view looking straight at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its middle handle, and drag it down past the floor so that it covers the floor platforms edge as well.
Tile Surrounds
Often a material, such as ceramic tile, is assigned to a soffit. These can then be applied to walls above tubs or shower stalls.
Chief Architect comes with many bitmap images which are useful in a variety of applications. Because bitmap images always rotate to face the camera, there can be situations when this quality is not desirable. A good example would be a trellis, which might look awkward when facing a camera from a side view. Materials can be attached to soffits, and textures applied to those materials. Textures containing transparency information can be used when mapped to a thin soffit to model a non-rotating image. For more information, see Texture Tab on page 565.
The program calculates the number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes or other such objects, when that type is applied to a soffit by the following rules: If the soffit depth is less than the larger of 4 inches (10 mm) or 1 times the material thickness, then only the front area of the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is 48"x48x4 thick, and the brick2 material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8 mortar joint) the front of the soffit is 48"x48=2304 square inches. Including the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/8 x 8 3/8 = 28.26 square inches. 2304 sq. in. divided
by 28.26 sq. in. per brick gives 81.5 bricks. If the soffit depth is greater than both 4 inches (10 mm) and 1 times the material thickness, then the surface areas of the soffit back, sides and top are used in addition to the front, if these surfaces are not attached to a wall or other soffit. However, only those portions of the sides, top and bottom remaining after subtracting twice the material thickness are used. So, for brick2 (which has a depth of 4"), the sides, top and bottom surface areas cannot contribute to the
467
Other Objects
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits
brick count unless the soffit depth is greater than 8 inches. If surface materials such as brick are applied to a large soffit, the soffit center is assumed to be hollow, with only a single layer of the material applied to each applicable face. For shingles and shakes, the overlap amount should be subtracted from the
height (as opposed to brick or tile, where the joint width is added to the size). For materials in the area category, the above soffit area calculation is used, with the material thickness treated as zero. For materials in the volume, concrete or earth categories, the true volume of the soffit is used.
Soffit Specification Dialog

Soffits can be created in Plan Views and 3D Views. They are automatically placed on the Soffits layer on the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog, but can be moved to any CAD layer using the Soffit Specification dialog. To customize a soffit using the Soffit Specification dialog, double-click on the soffit while in Soffit mode. Or select the soffit, then click the Open Object button. edit
General Tab
1 2 3 5 4 6 8
layer on which to place this soffit. If set to NONE, the soffit will be placed on the Architectural layer named Soffits. Depending on the soffits purpose you may
1 Layer - Enter the number of a user
want to place it on its own layer between 0 and 199. This allows the soffits to be displayed separately from other soffits, according to the settings for this CAD layer.
468
Soffit Specification Dialog
vertical height of the soffit. If you are using the soffit to represent a beam, this will be the depth of the beam.
2 Height - Enter a value to define the
3 Width - Enter a value to define the

width of the soffit. depth, the distance between the front and the back of the soffit. When selected in Plan View, the front of a soffit has a V, and the back of the soffit has a triangular rotation handle.
define the Floor to Bottom distance. This is often more easily defined by dragging the soffit in a 3D view until properly positioned. make a soffit placed outside a building adjust its height to the height of the terrain.
5 Floor to Bottom - Enter a value to
6 Follow Terrain - Check this box to
4 Depth - Enter a value to define the
7 A picture of the defined soffit displays

here. have the picture of the soffit display in the defined material.
Options Tab
1
3
1 Sloped Soffit - Select the check box to

slope the soffit vertically. Remember that the front of the soffit is defined by the v in Plan View. Soffits slope from the back of the soffit, up towards the front of the soffit. When you define a sloped soffit, the General tab includes additional options for specifying the soffit. You must define a height for the front of the soffit and a height for the back of
the soffit. The front value should be greater than the back if the soffit is sloped. To change an angled soffit back to a horizontal soffit, clear the Sloped Soffit check box. box to have a soffit slope to follow the roof. The soffit will move up and the top of the soffit will be in the same plane as the roof, at the same pitch as the roof. Be sure to
2 Place Under Roof - Select the check
469
Other Objects
place the front of the soffit toward the high side of the roof.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to the soffit surface in 3D views. If a material is applied, the Material List will also reflect the change. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
3 Place Under Ceiling - Select the check box to have the soffit move vertically until the top of the soffit comes in contact with the ceiling plane. Moldings Tab
For more information, see Moldings Tab on page 487.
Label Tab
For more information, see Label Tab on page 461.
Sloped Soffits
Elevation View
Plan View 3D view
Front When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit the General tab and the Options tab of the Soffit Specification dialog change. The picture of the soffit updates when new values are entered in the fields. This is a side view with the back of the soffit to the left. Three diagrams have been inset to show how the dialog relates to the sloped soffits.
470
Fireplaces
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the slope of the soffit. Width is measure left to right across the soffit. Horizontal Length is measured from back to front in Plan View. Since the soffit is at a slope, this measurement is not the actual length of the soffit. i.e. It cannot be used to determine the length of a slope beam.
For sloped soffits, both the front and back heights must be defined. Height at back is measured from the finished floor to the lowest point at the back of the soffit. Height at front is measured from the finished floor to the underside of the soffit at the upper end.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace may be created in or away from a wall using the Build> Fireplace command. If created in a wall it behaves as an opening, moving and resizing like a door or window. If created away from a wall it moves and resizes like a cabinet.
Standard, corner and see-through prefabricated metal fireplaces are also available from the Fixtures (Interior) library category. These can be framed in with standard walls.
Fireplace Types
Built into a Wall
To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, choose Build> Fireplace and click on the wall. Or you may add the Fireplace to your toolbar, and use that instead. The fireplace is created with the outside of the fireplace flush with the outside of the wall. tool Once the fireplace has been placed, select it, three handles will display on the fireplace, along the wall. Grab the center handle and pull toward the outside of the wall. The fireplace will stop when its front is flush with the inside edge of the wall. On an exterior wall, the fireplace always faces the interior. If a fireplace is created on
471
Other Objects
an interior wall, click on the edge of the wall to specify which way the fireplace should face. The fireplace will be created with the fire box on the same side as the wall edge on which you clicked to create it.
Moving a Fireplace
Drag from the center handle to move the fireplace. If the fireplace is in a wall, you are limited to moving the fireplace along that wall, or in and out, stopping when either its back or front is flush with the wall. If the fireplace is freestanding, it will move perpendicular to its sides unless you hold down the Ctrl key before dragging it. In this case, the freestanding fireplace will move freely in any direction.
Freestanding
Click in an open area to create a freestanding masonry fireplace. Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, freestanding fireplace will have five handles when selected, and may be rotated, resized, or moved in any direction like a cabinet.
Resizing a Fireplace
To change the width of the fireplace and its fire box, start at a side handle and drag along the wall away from or toward the center of the fireplace. Note that the fire box also resizes if this method is used. It is more accurate to enter the desired values for the fireplace in the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Fireplace Foundations
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before building the foundation plan, a foundation will be generated under the fireplace when the foundation is built. The fireplace foundation will be of the same material type as the original fireplace, but it will not have a fire box or a hearth. This fireplace foundation may be edited or deleted, as desired. A fire box and hearth may be added from the specification dialog.
Changing the Depth

Only a freestanding fireplace may have its depth changed by dragging from a handle. Drag the front handle to change the overall depth of the fireplace. This will not affect the depth of the fire box or of the hearth. For the most accuracy, change all specifications for the selected fireplace in the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Editing Masonry Fireplaces

Select a fireplace to move or to edit it. To select, click on the fireplace in Select Objects mode. Depending on the type of fireplace selected, either three handles (for a wall fireplace) or five handles (for a freestanding fireplace) will display. These handles may be used to move, resize or reposition the fireplace.
Displaying Fireplaces
The color and display of fireplaces in Plan View is controlled by the manual dimension layer. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128.
472
The Fireplace Specification Dialog
The Fireplace Specification Dialog

Select the masonry fireplace and click the Open Object
Fireplace Specification dialog. Unlike
edit button to display the
cabinet sizes, dimensions entered here must be in whole inches.
General Tab
1 3 5
2 4 6 7
1 Height - Specify the Height of the

fireplace. fireplace. fireplace.
2 Width - Specify the Width of the 3 Depth - Specify the Depth of the
Depth. This is measured from the front of the fireplace out into the room. To eliminate the hearth altogether, enter a zero for this value. Height. This is the height of the hearth above the floor in that room.
4 Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth
will appear for fireplaces placed in walls. Check this box to turn off the display of dimensions when this fireplace is selected. The display of dimensions is ultimately controlled by the Manual Dimension layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. changes are made. Press the Tab key to force the fireplace to update to the most recent change.
6 Suppress Dimensions - This option
7 The picture of the fireplace updates as
5 Hearth Height - Specify the Hearth
473
Other Objects
Fire Box Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6
fireplace. This is often used in the foundation plan to provide a solid matching base for the fireplace on the first floor, but without having a fire box. have the picture of the fireplace in this dialog display in color.
1 Height/Width - Enter the height and

width of the fire box.
mm) to offset the fire box. This will be measured from the center. A value of 0 will cause the fire box to be centered in the fireplace.
2 Depth - Enter the depth of the fire box. 3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or
4 Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the fire box to the left or to the right. The amount of the offset will be the value specified by Offset. 5 No Fire Box - Select the check box to
eliminate the fire box from the
Materials Tab
The Materials tab allows the fireplace material to be specified. For mroe information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Library Fireplaces
Several different fireplace symbols are available in the Fixtures (Interior) library category. You should check the manufacturers product information for dimensions of framing, and code clearances for the fireplace unit you intend to use and size the symbols accordingly once they are in your plan. The fireplaces in the Library act just like other Library objects. There are many ways to access the libraries. Choose Build> Library >Library Browser or click the Library Browser button to
474
Library Fireplaces
access all available libraries. To access the Fixtures (Interior) library category directly, choose Build> Library > Fixture (Interior) Library or click the Fixture (Interior) Library child button.
In the Fixtures (Interior) library category, select the Fireplace library. Navigate to the Open Front category. The three standard fireplaces which are provided have an opening width of thirty-six, forty-two, and forty-eight inches.
Placing a Library Fireplace
To place a fireplace from the Library, select your fireplace from the fixture library and click in the plan where the fireplace will be. In Plan View, select the new fireplace. Move it side-to-side in the wall and front to back, until it is where you want it. Since it is a wall fixture, it moves like a base cabinet. Leave its back attached to the wall. If you move it through a wall, the fireplace front should move right through the wall until its face is flush with the other side. The face of a Library fireplace will project through a four inch wall. If your house has
select Break Wall and click at one end where the wall segment in front of the fireplace meets an intersecting wall. Select the Interior Wall child tool and delete the wall segment by drawing over it starting from the break. Now draw a new four inch wall in its place. Once the fireplace is located, you can draw the walls that will enclose the back of the fireplace. Draw three walls to complete the box. Refer to the manufacturers information to make sure you leave enough room around the fireplace. Use dimensions to accurately place the walls.
475
Other Objects
Library fireplaces can be placed anywhere in your plan. Depending on the type of Fireplace, some of the library objects have behaviors that help you place the object in the wall. Open Front fireplaces for instance will snap the front of the fireplace to the inside surface of a wall.
thicker exterior walls, replace the wall section in the front of the fireplace with a four inch wall as shown in the picture on the far right. To change the thickness of the wall segment,
Projecting Library Fireplaces

Use the same method described above, except draw the walls to allow the fireplace to project into the room. Following are three pictures showing alternate methods of having the fireplace project out into the room. It is best to use one wall thickness for the side walls.
Chimneys
Chimneys for Masonry Fireplaces
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace: 1. 2. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the topmost handle, and drag the chimney up through all the floors and the roof until it is to the desired height. The use of the Ctrl key will prevent the chimney from stopping when it reaches the ceiling height. Once you have dragged the chimney up until it is approximately the correct height, you may select the fireplace, click the Open Object edit button, and type in the known height. 2. 1. Place a soffit in position over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then extend the soffit using the same method as extending the masonry fireplace in the 3D view. If the chimney chase is drawn with walls on the exterior of the house, you may also continue the chase with walls. Align walls with the chase on each subsequent floor. The chimney chase room on the uppermost floor should have a much higher ceiling defined in the Room Specification dialog. It should also be set to have no roof by unchecking Roof over this room in the Structure tab of the Room Specification dialog. Then rebuild floors & ceilings, (and the roof, if appropriate).
3.
Chimney Chases
There are a couple of options to extend the chimney chase.
Chimney caps may be made using soffits. You must hold down the Ctrl key before dragging them above the ceiling height.
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building exterior by selecting Build> Trim> Corner Boards from the menu while in Plan View. They are also available on the toolbar by first
476
Corner Boards
selecting the Trim Tools parent button and then selecting the Corner Boards , or the Quoins child tool. Click outside the wall corner where you wish to add trim. You should click where the outside wall surfaces meet. If you click where the inside surfaces meet, you will create corner trim inside the room. You must add corner boards to all floors of the building that will have trim. Placing them only creates corner boards for the current floor. The corner boards will extend from the top plate down over the floor platform below the walls. The trim shows in the Plan View as two lines at the corner, slightly out from the wall's surface. This display is controlled by the Corner Boards layer. Corner boards are not produced in 3D views if the Windows/Doors check box is cleared on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. If corner boards are produced for 3D views, they can still be turned off in the Layer Display Options dialog by clearing both the Doors and Windows check box. Select corner boards while in Plan View with the Corner Boards mode active. You cannot drag or otherwise move them, but you can delete selected corner boards by pressing the Del key. When a corner board is selected, you can click the Open Object edit button to open the Wall Corner
Specification dialog and change the
width, thickness, and material. Hold the shift key to select multiple corner boards. Again, with multiple corners selected you can delete them all, or you can open their dialog and change the size or materials. The material for corner boards is taken from the Exterior Trim entry in the Default Materials dialog.
Resizing Corner Boards

You can change the top and/or bottom height of a corner board by selecting the corner board in a 3D view and moving the appropriate vertical handle. It is more accurate to enter the desired values in the Wall Corner Specification dialog.
477
Other Objects
Wall Corner Specification Dialog
1 2
3 4
The General tab of the Wall Corner Specification dialog allows you to change the dimensions for the corner boards.
1 Width - Specify the width of the

selected corner boards.
of all subsequently created corner boards. This will not change the width of any existing corner boards. thickness of all subsequently created corner boards. This will not change the thickness of any existing corner boards.
5 Initial Width - Specify the initial width
6 Initial Thickness - Specify the initial
2 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

the selected corner boards. of the corner board.
3 Set Top - Specify the height of the top 4 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the
bottom of the corner board.
The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are not saved with the plan file and will be reset the next time you run the program.
Quoins
Quoins are added the same way as corner boards. In Plan View select Build> Trim> Quoins and click outside the corner where you want to place quoins. While they are created the same way as corner boards they can usually be distinguished in that they will appear larger in Plan View. Refer to the section on corner boards for more
478
Quoin Specification Dialog
information on editing, group selecting or other activities with quoins. Select quoins while in Plan View with the Quoins mode active. You cannot drag or otherwise move them, but you can delete selected quoins by pressing the Del key. When a quoins are selected, you can click the Open Object edit button to open the Quoin Layout Information dialog and change the size, layout, and material.
Hold the shift key to select multiple quoins. With multiple quoins selected you can delete them all, or you can open their dialog and change the size or materials. The material for quoins is taken from the wall that it is initially attached to. This material will not change if the wall material is changed, but you may redefine it on the Material tab of the Quoin Specification dialog.
Quoin Specification Dialog
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 Other Objects 479 9 10
one quoin. The dimension along the other wall will be one-half this value when they are staggered or mirrored.
1 Width - Specify the long dimension of
4 Gap - Specify the distance between

successive quoins. of the quoin.
5 Set Top - Specifiy the height of the top 6 Set Bottom - Specifiy the height of the
bottom of the quoin.
2 Thickness - Specify the amount that the quoin protrudes from the exterior surface of the wall. 3 Height - Specify the height for all
quoins.
7 Initial Values - Each of the above
values can be set for all subsequently
produced quoins. Changing these values will not change the settings for any existing quoins.
Swap Start Block - Switch the starting order for staggered quoins.
8 Staggered - Produce quoins that have one long side and one short side staggered on opposite sides of the corner.
Uniform - Produce quoins that are of equal length on both sides of the corner.
alternate having either two long sides or two short sides.
10 Mirrored - Produce quoins that
Staggered
Mirrored
Uniform
Architectural Blocks
Architectural Blocks are composite objects that are built from groups of architectural objects. Once an architectural block is created, the block behaves like a single architectural object while the components retain their specific attributes. Millwork Symbols Geometric Shape Symbols
Creating Architectural Blocks

An Architectural block can be created by blocking a group of architectural objects. The following is a list of block compatible architectural objects: Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height) Soffits, Shelves, Partitions Fixture/Furniture Symbols Hardware Symbols
Start by group selecting the set of objects that you would like to block together. Block the selection set by clicking the Make Block edit button. The set of blocked objects will be contained within a bounding box indicating that they are now an Architectural Block.
The Library
Click the Architectural Block Library child button to access a library of Architectural Blocks. Select the
480
Displaying Architectural Blocks
desired block in the Library Browser and click in the plan to place it.
You can save Architectural Blocks in the Architectural Blocks Library. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Displaying Architectural Blocks

Once placed, architectural blocks are visible in all views. changing the Architectural Blocks layer properties. The display attribute of the architectural block layer controls the display of the bounding box as well as the individual components.
In Plan View
The display of architectural blocks in Plan View can be controlled separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128. The components of the block will continue to use the layer attributes of their native type. You can control the appearence of the bounding box of the architectural block by
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog. This dialog allows the individual components to be turned off in that view.
Selecting Architectural Blocks

Before an architectural block can be altered it must first be selected. Once selected, two red handles will appear which can be used to move, copy, delete, rotate, or otherwise modify it. There are two ways to select architectural blocks. 1. Click on an architectural block in Select Objects mode. If your plan is crowded, this method may not select the block. If a nearby object is selected first, click the Select Next Object edit Tab button or press the key until the architectural block is selected. 2. Right-click on the architectural block while in any drawing mode. This is a quick way to select a block without changing modes. This method is similar to using the Select Objects mode. If a neighboring object is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button or the Tab key until the desired block is selected.
Once an architectural block is selected, you can select additional architectural blocks or architectural block compatible objects by holding down the Shift key and clicking on the objects.
481
Other Objects
Selecting Components
In order to edit an individual component within an architectural block, you must first select it. The technique for selecting a component is the same for plan view, 3D views, and Cross Section/Elevation views. Select the architectural block by clicking on the specific component. Once the block is
selected, either hit the Tab key or press tthe Select Next Object edit button. The selection rectangle should change to the individual object. In most cases , the ability to edit the component as part of a block will be more restrictive than if the object was independent.
Exploding Architectural Blocks

Many of the editing options for individual objects are not available if that object is part of a block. In order to resize, move, rotate, or delete an individual object, you must first explode the block. Select the architectural block and click the Explode Block edit button. The components of the original block will now be independent objects.
Deleting Architectural Blocks

Select an architectural block or group of architectural blocks to be deleted. Once selected, press the Del key on the keyboard or click the Delete edit button on the edit toolbar. To delete a component of an architectural block, you must explode the block, delete the component, and recreate the block.
Copying Architectural Blocks

Single/Multiple
One or more architectural blocks can be copied from one location to another, either within the same plan or across plans. To copy an architectural block or a group of blocks, first select one or more architectural blocks. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste edit button. If you are copying the blocks(s) to the same floor of the same plan, click in the plan to place a copy. If you are copying the block(s) to a different floor of the same plan or to a different plan, go to the new floor or new plan and select Edit> Paste from the menu which will make the cursor resemble the picture on the Copy/ Paste edit button. Click on the plan to place a copy of the selected architectural block(s).
482
Moving Architectural Blocks
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste edit button before pasting.
The multiple copy requires that the receiving plan be open and visible so that you can toggle to that plan simply by clicking on screen. If using multiple copy across plans, open both plans first and select Window> Tile to place them side-by-side on screen.
Moving Architectural Blocks

A single architectural block or a group of blocks can be moved by either dragging from the center handle or by using the Move Object edit tool. Select the architectural block or group of blocks. Click the Move Object edit button. The block can now be moved by entering the appropriate values in the Move Object dialog. For more information see Move Object on page 716. Groups of architectural blocks can be moved using the Pt to Pt Move tool. For more information, see Point-to-Point Move on page 714.
Dragging
The easiest way to move doors in Plan and 3D views is with the mouse. 1. 2. Select the architectural block(s) you want to move. Place the cursor over the middle handle (the cursor will change to the Move cursor). 3. 4. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the blocks(s) Release the left mouse button when the desired location is reached.
Move Restrictions
An architectural block inherits its move restrictions from its sub-components. Refer to the documentation for the specific components in order to determine the move restrictions of the architectural blocks. There are times when restrictions need to be removed. The restriction may be removed by holding the control key while moving the architectural block.
Using the Move Object Tool

An architectural block or group of blocks can be moved using the Move Object tool.
Rotating Architectural Blocks

Using the Rotate Handle
When an architectural block is selected, two handles or grips appear. Grab the triangular handle at the back of the block and drag it to rotate the block. To rotate multiple
483
Other Objects
architectural blocks selected as a group, drag from the triangular handle representing the group as a whole.
Using the Rotate Tool

Architectural blocks may be rotated by using the edit tools . Select a block or group of
blocks. When the selection is complete, click the Rotate Object edit button. The Rotate Object dialog will appear. Choose the desired parameters and click OK . The selected object(s) will rotate the specified angle. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Components
Certain attributes of an architectural block can be edited on a component level. An block component can be edited by accessing the specification dialog for the particular object. Select the component and click the Open Object edit button. Some attributes may not be editable while the object is part of a block. Select the architectural block and click the Add to Library edit button. The Add to Library dialog will appear, allowing you to add the object to a specific library under the Architectural Blocks category. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Edit Material Components

You can view and/or modify the Material List record for an architectural block or group of blocks through the Components dialog. The Components dialog will list the material components of all of the subobjects of the block. To open the dialog, select the cabinet and click the Components edit button. For detailed information about the specific fields and uses of the component list, see The Components Dialog on page 869.
Add to Library
If you have the Full version of Chief Architect, architectural blocks can be saved in the Architectural Blocks Library.
Note: If you open a plan in the Base version of Chief Architect that was created in the Full version and select an architectural block, you will not be able to unblock it or edit its components.
Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block Specification dialog lets the user have more control over the way architectural blocks are displayed in plan view. To open the Architectural Block Specification dialog: 1. Select a block or group of blocks.
484
Molding Polylines
2.
When the selection set is complete, click the Open Object edit button to open the Architectural Block Specification dialog for the selected block(s).
Display Bounding Box - check this in order to display the bounding box of the objects in the architectural block. The box will use the Architectural Blocks Layer settings. Use Block Layer - Check this to display the sub-objects of the block on the Architectural Blocks Layer rather than their native object layer.
Molding Polylines
Molding polylines are molding profiles that extrude along a polyline path. Molding polylines are used to create custom room moldings. They are also useful for creating custom decorations anywhere in your 3D model. For more information, see Room Polylines on page 202. A molding polyline can be created five different ways: With the Molding Polyline With the Molding Line tool. tool.
Molding Polyline Tool

Click on the Molding Polyline tool. The library browser will open. Pick a molding profile from the molding library and drag a rectangle from corner to corner. This creates a rectangular molding polyline that extrudes the selected molding profile along its path. The polyline can be selected and edited. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Molding Line Tool

Click on the Molding Line tool. The library browser is launched. Pick a molding profile from the molding library. Then drag a line from end to end. This creates a single segment molding polyline that extrudes the selected molding along its path. Multiple molding lines can be connected to make a custom polyline path. See Polylines in the CAD chapter for editing polylines.
From the Moldings and Profiles category in the Library Browser, (see Moldings and Profiles Library on page 544). From a room molding. From a CAD polyline.
485
Other Objects
Editing Molding Polylines

Molding polylines behave just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
molding to convert into a molding polyline. When you click on the OK button the new molding polyline will be selected. Outside rooms can also be selected, allowing molding polylines to be created from its perimeter.
Moldings and Profiles Library

In the Library Browser , open the Moldings and Profiles category and select a molding profile. The Molding Polyline tool becomes active allowing you to draw a molding polyline with the selected molding.
Converting CAD Polyline

A CAD polyline can be converted into a molding polyline. Select the CAD polyline and click the Convert Polyline edit button. Select the Molding Polyline option and click OK. The Molding Polyline Specification opens. On the Moldings tab, add a molding profile to the molding polyline. For more information, see Molding Polylines on page 485.
Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room Molding Polyline edit button. This brings up the Make Room Molding Polyline dialog, allowing you to select which room
Displaying Molding Polylines

Once placed, molding polylines are visible in all views. page 128. By default, molding polylines are placed on the Moldings system layer.
In Plan View
The display of molding polylines in Plan View can be controlled seperately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog. This dialog allows moldings to be turned off in that view.
The Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

To open the Molding Polyline Specification dialog: 1. Select a molding polyline or group of molding polylines. 2. When the selection set is complete, click the Open Object edit button to open the Molding Polyline Specification dialog for the selected polyline(s).
486
The Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
General Tab
No Molding on Selected Edge - Select to create blank section in the molding polyline along the selected line segment.
Polyline Tab
Selected Line Tab

Height - Specify the Height of the polyline path that the molding extrudes along. See Selected Line Tab on page 691.
Moldings Tab
1 2 3
1 Molding - Select the molding to edit. 2 Add New - Click to add a new molding
to the molding polyline. Select - Click to change the profile for currently selected molding. Delete - Click to delete the currently selected molding.
Width - Specify the width. This option is not available for molding polylines created from default room moldings. Offset - Specify the offset from the molding polyline height to the top or bottom of the molding profile. A positive offset always moves the molding up and a negative offset always moves the molding down. To Top - Click to specify that the top of the molding will be at the polyline height plus the offset.
3 Height - Specify the molding profile

height.
487
Other Objects
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom of the molding will be at the polyline height plus the offset. Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile on the inside or outside of the polyline. Clear to extrude the molding profile on the outside or left side of the polyline.This is only available for molding polylines.
Fill Style Tab

Materials Tab
Line Style Tab

Polyline Solids
In 3D views, Polyline Solids generate polyline shaped objects with a specified thickness. They can be either horizontal or vertical. They are useful for creating custom decorations anywhere in your 3D model. If no objects are behind, the polyline solid is place one foot in front of the camera. The polyline can be reshaped and have vertices added and removed. See Polylines in the CAD chapter for editing polylines.
Creating Polyline Solids

A horizontal polyline solid can be created in plan view by clicking the Polyline Solid button. Then drag a rectangle from corner to corner. This creates a rectangular polyline solid. The polyline can be reshaped and have vertices added and removed. See Polylines in the CAD chapter for editing polylines. A vertical polyline solid can be created in an elevation or cross section view by clicking on the Polyline Solid button. Then drag a rectangle from corner to corner. This creates a rectangular polyline solid. The polyline solid will be placed in front of any objects visble in the view behind the polyline solid.
Editing Polyline Solids

Polyline Solids behave just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Deleting Polyline Solids

Select an polyline solid or group of polyline solids to be deleted. Once selected, press the Del key on the keyboard or click the Delete edit button on the edit toolbar.
Converting CAD Polylines

A CAD polyline can be converted into a polyline solid. For more information, see Converting CAD Objects on page 733.
488
Displaying Polyline Solids
Displaying Polyline Solids

Once placed, polyline solids are visible in all views. page 128. Polyline solids are placed on the default CAD layer.
In Plan View
The display of polyline solids in Plan View can be controlled separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options button within any 3D view to open the 3D Display Options dialog. Polyline solids can be turned on and off with the Custom Slabs option.
The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid Specification dialog: 1. 2. Select the polyline solid(s). When the selection set is complete, click the Open Object edit button to open the Polyline Solid Specification dialog for the selected polyline(s). of the polyline solid. This property is not available for vertical polyline solids. the polyline solid. Increasing the thickness will cause the polyline solid to grow upward (horizontal) or toward the elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
2 Height - Specify the height of the top 3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
General Tab
Polyline Tab
1 2 3 1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to convert the polyline solid into a hole in a surrounding polyline solid.
Selected Line Tab

See Selected Line Tab on page 691.
Line Style Tab

See Line Style Tab on page 681.
Fill Style Tab

See Fill Style Tab on page 692.
489
Other Objects
The Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
Materials Tab
See Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
490
Chapter 19:
Terrain
Chapter Overview
The Chief Architect Terrain Modeler allows you to create the terrain surrounding your building. You begin by specifying elevation data which will create the surface contours. Then terrain features such as flower beds can be added. Next the Terrain Modeler builds a three dimensional map of the terrain using the elevation data and terrain features that you have added to the plan. The more information you can provide, the better the terrain will model. If you already have terrain data for your lot, that information can be imported into Chief Architect with the Import Terrain Wizard or the Import Drawing Wizard. Once the terrain is modeled, Sun Angle information can be added, creating shadows that follow the terrain. Roads and sidewalks can also be added, see Roads & Sidewalks on page 515.
Chapter Contents
The Different Types of Terrain Data Displaying Terrain in Plan View Displaying Terrain In 3D Views Selecting Terrain Data Deleting Terrain Data Copying Terrain Clearing the Terrain Editing the Terrain Perimeter Editing Elevation Data Editing Terrain Features The Terrain Specification Dialog The Elevation Point Specification Dialog The Elevation Line Specification Dialog The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog The Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog Importing Terrain Data Import Terrain Wizard Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
491
Terrain
The Different Types of Terrain Data

There are many different tools you can use to create your terrain. All options are available on the Terrain menu.
Note: Terrain data can only be added to the first floor plan file (.PL1).
site, you can convert this line to the terrain perimeter. For more information, see Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data on page 512.
Terrain Elevation Tools

Absolute elevation data can be specified using Elevation Points , Elevation Lines , Elevation Splines , and Elevation Regions . When the terrain is generated, this information is used to calculate the surface of your site, which is represented by contour lines in Plan View and a curved surface in 3D. Elevation Points contain elevation data for one location. The Terrain Modeler requires many points to make an approximation of your site. They should be used in addition to Elevation Lines and Splines, which contain more data. Even small sites with a slope may require over a hundred points to generate a good approximation of the terrain. To add an Elevation Point select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Points and click in Plan View. The Elevation Point Specification dialog will appear. Enter an elevation value and click OK. Click somewhere else in Plan View and the Elevation Point Specification dialog will open again with the last elevation value entered. Choose another tool to stop placing elevation points. For more information, see The Elevation Point Specification Dialog on page 502.
Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed polyline that can be edited and shaped to match the size and orientation of the building site. The Terrain Perimeter defines the boundary of terrain in 3D Views, excluding objects that are not within it. The Terrain Perimeter itself contains a variety of properties that can be customized. For more information, see The Terrain Specification Dialog on page 498. To create a Terrain Perimeter select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter . A rectangular polyline appears. If it does not appear on the screen, select Window> Fill Window to include the Terrain Perimeter on your screen. If you create a Terrain Perimeter after you have drawn a building or walls, it will encompass everything in Plan View. Otherwise it will be 50 wide x 100 long (15m x 30m). It can be resized and edited like other polylines. For more information, see Editing Polylines on page 689. If you do not add any elevation data within the Terrain Perimeter, you will have a flat terrain at the elevation 0-0". If you already have a CAD polyline representing the boundary of the building
492
The Different Types of Terrain Data
Elevation Lines and Elevation Splines contain elevation data for many points along a constant elevation. Elevation Lines and Splines can be connected to create a polyline with the same characteristics. To add an Elevation Line or Spline, select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Lines or Elevation Splines , and click and drag in Plan View at the desired location. When you first draw an Elevation Line or Spline it is at the elevation 0-0. Once it is in Plan View it must be opened and edited to specify a different elevation. Elevation Lines and Splines are created just like CAD lines and splines in CAD mode. For more information, see The CAD Drawing Tools on page 676. An Elevation Region is ideal for creating a flat surface for your building site. You should not specify any other elevation data within the elevation region. To create a terrain elevation region select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Region , and click and drag a rectangular polyline in Plan View. Once the terrain elevation region is in Plan View it must be opened and edited to enter an elevation value. Elevation regions are created just like rectangular polylines. For more information, see Rectangular Polylines on page 701.
the existing elevation data by drawing a closed polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain surface generated from the elevation data in your plan. To add a Raised Region, Lowered Region, Hill, Valley, or Flat Region to your plan, select one of the options from the Terrain> Elevation Data submenu and click and drag a closed polyline in Plan View. The polyline can then be selected and edited in a variety of ways. For more information, see Terrain Modifiers on page 498. A Raised Region creates a raised area which is flat on the top, like a plateau, and a Lowered Region creates a depression which is flat on the bottom. The Hill and Valley tools create similar terrain shapes which come to a point instead of flattening at their highest or lowest elevations. A Flat Region will adjust to the surrounding terrain to maintain a flat elevation.
Terrain Feature Tools

You can create Terrain Features using the Feature Lines , Feature Splines , Feature Polylines , Feature Closed Splines , Kidney Shaped Feature , and Terrain Hole tools. Terrain features are bounded areas created with closed polylines.They are useful for defining an area that is different from the terrain as a whole. Terrain features always follow the terrain and have the same surface shape as the terrain that lies beneath them.Terrain Features can have a specified height offset and material. Terrain features can also clip to other terrain features.
Terrain Modifier Tools

Absolute elevation data can be modified using the Terrain Modifier Tools . The Raised Region , Lowered Region Region , Hill , Valley , and Flat child buttons allow you to modify
493
Terrain
You can use Terrain features to highlight landscape elements. For example if the entire terrain is using a grass material, a flower bed can be created within the terrain by specifying a terrain feature that uses a dirt material. Terrain features are also useful for creating walkways using the height property. To create a terrain feature, select Terrain> Elevation Data> Feature Lines , Feature Splines Feature Polylines , Feature Closed Splines , Kidney Shaped Feature , or Terrain Hole then use the mouse to draw the terrain feature in Plan View. Terrain Feature Lines , Feature Splines , and Feature Closed Splines are created just like standard lines, splines, and closed splines in CAD mode. For more information, see Lines on page 676, and Splines on page 696. Feature Polylines , Kidney Shaped Features , and Terrain Holes are created just like rectangular polylines. For more information, see Rectangular Polylines on page 701. Terrain features can only be created from closed polylines or splines. If they are not closed, the Terrain Modeler will automatically close them. For information on adding height and material information to terrain features, see The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on page 506.
Terrain Holes
A Terrain Hole is a region that contains no elevation information and no terrain. Using this tool is the same as creating a terrain feature and checking "make hole" in the Terrain Feature Specification dialog. For more information, see The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on page 506. The Terrain Hole tool is useful for manually clipping the terrain around a foundation that does not match the footprint of the first floor. For more information on clipping, see General Tab on page 499.
The Terrain Library

The library browser contains a folder of terrain objects which can be placed in a plan. In addition you can create your own objects and save them to the library. You can select any combination of elevation points, elevation lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself and send them to the library as one unit. This library object can then be placed into a plan. Once placed into a plan each object is independent and is no longer part of the group. For more information, see, Adding to the Library on page 531, and Terrain Library on page 544.
Displaying Terrain in Plan View

In Plan View, the Terrain Perimeter, contours, elevation data, and Terrain
494
Displaying Terrain In 3D Views
Features are displayed. The line color, line style, and lineweight of these objects can be controlled by their layers. To change layer properties, click the Display Options button and the Layer Display Options dialog will open. The layers for terrain modeling are located on the
System tab. For more information, see Layers on page 125. When the Terrain Perimeter is visible, Window> Fill Window fills the window based on the terrain boundary. When the Terrain Perimeter display is off, Window> Fill Window fills the window based on the house boundary.
Displaying Terrain In 3D Views

Building the Terrain
A 3D Terrain can only be generated when a Terrain Perimeter is included in the first floor plan file (.PL1). A Terrain Perimeter with no additional elevation data will generate a terrain that is flat at the elevation 0-0. By default the terrain will automatically build before generating a 3D View. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123. This process will take a variable amount of time depending on the amount of elevation data and Terrain Features. The program indicates the progress of terrain generation with the Building Terrain progress dialog. can be viewed in 3D. The program will rebuild the terrain automatically before generating 3D Views. If you want to turn off the automatic rebuild, select 3D> 3D Preferences from the menu. The 3D Preferences dialog opens. Select the Include tab. Clear the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box and click OK. You can rebuild the terrain manually by clicking Terrain> Build Terrain .
Note: Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings does not update the terrain.
Terrain & 3D Drawing Time

The Terrain requires many triangles to generate, which has an effect on the drawing time of 3D views. More triangles take more time to render. The amount of the delay is determined by the quality of the terrain and the number of terrain features present.
When new terrain data has been added, the terrain will need to be regenerated before it
495
Terrain
Many tools are available to help you adjust the angle of your view in 3D. For more information, see Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras on page 582.
If you want to see the terrain in 2D but not 3D, select 3D> 3D Preferences from the menu. The 3D Preferences dialog opens. Select the Include tab. Clear the Terrain check box and click OK. The Terrain adjusts trees and image to the height of the terrain. This is done each time a 3D View is displayed. All lights and symbols from the symbol library can be placed outdoors and will be included in 3D Views when the terrain is generated. When placed outdoors, lights and symbols will follow the terrain surface.
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the contour of the terrain. If a Terrain Perimeter exists, the Sun Shadow adjusts to the terrain. The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt whenever the terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up to date, the terrain will automatically rebuild. You can turn off the automatic rebuild. For more information, see Sun Angle Specification Dialog on page 620.
Selecting Terrain Data

The Terrain Perimeter, Elevation Data, Elevation Regions, and Terrain Features can all be selected by clicking on them in Select Objects mode or by right-clicking on them in any drawing mode. Once an individual terrain object is selected in Plan View, similar objects can be added to the selection set by holding down the Shift key. The program will not allow dissimilar objects to be group selected.
Deleting Terrain Data

Once the object(s) you want to delete have been selected, press the Del key on the keyboard or click the Delete edit button.
All terrain objects will be deleted when the Terrain Perimeter is deleted.
Copying Terrain
Terrain Data and Terrain Features can be selected and copied. To do this: 1. 2. Select the object or group of objects in Plan View. Click the Copy/Paste The cursor will change edit button. . 3. Click where you would like to place the copied terrain objects.
Note: If you are copying from one plan to another, you will not be able to view the pasted objects in 3D unless a terrain perimeter exists.
496
Clearing the Terrain
Clearing the Terrain

To remove the terrain from memory, select Terrain> Clear Terrain . This decreases file size without losing information. When the Terrain has been cleared, it does not appear in 2D or 3D but the program is able to regenerate it with the Build Terrain command. Terrain> Clear Terrain deletes all components required to model the terrain including the generated 2D contours. Clearing the terrain does not remove the Terrain Perimeter, Elevation Data, or Terrain Features from the model. These objects can only be removed by a direct delete operation (selecting the object then deleting), or by deleting the Terrain Perimeter. To view the contours after clearing the terrain, the terrain must be built by selecting Terrain> Build Terrain .
Editing the Terrain Perimeter

The shape of the Terrain Perimeter can be edited like a CAD polyline. For more information, see Editing Polylines on page 689. The Terrain Specification dialog allows you to change how the Terrain Perimeter appears in Plan View, and controls many of the variables that determine how your terrain is modeled. For more information, see The Terrain Specification Dialog on page 498.
Editing Elevation Data

Terrain Elevation Points, Lines, Splines, and Elevation Regions can be edited with the CAD tools just like CAD objects. In addition, elevation data can be relocated with accuracy using the dimensions that appear in Plan View when they are selected. For more information about this method, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644. Anytime elevation data is changed the terrain must be regenerated to view your changes. The terrain is regenerated automatically when generating 3D or Render views, or can be manually regenerated with Terrain> Build Terrain .
Select an Elevation Point in Plan View and place the cursor over the center handle. When the cursor changes to a four-headed arrow the Elevation Point can be relocated by clicking and dragging. The Elevation Point Specification dialog is used to assign height values and provides a more accurate method for
497
Terrain
Elevation Points
relocating Elevation Points. It also lets you change how Elevation Points appear in Plan View. For more, see The Elevation Point Specification Dialog on page 502.
Terrain Modifiers
The shape of a Raised Region Region , Hill , Valley , Lowered , or Flat
Elevation Lines and Splines

Elevation Lines and Splines are edited just like lines and splines in CAD mode. They can be broken, extended, shortened, etc. Elevation Lines can be connected into Polylines. You should be familiar with editing them before spending too much time modeling terrain. For more information, see Lines on page 676, CAD Polylines on page 689, and Splines on page 696. The Elevation Line Specification dialog is used to assign different height values. It also allows you to change the way Elevation Lines and Splines appear in Plan View. For more, see The Elevation Line Specification Dialog on page 504.
Region , can be edited like a normal polyline. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689. Terrain objects created with the Terrain Modifier Tools can also be edited by selecting them and clicking the Open Object edit button to open them for specification. The Raised / Lowered Region Specification, the Hill / Valley Specification, and the Flat Region Specification dialogs contain area information for the polyline and allow you to specify the selected terrain objects relative height and how it displays in Plan View. For more information, see The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog on page 505.
Editing Terrain Features

Terrain Features are edited just like standard lines, splines, and polylines in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD on page 675. You can use the Polyline Subtract tool to create a hole in terrain features. When this method is used, the underlying terrain, or whatever lies beneath the terrain feature will define the height and material of the hole. For more information on using this feature, see Polyline Subtract on page 695. The Terrain Feature Specification dialog allows you to assign different height values, control how Terrain Features appear in Plan View, and select the material that is applied to the Terrain Feature in 3D views. For more information, see The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on page 506.
The Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog can be accessed in 4 ways: Double-click the Terrain button.
498
Double-click the terrain perimeter while in Select Objects mode. Select Terrain> Terrain Specification from the menu. Double-click the terrain in 3D or Render View.
The Terrain Specification dialog allows you to change how the Terrain Perimeter appears in Plan View, and controls many of the variables that determine how your terrain is modeled. When all changes have been made, press the OK button to store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
General Tab
2 5
3 4
of surface triangles created by the Terrain Modeler.
1 Triangle Count - Defines the number
and a better 3D approximation of the terrain. The triangle size is computed roughly as follows: Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter / Number of Triangles There is no upper limit to the number of triangles you can specify. However, the penalty for smaller triangles is the additional
The Terrain Modeler builds the 3D terrain surface by splitting it into triangles. Increasing the triangle count decreases the triangle size. Smaller triangles, representing less area, yield more detailed contour lines
499
Terrain
terrain generation time, increased memory requirements, and increased drawing time. If you select numbers too great on large sites, you may find yourself waiting a long time for the calculation. Elevation lines will be sampled less frequently when the surface triangle size is larger, speeding up terrain generation when there are many Elevation Lines in the plan. The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High (4000) values work well for an average Lot Area of 20,000 square feet. If your Terrain Perimeter varies greatly from this you may want to define the number of triangles using the Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting. Triangle Size - Specifies the maximum triangle size in the terrain surface. Smoothing - Controls the amount of rounding applied to the terrain. Rounding involves replacing sharp changes in slope with more gradual changes, effectively removing jagged edges in the terrain. A low value for smoothing produces a terrain that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in slope. A high value results in a terrain that continuously flows from point to point.
foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is present, and 12 is used otherwise. Building Pad Elevation - Enter the value, relative to sea-level, that is used to specify the relative elevation of the 0-0 elevation of your building model, (the floor height of the first floor). This value does not change the elevation data and does not alter the contours. The program always defines the first floor elevation at 0-0. While this is desirable for adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it leads to misrepresentations in relation to real world elevations. Finished grade can be measured relative to the finished floor, but to measure elevation in the real world, building pads are rarely at 0-0 sea-level. For example, if a structure is to be placed in the middle of a terrain which slopes evenly from the height 100.00 to the height 112.00. Entering a value of 106.00 for the building pad elevation would cause the structure to appear at the correct height in all 3D views. Check this box to cut out the portion of the terrain that is intersected by the first floor footprint. Checking this box will also turn off the display of contour lines in Plan View that are located inside of the house. If your foundation footprint differs from your first floor footprint you may need to use the Terrain Hole tool for custom clipping instead. For more information, see Terrain Holes on page 494. added to the terrain. The skirt is only displayed in 3D views. The skirt gives the
4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten

the area beneath your building. Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box to automatically calculate the Building Pad Elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief Architect takes the center of the building footprint and finds the terrain elevation at this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or 18 inches to calculate the Building Pad Elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab
5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
500
viewer a sense of depth when viewing the terrain. Flat specifies that the skirt should be flat at its base. In this mode, the Terrain Modeler determines the lowest point in the terrain and then offsets this value by the user specified thickness value. The resulting value is used
as a uniform elevation for the base of the skirt. Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base maintains a consistent distance below the terrain. The distance is obtained from the thickness value provided by the user.
Contours Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6
elevation between contours. If the Interval is set to twelve inches (one foot) then a contour line is computed and displayed for each elevation change of twelve inches (one foot). Offset - Specify an offset value for contours. For example, if the offset is set to 5 feet and the interval is set to 10 feet then contours are generated at the elevations 5, 15, 25, 35, etc. Most often this value is set to 0.
The program can identify two types of contours, Primary and Secondary. The two types are drawn on different System layers, so you can control how they appear in Plan View. Specify how often the Primary Contours are designated. A value of 5 defines every fifth contour line as a Primary Contour line.
501
Terrain
1 Interval - Define the change in
interval for Primary Contours. A value of one produces only Primary Contours.
2 Primary Contour Every - Specify the
the check box to label secondary contour lines with their elevation data. The program automatically labels Primary Contour lines with their elevation data. that contour labels display. The labels units can be in inches or feet (millimeters or meters for metric.)
3 Label Secondary Contours - Select
Selected Line Tab

4 Contour Line Units - Specify the units
Line Style Tab

smoothing is turned on, the Terrain Modeler attempts to remove sharp bends and jagged sections from the 2D contour lines. to perform when smoothing. The more passes the smoother the contour lines become.
5 Contour Line Smoothing - If contour
Fill Style Tab

6 Passes - Specify the number of passes
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select materials to apply to the terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views. These materials are not calculated in the Material List. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Polyline Tab
The Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point Specification dialog select an Elevation Point or group of Elevation Points and click the Open Object edit button. You can also double click the Elevation Point in Select Objects mode. The Elevation Point Specification dialog allows you to define the selected Elevation Point and how it appears in Plan View. When all changes have been made, press the OK button to store the changes or the Cancel button to ignore them.
502
The Elevation Point Specification Dialog
General Tab
1 2 3 4 5
elevation point. The default unit for this value is inches (mm for metric).
1 Elevation - Enter the height of the
2 X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate

of the elevation point. of the elevation point.
3 Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordiante

such as elevation in this box. It will display beside the Elevation Point in Plan View.
4 Text - Enter any notes or information,
inches (or millimeters) for the marker.
503
Terrain
5 Marker Radius - Enter the radius, in
Attributes Tab
1 3 5 6 2 4
1 Character Height - Define the

Character Height of the text. new text will default to this Character Height.
2 Make Default - Check this box and any 3 No Rotate with Plan - Check this box 4 Transparent - Check this box to make
the background of the text transparent.
color dialog to define the color of the Elevation Point and accompanying text. Use Default - Select the check box to use the default settings of the layer on which the Elevation Point is located, rather than defining the color apart from the layer.
5 Color - Use the standard Windows
to prevent text from rotating when the plan is rotated.
6 Layer - Define the Layer on which the

Elevation Point is to be placed.
The Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line Specification dialog select an Elevation Line/Spline or group of Elevation Lines/ Splines and click the Open Object edit button. You can also double click the Elevation Line/Spline(s) in Select Objects mode. The Elevation Line Specification dialog allows you to define the selected Elevation Line and how it appears in Plan View. When all changes have been made, press the OK button to store the changes or the Cancel button to ignore them.
504
The Flat Region Specification Dialog
Elevation Tab
dialog is opened for an Elevation Region, this option displays. Check this option if you would like the Elevation Region to converge at the specified height, creating either a convex or a concave area.
1 3 2
Polyline Tab
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the

Line/Spline in inches (mm).
Selected Line Tab

2 Interior is Flat - When the Elevation
Line Specification dialog is opened
for an Elevation Region, this option displays. Check Interior is flat to maintain a flat elevation at the specified height.
Line Style Tab

Interpolate Tangent to Edge - When the Elevation Line Specification
The Flat Region Specification Dialog

The Flat Region Specification dialog is similar to the Hill / Valley Specification dialog. For more information, see The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog on page 505.
The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

Polyline Tab Terrain
1 Hill / Valley Tab

Hill or Valley. This height is relative to the terrain surface which is generated from the elevation data in your plan.
Spline Tab
For more information, see Spline Tab on page 700.
1 Height - Enter a height for the selected
Selected Line Tab

505
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

The Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

The Raised / Lowered Region Specification dialog is similar to the Hill / Valley Specification dialog. For more information, see The Hill / Valley Specification Dialog on page 505.
The Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature Specification dialog, select a terrain feature or group of terrain features in Plan View and click the Open Object edit button on the edit toolbar. You can also double-click a Terrain Feature in Plan View, 3D View, and Render Views to access the Terrain Feature Specification dialog. The Terrain Feature Specification dialog allows you to define the selected Terrain Feature and how it appears in Plan View. When all required changes have been made, press the OK button to store the changes or the Cancel button to ignore them.
General Tab
1 2 1 Height - Specify the height of the

The Terrain Modeler covers the gap between the terrain and the raised/lowered terrain feature with a skirt. The skirt is composed of vertical surfaces that seam together the terrain and the terrain feature.
terrain feature above or below the terrain surface with a positive or negative number. The Terrain Modeler elevates or lowers the Terrain Feature by the value in this field.
506
Importing Terrain Data
Make Hole - Check this box to make a terrain hole. For more information, see Terrain Holes on page 494. sections of the terrain feature that are covered by other terrain features at a lower height. When two terrain features meet and one is lower or equal in height to the other, it can be clipped from the taller Terrain Feature. It is also useful for creating features that contain other features such as planters or swimming pools.
Selected Line Tab

2 Clipping - Check this box to remove
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

Polyline Tab
Materials Tab
Importing Terrain Data

Terrain data can be created manually through the processes described earlier in this chapter or it can be imported from an existing file. Terrain data can come from a variety of sources and in a variety of file formats. Chief Architect is capable of importing text files (.txt) and DWG/DXF files (.dwg, .dxf). If your terrain data is not already in one of these file formats there are third party programs available that can convert to these formats. point. Each point must be on a separate line of the text file. Importable text files can come from surveyors, other software programs, or you can create your own with the help of a GPS system. When you have terrain data for the building site in a text file format, the Import Terrain Wizard provides an excellent way to add this information to your model. For more information, see Import Terrain Wizard on page 508
Text Files
Text files contain elevation terrain data based on x, y, and z coordinates where x and y define the location of a point on a cartesian grid, and z defines the elevation for that
DXF/DWG Files
If you already have a model of your terrain that has been created on another program that contains contour lines and elevation data, that information can be imported directly as elevation data into Chief Architect as a .dxf
507
Terrain
or a .dwg file. For more information, see Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on page 511.
Import Terrain Wizard

The Import Terrain Wizard allows you to import text (.txt) files containing terrain elevation information into your model. To open the Import Terrain Wizard select File> Import> Terrain from the menu. The Import Terrain Wizard welcome dialog will open. Click Next.
Select File
1 2
of a text file, or use the Browse feature to locate a file on your computer. You will need to know how the data in your text file is organized. Each data point contains information about its X-axis (its
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name
East to West location), Y-axis (its North to South location), and Z-axis (its elevation). It might also contain a brief description. Elevation information can come in one of six different sequences, and will either be separated by a comma (comma delimited) or a space (space delimited).
2 Select the Organization of the Data -
508
Import Terrain Wizard
XYZ - Information in this format will begin with the X coordinate, followed by the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate. #XYZ - Information in this format will begin with a number that belongs to each data point, followed by the X coordinate, the Y coordinate, and the Z coordinate. #XYZ Description - Information in this format will begin with a number that belongs to each data point, followed by the X coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z coordinate, and a description.
YXZ - Information in this format will begin with the Y coordinate, followed by the X coordinate and the Z coordinate. #YXZ - Information in this format will begin with a number that belongs to each data point, followed by the Y coordinate, the X coordinate, and the Z coordinate. #YXZ Description - Information in this format will begin with a number that belongs to each data point, followed by the Y coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z coordinate, and a description.
Filter Data
1 2 3
contains. Depending on your processor speed and memory, if you import more than 1000 or 2000 elevation points, it is recommended that you use the Linear Smoothing option in the Terrain Specification. Building terrain with too many elevation points may take a long time. allows you to reduce the data imported by skipping data points. For example, using every 2 points would reduce the data by
1 This is the number of points your data
50%, and using every 10 points would reduce the data by 90%. Below - Another way to restrict the data used is to define a range. Data within these ranges will be imported, while data outside these ranges will not.
3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges
2 Use Every __ Points - This option
509
Terrain
defining a range, which is represented by the smaller box in this diagram. To do this you must define the range using X, Y, and Z coordinates. Another way to accomplish the same effect would be to delete unwanted data from your text file before it is imported.
The outer box in this diagram and the points within it represent all of the data contained within a given text file. If there are too many points in your text file, a subset of this information could be used instead by
Scale Data
1 2 3 4 5
1 This describes the total number of data

points that will be imported, and
defines the range of the coordinates of those points.
510
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
accurately position the terrain beneath your plan. You will need to know where the Chief origin is located on your plan, and where that origin is located relative to the geographical data in your text file. The coordinates of the data point that corresponds with the origin point in Chief Architect should be entered here. To find the origin point on your plan. Open the Move Point dialog, enter absolute coordinates X=0, Y=0, and Click OK to move the point to the (0, 0) location. For more, see Moving CAD Points on page 708.
2 Translate - This option allows you to
used in your data for each axis. The units in the drop down lists are a subset of the units in the Edit Preferences dialog. Only linear default units are displayed. For more information on specifying default units, seeUnit Conversions Panel on page 101. you to multiply the coordinates of each axis by a specific number, decreasing or increasing the relative relief of your terrain. allows you to accurately rotate your terrain data counterclockwise around the Z axis.
3 Units - Select the units of measurement
4 Scale Coordinates - This option allows
5 Rotate Coordinates - This option
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
If you have elevation data in DXF/DWG format it can be imported directly through the Import Drawing Wizard.
1. 2.
Select File> Import> DXF/DWG to open the Import Drawing Wizard. Check the Terrain Elevation Data box.
511
Terrain
Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
3.
Continue with the import process described in the section titled Select File on page 773.
Imported points are converted to elevation points. Other imported entities (solids, faces, etc.) are imported normally.
When using the Terrain Elevation Data option it is important to only import layers containing elevation data. The Terrain Import Wizard can be run again with this option turned off to import other layers as normal CAD.
All imported lines and points will be converted to elevation lines or elevation points, preserving the elevation data stored in the DWG/DXF file. If an imported line has vertices with the same Z values, an elevation line will be created. If the vertices have differing Z values, an elevation point will be created for each vertex.
If a terrain perimeter does not already exist, one that surrounds the data will be generated.

CAD lines can be selected and converted to terrain data that the Terrain Modeler recognizes. This enables the CAD lines of an imported file to be converted into terrain data that can be used for terrain generation. Select a CAD Line, Spline, or Polyline in Plan View and click the Convert Polyline edit button. The Convert Polyline dialog appears.
Convert Polyline 1
512
The Convert to Polyline dialog allows you to convert the selected polyline(s) to a variety of special CAD objects. For more information about the other special CAD objects, see Converting CAD Objects on page 733. available when a terrain perimeter does not exist and when only one closed polyline is selected. Click OK to convert the selected polyline to a Terrain Perimeter. any of these terrain objects can be created. Click OK to complete the conversion for the selected object(s).
1 Terrain Perimeter - This option is
2 A Terrain Perimeter must exist before
Roads and road objects are covered in the following chapter. For more information, see Roads & Sidewalks on page 515. When the conversion is complete, the terrain data will be at elevation 0-0. For information about how to add elevation data to your converted CAD lines, see Editing Elevation Data on page 497, and Editing Terrain Features on page 498.
513
Terrain
514
Chapter 20:
Roads & Sidewalks
Chapter Overview
Roads and sidewalks can be created in Chief Architect with the road tools. Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other terrrain objects. Because they have much in common with the terrain objects and rely upon the terrain modeler to be viewed in 3D, you should be familiar with terrain modeling before using the road tools. See Terrain on page 491.
Chapter Contents
Road and Sidewalk Defaults The Different Types of Road Objects Displaying Road Objects Selecting Road Objects Deleting Road Objects Editing Road Objects The Road Specification Dialog The Driveway Specification Dialog The Road Marking Specification Dialog The Sidewalk Specification Dialog Adding Road Objects to the Library
Road and Sidewalk Defaults

The settings in the Road Defaults, and Driveway Defaults, and Road Marking Defaults, and Sidewalk Defaults dialogs determine the initial settings when the road and sidewalk tools are used. It is a good idea to check these settings before placing any roads or sidewalks in your plan. To access the Road Defaults dialog, double click the Road Tools parent button. The settings in the Road Defaults dialog are the same as those in the Road Specification dialog. For more information, see The Road Specification Dialog on page 522.
515
Roads
To access the Driveway Defaults dialog, double click the Driveway button. The settings in the Driveway Defaults dialog are the same as those in the Driveway Specification dialog. For more information, see The Driveway Specification Dialog on page 524. To access the Road Marking Defaults dialog, double click the Road Marking button. The settings in the Road Marking Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
Road Marking Specification dialog. For
more information, see The Road Marking Specification Dialog on page 525. To access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog, double click the Sidewalk button. The settings in the Sidewalk Defaults dialog are the same as those in the Sidewalk Specification dialog. For more information, see The Sidewalk Specification Dialog on page 525.
The Different Types of Road Objects

Road objects cannot be placed until a terrain Perimeter exists. For more information, see Terrain Perimeter on page 492. When road objects are first placed into your plan, their initial dimensions and display properties are controlled by their default settings. For more information, see Road and Sidewalk Defaults on page 515. Once road objects have been placed, they can be edited individually or as a group. For more information, see Editing Road Objects on page 520. To place a road select Terrain> Roads> Road from the menu and click and drag to draw a line in Plan View. Multiple road sections can be connected together. Roads are edited like CAD lines. For more information, see Lines on page 676.
Roads
A Road is a line that can be used to model roads on your building site. Roads created with the Road tool have a consistent width that can be defined in the Road Specification dialog. The elevation of a Road is flat perpendicular to its centerline, which makes it an ideal tool for creating roads on terrain with relief.
Road Polyline
A Road Polyline can be used to model roads of any shape. It is ideal for creating parking lots and other non-linear road surfaces. Roads created with the Road
516
The Different Types of Road Objects
Polyline tool will conform to the surface of the terrain beneath them. To place a road polyline select Terrain> Roads> Road Polyline from the menu and click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline in Plan View. Road Polylines are edited like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Polylines can be converted to road medians. For more information, see Converting CAD Objects on page 733.
Driveway
A Driveway is a road without a curb. A Driveway will cut out a curb wherever it meets a road or a road polyline. Like a road, the elevation of a Driveway is flat from left to right. To place a driveway select Terrain> Roads> Driveway from the menu and click and drag to draw a line in Plan View. Multiple Driveway sections can be connected together. Driveways are edited like CAD lines. For more information, see Lines on page 676.
Median
A median is a polyline that can be used within a road. The median will be made of the same material as the terrain beneath it and will have a curb if the road that encompasses it has one.
Cul-de-sac
A Cul-de-sac is a Road Polyline in a predetermined shape. A Cul-de-sac follows the surface of the terrain beneath it. To place a cul-de-sac select Terrain> Roads> Cul-de-sac from the menu and click on a road end where you want the Culde-sac to appear. Cul-de-sacs cannot be placed on Road Polylines. To place a median select Terrain> Roads> Median from the menu and click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline in Plan View. Road Median polylines must be contained within a road. Road Medians are edited just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689. Cul-de-sacs can be edited just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Road Stripe Roads

A Road Stripe allows you to paint lines on a road surface.
517
width that can be defined in the Sidewalk Specification dialog. Sidewalks will cut out curbs and gutters wherever they meet a Road or a Road Polyline. The elevation of a sidewalk is flat from left to right. To place a sidewalk select Terrain> Roads Sidewalk from the menu and click and drag to draw a line in Plan View. Multiple sidewalk sections can be connected together. To place a road stripe select Terrain> Roads> Road Stripe from the menu and click and drag to draw a line within a road in Plan View. Multiple road stripes can be connected together. Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. For more information, see Lines on page 676. Sidewalks are edited like CAD lines. For more information, see Lines on page 676.
Road Marking
A Road Marking paints polylines on a road surface, allowing any shape to be created. To place a road marking select Terrain> Roads> Road Marking from the menu and click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a road in Plan View. Road Markings are edited just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Sidewalk Polyline
A Sidewalk Polyline can be used to create a sidewalk of any shape. Sidewalk Polylines will conform to the surface of the terrain beneath them. To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain> Roads> Sidewalk Polyline from the menu and click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline in Plan View. Sidewalk Polylines are edited just like CAD polylines. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689.
Sidewalk
A Sidewalk is a line that can be used to model linear sidewalks on your building site. Sidewalks have a consistent
518
Displaying Road Objects
Displaying Road Objects

In Plan View
Roads and Sidewalks are displayed in Plan View based on the settings for their layers in the Layer Display Options dialog. Individual layers can also be turned off from the 2D display. To change the 2D display properties select Tools> Display Options to open the Layer Display Options dialog. The Roads, Road Markings, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Road Centerlines layers follow the terrain layers on the System tab. For more information, see Layers on page 125.
In 3D Views
Roads and Sidewalks will display in 3D Views whenever the terrain is being displayed in 3D Views. Roads and Sidewalks create additional surfaces that affect the amount of time required to generate 3D Views. If you have added or removed any road objects since the terrain was last rebuilt, the terrain will need to be rebuilt again before being viewed in 3D. By default the terrain will automatically build before generating a 3D View. For more information, see Include Tab on page 123.
Selecting Road Objects

Road objects can be selected by clicking on them in Select Objects mode or by rightclicking on them in any drawing mode. Once an individual road object is selected in Plan View, similar objects can be added to the selection set by holding down the Shift key. The program will not allow dissimilar objects to be group selected. Road and Road Polylines can be group selected, Sidewalks and Sidewalk Polylines can be group selected, and Road Stripes and Road Markings can be group selected. Medians can only be group selected with other Medians.
Deleting Road Objects

Once the road object or group of road objects you want to delete have been selected, press the Del key on the keyboard or click the Delete edit button to remove them from your plan.
All road objects will be deleted if the Terrain Perimeter is deleted.
519
Roads
Editing Road Objects

All road objects can be edited and relocated like ordinary CAD objects using the mouse. Road objects can also be precisely relocated using the dimensions that appear in Plan View when they are selected. For more information, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644. Selecting a road object and clicking the Open Object edit button will open a specification dialog, allowing for further customization of the object. you to add a curb, change the dimensions, and control other properties that affect their display in 2D and 3D. For more, see The Road Specification Dialog on page 522.
Medians
Select the perimeter of the median for editing. Medians are edited similarly to polylines in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689. Selecting a median and clicking the Open Object edit button will open the Road Specification dialog. The General tab will not appear for medians. For more information, see The Road Specification Dialog on page 522.
For curved medians, the road (a polyline) can be concentrically resized and converted into a median using the Convert Polyline edit button. For more information about concentric resizing, see CAD Panel on page 104.
Roads & Road Polylines

The path of a Road can be edited with the mouse along its centerline, just like standard lines in CAD mode. For more information, see Lines on page 676. The CAD edit buttons which appear for lines and polylines, such as Trim Objects , Fillet Two Lines , Chamfer Two Lines , and Break Line can also be used on roads. The centerline of the selected road must be used. For more information, see CAD Edit Buttons on page 64. You can select a Road and use its side handles to make the road wider or narrower. Road Polylines are edited along their perimeter, just like standard polylines in CAD mode. The width of a road polyline is determined by the polylines shape. For more, see CAD Polylines on page 689. Selecting a road and clicking the Open Object edit button will open the Road Specification dialog. This dialog allows
Driveways
Driveways are edited along their centerline, just like standard lines in CAD mode. For more information, see Lines on page 676. The Driveway Specification dialog allows you to control the dimensions of the Driveway and other properties that affect its display in 2D and 3D. For more information, see The Driveway Specification Dialog on page 524.
520
Editing Road Objects
Cul-de-sacs
Select the perimeter of the Cul-de-sac for editing. Cul-de-sacs are edited just like standard polylines in CAD mode. For more, see CAD Polylines on page 689. The Road Specification dialog allows you to control the properties that affect how the Cul-de-sac displays in 2D and 3D. For more information, see The Road Specification Dialog on page 522.
Like Sidewalk Polylines, Road Markings are edited along their perimeter, just like standard polylines in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689. The Sidewalk Specification dialog allows you to control the properties that affect its display in 2D and 3D. For more information, see The Sidewalk Specification Dialog on page 525.
Road Stripes & Markings

Like Roads, Road Stripes are edited along their centerline, just like standard lines in CAD mode. For more information, see Lines on page 676. Like Road Polylines, Road Markings are edited along their perimeter, just like standard polylines in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD Polylines on page 689. Selecting a road stripe or marking and clicking the Open Object edit button will open the Road Marking Specification dialog, which allows you to change the dimensions and other properties that affect how it displays in 2D and 3D. For more information, see The Road Marking Specification Dialog on page 525.
Convert to Polyline Road/Sidewalk

Select a Road or Sidewalk and click the Convert to Polyline Road/ Sidewalk edit button to convert it into a Road Polyline or a Sidewalk Polyline . This will allow you to edit the object as a polyline. See Roads & Road Polylines on page 520.
Automatically Generate Sidewalks

Select a Road , Road Polyline Cul-de-sac , or Median and click the the Automatically Generate Sidewalks edit button to open the ,
Automatically Generate Sidewalks
Sidewalks & Sidewalk Polylines

Like Roads, Sidewalks are edited along their centerline, just like standard lines in CAD mode. For more information, see Lines on page 676.
dialog. The options that are available depend on the type of road object selected.
521
Roads
or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on the selected road object.
1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one
1 2 3
to generate a sidewalk along all other roads connected to the selected road object.
2 All Connected Roads - Check this box 3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap
between the generated sidewalk and the selected road object.
The Road Specification Dialog

Select a Road or a Road Polyline and click the Open Object edit button to display the Road Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 2 3
1 Width - Enter a width for the selected

road.
2 Height - Enter a Height above the

terrain for the selected road.
and the End when they intersect with other road objects. Check one or both boxes. Radius - Enter the flare radius.
3 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
522
The Road Specification Dialog
Curb Tab
1 2 3 4
would like the selected road to contain a curb. Width - Enter a width value for the curb. Height - Enter a Height value for the curb. Sidewalks - Check this box if you would like the curb to be cut for driveways and sidewalks.
1 Has Curb - Check the box if you
information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Road Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
2 Cut Curb for Driveways and
3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button

to select another curb profile.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to the road in 3D views. This material is not calculated in the Material List. The Materials tab of the Road Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many other specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
4 Default Curb Profile - Click this Line Style Tab
button to use the default curb profile.
The Line Style tab of the Road Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification Dialog. For more
523
Roads
The Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a Driveway and click the Open Object edit button to display the Driveway Specification dialog.
General Tab
1 2 3

driveway.
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Driveway Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
Height - Enter a Height above the terrain for the selected driveway.
Start and the End when they intersect with roads or other driveways. Check one or both boxes. Radius - Enter the flare radius.
3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to the Driveway in 3D views. This material is not calculated in the Material List. The Materials tab of the Driveway Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many other specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Driveway Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
524
The Road Marking Specification Dialog
The Road Marking Specification Dialog

Select a Road Marking and click the Open Object edit button to display the Road Marking Specification dialog.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Road Marking Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Specification Dialog on page 680.
General Tab
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the Road Marking Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690.
1 Width - Enter a width value for the

selected Road Marking.
Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab of the Road Marking Specification dialog is the same as the Polyline tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Polyline Tab on page 690.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to the Road Marking in 3D views. This material is not calculated in the Material List. The Materials tab of the Road Marking Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many other specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
Selected Line Tab

The Selected Line tab of the Road Marking Specification dialog is the same as the Selected Line tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Selected Line Tab on page 691.
The Sidewalk Specification Dialog

Select a Sidewalk or a Sidewalk Polyline and click the Open Object edit button to display the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
525
Roads
General Tab
1 2 3

sidewalk.
Line Style Tab

Height - Enter a Height above the terrain for the selected sidewalk. either end, check one or both boxes.
3 Flare - Sidewalks can be flared at

Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Fill Style Tab

Polyline Tab
Materials Tab
Selected Line Tab

Adding Road Objects to the Library

You can create your own road objects and save them to the library. Select any combination of elevation points, elevation lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself and send them to the library as one unit. When a group of terrain objects from the library is placed into a plan, each object will become independent and can be edited individually. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
526
Chapter 21:
Libraries
Libraries
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects library contains thousands of symbols, textures, and images that can enhance any plan. Anything that you would like to incorporate in your building design that cannot be made with Chief Architects architectural and drafting tools can be found in the library, or created in the Create Symbol Wizard and saved in the library for future use. New libraries and library enhancements are being created by ART on a continuing basis. There are also third party developers who have created their own libraries for Chief Architect which are available for purchase. Becoming familiar with the library will help you unleash Chief Architects full potential.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility With Earlier Versions The Library Browser Adding to the Library Adding Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the Library Adding a Molding Profile Editing Libraries The Select Library Object Dialog Library Categories Placing Library Objects Displaying Library Objects Selecting Library Objects Deleting Library Objects Copying Library Objects Moving Library Objects Resizing Library Objects Editing Library Objects Library Objects and the Material List Library Object Specification Dialog
527
Compatibility With Earlier Versions

Libraries
If you have any third-party libraries created for Chief Architect 7.0, you should copy them into your Chief Architect 9.0 "Libraries" folder. The next time you open Chief Architect, the program will automatically convert those libraries for you. If you have any third-party libraries for Chief Architect 8.0 they will be automatically copied into the Chief Architect 9.0 "Libraries" folder. Updated information on available libraries can be found at www.chiefarchitect.com. To resolve this, find the original texture file named in the error message and copy it (while recreating its path) into the "Old Textures" folder. The next time Chief Architect 9.0 is opened it will find the missing file and correctly display the texture. names and will not allow two texture files of the same name to exist. If you recieve an error message when creating Render Views your plan might contain two textures of the same name or textures that did not originally come with the program.
Texture Files
There have been changes to the way texture files are referenced in Chief Architect 9.0. The new system now disregards folder
The Library Browser

The Chief Architect Library comes with thousands of symbols, textures, and images that can be used in a plan. The Library Browser is basically a repository for prebuilt components and other plan elements that lets you explore the contents, find what your looking for, and place it in your plan. The Library Browser also allows you to add your own symbols, organize them into your own libraries within existing categories, and save them for use in future plans. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531. To open the Library Browser: Select Build> Library> Library Browser from the main menu. Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard. Click the Library Browser parent button then click any of its child buttons. The Door , Window , Cabinet , and Electrical parent tool buttons
528
The Library Browser
5 2 3
The Library Browser window has three adjustable sections. To adjust the height or width of a section, place the cursor over the split bar you wish to move. When the double-headed arrow appears, click and drag the split bar. Library 2 ... and so on.
The hierarchy can be navigated using the tree view control, by clicking in the view window, and by using the keyboard.
1 The left side displays the library

Library Category Library 1 Library Folder 1 Library Subfolder Library Object 1 Library Folder 2
2 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids

The Library Search button opens the Find Library Objects dialog. For more information, see Library Search on page 545.
in navigating and displaying windows.
hierarchy. The overall structure is:
The second toolbar button toggles the Selection window on and off. The third toolbar button toggles the Preview window on and off.
529
Libraries
display a Library child button. Clicking this button will open the Library
Browser window and automatically select the corresponding Library type.
The Preferences button automatically opens the Preferences dialog to the Library Browser panel, where many of the display properties for the Library Browser are controlled. For more information, see Library Browser Panel on page 94.
Make your selection by clicking on the desired object in the selection pane. You can continue to work on the model with the Library Browser open. It can be minimized, relocated, or simply closed and reopened again later. To close the Library Browser click OK or double-click the object in the selection pane.
3 The status bar at the bottom of the

sections.
Library Browser is divided into 4
The first section displays the name of the Library Type currently selected. The second displays the name of the Library Objects. The third section displays the total Number of Folders and Objects contained by the selected Library Category. The fourth section displays Copyright Information for copyrighted symbols.
Docking the Library Browser

The Library Browser can be relocated by clicking and dragging the title bar. A setting in the Preferences dialog allows the Library Browser to dock to the side of the screen. For more information, see Library Browser Panel on page 94. When moved to the top, bottom, or side of your screen it will automatically dock in a vertical or horizontal orientation, depending on its location. Holding down the Ctrl key will prevent the Library Browser from docking while moving. The Library Browser cannot be minimized or maximized when docked. If you close the program with the Library Browser docked, it will appear in the same position next time the program is opened.
or Folders available for the highlighted portion of the tree view. If you have Scrollable List checked in your preference settings a scroll bar will be present at the bottom of the selection pane. For more information, see Library Browser Panel on page 94.
4 The Selection pane shows thumbnails
5 The Preview pane displays a 3D or
alternate view of the selected object.
Note: there are no 3D previews for CAD blocks, profiles, graphics, textures, images, or backdrops.
530
Adding to the Library
Only the Full Version of Chief Architect allows you to add objects to the Library. Libraries shipped with Chief Architect are locked and cannot be edited, indicated by a small padlock symbol next to the library name. Unlocked libraries can be added to and edited. New Libraries, Folders, and Library Objects can all be added to the Library Browser. Library Objects are always placed in alphabetical order within their heirarchy.
symbols) such as cabinets, windows, doorways, CAD blocks, molding profiles, Architectural Blocks, and terrain objects can be added to the library. For more information, see Symbols vs. Native Objects on page 551. To add a symbol to the library, select the symbol in Plan View, Perspective View, or Render View and choose Tools> Symbol> Add to Library from the menu, or click the
Library dialog appears.
Add to Library
edit button. The Add to
Adding a New Library

To create a new library, open the
Library Browser
and choose File> New Library from the menu.
You can also select any current library in the tree view, right click on it, and select New Library from the contextual menu. A new Library "Untitled Library 1" will be added to the currently highlighted Library Category. The new library can then be renamed. For more information, see Renaming on page 534.
Folder that appears in the Choose window of the dialog. The symbol will be added to the selected Folder.
1 Symbols can be added to any Library or
Adding a New Symbol

Any symbol that was previously placed on a plan with the Library Browser or the Create Symbol Wizard can be added to a library. For more information, see Create Symbol Wizard on page 787. In addition, some Chief Architect objects (which are not
2 Give the symbol a name. Names are

case sensitive. If different names must be used to support Imperial and Metric standards, enter the Imperial name first followed by an exclamation mark(!) then the Metric name (for example: 10" Box!25.4cm Box). Metric symbol names will be visible only when a
531
Libraries
Adding to the Library
Metric plan is open, and likewise with Imperial.
3 Click the New Library
button to add a new library to the Choose area.
The names of Folders in the Textures, Images, and Backdrops libraries cannot contain the forward slash "/" character.
until an Object Name has been entered and a Library or Directory has been highlighted. Click OK and the object will be entered into the selected folder.
4 The OK button will remain dimmed
Refresh Library Browser

If you add a new library or graphics file by copying the file in Windows Explorer, it won't show up automatically in the browser. Click this button to refresh the Library Browser and display the added file.
Adding Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the Library

Chief Architect can use any texture, image, or backdrop that has been created in a standard .bmp, .jpg, or .png graphics file format. To add a new texture, image, or backdropfile for use in Chief Architect, simply copy the file into the appropriate folder using Windows Explorer. Chief Architect comes with the empty folders for your graphics files called My Textures, My Images, and My Backdrops. You can also create or modify any sub-folders under the Textures, Images, and Backdrops folders using Windows Explorer. Any modifications you make outside of Chief Architect will be visible in the Library Browser the next time Chief Architect is started. If you make any changes outside of Chief Architect while the program is running, you can use the Refresh Library Browser tool. See, Refresh Library Browser on page 532. Any new files or folders added will appear in alphabetical order with any existing files or folders. Once a texture, image, or backdrop file has been added to Chief Architect, you can rename or move the files as long as they are in Unlocked folders. You can also modify and sub-folders that are in an Unlocked folder.
Adding a Molding Profile

You can add a new molding profile to the Moldings and Profiles Library by drawing a closed polyline to represent its cross section. The polyline must be oriented properly for the molding to be usable.
Drawing the Molding

Moldings can be drawn using the CAD tools in either Plan View or in a CAD Detail window. Draw moldings at their actual size. The profile must also be created with the proper orientation. For a window casing or
532
Editing Libraries
To add a group of moldings at once: 1. 2. 3. Draw more than one closed polyline in Plan View. Group select the polylines only (Do not select other symbol objects). Select Tools> Symbol> Add to Library.
To add your molding to the library, see Adding to the Library on page 531.
Multiple Moldings
You can also place multiple moldings into a library all at the same time by selecting multiple closed polylines at the same time.
The Add to Library dialog will open. Choose a molding library to place the selected objects into and press OK.
Editing Libraries
Libraries can only be edited in the Full Version of Chief Architect. Most libraries that come with Chief Architect 9.0 are locked and cannot be deleted, moved, renamed, or modified. The Library Browser allows new libraries and library objects to be moved, copied, deleted, and renamed.
Individual Library Objects from locked libraries can be edited after being copied into Unlocked libraries.
into a text program such as Notepad or Text Editor.
Copying Folders and Library Objects

Libraries cannot be copied. Folders and Library Objects can be copied and placed into other Folders within the same Library Category . To copy a Folder or Library Object , open the Library Browser and select it. Choose Edit> Copy from the menu, or right click on the Library Object and select Copy from the Contextual Menu. Highlight the new location in the tree view and click Paste from the Edit menu to paste a copy.
Copy Library List

If you would like to make a copy of the list of all library objects, select a Library in tree view and choose Edit> Copy Library List from the Library Browser menu. You can then paste the entire library heirarchy as text
Inserting a New Folder

Select an editable Library or Folder in the tree view and right click on it.
533
Libraries
sill, crown, chair rail or baseboard, the back of the molding (the part that is against the wall) must be vertical and at the left of the polyline. Draw the vertical line first then continue drawing the molding clockwise.
The program will name the various profiles which you can then change later.
Choose Edit> Rename Object from the menu, or right click on the Library Object and select Rename Object from the Contextual Menu. The keyboard command Ctrl +R will also allow you to rename a Library Object. Library names can contain up to 63 characters. Library names are also casesensitive. "OakCabinet" for example, will not overwrite "Oakcabinet".
Choose Insert Folder to create a Folder beneath the selected Folder or Library. You may also select a location in the tree view and choose Edit> Insert Folder.
Expand/Collapse All
When the Library level or any Folder level is selected in the tree view of the Library Browser this menu option is available, allowing you to expand or contract all subcategories and objects it contains.
Deleting
Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders and Library Objects within them, can be deleted. To delete a Library Object, select it in the Library Browser and choose Edit> Delete Object from the menu. It is also possible to delete a selected Library Object in the Contextual Menu by right clicking on it, or by simply using the Del key when the Library Object is selected.
Modifying or Deleting Library Objects is permanent and immediate. You cannot undo these changes so use care when modifying your libraries. We highly recommend that you create backups of all your library files (*.alb) before making any modifications.
Components
How a Library Object appears in the Materials List can be edited using the Components dialog. Select Edit> Components from the Library Browser menu when any unlocked symbol is highlighted in tree view (see Symbols vs. Native Objects on page 551). The Components dialog will open, allowing you to change the information that will be used on the Material List. Terrain Objects, CAD Blocks, Moldings, Images, Backdrops, and Textures do not appear in the Material List. For more information, see The Components Dialog on page 869.
Renaming
Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders and Library Objects within them, can be renamed. To rename a Library, Folder, or Library Object, open the Library Browser and select the Library Object to be renamed.
Open Symbol
Any symbol from an Unlocked library can be opened for specification and edited
534
The Select Library Object Dialog
To open the Symbol Specification dialog highlight a symbol in the tree view of the Library Browser and choose Edit> Open Symbol from the menu. For more information, see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Folders able to accept additions will highlight as the file is moved. Release the mouse button to relocate the selected Library Object.
Preferences
Selecting Edit >Preferences from the Library Browser menu opens the Preferences dialog to the Library Browser panel, where many of the display properties for the Library Browser are controlled . For more information, see Library Browser Panel on page 94.
Keyboard Commands
You can navigate the tree view of the Library Browser using the arrow keys on your keyboard. The right and left arrow keys expand and collapse Folders. The up and down keys change which library object is currently selected. If you have Scrollable List checked in your preference settings (see Library Browser Panel on page 94), pressing the Tab key will allow you to switch focus between the tree view and the Selection pane. Use your mouse to select an object for placement. If you have Tiled To Fit Window checked in your preference settings, pressing the Tab key will allow you to switch focus between the tree view and the selection pane. The arrow keys can then be used to select a Library Object within the selection pane.
Moving Folders and Library Objects

Libraries are organized alphabetically by Category and will only move based on their alphabetical order. Folders and Library Objects cannot be moved between libraries, but can be moved within a library. Like Libraries, Folders and Library Objects are organized alphabetically within each hierarchy. To move a folder or file to another location within a library, open the Library Browser
The Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that can be accessed from many specification dialogs. When an object is open for specification, the library button may appear in the specification dialog. Click it to open the Select Library Object dialog, allowing you to select and apply objects from
535
Libraries
from the Library Browser menu. The Symbol Specification dialog is very similar to the Create Symbol Wizard.
and click the Library Object. Click and drag the selected Library Object to the desired location.
the library to the object currently opened for specification.
The Select Library Object dialog will only display categories that are related to the opened object. For example, this is how the Select Library Object dialog appears when accessed from the Cabinet Specification dialog.
The Select Library Object dialog can be resized , can display the Preview and Selection pane , and can initiate a Library Search . To make your selection, highlight the desired object and click OK, or simply double-click the object in the selection pane to close the Select Library Object dialog.
Library Categories
There are many Library Categories. Within each Library Category there can be any number of Libraries. The tree view and the Selection pane are always in sync. If you select a category or object in the Selection pane, the corresponding category or object selects in the tree view, and the 3D picture appears in the Preview pane. Here are the Library Categories which can be accessed from the Library Browser:
Architectural Blocks Library Backdrops Library Cabinet Doors Library Cabinet Modules Library CAD Blocks Library Doors Library Doorways Library Electrical Library Exterior Fixtures Library Interior Fixtures Library Exterior Furnishings Library Interior Furnishings Library Geometric Shapes Library Hardware Library Images Library Millwork Library Moldings and Profiles Library Terrain Library Textures Library Windows Library
536
Architectural Blocks Library
Library Search
Architectural Blocks Library

Clicking the Architectural Block Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Architectural Blocks Library. Architectural Blocks are a combination of other objects that are grouped together. Once blocked they can be edited as a single object and stored for future use. Only some Objects can be grouped in an Architectural Block. Cabinets Soffits Shelves/Partitions Fixtures Furnishings Geometric shapes Architectural blocks can only be relocated. They cannot be stretched or resized. For more information on editing Architectural Blocks, see Architectural Blocks on page 552. Hardware Millwork Cabinets
Backdrops Library
The Backdrops Library contains many images that can be used for backdrops in 3D, Render, and Raytrace Views. Backdrops can only be specified from the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Creating Backdrops on page 120.
Cabinet Doors Library

Clicking the Cabinet Doors Library button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Cabinet Doors Library.
537
Libraries
The Cabinet Doors Library contains many door styles that can be used with Chief
Architects standard cabinets. The door styles are organized into directories. These door styles can be selected and dropped onto existing cabinetsin Plan or 3D Views to change the door style for that cabinet.
Cabinet Modules Library

Clicking the Cabinet Modules Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Cabinet Modules Library. The Cabinet Modules Library contains cabinet modules that can be placed in Plan View from the Library Browser or the Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinets from the library can be selected and moved around in the model. They cannot be resized until they are opened for specification and Allow Resize is
Specification dialog.
selected on the General tab of the Cabinet
CAD Blocks Library

To open the CAD Blocks Library in CAD mode select CAD> CAD Blocks Library from the main menu or click CAD Blocks library . The CAD Blocks Library contains 2D CAD blocks that can be placed into any view that allows CAD mode, including layout pages. The CAD Blocks Library comes with a wide variety of CAD objects such as product specific CAD details, commonly used plan notations, and CAD images. The CAD Blocks library can contain any CAD Block designed for any purpose. For more information, see Creating a Library of CAD Blocks on page 731.
538
Doors Library
Doors Library
The Doors Library contains custom door styles that can be assigned to doors in the 3D model. These doors can be selected and dropped into any doorway to change the door style for that doorway. The Doors Library also contains custom doors that can be placed within doorway objects. Here is a sample of the doors available in this library.
Doorways Library
Clicking the Doors Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Doors Library. The Doorways Library contains doorway configurations that are used for grand entries, interior archways, garage door frames, etc. Here is a sample of the doorways available in this library.
539
Libraries
Electrical Library
Clicking the Electrical Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Electrical Library. The Electrical Library contains electrical symbols. These symbols are placed in Plan View and are used to create electrical plans. All of the symbols have a 3D object associated with them that will appear in 3D views and may also produce a light source in Render Views.
Exterior Fixtures Library

Clicking the Fixture Library (Exterior) child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Exterior Fixture Library. The Exterior Fixture Library contains symbols for many outdoor objects which are commonly found on the exterior of a home. Barbecues, plants, playground equipment, hot tubs, mailboxes, doghouses, automobiles, and a large variety of road accessories are just some of the objects that can be found in the Exterior Fixtures Library.
Interior Fixtures Library

Clicking the Fixture Library
Library Browser to the Interior Fixtures
(Interior)
child button opens the
Library. The Interior Fixtures Library contains a variety of interior fixtures such as appliances, indoor stoves, fireplaces, HVAC, surveillance cameras, and fire extinguishers.
540
Exterior Furnishings Library
Sunrooms
This Interior Fixtures Library also contains a variety of sunroom components which can be used to create many different styles of sunrooms. Following are some of the individual library objects shown next to others assembled as a sunroom unit. Only one side of each section is provided. To get the corresponding unit for the opposite side, check Reverse Item in the specification dialog for that sunroom section.
Exterior Furnishings Library

Clicking the Furnishings Library (Exterior) child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Exterior Furnishings Library. The Furnishings Library (Exterior) contains outdoor furniture such as benches, swings, planters, tables, and chairs.
541
Libraries
If a short wall is needed under the sunroom, use solid railings. You will also have to change the Floor to Bottom value from zero to the height of the solid railing.
Interior Furnishings Library

Clicking the Furnishings Library (Interior) child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Furnishings Library (Interior). The Interior Furnishings Library is very large. It contains a broad range of furniture. which is organized into directories, mainly by room. There are three types of furniture objects: A stand-alone object which places and moves like a base cabinet. Most furniture objects are stand alone. A table object, such as a table lamp or portable TV, which can be placed on top of a table, countertop, or other object. A wall object which attaches to the wall. The Furniture Library contains an assortment of desks, chairs, office equipment, shelving, and other interior objects that can be found in most buildings. Objects such as bathroom partitions are also available. them into the plan where there is sufficient floor space. They move and rotate like a base cabinet. If an object is created near a wall, its back is placed against the wall just as the back of a fixture or cabinet would be.
Most pieces of furniture behave like standalone fixtures or base cabinets. Simply drop
Geometric Shapes Library

Clicking the Geometric Shapes Library child button will open the
Library Browser and automatically select
resized and combined with many other objects for a variety of applications.
the Geometric Shapes Library. The Geometric Shapes Library contains cylinders, boxes, wedges, spheres, cones, and other primitive shapes which can be
542
Hardware Library
Clicking the Hardware Library child button will open the Library Browser window and automatically select the Hardware Library. The Hardware Library contains accessories that can be applied to doors and drawers for both commercial and residential use.
Images Library
Clicking the Images Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Images Library. Images are used in Chief Architect to represent objects in 3D and Render Views. Many Images are included with the program. Images are extremely important for the appearance of Rendered Views and VRML file export. Images are bitmap files which represent individual objects, such as trees, flowers, cars, people, etc. They are marked in Plan View with a 2D CAD block and are visible in 3D views. When placed on a terrain or terrain feature, the images are placed at the correct elevation. For more information, see Pictures, Images, & Movies on page 757.
Millwork Library
The Millwork Library contains many objects such as door surrounds, corbels, mantels and cupolas. The objects in the Millwork Library can also be applied to other objects in the program such as railings, fences, and stair brackets.
543
Libraries
Hardware Library
Moldings and Profiles Library

The Moldings and Profiles Library contains a collection of molding profiles that can be used on a variety of objects such as cabinets, rooms, windows and doors. Moldings profiles can also be extruded along a path in Plan Views with the Molding Line , and Molding Polyline tools. For more information, see Molding Polylines on page 485.
Terrain Library
Clicking the Terrain Library child button will open the Library Browser and automatically select the Terrain Library. The Terrain Library contains landscape elements like hills and gardens, and road and parking lot elements like islands and culverts. For more information, see The Terrain Library on page 494.
Textures Library
The Texture Library contains bitmap images that are used to display materials in Render and Raytrace Views. Textures can be applied to materials from the Materials tab of the Define Materials dialog. For more information, see Defining Materials on page 558.
544
Windows Library
The Windows Library contains windows with custom muntin patterns as well as windows with custom shapes. These windows can be placed in a model just like other windows and can be resized like other library objects.
Library Search
The Library Search button can be found on the main toolbar, on the Library Browser, and on the Select Library Object dialog. Clicking the Library Search button will open the Find Library Objects dialog.
2 Check the box for each category you

want to include in your search. your search case-sensitive. to match the entire word.
3 Match Case - Check this box to make 4 Match Entire Word - Check this box 5 Include Folders - Check this box to
include folders in your search. all of the categories.
1 3 5 7 8 9 2 4 6
6 Select All - Click this button to select 7 Reset - Click this button to remove all
search parameters from the dialog. begin searching.
8 Begin Search - Click this button to 9 Cancel - Click this button to cancel the
Objects dialog.
search and close the Find Library
1 Name - Enter a word (or words) to be

used in the search.
To search for a library object, enter the words or numbers to search for in the Name field and place checks in the boxes of the
545
Libraries
Windows Library
categories you want to include in your search. Click Begin Search. When the search is complete, the results can be found in the Search Results library, located at the bottom of the tree view in the Library Browser. For information on placing objects from this library, see Placing Library Objects on page 546.
The Search Results library will be cleared when a new search is ran and whenever the
Select Library Object dialog is opened.

The Find Library Objects dialog will remember the search information for the last valid search whenever it is accessed from the Library Browser, the main toolbar, or the menu.
Placing Library Objects

Click on an object in the Selection Pane of the Library Browser to select it for placement. Once an object has been selected, the cursor may change its appearance, indicating which Library Type the object came from. To place an object into the model, simply click in Plan View or 3D View where you would like the object placed. You can continue to click and place as many of the selected library object as you want, or you can select another object from a different library and place it in the model. Most Libraries contain 3D objects that can be selected from the Library Browser and placed directly in a 2D or 3D View. A few libraries contain objects that cannot. Once a library object has been placed it can be edited in a variety of ways. For more
546
Placing Library Objects
Placement Restrictions
Library objects come with a variety of placement restrictions that correspond with its typical location. Library windows, for example, must be placed in a wall, just like standard windows. Library doors must be placed in an existing doorway. Some appliances must be placed in cabinets. Library objects that are symbols (see Symbols vs. Native Objects on page 551) have placement restrictions which are determined when the symbol is created. These parameters can be changed. For more information, see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804. Any error messages you recieve when placing library symbols into your plan will indicate where the object must be placed. Once you have selected a library object in the Library Browser, your mouse cursor will change to indicate the type of library object as shown in the following list. Architectural Blocks can be placed wherever there is sufficient room to contain them. Cabinet Doors must be placed within existing cabinets. They cannot be free standing. Cabinet Modules can be placed wherever there is sufficient room to contain them. the CAD Blocks Library contains a wide variety of CAD objects which are typically used in Layout. CAD blocks can be placed in the plan without regard to spacial
Doors must be placed into an existing doorway. Doorways must be placed into an existing wall. Electrical objects from the library come with a variety of placement restrictions. Some objects such as ceiling fans, smoke detectors, and track lighting will attach to the ceiling. Other objects like switches, outlets, and jacks are mounted on the wall. Some electrical objects fit under a wall cabinet or directly on a floor. Most objects in the Exterior Fixtures category can be placed in Plan View wherever there is sufficient room to contain the object. Interior Fixtures can only be placed where there is sufficient floor space. If there is not enough room when you click to place a floor standing fixture object, an error message will display. Press OK and click in the plan where there is sufficient room to place the object. Enter Select Objects mode and resize the cabinets if needed. If a fixture drops into the top or front of a cabinet, you must already have a cabinet module large enough to hold it. If you attempt to place a fixture into a cabinet module that is too small, an error message displays. Select OK and resize the cabinet to accommodate the fixture. Drag a handle on either side outward to widen the module, then try to place the fixture in the cabinet again.
547
Libraries
information, see Editing Library Objects on page 551.
restrictions. For more information, see CAD Blocks on page 726.
Items in the Exterior Furnishings category can be placed in Plan View wherever there is sufficient room to contain the object. Interior Furnishings can only be placed where there is sufficient floor space If there is not enough room, an error message displays. Press OK and click in the plan where there is sufficient room to hold the object. If necessary, enter Select Objects mode and resize or relocate any cabinets and fixtures to make room for the new object. Items in the Geometric Shapes library can be placed wherever there is sufficient floor space room to contain them. Items in the Hardware library can be placed in Plan View wherever there is sufficient room to contain the object.The hardware object will attach itself if placed on a wall, door, drawer, or cabinet. Images can be placed anywhere in Plan or 3D View without regard to spacial restrictions. For more, see Pictures, Images, & Movies on page 757. Objects from the Millwork library can only be placed wherever there is sufficient room to contain them.The millwork object will attach itself if placed on a wall, door, drawer, or cabinet. Items in the Terrain Library can be placed anywhere in Plan View without regard to spacial restrictions. For more, see The Terrain Library on page 494.
Library Windows can be placed without regard to spacial restrictions but must be placed into an existing wall. The library objects contained within the Search Results library are references to the original objects. Selecting and placing objects from this library is the same as placing the original.
Backdrops
Backdrops can only be changed from the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Creating Backdrops on page 120.
Molding and Profiles

Moldings can be placed through the specification dialogs of certain objects. If you would like to place a molding on a particular cabinet for example, select the cabinet and open it for specification. For more information, see The Select Library Object Dialog on page 535. If you click on a molding profile in the Selection Pane of the Library Browser then you will go into molding polyline mode, allowing you to create a molding polyline, which can be used in Plan View only. For more, see Molding Polylines on page 485.
Textures
Textures on objects can be changed or added whenever an object is open for specification. The Materials tab of every specification dialog allows you to change the texture that appears on an object in Render View with the Select Material dialog.
548
Displaying Library Objects
In Plan View
All library objects except Textures and Backdrops are displayed in Plan View. Library objects are represented by 2D CAD Blocks that resemble the size and shape of the object in 3D. For information on how to change the 2D Block that represents an object, see 2D Block on page 794. As with other architectural objects, library objects in Plan View will display acording to the settings for their layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. Each library category has its own layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. You can change the layer for a library object by opening it for specification
with the Open Object edit button. Find the Layer field and enter a layer number or press the Select button to designate a layer using the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 128.
Render Views
All library objects, except CAD Blocks display in 3D and Render Views. Images will always rotate to face the camera in 3D and Render Views. For information on how to avoid this, see Non-Rotating Images on page 467. Terrain objects can be viewed in 3D only when a terrain perimeter exists. For more, see Terrain Perimeter on page 492.
Selecting Library Objects

Click on a library object while in Select Objects mode to select it, or right-click on the object in any mode. Continue to hold down the Shift key and click on individual objects to include or exclude them from the selection set.
Multiple Objects
Multiple objects may be selected and moved, copied or deleted as a group. Select the first object, then hold down the Shift key and click on objects to add or subtract them from the selection set. This can be done in Plan View or in any 3D view. In Plan View you may also click the Select Objects button, hold Shift down the key and drag a marquee (selection box) around the group of objects.
549
Libraries
Displaying Library Objects
Deleting Library Objects

You can delete a library object in any view. Select the object(s) and click the Delete edit button, or press the Del key on your keyboard.
Deleting Built-in Fixtures and Appliances

A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or drawer. It can be resized or deleted the same as any other face item in the Cabinet Specification dialog. For more information, see Cabinet Front Tab on page 456.
Copying Library Objects

You can copy a library object in Plan Views just like other objects, and in 3D Views. In Plan View: Select the library object(s). Click the Copy edit button. If Plan View is active, click to place the copy. If the object(s) need to be copied at a specified distance, you can use the Point-to-Point Move tool for more accuracy. For more information, see Point-to-Point Move on page 714. Select the object, and click the Replicate Object edit button. For more information, see Replicate Object on page 720. In a 3D View: Select the object to be copied, click the Copy edit button and drag your cursor from the center handle to create a new copy. Release the mouse button when the copy is located properly. This is especially useful in elevation or cross section views, since it provides good control of relative positioning. Select the object in 3D View, click the Copy edit button or select Edit >Copy, and click in 3D View to place the object. Select the object in 3D View, click the Copy edit button, toggle to Plan View and choose Edit> Paste. Click in Plan View to place the copy. This method also works to copy from one plan to the next.
Moving Library Objects

You can move library objects in Plan View and 3D views. Some 3D views will restrict the movement to one or two directions. Select the object(s). Grab the center Move handle and drag the object(s) to the new location. To move the object(s) freely, select
550
Resizing Library Objects
grab the center Move object(s).
handle and drag the
Resizing Library Objects

Fixture and furniture objects may be resized to any size up to 2000 inches, down to 1 inch. To make all objects in the Fixture or Furniture Libraries resizable: 1. Double-click the Select Objects button to access the Plan Defaults dialog. Select the Fixture/Furniture resize check box. Click OK.
By Dragging
When all five handles appear, the library object may be resized by dragging. To resize by dragging: 1. 2. 3. Select the library object. Grab any of the outside handles and drag in or out. The object will be resized.
2. 3.
With Typed-in Values

To resize using typed-in values: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the object, click the Open Object edit button. The Library Object Specification dialog will open. Select the General tab and enter new values for object height, width, etc. Click OK to exit the dialog and resize the object.
Editing Library Objects

Symbols vs. Native Objects
A symbol is an object that is based upon a 3D .dxf or .dwg file that has been imported into Chief Architect. The Library Browser contains many examples of symbols that can be placed in a plan. Native objects are those which were placed into the plan using Chief Architects standard
551
Libraries
the object(s), hold down the Ctrl key, then
tools such as Doors , Windows , and Cabinets . Native objects do not have a 3D .dxf or .dwg file associated with them and are not symbols.
Architectural Blocks
If you have the Full version of Chief Architect, clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Architectural Blocks library will open the Architectural Block Specification dialog.
Open Object
Any object, including most library objects, can be edited by opening it for specification. Select the object and click the Open Object edit button (or double-click on the object in Select Object mode) to open the specification dialog for that type of object. For example, selecting a base cabinet from the library in Plan View and clicking the Open Object
Base Cabinet Specification dialog for
1 2
edit button will open the
that object, just as it would for base cabinets created with the Base Cabinet tool.
box to display the boundary that contains the Architectural Block in Plan View.
1 Display Bounding Box - Check this
Open Symbol
When a symbol is selected the Open Symbol edit button will appear. Clicking this button will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected symbol. Any changes made will affect only the selected symbol. For more information on the Open Symbol edit button, see Open Symbol on page 805. The Symbol Specification dialog has much in common with the Create Symbol Wizard. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
you would like all of the objects within the Architectural Block to reside on the same layer as the Architectural Block itself.
2 Use Block Layer - Check this box if
Backdrops
Backdrops cannot be opened for specificaiton, they can only be selected from the 3D Preferences dialog. For more information, see Creating Backdrops on page 120.
Cabinets
Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Cabinet Modules library will open the Cabinet Specification dialog for that particular
552
Editing Library Objects
If a cabinet is selected and the Open Symbol edit button appears, clicking it will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected cabinet. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Images
Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Image library will open the Image Specification dialog. For more information, see Image Specification Dialog on page 764.
CAD Blocks
Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the CAD Blocks library will open the CAD Block Specification dialog. For more on CAD Blocks, see CAD Block Specification Dialog on page 729.
Terrain Library
Objects added to the Terrain library are group selected and saved. Once they are in the plan, they become separate terrain objects which can be individually selected and opened for specification. Terrain Features will open the Terrain Feature Specification dialog, Roads will open the Road Specification dialog and so on. For more information, see The Terrain Library on page 494.
Doors & Doorways

Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Doors and Doorways libraries will open the Door Specification dialog. For more information, see The Door Specification Dialog on page 221. If a door or doorway is selected and the Open Symbol edit button appears, clicking it will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected door or doorway. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Textures Library
Textures cannot be opened for specification, they can be applied to materials. For more information, see Define Materials Dialog on page 558.
Electrical
Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Electrical library will open the Electrical Service Specification dialog. For more information, see Electrical Service Specification Dialog on page 430.
Windows Library
Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from the Window library will open the Window Specification dialog. For more information, see Window Specification Dialog on page 252.
553
Libraries
cabinet type. For more information, see Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 453.
If an electrical object is selected and the Open Symbol edit button appears, clicking it will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected electrical object. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
If a window is selected and the Open Symbol edit button appears, clicking it will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected window. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
categories will open a unique specification dialog. For more information, see Library Object Specification Dialog on page 554. If a library object from any of these categories is selected and the Open Symbol edit button appears, clicking it will open the Symbol Specification dialog for the selected library object. For more information see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Furniture, Fixtures, Geometric Shapes, Hardware, & Millwork

Clicking the Open Object edit button for a selected object from any of these library
Library Objects and the Material List

Library objects are counted in a Material List. The Material List will not reflect any changes to the size or materials of any fixture or furniture object. It will list the library object as well as any comments added to the Components dialog for a library object.
Library Object Specification Dialog

Geometric Shapes Specification dialog, Hardware Specification dialog, and Millwork Specification dialog are all
The Fixture Specification dialog, Furniture Specification dialog,
the dialog that appears is determined by the type of object currently opened opened for specification. For example, selecting a library object from the Furniture (Ext) library category and clicking the Open Object edit button will open the Furniture Specification dialog.
the same. They will be referred to in the documentation as the Library Object Specification dialog. The actual name of
554
General Tab Libraries 6 4 5 7

Follow Terrain - Check this box if you would like the object to follow the surface of the terrain when it is placed outside a building.
1 2 3
1 Name - Displays the name of the

selected object.

library object is to be placed. If the layer is called NONE, the object will be located on its respective layer on the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog . You can also enter a number between 0 and 199 to place it on a CAD layer. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
5 Reset - Click to reset to the original,

unmodified size. with changes.
6 Picture of library object which updates

have the object display in this dialog in full color.
3 Height - Enter the height for the object.

Width - Enter the width of the object. Depth - Enter the depth of the object. from the floor to the bottom of the object. A value of zero will cause the object to be resting on the floor.
4 Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
555
Options Tab
reverse the library object. This would turn a right-hand refrigerator into a left-hand refrigerator, etc.
1 Reverse Item - Select the check box to
Materials Tab
The Materials tab of the Library Object Specification dialog is the same as the Materials tab on many specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
2 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the

background of the 2D symbol. Use Original Plan Colors - Select the check box to make the background white. No Fill (transparent) - Select the check box to have the 2D background transparent.
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Library Object Specification dialog is the same as the Label tab of the Cabinet Specification dialog. For more information, see Label Tab on page 461.
556
Chapter 22:
Materials
Materials
Chapter Overview
When you design a building in Chief Architect, objects are placed in Plan View that have 3D properties. These objects walls, windows, doors, cabinets, lot perimeters etc. can all be viewed in Plan View, 3D views and Render Views. The 3D model can be used for calculating material take-offs for all the objects, and records these in a Material List. Designing with objects that both look correct in 3D and calculate properly in the Material List requires that you create realistic material definitions, and then apply them to the 3D objects. 3D>Materials List> Define Materials allows you to create and redefine materials. Chief Architect comes with many material definitions, or materials, that are ready for use. Material definitions specify how objects appear in both 3D views and Render Views and can affect the calculation of the Material List. Materials may be defined in Plan View or in a 3D view.
Redefining only the visual properties of a material may create unexpected results. For example, changing the image of a brick material to represent siding will not cause the material to be considered as siding during material calculations.
Chapter Contents
Defining Materials Material Definitions Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab Editing Materials in 3D Views Exporting/Importing Material Definitions Defining the Default Materials
557
Defining Materials
Before any material can be assigned to an object it must be defined. Many materials have been supplied with the program. You can create your own unique materials or customize those provided. Materials are saved with the model that they are created in. Newly created materials can be exported for use in other models. If you redefine an existing material you have the option to update the same material within an old plan when the material is imported. To save duplication of effort, it is usually best to define commonly used materials in your template plans and update them as they are redefined. The Define Materials dialog is used to create and redefine all materials used in the model. To access the dialog select 3D> Materials> Define Materials.
Define Materials Dialog 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Group - Select the materials Group that 12
you want to view. Materials are listed in alphabetical order. Select All Materials to view all defined materials. Select a listed group to only display the materials that have been assigned to that group.
material displays in the boxes to the right of the list.
3 Click OK to save any changes made to

your materials. made during this session in the dialog and return to the current view.
4 Click Cancel to delete any changes you
2 This is the list of materials. Highlight a

material to select it. The selected
558
Material Definitions
5 Help opens the help section regarding

defining materials.
the Define Material Groups dialog where you can rename, create and remove groups. definitions from a text file. For more information, see Exporting/Importing Material Definitions on page 570. definitions to a text file. For more information, see Exporting/Importing Material Definitions on page 570. The preview window on top shows how the material will display in 3D views. The bottom preview shows how the texture will display in Render Views. If the words "No Texture" appears, this means that either a texture has not been assigned to the material or the texture file could not be found on your system. In either case, the material will be displayed in render views as a solid color.
6 Edit opens the Define Material

dialog for the selected material.
Material dialog to create a new, blank material with the system default specifications.
11 Import - Click to import material
7 New - Click to open the Define
8 Copy - Click to create a copy of the

Define Material dialog to change the
currently selected material. Use the
specification. the list. If the material is being used in the model, the program will not allow you to delete it.
9 Delete - Click to delete a material from
10 Groups can be defined to organize the
materials within the plan. Click to open
Select a material from the Define Materials dialog and click Edit. The Define Material dialog opens. There are five tabs used to specify the material and organize the information used to define materials.
559
Materials
12 Export - Click to export material
General Tab
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
The information on the General tab varies greatly from one material to the next. this field you can redefine the name of the material being edited. If you rename the material it does not create a new material, it redefines the existing material. the material appears. This color displays in 3D views and in Render Views if no texture has been selected. Click on the color to open the Windows Color dialog which allows you to select a new color. For more information, see Windows Standard Color Dialog on page 15. lines appears here. Click in the box to open the Color dialog which allows you to
1 The name of the material appears. In
select a new color. Lines are only used with patterns in 3D views and are not used in Render Views. For more information, see Windows Standard Color Dialog on page 15. to specify the amount of contrast between surfaces at different angles to each other in 3D views. The farther to the right the slide bar is set, the more contrast you will see. This setting has no effect on Render Views. The following is a picture showing the same curved wall view with three different contrasts (combined using a separate graphics program). Notice how the lowest contrast at the top appears almost flat, while the highest contrast on the bottom is sharp.
4 Shading Contrast - Use the slider bar
2 Material Color - The current color of
3 Line Color - The color of the pattern
560
a strip or siding pattern, this number represents the width of the material. Low Contrast Note: the Height - Overlap Amount = Exposure of the material. Length - Define a length dimension for the pattern. This value typically refers to the Pattern across the screen view. Thickness - Specify a thickness for a material such as Tile. This information does not typically effect the display of the material but is used for material list calculations. Depth - Specify a depth for the material such as brick. This information does not typically effect the display of the material but is used for material list calculations. material will look in 3D views. It updates as you change the material definition.
High Contrast
5 This area displays a preview of how the
Size - Some patterns are defined by relative size. Enter a number here. The number does not have any units, it is more like a scaling factor. Joint Width - Enter a value for joint width between pieces of the material. This does not draw the joint any wider, but the information is used by the program when counting pieces of tile or brick. Mortar Width - Enter a value for the mortar joints in a brick or block pattern. This does not draw the mortar any wider, but the information is used by the program when counting pieces of bricks or block. Overlap Amt - Enter the amount that a material overlaps itself, such as lap siding. Note: the Height - Overlap Amount = Exposure of the material. Angle - Certain patterns may be rotated to display with a different orientation.
defined in this field. Select the group from the pull down list. You can add Groups as you need them in the Define Material Groups dialog. defined by the program. Some types are associated with patterns. The Type classification can define how the material is calculated in the Material List. For more information, see Types on page 562. several additional edit boxes may appear in the dialog. Height - Define a height dimension for the Material. This value may be restricted to a ratio of another dimension. When applied to
6 Group - The name of the group can be
7 Type - This is the list of material types
8 Depending on the Type selected,
561
Materials
Normal Contrast
Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is used to describe the repeat of the pattern across the width of the material. i.e. A 13" wide siding with an overlap amount of 1" and a grouping of 3 calculates materials based on a 12" coverage and a repeat line pattern of 4". DXF Code - This field holds up to five characters that display at the end of the layer names used when exporting a 3D DXF file.
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D views. The height, or separation of the lines, and the angle can be specified. The Material List calculates lineal footage based on the height of the strip and the surface area being covered. Overlap is subtracted from the height to get the exposure of the material. Grouping can be used to model a material that has a repeating pattern across its width. Sheet - This does not show a pattern. If a sheet material is applied to a wall or floor surface, the Material List calculate the number of sheets needed. If a sheet material is applied to a Library object such as chair, the Material List does not calculate it. Gap - This does not show a pattern. Specify gap to a material to create an Air Gap between materials as in the case of a wall layer definition. This would be the same as defining no material at all. This does not go to the Material List. Area - This does not generate a pattern. The Material List calculates surface area. In the case of walls it is the area of the vertical surfaces. Volume - This does not generate a pattern. The Material List calculates cubic feet. Concrete - This does not generate a pattern. The Material List calculates cubic yards or cubic meters. When you apply this to a floor platform, the thickness is defined as four inches, by default. Tile - This produces a grid-like tile pattern. The Material List calculates the number of units based on the total surface area, exactly as for bricks. Shingles - This produces a pattern similar to the brick pattern, but you are able to define
Types
Every Material is classified by Type. The Type defines how the material is calculated in the Material List. Some Types are associated with patterns but not every Type is associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type is calculated in the Material List. Following are the available Types and their characteristics: Framing - These types are used by the program to estimate stick framing quantities if they are applied to the main layer of a wall layer definition. Brick - Displays a typical brick course pattern. The height and length of the brick can be specified. This can be specified for anything using this type of layout, including plywood with staggered joints. The Material List calculates the number of bricks (by height and length) which fit on the total surface area of the defined object. For a wall, the surface area is used. For a full masonry wall with two layers of brick, be sure to define the wall as having two layers to get the right count. You can define the mortar width which enables the program to do an accurate count of bricks.
562
an overlap amount. The Material List calculates the number of shingles required to cover the surface area. Flooring - This does not produce a pattern. The Material List calculates the total surface area. Shakes - This produces a pattern to represent wood shingles. The Material List calculates the number of shingles required to cover the surface area. Herringbone - This produces a Herringbone pattern. Height and width are restricted to a 2:1 ratio. The Material List calculates the number of units required to cover the surface area. Octagon - This produces a tile pattern of octagons and small squares. The size specified is the size of the small squares between the octagons. The octagon resizes proportionally. The Material List calculates the number of square and octagonal tiles required to complete the pattern. Hexagon - This produces a hexagon pattern. The Material List calculates the number of units required to cover the area of the object. Parquet - This produces a parquet wood floor pattern of small squares. The Material List calculates the required number of parquet units. Sand - This produces a pattern similar to stucco. The density or frequency of the dots is definable. The Material List does not calculate this material Type. Earth - This produces a 2D hatch, that represents earth in a Section View. The Material List does not calculate this material Type.
Stars - This produces a star pattern. The Material List does not calculate this material Type. Custom - If you select a pattern type from a PAT file, the materials is automatically defined as Custom regardless of the pattern style. Custom materials are calculated in the Material List as area.
563
Materials
Pattern Tab
1 2
3 4 5 6
2D surface patterns can be used as a visual tool in 3D views. When a Cross Section/ Elevation View or Overview is generated, the pattern helps define what material is being used. Patterns that are associated with Types, are used by the program to generate accurate take-off quantities for the Material List. Patterns are not used in Render Views.
Select Pattern - Click to select a Pattern File that has not been defined by Chief Architect. Pattern files, which are files with a .pat extension, can come from a variety of sources and can be saved on your hard drive. Once you have selected a pattern file, use the Entries menu to pick a hatch pattern from the file.
1 The name of the Material Definition

appears in this field. the 3D view. The pattern does not appear in a Render View. The preview updates to show any changes.
4 Pattern File - The name of the current

pattern file is listed here. define more than one hatch pattern. Individual patterns are defined with names that appear in the Entries list. Use the menu to select a entry from the pattern file. The selected pattern appears in the preview window. If the pattern displays as black the pattern repeats too often and the number in this field should be increased.
2 This is the preview of the material in
5 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
pattern from the pull down list. The Pattern Type: defines how the material is calculated in the Material List. Only Chief Architect Pattern Types are figured in the Material List. If a PAT file has been defined, the pattern type is listed as Custom.
3 Pattern Type - Select a Chief Architect
6 Scale - Rescale the pattern if necessary.
564
Texture Tab
1 2 Materials
selected texture. The values are in inches (or mm).
3 5
4 6
Textures can be applied to materials. Textures affect how a material appears in a Render View. Transparency information contained on the alpha channel of a texture will be used in Render View. Textures do not show up in any other 3D view and they do not affect the Material List. displays, and can be renamed here if desired. Renaming a material does not create a new material it just changes the name of an existing material.
4 Ratio - Adjust the ratio or scaling of the
In this example, the bitmap shown is mapped to a 96" x 96 area. If the surface being rendered is larger than this Ratio, the surface will have "tiles" that are 42" x 42" of the assigned bitmap. If it is smaller, only a portion of the texture is shown. Select the Stretch to Fit check box to have the texture image stretch to cover each surface it is applied to.
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if they are mapped to a surface using a different aspect ratio than they were originally created with.
1 The name of the selected material
file name of the selected texture. It is recommended that your texture files reside in the Textures subdirectory of the Chief Architect directory, but textures can be stored anywhere on your system.
2 The selected texture displays here. 3 Texture File - Displays the path and
565
Rotate Angle - Allows you to specify how the texture is rotated on the surface. color to represent the material in 3D views that are not rendered. The program
averages the color of all pixels to come up with a good average color for the material. select a texture for the material. This accesses the Textures folder in the Library Browser.
5 Select Color Using Texture - Selects a
6 Click the Select Texture button to
Render Tab
1 2 3 5 4
The Render tab controls how the material appears in Render Views and exported VRML files. The preview window displays the material as it is rendered on a panel that is approximately 3 x 6. As any of the render properties are changed, the preview will be updated to show how the new material would look.
material appears. It can be used to get the desired appearance relative to other materials being used. material when it is rendered with a point or spot light source on it. Shiny materials appear to have a bright white spot on them which simulates reflection of light. the material. Most materials are set to Opaque, but Partial can be used to simulate a glass surface that you can see through. Specifying materials with transparency can
3 Brightness - Controls how bright the
4 Shininess - Controls the sheen of the
Simple editing options or the Advanced editing options. The Simple options are displayed on this tab.
1 The name of the material appears here. 2 Use the radio buttons to select the
5 Transparency - Controls the opacity of
566
slow down rendering but it should have a minimal effect.
Render Tab - Advanced
surface appears when illuminated by a positional light source. It must be used together with the specular value to simulate light being reflected from a surface. Adjusting the shininess value controls the size of the reflected highlight on a surface. material appears without regard to the current scenes lighting. It can be used to simulate surfaces that are glowing with their own light, such as the glass on a light fixture. range from completely opaque to completely transparent.
4 Shininess - Controls how shiny the
5 Emmissive - Controls how bright a
1 2 3 4 5 6
Advanced options provide more control over the appearance of the rendered material. If any Advanced value is changed, the Render tab displays the Advanced options when you edit that material. You can always change back to the Simple settings. The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used together to modify a materials brightness. material appears when only ambient light is present. material appears when illuminated by a light source. The Specular and Shininess settings are used together to modify a materials shininess. material appears when illuminated by a positional light source. It simulates the reflection of light off a surface.
6 Transp - Controls the transparency
You should note that the material Render Properties are dependent on the Render settings in the Preferences dialog and the lights that have been placed in the model. To get proper lighting effects on an object, use at least one point or spot light. For these highlights to appear on large flat surfaces, select the Use Triangles and the Use Multipass options on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog.
1 Ambient - Controls how bright the 2 Diffuse - Controls how bright the
Raytrace Tab
For more information, see Raytrace Tab on page 631.
3 Specular - Controls how bright the
567
Materials
Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab

When you open the specification dialog for almost any object you see a Material tab. The Material tab is where specific materials are assigned to the selected object(s) or parts of the object(s). Once a Material has been defined it can be applied to the object.
2 3
The Material tab shown above is used to define the materials for an object. The tree view on the left contains all of the different parts of the object that can be defined with a unique material. Some objects will only have a single material that can be assigned to them while other more complex objects can have many. Some objects will contain additional items, when a symbol has been attached to the parent object for example. The contained items will have their own separate set of materials which will appear in the tree. Clicking on the plus or minus symbol will either expand or contract the list of materials. currently selected and can have its material modified. color, pattern and the texture of the material that has been assigned to the selected item. If "No Texture" appears in the preview window, this means that either the material has no texture assigned to it or the texture file could not be found on the system.
Select Material dialog. Select a material in the dialog and click OK. That material is assigned to the selected item. You can also create new material or modify existing ones from the Select Material dialog.
2 The two boxes on the right display the
3 Click Select Material to open the
1 Click on an item in the tree view. The

highlighted item is the one that is
Select another item to change its material or select OK to return to the active View.
568
Editing Materials in 3D Views
Editing Materials in 3D Views

There are a number of different ways to alter the appearance of objects in 3D and Render Views. It is important to be familiar with these options and how they affect other objects.
Adjust Material Definition

The Adjust Material Definition tool can be used to select any surface in a 3D or Render View and modifying its currently assigned material. Using the Adjust Material Definition tool will open up the Define Material dialog for the material which is currently assigned to the selected surface. Changing the material definition affects all objects that are currently using that same material and not only for the selected object.
Object Specification Dialog

You can open the specification dialog for almost all objects from any 3D or Render View. Simply double click on the desired object to open its specification dialog. For most objects, you can also single click on the object to select it and then click on the Open Object edit button that appears on the edit toolbar. From the object specification dialog you can reassign any material that has been assigned to the object. When a material has been reassigned, its appearance will change in the current view. For many objects, you can select multiple objects first and then open the specification dialog. This can be a quick way to change many material assignements at the same time.
Apply Texture to Material

The Apply Texture to Material tool allows you to apply new textures to materials used in render views. The Library Browser will open and the desired texture can be selected. Then simply click on the surface where you wish the new texture to be applied. You can keep clicking on surfaces until you have applied to texture everywhere desired. You must use the Apply Texture to Material tool carefully since applying the new texture not only changes the texture on the selected surface, but it redefines the material which is currently being used and will effect all objects which are currently using that material. It is equivalent to using the Adjust Material Definition tool and changing the texture assigned within the Define Material dialog. If you want to apply a new material to a specific object in a 3D or Render view, use the Material Painter tool instead.
Define Materials Dialog

You can open the Define Materials dialog at any time while in any 3D or Render View to modify the appearance of any selected material in the Define Material dialog. Any adjustments you make to a material definition will effect all objects which are currently using the modified material. Care should be used when modifying materials using this technique because the changes can effect many objects at the same time.
569
Materials
This tool can also be used by opening up the Library Browser while in a Render View and selecting the desired texture to apply. If materials are assigned correctly, this tool can be very useful for experimenting with different textures to get a more realistic View.
wish to change. The current material will be reassigned for the selected object only. You can continue to select surfaces to change the material settings for other objects. Using the Material Painter tool is the equivalent of opening up the selected object for specification and changing the selected material for the selected part of the object. For example, if you select a material and then select the counter top surface on a cabinet, this is the same as opening the Cabinet Specification dialog, clicking on the material tab, selecting the countertop item in the list of materials, clicking the Select Material button, and selecting the desired new material.
Material Painter
The Material Painter tool allows you to apply a new material to a selected object in a 3D or Render View. Click the Material Painter tool to open the Select Material dialog. Select the material which you wish to apply to one or more objects that are currently visible. Then select on the surface which currently has the material you
Exporting/Importing Material Definitions

Material Definitions are stored with the plan file and can be saved with the plan. As new materials are created within plan files, the export and import functions of Chief Architect can be used to share Material Definitions between plan files. specified directory that can be imported by other plan files.
Import Material Definitions

Select the Import button from the Define Material dialog or select File> Import> Material Definition. The Import Material Definition File dialog will open. Browse your directories and find a .dat file that contains exported material definitions. Select OK. The Material Definition Import Options dialog will open.
Export Material Definitions

Select the Export button from the Define Material dialog or select File> Export> Material Definition. The Export Material Definition File dialog will open. Select a directory and name the .dat file. The program will create a .dat file in the
570
Defining the Default Materials
Material Definition Import Options
Both of these options will add any defined materials that have a unique name. Ignore Duplicate Materials - This option will not update a defined material of the same name.
Replace Duplicate Materials - This option will update defined materials that have the same name as the one being imported.

When you set your defaults in Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> General Materials, you are setting various default values for objects. One of the default settings is the material assignment for the objects. Not every object can have its default materials defined ahead of time. For example, stairs do not have a default setup. You must specify the materials for the stair parts in the Default Materials dialog. Once you create a stair you can open the Stair Specification dialog and change materials for the various parts. To open the dialog select Edit> Default Settings> Material Defaults> General Materials and assign materials to many objects in the Default Materials dialog.
Default Materials Dialog
This dialog functions similarly to the Material tabs found throughout the specification dialogs. Select an item from the list on the left. Click Select Material or one of the preview boxes to open the Select Material dialog. Select a material from the dialog and click OK. Repeat the steps for the other objects in
571
Materials
the list.When you are finished, click OK to return to the current view.
572
Chapter 23:
Zoom & View Tools
Chapter Overview
The zoom tools are used to position the view. To work on a specific area, it may be necessary to zoom in so that the entire screen is filled by only a single room. At other times the entire plan may need to be visible. On large plans, it is helpful to have a small birds eye view of the entire plan up in one corner. All of the zoom modes may be activated through the Window menu or by clicking on an icon. It is faster to use the toolbar or the keyboard shortcut when one is available. Aerial View can only be accessed through the menu. Zoom tools are not available in the Render View, but you can change the Field of View for a similar effect. For more information, see Field of View on page 609. In addition to zooming, there are several ways to pan across the screen, shifting the visible part of the plan slightly while still maintaining the same zoom factor.
Chapter Contents
Zoom Tools Fill Window Undo Zoom Aerial View Panning the Display Tiling Views Cascade Arrange All Swapping Views Closing Views
Zoom Tools
Zoom - This is used to magnify any given area on the plan or 3D view. Click the Zoom tool, then click with the left mouse button and hold it down while dragging a box around an area on screen. When you release the mouse, the selected
573
Zoom Tools
area expands to fill the screen. When the zoom is done, whatever mode was active prior to selecting the Zoom tool automatically becomes active again. If another zoom is needed, click the Zoom tool again. Zoom In - Click to zoom in to screens center by a factor of two. Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from screens center by a factor of two. Undo Zoom - Reverses the last zoom.
Fill Window - Places all the visible items on the screen.
Zooming With the Mouse Wheel

Using the mouse wheel will allow you to zoom in and out in Plan and 3D views. Scrolling the mouse wheel zooms in and out, centering on the location of your cursor and changing the zoom by a factor of about 10%. Depending on the configuration of your mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the control key while turning the mouse wheel.
Fill Window
Click the Fill Window button (or press the F6 key) to view everything on screen that is visible. If you are zoomed in so close that only a portion of the view displays on screen, clicking the Fill Window button will zoom back so that the entire view fits on the screen. If you are zoomed out so far that the entire view is smaller than the screen, clicking the Fill Window button will zoom closer so that the entire view fills the screen.
Undo Zoom
Click the Undo Zoom reverse the last Zoom button to operation.
Note: The Undo , Redo not undo/redo zooms. buttons will
The Undo Zoom button only works to undo a single, most recent Zoom .
Zoom and Undo Zoom are also available through the contextual menu. For more information, see Edit Preferences Panel on page 90.
574
Aerial View
Aerial View
The Aerial View feature is available from the Window menu in Plan View. Selecting this tool opens a small Aerial View of the entire plan which facilitates zooming and panning of the Plan View window. The Aerial View has no scroll bars or maximize button, and always stays on top of any other window. 1. Before creating an Aerial View, maximize your Plan View window.
2.
Select Window> Aerial View from the menu. A small overview picture is created in the upper left corner of the Plan View. You can move and resize the Aerial View as you would any window.
3.
To use the Aerial View, click the Zoom button and drag a marquee around the area inside the Aerial View that you wish to zoom in on. When you release the mouse, the
575
Zoom Tools
working plan window will be zoomed to the specified area. Since the Aerial View remains on top and always displays the entire plan, it is easy to maintain overall perspective while zooming into different areas without continually using the Fill Window button. The Aerial View makes it is easy to switch from one close-up view to another. When you are finished, close the Aerial View as you would any other window.
If the plan is not maximized, the Aerial View may become active. You will know that the Aerial View is active by any of the following clues: 1. 2. The Aerial View title bar changes color The contents of the Aerial View may be edited in the Aerial View itself.
If this occurs, activate the plan, then maximize the plan. After the plan is maximized, the Aerial View functions normally.
Panning the Display

There are three methods of panning or moving the display around the screen without changing the zoom factor. One method is to use the scroll bars across the right and bottom edges of the window. 1. Drag the square button in the bar itself in order to pan a larger distance. Click the end arrow keys on the scroll bars to shift the display in 12" increments. Click the arrow key which points in the direction you want to pan. bar. They also shift the display according to the number of inches defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Note: The keyboard arrow keys do not pan a Perspective or Render View. They rotate the camera about the focal point.
Finally, the mouse can be used in combination with the Ctrl key. This is probably the easiest method. 1. Hold down the Ctrl key, click on a point in the view and drag the cursor to the new location for this point. The whole display shifts in the same direction and in proportion with the movement of the cursor.
2.
3.
2.
The 12" increment is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog under inches scrolled by arrow key. For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86. The arrow keys on the keyboard work exactly like clicking the arrows on the scroll
The disadvantage of this panning method is that it always causes a screen repaint. If used in a Cross section/elevation view, it takes significantly more time.
576
Tiling Views
Tiling Views
Chief Architect produces a 3D model as you draw in Plan View. This can be verified by tiling the Plan View next to a 3D view within the Chief desktop. Draw a basic wall perimeter and create a Full Overview . This produces an axonometric view of the 3D model. Select Window> Tile. The screen splits into two views: Plan View and 3D overview. To work in Plan View, click the title bar of the Plan View in order to activate that view, then proceed to draw. Note that the changes in the plan appear instantaneously in the overview window.
Tiling is a Windows function which allows you to simultaneously display all open windows. Depending on screen resolution, it is best to have no more than four open windows since they become very small. Two windows is optimal.
To exit Tile mode and resume working in the Plan View, click the Maximize button in the upper right corner of the Plan View window and the Plan View will fill the screen. Tile mode is very useful when copying objects, architectural symbols or details from one plan to another. Activate the Plan View with the object(s) to be copied, select the object(s), and click the Copy edit button. Activate the other Plan View and click to place the symbol. If the plans are not tiled, or if you need to copy an object from one floor to another, choose Edit> Paste when you have activated the Plan View you want to bring the object into. The cursor changes into the copy cursor. Click to place the object.
577
Zoom Tools
Cascade
This is a Windows function which allows you to organize open windows in a cascading pattern. Click on any visible edge to activate that window.
Arrange All
This is a Windows function which is used when several active windows have been minimized. Arrange All aligns the minimized icons in a row at the bottom of the working desktop. You can then click their minimized title bars to reactivate them or use them for Swapping Views and Closing Views.
Swapping Views
There are several ways to swap views. The Swap Views button toggles between the Plan View and the last 3D view created. It appears next to the zoom tools to the right of the toolbar. The F7 key is equivalent to the Swap Views button, as is selecting 3D> Swap Views from the menu. It is often necessary to move between other views as well. At the very bottom of the Window menu is a list of all the views currently open. Each view is identified by its name, followed by what type of view it is. Click on any view listed here to make that the active view.
Closing Views
Choose File> Close to close any view when it is no longer needed. If the view is still needed, swap to a different view without closing the current views.
578
Chapter 24:
Perspectives & Overviews
Chapter Overview
As a building is drawn in Plan View, a 3D model of the building is created. This model can be viewed at any time and allows some objects to be placed, selected, and edited. There are many types of 3D views which can be generated. Any 3D view may be shown in color or as a line drawing. The appearance of objects in 3D views can be edited, as well as the position of the camera that is being used to generate the 3D View. Render Views are similar to perspectives and Overviews, but are much more photo realistic. For more information, see Render Views on page 603. Cross Section/Elevation Views can be detailed using CAD tools and printed to scale or sent to layout. For more information, see Sending Views to Layout on page 813. You can also create a CAD Detail from any 3D view. For more information, see CAD Detail From View on page 600.
Chapter Contents
Perspective Views 3D Tools Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras Zooming in Perspective Views Overviews Displaying 3D Views Speeding up 3D View Generation Editing in a 3D or Render View Delete 3D Surface Saving 3D Cameras Remove 3D Walkthroughs Camera Specification Dialog Camera Defaults
579
Perspective Views
The Full Camera tool creates a multi-floor perspective view. It is used for both interior and exterior Perspective Views. Perspective Views will display cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell openings, or any other variation in floor and ceiling levels. Perspective views can also be used to create a Render View. The cameras can be moved, rotated, raised, lowered or have the line of sight adjusted. The default camera height, angle and move increment are defined in the Edit> Default Settings> Camera Defaults. There are two kinds of perspective cameras. The Full Camera tool creates a Perspective View of all floors in the model, while the Floor Camera creates a Perspective View of the current floor only. Each type of perspective camera view is created in the same way. The results vary depending on which perspective camera is used. To create a Perspective View: 1. Click the Full Camera button and the . Imagine that you are actually holding the camera in your hands. The field of view is set to 45 degrees which is similar to what the human eye sees or a 50mm camera lens. 2. Click in Plan View on the spot where you are standing, and drag a line in the direction you are looking. When you release the mouse button, a Perspective View will generate in a new window. Use the 2D/3D Toggle to return to the Plan View. A red camera symbol will now appear in Plan View. Tile the two views and use the camera movement tools to see how they act upon the camera.
3.
4.
Before setting up your camera, you must be familiar with the options to adjust the parameters assigned to 3D cameras. You must place the cameras correctly to take full advantage of these tools. The direction of the line defines where you are viewing. The point at which you end this line is also important if you are going to use any of the Orbit Camera tools. When you use an Orbit Camera tool in a Perspective View, the camera will rotate about the point at the end of the line that defined the angle of view. If you end that line in the middle of the object you are viewing, the camera will appear to rotate about the object and the object will remain in your view. If the line ends far short of the object, or beyond the object you may orbit the camera to such an extent that you will no longer be able to see the object that the view was focused on.
cursor will change to a camera
The crosshair marks the actual position of the cursor. Click and drag a line to define your camera angle and position. Where your line begins is the cameras position. The line that you drag will define which direction you are pointing the camera. The end of the line is the focal point of the view and the point around which the camera will rotate when it is orbited.
580
3D Tools
Floor Camera
The Floor Camera, 3D> Create View> Floor Camera, creates a Perspective View of a single floor. This camera does not show anything above the ceiling or below the floor for the current floor. It is faster to generate than a Full Camera, because less of the model is calculated.
Preferences dialog to block off the view
Unrestricted camera view.
Check Restrict Camera to Room in the 3D
into another room. Restrict Camera to Room is checked.
3D Tools
Choose from the architectural tool buttons that allow placement of Cabinets, Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows, and Corner Trim in Render Views. Click the Toggle Low Detail button to switch between High- and Low-Detail Modes. In Low-Detail Mode, the scene is drawn quickly with less detail, allowing fast editing and camera movement. For more, see Low Detail Mode on page 590. Click the Unrestricted Positioning button to allow for greater precision when editing in 3D mode. Click the Save Camera button to Saves the current camera in the plan. Saved cameras can be re-opened for later use. For more information, see Saving 3D Cameras on page 591. The Material Painter allows you to redefine the texture of a material while in a Render View. For more information, see Editing Materials in 3D Views on page 569.
581
Click the Export Picture button to save the current screen image to disk as a .bmp, .jpg, or .png file. For more information, see Exporting Picture Files on page 761. Click the Print Image button to print the current screen image. For more information, see Print Image on page 840.
Click the Edit Camera button to edit properties of the current Render camera, such as speed of movement or Field of View. For more information, see Camera Specification Dialog on page 592.
Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras

The camera functions that create both the Perspective and Render Views operate in a similar fashion. Once either of these views is created, there are many ways to manipulate the camera location, focal point, and line of site to adjust the view on screen. Camera movement is controlled in incremental steps from either the toolbar or with keyboard strokes. The distance or increment the camera will move are defined in the Camera Defaults dialog. For more information, see Camera Defaults on page 593. Each time you move the camera, the view is redrawn to reflect the camera movement. If you are using either the toolbar or keyboard to move the camera, and you have a large distance to move you can hold down the Shift key as you click a button or hit the keys on the keyboard. This will suppress the redraw of the view until the Shift key is released. Whether the movements are entered from the toolbar or the keyboard, the tools provide the ability to pivot the camera in any direction, move it orthogonally to the line of sight and rotate the camera around its focal point.
Camera Orbit Tools

Click the Camera Orbit Tools parent button to access these child tools. Orbiting the camera rotates the camera about the focal point. Orbit Camera Right - Rotates the camera to the right about the focal point. Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the camera to the left about the focal point. Orbit Camera Downward - Rotates the camera down about the focal point. The camera will not rotate below the vertical line going down from the focal point. Orbit Camera Upward - Rotates the camera up about the focal point. The camera will not rotate past the vertical line going up from the focal point. Move Camera In - Moves the position of the camera closer to the focal point along the line of sight. The camera will not rotate past the focal point using this tool.
582
Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras
Move Camera Out - Moves the position of the camera away from the focal point along the line of sight.
Move Camera Back - Moves the camera and the focal point back. Move Camera Left - Moves the camera and the focal point to the left in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. Move Camera Right - Moves the camera and the focal point to the right in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. Move Camera Up - Moves the camera and the focal point up. Move Camera Down -Moves the camera and the focal point down.
Camera Tilt Tools

Click the Camera Tilt Tools parent button to access these child tools. Tilting keeps the camera in one place and pivots the camera about its vertical or horizontal axis. This movement is similar to tilting your head up and down or turning it side-to-side. Tilt Camera Left - Turns the camera toward the left while staying in the same location. Tilt Camera Right - Turns the camera toward the right while staying in the same location. Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the camera upward while keeping it in the same location. The camera will not tilt beyond the vertical position. Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the camera downward while keeping it in the same location. The camera will not tilt beyond the vertical position.
Keyboard Camera Movements

Perspectives & Overviews Camera movement in Perspective and Render Views can be controlled by the keyboard as well as the toolbars.
F - Move camera forward. B - Move camera backward. U - Move camera up. D - Move camera down. L - Move camera left. R - Move camera right. I - Moves camera inward along the line of
Camera Move Tools

Click the Camera Move Tools parent button to access these child tools. These tools relocate the camera, while keeping the direction of the field of view in the same place. Move Camera Forward - Moves the camera and the focal point forward.
sight.
O - Move camera outward along the line of
sight.
S - Camera spins about focal point until
another key is hit. Hitting the S again will reverse the direction of the spin. This is available only in a Render View. Hitting the Esc key stops the spin.
583
Left or Right Arrow - Orbits the camera to the left or right about its focal point. Up or Down Arrow - Orbits the camera up or down about its focal point.
2.
Drag the triangular handle to rotate the direction of view around a vertical axis.
When you activate the window related to the camera, it will reflect the changes. The position of the camera is related to the model. When the camera is outside of a building it is relative to the terrain and will follow the terrain as you move the camera. When you are inside a building, the camera will go up and down stairs automatically and bounce off walls most of the time. If the camera is on an upper floor and you move the camera outside of the building, the camera will remain at the same height relative to the floor it was created on.
Moving or Rotating a Camera by Dragging in Plan

Return to Plan View without closing the Perspective or Render View. Click on the red picture of the perspective camera in the Plan View. While it is selected, you can: 1. Drag the center handle to reposition it
Zooming in Perspective Views

Although the zoom tools function normally in Perspective Views, the results obtained will sometimes be affected by perspective distortion. Perspective cameras are created with a field of view set at 45 degrees. This setting can not be changed as it can for render views. Clicking the Zoom In , Zoom Out or Fill Window buttons does not change the field of view, but instead moves the position of the camera. To view more of the room you will often need to place a new perspective camera in the plan, or select the existing camera and move it backward.
Overviews
The Floor Overview creates a single floor isometric drawing of the current floor without a roof or a ceiling. All lines are in true length but the drawing cannot be scaled. The Full Overview creates an isometric drawing of the entire model, including all the floors, ceilings and the roof. All surfaces such as roofs or ceilings can be removed from the view in order to see into the model. The Framing Overview creates an isometric drawing of the framing in the model. Framing must be built before generating a Framing Overview. The Framing Overview includes all floors, walls, roof framing and foundations. Overviews can be rotated and viewed from any angle. A special 3D Fly-by can be created using any of these views.
584
Overviews
Overviews can be printed directly or sent to the layout. If sent to the layout, the lines defining any part of the view can be modified or deleted in the layout using the Edit Layout tool. Click the Floor Overview , or Full Overview , or Framing Overview button and an overview will immediately generate in a new window.
Overviews are always created at the exact same angle. Once generated the View Angle can be adjusted to view the model from any angle. Objects can be selected and edited from any overview just like other 3D views. Overviews can also be created using the Render camera tools, although they behave differently. For more information, see Render Views on page 603.
Floor Overview
Floor Overview is an effective troubleshooting tool, since it can isolate each floor for review. Click the Floor Overview button to create an isometric drawing of the current floor. The ceiling is removed, giving a 3D view of that floor plan. To see a different floor, return to Plan View and make the other floor current before generating the Floor Overview.
585
Full Overview
Second floor.
First floor.
Foundation. (The lot perimeter was pulled back to show the footing.) Click the Full Overview button to generate an isometric drawing of the entire building. The overview will begin to generate immediately.
Framing Overview
Click the Framing Overview button to generate an isometric drawing of the entire building, displaying only framing and foundation. Framing must be built before
generating this view, otherwise the view will be empty. The overview will begin to generate immediately.
586
Overviews
Adjusting Overviews
Click the View Direction Tools parent button and then the View Angle child button to bring up the View Angle dialog. The box displays a picture of the exterior walls of the current floor as seen from the current view angle. Select the check boxes or move the slide bars to adjust the view. The picture will update to show all the adjustments being made. When satisfied, click OK to have the isometric drawing of the model adjusted to match. With the View Angle tool, an isometric drawing can be generated from any conceivable angle; From the Top (birds eye view) to an Elevation (straight on view) to the Bottom (worms eye view), and anywhere in between.
2 Use the slide bar to adjust the height to

view the model from. view is to the model.
3 Use the slide bar to adjust how close the 4 Use the slide bar to view the model
from a different direction. model from each side.
5 Select the check boxes to view the

Note: An Elevation created by turning the view is different from that created using the Cross Section/Elevation camera. The CAD tools are not accessible in this type of view.
6 The picture of single floor changes to

show results.
View Direction Tools

These toolbar buttons are present in Overviews only. View Angle - Click to open the View Angle dialog. Front View - Click for front view. Back View - Click for back view. Top View - Click for top view. Bottom View - Click for bottom view. Left Side View - Click for left side view. Right Side View - Click for right side view.
View Angle Dialog 1 2 3 4 5
1 Select the check boxes to view model

from Elevation, Top or Bottom.
Restore Original View - Click to restore the original view position.
587
Displaying 3D Views
Up to eight total 3D view windows can be open with one Plan View. A red camera symbol displays in the Plan View for each 3D view window that is open. The views are named and numbered sequentially in the order they were created. The camera symbol is an on screen reference, and does not print.
Note: An object will not show in 3D views if it has been suppressed in 3D Preferences or if its display has been turned off in the Plan View in the Layer Display Options dialog.
the 3D Preferences dialog. Then create another Overview.

Multiple check boxes can be selected by clicking the text and dragging. You can also use the Shift and Ctrl keys to modify your selections. Once selected you can toggle the check boxes for all selected items by clicking on any check box.
Color Off/On
Tools> Color Off/On and the Color toggle button control the display of color in any view (except Render Views). You can toggle between the two options. You can also set defaults which define which 3D views will be generated with colors turned on (Section/Elevations, Overview, and Perspectives) in the Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. The display of colors may or may not make the views easier to understand. You will want to experiment to see what works for you. You can then set the default Color mode for each view. Colors are used in 3D views to represent the use of different materials. The colors can be printed if you have a color printer, or can appear as shades of gray on a black and white printer. If you have assigned a bitmap to represent the texture of a material in Render Views, the program can sample that bitmap and define an approximate color to use in all other 3D views. Selecting Options> Color Off turns off color for the current window. The window will become black and white. Solid fills are
3D Display Options
From a Perspective View or Overview click the Display Options button or choose Tools> Display Options to display the 3D Display Options dialog.
Displayed 3D objects can be suppressed by unchecking the appropriate box. If an object is grayed out in the 3D Display Options dialog, it has been suppressed in the 3D Preferences dialog and cannot be viewed in the 3D view. To see the object in an Overview, close the view, select the appropriate check box on the Include tab of
588
Speeding up 3D View Generation
black, and all lines are black. The background remains as defined in the Preferences dialog. When you go to print a view, the color toggle sets the initial value of the Color or Shaded check box in the Print dialog. If Color is on and the current printer has color capabilities Color will be checked in the Print dialog. If the printer is black and white, Shaded will be checked in the Print dialog.
If Color is off, the check box will not be selected.
Changing Materials in 3D Views

From a Perspective View or Overview there are a number of ways you can change the way that objects appear. For more information, see Editing Materials in 3D Views on page 569.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

Depending on the speed of your processor and the memory of your computer, a 3D view should generate in a few seconds or less. When you have a large, complex model with a lot of interior detail, many objects, or hatch petterns with many lines, it may take a few minutes to generate a 3D view of everything in the model. While this process is happening, look at the information window in the toolbar. It will indicate that surface sorting is occurring. There are several ways to speed up the generation time of your views. subdivided into vertical panels - and View Panel Factor 2 determines how many surfaces are contained in each vertical panel. The default settings are reasonable for most computers, but with some experimentation you can find the optimal solution for each plan on your computer.
Suppress Objects in 3D Views

The Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog has an option where you can include only those objects you wish to see in every new 3D view created. The surfaces for objects not included are not calculated, which speeds up the 3D generation process. Suppressed objects cannot be displayed using the Layer Display Options dialog, but these settings can be changed. If you are using many patterns, turning them off may have a big affect on drawing speed. You can turn patterns off until you are ready to print or send to layout.
Change View Panel Factors

The 3D view is drawn using an adaptive method that divides the screen into horizontal and vertical panels. to save time. The Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog has two tuning factors that allow you to adjust the way the adaptive method works. The View Panel Factor 1 determines how many surfaces are drawn for each horizontal panel. Each horizontal panel is then
589
Halt Generation with Esc Key

Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the modeling process at any point and display the incomplete model as is. This is particularly helpful when you just need to reorient a model on the screen for a specific angle or view. The Esc option allows you to place the view quickly, then use Window> Refresh Display to redraw the model with all 3D Faces intact. You may use this option with Elevation
Views, Perspective Views, Render Views and Overviews.
Low Detail Mode

You may also wish to switch to Low Detail mode. Low Detail mode will suppress patterns, and draw 3D approximations of some objects, allowing for a quicker screen redraw time and quicker camera maneuverability. For more information, see Low Detail Mode on page 590.
Editing in a 3D or Render View

Selecting Objects in 3D Views
In a 3D view, you can select and edit objects. Click the Select Objects button, (or Edit> Select Objects) to get in the Select Objects mode. In this mode you can click on the surface of an object and handles will appear which can be used to move and resize the object. Double-click on the object or click the Open Object edit button to display the appropriate specification dialog for the object. When you select an object, you will see handles and a handle surface. The handle surface is a red rectangle at the perimeter of the object which indicates the overall height along with either the width or depth of the object. Normally five handles display. The top and bottom handles raise and lower the heights of the object's top and bottom. Side handles move the object's sides in and out, changing its width or depth. The middle handle moves the object horizontally or vertically, changing its position but not its size. All moving or resizing is in the plane of the handle surface. By default movement is restricted to one inch (10 mm) increments, but this restriction can be toggled to allow 1/ 16th inch (1 mm) increments with the Unrestricted Positioning tool. This tool can also be enabled by holding down the Ctrl key while you move the object. You cannot move an object directly towards or away from the camera, it will be restricted to the handle surface plane. If the program does not allow you to move or resize the object due to an obstruction, select the object, hold down the Ctrl key, and move or resize it as desired. If Furniture/Fixture Resize Enable is cleared in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a single handle displays for furniture and stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this case the object can only be moved.
590
Delete 3D Surface
Dimension lines are displayed to help you resize an object and determine its height. These are more visible when the color is turned off . Due to movement restrictions Cross Section/ Elevation Views are sometimes the best for editing. Editing in a 3D view is a convenience. All of the same functions are available, with more accuracy, in a Plan View or from the object's specification dialog. When several Plan Views and 3D views display, changes made in one automatically
display in the others. If you have major changes to make to your plan, it is faster to make them with as few windows as possible displaying that plan.
Creating Objects in 3D Views

You can also place Windows, Doors, Cabinets, Electrical objects, Corner Trim, and most Library objects directly into a 3D view. To do this, choose the appropriate tool from the toolbar and click in the 3D view. You can then edit the object to ensure proper size and placement.
Delete 3D Surface
Individual surfaces can be temporarily removed from any 3D view. Once removed in one view, it will be removed in all subsequent 3D views, but it is not permanently removed from the model. If you select 3D> Remove 3D, or Rebuild Walls/ Floors/Ceilings , the model will be rebuilt with all surfaces intact. Perspectives & Overviews Click the Delete Surface button then click on any surface to remove it. Continue clicking on surfaces to remove them from the View. Select another tool to end the process. Once the Delete Surface tool is active, you can click the Delete Surface button to replace up to the last 32 removals one at a time. You can only replace surfaces in the View that they were removed from.
Saving 3D Cameras
You can save any Perspective or Render camera either by opening the camera in Plan view and hitting the Save button, or by clicking the Save Camera button while in a 3D View. When a 3D or Render camera is saved and not activated, it appears as a green, inactive camera in the Plan View. To activate a saved camera, either select the camera and open it for specification and choose Activate, or select the camera and choose the Activate Camera edit button. Overview cameras cannot be saved.
591
Remove 3D
Choose 3D> Remove 3D from Plan View to close all 3D views associated with the current plan file and remove 3D data from memory. Whenever you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings or Rebuild Roof Planes, all 3D views are automatically closed.
Walkthroughs
Any Perspective or Overview can be used to record a walkthrough. You can record these as standard .avi files or as a Chief Architect .wlk file. For more information, see Walkthroughs on page 766.
Camera Specification Dialog

1 2
3
5 7 9
4 6 8 10
This dialog is accessible in Full Camera , Cross Section / Elevation , Wall Elevation Views, or Render Views . When a 3D View is active, click the 2D/3D Toggle button, or tile your windows so that both the Plan View and the 3D View are visible. Select the red camera symbol that represents the cameras location in Plan View and click
the Open Object
Camera Specification dialog opens.
edit button. The
This dialog is also accesible in 3D Views by clicking the Edit Camera button. Use the This Camera tab of the Camera Specification dialog to change settings for the selected camera view only. Use the Default tab of the Camera Specification
592
Camera Defaults
dialog to adjust the settings for all future camera views. Depending on the type of camera view in use, not all of the settings may be editable. In addition, some settings only affect some types of views.
era lens angle in Render Views. This value does not affect Perspective Views. For more information, see Field of View on page 609.
6 Field of View - This adjusts the Cam-
1 This Camera - This tab makes changes

to the selected camera. all new cameras.
7 Tilt Angle - Enter a value for this

specific camera. A tilt angle of zero is horizontal. Minus 10 degrees (-10) would tilt the camera 10 degrees downward, and 90 degrees would tilt it to look straight up. the camera does not display an object within this distance.
2 Default - This tab defines settings for

The settings on the two tabs are identical. many inches the camera will move each time you direct it to move right, left, forwards or backwards. For interior views a small number is good, but for exterior views you may want a larger increment. many degrees the camera rotates each time you direct it to move. A setting of 90 degrees would make a complete revolution with just four rotations. height that the camera is above the floor level for the current floor.
3 Inches Each Move - Controls how
8 Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that 9 Remove Wall Within - Removes the
Both of these distances are measured as a radius from the Camera position. to display a wall which is inside the Remove Wall Within range if the camera is pointing through an opening such as a door or window.
10 Unless Opening - Select the check box
5 Height Above Floor - This defines the
To see the new settings, return to the edited view (Use the F7 key, the Swap Views button, or click on the camera name from the list at the bottom of the Window menu).
Camera Defaults
To access camera defaults go to the Default tab of the Camera Specification dialog, select Edit> Default Settings> Camera Defaults from the menu, or double click the Render Tools parent button. The settings on the Camera Defaults dialog are the same as those on the Default tab of the Camera Specification dialog. They define camera position, how the camera move with the tools on the Camera toolbar, and how the camera clips and captures views.
593
4 Degrees Each Rotate - Defines how
view of walls with this distance of the camera.
Default Tab
1
3
2 4
many inches the camera move each time you direct it to move right, left, forwards or backwards. For interior views a small number is good, but for exterior you may want a larger increment. many degrees the camera rotates each time you direct it to. A setting of 90 degrees would rotate to each wall in a room with just four rotates. height that the camera is above the floor level for the current floor.
1 Inches Each Move - Controls how
the Render Cameras field of vision in angular degrees. the camera does not display an object within this distance.
4 Field of View (Degrees) - This defines 5 Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that 6 Remove Wall Within - Removes the
2 Degrees Each Rotate - Defines how
view of walls within this distance of the camera. Both of these distances are measured as a radius from the Camera position.
3 Height Above Floor - This defines the
594
Chapter 25:
Cross Section/ Elevation Views
Chapter Overview
From the 3D model, you can define and create Cross Section/Elevation Views that detail the structure of the model. Cross Section/Elevation Views can be saved and the program will update them as the model is edited. You can also add information to the Cross Section/Elevation Views using Dimensions, Text, and other CAD tools. The program saves this information with the view, although it may need to be repositioned if the model has changed. The active connection between the model and Cross Section/Elevation Views can save you a lot of time once your drawings have been sent to the layout facility. Sections and elevations are the only 3D views which can have information added using the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully annotated and dimensioned and then printed to scale. A Section/Elevation which is printed directly from the view can be printed to multiple pages if the scale requires it. Cross Section/Elevation Views can be in either Architectural mode or CAD mode, like Plan Views. Many of the Build menu tools available in Plan Views are also available in CAD mode, which can be turned on or off by selecting CAD> CAD mode On/Off, clicking the CAD mode On/Off button, or by pressing F2 .
Chapter Contents
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views Wall Elevation Cross Section/Elevations Lines in Section/Elevation Views Detailing a Cross Section/Elevation View Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras 3D Display Options
595
Sections & Elevations
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views
Section/Elevation Camera cuts through entire house.
Wall Elevation Camera shows single room only.
To create the cross section or elevation, click here and drag to right. Cross Section/Elevation Views and Wall Elevation Views are created in the same way: 1. Click either Wall Elevation or Cross Section/Elevation buttons and the cursor changes to a . The crosshairs on the icon mark the actual position of the cursor. Click in the Plan View at the spot where the section is to be cut, or elevation is to be viewed from. Drag a line in the direction of the line of sight, perpendicular to the cut line, and release the mouse button. When you release the mouse button the view generates in a new window. Cross Section/Elevation and Wall Elevations are accurate 2D views of the 3D model. Although they display objects at different depths from the camera, all lines in the view are in the same plane when it is sent to Layout. Cross Section/Elevations and Wall Elevations have the editing capabilities found in other 3D views, and can be further enhanced with the CAD tools. They are the traditional, orthogonal views that are used in drafting. Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which makes it easy to see accurate spatial relationships of the 3D objects created in the model. Cross Section/Elevations and Wall Elevations can be calculated at any allowed wall angle. This makes it possible to create a true length elevation of any wall.
2.
3.
The cut line is the line that you would traditionally think of as the Section line in a Floor plan drawing.
596
Wall Elevation
Wall Elevation
The Wall Elevation tool creates a single floor, single room elevation. It is used primarily for applications such as kitchen elevations or bath elevations. It does not cut through walls or show the ceiling, flooring or roof. The view can be taken at any angle to the wall(s). The Wall Elevation calculates an interior elevation. The view is a 2D projection of a vertical face, such as a wall, and the objects between the wall and the camera. Windows, cabinets, and other objects along the wall are displayed. Always drag the Wall Elevation camera directly toward the wall to be viewed. The length of the line is not important.
Cross Section/Elevations
Direction of drag. Stop Start No back clipping.
Back clipped When back clipped, only objects between start and stop of camera drag are calculated. The Cross Section/Elevation camera is used to create both cross section and elevation views from the interior of buildings and exterior elevations. If the Section/Elevation camera is created totally outside the structure looking toward it, the result is an external elevation. Nothing has been cut. If the Section/Elevation camera is created inside the structure, or passes through any of the structure, a cross section is created. The Cross Section/Elevation camera generates the complete model. Everything beyond the cut line in the direction of the line of sight displays in a Cross Section/Elevation View.
597
The Cross Section/Elevation creates a multi-floor, full house elevation or cross section. Views created with the Cross Section/Elevation camera can be edited with the CAD tools. Once CAD objects are added to a Cross Section/Elevation View, the program prompts you to save the view before closing. They are linked to the model and update accordingly with any changes. Any CAD information added to a cross section or elevation is stored with the view. These views are saved individually as part of the plan file.
Back Clipping Sections

To restrict the view to the length of the sight line only you must Back Clip the view. To do this select the Back Clip Cross Sections check box on the Options panel of the 3D Preferences dialog or toggle the Back Clip Section child button. This limits the view to only the objects between the starting point and stopping point of the cross section line. This option only affects Cross Section/Elevation Views that are created when it is active. Toggle it off to see all information. Make sure Back clip cross section is unchecked if an exterior elevation is needed.
Lines in Section/Elevation Views

There are several different types of lines which represent different things in a Cross Section/Elevation View. Each surface cut by the Section/Elevation camera generates a CAD line. If a View is created which cuts through the roof, walls, ceiling and floor, each surface of each object is represented by a CAD line. You can dimension to these lines, which is helpful when detailing a cross section. The CAD lines generated by the program are on System layer 9, Cross section lines, in the Layer Display Options dialog. To show the framing in a Cross Section/ Elevation View framing must first be built in the Build Framing dialog. Once framing exists, you can go to the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog and make sure the framing objects are checked. If a cross section line does not cut through a 3D object and the object is within the back clipped distance, such as a window shown in elevation, the object retains its 3D definition. 3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched, or otherwise modified, in a Section / Elevation View. The 3D model is updated in all Views. If Automatic dimensions are set to locate that object, such as cabinets or windows, dimensions locate them in a cross section or elevation. Any wall which appears in elevation adds edge lines in the Cross Section/Elevation View. Walls can be selected, moved angled, and adjusted in many ways within this view. CAD lines and polylines can be added to the cross section or elevation using the CAD tools. Remember, a Section /Elevation View
598
Detailing a Cross Section/Elevation View
is a 2D representation of the 3D model. There is no depth to the view. CAD lines are superimposed on the view and have no affect on the 3D model itself. If you have drawn
CAD lines in a Section./Elevation View, the program prompts you to save the window before closing out of the model or Plan View.
Detailing a Cross Section/Elevation View

CAD tools are accessible in Cross Section/ Elevation Views. Cross sections or elevations can be detailed using the CAD tools. Any CAD information added to a cross section or elevation is stored in that view. These views must be saved individually to become part of the normal file saving process.
To save time, you can use the Auto-Detailing tool to give you a head-start in detailing your Cross Section/Elevation View. The autodetailer creates CAD objects for you for commonly detailed aspects of your view. To activate the auto-detailer, use CAD> Autodetail, or click the Autodetail button. The auto-detailer can create CAD objects detailing the following: Wall Details - closed CAD polylines for each wall layer are added to your crosssection or elevation view, where the wall intersects the viewing plane. The polyline
fill defaults to the fill specified in your Wall Specification (see The Wall Specification Dialog on page 172). Insulation - You can specify which layers in your Wall Specification should appear as insulation when auto-detailed (see The Wall Specification Dialog on page 172). You can also specify which rooms should have insulation below the floor or above the ceiling in the Room Specification dialog. For more information, see Room Specification Dialog on page 204. Foundation Walls - Closed polylines are created for foundation walls and footings
599
Auto-Detailing
Slabs - Closed polylines are created for slabs where the slab intersects the front clipping plane.
CAD Detail From View

When you have finished modifying your cross section view, you can use the CAD Detail From View tool to generate a CAD detail of the view. This converts all 3D lines to CAD lines, and copies them with any added items to a CAD Detail. This tool can be used in any view except Render or Raytrace Views. For more information, see CAD Detail from View on page 741.
For more information on editing CAD objects, including closed polylines, see CAD Polylines on page 689. When you use the auto-detailing tool, CAD objects are placed on the default CAD layer. Using the auto-detailing tool twice will result in two copies of the same CAD objects.
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras

Cross Section/Elevation cameras can be saved using the Save Camera button. They can be saved in Plan View before the camera is closed. 1. In Plan View, click on the red camera icon and click the Open Object edit button. The Camera Specification dialog for that camera opens. 2. 3. Click the Save button at the bottom of the dialog and click OK. Once saved, the View can be closed and reactivated. To reactivate a saved Cross Section/ Elevation camera, select the Camera symbol in Plan View, then click the Activate Camera edit button. You can also use the Activate button that appears in the Camera Specification dialog. If the symbols for your saved cameras do not appear in Plan View, make sure that Display Inactive Views is checked in the 3D Preferences dialog, then refresh the display. If the green cameras still do not show, they do not exist.
Note: Any time you have added objects to a Cross Section/Elevation View, the program prompts you to save the view before closing.
An open, active Cross Section/Elevation camera shows red in Plan View. A closed, saved Cross Section/Elevation camera shows in green in Plan View.
600
3D Display Options
3D Display Options
There are two possible dialogs accessed by the Display Options button in a Cross Section/Elevation View. If the Architectural mode is active clicking the Display Options button displays the 3D Display Options dialog used for suppressing the display of 3D objects.
3D Preferences dialog before the view was generated, it will be grayed out in the 3D Display Options dialog and cannot be
If a type of object has been suppressed in the
displayed. To see that object, close the View and open the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. Select the check boxes to include the missing objects, then generate a new Cross Section/Elevation View based on the new settings. If the Plan View is active when you click the Display Options button, the Layer Display Options dialog will appear. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
601
3D Display Options
602
Chapter 26:
Render Views
Chapter Overview
Render Views can be created in a variety of ways. Once a Render View is created you can: Move the camera to view the model from different angles and adjust the lights. Redefine an existing material or use the Material Painter to apply a new material to an object Generate a Final View or a Raytrace of the current view Use the Glass House mode to view both the interior and exterior of the house simultaneously Use the Day/Night toggle to switch the view from day to night Place, resize, delete, and edit 3D objects Delete surfaces from the model to get a better view of a particular room Print the Render View or save it to disk as a picture file Save the Render View Camera.
Chapter Contents
Hardware Rendering Tools Render Views Glass House View Low Detail Mode Preview vs. Final Render View Using the Contextual Menu Camera Movement Field of View Textures, Images & Backdrops Materials in a Render View Editing Objects in Render Views Saving a Render View Picture Printing a Render View Rendering Tips and Tricks Light Sources Light Types Defining Light Types Adjusting Lights Sun Angle Specification Dialog Light Specification Dialog Cross Section Slider Dialog
603
Render Views
Hardware
Chief Architect contains a built in, easy to use rendering engine which makes use of OpenGL rendering technology. OpenGL, the standard for high-end 3D graphics, has the advantage of good hardware support on most video cards. With OpenGL, Render Views should look the same on all computers regardless of the graphics card being used. The only difference is in the speed that it takes to perform the rendering. It is highly recommended that users have a graphics card with OpenGL hardware acceleration, to take full advantage of the rendering capabilities in Chief Architect. For complex models, an accelerated card generates quality renderings in seconds that might otherwise take hours with a non-accelerated card.
Rendering Tools
These tools are unique to the Render View. They can either be added to a Render toolbar or accessed from the menu. The Adjust Lights option allows a user to edit the current lights that are being used in the Render View. The lights are displayed in a list for easy selecting. Interior default lights in the list cannot be changed or altered, but the default sun can be changed. You can quickly adjust lights to get the desired appearance in the Render View. Use the checkboxes to turn lights on and off. Selecting a light and choosing "Adjust" in the Adjust Lights dialog opens a dialog box. If it is an added light, the dialog is the Light Specification dialog. If you open a Light Fixture, the dialog consists of the Render Data tab of the Electrical Service Specification dialog. For more information, see Adjusting Lights on page 619. Click the Sunlight Toggle button to turn on and off the light source that represents the sun. This feature can be used to simulate day vs. night exterior views. User defined exterior lights are turned off in day views and turned on in night views. For more information, see Sun Angles on page 616. Click the Final View button to regenerate the Render View based on the Final View settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Preview vs. Final Render View on page 607. Click the Toggle Glass House button to turn on/off Glass House mode. This mode makes the scene semi-transparent, so that you can examine the interior and exterior of your structures simultaneously. For more information, see Glass House View on page 606. Click the Glass House Options button to modify the settings for the Glass House view, such as transparency level and color. For more information, see Glass House View on page 606.
604
Render Views
Click the Cross Section Slider button to open the Cross Section Slider dialog which allows you to adjust the cutting plane of a Rendered View. For more information, see Cross Section Slider Dialog on page 626. Click the Raytrace button to Raytrace the current render view. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627. One unique feature of Render Views is the ability to use the mouse to adjust the camera. Select the Move Camera with Mouse parent button on the Render toolbar to open its child tools. For more information, see Camera Movement on page 608.
drawn quickly with less detail, allowing fast editing and camera movement. For more information, see Low Detail Mode on page 607. Click the Unrestricted Positioning button to allow for greater precision when editing in 3D mode. Click the Save Camera button to Saves the current render camera in the plan. Saved cameras can be re-opened for later use. For more information, see Saving 3D Cameras on page 591. The Material Painter allows you to redefine the texture of a material while in a Render View. For more information, see Editing Materials in 3D Views on page 569. Click the Export Picture button to save the current screen image to disk as a .bmp, .jpg, or .png file. For more information, see Exporting Picture Files on page 761. Click the Print Image button to print the current screen image. For more information, see Print Image on page 840. Click the Edit Camera button to edit properties of the current Render camera, such as speed of movement or Field of View. For more information, see Camera Specification Dialog on page 592.
Other 3D Tools
These tools are common to both the 3D perspective and overviews, and the Render views. They can either be added to a Render toolbar or accessed from the menu. Choose from the architectural tool buttons that allow placement of Cabinets, Doors, Electrical Objects, Windows, and Corner Trim in Render Views. Click the Toggle Low Detail button to switch between High- and Low-Detail Modes. In Low-Detail Mode, the scene is
Render Views
Very little preparation needs to be done to create a Render View. Chief Architect has default values for most surfaces and even creates default light sources so that the Render View looks highly realistic the first time it is generated. For
605
Render Views
better Render Views, add or adjust light sources and specify the materials being rendered. Create a Render View from a Plan View by selecting 3D> Create View> Render Camera, or clicking on the Render Camera button on the Render tools toolbar. Once selected, click and drag a camera angle just like a Perspective View. A Glass House Render Camera View can be created in the same way with the Glass House Render Camera child button. Create a Render Full Overview , Render Floor Overview , or a Render Framing Overview by first clicking the Render Tools parent button and then selecting the desired child tool from the Render tools toolbar.
Chief Architect renders the image based on your Preview settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog.
From Perspective Views

If a Perspective View is the active view, that image can be rendered by selecting 3D> Render, or by selecting the Render button from the Perspective toolbar. Chief Architect renders the view based on your Preview settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog. Once an image is rendered, settings can be adjusted, materials can be modified, and perspective can be moved. Any changes made to the model from another View can be updated by selecting 3D> Render, Refresh Screen , or F5 . When you have an image that you are satisfied with, select 3D> Final View to render a Final quality image which can then be printed or saved.
Glass House View

You can display a current Render View in Glass House mode by clicking the Glass House Toggle button on the Render toolbar. You can also create a Glass House View from Plan View by clicking the Render Tools parent button and selecting the Glass House Render Camera tool to click and drag a camera angle just like a Perspective View. When in Glass House Mode, your Render view is drawn by making the surfaces in the scene semi-transparent. This allows you to view the spacial relationships between areas within the house, and examine the interior and exterior simultaenously.
You can modify the settings for Glass House Mode using the Glass House Options
606
Low Detail Mode
button. This brings up the Glass House Options dialog.
Color - This allows you to specify which color is used when rendering in Glass House mode. Transparency - This allows you to specify how transparent the surfaces are in Glass House mode. For a wireframe line drawing of your structure, turn transparency to full.
Low Detail Mode

When positioning the camera, or editing in a Render view, speed is often more critical than visual quality. In these situations the fastest display mode is Low Detail Mode. You can switch between high and low detail modes by clicking the Low Detail button. When drawing in Low Detail mode, textures, lighting, and smoothing are not used. The model is also simplified by using approximations for symbols, moldings, and other objects. This allows you to quickly establish your camera location or perform 3D editing.
Preview vs. Final Render View

A Render View is first drawn using the Preview settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog. By default, many available options have been turned off for the Preview. This allows for more efficient work in the Render View because the screen will display much faster. When you have finished making adjustments in Render View, select 3D> Final View or click the Final View toolbar button. You will then apply the Final View settings from the Render panel of the Preferences dialog to your render view. This will create a much higher quality image which is more suitable for printing or saving as a .bmp, .jpg, or .png file. It will usually take significantly longer to generate the Final View than the Preview. The Render View will revert back to the Preview settings as soon as anything is changed within the View. For faster rendering speed, but lowest rendering quality, all options in Preview settings should be turned off. To speed up the render speed even further, you can switch to Low Detail rendering mode, which will which will draw a simplified version of your scene witohut lighting. For the best rendering quality, but slowest rendering speed, all rendering options should be turned on in Final View settings.
607
Render Views
The rendering option that has the greatest impact on rendering speed is the Show Shadows option. It is recommended that you dont use this feature unless you have OpenGL hardware acceleration on your video card. When rendering shadows, a percentage complete value displays on the status bar.
You can turn on the Show Shadows option at any time using the Contextual menu. You may adjust your Preview and Final View settings to best fit the speed of your graphics card and still give you satisfactory rendering quality. For more information, see Render Panel on page 117.
To generate even higher quality renderings that can be created with the Final View Settings, you will want to use the Raytrace feature. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627.
Using the Contextual Menu

When in a Render View, click the right mouse button to access the Render View Contextual menu. In most views the Contextual menu contains the same tools as the Edit toolbar, but in Render Views the options are a mix of tool buttons and quick toggles that allow you to override the settings on the Render panel of the Preferences dialog, or to access special Render features. Refresh, Nighttime, Low Detail, Raytrace, Glass House, and Final View are all options available from the toolbar. Selecting Smooth Edges, Smooth Faces, or Show Shadows will enable or disable the specific Render capability and generate a new Render View. Changing a setting from the menu only affects the current view, it does not affect the settings in the Preferences dialog. You also have the option to Raytrace from this contextual menu. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627. Finally, you can toggle to and from the fast Low Detail mode, or switch to the Glass House mode. When in Glass House mode you can also access and adjust the Glass House Options from the contextual menu.
Camera Movement
Using Keyboard / Buttons
The camera used to create a Render View can be moved or relocated just like the Perspective camera. You can use both the toolbar and the keyboard to move the camera around once you have generated the Render View. For more information, see Adjusting
608
Field of View
Perspective & Render Cameras on page 582.
Using the Mouse

One unique feature of Render Views is the ability to use the mouse to adjust the camera. To adjust the camera with the mouse, first choose the Move Camera with Mouse parent button on the Render toolbar. You can then select the Mouse-Orbit Camera , Mouse-Pan Camera , the Mouse Dolly Camera , and 3D Center Camera On Point child buttons. To use these tools, left-click in the Render View, hold down the left mouse button, and drag the mouse across the screen. The Mouse-Orbit Camera allows you to rotate the camera around the current camera center. You can also click in
the Render View, move the mouse, and release the mouse button to "throw" the view. Click again in Render View to stop the view from rotating. The Mouse-Pan Camera allows you to move the camera up, down, left and right. The Mouse Dolly Camera allows you to move the camera forward and backward by moving the mouse up and down. It also allows you to turn the camera left and right in the same way. The 3D Center Camera On Point allows you to focus the camera at a particular point in the scene. This also sets the camera center so that future use of the Mouse-Orbit tool will rotate around that particular point. To use the 3D Center tool, activate the tool and then click on any object in the scene.
Field of View
The Field of View can be adjusted in Render Views. In an active Render View, click the Edit Camera button to open the Camera Specification dialog. Change the Field of View to the desired angle. For more information, see Camera Specification Dialog on page 592. The Field of View can also be adjusted with the mouse wheel while in Render View, if your mouse is equipped with one. The Field of View option produces results that are similar in appearance to zooming in perspective views, but it is in fact quite different. The Field of View does not alter the cameras position, but instead adjusts the angle of vision. A wider Field of View makes the focal point appear much further away, as more of the image is included.
609
Render Views
Textures, Images & Backdrops

Hundreds of graphics files have been included with Chief Architect. They are categorized into three groups: Images, Textures, and Backdrops. By using them you can create more realistic Render Views. background color for Render Views is defined on the Render tab. For more information, see Creating Backdrops on page 120.
Images
Images are very important for the appearance of Rendered Views and VRML file export. Images are bitmap files which represent individual objects, such as trees, flowers, cars, people, etc. They are marked in Plan View with a 2D Block and are visible in 3D views.
Spherical Backdrops
The Render View allows a special type of backdrop called a Spherical Panoramic Backdrop. These options are used to have the backdrop rotate as you move the Render View Camera. To enable Spherical Panoramic Backdrops, you can turn them on from the Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. You can then adjust how the backdrop wraps around the scene. Adjusting the Horizontal Angle will determine how many times the backdrop should appear as you rotate in a full circle from side-to-side. A value of 360 will cause the backdrop to wrap around the scene once. A value of 720 will cause it to wrap around the scene twice. 180 will cause only half the backdrop to wrap around the scene. Adjusting the Vertical Angle will determine how much the backdrop should stretch upand-down. To have the backdrop stretch from the highest point in the sky to the lowest point in the ground, use a value of 180. To have the backdrop stretch from just below a horizontal render to just above, use a smaller value such as 100. It takes a special camera or an image processing program to generate spherical panoramic backdrops. Experimenting with the images and with the Angle values will
Textures
Textures are bitmap files which are used to represent irregular surfaces of objects, such as bricks, tiles, woods, lawn and carpets in Render Views. Textures are assigned to Materials and Materials are assigned to objects. For more realistic Render Views, it is important to use realistic textures and adjust material properties correctly. The textures and render properties for materials are defined in the Define Material dialog.
Backdrops
Backdrops are bitmap files which display in the background of all 3D views. Only one Backdrop can be applied per model. If one is not defined, Chief Architect defaults to a user defined background color. Backdrops are selected and removed on the Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog and the
610
Materials in a Render View
usually be necessary to achieve the desired effect.
Plan Export
When transferring a plan to another computer, or to another user, it is helpful to have all of the Images, Textures, and
Backdrops used in the plan. The Plan Export tool accessed through File> Export > Entire Plan allows you to save the plan and all associated images, textures, and backdrops, into a single directory. For more information see Exporting an Entire Plan on page 77.
Materials in a Render View

A Render View is similar to a Perspective View except that the surfaces you see are displayed with textures (picture files) mapped onto them instead of patterns. If you have not selected a texture for a material or you have turned off the display of textures, the surfaces will be displayed using a solid color instead. The display of surfaces, whether or not you are using textures, is also influenced by your render settings on the Render tab of the Define Material dialog. There you can adjust the brightness, shininess, transparency, and other material properties which will affect how they will be displayed in the Render View. For more information regarding materials, bitmap textures and how they will render, see Defining Materials on page 558.
Editing Materials in Render Views

From a Render View there are many ways to change an objects appearance. For more information, see Editing Materials in 3D Views on page 569.
Editing Objects in Render Views

Render Views
You have full editing functionality in a Render View, including the ability to add, resize, move, group, ungroup, and delete objects. For more information, see Editing in a 3D or Render View on page 590.
Saving a Render View Picture

Render Views may be saved as .bmp, .jpg, or .png files. To save a Render View: 1. Select File> Export> Picture or click the Export Picture button on the Render toolbar.
611
2.
The Export Picture File dialog appears with the current directory specified. Navigate to the desired directory before saving the file. Use the file type drop-down to choose which file type to save to. Give the file a name and click Save.
3. 4. 5.
of the numerous graphic programs that are available. Picture files can be utilized in word processing, desktop publishing, or web development programs to create advertisements, brochures, etc.
The picture will be saved using the size of the current window. You can maximize or minimize your render window to create a smaller or bigger picture.
Once saved, a picture can be opened and converted into many other formats using one
Printing a Render View

Since Render Views are created from pixels instead of lines, File> Print> Print Image must be used to send them to the printer. File> Print> Print Image is a special Chief Architect function which prints the screen in picture format. The entire view will print, including images such as trees and textures. The quality of your print image is affected by your current window size and screen resolution. To maximize the quality of your printed image, generate it in full screen size and use the maximum screen resolution.
If you want to save or print a picture whose resolution is higher than your screen, you can create the image using Raytracing. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627.
Rendering Tips and Tricks

You can achieve significantly different results in rendering speed or quality by adjusting the following options in the Render tab of the Preferences dialog. To access this dialog go to Edit> Preferences> Render. each frame. For most video cards you will want to turn this off, and turn Keep All Surfaces on. Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect creates the 3D model, this option toggles whether to only create surfaces facing you. On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it is faster to create the model with all surfaces once, rather than re-create it every time the camera position changes. For most scenarios you will want to turn this on, and turn Always Rebuild off.
Faster Rendering
To improve rendering speed, consider turning off the following options Always Rebuild - This forces Chief Architect to re-create the entire model for
612
Rendering Tips and Tricks
Use Triangles - This determines whether or not lights will illuminate the scene accurately. Turning off this option will speed up render times, but will result in large objects (such as walls) appearing to be lit incorrectly. When you are editing in a Render View, or when you have no lights, you probably want to turn off Use Triangles. Soft Shadows - Only used when Shadows are turned on, this significantly slows down the rendering speed. Only use this option for final images, and consider Raytracing as an alternative way to generate a high-quality image. H/W Backdrop - For some OpenGLaccelerated video cards, this option will drastically increase you render speeds. When turned on, this option uses the video card OpenGL acceleration to draw the backdrop instead of simply using software. Use Optimizations - Many OpenGLaccelerated video cards are capable of optimizing the view for subsequent redraws. Use of this option will vary from video card to video card. In general, you should leave this option turned on unless you are experiencing crashes when rendering. Smooth Edges - Only use this option for final views, as this will slow down even the fastest video card. Show Shadows - This should only be used for final views, unless you have an extremely fast OpenGL-accelerated video card. In general, you should make sure you are only using a minimum number of lights to cast shadows.
Use Textures - Some older video cards will significantly slow down using textures. Also, look at your Render> Texture Filter settings. Some video cards will perform significantly faster using either Nearest or Linear texture filters, instead of using a mipmapping filter. Number of Lights - especially if you are using shadows, the number of lights turned on can drastically effect rendering speed.
Higher Quality Rendering

Use Triangles - when you have lights in your scene, triangles are used to make those lights appear to illuminate objects properly. Generally speaking the smaller you set your Triangle Size, the slower the render, but the higher-quality result you can achieve. Texture Filters - Mip-mapping, though slightly slower on older video cards, greatly improves the appearance of scenes where objects are far away. Use Multipass - Necessary to display transparent or semi-transparent surfaces in a Render View. This also improves the appearance of lighting on textured surfaces. Smooth Edges - Though slow, this can significantly improve the quality of a Final View.
If you are attempting to generate a highquality picture of your scene, you will also want to look at Raytracing. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627.
613
Render Views
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important for Render Views, Raytracing, and VRML file export. Even small changes can have a large impact on image quality. In a Render View, lighting calculations are done on a room-by-room basis. The Render View uses only the lights in the room which contains the camera. When the camera is outside of a building the program normally uses sunlight for lighting calculations. In this case, all of the other lights are turned off. It is possible to turn the sunlight off and to have all the other exterior lights turned on to simulate night time views. The sun can be controlled like other light types. The maximum number of light sources that can be turned on in a room at the same time is determined by your video card (see Render Panel on page 117). If eight is your maximum number of lights, the program will only use the eight light sources which are closest to the cameras position for its lighting calculations. You can manually turn on and off certain lights in order to get desired lighting effects, see Adjusting Lights on page 619 for more information.
Ambient Lights
Ambient light is additive to other lights in a room or scene. Ambient light settings are controlled on the Render tab of the 3D Preference dialog. Select 3D> 3D Preferences to access the dialog. Here you can adjust the ambient light settings, which affect the overall brightness of a Render View. Interior Ambient controls the light when a View is inside the model. Daytime Ambient controls the light when you are outside the model and the Sunlight Toggle is on. Nighttime Ambient controls the light when you are outside the model and the Sunlight Toggle is off. Ambient light is used to simulate the way that light bounces around a scene. Ambient light approximates this by simply ensuring that all objects are at least as bright as the appropriate ambient value. To create a more realistic model of how light bounces around a scene, use Raytracing with Radiosity. See, Raytracing on page 627.
Light Types
In addition to the ambient light levels that are specified in the 3D Preferences dialog, there are four additional ways that light sources can be created for Render or Raytrace Views: Light Fixtures Added Lights Sunlight Default Lights
Each individual light has a set of Rendering properties that can be defined. You can adjust a lights color, intensity, attenuation (which affects how quickly the
614
Light Types
light drops in intensity over distance), whether it can cast shadows and whether the light is on or off. There are three possible types of light sources that can be used to specify how a light is calculated by the Renderer: Parallel Light sources Point Light sources Spot Light sources.
the list of available lights in the Adjust Lights dialog. For more information, see Adjusting Lights on page 619. Select Adjust and the Light Specification dialog will open. The Light Specification dialog will have many options grayed out. For more information, see Light Specification Dialog on page 622. The Default Sun Light acts like a parallel light source. For the Default Sun Light you can specify: Intensity Color Tilt Angle Dir Angle On Casts Shadows Soft Shadows
For more information, see Defining Light Types on page 618.
Default Lights
If you create an interior Render View and no user defined lights exist, the program will create a Default Light source within the room. The Default Interior light acts like a central point source. It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want control over the light sources in your interior Render Views, you must add a light to the room that you are rendering by placing a lighting fixture or by adding a light using 3D> Add Lights.
The Default Sun Light acts like a sun but its location is not based on any real world locations. If you place a Sun Angle in Plan View, the Default Sun Light can no longer be used as a light source in exterior Render Views unless it is first turned off. Sun Angles can be specified with Earth data to make them much more realistic interpretations of the Sun.
Default Sun Light

If you create an exterior Render View, and no Sun Angle exists, the program creates a Default Sun Light. The Default Sun Light can be selected for specification from a Render View by selecting 3D> Adjust Lights. If there are no other lights in the scene, you will immediately get the suns Light Specification dialog. If there are other lights in the scene, but no sun angles, you can edit the sun by selecting Default Sun from
Light Fixtures
Electric symbols placed in Plan View that represent a Light Fixture may create one or more light sources in Render and Raytrace Views. The light type and properties for each fixture can be modified by selecting the fixture, clicking the Open Object edit
615
Render Views
button, and opening the Electrical Service Specification dialog to the Render Data tab. For more information, see Electrical Service Specification Dialog on page 430. Use the "Light" drop-down to choose which of the fixture lights you want to edit. You can then specify the Light Type - (parallel, point, or spot), the Color, Intensity, and adjust the Offsets to determine the light position relative to the fixture. Offset From Base controls how far the light source is relative to the position of the fixture base. The fixture base is determined by the surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling). Offset in X/Offset in Y are only available when you are not editing a wall-mounted fixture. These allow you to position the light relative to the center of the fixture, along the floor/ceiling. Offset up Wall/Offset Along Wall are only available when you are editing a wallmounted fixture. These allow you to set the lights distance up/down the wall, and left/ right along the wall. If the light source is a Point or Spot Light, you can define its offset relative to the fixture base. For instance, if the fixture is on the ceiling you may want to set the Height Offset field to move the light source down to the location where the bulb might be in real life. By using Show Position in Render View you can tell where in the scene your light is located. Due to limitations in the OpenGL lighting model, and limitations of raytracing, lighting looks most realistic if it is offset from a surface.
Added Lights
3D> Add Lights allows you to quickly add a light in the Plan View. Added Lights are similar to Light Fixtures, but they only generate a light source in the Render and/or Raytrace View. They do not create a 3D object that appears in 3D views. Added lights can be placed into an object which would normally not generate a light source such as a TV. To add a Parallel Light: 1. 2. Select 3D> Add Lights. Click and drag in Plan View.
Parallel Lights can be added to the exterior or interior of a model. To create a Point Light source: 1. 2. Select 3D> Add Lights. Click in Plan View. Do not drag the cursor when you click on the screen, or you will create a parallel light source.
To create a Spot Light source: 1. 2. 3. Create a Parallel or Point Light source using one of the above methods. Select the light and open it for specification. Change its Type to Spot Light in the Light Specification dialog.
Sun Angles
In Plan View you can create multiple Sun Angles. Select CAD> Special> Sun Angle or click the Sun Angle button and click in Plan View to place a Sun Angle.
616
Light Types
In each Sun Angle you can specify time of year, time of day, and a location based on longitude and latitude. If you have defined a North Pointer, using the CAD> Special> North Pointer tool, the Suns location in reference to the model is accurate. The Sun Toggle controls the display of either the default Sun or the current Sun Angle. Sun Angles can only act as Parallel light sources. Their location and direction are defined per plan. The Render Data tab has been added to the Sun Angle Specification dialog to allow more control of its Render properties such as color, shadows, etc. Through the Sun Angle Specification dialog, you can specify the location and time that the program uses to model the actual sun angle as a light source. When rendering an exterior View, the program looks for the first Sun Angle which is turned on. If you have multiple Sun Angles, you must select the one you want to use and make sure it is turned on in the Sun Angle Specification dialog. Verify all others are turned off and the program will render the correct sun. If one does not exist, the program uses the Default Sun Light. To define a Sun Angle: 1. 2. 3. Make the first floor the current floor. In Plan View, select CAD> Special> Sun Angle and click. The Sun Angle Specification dialog opens. Fill in the options to define the Sun Angle, and click OK.
4.
A Sun Angle arrow will appear in Plan View.
The Sun Angle arrow is a marker that shows you the angle of the sun. Its location does not affect the calculation of the shadows, it may be moved if desired. Each Sun Angle can define the position of the building on the Earth and the date and time at which the calculations are performed. This position is pinpointed by the Latitude and Longitude settings. The following table lists latitude and longitude values for some cities:
Shadows
The Sun Angle function allows the shadow cast by a building at any time of the year to be displayed. Sun Angles can also be used as a light source in Render Views. More than one Sun Angle may be placed in the same plan to allow the simultaneous display of shadows at different times. A Sun Angle can only be specified in a first floor or foundation plan. Each Sun Angle is represented in Plan View by a Sun Angle arrow
617
Render Views
at height zero which is the default height for the first floor. If a Terrain Perimeter exists, the shadow will be modified to indicate where the real shadow would fall on the actual terrain.
Deleting Shadows
There are several ways to delete the shadow created by a Sun Angle. Sun angle for: March 1, 2003 12 p.m. (noon) Coeur dAlene, ID The shadow cast by a building at a particular time and at a particular location can be displayed. If no Terrain Perimeter has been created, the shadow falls on an imaginary plane In Plan View, select and delete the defining polyline. In Plan View, select and delete the Sun Angle arrow. In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click Make shadow to delete the existing and create a new shadow. In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Delete Shadow button.
Defining Light Types

Each Light Type, may be defined as modelling either a Point Light source, a Parallel Light source, or a Spot Light source. These definitions can be assigned and modified to create many different lighting effects. of light to use for maximum speed generating Render Views. Parallel Light sources are represented in Plan View by three arrows. To modify the light, double-click on it or select it, then click the Open Object edit button. The Light Specification dialog opens, allowing you
Parallel Lights
A Parallel Light has a direction but no position. The light appears to illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as if it were at an infinite distance from the object. A Parallel Light source is commonly used to simulate distant light sources, such as the sun. It is the best choice
to modify the lights characteristics. Any light source can be changed into a Parallel Light source by changing its light type in the Light Specification dialog.
Point Lights
Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light radiates light equally in all
618
Adjusting Lights
directions from its origin. It slows rendering down, but it is a more realistic representation of electric lighting and should be used where visual fidelity is the deciding concern. If no user defined light exists, Chief Architect creates a Point Light source to represent a light within a room. Any light source, except a sun angle, can be changed into a Point Light source by changing its light type in the specification dialog. To modify the light, double-click on it (or select it, then click the Open Object edit button). The Light Specification dialog opens.
Spot Lights
A Spot Light focuses the light in a specified direction. The location, cone angle, direction and intensity of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights cannot be placed directly in the plan. They are created by changing an existing lights specification. Once defined as a Spot Light, the direction of a spot light can be changed in the Light Specification dialog or for an added light source, by rotating the light in Plan View.
Adjusting Lights
Once lights have been added to the model, they can be edited or adjusted using the Adjust Lights dialog. Sometimes you will want to adjust the lights from the Render View to get immediate results, other times you may want to adjust lights in Plan View where you can easily see their position within a room. 3. All lights in the plan will appear in the list. You can use the checkboxes to turn lights on and off. To adjust the properties of a specific light, select the light to be adjusted and click Adjust. The Light Specification dialog opens.
Adjust Lights Dialog Render Views

4. 5. 6. Make changes to the light and click OK. You will return to the Adjust Lights dialog. Select another light to adjust or click Done. In a Preview or Render View you can use the Adjust Lights dialog to select a light and open the appropriate Specification dialog for that light. 1. 2. Create a plan with fixture, sun angle, or other added lights. Select 3D> Adjust Lights or click the Adjust Lights button. The Adjust Lights dialog opens.
619
When you are in a Render View, the view is regenerated based on the new light settings.
Sun Angle Specification Dialog

Earth Data Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 12 4 Time - Enter a time for each arrow you
11
1 Latitude is measured North or South of

the equator.
2 Longitude is measured West or East of

the Greenwich meridian. Common values for latitude, longitude can be found in any atlas.
create. Define whether or not it should be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings Time.
3 Date - Enter a date for each arrow you

create.
The previous values default to the settings on the Special CAD panel of the Preferences dialog.
Specification dialog is a section displaying the calculated angles.
5 Time Zone - Specify the time zone.
6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
620
Sun Angle Specification Dialog
The Solar altitude angle displays the angle of the sun in degrees above the horizontal plane. The Solar direction angle shows the angle between true north and the sun's direction. This is the angle at which the Sun Angle arrow displays in Plan View. This angle is always measured relative to north. North is defined by a user specified North Pointer . If you have not created a North Pointer, north is assumed to be straight up in the Plan View. If a North Pointer is drawn, or the direction of an existing North Pointer is changed, Sun Angles and their shadows automatically update. to have the program update the shadow for this arrow whenever any of the defining information is changed. When checked, it slows the system down while the Sun Angle Specification dialog is displayed. If this is not checked, you can click the Make Shadow button to generate a new shadow based on the new information. Show Date on Sun Angle - Select the check box to have the date and time display on the Sun Angle arrow in the Plan View.
Note that when you use the Build Terrain command in plan view, all sun shadows in the plan are automatically updated. length of the Sun Angle arrow for Plan View.
10 Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the
11 Make shadow - Select the check box to

calculate the shadow on screen. The shadow is a polyline filled with a hatch pattern derived from the Sun Angle direction. No shadow generates if the sun is not above the horizon or if the sun is so low on the horizon that the shadow would be extremely long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to noon to test the function. If the shadow appears, your original time setting was too early or too late to generate shadows. Note that the Make Shadow option does not affect the Render view. To turn shadows on and off for the Render view, use the Render tab. shadow generated using Make Shadow from the plan view.
7 Always Update - Select the check box
12 Delete shadow - Removes the sun
Render Data Tab
2 4
If the Auto Rebuild Terrain check box is checked, then if you rebuild the sun shadow, the terrain will automatically rebuild as needed before the sun shadow generates. If this check box is unchecked, you will be prompted to rebuild the terrain.
You can define if the Sun Angle will be used as a light source in Render Views. Set the parameters here if you want to use the Sun Angle as a light source in Render Views.
621
Render Views
check box to rebuild the terrain automatically whenever you create a sun shadow.
9 Auto Rebuild Terrain - Select the
The settings defined on the Render Data tab are not related to how the shadow is displayed in Plan View. They only affect Render Views. rent Sun Angle as a rendering light source. If there is more than one defined Sun Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun Angle that is defined as On. To make sure you are rendering the correct Sun Angle, make sure all others do not have this box checked. this light source cast shadows. These shadows are similar to the shadow shown in Plan View, but they may render differently based on other light sources.
1 On - Check this box to select the cur-
the relative intensity of the light source. Time of day as set on the Earth Data tab, does not affect how the Sun Angle renders as a light source, but this does.
3 Intensity - Use this slider bar to define
4 Color - Select a color for the light

source.
Line Style Tab

On the Line Style Tab you can set Line Color, Line Style, and Line Weight for the Sun Angle arrow in plan view. For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681. You can also set the Layer on which the Sun Angle appears. Sun angles appear on CAD layer 20 by default. Note that Sun Shadow polylines and hatching appear on the same layer as the Sun Angle arrow from which they are created.
2 Casts Shadow - Check here to have
Light Specification Dialog

When a light has been placed in the plan using the 3D> Add Lights menu command, you can redefine its behavior and modify
Light Specification dialog.
certain properties of each light using the
622
Light Specification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 15 12 14 11
Depending on the type of light selected, the options available will vary. Available source types are Point Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The selections in the dialog are affected by the Type that you select. Each type of light source behaves differently but they have some rendering properties in common. For more information, see Defining Light Types on page 618. to have the program set intensities for each light in the Render View. When you select Auto Intensity the program provides an average intensity to render with reasonable lighting effects. If you clear the check box, the slider bar controls how bright the light appears in the Render View.
Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the same as lights that are turned off. Lights that have an intensity of 100% have the maximum brightness allowed. If you have multiple lights in a room all set to maximum intensity, it is possible to have too much light for a realistic View. Colors and textures become washed out if there is too much light. the color of the light being modeled. Colored lights may be used to achieve special lighting effects. They alter the appearance of your material colors and textures. The default color of light is pure white, which has the least affect on the material colors and textures.
2 Auto Intensity - Select the check box
623
Render Views
3 Color - Click on the rectangle to define
how the quickly the light intensity drops off as a result of the distance from the light source. Only Spot and Point Lights can have attenuation values set.
4 Attenuated - Check this box to control
that includes the first floor. A value of 0 equals the floor elevation of the first floor. control the angle of the light with respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees means that the light is pointing straight down and a value of 90 degrees means that the light is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to the horizon. Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along. Zero degrees is measured horizontally on your screen pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees. If you enter a negative value, the program uses Zero. Direct a Spot Light in Plan View by selecting and dragging the rotate handle. controls the angle of the cone of light for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180 degrees would create a Spot Light that shines on one side of the lights position, representing a half sphere. A small cone angle, say 10 degrees, would create a very narrow cone of light. The cut off angle should always be between 0 and 180 degrees. The cut off angle for an added light can be defined in the Plan View by dragging the handles at the ends of the cone lines in or out. the light intensity drops off from the center of the cone of light to the outside edge. This is only available for Spot Lights. The default value for this is set to 7.5 which means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is not useful to set this value too low because there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting
7 Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
The three edit values represent the three coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression: 1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance from the light source. Increasing any of these values results in the light intensity dropping off faster (the light does not travel as far). Decreasing any value results in the light intensity dropping off slower, (the light travels farther). Small changes in these coefficients can have significant impact on lighting effects. Some experimentation should be done to fully understand how to use them. symbol for an added light appears in Plan Views. The Floor Number controls on which floor plan the added light symbol is drawn. If you assign the number of a non-existent floor, you will not see the light display and you cannot delete that light. A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light symbol on the first floor. The floor number has no effect on the light height. Set the number equal to the floor plan that contains the room that the light is in, if you want it to appear in Plan View.
8 Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
5 Floor Number - Define where the
9 Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
10 Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
6 Height - Define a height for the light. Heights of Added lights are always relative to the first floor. If you want an Added light to appear in a room on the second floor you must enter a height value
624
model which result in jagged looking circles of light when they are shining on large flat surfaces. Appearances can be improved by decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and increasing the Drop off Rate but it is impossible to get a nice sharp circle of light using current methods under OpenGL. Soft Shadows (raytracing) - This allows you to set how a light will cast soft shadows in a Raytrace view. Setting the Light Size will set how big the light should appear. A size of zero indicates a true point light source, while a size of 3 indicates a larger source such as a lightbulb. Setting the Softness determines how many iterations the raytracer should go through to soften the light. This value determines the quality of the raytrace, but also slows down the raytrace. It is not recommended to use values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Light Size is very large.
11
Use in Real-Time Rendering/ Use in Raytracing/Use in Both These options allows you to specify whether a light is used only in a Raytrace View, only in a Render view, or used in both views. Raytrace views can handle many more lights than Render views, and some fixtures may have four or five lights in a raytrace view while only one in a Render view. Be warned that the more lights you use in either view, the slower the time to generate that view.
15
light should be used for lighting effects in the Render View. The default is On. not the light casts shadows when Shadows are turned on in a Render View.
12 On - This controls whether or not the
13 Casts Shadows - Controls whether or
Check this box to display an indicator where a light source is actually positioned in a Render View. The light position indicator is only drawn when the light is "On" and only for positional lights such as "point" or "spot" lights. This tool can be used to determine if your light source is positioned correctly.
14 Show Position in Render View -
625
Render Views
It is recommended that you only use one, or at most two lights to casts shadows at a time. Shadow calculations are very complicated and can slow rendering significantly.
Cross Section Slider Dialog
Cross Section Slider Dialog
Click the Cross Section Slider button in a Render View to open the Cross Section Slider dialog.
Choose one of the cross section angles and move the Position slide to adjust the position of the cutting plane. Select the option at top right to turn off the cutting plane.
626
Chapter 27:
Raytracing
Chapter Overview
Raytracing is a technology which allows for the creation of highly realistic images from your Chief Architect plans. Where Render View simply draws your model onto the screen, raytracing actually traces the rays of light from your camera as they bounce and reflect into your scene. As a result, raytracing is somewhat slower than OpenGL rendering, but can be used to achieve much more complicated effects such as reflections and ultra-realistic lighting models.
Chapter Contents
Creating a Raytrace View The Raytrace Window Creating Materials for Raytracing Tips and Tricks POV-Ray
Creating a Raytrace View

To create a raytraced image in Chief Architect 9.0, start with a Render View. The camera position, orientation, and field of view in the Render View will determine the way the scene appears in the Raytrace window. None of the other Render settings, including your Render Preferences will be used for generating a Raytrace View. The lighting used for creating a Raytrace View is different than the lighting used for a Render View. All of the lights that are currently being modeled in the plan will be used when creating a Raytrace View, as long as the light has not been turned "off" in its specification dialog, and it has been set to "Use in Raytracing". Unlike the Render View, the Raytrace View has no limit on the number of lights that can be used to create a
627
Raytracing
scene so lights are not limited to the current room. The more lights there are in a scene, the longer it will take to create.
In a Render View, click the Raytrace button, or choose Raytrace from the 3D menu to start raytracing. The Raytrace Options dialog will open.
5 7
Raytrace Properties
the image you are about to create. The initial values are identical to the size of your previous render view. You can set these values to virtually anything you wish, though images larger than 2000 x 2000 pixels cannot be viewed from within Chief Architect, and must be saved directly to a file. Make certain that you have sufficient disk space before starting a raytrace saved to a very large file. Save As You can optionally save the raytrace image directly to a file while it raytraces. The only supported file format is the Windows Bitmap (.bmp) format. Saving to a file is mandatory for very large images
1 Width/Height the size, in pixels, of
that cannot be viewed from within Chief Architect.
Raytrace Parameters
much more realistic, lighting model than standard raytracing. Without radiosity the raytracer will use a lighting model similar to a Render View, which uses a constant value for ambient lights. Unlike the constant Ambient Lighting model which assumes any object not directly exposed to a light is a preset brightness, Radiosity traces light as it bounces around a scene, capturing the subtle variations in shadows.
2 Radiosity Radiosity is a slower, but
628
Creating a Raytrace View
Without Radiosity
determines what quality of smooth edges to create in your raytraced image. The High Quality setting is somewhat slower than the Normal quality setting. This is similar to the Smooth Edges option used in Render Views. For more information, see Faster Rendering on page 612. soft shadow settings for each light in the Adjust Lights dialog. For more information, see Adjusting Lights on page 619. These settings will only take effect if you enable Use Soft Shadows. Soft shadows require extra work on the part of the raytracer and can slow down the image generation. lights in your scene, the raytracer will optionally create one for you. This option is similar but not related to the Soft Shadows option set in the Render Preferences. Default lights are only created if you are indoors. allows advanced lighting models such as the ability to have light coming directly from the sun, combined with light scattered through the clouds. Direct Sunlight allows you to brighten the intensity of the light coming directly from the sun. Diffuse Sunlight allows you to brighten the intensity of the light from the surrounding atmosphere. For a cloudy day, you might turn up the diffuse sunlight, and turn down the direct sunlight.
4 Anti-Aliasing This setting
5 Use Soft Shadows You can set up
With Radiosity
The following options allow you to adjust how Radiosity works in the scene: None - uses an ambient lighting model similar to the Render View Low Quality - This option should provide reasonable image quality for most images, though the results may appear blotchy. This is the fastest Radiosity option. Medium Quality - This option should only be used for images where Low Radiosity is insufficient, as it is more time-consuming. High Quality - Extremely time-consuming and only necessary for the most discerning tastes. High Radiosity will often take hours to render what takes minutes using Low Radiosity. Nighttime setting in Render views, this allows you to choose whether to render a daytime or a nighttime image.
6 Create Default Light If you have no
7 Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Radiosity
3 Time of Day similar to the Daytime/
629
Raytracing
The Raytrace Window

If your raytraced image is small enough to fit in a window, your image will appear as it is created. Unlike Render Views, you can minimize your raytrace window or perform other tasks while the raytrace is progressing. Simply restore your raytrace window when you are ready to view your image. The following options are available from the Raytrace Window: File> Print Image From the File menu, you have the ability to print your picture. File> Save Image - You can save your picture to several file formats including .jpg, .bmp, and .png. File> Image Adjustment A raytracer mimics a camera while it generates your image. From the File menu, you have the option to adjust the camera lens aperture. This can be done during the raytrace, or once the raytrace is completed. This allows you to brighten/darken the image as necessary to achieve the appropriate light balance in your room.
Creating Materials for Raytracing

There are several new properties of materials that only come into effect when you are doing a raytraced image. To view the effect of your material settings in a raytrace, you can use the Show Preview option on the Raytrace tab in the Define Material dialog. For more information, see Define Materials Dialog on page 569.
630
Creating Materials for Raytracing
Raytrace Tab
1 2 3 4 5
The Raytrace tab has controls which effect how materials appear in Raytrace views. Modifying any of these values will have no effect on 3D or Rendered views. You can activate the raytrace preview window by hitting the Show Preview button.
the bump map, and brighter areas corresponding to high points how drastic the effect of the bump map will be. The Ratio and Stretch to Fit options work for bump maps the same way that they do for textures. If you are using a texture and a bump map, they will both use the same values for Ratio and Stretch to Fit. material will allow light to pass through it, but will appear in the image. An example of a translucent material is a lampshade. Translucency is an effect which looks best when rendering with Radiosity. material which filters light acts like a stained-glass window. A material that does not filter light simply transmits it, such as white tissue paper.
4 Bump Height allows you to specify
reflective the material appears in raytrace views. Push the slide bar all the way to the right to simulate a highly reflective material such as a mirror. image file which is used to make a material appear non-flat where light hits it. For more information on bump maps, see Raytracing on page 627. To create a bump map, turn on Use Bump Map and select a bump map to use. Any image file or texture can be used as a bump map, with dark areas of the image corresponding to low points in
1 The name of the material appears here. 2 Reflectivity - This controls how
5 Material is translucent - A translucent
3 Use Bump Map - A bump map is an
6 Transparency Filters Light A
631
Raytracing
Tips and Tricks

Faster Raytracing
Calculating a realistic image can take time. However, there are several things to think about before you raytrace that can drastically reduce your raytrace time.
Without the appropriate setup, a scene that should take five minutes to raytrace can quite literally take five to ten days. These tips can help you reduce raytrace times so you can get the image you want, when you want it.
need to raytrace a full-screen image. Try using a much smaller image size such as 300x200 which can give you the information you need to determine whether lighting is appropriate. Image size is a significant factor in determining raytrace speed. Only raytrace your full image when you are certain that your scene lighting is correct. Anti-Aliasing Level Anti-aliasing works to smooth edges that otherwise would appear jagged. High-quality anti-aliasing is most useful when you are raytracing a smaller picture that contains a very complicated scene. If you are raytracing a very large picture, you probably only need low-quality anti-aliasing. Bump Maps Bump map calculation is time-consuming and should only be used as necessary. Soft Shadows Soft shadow calculation is time-consuming and should only be used as necessary. Only enable soft shadows for lights whose shadows are significant to the scene you are raytracing.
Number of Lights Unlike the Render view, which can support only a limited number of lights, the Raytrace View can handle as many lights as you like. Leaving the lights on is the number one cause of slow raytracing. Use the Adjust Lights dialog (available in the render window, or in plan view) to turn off any lights which are not important to your scene. Remember that most lights are on by default. Radiosity Quality For simple scenes, Low Quality Radiosity is usually sufficient. High Quality Radiosity is extremely timeconsuming and only necessary for very complicated scenes where Low or Medium radiosity is not sufficient. If your image is very large, or if you have complicated aspects such as grills or grates, you may wish to try Medium radiosity. Always try Low radiosity first to see if you get the desired result. Preview Your Raytrace When you are setting up lighting for a scene, there is no
Raytrace Quality
It is not hard to create an image that looks reasonably realistic with raytracing. However, getting an image that really looks like a photograph takes extra attention to detail. Here are a few tips for achieving the most photo-realistic images possible: Use Radiosity - Though slower, radiosity adds significant depth to the scene by
632
POV-Ray
simulating the way that light works in the real world. Especially for scenes with a fair amount of shadow in them, radiosity will make a huge difference. Use Reflections For outdoor scenes, ensure that your windows are slightly reflective. You may wish to set up a building across the street which, though not in the scene, will appear in the reflections in the windows. Especially important, however, are materials which are partly reflective, such as stovetops, tile floors, or coffee pots The subtle effect of the reflections help fool the viewers eye into believing that the picture is a real photograph. Sunlight Settings The brightness of the sun varies dramatically from climate to climate, from cloudy day to sunny day. Use the Direct/Diffuse Sunlight Settings to find a setting which provides the appropriate lighting for the scene you are rendering. Lighting Lighting is an extremely important tool for achieving high-quality results. Work with the lighting of your scene until you achieve something realistic. Add 3D lights as necessary (see Added Lights on page 616) to capture the effect you want. For lights which cast shadows into the scene, consider soft shadows which will smooth the appearance of the scene lighting.
Finally, from the Raytrace window, use the File> Image Adjustment options to tweak the brightness of your finished rendering. Dont be afraid to over-saturate your image slightly in very bright areas this is a common occurrence in actual photographs. Interior Shots - If you are rendering an interior radiosity shot where the primary source of light is the sun through a window or door, you will probably need to adjust your image brightness using File> Image Adjustment in the Raytrace window. You may also need to raytrace using Medium radiosity quality to ensure that the raytracer models the light bouncing through the window accurately. Bump Maps Though the effect of bumpmaps are usually very subtle, they can provide sublte suggestions to the viewer that the scene is actually a photograph. A tile floor which shades appropriately to the lighting in the room will give the appearance of realism. Emissive Materials If you aim to achieve photorealism, you will likely be using radiosity. A material with emissive properties, when using radiosity, will actually cast light into the scene. This effect can be used to achieve the subtle variations of light that you see in the real world, particularly when applied to TV screens or other electronic devices.
The Persistance of Vision Raytracer (POVRay) is a high-quality, entirely free raytracer. The POV-Ray raytracer has been used for over ten years to generate images of virtually
anything imaginable. POV-Ray has even been used on the space shuttle! For more information on POV-Ray, or to download the
633
Raytracing
POV-Ray
latest version, please visit the POV-Ray Web site at www.povray.org. Chief Architect uses POV-Ray to generate raytraced images. Chief Architect knows how to communicate and manage POV-Ray directly, so you do not need to understand POV-Ray to create raytraced images from within Chief Architect. However, hobbyist raytracers or those interested in the highest possible visual quality may wish to learn about POV-Ray, to take advantage of the complete flexibility that it provides.
Exporting to POV-Ray Format

Note: You do not need to export a POV-Ray scene in order to raytrace in Chief Architect.
To use a Chief Architect scene in the POV-Ray raytracer, you can export your scene to POV-Ray format (.pov) file. You must be in a Render View to export to POV-Ray format. From the render view go to File> Export, and choose POVRay (.POV) from the list of file types. When exporting to a POV-Ray file, you have the option of including all of the images which are used in the scene. This will make a copy of the necessary textures and images into the same directory as the destination for your POV-Ray export.
634
Chapter 28:
Dimensions
Dimensions
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect provides many dimensioning tools. In addition, Dimension Lines can be selected, edited, and customized. Extension Lines can also be customized with the mouse or opened for specification. Dimensions are also useful for accurately relocating objects by changing the dimensions that locate them. Chief Archtiect can locate most objects, including Markers, Callouts and Terrain Elevation Points.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility With Previous Versions Dimension Defaults The Dimension Tools Displaying Dimension Lines Selecting Dimension Lines Deleting Dimension Lines Editing Dimension Lines Editing Extension Lines Dimensions and Importing/Exporting Relocating Objects Using Dimensions The Dimension Line Specification Dialog The Dimension Defaults Dialog
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Version 9. Being familiar with these changes is necessary if you will be opening plans from prior versions in Version 9. So that you can control how Chief Architect Version 9 handles these dimensions an option has been added to the Dimension Defaults dialog, Version 8 Compatible Accuracy. This option will be checked automatically for plans created in earlier versions, and will have an affect on your available options. For more information, see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649.
635
In Version 8, Extension Lines had two modes, normal and short. Version 9 offers full control over extension lines. If Version 8 Compatible Extensions is checked, you will not have this control. For more information, see Extensions Tab on page 655.
Accuracy
Chief Architect Version 9 utilizes a different method for rounding dimensions. Dimension runs always add up correctly. Prior versions displayed the distance between equally spaced objects correctly, but dimension runs werent always accurate when added. Dimensioning the same object in different ways will also obtain the same results in Version 9 as long as the object being
dimensioned is placed in the model with the same accuracy as the precision of the dimension lines. If, however, an object is placed using more precision than the dimensions, results may vary. An example is a 36 1/16" window centered on a wall that is 20' long. Since the precision of the centering is 1/32" you will get cases where a dimension differs by 1/16" from another. This is expected behavior as there is no "correct" answer. The solution to this is to force the window to be positioned to 1/16" accuracy.
A good approach is to turn on the accuracy indicators (see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649) and position the object so that the inaccuracy indicators do not appear.
Dimension Defaults
The settings in the Dimension Defaults dialog define the behavior and appearance of dimensions. A solid understanding of the options in this dialog is extremely valuable. For more information, see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649. Click Dimension, then press the Change Font button. Select the desired dimension font from the list of available fonts. This dimension font will become the new default for all Chief Architect plans, old and new. It can be changed at any time. If Chief Architect cannot find the specified font, or if the specified font is invalid for whatever reason, Chief will substitute Arial.
Default Dimension Fonts

Select Edit> Preferences> Appearance> Font to change the default dimension font.
The Dimension Tools

Click the Dimension Tools parent button to access the dimension tools. The Dimension tools can also be activated by selecting CAD> Dimension from the main menu.
636
The Dimension Tools
Click the Manual Dimension child button and drag a dimension line near or through the objects requiring dimensions. Drag perpendicular to walls. The dimension line will locate objects specified in the Locate Items tab which lie within the Manual Reach specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Each manual dimension line can be edited individually. For more information, see Editing Dimension Lines on page 641.
The End-to-End Dimension tool is used to dimension between any two defined points or objects in Plan View. Click the End-to-End Dimension tool, then drag the dimension from the first object to the second object. The dimension line will snap to each object, ignoring any other objects located between either end.
Angular Dimensions
The Angular Dimension tool can be used to display the angle between any two straight edges, including lines, walls, sides of boxes, polylines (straight sides only), cabinets or soffits. Any straight line or side within a CAD block may be dimensioned also. Edges nested up to four levels deep within a CAD block can be dimensioned. Click on the first line, then drag and release on the second. The line's start and end points should be as close as possible to the objects. Do not pull the angular dimension past the object as you might with a normal straight dimension line.
Drag manual dimension
The wall is 40" from where the dimension was created. This is too far, the dimension cannot reach the wall. The sink is within reach so is located
If using the Manual Dimension child button, dimension lines can be drawn at any of the allowed wall angles defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. For more information, see Plan Defaults on page 86. Manual dimension lines can be also be drawn at unrestricted angles if this preference is selected by pressing the Unrestricted Angles toolbar button, or by selecting Unrestricted under Allowed Angles in the CAD section of the Preferences dialog, see CAD Panel on page 104.
As with a straight dimension line, an angular dimension selected with other CAD objects can be included in a new CAD block. When the block is exploded the angular dimension may become invalid and disappear when
637
Dimensions
Manual Dimensions
End-to-End Dimensions
edited or changed. If this occurs, the angular dimension can be redrawn. Angular dimensions can be selected and moved by dragging from a handle along the arc in its middle. The dimension moves to maintain the location of its own arc's center. If one of the dimensioned objects is moved, the angular dimension adjusts, but may have to be moved manually to a more visible position. Double-click on an angular dimension to display the Dimension Line Specification dialog. This dialog allows the number height and arrowhead size to be changed, and the arrowhead type and fill to be specified. For more information, see The Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 646. The dimension can be placed on a CAD layer. If left on the default layer it will behave and appear as a normal manual dimension line.
information, see Locate Objects Tab on page 653.
Point to Point Dimensions

The Point to Point Dimension tool can be used to dimension between any two arbitrary locations. If you click or release the mouse within 3" of an object using the Point to Point Dimension tool, that object will be located. If no object can be found near the beginning or end of the dimension line, a point marker will be created. Point Markers have no text and show up as a "+" at either end of the dimension line. For more information, see Markers on page 671.
Interior Dimensions
The Interior Dimension child button is used to create interior dimensions. Draw a dimension line through walls (at right angles only), to create interior dimensions in Plan View. The Interior Dimension tool locates interior walls only. It will not dimension between surfaces in the same wall. Allowed dimension angles match the allowed wall angles for each plan. Interior Dimensions will locate either the wall surface or the main layer, depending on the settings in the Locate Items tab of the Dimension Defaults dialog. For more
Point Markers can be selected and edited. For more information, see Editing Markers on page 672. Point Markers become a permanent part of your plan until deleted. Deleting the Point to Point Dimension line that created the marker(s) will not delete these markers. If the objects and Point Markers located by a Point to Point Dimension line are
638
The Dimension Tools
The objects and Point Markers located by a Point to Point Dimension line can be accurately relocated by inputting new dimension values. For more information, see Relocating Objects Using Dimensions on page 644.
The Automatic Exterior Dimension tool is used to generate dimensions around a plans exterior in Plan View. The dimension lines locate walls and openings as specified in Dimension Defaults dialog. For more information, see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649.
Automatic Exterior Dimension will not generate properly where there is a gap in the exterior walls. Sometimes angled walls may not connect properly. If automatic dimensions do not generate, try Build> Wall> Fix Connections.
Baseline Dimensions
Click the Baseline Dimension child button, click near an object in Plan View and drag a dimension line near or through the objects requiring dimensions.
The Baseline Dimension tool creates a series of dimensions that all share the same origin, instead of continuing from each previous location. The dimension lines created by the Baseline Dimension tool are independent and can be edited separately. The spacing between lines is the Line Separation value, which is also used by automatic dimensions. For more information, see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649.
These dimensions may be edited individually, but all such editing will be lost when Automatic Dimensions are created again. To save an Automatic Dimension line it must be converted to a manual dimension line. To do this, move it to a user layer, or double-click on it to display the Dimension Line Specification dialog and uncheck "Automatic", see The Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 646. There are a maximum of three rows of automatically generated dimensions per exterior wall direction. The innermost dimension line locates exterior walls, interior walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The second dimension line locates exterior and interior walls. The outermost dimension line is the overall exterior dimension.
639
Dimensions
moved, the dimension will update to reflect the change.
Automatic Exterior Dimensions
Displaying Dimension Lines

Dimension Lines display in Plan, CAD Detail, Cross Section/Elevation and Layout Views. Dimension Lines created by any of the dimension tools share the same components.
Dimension Lines Dimension Labels
Dimension Lines run parallel with the distance being measured. Extension Lines are perpendicular to Dimension Lines, indicating where they begin and end. Arrowheads appear at the intersections of Dimension Lines and Extension Lines. Dimension Labels appear at the midpoint of Dimension Lines and display the distance of the Dimension Line. Dimension Lines can be placed on different layers, allowing their appearance to be customized. For more information, see Dimension Tab on page 647.
Extension Lines
Arrowheads
Selecting Dimension Lines

To select a Dimension Line, first click the Select Objects button or any of the Dimension Tools child buttons and click on a Dimension Line. Dimension Lines can also be selected by right-clicking on them in any drawing mode. When you have selected a Dimension Line, several handles will appear. For information on how these handles work, see Editing Dimension Lines on page 641. Once a dimension line is selected in Plan View, other Dimension Lines can be added to the selection set by holding down the Shift key. Angular Dimensions cannot be group selected.
Deleting Dimension Lines

Dimensions may be erased by drawing another dimension line over the first line. The entire dimension line or only a section may be erased in this way.
640
Editing Dimension Lines
Editing Dimension Lines

Dimension Lines can be selected and edited with the mouse in a number of ways. You can continue to edit Dimension Lines until you click another toolbar button. Dimension Lines can also be selected individually or multiply, and opened for specification. For more information, see The Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 646. Dimension Lines can be customized. Numbers and existing extension lines can be moved and deleted individually and new extension lines can be added. Select a Dimension Line with the mouse to display several handles. Each of these handles allows the Dimension Line to be edited in a different way. The handles are located in four locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. Where the Dimension Line was selected. At each Dimension Label. Just beyond each end of the Dimension Line. Where each extension line meets its mark. To move a Dimension Label, select the Dimension Line and grab the handle at the Dimension Label. The cursor should change to a Four-Headed Arrow . Click and drag this handle to move the Dimension Label. new wall location or use the Proximity Fixed option, see Extensions Tab on page 655.
To move a Dimension Line, select it and grab the red handle at its midpoint. The cursor should change to a Double-Headed Arrow . Click and drag this handle to move the Dimension Line perpendicular to itself.
Moving Dimension Labels
Moving Dimension Lines

If a wall is moved, some dimensions may remain in the original location. If the dimensions were generated automatically, regenerate them again to update them to the
641
Dimensions
Delete Dimension Lines after they have been selected by clicking the Delete edit button or pressing the Del key on the keyboard.
Editing Extension Lines

Extension Lines can be added and edited with the mouse. Extension Lines are also affected by the settings on the Extensions tab of the Dimension Specification dialog. For more information, see The Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 646.
Adding Extension Lines

To add an Extension Line to an existing Dimension Line: 1. 2. Select the Dimension Line. Grab the handle just beyond either end of the Dimension Line. The cursor will change to a Double-Headed Arrow 3. . Drag the cursor to the object that you would like a new Extension Line to locate. In this example we will add an Extension Line to the Windows edge. 5. Release the button to add an Extension Line.
Moving Extension Lines

Extension Lines can be moved to locate the centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In this example an Extension Line is moved from the windows edge to the center. To move an Extension Line: 4. As you drag the cursor a temporary line will appear indicating where an Extension Line can be added. 1. 2. Select the Dimension Line it is connected to, not the extension line itself. Grab the handle that appears where the Extension Line meets the mark. The cursor will change to a double-headed arrow .
642
Editing Extension Lines
1. 2.
Select the Extension Line to reveal two handles. Grab either handle with the mouse to reveal the Resize cursor. Extend or contract the Extension Line and release the mouse.
3.
Deleting Extension Lines

3. Drag the cursor to a new location. The Extension Line will snap to possible marks as the cursor is moved. Release the button. When an extension line is deleted the remaining dimensions will be updated. To remove an extension line: 1.
Dimension lines will not locate library objects when the dimension line is drawn, but an extension line of an existing dimension line can be moved or added to locate a library object.
4.
Select the Dimension Line it is connected to, not the extension line itself. Grab the extension handle.
2.
3.
Drag it perpendicular to the direction of the arrows, away from any dimensionable object, and release the button.
643
Dimensions
Editing the Length of Extension Lines
Dimensions and Importing/Exporting

Chief Architect supports the import and export of aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions. Imported dimensions which are not supported by Chief Architect can be edited only as lines and text. CAD blocks containing dimensions as text must be exploded before the text can be edited separately. For more on exploding, see CAD Blocks on page 726.
Relocating Objects Using Dimensions

Any object can be quickly moved by changing the dimension value which locates it. This technique can be applied to nearly any situation where dimensions are present, including angular dimensions. If the appropriate dimension line is not already available, create it using the techniques covered in the previous section. Mastering this technique will save time. If you do not know which dimension is related to the object you want to move, select the object and drag it in the desired direction. As you drag, watch to see which dimensions update. These dimensions are the dimensions which may be used to move that object. To move an object accurately: 1. 2. Select the object and click on the dimension that will be used to locate it. The Set Dimension Line dialog displays. The Previous Value will be displayed. 3. 4. Enter a value in the New Value field to relocate the object. The selected object will be moved unless there is another object blocking it.
Moving a CAD Object With Dimensions

The same principles apply when moving CAD objects. Make sure dimensions are set to locate CAD objects on the Locate Items tab of the Dimension Defaults dialog. When two objects are parallel, selecting one will create a temporary dimension line to the other. This temporary dimension line may be used to move the CAD object. Always make sure that the endpoints of the dimension line are in the desired location. Sometimes it may be easier to position a manually created dimension for moving an object rather than using temporary dimensions which may locate the wrong sides.
644
Relocating Objects Using Dimensions
When you are resizing a house using dimensions it is important that you work your way around the house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a time in succession so that you do not redefine specified dimensions.
This task is much easier to accomplish before interior walls, doors and windows are placed.
3.
Click OK
1.
Sketch the general shape of the house using the Exterior Wall tool. Generate exterior dimensions with the Automatic Exterior Dimension child button.
4. 5. 6.
Click the Automatic Exterior Dimension child button again. Fill Window . Repeat steps 2 & 3, adjusting each wall sequentially as you work your way around the house until done.
2.
Select a wall, click a related dimension, type new values.
645
Dimensions
Resizing a House With Exterior Dimensions
Using Angular Dimensions

Angular Dimensions are useful for adjusting the angles of CAD lines and walls. 1. Draw the Angular Dimension line, beginning and ending the line on the objects you wish to move.
3.
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
Click on the dimension value to open the
4.
Click OK.
2.
Select the object you wish to move.
The Dimension Line Specification Dialog

To open the Dimension Line Specification dialog, double-click on a dimension line in Select Objects mode or Manual Dimension mode, or select a dimension line or group of dimension lines and click the Open Object edit button.
646
The Dimension Line Specification Dialog
1 3 5
2 4
number height for the selected dimension. Type "d" in the box to reset the number size to the default. the selected dimension. Type NONE to reset the dimension to the Manual Dimension layer or the Automatic Dimensions layer. The dimension line will reflect the line color and style of the layer it is on. display from feet and inches to inches only. Uncheck it to display that dimension in feet and inches. This is only available in imperial mode. display of those portions of the dimension line that stretch between two surfaces of the same wall. It will still locate both sides of the interior walls but will not display the wall thickness.
1 Number Height - Define a new
2 Layer - Define a User layer to contain
line to a manual dimension line, and vice versa. An automatically produced dimension line that is changed to a manual one will not be deleted when automatic dimensions are produced again.
3 Inches Only - Check this to change the
4 External Only - Check this to suppress
5 Automatic/Manual Toggle - Check
this to change an automatic dimension
647
Dimensions
Dimension Tab
Extension Tab
1 3 5 2 4 6 7
The Extension Tab is not available for multiply selected dimensions.

Note: The settings in this dialog will have no affect on the selected Dimension Line if the option Version 8 Compatible Extensions is checked in the Dimension Defaults dialog. For more information, see Extensions Tab on page 655.
dimension line is moved, the extension line will update, and the gap will be maintained. Specify a fixed length for the portion of the extension line that points toward the marked object. Specify a fixed length for the portion of the extension line that points away from the marked object. specify a fixed distance between the marked object and the dimension line. This will have no effect when the mark is at the arrowhead. You can only fix the proximity for a single extension line. apply the settings on this Tab to all of the Extension Lines on the selected Dimension Line.
4 Length Towards Marked Object -
5 Length Away From Marked Object -
down list to select which extension line of the selected Dimension Line is being specified. The numbers for each Extension Line display above the Dimension Line in Plan View when it is selected. would like to use the Plan Default settings for the current Extension Lines. For more information, see The Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 649.
1 Selected Extension - Click the drop
6 Proximity Fixed - Check this to
2 Use Plan Defaults - Check this if you
7 Apply to All - Click this button to
3 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a fixed gap between the marked object and the end of the extension line. If the
648
The Dimension Defaults Dialog
1 2 3
1 Type - Select a different arrowhead for

this dimension string. Default - Check this box to set this lines arrowhead to the default type specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
Default - Check this to use the default arrowhead fill color specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. arrowhead. This will be in scale inches (or mm). Default - Check this box to use the default arrowhead size specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
3 Size - Specify the size of this
2 Fill Color - Choose a different Fill

Color for this arrowhead.

You can control how you use dimensions and how they display in the Dimension Defaults dialog. A solid understanding of the various options in this dialog is important. Select Options> Defaults Setup> Dimension Defaults, or double-click the Dimension Tools parent button to access the Dimension Defaults dialog. The settings in this dialog are saved with the plan. Once you have the settings correct it is recommended that you save the setting in your default template file for use in future plans. For more information, see Plan Templates on page 72.
649
Dimensions
Arrow Tab
Setup Tab - Left Side

Imperial Plans Metric Plans
1
3 5
2 4 6 8
10
dimension would display: 7' 1/2. Yet if 0" is also checked, the same value would display: 7'- 0 1/2. Check this box to display inches in decimal format. For example 3 feet 1 1/2 inches would be represented as 3 1.5". to display feet or meters in decimal format. For example 5 feet 2 1/2 inches would be represented as 5.5208 feet.
this box to display dimensions in abbreviated eighths, or millimeters. For instance, 5' 3-1/2 would display as 5'3" 4, with the 4 representing 4/8 which is equal to 1/2. A dimension which does not have an exact equivalent in eighths will be rounded up to the nearest eighth (i.e. 7' 6-3/16 would round to 7'6"2). box to display dimensions in fraction format, or centimeters. This is the more precise of the two options.
1 Eighth Inches/Millimeters - Check
3 Decimal Inches/Centimeters/mm -
4 Decimal Feet/Meters - Check this box
2 1/16 Inches/Centimeters - Check this
0" - Check this box to supply a zero after the decimal, even if there is no fractional part. This will display whole numbers of inches even if it is zero, and will place a dash between feet and inches. If 1/16th Inches is also checked, the double quote () will always appear after the dimension. For example, when 1/16 Inches is checked but 0" is not checked, the following
to have all of the dimensions display above the dimension line, rather than in the center of the line. zeros out to 3 decimal places. For example 314.500 instead of 3.145.
5 Number Above Line - Check this box
6 Add Zeros - Check this box to display 7 Check Imperial and/or Metric to
define the units which are used for displaying dimensions. Although Imperial
650
When using the metric system the default value is 10 mm. The maximum value allowed is 480mm. Unrestricted - Select this option to allow movement increments of 1/16th inch. to indicate dimension values that are not accurate with the ~ symbol.
the incremental units that are allowed when placing walls, doors and windows, or when moving an object with the mouse. The dimensions appear in the toolbar as an object is dragged. This does not affect how Dimensions are created. Inches/mm - Select this option to restrict the snap unit to a specified number of inches. Change the value if desired. The default
8 Wall & Opening Snap Unit - Defines
9 Use ~ Before Number - Check this box
box to indicate that the actual dimension value is higher or lower than the value shown.
10 Use +, or - After Number - Check this
Setup Tab - Right Side

Imperial Plans Metric Plans
12 14 16 18 20 22 11 Number Height - Specify the scaled
11 13 15 17 19 21 23
will be no smaller than this value. This does not affect printed or exported output. To see the dimension numbers on the screen at the printing scale, set this value to 0. Changing this value will affect all dimensions immediately.
height, in inches or mm, of dimension numbers. 6" will print a 1/8 tall number at 1/ 4 = 1 scale. minimum screen size (in pixels) for dimension numbers. The screen dimensions
12 Min. Number Size - Specifies
651
Dimensions
plans always use the Imperial dimensions, dimensions may be changed to display in Metric only or in both Metric and Imperial units simultaneously. These options are not available in Metric plans.
value is 1. Fractions are allowed. The maximum value allowed is 48.
defines how closely the mouse and the selected object move together while dragging. 1 means 1:1, or that both move at exactly the same speed. 8 means 1:8, or that the mouse must move 8 units to make the selected object move by 1 unit. (In other words, the selected object moves 1/8th as fast as the mouse.) This can be used to move walls and openings more accurately. If you wish change the moving speed temporarily, press a number key (along the top of the keyboard) while moving a wall or door or window. The moving speed will be changed for that move only, and will return to normal as soon as the selected object is released. automatic dimension lines will reach to locate objects along exterior walls that are set back. The default is 192 inches. If exterior walls are set back farther than this, a second set of dimension lines will be produced to dimension the set back walls. manually drawn dimension lines will reach to locate walls and/or objects specified in the Locate Items tab. (in scale inches or mm) between the exterior wall and the first automatic dimension line. (in scale inches or mm) between automatic and baseline dimension lines.
13 Moving Speed - (allowed values 1-9)
Automatic Exterior Dimensions generate dimensions.
tool to
layer which manually drawn dimension lines will be placed on. Enter a Layer number between 100-199 to place manual dimensions on a User layer. The default is NONE, which means that manual dimensions will be placed on the Architectural layer - Manual Dimensions. Opening to have the Automatic Exterior Dimensions tool locate doors and windows automatically. If the check is removed, openings may still be located using the Manual Dimension tool.
19 Current Layer - Defines the User
20 Check the Auto box next to Locate
14 Automatic Reach - Specify how far
Dimension to have the Automatic Exterior Dimensions tool locate the overall exterior dimensions.
21 Check the Auto box next to Overall
15 Manual Reach - Specify how far
16 1st Line Offset - Specify the distance
box to have all subsequently created Manual Dimensions show inches only (37" instead of 3-1). This does not affect existing dimensions. Uncheck this box to return to drawing Manual Dimensions using feet and inches. Imperial plans only. more information, see Compatibility With Previous Versions on page 635.
22 New Lines Inches Only - Check this
23 Version 8 Compatible Accuracy - For
17 Line Separation - Specify the distance 18 Min. Dimen Area - Specify the
minimum enclosed area needed for the
Note: The default settings for dimension line Color, Style and Line Weight are defined in the Layer Display Options dialog on the Architectural layers Manual Dimensions and Automatic Dimensions. If the dimension line was placed on a numbered CAD layer, then these attributes are set by that layer.
652
The Locate Items tab defines whether or not dimension lines locate specific types of objects. Changes made in this box affect only
new dimension lines, not those already drawn.
1
3
9 2 4 6 8 10
5 7
Walls - This section affects both the Automatic Exterior Dimensions and Manual Dimension tools. by outer surface and interior walls by one of their surfaces.
1 Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls 2 Select Main Layer Surfaces to locate
walls. It will dimension the wall thickness as well. The surface dimensioned will be either the outside surface or the main layer surface, depending on the option selected above. dimensions to ignore the interior surface of exterior walls. It will still locate both surfaces of an interior wall, but will not display the wall thickness. Internal only is available only when Both Wall Surfaces is checked.
5 Checking Internal Only will cause the
exterior walls by the outer surface of the main layer and interior walls by a main layer surface.
dimension lines locate the centers of interior walls. (Exterior walls will be dimensioned by the option selected above.)
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to have
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have
dimension lines locate both surfaces of
653
Dimensions
Locate Objects Tab
Both Wall Surfaces
Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only

Cabinets - Choose none, one, or both locate options. This section affects only Manual Dimensions. sides. The sides must be perpendicular to the dimension line. corners of all cabinets within the manual reach area. Angled cabinets will be dimensioned to their corners at a right angle to the dimension line. The cabinet fronts or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line.
6 Sides - Check this to locate cabinet 7 Corners - Check this to locate the
Electrical - Check this to locate electrical objects. You can use this option once you are ready to precisely position electrical objects.
method of dimensioning windows and doors. This section affects both the Automatic and Manual Dimension tools.
9 Openings - Check this for the preferred
Centers - Check this to locate dimensions to the center of windows and doors. Sides - Check this to locate both sides of windows and doors. This does not dimension the rough opening. It dimensions to the window or doors nominal width. Casing - Check this to locate both sides of windows and doors at the edge of the casing. Because casing can have different widths on each side of an exterior wall, an opening may show different widths depending on which of its sides the dimension line is drawn. Rough Opening - Check this to locate both sides of windows and doors at the rough opening. When editing dimension lines and
654
Note: If neither box is checked, Automatic dimensions will default to locating the centers of openings. Manually drawn dimensions will not locate openings at all.
10 CAD Objects - Affects only Manual

Dimensions of 2D objects.
Ends/Corners - Check this to locate all ends of lines or corners of polylines, no matter what angle they are in relation to the dimension line.
Extensions Tab
1 2 3 4
fixed gap between the marked object and the end of the extension line. If the dimension line is moved, the extension line will update, and the gap will be maintained.
1 Gap From Marked Object - Specify a
the extension line that points toward the marked object. Specify a fixed length for the portion of the extension line that points away from the marked object.
3 Length Away From Marked Object -
2 Length Towards Marked Object -
Specify a fixed length for the portion of
655
Dimensions
moving their marks, this must be checked in order to place a mark at the rough opening. Otherwise a mark can be placed at the opening side or the casing edge, but not at the rough opening.
Line/Sides - Check this to locate lines and sides which are perpendicular to the dimension line. If the lines or sides are not perpendicular to the dimension line they will not be dimensioned. In CAD mode, dimensions will automatically locate perpendicular CAD lines or sides whether this is selected or not.
specify a fixed proximity between the marked object and the dimension line. This will have no effect when the mark is at the arrowhead. If you specify fixed proximity as your default automatic dimensions will set the closest mark as fixed proximity. Automatic dimensions ignore the fixed proximity default and use the default spacing values.
4 Proximity Fixed - Check this to
You can only fix the proximity for a single extension line. Check this if you would like your extensions to function as they did in Version 8. For more information, see Compatibility With Previous Versions on page 635. short, uniform-length extension lines created instead of the extension lines reaching the object it locates.
5 Version 8 Compatible Extensions -
6 Short Extensions - Check this to have 5
Arrow Tab
1 2 3
The Arrowheads tab controls the arrowhead style of all dimension lines which have not been set individually. You can assign different types of arrowheads, fill the arrowheads with different colors and define the size.
area which can be filled, specify the desired color. arrowhead in scale inches (mm). It is the length of the arrowhead, not the line attached to it. If you want the arrowhead to be 1/8 long when printed, and you plan to print at 1/4=1 scale, you should set the size to 6.
2 Fill Color - If the arrowhead has an
3 Size - This number is the length of the
1 Type - Choose the style of arrowhead

from the list.
656
Chapter 29:
Text
Text
Chapter Overview
Sometimes the best way to draw attention to design elements is to simply use text. Text can be added in Plan View, Cross Section/ Elevation Views, interior elevations and Layout. Text can be placed on different layers and set to display only when you want it to. Arrows can also be added to text objects, allowing you to direct attention to specific plan details.
Chapter Contents
Fonts Text Displaying Text Selecting Text Editing Text Text Specification Dialog Text Arrows Printing Text Text and Layout
Fonts
Chief Architect allows multiple fonts to be used within the same file. Only one font may be defined for each text object, but each text object may use a different font. Default fonts are set globally. They are stored in the Windows Registry and affect all plans. When a plan file is opened, the program references the Text Objects panel of the
Preferences dialog. Text objects that have
not been individually defined use the default font specified in this dialog. Any font which has been individually defined in the Text Specification dialog will be used for that particular text object. If you are sharing files across different computers you should make sure all
657
computers have the same default font settings. If default font preferences are different, text objects using the default font will draw differently. This affects wrapping and the amount of space that a text object uses.
If you are referencing a default font which is not available on your system you will get a "missing fonts" error message when starting Chief Architect. Correct this by going into your preferences and changing your default font to one that exists on your system. If you do not do this, Windows will substitute a font for you.
Text
Text can be added in Plan View, Cross Section/Elevation Views, interior Wall Elevations , or in Layout. The techniques are the same for each. Click the Text button or select CAD> Text> Text. Once the Text mode is active, click where you would like the center of the first line of text to appear. The Text Specification dialog displays. For more information, see Text Specification Dialog on page 662. In Cross Section/Elevation or Wall Elevation Views, the CAD tools must be activated before text may be added. Press the F2 key on your keyboard or click the CAD Mode On button. Up to thirty two thousand characters can be inserted in one text object. The system will truncate your text to this amount if you enter any more. It is usually more convenient to use several smaller text objects if you have a lot of text to insert.
Text With Arrow

A text object with an attached arrow can be created similarly with the Text With Arrow child button or by selecting CAD> Text> Text With Arrow from the menu. Once Text mode is active, click where you would like the center of the first line of text to appear. The Text Specification dialog displays. For more information, see Text Specification Dialog on page 662.
Displaying Text
Text and Layers
Unless specified otherwise, text objects are placed on the Architectural layer Text. A text object can be placed on any CAD layer so that it displays and can be edited only when the specified layer displays. It is highly recommended that you use CAD layers on the User tab of the Layer Display Options dialog, see CAD Layers on page 129. Many text objects should only display at certain times. For instance, electrical notes
658
Selecting Text
can be attached to the Electrical plan, so they are not visible in the Framing plan. To accomplish this, assign text objects to different CAD layers for each plotting scenario. To move text to a different layer, select the text object or group of objects, then click the Open Object edit button. The Text Specification dialog will open. Change
In Wall Elevation and Cross Section Views

The Text tool in Wall Elevation and Views is Cross Section/Elevation available through the CAD facility. It functions the same as in Plan View. All CAD layers are also available in cross section or elevation, but most of the architectural layers cannot be accessed from either of these views. The default Text layer may be accessed from the 3D view if CAD mode is active, even though most of the other architectural layers are inaccessible.
the value in the Layer field to be a CAD layer number, usually between 100 and 199. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
Selecting Text
To select a single text object, click on the text object while in Text or Select Objects mode, or right-click on it in any mode. When the handles display, click the Open Object edit button to access the Text Specification dialog for that individual text object. You may also open the text object for specification by double-clicking on the text object in either Text or Select Objects mode. 2. Then hold down the Shift key and drag a marquee across the area containing the text to be selected. Only text objects will be selected. Add to or subtract from the selection set by holding down the Shift key and clicking on objects.
3.
Selecting Multiple Text Objects

Multiple text objects may be selected by dragging a selection marquee while in Text mode. This selection method will limit the selections to text only. 1. Activate the Text tool.
If the marquee is used in Select Objects mode or other modes, additional objects such as cabinets, furniture and CAD objects will also be selected. If a group contains only text objects, clicking on the Open Object edit button displays the Text Specification dialog. You cannot change the contents of the selected text objects, but you can change anything else. If a group contains even one other object, such as a CAD object, then the Open Object edit button will not display.
659
Text
Editing Text
Deleting Text
Delete some of the contents of a text box by opening the text object and using the Backspace or Del key in the Text Specification dialog. Click OK and the text will update in your view. Delete the entire text object (or group of objects) by selecting it, then clicking the Delete edit button or the Del key. 2. 3. Move the cursor over the center handle. When the pointer becomes a fourheaded arrow , drag the text object to the new location.
Reshaping Text
The rectangle surrounding a text object can be made either wider or narrower, forcing the contents to fit on fewer lines or more lines. To reshape a text object, select it. When the handles appear, move the cursor above the handle on either of the two sides. When the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow, click and drag the edge in or out to reshape the text box. As the display area narrows, the number of text lines will increase.
When text objects are group selected, move them as a unit using one of the following methods: Grab the center handle and move the objects vertically or horizontally. Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the center handle, and move the objects freely in any direction. When the text is selected, click the Pointto-Point Move button at the right side of the toolbar. Then either drag the cursor from any location to any other location, or click on the start location then click on the end location. If you drag between the two points, the selected objects will be restricted to a vertical or horizontal move. If you click between the two points, there are no restrictions in direction. The Move Object edit button can also be used with text. For more information, see Move Object on page 716.
Moving Text
A single text object will move freely in any direction. 1. Select the text object.
660
Editing Text
Rotating Text
Select the text. Grab the triangular handle at the top and drag the cursor right or left to rotate the text. The text will rotate.
For Example: 1. Highlight a block of text objects from the Material List, and press Ctrl +C to copy them to the Windows clipboard. Return to the Plan View and activate the Text tool. Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied materials into the text box, then click OK. The text object will appear on screen. Select the text object and note the additional lines with handles separating each column.
2. 3. 4. The Rotate Object edit button can also be used with text. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717. 5. 6.
Copy, Cut and Paste

Copy, Cut and Paste of text in the Text Specification dialog uses the Windows clipboard. This makes it possible to tranfer text from your plan into other applications or to import text from any program in Windows and input that text into Chief Architect. General Notes can be created and saved in a word processing program, then copied and pasted into a text box. Sections of the Material List can also be copied and pasted into a text box or a word processing or spreadsheet program.
The ability to copy and paste between word processing programs and Chief Architect is especially useful for spelling, grammar, and other common text editing functions.
Drag the handles to adjust column spacing.
Aligning Text
To align text, select it and click the Align Left edit button, Align Right edit button, Center edit button, or Justify edit button. Using these edit buttons to align text is the same as using the Alignment drop down box on the Attributes Tab. For more information, see Attributes Tab on page 663.
Note: The Justify edit button will appear to left justify a single line of text. It only effects text that is wrapped automatically. The last line in a block of justified text will be left justified. This is consistent with word processors that use "Enter" to insert a paragraph break.
Tab Spacing
Tab spacing for tabbed text objects can be visually edited.
661
Text
Click on screen to place a text object.
Text Specification Dialog

The Text Specification dialog is used for the creation of a new text object and for the editing of an existing one. It can also be displayed for a selected group that contains only text objects. When text is group selected, the actual text content of the objects cannot be changed, but everything else (character height, color, transparent background, etc.) can be. To jump from the text entry area to Character Height using the keyboard, press Shift + Tab . height in scale inches. (When Metric units are used, the height is in mm.) For example, if you will be printing at = 1-0 scale, then every 1-0 or 12" on the plan would print in layout at high. If the printed text size is to be 1/8, the text Character Height should be 6.
Note: The actual height of the text is based on the approximate height of an uppercase character. There will be a small variation of height with different fonts.
2 Character Height - Specify the text
Text Tab
2 3 5 4
make the Preferences dialog match the settings in this Text Specification dialog. This new character height becomes the height for all subsequently created text objects. box to make the text background transparent, allowing objects behind the text to show through. Unless this is checked, text will have a background which will block out anything behind it. prevent the selected text from rotating if the Rotate View command is invoked. If selected, the position of its center point will rotate with the plan, but the angle of the text itself will not change.
3 Make Default - Check this box to
4 Transparent Background - Check this
Do not press the Enter key until totally done entering text and making any other modifications. Text will automatically flow to the new line. To force a new line in the text box, press Enter . You can also use tabs in your text by simply pressing the Tab key in the appropriate spot.
1 Text Entry Box - Enter the new text.
5 Rotate with Plan - Check this box to
662
Text Specification Dialog
Attributes Tab
Display of text objects is controlled by the layer properties for the assigned layer. for the selected text object(s). Your choice will display at right.
5 Font - Click to select a different font 6 Use Default - Select the check box to 7 Tabs - The edit box defines the number Text
1 2 3 4 5 7 9 6 8
make the text objects use the default font as set in the Preferences dialog.
of spaces from the left edge of the text box at which each new column will begin. The first column will always start at 0. In this case, the second column (following the first Tab ) starts 10 spaces in, the next at 20 spaces, etc. Default Tab settings can be defined in the Preferences dialog. with tabs display with gridlines separating the rows and columns of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a simple box is drawn around the text.
selected text object(s) by choosing a different color. define the color by the Layer color defined in the Layer Display Options dialog.
1 Color - Change the color for the
8 Check Box/Grid to have a text object
2 Use default - Select the check box to
9 Select an option from the drop down

list to align the selected text.
selected text object(s). If the Layer is set to NONE it refers to the Architectural layer Text in the Layer Display Options dialog. To change the layer to a CAD layer, enter the appropriate number between 0 and 199. have the newly defined CAD layer become the default layer for subsequently created text objects. If a CAD layer is used and the Use Default check box is selected next to the Color button, the color of the new layer will replace the previous color.
3 Layer - Define the Layer for the
Arrow Tab
1 2 3 4 5 7 6
4 Make Default - Select the check box to
663
to have an arrow attached to the selected text object(s).
1 Include Arrow - Select the check box 2 Type - Select an arrowhead type.
use the default line weight for that layer, see Layer Properties on page 127.
5 Line Weight - Specify a line weight or
Default - Check this box to assign the default settings to the selected text. For more information, see Text Objects Panel on page 95.
Default - Check this box to assign the default settings to the selected text.
6 Second Arrow - Select the check box

turn this arrow into a Special Use arrow.
to add a second arrow to the text object.
3 Fill Color - Choose a color to fill the arrowhead. This will only affect the styles of arrows which have a filled area.
Default - Check this box to assign the default settings to the selected text.
7 Special Use - Select the check box to
4 Size - Specify the size (in inches or

millimeters) for the arrowhead. Default - Check this box to assign the default settings to the selected text.
A Special Use Arrow will replace the first number in the text object with the height of the following objects: footings, slabs, foundation slabs, custom countertops, and stair landings. The arrow must be placed on one of these objects. The text prior to the first number is limited to 50 characters. For more information, see Special Use Arrow on page 665.
Text Arrows
Text arrows can be modified individually, as well as globally. To add an arrow to a text entry: 1. 2. 3. Select the Text entry. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Text Specification dialog. Check Include Arrow on the Arrow tab of the Text Specification dialog to have a single arrow attached from the midpoint of the text box pointing straight left. Select the text. Grab the handle on the arrowhead and position it on the plan. 7. 6. If a bend or joint is needed in the Text Arrow, select the text again and this time grab the middle handle of the arrow leader. This joint can be placed anywhere. Move it into place. As you drag the arrowhead, the arrow will attach to the nearest corner or center of an edge.
4. 5.
When a text object is moved, its arrow will remain in place. If a joint has been added, remove it by adjusting the arrow so that it is nearly straight. The joint will lock back in place as it was when originally created, and the arrow will respond to movement as though there is no joint.
664
Text Arrows
To remove the arrow, move its arrowhead into the center of the text, or remove the check for Include Arrow in the Text Specification dialog. Check Second Arrow to produce a second arrow. It is positioned independently, but otherwise will behave like the first one.
Lines with arrows can be drawn directly with the Line With Arrow child button. For more information, see Line with Arrow on page 679.
Special Use Arrow
1 2
Original
Number is replaced when arrow is moved onto footing.
1 To use the Special Use Arrow feature

the text needs to include a number. tab.
2 Select Include Arrow on the Arrow 3 Select Special Use to change this arrow
into a special use arrow.
Drag the arrow and place it on a stem wall, footing, slab, foundation slab, custom counter top or stair landing. The Special Use Arrow replaces the first number in the text with the height of the object it is on, relative to the first floor elevation of 0-0.
665
Text
You must Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings before the text will update.
Printing Text
Text does not always print exactly as it appears on screen. One way to get a better idea of how text will print is to zoom in on it. A table has been prepared to help you determine what size your text should be set for printing purposes. For more information, see Printing Text and Dimensions on page 837.
Text and Layout

The character height and arrowhead size for layout text is its actual size when the layout sheet is printed. Thus you can expect these sizes to be much smaller than sizes used in plan and other views. Layout text will be 1/ 8 tall instead of 6".
666
Chapter 30:
Callouts & Markers
Chapter Overview
Callouts and Markers are a common way to raise attention to special details in plans. They come in a variety of shapes, and can be customized in a variety of ways. Click the Text parent button in Plan View or Layout View to access the Callout , and Marker child buttons.
Chapter Contents
Callouts Selecting Callouts Editing Callouts Callout Specification Dialog Markers Selecting Markers Editing Markers Marker Specification Dialog
Callouts
Click the Callout child button and then in Plan View where you would like the Callout to be placed. The Callout Specification dialog will display. For more information, see Callout Specification Dialog on page 669. Click OK to close the Callout Specification dialog and the Callout will appear in Plan View.
Pointers and Arrows

Callouts can have arrows and/or pointers added. With With Circles without cross Pointer Arrow section lines can have several pointers added. Circles with cross section lines can have only one pointer added.To add a pointer to a Callout, select the Callout and click near the outside of the circle. A pointer will be created.
667
Callouts & Markers
If there is a cross section line, only one pointer may be created. Change the pointers direction by selecting the Callout and dragging the red handle appearing just beyond the pointer.
Remove a pointer by selecting the Callout and dragging the pointers handle into the center of the Callout. Change a pointer into an arrow by dragging the handle away from the Callout. You can form up to two arrows in this way. Each arrow will be jointed and behave the same as a text object arrow.
Selecting Callouts
In Select Objects mode or in Callout mode, click on the Callout to be selected. You may also group select the Callouts by holding down the Shift key and dragging a marquee around them while in Callout mode. If more than one Callout is selected, clicking
Callout Specification dialog. You will be
the Open Object
edit button will open the
able to change the appearance, but not the text. For more information, see Editing Callouts on page 668.
Editing Callouts
Text, size, layer, and color can be changed for an existing Callout. Select the Callout. Click the Open Object edit button, or double-click on the Callout while in Callout mode. The Callout Specification dialog will open. For more information, see Callout Specification Dialog on page 669. Delete a cross section line by selecting the Callout and grabbing the handle located near the end of the cross section line and dragging it to the center of the Callout. Or open the specification and clear the Cross Section Line check box.
Deleting Callouts
Select the Callout (s). Click the Delete edit button or press the Del key.
Cross Section Lines

Select the Cross Section Line check box on the Callout tab of the Callout Specification dialog to add a cross section line perpendicular to the nearest wall. Cross section lines can be added to any shape. Move or stretch the cross section line by selecting the Callout and dragging from the handle near the end of the cross section line.
Moving & Rotating Callouts

Move and rotate Callouts as you would text. For more information, see Moving Text on page 660, and Rotating Text on page 661.
668
Callout Specification Dialog
The Move Object edit button can also be used. For more information, see Move Object on page 716. The Rotate Object edit button can also be used. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
fit the text. Adding more text to either the top or bottom area will enlarge the Callouts size as well, unless you have checked "Specify Callout Size". Callout size can be adjusted without regard to its contents by checking Specify Callout Size in the Callout tab of the Callout Specification dialog. The value entered will dictate that individual Callouts size. Uncheck the box to allow the Callout to automatically adjust.
Resizing Callouts
Changing the character height in the Callout Specification dialog will increase text size. The Callout will adjust to
Callout Specification Dialog

Click the Callout child button and then in Plan View where you would like the Callout to be placed. The Callout Specification dialog will display.
Callout Tab
1 2 3 4 5
1 Callout Label - Enter the text for the

top row of the Callout.
2 Text Below Line - Enter text for a

bottom row if desired.
669
Callouts & Markers
box to add a Cross Section Line. Cross section lines may be added to any shape.
3 Cross Section Line- Select the check 4 Define the Callout shape.
to specify individual Callout size in inches or mm. If this box is left unchecked, the Callout will be sized according to the size of the text in the Callout.
5 Specify Callout Size - Check this box
Attributes Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6
Character Height of the Callout text. Callout size will adjust based on text height if you have not specified a Callout size. have new Callouts default to the new Character Height.
1 Character Height - Define the
2 Make Default - Select the check box to
use the color of the layer on which the Callout is located, rather than defining the color apart from the layer. Callout is to be placed.
4 Color - Define the Color of the Callout. 5 Use Default - Select the check box to

If the layer is called NONE, the Callout will be located on the layer named Text on the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog. Otherwise enter a number between 0 and 199 here to place it on a CAD layer.
3 No Rotate with Plan - Select the check box to prevent the Callout from rotating when the plan is rotated. The Callouts center will still move with other objects as the plan rotates, but the orientation of the Callout will not change.
670
Markers
Arrow Tab
1 2 3
desired for the selected Callout object(s).
1 Type - Choose the type of arrowhead
arrowhead. This will only affect the styles of arrows which have a filled area. or millimeters).
2 Fill Color - Choose a color to fill the 3 Size - Specify arrowhead size (in inches
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test Borings and Point Markers can be placed in Plan View, Cross Sections, or CAD Details. Framing Reference Markers should only be placed in Plan Views. To create a Marker select the Marker child button. Click in Plan View to create a Marker. The Marker Specification dialog will appear. For more information, see Marker Specification Dialog on page 672. You can also place a Framing Reference marker by using the Framing Reference child button directly. For more information, see Framing Reference Markers on page 382. In addition, you can place point markers by using the Point to Point Dimension tool directly. Point Markers will be placed automatically if you use the Point to Point Dimension tool and the dimension does not locate an existing object to snap to. For more information, see Point to Point Dimensions on page 638.
671
Callouts & Markers
Selecting Markers
In Select Objects mode or in Marker mode, click on a Marker to select it. You may also group select multiple Markers by holding down the Shift key and dragging a marquee around them while in Select Objects mode.
Editing Markers
Markers can be selected and edited in a number of ways. The Move Object edit button can also be used. For more information, see Move Object on page 716.
Deleting Markers
Select the Marker(s). Click the Delete edit button or press the Del key.
Rotating Markers
Any Marker can be rotated. Select it, then grab the handle at the end of the line between the two rows of text. Drag the handle to rotate (or stretch) it. The text will always be centered along the line. The Rotate Object edit button can also be used. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
Moving Markers
Move Markers as you do text objects. For more information, see Moving Text on page 660, and Rotating Text on page 661. A new Marker or moved Marker positioned near a CAD point, CAD object, or wall surface will snap to it.
Marker Specification Dialog

To create a Marker select the Marker child button from the Text child toolbar.
Marker Specification dialog will appear.
Click in Plan View to create a Marker. The
672
Marker Tab
1 2 3 4 5 Callouts & Markers 673
1 Text Above Line - Enter optional text

to be placed above the line.
Attributes Tab
The Attributes tab for Markers is the same as the Attributes tab for Callouts, see Attributes Tab on page 670.
2 Text Below Line - Enter optional text to be placed below the line (Level Line Marker only). 3 Marker Type - Choose the type of
Marker to create. Level Line Test Boring Point Marker Framing Reference Only the Framing Reference has an effect on your model. The other Marker types are only cosmetically different. Marker in 3D space. Changes will not affect Plan View. Height can only be entered for a Level Line and Point Marker.
4 Height - Enter the Height of the
Marker Radius - Enter the radius, in inches (or millimeters) for the Marker.
674
Chapter 31:
CAD
Chapter Overview
With the 2D Computer Aided Drawing (CAD) tools included in Chief Architect you can add the necessary details to create complete working drawings. CAD details may be created once and then used multiple times. Property lines are quick to lay out. Custom 2D symbols may be created and then copied into appropriate plans. Individual elevations and cross sections may also be customized. Remember that CAD lines are only 2D and are superimposed on the 3D view (whether it be the plan, cross section, elevation, or layout windows). They do not effect the 3D objects, nor do they appear in other 3D views, with a few exceptions. Some special objects (such as custom countertops) may be created from a CAD polyline and then turned into a 3D object.
Chapter Contents
The CAD Drawing Tools Lines Line Specification Dialog Arcs Arc Specification Dialog CAD Polylines Polyline Specification Dialog Polyline Edit Tools Splines Box Tools CAD Box Specification Dialog Circles CAD Circle Specification Dialog Ovals CAD Oval Specification Dialog Points Displaying CAD Objects Selecting CAD Objects CAD Buttons Moving CAD Objects Copying CAD Objects Move Object
675
CAD
Rotate Object Resize Object Reflect About Line Reflect Object Replicate Object Delete Reverse Direction Make Parallel/Perpendicular Break Line Trim and Extend Fillet and Chamfer CAD Blocks
CAD Block Specification Dialog Creating a Library of CAD Blocks Dimensions CAD Preferences Number Style/Angle Style Dialog Converting CAD Objects CAD Menu Snap To: (Snap Points) North Pointer CAD Details Plan Footprint Line Thickness Visibility
The CAD Drawing Tools

Click the CAD Mode On/Off button, select CAD> CAD Mode On/Off from the menu, or press F2 to switch to CAD mode. Many of the buttons available in CAD mode are also available in other modes. For more information, see Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17. The CAD menu is used to access the almost all of the CAD tools. Most of these menu items are also accessible from the CAD toolbar. For a complete description of the CAD menu, the CAD tool buttons, and keyboard shortcut keys available in CAD mode, see CAD Menu on page 46. A few buttons only appear in CAD mode. For more information, see CAD Preference Buttons on page 712. There are also a variety of CAD edit buttons available depending on what type of CAD object is currently selected. For more information, see CAD Edit Buttons on page 712. The status bar displays the current CAD layer as well as the CAD coordinates of the cursor. This is similar to the Cartesian coordinate system, and allows for CAD tools to be used with precision. For more information, see Appearance Panel on page 90.
Lines
Click the Draw Line button to activate Line mode. Drag to draw lines from beginning to end, just like walls are drawn. Like walls, a line may be drawn back
676
Lines
on itself to erase a section. If the Auto Snap button is selected and the beginning and/ or end of a line is drawn near the endpoint of a different line or arc, the current line will snap to and join to the other line. This new entity is a Polyline, which is simply two or more lines and/or arcs joining end to end into a single unit. If one end of the polyline is connected to the other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed polylines may be filled with a pattern, or the closed polyline may be turned into special 3D objects such as counter top or slabs which will then display in 3D Views. Lines and polylines are quickly identifiable by selecting the object and observing the handles. Two seemingly identical objects may actually be very different. The following is a comparison of two shapes which appear identical when unselected. When each lower edge is selected, the item on the left shows that the lower edge is not attached to the rest of the lines. To the right, the lower edge is part of a larger polyline unit.
Input Line
There is a method which is slower than dragging, but more precise, where each line is drawn using values entered from the keyboard. This method is ideal when the desired length and angle of each line is known beforehand, such as with property lines. Before any line can be drawn using this second method, a starting point needs to be defined. 1. Click the Point child button, then click on the screen to place a red X on screen. Every X defines a point, and the red X defines the current point. Once this starting point has been established, click the Input Line button. The New CAD Line dialog will open allowing you to type in the values defining the endpoint of the line.
2.
There are four different ways to specify the location of the endpoint of the line. Absolute Location requires input of the X Position and Y Position which are related to a Cartesian coordinate system. There actually is a (0,0) point in Chief Architect, although it is rarely used. If this method makes no sense to you, rest assured that you have no need to use it.
677
CAD
Use one of the other, more common methods. Relative to Start Point requires input of the X Distance (horizontal) and Y Distance (vertical) to locate the next endpoint. This method is easier to use when one of the two values is 0, which means you are going straight horizontally or vertically.
Relative to Previous Line requires input of the Distance and the relative Angle from the previously created line. This option is enabled only when the current point is on the end of an existing line or polyline. The relative angle is measured counter clockwise from the previous line drawn. Angles may be either bearings or decimal degrees.
Relative to Start Point, Polar requires input of the Distance and the Angle between the start point and the new line endpoint. This angle is an absolute angle where 0 degrees points to the right of the screen and values are measured CCW such that 90 degrees is straight up.
To draw the line, enter the information and click the Select Next Object edit button at the bottom of the dialog. This draws the specified line without exiting the dialog so that the program is ready for you to input the data for the next line. The current point will be at the end of the most recently drawn line. The next line
678
Lines
will be drawn from this point. Continue entering the new values and clicking Next until the polyline is finished. Then click OK to exit the dialog. If the dialog is in the way as you are using it, simply click in the title bar and drag it to a better location on the screen. If you accidentally click OK instead of Next and you need to continue drawing the polyline using the New CAD Line dialog, click the Input Line button again. You can click the Num Style button to display the Number Style / Angle Style dialog. For more information, see Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page 733.
Moving a Line
Select a line. Do not click on the line while in Point mode, or a red X, or point, will appear. When selected, a single line will have handles at its midpoint and ends. Place the cursor over the center handle to display the two-headed arrow. Dragging from this handle will move the line perpendicular to itself, jumping at increments defined in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. To move the line freely in any direction, press and hold the Ctrl key, then drag from the handle to move the line.
Reversing a Line
Select a line then click the Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its direction. Reversing a line is useful with certain line styles or with an arrow at one end. For more information, see Reverse Direction on page 721.
Line with Arrow

You can create a line or polyline with an arrow on one or both ends, using the Line With Arrow child button. Draw a Line With Arrow like a standard line. When you release the mouse button, it will have an arrowhead at the end. The arrowhead that appears is the same in size and type as the default arrowhead used with text objects. Change it by selecting one or more arrow lines, clicking the Open Object edit button and displaying the Arrow Tab. For more information, see Arrow Tab on page 683. You can continue to draw connected lines to form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end. The arrowheads appear only at the free ends, not where the lines connect. Arcs with arrowheads can also be created. For more information, see Arc with Arrow on page 686.
Stretching a Line
Select a line. End handles display. Drag from the end handles to lengthen or shorten the line. If Allowed Angles are restricted, drag the end handle along the line to lengthen or shorten the line. (Note that when the button is up, Allowed Angles are restricted.) If Allowed Angles is unrestricted, the end of the line can be dragged anywhere, and snapped to a point or CAD object. (Note that when the button is down, Allowed Angles are unrestricted.)
679
CAD
End handles may also be used to change a line into an arc. For more information, see Change Line to Arc on page 693.
This also works on the end of an open polyline.
Line Specification Dialog

Line Tab
changing properties on this dialog affect the line.
1 Lock - These lock options control how
Lock Start - Select this option to keep the start of the line fixed when changing the length, angle, and end. Lock End- Select this option to keep the end of the line fixed when changing the length, angle, and start. Lock Center- Select this option to keep the center of the line fixed. Changing the length of the line will move the start and end of the line equally. Changing the angle will rotate the line around the center.
Lock Length/Angle - Select this option to keep the length and angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the start or end will move the other end so the length and angle of the line dont change.
2 Length/Angle - Specify the length and

angle of the selected line. Length - Specify the length for the line. Angle - Specify the angle for the line.
3 Start X - Specify the X coordinate for

the start of the line. Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the start of the line.
680
4 End X - Specify the X coordinate for

the end of the line. End Y - Specify the X coordinate for the end of the line.
The format of all of these controls can be changed by clicking on the Num Style button.
Line Style Tab
1 2 3 5 4 6 7 9 8 CAD 681 10
The format of all of these controls can be changed by clicking on the Num Style button.
Check By Layer to restore the current Line Style default for the specified layer.
1 Line Color - Click the rectangle to open the standard Windows Color dialog. Use the dialog to choose the desired line color.
By Layer - Select the check box to restore the current color default for the specified layer. Choose white if an object is to exist, but not display on the screen or in printouts (must print with color on).
3 Line Weight - Define the line weight

(in pixels) for the specific object. Check By Layer to restore the current Line Weight default for the specified layer. To make line weight display on the screen, check Show Line Weight in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 90. selected object(s). Unless otherwise specified, the selected object(s) will take on the default values of the new layer.
4 Layer - Define the new layer for the
2 Line Style - Select a line style from the drop down list. Use the keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down through the options.
Select - Press this button to open the Select CAD Layer dialog to choose a new layer. Any layer from 0 - 199 can be entered here. have the length of each line display along the line itself, above the line and centered. The length format for imperial units (either fractional feet or decimal feet) is defined on the Line Properties panel of the Preferences dialog. See Line Properties Panel on page 111. This option is available with line and arc segments. This feature can be used for property lines. have the angle of each line display along the line itself, below the line and centered. The angle format (either degrees or bearings) is defined under Default Style in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. All Angles - Clear the check box to display only those angles which are neither horizontal nor vertical. This is automatically checked when Show Angle is checked. Reverse Angle - Check this box to reverse the angle by 180 degrees. This is most commonly used when showing the bearing of a line, since the start point of the lines defines the bearing. have the selected object show in front of other CAD objects in the same location. This is useful for shifting the layering of CAD objects to mask or display objects as desired. (i.e. Move a solid circle representing rebar to the front of a hatched foundation
wall in a cross section so that the rebar will display and not be masked by the hatched foundation wall.) Move to front will not work with System layers 1 through 4. These layers are used for ceiling, floor, roof and truss framing. These layers are maintained in front of other System, Architectural and User layers.
Note: "Move to Front" is not an attribute, it is an action. Once you click OK the operation is performed and the box will not be checked the next time the object is opened.
5 Show Length - Select the check box to
6 Show Angle - Select the check box to
have the selected CAD object drawn first, behind everything else. In a Plan View, this will draw the objects behind even the architectural objects. In Cross Section/ Elevation Views, this will draw the selected objects behind the structure.
Note: "Move to Back" is an attribute and will remain checked after clicking OK and reopening.
8 Maintain in Back - Check this box to
for polylines only. Check this box to stop the object when moved against most CAD objects. Stops can be defined for closed polylines and any of the box types except Oval . for polylines only. Check this box to stop the CAD object when it bumps into a wall. Stops can be defined for closed polylines and any of the box types except Oval .
9 CAD Stops Move - This option appears
7 Move to Front - Check this box to
10 Wall Stops Move - This option appears
682
Arrow Tab
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
Include Arrow - Turn the arrow display on or off. Type - Select the type of arrowhead from the list.
Default - Check this to set the fill color to the default.
4 Size - Define a size for the arrow(s).

Default - Check this to set the arrow size to the default.
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have more than one arrowhead type, check No Change to leave each arrow with its defined arrow type. Default - Check this to set the arrow type to the default. The default arrow Size, Type and Fill Color are defined in the Text Objects panel of the Preferences dialog.
5 Arrow on Both Ends - Select the
check box for an arrow on both ends.
CAD Arrows may be edited just like a line or polyline. Segments of a polyline arrow may be turned into an arc. Line thickness can be increased. Extra segments can be added using the Arrow tool.
3 Fill Color - Select the solid color to fill

the arrowheads. If multiple arrows are selected, and they have more than one Fill Color, check No Change
683
CAD
The Arrow Tab appears on any line, arc, polyline, or spline specification dialog that is eligible to have an arrow.
to leave each arrow with its defined Fill Color.
If special arrows are used frequently, they can be blocked and added to the CAD Block library . They could then be placed in any plan file as a block, exploded, then
manipulated into position. For more information, see Creating a Library of CAD Blocks on page 731.
Arcs
Selected arc Drag from left handle
Drag from handle at arc midpoint.
Drag from triangular handle.
Drag from right handle.
Move using center handle.
In Arc mode, draw arcs from beginning to end. Moving the cursor along the curve while dragging the arc will cause the arc to curve accordingly. The position of the endpoints is most important. The curvature of the arc can be changed later. Arcs draw much more smoothly if walls are set to allow 7 degree angles. Choose Edit> Default Settings> Plan Defaults to define the allowed wall angles. Arcs draw more smoothly if Unrestricted Angles is turned on.
2.
Place the cursor over each of the handles to display an arrow showing the type of editing which will result if that handle is dragged. The result of dragging from each handle is illustrated above. If a single arc is selected, you may also grab an end handle and drag along the curve of the arc itself to lengthen or shorten the arc.
3.
Unlike other objects, the triangular handle on an arc is not used to rotate the object. Instead, it is used to reshape the curvature of the arc between the endpoints. For information on how to change the angle of an arc, or to change any of its specifications, see Arc Specification Dialog on page 687.
Editing Arcs Using Handles

1. Select an arc to modify it. Five red handles appear.
684
Arcs
Input Arc
Like a line, an arc may be drawn using the New Arc dialog. 1. First, define a start point by clicking on the screen in Place Point mode. The red X defines the current point, which is the start point for the new arc. 2. When this start point is established, click the Input Arc child button. The New Arc dialog will open allowing you to type in the values defining the endpoint of the arc, plus its curvature and direction. 3. Choose either the Start Direction or the Chord Direction by selecting the appropriate radio button. Ignore the value of the unselected object, as it has nothing to do with the arc actually being drawn. 6. 4. 5.
in every way except for the defined Direction. The X identifies the first point of each arc. The arrow shows the angle defined by the terms Start Direction and Chord Direction. Define the Radius of the arc. Define one of the values in the Extension group: Degrees in Arc: The positive number of degrees from the center point of the arc to each of its two endpoints. Also referred to as Arc Angle.
Length of Arc - The length along the arc itself from one endpoint to the other. Also referred to as Arc Length. Length of Chord - The length of the straight line from one endpoint to the other. Also referred to as Chord Length. Select which direction the arc bends, either cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter clockwise).
Start Direction=0
Chord Direction=45
5. Click OK to draw the specified arc.

Note: If the current point is a line (or arc) end point, the Start Direction defaults to its current direction (or direction of that end of the existing arc). This makes it easy to draw smooth curves that blend into straight sections.
The Start Direction defines the angle of the line tangent to the arc at the start point. The Chord Direction defines the angle of the imaginary line connecting the two arc endpoints. The two arcs shown above are identical
Number Style / Angle Style dialog. For
Click the Num Style button to display the
685
CAD
more information, see Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page 733.
Arrow Tab. For more information, see Arrow Tab on page 683. You can continue to draw connected lines and arcs to form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end. The arrowheads appear only at the free ends, not where the lines connect. Lines with arrowheads can also be created. For more information, see Line with Arrow on page 679.
Draw Arc About Center

Select the Arc About Center child button to draw an arc by defining the center and then the end points. 1. 2. Press Arc About Center button. child
Click once to define the center. If you do not first click on the arc's center point, the current point (red X) will be used as a center point. Click and drag from the start point of the arc around to its end point.
Lock Center Arc

An arc center may be locked or unlocked. The Lock Center Arc edit button displays when an arc is selected. A locked center arc will extend along its arc when snapping to another CAD object. An unlocked center arc will extend along its chord, keeping its subtended angle constant. A locked center arc also extends along its arc, rather than its chord, when an adjacent line or Original arc & line before moving line so arc is moved in a arc snaps to line. polyline. Thus the chord angle will usually remain constant for a non lock center arc, Lock center arc while the center and radius will usually not change for the lock Unlocked center arc center arc. If a lock center arc in a polyline is itself moved, it moves concentrically about its center, so only its radius changes. For an unlocked center arc the chord moves, keeping the arcs subtended angle constant.
3.
Both the center point and the start point will snap to any appropriate nearby CAD object, intersection or point. The end point will also snap, but only to determine the angle of the arc's end point. The radius has already been fixed when the start point was positioned.
Arc with Arrow

You can create an arc with an arrow on one or both ends, using the Arc With Arrow child button. Draw an Arc With Arrow like a standard arc. When you release the mouse button, it will have an arrowhead at the end. The arrowhead that appears is the same in size and type as the default arrowhead used with text objects. Change it by selecting one or more arrow arcs, clicking the Open Object edit button and displaying the
686
Arc Specification Dialog
Arc Specification Dialog

Arc Tab
5 CAD
The format of all of these controls can be changed by clicking on the Num Style button. Chord - Select this option to keep the arc chord fixed when changing the arc radius. Various controls will be disabled depending on what lock option is used.
1 Lock - These lock options control how changing properties on this dialog affect the arc.
Start - Select this option to keep the start fixed when changing the arc, chord, or end. End - Select this option to keep the end fixed when changing the arc, chord, or start. Center - Select this option to keep the center of the arc fixed when changing the arc. Arc - Select this option to keep the arc fixed when changing the arc location.
2 Arc - These parameters define the arc.
Center X - Specify the x coordinate for the center of the arc. Center Y - Specify the y coordinate for the center of the arc. Radius - The distance between the center of the arc and the arc surface. Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line drawn
687
from the arc center to the arc start makes with a horizontal line to the right. End Angle - Specify the angle that a line drawn from the arc center to the arc end makes with a horizontal line to the right. Arc Angle - The included angle between the center of the arc and each end.
End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the end of the arc. End Direction - Specify the angle of a tangent line at the end of the arc.
5 Chord - These values define the chord

of the arc. Chord Length - The straight line distance between the two ends of the arc. Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the chord (the imaginary straight line going from the start of the arc to the end of the arc).
Arc Length - The length of the arc along the curve.
3 Start - These values
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Arc Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681.
define the start point of the arc.
Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the start of the arc. Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the start of the arc. Start Direction - Specify the angle of a tangent line at the start of the arc.
Arrow Tab
The Arrow tab of the Arc Specification dialog is the same as the Arrow tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Arrow Tab on page 683.
End - These values define the end point of the arc.
End X - Specify the X coordinate for the end of the arc.
688
CAD Polylines
CAD Polylines
Closed Polylines A polyline consists of two or more line and/ or arc segments which are attached together at their endpoints. If the polyline connects with itself, it is said to be closed. If there is a gap in the polyline, it is said to be open. A major use of lines (and arcs) is the construction of polylines. Make a polyline by drawing lines end-to-end, allowing the end of each successive line to snap to the end of the previous line. Auto Snap must be enabled (Auto Snap toggle button is up ) or the lines will not connect.
Open Polylines edge (if Allowed Angles is unrestricted when drawing the dimension lines as well).
Adjusting Polylines
Dimension lines may now be used to move angled polyline sides the same way as connected angled walls move. If the polyline side is not at one of the allowed angles, be sure to unrestrict angles before dragging a dimension along the side of the polyline. Dimensions will snap correctly to the polyline if dragged fairly close to parallel. Following is an arbitrary polyline. No angle coincides with the Allowed Angles. Yet dimension lines drawn at approximately the same angle snap to become horizontal to the
You may also click on a polyline side, and change that side's length in the polylines specification dialog on the Selected Line tab.
Editing Polylines
To add a new corner (and thus, a new edge) to an existing polyline, use the Break Line edit button. button. Change straight edges to curved using the Change Line/Arc Fillet or chamfer the corners, or trim away a section using the Fillet Two
689
CAD
Lines or Chamfer Two Lines buttons.
edit
If the polyline is closed, you can also fill it with a hatch pattern. Closed polylines can be changed into custom counter tops and other objects by clicking on the Convert Polyline button to access the Convert Polyline dialog.
adjacent edges are affected. If the adjacent edges are converging, continue to drag until they meet at a point. 4. Try to move one of the handles at either end of the side. The adjacent sides can only be stretched in their original direction. The angle of the selected side can change, but not adjacent sides. If you need to add an edge, use the Break Line tool to divide one edge in two. Select an edge, and grab an end handle of a side opposite the selected edge. These handles can move completely unrestricted. Place the handle wherever you want to adjust the polyline. Practice with different shapes until you understand how to adjust a polyline on the screen. This practice will be invaluable when you begin to edit other objects.
When adjusting sides and corners of a polyline, the most important thing is selecting the polyline by the correct edge. Certain restrictions apply to the polyline depending on which edge is selected. Follow these steps to understand the restrictions: 1. 2. Create a closed polyline with four or more sides. Select an edge. The selected edge will be the only edge with a handle at its midpoint. Grab the midpoint and you can move the edge parallel to itself. Notice how the
5.
6.
7.
3.
Polyline Specification Dialog

Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab of the polyline dialogs displays the enclosed area of a closed polyline. The units are square feet for imperial units and square meters for metric. If the polyline is not closed, "Not closed" will display. Polylines may be copied, moved, reshaped, or resized as a single unit. For more information about CAD preferences, see CAD Panel on page 104.
690
Polyline Specification Dialog
Selected Line Tab
The Selected Line tab will appear almost always when a polyline has been selected. The data here represents the specification of a particular line segment of the polyline. The currently selected line is the one you clicked when selecting the polyline, and the one with the extra handle at its midpoint. Moving the start of a line segment will move the end of the previous connected line (if there is one). Moving the end of a line segment will move the start of the next connected line (if there is one). The Selected Line tab of the Polyline Specification dialog is the same as the Line tab of the Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Tab on page 680.
The Line Style tab of the Polyline Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681.
691
CAD
Line Style Tab
Fill Style Tab
1 3 5 7 9 8 2 4 6
You can apply a fill pattern to boxes, circles and most other closed polylines. The pattern options are disabled until a pattern other than None is selected from the drop-down list. Select a pattern, then click anywhere in the box to close the drop-down list. Fill Pattern - Choose a pattern from the drop-down list. If the pattern Custom is selected, the custom pattern options will become available.
When checked, any objects behind the fill pattern would then show through. Fill Color - Define a different line color (or fill color if a solid is specified). This would override the layer color.
A picture of the selected fill pattern or solid fill displays here. Select Custom from the fill pattern drop down list to activate this option. If any custom pattern files exist (.pat files), enter the file name or click Browse to find the file on your computer. drop down list box. This list will display all custom patterns available in the selected file.
7 Custom Pattern File and Name -
2 Spacing - Define the spacing for the

selected fill pattern. hatch pattern.
3 Angle - Define the angle of the selected

have the fill pattern use its own layers color for the pattern lines. If it is a solid fill, checking this will cause the fill color to be the same as the layers color.
4 Use Layer Color - Check this box to
8 Pattern - Choose a pattern from the
5 Transparent Fill - Check this box to

make the hatch patterns transparent.
9 Scale - Choose a scale for the pattern if

desired.
692
Polyline Edit Tools
Polyline Edit Tools

Change Line to Arc
There are two methods of changing lines into arcs. One method is used for lines in polylines, and the other method is used for single lines which are not part of any polyline or which are at one of the ends of an open polyline. The Change Line/Arc edit button changes the selected line in a polyline to an arc, or a selected arc to a line. This tool is available whenever a line or arc which is part of a polyline is selected. It will not appear if an individual line or arc is selected. In that case, use the alternate method described below. To change a single line into an arc, select the line, hold down the Ctrl key, then grab the end handle and drag it to either side. The line becomes an arc, with the non-moved end remaining tangent to the lines original direction. This will also work on the free end of a line in an open polyline. This tool may also be used to convert straight/curved stair subsections into the other form.
Make Arc Tangent

The Make Arc Tangent edit button appears when an arc in a polyline is selected. Pressing it changes the arc so it is tangent with the lines/arcs it meets at either or both of its ends. This tool may also be used with curved walls & stairs.
Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract

Polylines may be created based on existing closed polylines. Special tools are provided for this purpose.
Polyline Union
Use the Polyline Union edit button to combine two or more polylines into a single polyline.
The example shows three closed polylines and the single closed polyline which resulted
693
CAD
when all three were merged using the Polyline Union edit button. Create two or more closed polylines of the same type. (If one polyline is a counter top, the others should be counter tops as well.) Once the polylines are created, there are two methods of combining them using the Polyline Union edit button. Single Select: 1. 2. 3. Select one polyline in Select Objects mode. Click on the Polyline Union button. edit
The new polylines will be of the same type (counter top, lot perimeter, etc. as the originals). If the original polylines did not overlap, all the polylines are duplicated on top of themselves.
Polyline Intersection
Use the Polyline Intersection edit button to create a single polyline from the overlap area of two or more closed polylines.
Select another polyline to create a new polyline defined by the boundaries of both of the polylines. The new polyline is selected. Move it away from the original polylines. Otherwise it will be superimposed. The example shows two closed polylines and the single closed polyline which resulted when the Polyline Intersection button was applied to them. edit
4.
Group Select: 1. 2. Group select two or more polylines. Click on the Polyline Union edit button to create a new polyline defined by the boundaries of all the polylines. A dialog will open. Choose to retain or delete the original polylines.
3.
Create two or more closed polylines of the same type. (If one polyline is a counter top, the others should be counter tops as well.) Once the polylines are created, there are two methods of finding the overlap area using the Polyline Intersection Single Select: edit button.
The second method allows you to combine more than two polylines simultaneously.
1.
Select one polyline.
694
Polyline Union, Intersection, and Subtract
2. 3.
Click on the Polyline Intersection edit button. Select another polyline to create a new polyline defined by the intersection of both of the polylines. The new polyline is selected. Move it away from the original polylines. Otherwise it will be superimposed. This polyline
This polyline
4.
Group Select: 1. 2. Group select two or more polylines. Click on the Polyline Intersection edit button to create a new polyline defined by the intersection of all the polylines. A dialog will open. Choose to retain or delete the original polylines. 1. 2. 3.
Originals Draw two closed polylines that overlap, or one closed polyline within another. Select one of the polylines. This is the polyline you want to keep a portion of. Click the Polyline Subtract edit button and then click on the other closed polyline. This is the polyline which will be deleted from the first polyline. A new polyline will be created by subtracting the second polyline from the first. The new polyline will be of the same type (counter top, lot perimeter, etc.) as the polyline selected first.
3.
4.
The second method allows you to work with more than two polylines simultaneously. The new polylines will be of the same type (counter top, lot perimeter, etc.) as the originals. If the original polylines did not overlap, no new polyline will be created.
The original polylines are not changed. The new polyline remains selected so that it can be moved or copied easily. If the two polylines do not intersect a copy of the polyline is formed right on top of itself, since the program was unable to subtract anything from it.
Polyline Subtract
Use the Polyline Subtract edit button to subtract one closed polyline from another to create a third. The Polyline Subtract tool appears on the Edit toolbar when you select a closed polyline.
695
CAD
Splines
A Spline is a curve which passes smoothly through a set of points. A contour line is a typical example of this type of curve. Splines can be selected and opened for specification. For more information, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 690. Click the Spline child button once to activate Spline mode. Draw the first spline segment just as you would a line. It will appear identical to a line. (You may need to select Unrestricted Angle to draw freely.) Draw a few more segments, connecting each to the free end of a previously drawn segment.
Result
As drawn
Notice that, as each additional segment is drawn, the spline changes the curvature of the previous segment in order to create a smooth, continuous curve between the last three points.
As drawn
Draw the second segment from the end of the first segment but at a different angle.
As drawn
Result
Form a Closed Spline by drawing a segment between its two free ends.
Draw segment to close Result
As soon as two straight spline segments connect end-to-end, the straight segments turn into a smooth curve which passes through each endpoint defined by the original segments. Each point is called a vertex.
The result will be an irregular curve which flows smoothly through each vertex.
696
Splines
will display independently of control handles.

Result
Reshaping Splines
Reshape the spline by dragging from one of the Vertex handles.
Spline Handles
Select a spline as you would a polyline. Several different types of handles display. The handles which display will depend on whether or not Advanced Splines is selected. For more information, see Displaying Control Handles on page 697. Advanced Splines is not checked
Vertex
Drag Vertex
This is the simplest method of adjusting splines and will satisfy most needs. The following additional control is available if Advanced Splines is enabled. For more information, see Displaying Control Handles on page 697. The dashed line Control between the vertex and Tangent line a control point defines a line tangent to the spline through the vertex. Move the Vertex control handles at the end of the line to change the direction of the spline at that point. The spline curves away from its tangent direction at the vertex point on its way to reach the next vertex. Change the shape of the spline by dragging the control handles.
Move
Advanced Splines is checked

Vertex
Rotate Control
The Move handle displays near the center of the spline. Drag it to move the entire spline. Drag the triangular Rotate handle to rotate the entire spline. The other handles are for adjusting the shape.
Displaying Control Handles

Display of spline control handles is controlled by the Advanced Splines edit button. Select Advanced Splines to show the control handles. Clear this button to suppress the control handles. The Vertices
697
CAD
Drag Control Handle tangent Original Curve tangent tangent
Make this curve sharper or more gradual by moving the control point toward or away from its vertex. Move control closer
The Lock Control Handle Angle button is usually selected. When selected, this button is dark, as shown. This causes the relative angle between the vertex and its control handles to remain the same. Press the Lock Control Handle Angle button to free the control of the relative angles between the vertex and its control handles. The control handles can now be adjusted individually. The opposite handle will remain unaffected by the change. Notice that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to the lines between the vertex and both of its control handles. Control moved separately
Result = sharper curve When you move a control handle around the vertex, the opposite control handle also moves to keep the lines between the vertex and control handles at the same relative angle to each other. Typically, this is a straight line. In the following illustration, notice how the control handles stay in a straight line to each other, and how the curve of the spline adjusts while still keeping tangent to the line through the vertex.
Original
Control moved separately
The Straighten Spline Segment button is used to straighten a segment of an advanced spline between two vertex points. To use, first select the spline.
698
Splines
Click the Straighten Spline Segment edit button, then click on the spline between two vertices. That portion will become straight.
Converting Splines into Polylines

A curved portion in a spline is represented as a number of smaller straight lines. You can change a spline into a normal polyline that is made up from all these straight lines by selecting it and pressing the Convert Spline to Polyline edit button.
Straighten segment
Result
If you reselect the spline, you will see that the two control handles point toward the straight section from each vertex point on the splines straight section.
Before
Add a Vertex
Add a vertex point to a spline by selecting the spline, clicking the Break Line edit button, and clicking on the spline. A vertex will be added at the point where you clicked. The spline will remain selected and you will see the additional vertex and control handles.
After
Converting Polylines into Splines

Any polyline can be converted into a spline by selecting it and pressing the
Break
Result
Convert to Spline
edit button.
699
CAD
The spline is replaced by the new polyline.
Applications for Splines

Before
Splines are typically used in situations where there is an irregular curve. This often occurs where land or water are involved. Splines are useful wherever a free-flowing curve is needed.
The polyline is replaced by the new spline.
Spline Tab
After
Splines with Trim & Extend

Other CAD objects such as lines and arcs can be trimmed against and extend to a spline. Select the spline, press the Trim Objects or Extend Objects edit button, and then click on the portion of each CAD object to be removed (for trim) or extended (for extend).
Polylines that are splines will have an additional Spline Tab in their specification dialog. New Segment Angle - Specify the angle between line segments that are used to draw the spline. Specifying and smaller angle will cause the spline to draw smoother. Specifying a larger angle will cause the spline to draw faster.
700
Box Tools
Box Tools
Drag to create
Select on right edge.
Rotate using triangular handle.
Reshape using midpoint handle
Resize using corner handle.
Click the Box Tools
parent button
and then the Box button. Draw a box by dragging from the midpoint of one side to the midpoint of the opposite side. If a small box is desired, draw the box larger, then resize it. A box originally drawn too small will leave only a point. The original direction a box is dragged when created is defined as the length of the box. The other direction is defined as the width. Develop the habit of dragging all boxes the same direction (i.e. left to right or top to bottom). This will simplify keyboard editing using the CAD Box Specification dialog. Boxes are originally square. Select the box to resize or reshape. Drag the handle at the midpoint of the selected edge to move that edge, or drag a corner handle to resize the box.
one corner to the opposite corner. Once produced, this polyline is no different than one you would make by drawing four lines along the rectangle sides.
Boxes
Boxes drawn using the Box child tool have a couple of limitations which are important to understand. The Edit type Move Corners (set in the Preferences dialog) will not affect boxes. Boxes are a special type of restricted polyline which always maintain a rectangular shape with exactly four corners. Edit types Concentric and Resize (set in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog) work differently if the box is not square. Resize maintains a constant ratio between the boxs length and width. Concentric requires that the change in length equal the change in width for any modification.
Rectangular Polylines
The Rectangular Polyline child button appears at the right of the toolbar when the Box Tools parent button is selected. Click the Rectangular Polyline child button, then drag a rectangle from
Framing
Click the Box Tools parent button and the Framing child button to draw draw a 1-1/2 (38 mm) wide box of any
701
CAD
length. When dragging the length, the framing box appears to be a line until the mouse button is released. Specially designed to represent general framing materials, the box can be resized to any specification using the handles or the Framing Specification dialog, discussed later in this chapter. Multiple copies may also be laid out automatically at defined spacing using the Multiple Copy
Replicate Object dialog.
difference is the cross which is automatically drawn whenever this tool is used. Use the cross box add framing detail to cross sections. Cross boxes are automatically maintained at ends of framing members cut by the cross section cutting plane. These are found on locked layer 9. They automatically update when the cross section first displays and whenever a Fill Window is done. You may wish to create and resize one cross box for each size (i.e. 2x4, 2x6, 2x12 etc.) then copy the original as needed. It is easiest to resize using CAD Box Specification dialog.
edit button or the
Framing members drawn with this tool will show in the Materials list under the Framing category. To specifically draw rafters or joists, click the Rafter button or Joist button and drag a framing member. The Trim Objects and Extend Objects
Insulation
tools work well to adjust the framing members to the correct length, and to cut their ends off at an angle to fit against the trimming members.
Wall Bridging
Click the Box Tools and the Wall Bridging to get in wall blocking mode. parent button child button
Drag to create Result Select to Edit
With this tool you can draw wall bridging while in a wall detail. For more information, see Detailing a Cross Section/Elevation View on page 599.
Cross Boxes
The Cross Box behaves the same as a regular Box. The only
Use this tool to draw insulation for cross section details. Drag the length of the insulation, then select the invisible box border to resize or move it, the same as with other boxes. Once again, it is easier to use the CAD Box Specification dialog to define the insulation width and length exactly using keyboard input.
702
CAD Box Specification Dialog
CAD Box Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 2
1 Specify a Box Style.

Normal - Select this to specify a normal box. Cross - Select this to specify a cross box. Insulation - Select this to specify an insulation box.
Width - Specify the length of the box.

To find out which direction is the height and which direction is the width of a square box, select it. The triangular rotate handle will be nearest the side you originally dragged from when creating the box. Changing the height will change the length of this side.
2 Define the Position of the box.

X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the center of the box. Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the box. Angle - Specify the angle for the box.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

3 Specify the Size of the box.

Height - Specify the height of the box.
703
CAD
Circles
Drag left to right to create.
Select.
Drag square handle to resize from opposite point.
Drag diamond-shaped Move by dragging cenhandle to concentrically ter handle in allowed directions. resize.
Draw a Circle by dragging across the diameter. If a small circle is needed, draw a larger circle and then resize it. Select the circle. Drag a square handle located on the circle to resize the circle. Drag a diamond-shaped handle not attached to the circle to concentrically resize the circle (its center will not move). Move the circle by dragging the center handle (the cursor turns into a four-headed arrow). A circle may be dragged only in the direction of a line drawn between the center handle and any handle touching the circle, unless this constraint is released by holding the Ctrl key. You can use the Circle Specification dialog to accurately set the size, position and
other attributes. You may also fill a circle with a hatch pattern or solid fill.
Draw Circle About Center

Click the Circle Tools parent button and then the Circle About Center child button to create a circle by dragging the radius out from the center point. Click the Circle About Center tool, then click on screen to define the center of the circle, and drag the radial distance before releasing the mouse button. Both the center point and the radius point will snap to any appropriate nearby CAD object, intersection or point. For information about Ovals, see Ovals on page 705.
704
CAD Circle Specification Dialog
CAD Circle Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 2
1 Specify the Center of the circle.

X Position - Specify the x coordinate of the center of the circle. Y Position - Specify the y coordinate of the center of the circle.
Changing either the Radius or the Diameter will change the other value.
Line Style Tab

2 Specify the Size of the circle.

Diameter - Specify the diameter for the circle. Radius - Specify the radius of the circle.
Fill Style Tab

Ovals
An Oval appears originally as a circle, which can then be reshaped into an oval. Use the same drawing technique as with a box (i.e. left to right), since the direction of drag is defined as the length and the perpendicular is defined as the width. Drag the length of the oval, then release the mouse button. Select the oval. Notice the various handles. Use any square handle actually touching the oval to reshape it into an actual oval. Use any diamond shaped handle to resize the oval. It will either concentrically or proportionately resize depending on the settings in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. Use the triangular handle to rotate the oval. Use the center handle which turns into a four-headed arrow to move the oval. The allowed moving direction is directly related to the angle of the oval. The oval will move
705
CAD
only in a straight line between the center handle and any handle touching the line. Override this constraint by holding the Ctrl key while selecting and moving the oval. There are two visual clues to distinguish between ovals and circles even when both appear circular. An oval has a large + in
the center when originally being created, and it has a triangular rotation handle when selected. Neither of these is true for a circle. You can use the CAD Oval Specification dialog to accurately set the length, width and other oval attributes.
Drag to Create
Select
Drag from right handle
Drag from corner handle
Move with center handle
CAD Oval Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 Specify the Position of the oval.

X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the center of the oval. Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the oval. Angle - Specify the angle for the oval.
Width - Specify the width of the oval.
Line Style Tab

Fill Style Tab

2 Specify the Size of the oval.

Length - Specify the length of the oval.
706
Points
Points
Use the Place Point tool to place a temporary CAD point in the plan. These temporary points can be used to accurately position other CAD objects. When Auto Snap is on, a CAD object being drawn or positioned will snap to a nearby point before it snaps to any other item. The CAD> Snap To: tools can also be used to move items to specific points. The accurate placement of CAD points can help you position other CAD objects very precisely. To locate a second point once a first point (current point) has been established, Click the Input Point tool. The New CAD Point dialog will open.
Placing a Point
Make a new point by clicking in the drawing area while in Place Point Draw Arc , Box mode or by , mode. clicking (not dragging) in Draw Line or Circle
Input Point
A new point can be placed using absolute coordinates as well. Click the Input Point button to display the New CAD Point dialog, select Absolute Location, and enter the CAD points absolute coordinates. A point appears as an X on the screen, with the current point showing as a red X. The current point is either the most recently created or the most recently accessed point. To cause a different point to become the current point, simply click on it while in Place Point or Draw Line mode. The old point should change color from red to black, indicating that it is now the current point.
1.
Absolute Location requires input of the X and Y coordinates which are related to the system origin (0,0). This method is almost never used. Relative to Current Point (not Polar) requires input on the distance along the X-axis (horizontal) and along the Y-axis (vertical) to locate the next point. Relative to Current Point, Polar requires input of the distance and the angle between the start point and the new point. This is the most typical method.
2.
3.
When using Imperial Units, lengths and distances may be entered as inches or feet and inches, in either decimal or fractional form. Fractional inches with denominators 2,
707
CAD
A new point may be located using keyboard input exactly the same way a line is drawn using keyboard input. The only difference is that there is no line connecting each of the points.
4, 8 and 16 are allowed. (Millimeters are used for all metric distances.) Angles may be entered as bearings, decimal degrees, or degrees, minutes and seconds. The Next button at the bottom of the New Point dialog is simply a shortcut when placing several points at a time. Instead of clicking on OK to place the point and then double-clicking on the Place Point child button to redisplay the dialog, just click on Next to define the next point. Click the Num Style button to display the Number Style / Angle Style dialog. For more information, see Number Style/Angle Style Dialog on page 733.
Delete Temporary Points

Choose CAD> Points> Delete Temporary Points or click the Delete Temporary Points child button to delete all temporary CAD points simultaneously. CAD points are the Xs which are drawn in CAD mode. They are used by the program as snap points. Delete Temporary Points saves time when there are a lot of points on the screen. Otherwise, press the Del key on the keyboard, with nothing selected, to have CAD points delete one at a time in the reverse order in which they were created.
Point Markers
You can use a permanent Point Marker to be used as a snap point for a dimension line or other CAD objects. Click the Point Marker child button and click in the view to place a permanent Point Marker. Point Markers are one of the available types of Markers that display as a simple cross, with or without a text label. They can be opened for specification and modified to include a label or to alter their display attributes. You can also place Point Markers using the Marker tool, which will allow you to specify the Marker label and type when it is placed. For more information, see Markers on page 671.
Moving CAD Points

It is possible to reposition a point in relation to itself or another point or CAD object such as a line. This may be used to locate the point exactly one-quarter the distance along a given line, or exactly 6 inches from one end. This new location can then be used for many things, such as the start point of a new line. To reposition a point, double-click on the point you wish to move. The Move Point dialog will open.
708
Points
There are four ways to move a point with this dialog. The two relative ways allow you to specify normal or Polar values. 1. Absolute Location is set the same as when positioning a new point. The current location (in absolute coordinates) is always listed at the bottom of the dialog. Relative to Itself sets the point's new location from its current one. The new location can be placed using rectangular or polar coordinates, just as when positioning a new point. Relative to Prev. Point positions the new point location relative to the point that was current just before the point being moved was created or made current. If you are not sure that the desired reference point was actually the previous point, click on it before double-clicking on the point to be moved. This will make the reference point the previous point. (The point you are moving is always the current point). From Line End is enabled when the point is nearby a CAD object. The Along Line box allows a value to be entered to position the point on the CAD object at the defined distance from the end to which it was originally closest. (For an arc, the distance is measured along the curve.) This distance may be defined as a percentage of the total line or arc length by checking the percentage % box. Thus 0, or 0% moves the point to the closest end of the nearest edge, 50% to the midpoint, and 100% to the other end. Negative numbers and percentages greater than 100 are allowed.
Notes on From Line End

If the point is a line endpoint (it was automatically placed at the line end when the line was drawn), it will take the end of the line with it when it moves. Thus, a positive number will shorten a line, and a negative one will lengthen it. If the point is near a box or polyline, then Along Line applies to the line or arc forming the closest side just as it does to a unconnected line or arc. If the point is near an oval or circle, then the point is placed along an (invisible) axis line along which the item was originally drawn.
2.
3.
4.
The temporary point which appears on the end of a line when originally drawn is a line endpoint, and is attached to the line itself. Moving that point using the Snap tools will adjust the line as well. This special type of endpoint can only be created when the line is originally drawn, or by using Snap To> Item End. For more information, see Snap To: (Snap Points) on page 735. Any other method of snapping a point to the end will not unite the point and line, so repositioning the point will not affect the line.
The current point was the original endpoint which was still attached to the line. Moving the point Along Line 50% actually shortened the line to one-half its original length.
The current point was moved Along Line 50% and so the point moved to the center. Snap to Item Midpoint will do the same thing.
709
CAD
Displaying CAD Objects

Current CAD Layer - Displays the current CAD Layer. Click to jump to new layer. Any CAD objects drawn will automatically be placed on this layer. Be careful about drawing on layers 1-100. Those are used by the system. CAD Layer Down - Change the current CAD layer by one less. CAD Layer Up - Change the current layer by one more. Display OptionsClick to display the Layer Display Options dialog. Layer 0 is the CAD Default Layer where all CAD object will be placed unless otherwise specified. Each CAD layer has several options which affect every item on that layer. For more information, see Layer Properties on page 127.
CAD Layers in Cross Sections

When CAD mode is enabled in a cross section, CAD objects can be drawn on any CAD layer desired, just as when CAD is enabled in Plan View. In a cross section, for each wall, floor, ceiling, roof or other surface that is cut by the section plane, a CAD line is produced that follows the cut. Also, any framing item or truss that is cut produces cross boxes to represent the cut end. These CAD objects are all on layer 9 "Cross Section Lines", and are updated whenever the Fill Window button or menu item is selected for the cross section view. Layer 9 is defaulted to locked in the Layer Display Options dialog, since these lines should remain with the cross section view. The generated CAD lines can be used as snap guides to locate other CAD objects or blocks, as well as dimension line indicators. The Layer Display Options dialog can be displayed in an elevation or cross section view by selecting Display Options when the CAD mode is active. button
Selecting CAD Objects

Single Select
To select CAD objects, click the Select CAD Objects button once, then click on any CAD object. In CAD mode you cannot select objects on Architectural layers using this method. Once selected, the CAD object will display one or more red handles (depending on the item). The selected CAD object is ready to be moved, deleted, or edited in some manner. The right mouse button also functions as a single select click no matter which mode is
710
Selecting CAD Objects
currently active (true also for the Architectural mode). Double-click the Select CAD Objects button to display the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see CAD Panel on page 104.
may also be copied from one plan and pasted into another. Customized 2D symbols are possible, as is the ability to create CAD details and save them into a library for use across plans. For more information, see CAD Details on page 740. Depending on what type of CAD object is selected, buttons from the following group will appear in the Edit toolbar. If contextual menus (accessed by right-clicking once or twice on an item) are used, a menu item corresponding to each displayed edit button will be available also.
Group Select
To group select CAD objects, hold down the Shift key while dragging a marquee around the items to be selected. Every item whose center is inside the marquee will become part of the selection set. This may include some architectural items as well. To remove items from the selection set, click on the items one at a time while continuing to hold the Shift key. Items may also be added to the selection set by holding down the Shift key and clicking on one item at a time.
Once any item has been selected, you can no longer drag a marquee to select. Hold the Shift key and click objects to add them to the selection set.
Selecting CAD Objects Using a Fence

A Select/Make Fence selection tool is available. This tool offers another method of selecting multiple CAD objects. Instead of dragging a marquee around the items to be selected, the Select/ Make Fence tool uses a line or polyline to select all the CAD objects which it crosses or touches. This selection method is useful when a marquee would select too many enclosed items, or when the shape of the selection set will not easily be contained by a marquee. The selection fence may be any already existing line or polyline, or it may be a line which is drawn after choosing the Select/ Make Fence tool. To use a pre-defined line or polyline, draw a line or polyline so it crosses or touches every item you wish to be selected. Then select that line or polyline and click on the Select/Make Fence tool. All CAD objects in contact
The Select CAD Objects button does not have to be clicked to activate Multiple Select. Any CAD button may be active except the Zoom or Manual Dimension buttons. If the CAD facility is not active and the Multiple Select feature (for CAD objects only) is desired while in the Architectural mode, choose CAD> Select CAD objects from the pull-down menu. Once several items are selected, they may be blocked, deleted, copied or moved as an entire unit. Moving is restricted to horizontal or vertical unless the Ctrl key is held. They
711
CAD
with the fence line will immediately become selected and ready to be edited. The fence line will become deselected. You may hold the Shift key and continue to select or deselect objects. After this you may continue with the CAD edits as desired.
If you will be selecting a group of CAD objects more than once this technique might be helpful. Draw the line or polyline through the CAD objects, then use that fence to select the same items every time. Leave the fence in place until all editing is done, then delete it. You can also have all your fences on their own CAD layer to keep them for future use, while turning off the display when not needed. For more information, see Layers on page 125.
The Trim Objects
and Extend Objects
tools also utilize the Select/Make Fence tool, but in a slightly different manner. In this case, you will first select the line(s) defining the boundary (for Extend Objects ) or the cut line (for Trim Objects ). Then click the Select/Make Fence tool and either click on the line or polyline to act as the fence or else drag a temporary line across the CAD objects to be trimmed or extended. Whatever was crossed by that temporary fence line will immediately be acted upon if appropriate. If you do not select the Select/Make Fence tool, you will need to individually click on the CAD objects.
CAD Buttons
Many of the buttons available in CAD mode are also available in other modes. For more information, see Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17. preference settings. They control how different objects behave when edited. Edit Polyline Parts - Toggle ability to edit individual components of polylines. For more information about Edit Polyline Parts, see Edit Polyline Parts on page 110. Restrict Angles/Unrestrict Angles Toggle the angle restriction. For more information about Allowed Angles, see Allowed Angles on page 105. Autosnap - Toggle autosnap for CAD object moving/editing. For more information about Autosnap, see Auto Snap on page 109. Display Arc Centers - Toggle the display of arc centers. For more
CAD Edit Buttons

Depending on what type of CAD object is currently selected, the available edit buttons will vary. The CAD edit buttons are covered in detail throughout this chapter. For a brief overview, see CAD Edit Buttons on page 64.

These buttons are essentially shortcuts to
712
Moving CAD Objects
information about Show Arc Centers, see Line Properties Panel on page 111. Restrict/Unrestrict Positioning Toggle positioning of CAD objects at
restricted increments or unrestricted. For more information, see Positioning Unit on page 106.
Moving CAD Objects

Selected item(s) can be moved by dragging the center handle. Some CAD objects such as cross boxes, framing members and insulation automatically stop when moved against other CAD objects. Tap the Ctrl key once while continuing to drag, and the item will move through the stop. If the Ctrl key is not used until after the item(s) have begun to be dragged, the items will only move in the normal allowed directions. This is normally the desired option. To move selected CAD object(s) freely with no constraints whatsoever, select the item(s), hold the Ctrl key, and then grab and drag the item(s). Boxes, circles and polylines can also be set to stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls. This is defined in the Line Style tab on the specification dialog for each item. points will each snap to any nearby CAD object, wall line, or intersections of these.
Drag Method
You may also click on the start point, then drag to the end point while holding the left button. In this case, the item will move only in its normal restricted direction. The distance moved will be the distance between your start and end point projected onto that move direction. To override the restrictions using the Drag Method, hold down the Ctrl key before dragging the selected item(s). If you do this, the item will move as if you had used the click method already described.
Accurate Move
Select an object and click the Accurate Move edit button to slow down the movement of the object with the mouse. This can be useful for precisely moving and resizing objects. This edit button is also available for many architectural objects such as walls, windows, and stairs.
Click Method
Select the item or group of items to be moved, click the Point to Point Move edit button, then click at a start point, not necessarily on the object to be moved, and then click on the end point. The item(s) will be moved by the distance and direction between the two points. These start and end
Copying
Point to Point Move may be used with edit button edit button copy if you hit both the Copy then the Point to Point Move
713
CAD
after selecting your item(s), then clicking the start point and end point. You may instead choose to drag the copy in order to place the copy along the restricted move path.
Any group of free-standing items (whether CAD, architectural, or a combination) can be moved or copied accurately relative to snappable items (points, intersections, etc.) using the Point to Point Move tool. For more information, see Point-toPoint Move on page 714.
Point-to-Point Move
The Point to Point Move edit button allows a selected CAD object to be accurately moved. There are two different ways to use the same tool, with each method producing a different result.
Move to Framing Reference

Framing members can be positioned relative to a framing reference using this tool. For more information, see Framing Reference Markers on page 382.
Move to Front
Click the Move To Front edit button to move the selected object in front of other CAD objects.
Curved Items Affect CAD Stops

Arcs as polyline edges, circles and curved walls stop CAD moves of the same, as well as straight polyline edges, box sides and straight wall surfaces stopping CAD moves. CAD Stops Move and/or Wall Stops Move must be checked in the Line Style tab of the specification dialog for the object being moved. When CAD Stops Move and/or Wall Stops Move are checked in the Line Style tab of the specification dialog for the item being moved, arcs and circles now will stop when they touch another line, straight wall, arc, curved wall or circle.
Moving Roof Planes

Point to Point Move works with roof planes. If a roof plane is accidentally moved so the baseline is off the wall, use Point to Point Move to move the baseline back onto the outside edge of the main wall layer.
Move and Reshape Using Specified Values

You may move a polyline corner, polyline edge, entire polyline, etc. by entering new values in the Set Dimension dialog.
714
Copying CAD Objects
Moving CAD Objects

A CAD object only moves in certain directions if the Ctrl key is not held. Normally the directions along and perpendicular each edge of a polyline or box are the allowed directions for moving. A
circle normally moves horizontally or vertically. When an object to be moved is already against another straight object, such as a straight wall or polyline or box edge, there will be an additional move direction along the direction of the straight object.
Copying CAD Objects

Copy/Paste
The Copy/Paste edit button allows single or multiple copies to be made of the selected item(s). Just as in the Architectural mode, single click the Copy/Paste edit button for a single copy (then click on screen to place the copy). Double-click the Copy/Paste edit button to place multiple copies. A copy will be placed each time you click on the screen. Click the right mouse button to stop copying (or click on any other toolbar button). You can also single click the Copy edit button, and then drag from a handle on the selected items. This allows the new copy to be positioned, or perhaps resized, precisely with respect to its original. Double-click the Copy/Paste edit button to place multiple copies when dragging. Copy/Paste can also be used in combination with the Point to Point Move edit button to make a copy of the selected item(s) at a specified location. Select the item(s), click Point to Point Move , click the Copy/Paste edit button, then click the start point and then the end point. An exact copy of the selected item(s) will be created. The two copies will have the exact relationship as the start and end point had in relationship to each other.
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy tool makes it easy to lay out multiple copies of any CAD object or group of CAD objects, including CAD blocks. 1. 2. Select the CAD object(s) to copy. Press the Multiple Copy edit button, and drag from the center handle. Linear replications will be made between the copied item and the cursors location. Release the mouse button to place copies. The distance of drag will determine the number of copies placed.
3.
Dragging from a corner handle instead of the center handle will produce concentric copies. Separate intervals are used for: CAD objects Framing (general, floor and ceiling) Rafters
715
CAD
Roof and floor trusses Studs (in wall framing details)
interval for rafters, joists, or studs is set in their own tab in the Framing dialog. Doubleclick the Framing Tools parent button. Choose the appropriate tab, and define the spacing. Once the copy interval is defined for each type of item, it will remain set at that interval until changed.
To set the copy interval for CAD objects or Roof Trusses, click the Multiple Copy button when it appears, and click on it again when in Multiple Copy mode. The copy
Move Object
When one or more items are selected, click the Move Object edit button to display the Move Object dialog.
Move Object Dialog 1 3 5
2 4
move the object relative to its current position. You will need to specify X Delta and Y Delta. X Delta - Specify the amount to move the object in the X direction. Y Delta - Specify the amount to move the object in the Y direction.
1 Relative to Itself - Select this option to
X Position - Specify the new X position of the center of the object. Y Position - Specify the new Y position of the center of the object. Angle - Specify an angle between the new center of the object and the origin of the plan (0, 0). Distance - Specify the distance from the new center of the object to the origin of the plan. option to move the object relative to the current CAD point. You can either specify its
2 Absolute Location - Select this option to move the object to an absolute location. You can either specify its X and Y Position, or Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked.
3 Relative to Current Point - Select this
716
Rotate Object
X Delta and Y Delta, or Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked. X Delta - Specify the X distance from the current point to the new center of the object. Y Delta - Specify the Y distance from the current point to the new center of the object. Angle - Specify an angle between the new center of the object and the current point.
Distance - Specify the distance from the new center of the object to the current point.
4 Polar - Check this box to change the

available choices at right. current location of the center of the object.
5 Current Location - Displays the
Rotate Object
When one or more items are selected, click the Rotate Object edit button to display the Rotate Object dialog.
Rotate Object Dialog 1 2 CAD

About Object Center - Select this option to rotate about the objects center. About Absolute Point - Select this option to rotate about the specified point. X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the point to rotate about. Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the point to rotate about. About Current Point - Select this option to rotate about the current CAD point.
1 Angle - Specify the angle to rotate the

object. Absolute Angle - Select this option to rotate the object so that its orientation is at an absolute angle. Relative Angle - Select this option to rotate the object the specified angle. Angle - Specify the rotation angle.
2 Rotate About - Specify how the object

will rotate.
717
Resize Object
When one or more items are selected, click the Resize Object edit button to display the Resize Object dialog.
Resize Object Dialog
1 2
1 Resize - Specify how the object will

resize. Resize Factor - Specify the resize factor. A resize factor of 2 double the size of the object. A resize factor of 0.5 halves the size of the object.
About Absolute Point - Select this option to resize about the specified point. X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the point to resize about, when resizing about an absolute point. Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the point to resize about. About Current Point - Select this option to resize about the current CAD point.
2 About Object Center - Select this option to resize about the objects center.
Reflect About Line

A selected area or an entire floor may be reflected about any line which is drawn at one of the allowed wall angles. Draw a CAD line (not a polyline) to act as the reflect line. Once the Edit Area has been defined, the Reflect About Line edit button appears in the Edit toolbar. Click the Reflect About Line edit button, and then click on the CAD line to reflect the selected area about that line. It does not matter whether or not the line is inside the selection rectangle. The selected area will then be reflected around the CAD line, and the original
718
Reflect Object
selection area will no longer be there. You can use the copy tool with the Reflect About
Line edit button if you want to preserve the original selection.
Reflect Object
When one or more items are selected, click the Reflect Object edit button to display the Reflect Object dialog.
Reflect Object Dialog 1 2
1 Axis of Reflection - Specify which axis

to reflect about. Vertical Line - Select this option to reflect the object vertically. Horizontal Line - Select this option to reflect the object horizontally.
Through Absolute Location - Select this option to reflect about the specified point. X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the point to reflect about, when reflecting about an absolute location. Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the point to reflect about, when reflecting about an absolute location.
2 Through - Specify the point to reflect

about. Through Object Center - Select this option to reflect about the objects center. Through Current Point - Select this option to reflect about the current CAD point.
719
CAD
Replicate Object
When one or more items are selected, click the Replicate Object edit button to display the Replicate Object dialog. The Replicate Object dialog is used to make copies of the object(s) and allows you to move, rotate, and resize each copy.
Replicate Object Dialog 1 2
3 4 5
1 Number Of Copies - Specify the

number of copies to make. each copy.
3 Angle - Specify the angle to rotate each

copy. resize each copy by. A resize factor of 2 doubles the size of the object. A resize factor of 0.5 halves the size of the object.
2 Move - Specify how much to move

X Delta - Specify the amount to move each copy in the X direction. Y Delta - Specify the amount to move each copy in the Y direction. Polar - Select this option to specify polar coordinates Distance and Angle, for the move.
4 Resize Factor - Specify the factor to
5 Rotate/Resize about - Specify how the

object will rotate or resize. About Object Center - Select this option to rotate/resize about the objects center.
720
Delete
About Absolute Point - Select this option to rotate/resize about the specified point. X Position - Specify the X coordinate of the point to rotate/resize about, when rotating/ resizing about an absolute point.
Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of the point to rotate/resize about, when rotating/ resizing about an absolute point. About Current Point - Select this option to rotate/resize about the current CAD point.
Delete
The Delete edit button will delete whatever is selected. The Del key on the keyboard also works the same way. Make sure that only those items which should be deleted are selected. If extra items which should not be deleted are part of the selection set, hold the Shift key while clicking the individual items to remove them from the selection set before clicking the Delete edit button.
Reverse Direction
Select a line, arrow, or polyline, then click the Reverse Direction edit button to reverse the direction. Reversing a line or
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
The Make Parallel edit button is an alignment tool. Any CAD line, straight edge of a CAD block, framing member, polyline edge or roof plane edge may be made parallel or perpendicular to another straight edge. Select the straight line, click the Make Parallel edit button, then click on a second wall (or line/edge) to align to. The first item should be within 20 degrees parallel (or perpendicular) to the second, and will rotate until parallel (or perpendicular). Walls are often used to align CAD edges or roof edges.
Select edge
Click button
then click wall
Result
If you initially clicked near the first item's center, it will rotate about its exact center. If
721
CAD
polyline is useful with certain line styles or with an arrow at one end.
it was clicked near its end, it will rotate about that end. If a specific angle is needed, create a wall or CAD line at that angle before using it to align the edge of a roof or other CAD object.
on the setting under "Rotate/Resize About" in the CAD area of the Preferences dialog, see CAD Panel on page 104.
Arcs
The Make Parallel edit button affects arcs in two different ways, depending on which part of the arc is selected. The arc is divided into three equal selection areas...the two outer thirds, and the center third. Selecting near either of the ends (in the outer third) affects that end. Selecting the arc in the center third affects the center point. If you select the arc on either end (in the outer third), the Make Parallel edit button will extend or contract the free end of the arc along the arc until the tangent at that end is parallel/perpendicular to a second item which could be a straight wall or CAD object. Just click on the arc near the desired end, then click on the Make Parallel edit button, then click on the second item. The selected arc end will extend or contract if it is already within about 20 degrees of being tangent (or perpendicular) to the second item. This method is used to adjust the end direction for curved stairs. If you select the arc in the middle third, the Make Parallel edit button will move the arc so that its center coincides with the center of a nearby curved wall, arc or circle. Just click in the middle third of an arc, then on the Make Parallel edit button, and finally click on a nearby arc, circle or curved wall, and first arc will be moved so that its center coincides with that of the second item. The radius of the arc will not change.
CAD Blocks & Polylines

The Make Parallel edit button appears for a selected CAD block instance when a line, including a straight polyline edge, or box edge within the block instance, is selected. The entire block is rotated to make the selected line or edge parallel (or perpendicular) to the item subsequently clicked on. The Make Parallel edit button normally rotates a polyline edge while leaving other edges in the polyline unchanged, except those that must be extended or contracted to maintain contact with the rotated edge. The line rotates about its end if selected nearby, or about its center if you click within its middle third. To rotate the entire polyline instead, click twice on the Make Parallel edit button to display the Make Parallel dialog.
Choose to either rotate just the selected edge, as before, or to rotate the entire polyline. Your setting will remain until you access the Make Parallel dialog again and change it. Polylines and CAD blocks will rotate about center or about the current point depending
722
Break Line
In order to prevent drastic or unforseen changes, an arc can be moved only a limited distance, so you may wish to move the arc into is approximate position before using the Make Parallel edit button to reposition the arc center exactly. An arc is moved only if the distance between its center and the second item's center is less than half the
minimum radius of either item. Also, an arc that is part of a polyline is moved only if it and lines it is connected to are not extended or contracted more than half of their original length. This tool may also be used with curved stairs.
Break Line
The Break Line tool adds a complete or partial break in a line or polyline edge. It will not break items created with the Circle Cross Box , Oval , Box , or tools. A partial break adds a joint to single line to make a polyline. It can also be used on a polyline to add corners so the shape may be changed.
A complete break means that the line is totally severed at that point. A partial break means that a joint has been added to the line or polyline, and that joint can be used to change the shape of the polyline (if Move Corners is selected on the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog), but the sections are still part of the same polyline unit. Framing members are always completely broken when a break is added. You cannot add a partial break to a framing member. To partially break a line (add a joint for reshaping), select the line, click the Break Line tool, then click the location for the break. If Singlethere is a nearby point or click intersecting line or arc on the item to be broken, the break location will snap to that point or intersection. (See CAD Preferences on page 732 for Auto Snap priorities.)
Result
Select the line exactly on the break. (If you dont know where it is, select the line, position the cursor above the diamondshaped handle, click once to unselect, then click again to re-select.) Grab the handle and drag to the new shape.
To completely sever a line or polyline so that a section is removable, select the line, double-
Doubleclick the Break Line click button, then click on the location for the clean break. As before, the break location will snap to nearby points or intersections. If a complete break is needed at an exact distance, first place a point or a crossing line at that location so that there will be an exact location for the break point to snap to.
723
CAD
Breaking near a polyline corner will snap to the corner and simply separate the adjacent polyline components. If a segment needs to be removed from a closed polyline, two complete breaks will be necessary before the segment may be deleted. (Don't worry if the cursor shows a double arrow if breaking at a polyline joint). A complete break turns a single line into two separate lines. It can also be used to cut a polyline.
Deleting a Polyline Edge

There are three ways to delete an edge of a polyline: 1. 2. 3. Create a complete break at both ends. Select the edge and delete. Select Edit Polyline Parts the edge and delete. . Select
Draw over a straight line edge from one end to the other.
Trim and Extend

Trim Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines, framing items, and circles may be trimmed. The trimming, or cutting item may be any CAD object, or a group of CAD objects. The cutting item may even be a CAD block. First select the item(s) to trim against. Then click on the Trim Objects button. Finally, click on the part of the item to be trimmed off. You may repeat this final step as many times as desired. Right click or hit the Esc key to terminate this process. A circle may be trimmed against any other CAD object(s), turning it into an arc. A circle cannot be broken at only one point. A portion of it must be removed. The cutting items must therefore cross the circle on both sides of the portion clicked on to be removed.
Note: If you use Fillet Two Lines to trim one framing item to another framing item, both framing items will be angle cut.
Extend Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines or framing items may also be extended. The boundary to which the items will be extended may be any CAD object or group of CAD objects. It may even be a CAD block. First select the boundary item(s), the ones to which the CAD objects will be extended. Then click on the Extend Objects edit button. Finally, select the part of the item to be extended. You may repeat this final step as many times as desired. Right click or hit the Esc key to terminate this process.
Note: If you use Fillet Two Lines to extend one framing item to another framing item, both framing items will be angle cut.
Select/Make Fence
To trim or extend using a fence for multiple selection, first select the cutting item(s) or boundary(s) as before.
724
Fillet and Chamfer
Then click on the Trim Object
or Extend
Object edit button. Next, click the Select/ Make Fence edit button. Then, click on the line, arc or polyline that will serve as the fence. Items crossing the fence will be trimmed or extended where they are crossed by the fence.
As an alternative final step, instead of clicking on an existing fence item, drag a temporary line fence while holding the left button down. Be sure the fence crosses the items on the side to be edited, especially when trimming to edit the correct half of the item properly.
Fillet and Chamfer

Fillet Two Lines
The Fillet Two Lines tool allows you to use an arc of a specified radius connecting any two non-parallel lines. The Fillet Two Lines tool may also be used to create a mitered intersection between framing items such as joists or rafters. The miter will display in both Plan View and in 3D. part of each line toward the selected end, and discard the overlap when the fillet or chamfer is created. The edited lines will also be joined as a polyline. The lines may be single lines, adjacent edges of a the same polyline, or outside edges of two different open polylines. So long as the two lines are not parallel to each other, a fillet or chamfer may be created between them. Arcs may also be edited. (See note). The size of both the fillet or chamfer is specified within either the Fillet Two Lines or the Chamfer Two Lines tool. The method is the same. First, select any line in order to bring up the tools. When the Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two Lines buttons become visible, double-click on either button. The Fillet / Chamfer dialog will open. Type in the desired values.
Chamfer Two Lines

The Chamfer Two Lines tool allows you to create a straight corner bevel of a specified size connecting any two non-parallel lines. The chamfer is a third short line which cuts off the corner between the two selected lines. To create a Fillet Two Lines Two Lines Fillet Two Lines or Chamfer
, select the first line, click the or Chamfer Two Lines
tool, then click on the second line. The two lines will join together with the specified fillet or chamfer at the intersection. If the lines did not originally meet, they will extend until they do. If the lines overlapped originally, the fillet or chamfer will keep the
725
CAD
Click OK when done. At this point, you may select on a second line to create the fillet or chamfer between the original line selected and the second line selected. Or you may click a different tool to get out of Fillet Two Lines or Chamfer Two Lines mode. Either way, the Fillet radius and Chamfer distance values specified will be the default values used until you choose to change them. There is no need to keep defining the same value over and over. Define it once, use it multiple times. A value of 0 for either tool will cause the two lines acted upon with that tool to meet at a sharp corner. Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two
Note: An Arc will always respond as though the fillet or chamfer has been set to 0. It will extend or shorten along the curve to meet the other item, creating a sharp intersection between them. You MUST select the arc on the half to be affected by the edit. Otherwise you may have nothing occur, or the wrong end may be affected.
When used this way, the following dialog will open. Click OK to approve the polyline edit and see the changes occur.
Lines can also be used to eliminate parts of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two non-adjacent lines that are in the same polyline.
CAD Blocks
Make Block
Create a CAD block by selecting multiple CAD and text objects, then click on the Make Block edit button that appears on the Edit toolbar. The new block acts like a single CAD object. CAD blocks can contain other CAD blocks, these are called "Nested" CAD blocks. When creating a new block from a group of CAD objects, two things are actually created. A block definition, which holds all of the items in a group is created, as well as a block instance that displays the block at a position, orientation and size that matches that of the items in the original group. More instances of the new block are made by copying the first instance. Any copy can be repositioned, resized and rotated independently of any other block instance. For a single plan file, these instances share the same definition regardless of which floor
726
CAD Blocks
or CAD detail in which they appear. Copying a block instance to a completely different plan file also copies the block definition to that plan. Select a block instance by clicking on any one of its components. It moves, rotates and resizes much like a CAD box. Drag from a corner to resize the block proportionately. Drag from a side handle to resize in only one dimension. Resizing each dimension differently can distort ovals and arcs, and prevents exploding the block instance. You should be able to snap to any item or crossing of items in an instance of CAD block. The exception is snapping to arcs, circles or ovals if the instance has been stretched differentially. Only horizontal text should be placed in a block whose instances will be rotated. The center of a text object will rotate with the rest of the block. Angled text will not maintain position as well when rotated. A CAD block may not contain the following CAD objects: roof planes, layout boxes, north pointer, plan footprint, roof/gable line, sun angle arrow, bearing line, or joist direction line. If any these are selected in the group from which a block is made, they will be omitted and the block will be constructed from the remaining items. Text , Callouts and Markers may be included in a CAD block. Rotating a block instance containing text will not rotate the text. CAD objects that display in 3D (such as counter tops and slabs) can be part of a block, but will not display in 3D when included in a block.
Counter Tops and Slabs that are blocked in a CAD block will still generate in 3D views.
Explode Block
Click on any item in a single block instance to select that instance. When a single block is selected, click the Explode Block button to break it back into its individual components. You cannot explode a block instance selected by dragging a marquee. You must click it to select it. If the block was composed of other blocks, exploding the outermost block will break it down into the component blocks. Note that the block definition is not exploded or changed, just the instance.
727
CAD
CAD Block Management 1 2 3 4 5 6

Select CAD> CAD Block Mgmt to display the CAD Block Management dialog. current plan file. This includes all CAD blocks that appear as instances on any floor, in a CAD detail or saved elevation/cross section view. It can also include CAD blocks that currently have no instance anywhere in your plan. These blocks can remain after all of their instances have been deleted. window or in a Cross Section/Elevation View to place a new instance for the block into that view.
1 Displays a list of all CAD blocks for the
4 Rename - Click to specify a new name

for the CAD Block. unused block definitions from your plan for deletion. Blocks will delete when OK is clicked. may be marked Delete or Undelete with this button. Blocks will delete when OK is clicked.
5 Press the Purge button to mark all
2 In Use shows which blocks have at

least one instance being used.
6 Delete/Undelete - A selected block
3 Select any block in the list, click Insert,

then click in Plan View, a CAD Detail
728
CAD Block Specification Dialog
CAD Block Specification Dialog

General Tab
1 2 4
CAD block in the plans CAD block list. While all other changes in this dialog affect only this instance of the block, changing the name modifies the block definition.
1 Block Name - Specify the name for the
2 X Position - Specify the x coordinate of

the center of the CAD block instance. Y Position - Specify the y coordinate of the center of the CAD block instance. Angle - Specify the angle for the CAD block instance.
This name is used when the block is exported via DXF/DWG, and is also imported with DXF/DWG block definitions. A CAD blocks name is limited to 255 characters. If you use a name that is in use, the definition of the other block is overwritten and the instances of that block will be updated to match the current definition. Copyright - Displays the blocks copyright, if there is one.
3 Height - Specify the height of the CAD

block instance. Height Factor - Specify the ratio of the height of the CAD block instance to the height of the original CAD block. If the height and width factors are set to different values the instance cannot be exploded, and ovals and arcs will be distorted.
729
CAD
Width - Specify the width of the CAD block instance. Width Factor - Specify the ratio of the width of the CAD block instance to the width of the original CAD block. If the height and width factors are set to different values the instance cannot be exploded, and ovals and arcs will be distorted. style and fill style should override the line style and fill style of the individual objects in the block.
By Object - Specify that the individual objects in the block control their own line style and fill style.
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the CAD Block Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681.
4 By Block - Specify that the blocks line
Fill Style Tab

The Fill Style tab of the CAD Block Specification dialog is the same as the Fill Style tab of the CAD Polyline Specification dialog. For more information, see Fill Style Tab on page 692.
New block instances default to By block unless New blocks by layer is checked in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see CAD Preferences on page 732.
730
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks can be saved in the Library to be used in all plan files. To create your own CAD Block library: 1. 2. 3. 4. Have one or more CAD blocks ready in the current view. Select the CAD block(s). Click the Add to Library ton. edit but6. Browse the library.
In the Add to Library dialog, add a new CAD Block category or select an existing one. Name or rename the block if desired. If multiple blocks are selected, the block names will be used as the library names.
5.
Use the CAD Blocks library like you would any other library. Select the item, then place it in the drawing.
731
CAD
CAD Blocks which are placed from the Library can be exploded back into their component parts. This allows for modifications to the block if necessary. Once you have made the modifications, you can create a new block with the changes and add that modified block to the Library as well.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in DXF format. You can import these into a plan, block them, and turn them into Library items. Some manufacturers details have already been provided in library format for you. Observe the different CAD Block libraries which are included with Chief Architect.
Dimensions
For more information on the Manual Dimension tool, seeDimensions on page 635. There are several things to remember when dimensioning CAD objects. Make sure that CAD objects are displayed in the current view. Dimensions will not look for CAD objects that are not displayed (Double-click the Manual Dimension button to display the Dimension Defaults dialog, then click the Locate Items tab). If CAD objects are turned off and do not display, related dimensions will not display either. When CAD objects are turned on again, the related dimensions reappear. There are no automatic dimensions in CAD. Dimensions must be manually drawn. Dimensions in CAD mode follow the Allowed Angles set in the Preferences dialog. If Unrestricted (button down), dimensions may be drawn at any angle. To find the length of a line or polyline edge drawn at a nonrestricted angle, drag a dimension line along it. Once drawn, the dimension line will snap to the exact direction of the line and give its exact length.
Select the Angular Dimension button to dimension angles between CAD objects and within CAD blocks. Angular dimensions can also be used with objects, such as walls, joists or cabinets. For more information, see Angular Dimensions on page 637.
CAD Preferences
The key to mastering the CAD tools is understanding the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. This dialog contains information which lays the foundation for everything done with the CAD tools. For more information, see CAD Panel on page 104.
732
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
Many of the CAD dialogs have a Number Style button. Clicking this opens the Number Style/Angle Style dialog which
controls the format for distances and angles. This affects which units display in the dialogs.
Converting CAD Objects

CAD CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a flat line drawing into a 3D model. Once a drawing has been imported into Chief Architect, double CAD lines which represent wall layers and other structural items can be converted to actual Chief Architect walls, railings, windows, or doors. For more information, see CAD to Walls on page 160. To convert a CAD object into one of these objects, select the object and click the Convert Polyline edit button. The Convert Polyline dialog appears. Select one of the options and click OK to convert the polyline.
Converting Special Polylines into Polylines

Special polylines can be converted to plain polylines. Select the special polyline and click the Convert to Plain Polyline edit button. This can be used to convert a counter top to a plain polyline and then to a slab.
One of the many uses of the polyline conversion tools is to import a DWG/ DXF file and then convert the CAD lines into elevation data that the Terrain Modeler recognizes.
Converting Polylines into Special Polylines

Lines, polylines, splines, and boxes may be turned into special polylines such as counter tops, slabs, landings, material list polylines, molding polylines, roof/ceiling holes, polyline solids, and many terrain objects.
733
Convert Polyline Dialog
1 3 5 7
9 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17
10 12 14 16 18
Only available when the polyline is closed. For more on Counter top polylines, see Custom Counter Tops on page 439.
1 Countertop - Convert to a counter top.
the polyline is closed and is contained inside a roof plane or ceiling plane. solid. Only available when the polyline is closed.
8 Polyline Solid - Convert to a polyline 9 Terrain Perimeter - This option is

only available when:
2 Slab - Convert to a slab. Only available

when the polyline is closed. foundation slab. Only available when the polyline is closed.
3 Foundation Slab - Convert to a
The polyline is closed A terrain perimeter does not yet exist When only one polyline is currently selected
4 Landing - Convert to a landing. Only available when the polyline is closed and is not a spline. 5 Material List Polyline - Convert to a material list polyline. Only available when the polyline is closed. 6 7
Molding Polyline - Convert to a molding polyline. Hole in Roof/Ceiling - Convert to a roof/ceiling hole. Only available when
elevation line. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists. feature. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists.
10 Elevation Line - Convert to an
11 Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain 12 Road (Perimeter) - Convert to a road
polyline where the polyline represents the perimeter of the road. Only available
734
CAD Menu
when a terrain perimeter exists and the polyline is closed. road where the polyline represents the center line for the road. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists. polyline to a road median. This is helpful for creating medians on curved roads. to a road marking where the polyline represents the perimeter of the road marking. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists and the polyline is closed.
13 Road (Center Line) - Convert to a
to a road stripe where the polyline represents the centerline of the road stripe. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists. sidewalk polyline where the polyline represents the perimeter of the sidewalk. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists and the polyline is closed.
16 Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert
17 Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a
14 Road Median - Convert the selected
15 Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert
sidewalk where the polyline represents the center line of the sidewalk. Only available when a terrain perimeter exists. Click OK to convert the object(s).
18 Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
CAD Menu
The CAD tools are always available in the Plan View, even when the Architectural mode is active. If only one or two lines are needed, select CAD> Line from the menu. This will activate the Draw Line tool without requiring you to toggle into the CAD facility. Draw the lines you need, then click on the next architectural tool (such as the Interior Wall tool) and continue. The Multiple Select for CAD objects is available in Architectural mode by choosing CAD> Select from the menu.
Snap To: (Snap Points)

The snap functions in Chief Architect are rarely used. Sometimes there is an easier way to accomplish the same goal, but the snap functions do accomplish some things which are impossible to do any other way. When deciding to use the Snap To: function remember that the current CAD point is the first thing Chief will use as a snap. Snap To: allows you to locate the current CAD point in a place where it will be useful as a Snap. Snap To: can either move or stretch a CAD object to a point, or it can move a point to a CAD object., depending on whether or not a CAD object is selected prior to activating the function.
735
CAD
If a CAD object is not selected, Snap To: will move the current point (the red X) to the closest qualifying item, no matter how far away it is. If that current point is the attached endpoint of a line or arc, the current point will take the line or arc endpoint with it as it moves to the new snap location, thus changing line or arc. Qualifying items are - CAD points, Line or Arc midpoints, Circle or Oval centers, Box mid-points. You can also snap to the following items: a roof baseline a center crossmark for curved wall in working (active) plan center crossmark for a curved wall in the reference plan if wall centers are displayed in the reference plan (check the Ref. column for Automatic Dimensions in the Layer Display Options dialog) edges of stair sections & landings
Snap to Point
Original line with temporary endpoint as current point.
New location after Snap To: Point was selected.
Original arc with temporary endpoint as current point.
New location after Snap To: Point was selected.
The following section describes the results of using Snap To when a CAD object is and is not selected first. Current Point - When no CAD object is selected, choosing Snap To> Point will cause the current point to snap to and merge with the nearest point. In the two sets of illustrations, the finger is pointing to the current point before and after Snap To> Point was selected. The point on the end of both the line and arc is the temporary, attached endpoint created when the line and arc were drawn. Notice that both the line and the arc change when their endpoint snaps to the new location (the nearest point). CAD Item Selected - If a CAD object is selected first, Snap To> Point has no effect.
If a CAD object is selected before choosing one of the Snap To: options, the selected item moves to the current point. This is very useful for precisely locating items in relation to each other. Each type of CAD object has a specific definition point used to locate the item. Lines and arcs are located by their midpoint, circles and ovals by their center, and boxes by the midpoint on their lower edge (when drawn from left to right).
736
Snap To: (Snap Points)
Snap to Object End
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD object is selected first, choosing Snap To> Item End will move the selected item to the current point. This is used to reposition CAD objects, such as moving a circle so that its center lies exactly on the end of a line.
Newly created polyline. Ends do not meet.
Closed polyline after Snap To: Item End was chosen.
Current point placed near Current point after Snap end of line. To: Item End was chosen. This creates an attached endpoint.
Newly created line.
Snap to Intersection
Current Point - If a CAD object is not selected, choosing Snap To> Intersection will snap the current point to the intersection between the two closest CAD objects. If the two closest CAD objects do not intersect, or if neither one is a line, the current point will not move. CAD Item Selected - If a CAD object is selected first, Snap To> Intersection will have no effect.
Current Point - If no CAD object is selected, Snap To> Item End snaps the current point to the nearest endpoint or corner. This can be used to automatically close a newly created polyline or to snap the end of one line to a corner or end of another edge. Also use this to snap a point to the end of a line or arc in order to create an attached endpoint. Once snapped to the end using this method, the point will stretch the line or arc if it is then snapped to another snap point. Circles and ovals also have qualifying Item End snap points. These snap points are visible when a circle or oval is selected they are the handles which lie on the edge of the item. If a circle is drawn horizontally, the Item End snap points will be the four quadrant points (i.e. north, south, east and westsee illustration above).
737
CAD
Line after Snap To: Item End was chosen.
Corners of a circle (also oval) to which Snap To: Item End will snap.
Snap to Object
Normal snapping to item. Snap to line
Snap to circle (with & without center displayed).
Current Point - If a CAD object is not selected, choosing Snap To> Item snaps the current point to the nearest item. If the nearest item is a line or line segment, the point will snap to the perpendicular point. If the nearest item is an arc or circle, the point will snap to the item directly in line with the center point (unless arc centers are displayed...then the point will snap directly to the center). If the point is an attached line endpoint, it behaves as expected unless the nearest item is the straight edge of a line, polyline or box. Then the line endpoint will move in the direction of its line to the location where the two lines would meet in space, lengthening or shortening the line as necessary. CAD Item Selected - If a CAD object is selected first, choosing Snap To> Item will move the selected CAD object in a perpendicular direction to the current point.
Snapping to the meeting point of the two lines
Snap to Line Midpoint
Line endpoint before and after Snap To: Line Midpoint was chosen.
Arc endpoint before and after Snap To: Line Midpoint was chosen. Notice the midpoint of the circle.
Current Point - If a CAD object is not selected, choosing Snap To> Line Midpoint snaps the current point to the midpoint of the nearest line, linear edge, or arc, or to the center point of an oval or circle. CAD Object Selected - If a CAD object is selected first, choosing Snap To> Line Midpoint will move the selected CAD
738
North Pointer
object so that its defined midpoint relocates to the current point.
North Pointer
The North Pointer defines the direction of true north in Plan View. If north is not defined, it is assumed to be straight up. Every bearing is in relation to north, so establish this direction before keying in survey information for plot layouts or for using bearings to establish polar direction for the creation or editing of points, lines, arcs, etc.
Line angle set to display as Degrees. This does not reference the North Pointer.
The same line angle is set to display as Bearings. This shows the angle in reference to the North Pointer.
There can be only one North Pointer per plan. After choosing CAD> Special> North Pointer, drag the line defining the pointer, starting at the tail and dragging toward the point. Do not worry about the size or direction when creating the pointer, since it is more accurate to input the exact values using the Line Specification dialog. When the North Pointer is drawn, select it and open it for specification. For Angle, type in the actual angle for north (0 degrees is horizontal to the right, 90 degrees is straight up, etc.) For Length, type in the desired length of the North Pointer. Once a north pointer has been created and set for one floor of your plan, a north pointer drawn on any other floor will automatically point in the same direction. If you use the Line Specification dialog to reset this direction of the pointer on any
To enter the angle in bearings, first type N or S (for North or South) then the degrees (followed by d) then the minutes (followed by ') then the seconds (followed by ) and finally type either E or W (for East or West). If minutes are zero, you do not need to enter a value. Following are some examples of bearings: It is not necessary to capitalize the letters. Spaces are also optional. N 20d 30' E S 45' W N 89d 48' 30" W N 90' E
739
CAD
floor, those on all other floors will also reset automatically.
Note: If you choose to display the angle of a line when a North Pointer exists, be sure to select the appropriate format on the CAD page of the Preferences dialog. If angles are set to display as Degrees then the angle displayed is in relation to 0 degrees (horizontal to the right) even though a North Pointer is already established. Set the angles to display as Bearings to display the relationship to the North Pointer.
CAD Details
Each plan file can store any number of CAD Details. These are a special window which may be used to draw and store any type of separate detail, such as plot layouts, cross section details, etc. The CAD Detail windows save and restore with the plan from which they were created. They may be sent to the printer or to the layout sheet like any other plan or view window. CAD information may also be copied in or out of a CAD Detail window using the Group Select and CAD Copy functions described elsewhere.
Creating CAD Details

Choose CAD> CAD Detail The first time the menu is selected, the CAD Details dialog will open. Click New to create a new detail.
The Create New CAD Detail dialog will open. Type the New Detail Name for this CAD Detail, then select OK.
A new window with the given name is created. This window automatically saves with the model. If a CAD Detail window has already been created for this plan, selecting CAD> CAD
740
CAD Details
Detail will open the CAD Details dialog. Select from the list of all accessible details, then click Open.
into CAD objects, which can then be edited independently. Anything on an architectural layer is mapped to layers 40 and up. If you are using this tool from an elevation or a 3D view, patterns are mapped to layer 38 and lines are mapped to layer 39. Any other CAD objects will remain on their original layer.
Note: It is important to understand that a detail created with the CAD Detail from View tool is not dynamically linked to your view. Once made, any changes made to the view will not be updated in the detail.
The existing CAD Detail windows will be available in the order they were created.
Special Details
Some CAD details are created automatically by the system. If you have any roof trusses in your plan, a diagram of each truss type used (with a count for each) will be in the Truss Detail CAD detail. When walls are framed via the Framing dialog, a special detail is created for each wall. These details, however, are not accessible via the CAD Details dialog, but only by selecting a wall and clicking on the Open Wall Detail the Edit toolbar. button that appears in
CAD Detail from View

This tool works for any view that is derived from drawings, such as Plan Views, Section/Elevations, and camera views (3D Perspective, Elevation, or Overview). It does not work for Render Views or material list views. It converts what is seen on screen
741
CAD
Plan Footprint
Site information can be drawn with the model or in a CAD detail. If you create a CAD detail to draw your site plan, Plan Footprint is a function that quickly imports the building footprint into the CAD detail. Once the Plan Footprint is imported into the detail, you have some control over what information is imported. The footprint acts just like a polyline, it can be rotated and moved around the detail.
DN DN
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE electric cooktop
KITCHEN
12'4 x 10'5
DINING
12'4 x 13'5
Allow 39" for ref. Double electric oven
LIVING
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
2'6 x 6'5
NOOK
10'3 x 9'5
UP
UP
DN
DN
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET two vents, min 50 sq in ea., max 5 in off floor
2'2 x 7'2
HALL
FAMILY
13'1 x 19'1
solid core door, 1 hr rating
UP
5/8 inch, wallboard on walls & ceiling between house and garage
UP
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
15'7 x 5'6
DN
DN
Floor plan Plan Footprint can only be accessed from an active CAD Detail window. To create a site plan in this way, you must first create a new CAD Detail window with an appropriate name. While in this new CAD Detail window, select CAD> Special> Plan Footprint. The Plan Footprint dialog will open. Any floor already created in this plan displays. Choose which floor to use as the footprint.
Plan Footprint behaves like a polyline and can be moved, rotated or placed anywhere in the CAD Detail window. Use this to create plot plans. If the model consists of several buildings, a footprint will be created for each building. Each footprint will act like a polyline, but adjusting one footprint will automatically adjust all the footprints in order to maintain their relationship. If the footprint is adjusted, sometimes the screen will not refresh properly. Select Window> Refresh Display from the pull-down menus to redraw the screen. If you have edited your 3D model since creating the Plan Footprint, you can update the footprint by refreshing the screen in the CAD detail containing the plan footprint.
A skeleton floor plan will be created in the CAD Detail window. This footprint
742
The footprint will update to agree with any changes made to the 3D model. If you reverse a plan, or edit it using the Edit Area command, the plan footprint will be updated automatically.

The items appearing in Plan Footprints can be determined using the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Layers on page 125.
Line Thickness Visibility

The screen image will display any type of line (in Plan View or 3D) whose line weight has been increased. This is usually used as a quick check prior to printing, to make sure that the desired items have had their lines thickened appropriately. The thickness defines the actual printing thickness. Since the screen pixel size is usually much larger than the print pixel size, the lines on screen will appear much larger than they will actually print. You may need to zoom closer to see a more accurate screen representation of what will actually print. Choose Edit> Preferences> Appearance, then check Show Line Weight. Until unchecked, all thickened lines will display on screen. This will affect not only CAD objects, but also Layout lines and lines defining architectural items in Plan View (such as walls, doors, etc.).
743
Line Thickness Visibility
744
Chapter 32:
Advanced Design & Editing
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects advanced design tools let you draw and model plans with ease and flexibility while giving you the tools you need to ensure the quality and integrity of your work. Chief Architects advanced editing tools offer a powerful variety of editing alternatives. Groups of objects can be selected based on a shared quality or location. Those objects can then be edited in many unconventional ways. Before beginning any major plan revisions manually, you might want to become familiar with the tools described in this chapter.
Chapter Contents
House Wizard Plan Check IRC Checklist Select Same / Load Same Edit Area Tools Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area Reflect About Line with Edit Area Copy/Paste with Edit Area Delete Objects Rotate View Reverse Plan
House Wizard
The House Wizard is a timesaving feature that allows you to create a preliminary room-by-room design of the home without getting caught up in the
745
Advanced Design
details. Once you have finalized the shape and layout of the rooms, the House Wizard will convert them into a working plan that can be edited and detailed to completion.
Editing Rooms
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start House Wizard . The House Wizard will lead you through a series of windows that gather information about the rooms you want to include in your house. Once you have clicked Finish and closed the House Wizard, room boxes will appear for all of the chosen rooms.
Select room boxes in Select Objects mode just like other objects in Chief Architect. Room boxes can then be resized, rotated, and rearranged as desired. Try to line up the rooms so that they are just touching. Excessive overlaps may cause your rooms to form incorrectly. Click on any of the rooms and the Delete edit button and the Copy/Paste edit button will appear. Clicking the House Wizard parent button opens child buttons that allow you to place additional rooms in your plan. Select a child button and click in the plan to place a room box of that type.
Once the Room Boxes have been created, they must be arranged into a floor plan.
746
Plan Check
Build House
Once the rooms are all in place select Tools> House Wizard> Build House and the rooms will be converted into a building model.
Walls and doors will be created between the rooms that you arranged. If you specified a two-story house you will need to go to the second floor and select Tools> House Wizard> Build House to create the second floor.
Plan Check
Plan Check checks the currently displayed floor of your plan for anything that appears to violate common building codes or practices. It will not find all the problems in your plan. It at least points out areas of your plan that you should take a look at to see if they could be improved. When it is done, respond to any of its messages that make sense and then run it again. Most plan errors that are found cause the offending object to be circled. To prevent the circled item from being off screen, make sure the entire plan is displayed within the window before you run Plan Check. Plan Check only checks for possible code violations. With each error that it finds, Plan
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in Chief Architect analyzes your plan and compares it against commonly known building codes and practices. This Plan Check may be limited and does not claim to detect all building codes and design requirements. It is recommended that you always have your plans checked by a licensed professional before beginning actual construction.
747
Advanced Design
Check displays a dialog that gives you several choices.
Plan Check Dialog
example, a shelf in a small room indicates a closet, a stove or refrigerator indicates a kitchen, a bed a bedroom, etc. If the program cannot assign a room type the Plan Check will circle it and suggest that you manually assign the Room Type. The first time Plan Check runs it will automatically assign the room type to as many rooms in your plan as it can and request that you assign the rest. Do this by double-clicking in the room in Select Objects mode to display the Room Specification dialog. Then select a Room Type for the room. The system can do a much better job of checking if it knows what a room is to be used for. Several things that can become incorrect as your plan evolves are fixed during Plan Check. Some walls in your plan can change from exterior to interior as they become enclosed by other walls. Doors in these walls are redrawn without the threshold that marks an exterior door. Any wall that changes from interior to exterior, or becomes a wall between the house and its attached garage has its doors redrawn with a threshold. A cabinet, fixture or furniture item that is against a wall due to the wall being moved into it, as opposed to the item being moved, will be attached to the wall.
1. 2.
Click Next to ignore this error and proceed to the next. Hold suspends Plan Check so you can fix the problem. Select Plan Check again from the menu, or hit F9, and it takes up where it left off, with the next error. Done terminates Plan Check.
3.
If this dialog obscures the Plan View, simply drag its title bar to move it out of the way. It will remember its new position and continue to display there. Some rooms that have not yet had their Room Type specified using the Room Specification dialog can be automatically changed by Plan Check. Hallways, entry halls, clothes closets, garages, bedrooms, bathrooms and kitchens can often be located and typed automatically. Some of these rooms are determined by their size and shape, and others by their contents. For
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the International Code Councils IRC Checklist. This checklist provides a comprehensive list of standard building codes. These codes can be used to greatly facilitate your planning, design, and plan approval process. Use the IRC Checklist to verify the code requirements of your design. Select Tools> View IRC Checklist from the menu or click the View IRC Checklist button to view a copy of the IRC Checklist in .pdf format.
748
Select Same / Load Same
The Select Same/Load Same tools provide a very fast and powerful way to locate and modify objects within your plan. These tools are currently available for rooms, cabinets, windows and doors. The Select Same Type tool allows you to quickly locate all objects that have specific matching attributes. These objects can then be modified as a group. The Load Values to Make Same tool allows you to quickly modify other objects to have the same matching attributes as the original. Both tools give you complete control over which object attributes should be used for the purposes of matching or loading.
Select Same Type

The Select Same Type edit button will appear when you have selected a room, cabinet, window or door object in Chief Architect. You can use the Select Same Type tool to select all objects that have the selected attributes set the same as the original object selected. This can be useful to quickly find all objects which all have the same set of attributes. For all objects selected (except rooms) you can then open the objects for specification to modify them all at once.
749
Advanced Design
Select Same / Load Same
Click the Select Same Type tool to open the Select Similar Objects dialog. Select all attributes that you want to match by checking its corresponding box. The set of attributes that you can select will vary depending on the type of object you have selected. Click OK to select all objects in the current plan which have those attributes the same as the original object. All objects that match the orignal will be displayed as highlighted. The Load Values to Make Same edit button will become available when the objects have been found and highlighted. Depending on the type of object selected, several other tools might be available, including the Open Object edit button and the Delete edit button.
attributes. This tool can be used to load the selected attributes into any objects that do not currently have the same values. Click the Load Values to Make Same tool after using the Select Same Type tool. Then click on any object which is not currently highlighted to match its attributes to the original selection set. You can keep selecting objects to load values until the Esc key or any other tool is used to change your mode. Some attributes can only be used for selecting objects and cant be loaded from one object to another. These attributes will appear in the Select Similar Objects dialog followed by a star. Since multiple select is not available for rooms, the Load Same tool can be used to quickly modify multiple rooms. Simply click on the rooms that are not highlighted and they will have their attributes changed so that they will match.
Load to Make Same Value

The Load Values to Make Same edit button will become available after first using the Select Same Type tool to select a group of objects that share the same
Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to quickly edit groups of objects in a variety of ways. Select Edit> Edit Area> from the menu to see the available options or click the Edit Area Tools parent button to view the Edit Area child buttons. marquee around the area of the plan to be edited. Some objects, such as cabinets and roof sections, will be included with the edit group if more than half of the object is contained within the marquee. Click the Edit Area Visible button to perform the Edit Area function on the visible objects only. Normally, the Edit Area tool works on all objects in a plan, regardless of whether an object is currently displayed.
Edit Area
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area from the menu or click the Edit Area child button and drag a rectangular
750
Edit Area Tools
Edit Area Polyline

If the rectangular marquee does not allow you to define the area precisely, a closed polyline may be used instead. Select the polyline covering the desired area in Plan View and then choose Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area from the menu. The polyline will temporarily change to a dashed line. You will be able to delete, move, or copy all of the objects surrounded by the marquee, within the same floor, from floor to floor, or from plan to plan. You may also reflect, or mirror the area around any given CAD line. If you select Edit> Edit Area> Area (All Floors), or Edit Area (All Floors) Visible the same actions will be taken for all floors of your plan file.
When the desired area is defined by the marquee, most of the Edit Area functions described in this chapter may be used. The difference is that, in this case, every floor in the plan will be affected.
.
This provides a very simple method of copying an entire building from one plan and placing it into another.
This feature can be very useful if a plan needs to be rotated. For more information, see Allowed Angles on page 161.
Moving an Area
To move the area defined by the marquee, drag from its central area, the area within which the cursor will turn into a four-headed arrow. Everything in the rectangle is moved. Walls that cross its boundaries are cut and the portions in the rectangle are moved. Walls that are cut but are parallel to the move, are lengthened or shortened and reconnected. This is done only for move, not when rotating, reflecting or copying. When you drag the area, it will jump at increments defined by the Wall & Opening Snap Unit located in the Dimension Defaults dialog. To move the area an exact distance, type that value into the Wall & Opening Snap Unit before moving the area. The snap unit may be as high as 48 (1200 mm). To move an area greater than that amount, move it in two steps. First move it with the snap unit set to 48. Then set the snap unit to the remaining distance, and move the area one more time.
Edit Area (All Floors)

Edit Area (All Floors) allows you to select everything within a given area across all floors in a plan. Once selected, you may copy, delete, move, or somehow affect them all simultaneously. Click the Edit Area (All Floors) Visible button to perform the Edit Area function on the visible objects only. Normally, the Edit Area tool works on all objects in a plan, regardless of whether an object is currently displayed. Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All Floors) or Edit Area (All Floors) Visible Then drag a rectangular marquee around the entire area you want to copy, delete or move. (Remember that you are defining the same area for all the floors, so be sure to draw the marquee large enough to select all the items on every floor, if that is what you want.)
751
Advanced Design
You can also use the Move Object edit button with the Edit Area Tools for more accurate moving. For more information, see Move Object on page 716.
The location of text changes appropriately with the rotation. If you do not want the text to rotate, select the Don't rotate with plan check box on the Text tab of the Text Specification dialog. You can also use the Rotate Object edit button with the Edit Area Tools for more accurate rotating. For more information, see Rotate Object on page 717.
Rotating an Area
Once the Edit Area has been defined, drag the triangular handle to rotate it. Unless otherwise specified in the Preferences dialog, the selected area will rotate about its center. If Current Point is checked under Rotate/Resize About in the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog, the rotation will be about the current point. Rotation is constant to the Allowed Angles in order to keep all walls that are rotated at allowed angles.
Deleting an Area
When an area is defined using Edit Area, click the Delete edit button to delete everything in the selection set. Selecting Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All Floors) and clicking the Delete edit button will delete all items in the selection area on all floors of your model.
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area

The Point-to-Point Move edit button allows a selected Edit Area to be accurately moved. There are two different ways to use this tool.
Drag Method
If you click and drag while using the Pointto-Point Move edit button, the move will be restricted by the Allowed Angles as defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. Define the Edit Area by dragging the rectangular selection marquee, click the Point-to-Point Move edit button. Then click at a start point and drag the cursor while holding down the mouse button. The area will move in the restricted direction. The distance moved will be the distance between your start and end point projected onto that move direction.
Click Method
Define the Edit Area by dragging the rectangular selection marquee. Click the Point-to-Point Move edit button, click at a start point to move from, and then click at the end point to move to. The selection set will be moved by the distance and direction between the two points. Use CAD points and other snap points to place the selection set accurately.
752
Reflect About Line with Edit Area
If you hold down the Ctrl key before dragging the selected item(s), the item will move as if you had used the click method already described.
Copying
The Point-to-Point Move tool may be used with copy if you first click the Copy/ Paste edit button then the Point-to-Point Move edit button after selecting your area. Items will be copied and moved relative to the start and end point selected.
Reflect About Line with Edit Area

A selected area or an entire floor may be reflected about any line which is drawn at one of the allowed wall angles. Draw a CAD line (not a polyline) to act as the reflect line. Once the Edit Area has been defined, the Reflect About Line edit button appears in the Edit toolbar. Click the Reflect About Line edit button, and then click on the CAD line to reflect the selected area about that line. It does not matter whether or not the line is inside the selection rectangle. The selected area will then be reflected around the CAD line, and the original selection area will no longer be there. You can use the copy tool with the Reflect About Line edit button if you want to preserve the original selection.
The Copy/Paste edit button that appears when an Edit Area is defined allows a portion or all of a plan to be duplicated on the same plan, or to be copied to another floor or another plan.
Copy - Drag
To use this, select the Edit Area , press the Copy/Paste edit button, then drag from the center of the selected area to position the copy at its new location. Dragging your copy allows you to position it accurately with respect to its original position by watching the readout of the moved distance in the toolbar's display box or on the status bar.
Copy Restrictions
When copying into the same plan, the distance between the center of the original area and the center of the copied area must be more than half the width or height of the area. This avoids a copy appearing on top of the original.
Copy - Click
Once you have pressed Copy/Paste edit button, you can also place the copy by clicking in the same or in a different plan.
753
Advanced Design
Copy/Paste with Edit Area
To copy to another window, you will have to click once to activate that window, and click a second time to place the copy. If you have to go to the window menu or toolbar to display the other plan files window, you must select Edit> Paste and then click to place the copy.
the copy will be reflected about a vertical axis, centered on the point clicked.
Hold Position
When copying between different floors of the same plan, create the copy exactly over or under its original by clicking the Hold Position edit button, before you click the Copy/Paste edit button. Switch to the desired floor and click in Plan View or select Edit> Paste and then click anywhere to place the copy. The copy will appear directly above or below the original selection. If you select File> Edit Area (All Floors) the Hold Position edit button will allow you to copy all floors from one plan to another and retain the absolute position of the data in the new plan.
Making a Reflective Copy with Edit Area

To reflect a copy within the same plan, select Edit> Edit Area from the menu, then click the Reflect About Line edit button, then the Copy/Paste edit button. Click on a CAD line (not a polyline) and a copy will be reflected about the specified line. If you do not click on a line, but click elsewhere in the same or in a different plan,
Delete Objects
Use the Delete Objects feature to delete all objects of a specified type (such as cabinets or electrical) in one room, the current floor, or in the entire plan. If you are deleting from a room, place your checks in the dialog, then click in that room before clicking Done. The items will be deleted. 1. 2. Click the Delete Objects button to open the Delete Objects dialog. Use the radio button to select the Delete Scope as Single Room, All Rooms (current floor only), or All Floors. 6. 3. 4. In the Delete section, select the check boxes for the items you wish to delete. Click Select All to select all check boxes. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. When the scope has been set to Single Room, you must click in a room of the plan to delete the selected objects. The dialog will remain open so that you can continue clicking on rooms or choose a different scope. Click Done when all selections have been deleted.
5.
754
Rotate View
If you select All Rooms or All Floors, you do not need to click in Plan View. The Done button will change to OK. Clicking this button will cause the changes to be made.
Rotate View
In Plan View select Tools> Rotate View to rotate the view of the model. The Rotate Plan View dialog will open. Enter the amount of degrees to rotate the Plan View. Degrees can be entered in fractional or decimal units, and in positive or negative numbers. Layout windows for Plan Views and CAD Details may also be rotated in a Layout file. When the view is rotated, the Cartesian coordinates that are applied to CAD objects are also rotated. If you rotate the Plan View by 90 degrees the positive X direction will now be from bottom to top and the positive Y direction will be from right to left.
.
The text will rotate with the plan, unless you open the Text Specification dialog and check the Don't rotate with plan box.
The plan will always rotate relative to its original orientation. For example, entering 90 degrees twice will result in a rotation of 90 degrees from the original orientation, not 180.
755
Advanced Design
Reverse Plan
Reverses your entire plan. The plan is reflected right to left about a vertical line. Reverse Plan reverses all floors associated with the current floor. Reversing a plan will cause the entire model to be rebuilt. This will also close any 3D view windows currently open. The reverse plan tool is a quick way of mirroring a plan so that everything is swapped left to right.
756
Chapter 33:
Pictures, Images, & Movies
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can save any view as a Picture file. Picture files can be imported into the program and displayed in any view that supports CAD. Chief Architect can also save views as Windows Metafiles and Enhanced Windows Metafiles (.wmf, .emf), for use in a variety of applications. Chief Architects Library Browser contains many images of real world objects such as trees, plants, people, vehicles, etc. Chief Architect also allows you to create virtual tours from your plans. With a "walkthrough" file you can create a frame by frame tour that can be saved and played back later. Chief Architect can also export 3D views as a VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) file. Chief Architect can also export any 3D view as a POV-ray file. POV-ray files can be used to transfer the 3D model from Chief Architect into POV-ray for advanced rendering capabilities. For more information, see Raytracing on page 627.
Chapter Contents
Importing Picture Files Scaling Picture Files Picture Box Specification Dialog Exporting Picture Files Placing Images Viewing Images Copying Images Moving Images Resizing an Image Adding Images to the Library Image Specification Dialog Windows Metafiles Walkthroughs
757
Images & Movies
VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language)
Importing Picture Files

Select File>Import>Picture or click the Import Picture button to insert a 2D image into a plan. The Import Picture File dialog will open and let you browse for the picture file you wish to import. Pictures can be imported into any Plan View, Cross Section/Elevations, Wall Elevations, CAD Detail, and Layouts. Chief Architect allows you to import any standard .bmp, .jpg, and .png format file. Pitcture Files do not show in 3D views but they can be used in Section/Elevation views. Picture Files can be used in layout pages as in the case of logos or scanned cut sheets, but they cannot be applied to the model and viewed on a layout sheet. If you want to use a picture on a layout sheet, select File> Import>Picture when in the active layout file. The picture will then appear on the current layout page. If placed on layout page zero, the picture will print on all pages.
1 2
3 4
1 Navigate to the folder containing the

picture to be imported.
4 Files of type can be picture files

(*.bmp, *.jpg, or *.png). Click Open to finish importing the picture. The picture will be placed in the center of the current view.
2 Select the picture file from the list. 3 File name shows the selected picture.
758
Scaling Picture Files
Scaling Picture Files

By Dragging
Picture Files have a border which acts just like a CAD box. It can be used to relocate or resize the picture. Select the border and drag from a corner to resize the picture proportionally. Drag an edge to stretch the picture horizontally or vertically. 6. Select the picture and click the Resize Object button . The Resize Object dialog opens. Select the Resize Factor check box and enter the calculated Resize Factor in the field. Click OK and the image will be rescaled.
7.
8.
Resize Factor
If you import a picture of a house plan or property layout, you will usually want it to be drawn at full scale. This can be done with a little bit of calculation. 1. 2. Import the picture file. Find two items on the picture which are a known horizontal or vertical distance apart. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these two items. Find the distance between the CAD lines. The Resize Factor for the image will be the true distance on the image divided by the distance between the CAD lines.
Resize Picture
A selected picture can be resized in either the X or Y direction with the Resize Picture tool. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the picture. Click the Resize Picture edit button. Click on two points in the image that have a known distance between them.
Resize Picure dialog opens showing
3. 4. 5.
After you click at the second point, the
the distance between the points.
In other words, if the items are supposed to be 10 feet apart on the picture, but the distance between the two CAD lines superimposed on those items is only 2 feet, you need to set the Resize Factor for the picture to 5. (10 divided by 2 equals 5). When the picture is 5 times the original size, the items on the picture are at the actual scale shown on the picture.
5. 6.
Enter a new dimension that matches the known distance between the points. Click OK and the picture will be resized.
759
Images & Movies
Picture Box Specification Dialog
1 2 3
picture file. You can type in a new name to change the picture assigned to this box. Browse - Click this button to browse for a new picture file or to relink one that was not found.
1 Filename - The full pathname for the
will be recalculated so that the image does not get stretched unevenly. Width - the width of the picture in plan units. Height - the height of the picture in plan units. Reset Original Aspect Ratio - Click this button to resize the picture to the original aspect ratio. This will change the current width value and keep the height value.
2 X Position - The location of the picture

box relative to the absolute origin. Y Position - The location of the picture box relative to the absolute origin. Angle - The current angle of the picture box relative to a horizontal line pointing towards the right hand side of the screen. Allowed angles are only in 90 degree increments. ratio (the ratio of width to height) constant. If you change one value the other
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab of the Polyline Specification dialog is the same as the Line Style tab of the CAD Line Specification dialog. For more information, see Line Style Tab on page 681.
3 Keep Aspect Ratio - Keeps the aspect
760
Exporting Picture Files
Exporting Picture Files

The Export Picture tool is similar to creating a screen capture of everything that appears in the current Chief Architect window. Select File>Export>Picture or click on the Export Picture button to save the current view as a picture file. The Export Picture File dialog will open. This dialog will allow you to specify the file name, location, and file format to use. Files may be saved as either .bmp, .jpg, or .png graphics files. These files can then be used outside of Chief Architect in a variety of other applications.
2 3 4
1 Navigate to the desired directory. 2 The pictures which exist in the current
directory display.
3 Give the picture a name. 4 Save as type should show that it is a

picture file. Click Save to finish.
Placing Images
2D Images that represent real world objects may be placed into plans to enhance the 3D views. Images have the advantage of making 3D views and renderings more realistic without adding many surfaces to represent the same objects. A very real looking tree Image can be used instead of a polygon model of a tree that might have thousands of surfaces. This can dramatically improve realism without dramatically hurting program performance. Select Build> Library> Image Library or click the Image Library toolbar button. The Library Browser opens to the Images directory.
761
Images & Movies
Select an image from the Library Browser and click in Plan View, 3D View, or Render View to place it.
The Image will display in plan view with a CAD block to represent its location. The actual graphics will be displayed in 3D views to represent the object.
Viewing Images
In Plan View
In Plan View, images are represented by a 2D CAD block. The 2D CAD block is defined by the image selected from the library. The 2D CAD block can be changed to a different symbol created from a CAD block. For more information, see, Image Specification Dialog on page 764. In Plan View, the blocks associated with Images are placed on the Images/Trees layer on the Architectural tab. Click the Display Options button or choose Tools> Display Options, to access the Layer Display Options dialog. Clear the Display column for the Images/Trees layer in the dialog if you do not want the symbols to appear in Plan View. you can use the Layer Display Options dialog to toggle the display of Images in a 3D view. In 3D Views, the closer the image is to the camera, the larger the image will appear. Images will always face the camera in Perspective and Render Views. This is usually desireable. If you would prefer that an images surface remain in a fixed position when the camera is rotated, see Special Applications for Soffits on page 466.
In Layout
The symbols representing images in Plan View, whether 2D symbols or CAD blocks, can be displayed on a layout sheet and can be printed or plotted.
In 3D Views
In order to see Images in 3D views, you must have the appropriate box checked on the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. Select the Images check box to have Images appear in 3D views. If the Images/Trees layer is not displayed in Plan View, the images do not show in a 3D view when it is first calculated. If the Images check box is selected in the 3D Preferences,
Display Options
In any 3D view, click the Display Options button to open the 3D Display Options dialog. Clear the Images check box, then click OK. This changes the display for this specific 3D view. Once the View is regenerated, Images will not display.
762
Copying Images
Copying Images
Copying the 2D symbol in Plan View, copies the attached picture within a plan or to another plan. Multiple images can be copied simultaneously, either within the same plan or between plans. The relationship between the images is maintained in the copy. Copy the picture images by selecting them in 2D or 3D Views and clicking the Copy/Paste edit button. When the Copy cursor appears, click to place a copy.
Moving Images
Images can be selected and moved in both Plan View and 3D Views. When selected in Plan View, the move handle allows you to relocate the image. The elevation of an image cannot be changed in Plan View. In a 3D view, the image can be selected by clicking anywhere in the rectangular border that defines the image. Once selected, use the move handle to move the image up, down, or side-to-side. The movement will be restricted to lines that are perpendicular to the angle of the camera that produced the current 3D view. Dimensions will appear to help you locate the item properly.
Resizing an Image
Images can be resized in either 2D or 3D views. When either the height or the width is changed, the rest of the image resizes proportionally. The Image Specification dialog associated with any image allows you to type in a width or height value for that image. To access the dialog, select the Image and click the Open Object edit button. You can select the image in any 3D view and resize it by dragging from any of the four outside handles. The picture image and the 2D symbol resize proportionally. The image can be resized in Plan View by dragging from the two outside handles of the selected 2D symbol. This method changes the width of the image and adjusts the height proportionally.
763
Images & Movies
Adding Images to the Library

Chief Architect can use any image with a .bmp, .jpg, or, .png extension. Generally .png files work best as Images because this format has good compression and allows for the image to contain transparency information. You can create new folders within the Images directory to store your images. The files display in alphabetical order. Once a folder is created, it becomes available the next time Chief Architect is started or when the Refresh Library Browser tool is used. For information on adding images, see Graphics Directories on page 99.
Image Specification Dialog

1 3 5 7 8
Any image can be modified. It may be adjusted in size or even changed to a different image altogether. In Plan View click in the center of the 2D symbol to select it. Click the Open Object edit button to open the selected image for specification. The Image Specification dialog appears. current plan to represent the image in Plan View. Any CAD block may be used to identify a picture image in plan. Once a CAD block is defined in the plan it is available to represent an Image in Plan View. A selection other than NONE overrides the Picture Symbol defined below. symbols are provided to mark the location of the image. Select one from the list.
2 4 6 9
1 Image File - The path and name of the

selected image file displays here.
3 Picture Symbol - Several Plan View
2 3
Block for Plan You can use this list to select any CAD block definition in the
764
Windows Metafiles
image. The width adjusts proportionally.
4 Height - Enter a height for the selected 5 Width - Enter a width for the selected 6 Height Above - Specify the symbols
The Transparent Color

Depending on the image itself, the transparent color can be either black or white. The program automatically selects one or the other based on characteristics of the image. There are times when it is necessary to override the default and choose the transparent color manually. This mainly occurs in situations where an image contains a lot of black or a lot of white (such as with black or white cars). If the transparent color is inappropriate for the image, the image appears partially disintegrated. Try each of the options (at step 7) in the Image Specification dialog to find the best color. If black is defined as the transparent color, every solid black pixel in the image becomes transparent. If white is selected, every solid white pixel becomes transparent.
image. The height will adjust proportionally.
Height above the ground, if applicable.
transparency (applies only to .bmp files).
7 Choose which pixel color will indicate 8 Click Select Image to replace the 9 The current image displays here.
current image with a different one.
Windows Metafiles
A Windows Metafile (.wmf) is a special file format that is made up of vectors (lines) that allow the image to be rescaled without loss of quality. High resolution pictures of a plan or 3D view can be exported as a Windows Metafile. the marquee cursor from the upper left to the lower right corner, encompassing the area to be created into a Windows Metafile. When you release the mouse after defining the area, the Write Windows Metafile dialog opens.
A Windows Metafile can be exported from any view except Render and raytrace Views. Only items which are displayed are written to the Metafile. If the view is in color on the screen when the Metafile is written, the Metafile picture will be in color. When the view is accurately positioned on screen, select File> Export> Metafile. Drag
765
Images & Movies
Exporting Windows Metafiles
are not definable for 3D items, an option is provided to increase the printing line weight of a Metafile created from any 3D view.
Enter the name for the Metafile, making sure to save it in the desired directory location. You do not need to add the .wmf extension,the program will do that automatically. Click Save and the Metafile Size dialog opens.
To increase the printing line weight of a Metafile created in a 3D view, increase the value in the Use line weight box. A line weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient for plotting. This option is not needed from Plan View since Metafiles created in Plan View use the line weights defined in the Layer Display Options dialog.
Enhanced Metafiles
Chief Architect has the ability to export normal Windows Metafiles (.wmf) or Enhanced Windows Metafiles (.emf). In general, you should use the Enhanced Metafile for transferring data to other applications because it is more precise and contains more complete drawing information. If you have problems importing the Enhanced Metafile in other applications, try using the Windows Metafile instead.
It is fine to accept the default Width and Height, Windows Metafiles can always be resized later. The Metafile Size dialog from a 3D view has one additional option. Since line weights
Walkthroughs
A recorded 3D Walkthrough is a series of screen captures saved as a series of picture files. Chief Architect can replay them in sequence at any time. Since the program is not generating the view, it can display them far more rapidly than when they were originally produced. You can either save a walkthrough as a .wlk file which can only be opened by Chief Architect or as a standard Windows .avi file
766
Walkthroughs
which can be opened by many other applications such asWindows Media Player. When a walkthrough is recorded in a .wlk file it is saved in a compressed format. These files can still be quite large (many megabytes) especially if it contains many frames and if recorded using a large window at high screen resolution.
1.
Create a Perspective or Render View that will be the first frame of the walkthrough. From the View choose 3D> Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough or click the Record Walkthrough button. Name the walkthrough noting the directory. Click OK. The first frame of the walkthrough is the immediate view. Use the camera movement buttons to create additional views. Each time the screen repaints, that view is recorded as the next frame in sequence. For more information, see Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras on page 582. If you would like to move the camera without saving a view, use the Pause Recording button to temporarily stop recording. You can then use the Save Frame button to control which views get saved, or start recording again by clicking the Pause Recording button. When the walkthrough sequence is complete choose Stop Recording or simply close the view and the walkthrough file will be closed.
2.
Walkthrough Recording Tools

Perspective and Render Views, as well as Overviews, can be used to record a 3D Walkthrough which can be replayed later. Walkthrough Recording Tools Click this button to display the Walkthrough Recording child buttons. Record Walkthrough - Click this button from a perspective or 3D view to begin recording a walkthrough. Stop Recording - Click this button to stop recording the walkthrough. This closes the walkthrough file. Use this button when you are done. Pause Recording - Click this button to pause the recording of a walkthrough. When paused, you can change the camera position without saving an image to the walkthrough file. Save Frame - Click this button to save a single frame to the walkthrough file. Use this button when a walkthrough has been paused to control which screens are saved. To record a 3D walkthrough:
3. 4.
5.
6.
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll bars, does not change the viewpoint and will not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
Walkthrough Playback Tools

Walkthrough Playback Tools - Click this button to display the Walkthrough Playback child buttons.
767
Images & Movies
Play Walkthrough - Click this button to begin playing a walkthrough. Slow Down Playback - Click this button to slow down the walkthrough. Play Backwards - Click this button to play the walkthrough backwards. Stop Playback - Click this button to stop playing the walkthrough. Play Forwards - Click this button to play the walkthrough forward. Speed Up Playback - Click this button to speed up the walkthrough. To view a 3D walkthrough: 1. 2. 3. Choose 3D> Show Walkthrough. Browse to the directory where the walkthrough file (.wlk or .avi) is stored. Select it and click OK. The recorded walkthrough will begin playing back. If 5. 4.
the file is a .wlk file it will playback within Chief Architect. If the file is an .avi file, it will be played back outside of Chief Architect using your default .avi viewer application. When playing back .wlk files you can pause the playback or play it forward by clicking the left mouse button. Play the walkthrough backward by clicking the right mouse button. Speed up or slow down the playback speed using the up or down arrow keys on the keyboard. When done playing the walkthrough close the window to close the walkthrough file.
6.
You cannot edit a walkthrough once it has been created. If you make changes to the model, or want to show different views of the model you must generate another walkthrough.

VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) is a 3D file format that can be imported by various walkthrough viewers as well as other rendering packages. An exported VRML file contains the entire 3D model with texture, image, and lighting information that cannot be exported via DWG/DXF. You can post a VRML file on your Web site, or email it to a customer who can then view it and walk through it using a VRML viewer. The Cosmo Player, supplied with Chief Architect, provides a 3D walkthrough capability. Walkthroughs can be created in real viewing time, allowing you to use the mouse as a joy stick. Cosmo Player is distributed on the Chief Architect 9.0 CD-ROM.You must have installed either Netscape 4 (or greater) or Internet Explorer 4 (or greater) to be able to use this VRML viewer. The Cosmo Player plug-in is also available over the internet at www.cai.com/cosmo/. Other viewers are also readily available as a free download on the Internet.
768
Exporting VRML Files

VRML files are created from Perspective and Render Views. The entire model is exported, but the starting point for the walkthrough is defined by the camera location at the time of export. VRML files use the same textures that appear in Render Views. VRML files will match Render Views more closely than Perspective Views since they will use similar methods of display including lighting and textures. When a Perspective or Render View is active, select File> Export> Export VRML. The VRML Options dialog opens.
2 4 6 8
3 5 7
Standard most closely corresponds to the default Chief Architect camera view. The other options generate a wider field of view. Then select as many options along the right side as desired. associated texture files from being exported with the VRML file. If textures are exported, the texture files must be in the folder with the VRML file.
1 Define the Camera Field of View.
default lights which are generated for fixtures and are used to light a scene. ground plane and sky to give a night appearance. VRML viewer and opens the new VRML file as soon as it is generated.
5 Turn off Fixture Lights turns off the 6 Night Sky/Ground colors darkens the 7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts the 8 Copy Images to Export Directory Images & Movies
2 No Textures Exported keeps
3 Walk Through Surfaces allows you to walk through walls and closed doors from room to room, instead of stopping when you reach a wall.
default lights that are used to light a scene.
should be checked if you are saving the VRML to a file on a disk to be shared with others. This copies texture bitmaps with the VRML file so that they render correctly when exported. Once the general parameters have been selected click OK. Name the VRML file and
4 Turn off Ambient Lights turns off the
769
save it to the desired VRML folder, give the VRML file a name, and click Save.
It is best to keep all VRML files in a folder separate from your normal Chief Architect files, since all textures used in the model will also export corresponding texture files to the same folder. This could add a significant number of files, creating potential organizational problems. A folder named VRMLexport can be found in the Chief Architect root directory for this purpose.
buttons are self-explanatory. More detailed information about the Cosmo Player and its use is available at the www.cosmosoftware. com Web site.
VRML use of Texture & Image Files

The VRML specification does not support the use of .bmp files. Instead, VRML only supports compressed file formats such as .gif, .png, or .jpg files. These are more compatible, compressed, efficient formats. In order for VRML to render textures correctly, the texture and image files must be in the same directory as the exported .wrl file. So keep the .wrl and graphic files in the same directory when moving or copying the VRML file. You may add new texture and image files for Chief Architect to use if you use the same file formats as those provided with the program. If you wish to use a .bmp file in Chief Architect and still be able to export it with the VRML file, you should also create a .gif file with the same name in the same directory. When you export the VRML file, Chief Architect will automatically substitute the .gif for the .bmp file used in the Render View. It is recommended that you use either the .jpg or .png file format instead of using .bmp and .gif pairs.
Using the VRML Player

The Cosmo VRML player is a separate program from Chief Architect. We have simplified the interface between Chief Architect and the VRML viewer, but no detailed instructions for the VRML viewer are provided. Various tool buttons appear on the screen, commanding tasks to the mouse. Walk, Pan, Turn and Roll allow real-time viewing of the model by pressing down the left button of the mouse, and pulling it in the direction you wish to go. Selecting the Go To button, and placing the cursor on an object in the screen, and holding down the left mouse button zooms your view towards that object. The Study button allows total viewing of the model as it rotates beneath the sky and over the ground. The Zoom Out and Restore
770
Chapter 34:
DXF/DWG
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect allows you to import and export files from, and to, other plans, or even other CAD programs. Importing is the process of opening a file in Chief Architect which was produced in a different program. Exporting is the process of saving a file in a format that can be read by another program. Importing and exporting of files in .dwg format is supported only in the Full Version of Chief Arcitect 9.0.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility DXF vs. DWG CAD to Walls Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files Additional 2D Import Information Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files Additional 2D Export Information Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model
Compatibility
Import
Chief Architect supports import of the following: 2D .dxf or .dwg files compatible with AutoCAD. Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline) Multi Line Text Lightweight Polylines 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) 3D faces
Export
Chief Architect supports export of the following:
771
DXF/DWG
Complete 3D .dxf or .dwg models 3D Views as 2D .dxf or .dwg files Polylines (Bulges- Arcs in Polyline) Filled areas are exported as 2D solids
dimensions. Imported dimensions which are not supported by Chief Architect can be edited only as lines and text. CAD blocks containing dimensions as text must be exploded before the text can be edited separately. For more on exploding, see CAD Blocks on page 726.
Dimensions
Chief Architect supports the import and export of aligned, rotated, and angular
DXF vs. DWG

Many design programs can read and write .dxf and .dwg file formats. Both formats interpret data as CAD objects such as lines, polylines, circles, etc. The native AutoCAD file format is .dwg. Originally a proprietary format, it is typically used only in AutoCAD. The .dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a standard file format created by Autodesk for the transfer of data between other programs. Due to limitations in its structure a higher degree of data loss should be expected.
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a flat line drawing into a 3D model. Once a drawing has been imported into Chief Architect, double CAD lines which represent wall layers and other structural items can be converted to actual Chief Architect walls, railings, windows, or doors. For more information, see CAD to Walls on page 160.
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files

A .dxf or .dwg file can be imported into Plan View, a Wall Elevation View, a Cross View, or a CAD Section/Elevation Detail Window. To Import a 2D file, choose File> Import> Drawing DWG/DXF. This will bring you to the welcome page of the Import Drawing Wizard. Click Next to continue.
772
Select File
1 2 3 4
wish to import, or click Browse to locate a file on your computer. The last file name selected here will appear in this field.
1 Enter the name of the drawing file you
information, see CAD Block Management on page 728. blocks, which will reduce the volume of transferred data. Click Next to load the file into memory so that Chief Architect can present you with information about the contents of the file. This can take a while for larger files.
4 You can import only referenced CAD
2 If you want to convert lines to polylines or boxes check the appropriate options. Polylines will be imported as polylines regardless of these settings.
Terrain Elevation Data - Check this box to import lines as Terrain Data. For more information, see Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on page 511. Polylines - Check this option to import lines as polylines. Unconnected lines will be connected. This option is rarely needed. Boxes - Check this option to import lines as boxes. Unconnected lines will be connected. This option is rarely needed. will enable you to access all CAD blocks associated with that file. For more
3 You can import all CAD blocks, which
773
DXF/DWG
Select Layers
2 1
3
Here you may specify which layers you wish to import. may choose to include them by checking the box at left. Layers are designated as "visible" or "frozen" before a file is saved/exported in the original program. Any changes to this must be made in the original program and saved/exported again. Layers in Chief Architect are based on numbers and can be given names for user distinction. Layers in most other CAD programs are based strictly on names. For more information, see Layers on page 125.
1 Boxes checked at left will be imported,

unchecked boxes will not. will be checked by default. You may choose to include an invisible layer by checking the box at left.
2 Layers which were visible on import
3 Layers which were frozen on import

will not be checked by default. You
774
Layer Mapping
3 4
The Layer Mapping dialog enables you to choose how layers will be structured once imported into Chief Architect. There are three options:
Mapping to Multiple Layers

individual CAD objects to multiple layers in Chief Architect. The first imported CAD object will be placed on the layer indicated in the box, with additional layers following consecutively by increments of one. You can specify the first layer with the Select button. alternative, you may choose to import all attributes for each layer or none at all. The third alternative allows you to map each layer individually, offering complete control of layer mapping variables. Selecting the third alternative will take you to the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog.
2 The second alternative is to map
Mapping to a Single Layer

option is to assign all CAD objects to a single Chief Architect layer. This choice offers the least control. Original layer attributes will not be imported. Line color, style, and weight will be preserved on a per object basis. All CAD objects to be imported will share the layer indicated in the box. You may also specify a layer visually with the Select button, which will open up the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
1 The first and simplest layer mapping
3 In combination with the second 4
775
DXF/DWG
Advanced Layer Mapping

\
4 5
2 3
If you selected the Advanced Layer Mapping alternative the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog will appear. This window allows for complete user control of all layer mapping options. menu at the far left. Multiple layers may be selected while the Shift key is depressed.
mapped to multiple layers here. The first highlighted item will be placed on this layer. Additional highlighted items will be placed on consecutive layers.
3 Highlighted CAD objects can be
1 Highlight the desired layer from the
4 Click Add to make your selection

visible in the table on the right. name, color and linetype) Check the box to the left of the table. Only one CAD objects attributes may be included if it is sharing a layer with others. highlight it and click Remove. Multiple items may be selected while the Shift key is depressed. Repeat these steps for additional layers. Click Next to continue.
5 To import a layers attributes (layer
2 Select this radio button and any CAD objects highlighted above will be mapped to the layer indicated in the box. If you prefer you may also specify layers visually with the Select button which will open up the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
6 To remove an item from the table,
776
Duplicate CAD Blocks
1 2 3 4
If one or more CAD blocks, in the imported file, have the same name as a block in the current plan the Duplicate CAD Blocks dialog will appear. There are four alternatives. Selecting any of the first three will apply that choice to all duplicate CAD blocks in your plan. to automatically generate unique names for each duplicate. For instance if the original files name is "blockname" the program will give the new file a name like: "blockname-copy", or "blockname-copy-1". existing block in the plan with the duplicate. and discard the duplicate.
you to the Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks dialog and allow you to
4 Selecting the fourth option will take
manage each duplicate individually. Click Next to continue.
1 The first choice is to allow the program
2 The second alternative is to replace the DXF/DWG 777 3 The third is to keep the existing block
Click Next to close the Import Drawing Wizard, or choose option 4.
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks
3 1 4
2
If you chose the fourth option from the Duplicate CAD Block dialog the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Block
of the window to specify how the highlighted blocks are to be treated. right.
2 Click one of the 3 buttons in the center 3 Review your choices in the tables at the
window will appear. It allows you to apply the first three alternatives from the previous window to each duplicate individually. left. Multiple blocks may be selected while the Shift key is depressed.
1 Highlight a block in the menu at the far
right and click Remove to reverse choices. Click Next to continue.
4 Highlight block(s) within tables at far
778
Additional 2D Import Information
Drawing Unit
1 3 2
to create this drawing? - Click the drop down box and select a unit of measurement. This will ensure that your imported drawing is accurate.
1 What unit of measurement was used
radio button to import dimensions as CAD entities that are not recognized by Chief Architect as dimensions.
3 Import as CAD blocks - Select this
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief Architect defaults to inches or millimeters. If you are importing a site plan or topo prepared by a surveyor, or if you are importing a metric drawing into an imperial plan (or vice versa), you might need to change the units.
Once a file is imported it appears in Chief Architect selected as a unit, with a central Move handle available for relocating the entire file. A Rotation handle is available as well. Imported CAD objects can be manipulated with the CAD tools. For more information, see CAD on page 675.
- Select this radio button to import dimensions as Chief Architect supported dimensions.
2 Import as dimensions where possible
Additional 2D Import Information

2D import is accomplished by reading entities from the .dwg or .dxf file and creating the equivalent CAD objects in Chief Architect.
779
DXF/DWG
In general all z coordinates are mapped to zero. If an entity has thickness Chief Architect ignores it. Following is a list of the entities that are read and how they are converted. All other entities are ignored: Lines
Dimension - Chief Architect supports the rotated, aligned and 3-point angular dimensions. All other dimension types have their associated block imported and placed as an insert at the appropriate location. Polylines and Lightweight Polylines Polylines are imported as polylines. Bumps are converted to arcs. Line widths are ignored. Attributes - Attributes are text objects that are associated with other items, like blocks. These are imported as text objects at the appropriate location. The association with the original object is broken. Layers - There can be some confusion between importing a layer and actually mapping entities to a layer. The distinction is important. The filter and layer mapping pages of the Import Drawing Wizard mostly deal with how entities get mapped from one layer to another. Layer information is only imported through the path that maps all layers to successive numbered layers or in the Advanced Layer Mapping dialog when the appropriate item is checked. Line Styles - Line styles are not imported. Instead, if a style of the same name appears in the Chief Architect line styles, that line style is used. Otherwise a solid line style is used.
- Both 2D and 3D lines.
Circle - Fully supported. Arc - Fully supported. Text & Multi-line Text - Both are mapped to our text object. Multi-line text objects retain their original width. The first font in a multiline text object is applied to the entire object. Blocks & Block Inserts - Blocks are loaded by name. The Duplicate CAD Blocks dialog controls whether the block is imported under a new name, replaces an existing block or simply uses the existing block of the same name. A block is a group of entities. Currently a 32K limit on number of entities per block exists. Solid - A solid is a 4-sided filled area. These are imported as filled polygons. Note: there is currently no export of these items. 3D Face - A 3D face has its z coordinate mapped to zero, and is imported as a polygon.
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files

2D and 3D files can be exported from Chief Architect in both .dxf and .dwg file formats. You can select the version of AutoCAD that you prefer to export to. Compatibility with other software may vary. To export the floor or CAD detail which is currently displayed, select File> Export> Current View DWG/DXF. To export the Plan View for all floors simultaneously, select File> Export>
780
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
All Floors DWG/DXF from any floor of the plan.
The Export Drawing File dialog opens.
Export Drawing File 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 1 Save In - The current directory displays

here.
12 13 14
15
AutoCAD. Specify which version from the drop down list. the file in binary .dxf format. Binary .dxf is easier for the computer to read, is more accurate, and occupies less disk space. However, some applications do not support binary .dxf.
2 Existing .dxf or .dwg files in the

current directory are listed here.
6 Binary DXF - Check this box to export
5 File Format Options - .dxf and .dwg files created by Chief Architect are compatible with many versions of
781
DXF/DWG
format Chief Architect will use to export.
3 Enter a file name. 4 Save as type - Specify which file
The .dxf format must be selected at step 4 to allow binary .dxf as an option.
Wall assemblies can be split into layers, allowing them to be edited separately. this radio button to export only those layers that are displayed.
7 Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers -
to export pattern lines. Pattern lines are exported as normal CAD lines. to export filled areas as AutoCAD 2D solid entities. Select Save to complete. This file is now ready to be imported by another program.
14 Export Pattern Lines - Check this box 15 Export Filled Areas - Check this box
8 Export only displayed layers - Select 9 Export all used and named layers -
Select this radio button to export all layers that either have something on them or have a layer name specified. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
10 Scaling Unit - Select a unit of

measurement to be used. Check this box to export dimensions as associative dimensions. Associative dimensions are recognized by AutoCAD and many other CAD programs. Uncheck this box to export dimensions as simple CAD entities that are not recognized dimensions.
If you chose to export all floors the file will contain all floors superimposed on each other. The items are on distinct layers, each for its own floor. Items or entire floors can be turned on or off as desired. For each floor, different plan items are placed on separate layers. The floor an item is located on will be indicated by a number following the layer name. For example: "Electrical-2" contains the electrical information for the second floor. Each fixture and furniture item is a CAD block in the exported file. Fixture blocks are referenced on the cabinet layer while furniture blocks are referenced on the furniture layer.
11 Create Associative Dimensions -
12 Layer Set - Select a Layer Set to

export.
You may customize layer sets to accommodate desired naming conventions or display attributes. For more information, see Layer Sets on page 127.
DXF/DWG 2D View
Sometimes a flat 2D DXF is needed from a 3D view, such as an elevation, camera view or overview. When the desired 3D view is on screen with the desired items displayed, choose File> Export> Current View. Give the file a name and save in the desired location.
Before creating the file, turn off the color (Window> Color Off) in the 3D view so that only lines show. This reveals which lines will be visible in the exported file.
will open the Layer Display Options dialog and allow you to edit your layer sets before exporting. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page 126.
13 Define Layers - Clicking this button
782
Additional 2D Export Information
Elevation and cross section views produce a file with accurate dimensions. Perspective and overviews are not produced to scale.
Use the CAD Detail from view tool to automatically create a 2D view from a 3D View. For more information, see CAD Detail From View on page 600.
Additional 2D Export Information

Export of 2D data takes what would be drawn on screen and converts it to entities. Chief Architect exports all data to model space. We currently support the following entity types for 2D export: Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD this is a 3 dimensional line with the z coordinate set to zero. Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and radius. Circle - Fully Supported. Multi Line Text - All text is exported as a multi line text object. Each line is exported as a seperate entity. Polyline - Polylines are a collection of points with lines or arcs connecting them. Chief Architect supports both lines and arcs. Arcs are referred to as bumps in AutoCAD. Dimension Each dimension has an associated block that contains a representation of the dimension as it is drawn in Chief Architect. It also contains all the data to recreate that information. When an exported dimension is modified in AutoCAD or another CAD program, its appearance will change. Chief Architect does not support arrowhead styles or fonts. The placement of the dimension text will also change slightly when the dimension is modified. The dimension length, and extension lines will remain accurate. Three kinds of dimensions are generated: Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular. Please refer to AutoCAD documentation for more information.
Note: You should uncheck "Use Associative Dimensions" in the Export Drawing File dialog if the CAD program you are using does not support AutoCAD Associative dimensions. For more information, see Export Drawing File on page 781.
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference to a block. A block is simply a named collection of entities. A block can also contain block inserts. In addition to the above entities several other things are also written to the file as follows:
Line Type
A line type is used by layers and entities to determine how lines are drawn. Chief Architect line types are supported on export.
Layers
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief Architect layers. However, there are some
783
DXF/DWG
subtle differences. Chief Architect layers are based on a number whereas exported layers are based solely on a name. It is possible to give multiple Chief Architect layers the same name. When exported everything on those layers will be placed on the same layer. The following information in a layer is mapped as follows: Chief Name Color Other Systems Name Nearest AutoCAD Color. We use the default AutoCAD color table to determine this mapping.
Display Size
On Line Weight. In AutoCAD line weights are determined by a table of mm line widths. We map to the closest match in the default line weight table based on the assumption that we are going to output our drawing to 600 dpi printer. Line type Lock
Style Lock
Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model

This option is only available in the Full Version of Chief Architect.
Layers for 3D DWG/DXF Model

When you export a 3D model all surfaces are exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity represents a surface in the 3D model. The entities are placed on layers that are named by Chief Architect. The names currently used by Chief Architect are listed below. AutoCAD Layer Name A-APPL-MAIN A-APPL-SECN A-APPL-THIR A-APPL-FOUR A-APPL-GLAS A-CASE-CABF A-CASE-CABN Chief Architect Surface / Object Appliance (main matl) Appliance (2nd matl) Appliance (3rd matl) Appliance (4th matl) Fixture (glass) Cabinet Doors & Drawers Cabinet (incl. Face frame)
The entire 3D model can be exported from Chief as a 3D file, with all surfaces exported as 3DFACE entities. This file can then be imported by any program which is fully compatible with AutoCADs 3D .dxf or .dwg format. To export the 3D model, a 3D view must be active. Make sure that everything to be exported is displayed. When the model is ready, choose File> Export> DWG/DXF 3D Model. Give the file a name, making sure to save it in the desired location. The 3D model is created. If you use the delete surfaces tool, the deleted surfaces will not be exported.
784
Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model
A-CASE-CNTR A-CASE-GLAS A-CASE-SOFF A-CASE-TOEA A-CEIL-BAY A-CEIL-MAIN A-CEIL-SLOP A-DOOR-STND A-EQPM-DOOR A-EQPM-HDWR A-FIXT-GLAS A-FIXT-MAIN A-FIXT-SECN A-FIXT-THIR A-FIXT-FOUR A-FLOR-BAY A-FLOR-EDGE A-FLOR-MAIN A-FOOT-FOOT A-FRAM-GENL A-FRAM-JOIS A-FRAM-CEIL A-FRAM-ROOF A-FRAM-WALL A-FURN-GLAS A-FURN-MAIN A-FURN-SECN A-FURN-THIR A-FURN-FOUR A-GLAZ-TRAN A-GLAZ-WIND A-HRAL-BAL A-HRAL-BLST A-HRAL-MAIN A-HRAL-NWEL A-HRAL-RAIL
Each layer name exported can include a DXF Code from the materials used for items on that layer. If a material has been specified for an item and appears on the surface of the
785
DXF/DWG
Cabinet Counters Cabinet Glass Soffit Toe Area Bay Ceiling Ceiling Sloped Ceiling Door Door/Window hardware Hardware Fixture (glass) Fixture (main material) Fixture (second material) Fixture (3rd material) Fixture (4th material) Bay Floor Floor Edge Floor Footings General framing Floor framing Ceiling framing Roof framing Wall framing Furniture Glass Furniture (main matl) Furniture (2nd matl) Furniture (3rd matl) Furniture (4th matl) Glass Window Stair Baluster Baluster Railing Newel Post Stair Railing
A-LOTP-LOTP A-MASN-FIRE A-NONE-NONE A-PLAT-RIM A-RISR-MAIN A-ROOF-EAVE A-ROOF-FASC A-ROOF-MAIN A-STRS-RUNR A-STRS-TRED A-STRS-UNDR A-WALL-BAY A-WALL-EXTR A-WALL-EXTW A-WALL-MAIN A-WALL-PONY A-WALL-THIR A-WDWK-BAY A-WDWK-EXTR A-WDWK-MOLD A-WDWKEXTTRIM A-WDWK-SHLF A-WDWK-TRIM C-PROP-TERA C-PROP-TRFE C-PROP-TRSK C-PROP-ROAD C-PROP-CURB C-PROP-SDWK E-ELEC-GLAS E-ELEC-TRIM
Lot perimeter Fireplace Miscellaneous Platform Rim Stair Riser Eave (Exterior Soffit) Fascia Roof Stair Runner Stair Tread Underside of the stairs Wall for Bows/Bays Exterior Trim Exterior Wall Wall Wall (pony material) Wall (3rd material) Base Molding Exterior Woodwork Molding Exterior window sash Shelves/Partitions Trim Terrain surface Terrain feature Terrain skirt Road Curb Sidewalk Electrical Glass Electrical Trim
DXF Code
item, the DXF code for the material is included in the layer name. This DXF Code is specified on the General tab of the Define Material dialog.
These codes are specified in the Define Material dialog for each Chief Architect material. As you add new materials in this dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF code for each.
786
Chapter 35:
Overview
Chief Architect provides a complete set of architectural tools for highly customized design. In addition, the Library contains a vast supply of objects that can be used to add more detail to a plan. For everything else, theres the Create Symbol Wizard. With the ability to make your own symbols, the amount of detail that can be added to a plan is limitless. With the Create Symbol Wizard you can import 3D objects and convert them into 3D symbols for use within Chief Architect. You can also modify existing library symbols. This chapter guides you through the process of creating a symbol in Chief Architect using the Create Symbol Wizard. Adding symbols to the library, editing them, and placing them in a plan are covered in the Libraries chapter, see Libraries on page 527.
Chapter Contents
Importing 3D Data Opening the Create Symbol Wizard Selecting the Symbol Category Loading the 3D File 2D Block Symbol Options Sizing Materials Openings Plan View Closing the Create Symbol Wizard Symbol Specification Dialog
787
Symbol Wizard
Create Symbol Wizard
Importing 3D Data
Creating a symbol that can be used by Chief Architect is a relatively simple process but you must start with 3D data that was previously created. More then likely, this data will have been created by a program other than Chief Architect, although it is also possible to use Export>3D Model to create your own 3D data. If you are using another 3D modeling program to create your 3D data you should be aware of the requirements for this data before you begin creating your models.
ART Inc. is not able to provide support for any third party software.
that you can map them to the materials you want to use in Chief Architect. It is helpful to name your layers using a naming convention that will help you decide what materials would be appropriate for that portion of the object. 4. You should pay attention to the origin and orientation of the 3D data when designing your own symbols. Chief Architect provides some support for adjusting this when you are creating the symbol but it may be easier if you build the 3D data the way you want it to look in Chief. For more information about defining the origin, see Default Origin Locations on page 788.
There are a number of requirements that must be met before any 3D data can be used for building a symbol in Chief Architect: 1. The 3D data must be stored in a standard Drawing Exchange File (.dxf) or Autocad Drawing File (.dwg). Other types of 3D file formats can't currently be used. If you have 3D data in another file format, you will have to find a way to convert it into one these formats first. The 3D model must be composed of 3D Faces and/or Poly Meshes. Other types of entities in your file, such as lines, circles, polylines, and solids can exist in the file but will not be imported when the symbol is created. The 3D Faces and/or Poly Meshes should be assigned to different layers so
Surface Normals
If you will be using a third party software program to help you create .dxf /.dwg files to turn into symbols, it is a good idea to be familiar with the concept of surface normals. A surface normal is a vector which is perpendicular to the plane of a surface. This vector points in one direction, determined by the way the face is drawn. If the face is drawn clockwise, the surface normals are directed outward, if the face is drawn counterclockwise, the surface normals will point inward.
2.
3.
788
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
Many objects can be drawn using only one side of each face. A cube is a good example. The inside of a cube is not visible when only the outside faces are drawn. When the inside faces are not calculated, 3D and Render Views in Chief Architect will generate faster. Chief Architect assumes that the face on the positive side of the normal vector is the outside face. The cube on the left shows which direction each face was drawn and the cube on the A time saving option, "Make Faces Double Sided", allows you to view faces from any perspective. For more information, see Loading the 3D File on page 791.
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard

To open the Create Symbol Wizard select Tools> Symbol> Create Symbol from the main menu, or click the Create Symbol Wizard button. A slightly different version of the Create Symbol Wizard is accessible by selecting a symbol and clicking the Open Symbol edit button. For more information, see Symbol Specification Dialog on page 804.
Selecting the Symbol Category

The Select Symbol Category window allows you to determine the symbol type. Each category contains properties that are specific to the type of item being created. These properties are viewable later in the Create Symbol Wizard.
789
Symbol Wizard
right shows which direction the surface normal for each face is pointing as a result.
category will determine where the symbol is stored in the Library Browser and may affect some of the options in the symbol creation process.
1 Category - Choose a category. This
Furniture categories. You can select an Item Type that will appear in Material Lists. Some Item Types for Fixtures may also have an affect on how the symbol can be placed. The following table lists these affects. For more information on options, see Symbol Options on page 796.
Affect
2 Type of Item - This drop down list is

available only for the Fixture and
Item Type
Appliances (built-in base cabs) Appliances (under wall cabs) Cooktops Ovens (built-in) Refrigerators (built-in) Sinks (bathroom) Sinks (kitchen) Sinks (laundry)
Placement in base cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is selected. Placement under wall cabinet is allowed if Fits under Wall Cabinet option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Front option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected. Placement in cabinet is allowed if Inserts into Cabinet Top option is selected.
790
Loading the 3D File
The options in this dialog determine how the symbol will be displayed in 3D.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9 10
or .dwg file you wish to import into the Create Symbol Wizard, or use the Browse feature to locate a file on your computer.
1 Enter the name and directory of the .dxf
To understand this option it is helpful to be familiar with the concept of surface normals. For more information, see Surface Normals on page 788. if you would like Chief Architect to automatically determine which lines will display in 3D views.
2 Make Faces Double Sided - Check this box to make all symbol faces double sided.
While this increases the amount of information calculated for Render Views, it also simplifies the symbol building process by ensuring that all surfaces are visible from any perspective.
3 Automatic Edge Lines: Check this box
When displaying a model in 3D, edge lines are used to emphasize the edges and corners of the model. Each face has up to 4 edge lines. Some edge lines are helpful in thirdparty programs but are not needed in Chief Architect. If your modeling program has the
791
Symbol Wizard
Loading the 3D File
capability to turn edges off, that may be the ideal place to do so. Instead of manually turning edges on and off, Chief Architect offers another alternative with Automatic Edge Lines. When checked, this automatically interprets which lines are needed in Chief Architect and turns the others off. Edgelines
then the Surface Smoothing Angle should be set to something greater than 45 degrees. If you want to make the cylinder look hexagonal, set it to less than 45 degrees. The default is 35 degrees. when the symbol was created. Specifying any units other than inches (or mm in metric) will cause the program to convert the data so that it is in appropriate units for Chief Architect. For more information, see Unit Conversions Panel on page 101. object determines where that object will be placed in Chief Architect. It is the point where the X, Y, and Z axes intersect (0,0,0). For example, a smoke detectors top surface typically rests against a ceilings bottom surface, while an armchairs bottom surface typically rests on the floors top surface. For an object to be placed correctly, the origin needs to be at the right location. The origin of an object is defined when a symbol is originally created in a third party modeling program. Chief Architect also has default origins for most object types.
5 Units - Enter the units that were used
6 Specify Origin - The origin of an
The center lines on this object are an example of an edge line that will not display when the Automatic Edge Lines option is checked. is used to determine whether two adjacent surfaces are displayed with a smooth or sharp angle between them in Render View. If the angle between any two surface normals is less than this angle then normal averaging will be used in the Render View to give the effect of a curved surface. This angle also effects the generation of Automatic Edge lines.
4 Surface Smoothing Angle - This value
Default Origin Locations

Symbol Type
Furniture Fixture Electrical Items Electrical Items
Origin location
Bottom, Back, Middle Bottom, Back, Middle Center, Bottom (against floor) Center, Back (against wall)
Floor Wall
A good example is a hexagonal cylinder. The angle between adjacent surfaces is 360/8 or 45 degrees. If you want it to look cylindrical
792
Loading the 3D File
Electrical Ceiling Windows Cabinet Door Doors Doorways
Center Top (against ceiling) Bottom, Outside, Middle (of sill) Bottom, Back, Middle Bottom, Back, Middle Bottom, Outside, Middle
This portion of the dialog allows three options: Leave this box unchecked to accept Chief Architects default origins for the symbol. Checking this box and entering 0 in the X, Y, and Z fields will produce the same results. Check this box if you would like to use the origin point from the original .dxf/ .dwg file. The values present in the X, Y, and Z fields represent the difference between the default Chief Architect origin for that type of symbol and the origin from the original dxf/.dwg file. Check this box and enter new values to manually adjust the origin. The values in the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset of the origin point from the default Chief Architect origin.
Origin of 0, 0, 0 located middle, bottom, back of object.
90 degrees around any axis when creating the symbol.
7 Rotation - Rotates the dxf/.dwg object 8 Display - A preview of the object in 3D
views displays here. The display is updated in this dialog when the symbol is rotated or when a new 3D data file is selected.
characters. Symbol names are case sensitive and appear in the Materials list, the Symbol Specification dialog, and the various item specification dialogs. append the name of the symbol with size information which is relevant to the current plan. Just select the format from the drop down box and the symbol name will be automatically appended with the selected sizing information. Choosing "None" will not append anything to the name.
9 Symbol Name - Enter a name up to 63
10 Display Size - This allows you to
793
Symbol Wizard
Origin of a Window
2D Block
Most 3D objects require 2D representation in Plan View. 2D CAD blocks are not required for Windows, Doors, Cabinet Doors, and Doorways. The 2D Block page of the Create Symbol Wizard allows you to choose your 2D CAD Block from a variety of sources.
1 5 2
3 4
boxes will populate the list with available 2D CAD Blocks.
1 Select Blocks From - Checking these
generate a CAD Block based on an overhead projection of the object.
Plan - Check this box if you would like every CAD Block that is currently in your plan to appear in the list. For more information, see CAD Blocks on page 726. File - Check this box to include any CAD blocks contained in the 3D .dxf/.dwg file. Generated - Check this box if you would like Chief Architect to automatically
2 Available Blocks - The 2D blocks that

you can choose from display here. background of the 2D symbol.
3 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the

check box to have the 2D background transparent. Use Plan Colors - Select the check box to make the background white.
4 No Fill (transparent) - Select the
794
2D Block
rotate the 2D CAD block from its original angle.
The orientation of the 2D CAD Block in Plan View is independent of the symbol orientation in 3D view.
Creating Your Own CAD Block
You can create your own CAD Blocks to represent symbols in Plan View. The only requirement is that the correct X and Y dimensions are defined. An incorrect CAD block size will cause inconsistent placement of your symbol. It is usually best to build your CAD block symbol with solid filled properties. This will keep background patterns and other objects from showing through. For more information on creating CAD Blocks, see CAD Blocks on page 726. Once the item has been blocked it needs to be named. Select the item and click the Open Object edit button to open the CAD Block Specification dialog. For more information, see CAD Block Specification Dialog on page 729.
795
Symbol Wizard
5 The selected CAD Block displays here. 6 Enter an angle if you would like to
Nested Blocks cannot be used in the symbol development process. Blocks can also be imported with the Import Drawing Wizard, see DXF/DWG on page 771.
Symbol Options
2 3
The options that appear on this page will vary depending on the type of symbol being created.
dialog. For more information, see The Components Dialog on page 869. when the Light option is checked (for electrical symbols). Enter a distance to offset the light source from the symbols origin.
1 Options - How each of these options will affect a symbol is detailed in the following table.
would like the symbol to rest a certain height above the floor.
4 Default Light Offset - This is enabled
2 Height Off Floor - Enter a value if you 3 Material Components - Click this
button to open the Components
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options that are available and how this option will affect the behavior of the symbol:
796
Symbol Options
Option 110 / 220 Volts
Categories Electrical
Affect on Symbol If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build> Electrical> Place Outlets, an outlet will not be placed in that area. Chief Architect recognizes item and applies 2D view after a specific number of electrical connections have been created between electrical items. Chief Architect recognizes item and applies 2D view after a specific number of electrical connections have been created between electrical items. Check this box if you would like this fixture to appear in the Appliance Schedule. Check this box if you would like this fixture to appear in the HVAC Schedule. Check this box if you would like this fixture to appear in the Plumbing Schedule. No effect Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols remain selectable and independent of cabinet after placement. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to bottom. Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin. Uses switch default height. Recognized by Plan Check to be connected by a Switch. Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed independently on plan, and will locate itself 54" from floor to bottom. Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Height Off Floor can be used to specify distance from floor to bottom. If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute, and that item is placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electrical> Place Outlets recognizes it and will not insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet. Fixture will attach to wall at 54" from floor if placed within 8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of wall if placed more than 8" away and will insert at 54" from floor to bottom.
3-Way
Electrical
4-Way
Appears in appliance schedule Appears in HVAC schedule Appears in plumbing schedule Breaker Panel Can sit on base cabinet or table
Fixture
Fixture Fixture
Electrical Fixtures, Furniture, Electrical Electrical Electrical Electrical Fixtures
Ceiling Mounted Doorbell Fan Fits under wall cabinet
Floor Mounted
Electrical
GFCI
Electrical
Hangs on wall
Fixtures and Furniture
797
Symbol Wizard
Option Inserts into cabinet front
Categories Fixtures
Affect on Symbol Fixture will attach itself centrally to the front of a full height cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet, and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently. When this is the single option selected, fixture can be placed in a full height cabinet only. *Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or width/depth modification is required. For modification, depth must = distance from back of block to point wished to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show properly. Fixture will set on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it. Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not selectable. Creates light source with available properties to individual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check to be connected by a Switch. This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this box to have the casing moved out from the window or doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Casing must also be checked. Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway. Plan Check will warn that this is not a waterproof switch/ outlet. Can be placed automatically using the Place Outlets option. Electrical Defaults determines placement above floor. Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet default height. If against a wall, Build> Electrical> Place Outlets will place an outlet of the appropriate type behind the fixture. Also makes fixture appear in Appliance Schedule. Appears in Appliance Schedule. Appears in Plumbing Schedule. Default option for Fixtures. Places fixture on floor. Recognized by Plan Check as a requirement for certain rooms.
Inserts into countertop Light
Fixtures
Electrical
Move casing out 1/2 inch, 1 inch at sill No default door in this doorway Outdoor Outlet
Doorways and Windows
Doorways and Windows Electrical Electrical
Phone Requires high/ standard voltage Requires natural gas Requires water drain Sits on floor Smoke Detector
Electrical Fixtures
Fixtures Fixtures Fixtures and Furniture Electrical
798
Sizing
Option Switch
Categories Electrical
Affect on Symbol Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a Switched item. Electrical Defaults determines placement above floor. Recognized by Plan Check to be connected by a Switch. Chief Architect will automatically supply rectangular casing if your model does not already have a casing. No affect. Uses switch default height. Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet default height. Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Switched System supplies rectangular casing Thermostat TV Wall Mounted
Electrical Doorways and Windows Electrical Electrical Electrical
Sizing
The Sizing window allows you to control the size of a symbol and how it will behave when resized. The objects Width (X), Depth (Y), and Height (Z) are referenced to the nearest 1/16". The default size information for the symbol will display, representing the actual boundaries of the 3D object. In most situations, the default values for Width (X), Depth (Y), and Height (Z) should be left unchanged.
1 2
3 1 Size -The size values only need to be

For example, to make an object protrude through other 3D items (e.g. fireplaces, wall unit heaters, air conditioners, etc.) smaller size values will need to be used. Size values
modified if the boundary box (the selectable area) of a symbol is not the same size as the 3D symbol.
799
Symbol Wizard
that are larger than the 3D objects can be used if a symbol needs to be spaced away from other 3D items (e.g. toilets and sinks that need minimum clearance). you to define where the symbol will stretch when resized. If no stretch planes are added, the symbol will resize uniformly. A stretch planes coordinates are relative to the symbols origin point. For more about the origin point, see Loading the 3D File on page 791.
Before
It will resize like this:

(Y axis into paper)
2 Stretch Planes: Stretch Planes allow
Below one Stretch Plane is specified 6" from the symbols origin.
It will resize like this:
One Stretch Plane

One stretch plane means that the symbol will stretch only at the location of that plane. In the following illustration, a stretch plane was placed at x=0 and the symbol stretched along the x-axis.
Two Stretch Planes

If you want to stretch the symbol without disrupting the outer arches, two stretch planes will need to be specified.
800
Sizing
In this example two YZ stretch planes are specified on the X axis, the first at -6", the second at 6". Stretch planes to the left of the origin will need to be expressed as a negative number, while stretch planes to the right are positive.
It will resize like this: It will resize like this:
Stretch Zones
an area between two planes that will stretch uniformly, leaving the area outside unaffected.
3 Stretch Zone - A Stretch Zone defines
In the following example we want to designate a Stretch Zone for an archtop. To stretch only the middle when the archtop is stretched vertically, select Height 1-2. "Height" means that we are going to make the object taller, and "1-2" directs Chief Architect to the two planes that define the area.
801
Symbol Wizard
In the following example the area to be stretched is between 18" - 24" from the bottom. Only this area becomes taller.
Materials
The Materials window of the Create Symbol Wizard is like the Materials tab on many other specification dialogs. For more information, see Selecting Materials with the Materials Tab on page 568.
1 All of the layers and layer names from

Double click a name to rename it. If the .dxf/.dwg file for a symbol has changed, all material information will be lost.
the original .dxf/.dwg file display here.
Openings
This window of the Create Symbol Wizard appears only for Windows and Doorways. When creating a doorway or window symbol, Chief Architect needs information
Opening window defines the specifications
about the space that will contain it. The
of the hole to be cut. The hole needed is the same as the rough opening that would be created in actual construction.
802
Plan View
If a window or doorway requires an arch top opening or triangle you will need to select more than one opening section from the drop down list to correctly display the opening in Chief Architect. You can approximate the opening for arch or other odd shaped windows or doors by specifying up to three sections.
Plan View
The Plan View window appears only for Windows and Doorways. The preview shows how the symbol will display in Plan View. By default the program brings up a door symbol for a doorway. To change from a door swing to a window, click on the image itself in the dialog. Click again to toggle back. To edit a dimension, click on it and type the desired size.
803
Symbol Wizard
Edit the size of the opening by clicking on the appropriate side and entering the dimension.
Mulled Units
To represent a .dxf/.dwg that is a mulled window or doorway you may need several windows and possibly a door in Plan View. Click the drop down list and select the number of units. You can have up to 5 windows or 4 windows and a doorway. This is independent of the opening.
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard

This window will appear when you have completed the Create Symbol Wizard. Select the Back button at any time during the process to make changes. Click Finish to close the window and place the new symbol in your plan with the next click. Check the Add to Library box to close the window and proceed to the Add to Library dialog with your new symbol. For more information, see Adding to the Library on page 531. If you created a symbol that must be contained by another object, click Finish to close this window, place the object, then select Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol or click the Get Last Symbol button to retrieve the last symbol created.
Symbol Specification Dialog

The Symbol Specification dialog provides a convenient method for editing existing symbols. The Symbol Specification dialog can be accessed in two ways. Whichever method is used will determine whether the original symbol or a copy of the symbol is edited.
Edit> Open Symbol

Any symbol from an Unlocked library can be opened for specification and edited from the Library Browser menu. Highlight a symbol in the tree view of the Library Browser and choose Edit> Open Symbol from the menu.
804
Symbol Specification Dialog
The tabs on the Symbol Specification dialog correspond with the windows that appear in the Create Symbol Wizard.
Type Tab
This tab will be present when the Symbol Specification dialog is opened for a selected Fixture or Furniture object.
Editing a symbol using the Edit> Open Symbol menu command will open the Symbol Specification dialog and allow you to make changes to the original symbol and all future instances of it.
Changes made using this method are permanent. Use the Edit> Open Symbol menu command only if you want to overwrite the original library symbol. Instead, copy a symbol and then add it to the library. For more information, see Adding a New Symbol on page 531.
Click the drop down list if you want to change the Item Type. For more information, see Selecting the Symbol Category on page 789.
3D Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the 3D window in the Create Symbol Wizard. For more information, see Loading the 3D File on page 791. If you load a new .dxf/.dwg to an existing symbol, all material information will be lost. For more information, see Materials on page 802.
Open Symbol
The Open Symbol edit button appears when a library object is selected in Plan View or 3D View. Clicking it opens the Symbol Specification dialog, allowing you to edit the symbol which is currently opened for specification. A library symbol which has been placed in Plan View is a copy of the original, which is stored in the Library Browser. Changes made to a symbol using the Open Symbol
2D Block Tab
This dialog is similar to the 2D Block window in the Create Symbol Wizard. It allows you to select from the 2D Blocks in the list or generate a new one. For more information, see 2D Block on page 794.
805
Symbol Wizard
edit button will only apply to the selected copy.
Options Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the Options window in the Create Symbol Wizard. For more information, see Symbol Options on page 796.
Symbol Specification dialog. If you
Opening Tab
The Opening Tab will be present when the Symbol Specification dialog is opened for a selected Window or Doorway symbol. For more information, see Openings on page 802.
Default Light Offset is not present in the
would like to change the Light Offset for an existing symbol, select the symbol and click the Open Object edit button. For more information, see Render Data Tab on page 621.
Plan View Tab

The Plan View Tab will be present when the Symbol Specification dialog is opened for a selected Window or Doorway symbol. For more information, see Plan View on page 803.
Materials Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the Materials window in the Create Symbol Wizard. For more information, see Materials on page 802.
Sizing Tab
The Sizing Tab is the same as the Sizing Window of the Create Symbol Wizard. For more information, see Sizing on page 799.
806
Chapter 36:
Layout
Layout
Chapter Overview
The Chief Architect Layout facility can be used to create large or small format plot sheets for working drawings. Each Layout file contains up to 200 layout pages, and each page may contain many different views, details, etc. Layout files can be printed with any printer that uses a Windows driver. Layout files can also be printed to file and sent to a printing service.
Screen captures are provided for illustrative purposes only and are not an endorsement of any products. Many options available with one driver may not be available with another. Printers supported in one version of windows may not be supported by the manufacturer in another.
Chapter Contents
Preparing for Layout Creating a Layout File CAD and Text in Layout Testing the Print Area Creating Borders Sending Views to Layout Selecting Layout Views Resizing Views Rescaling Views Changing the Display of Layout Views Keeping Layout Views Current Editing Layout Edit Layout Lines Dialog Changing the Printing Line Weight Line Color and Printing Relinking Layout Views Finding Missing Files Printing Layout Files Exporting Layout Files Layout & Printer Relationship
807
Preparing for Layout

When a Layout file is created, the printable area and orientation are based on the current printer configuration in Windows. The Layout file can be rescaled later if you chose to use a different printer, but it saves a lot of time if you set your default Windows printer, including paper size and orientation before you select File> New Layout from the menu. This can be accomplished by closing the Chief Architect and selecting Start> Settings> Control Panel. Once the Control Panel is active, open the Printers folder. In the Printers folder all of the installed printers are visible, and the page size, orientation and other settings can be adjusted by opening the properties for that printer and making any necessary changes. The last step in this process is to return to Chief Architect and select File> Print> Printer Setup. Here, the desired printer must be selected. Once the paper size and orientation have been selected in the Printers folder in Windows, and the desired printer has been selected in Print Setup within Chief, the layout will detect these settings and reflect them in the blue border of the layout. If a large size printer has been chosen for the layout, it is still possible to print test plots to a smaller printer. This allows you to test the layout and organization, and do any final checks before printing to the larger sizes. For more information, see Layout & Printer Relationship on page 830.
Printing Services
If you are going to use a printing service, make sure that you install the driver for the printer they use in the Printers folder in the Control Panel. Contact the printing company to learn what paper size they use, and select this paper size in the Properties of the print driver. Specify that printer by clicking File> Print> Printer Setup within Chief Architect. A new layout can now be created. Once the layout is complete, you can then print the layout to a .prn or .plt file and send those file(s) to the service for printing. For more about printing, see Printing Layout Files on page 827. When using an outside service it is a good idea to run printing tests to make sure that the setup is correct, and that all of the hardware is functioning properly.
A print test drawing has been included in the Chief Architect installation CD. This drawing file is accessible by clicking File> Open and Browsing to the folder called "Sample Print". The drawing file "Print Test" can be printed from both a drawing file and a layout file. Once a drawing and layout file print correctly, you will be ready to print production drawings with your printing service.
Printer Setup
You can install print drivers on your computer for any printer. The new driver can then be specified as your default printer even if the printer has never been physically attached to your computer. You will have to assign the correct paper size within the print driver, and print to a file in Chief Architect.
808
Creating a Layout File
To select the printer for a new Layout file choose File> Print> Printer Setup. The Print Setup dialog opens. Select the desired printer from the list of installed printers.
When the printer has been selected, click OK. When you click File> New Layout to create a new Layout file, a blue border displays that represents the printable area.
Creating a Layout File

Choose File> New Layout to create a blank Layout file. A Layout file is created with the name untitled.la1. By default, new layout files open to page one. If you have specified a default template file for layouts, this file will be opened. For more information, see Template Files on page 72. Select File> Open Layout to open an existing Layout file. Browse to the proper directory and select the Layout file to open. Only one Layout file can be open at a time. When a Layout file is open it appears at the bottom of the Window menu as an open view. Each Layout file comes with 200 blank layout sheets already created. Each sheet has a blue border on the screen that shows the printable area of the specified printer. Select File> Save to save the Layout file. It is important that you save the file in the same directory that contains the plan files and views that are contained on the layout sheets. It is also a good idea to save any plans that appear in the layout at the same time you save your layout. mode, or the Current CAD Layer in CAD mode. In a Layout file they control and display the current page. The current layout page is the target of any view sent to layout. If sent to the wrong page, a view may be moved from one page to another. To accomplish this, simply click on the view you wish to move. Once it is highlighted, click the Open Object tool. This will produce a Layout Box Specification window, and in the Line Style tab you can change the Page number. To toggle between layout pages click the arrows on either side of the Layout Page button. You can also choose Tools> Layout> Change Layout Page. If you are scrolling one or two pages this may be the fastest way to navigate but if you have many pages to scroll through, Click the Current Page number between the arrows.
The Current Page

When a Layout file is first created, the Current Page is page one. The current page is noted at the center of the Layout Page buttons. These buttons change the Current Floor in Architectural
The Go to Layout Page dialog opens. Enter the page number and click OK.
Note: You cannot print the current page if it is blank.
809
Layout
Layout Page Zero

Layout page zero is unique. Anything on page zero displays and prints on all layout pages, from 1-199. This allows you to create title blocks and
borders that are used by layout pages 1-199 without having to recreate them for each page. Add anything to page zero that you want superimposed on all subsequent layout pages.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD objects and text may be added to any layout page. These are attached to the layout page itself, not to any specific view contained on the page. CAD objects drawn directly on the Layout page do not have any layer control, whereas CAD objects sent to Layout each have their own layer control. Text sent to Layout is specified in model coordinates. Text placed directly on a layout is specified in printer coordinates. If you want text in a plan, elevation, or detail to print at a particular size, you will need to calculate its size based on the scaling you use when you send a view to layout. For more information, see Printing Text on page 666. Characteristics such as color and line weight are defined item by item, not by a layer. By default, text and CAD objects drawn on a layout page are black with a line weight of 1. To change the characteristics of CAD objects, select them individually or as a group and click the Open Object edit button. The Specification dialog for the object opens. Click the Line Style tab to edit the selected items. Change the number in the Page: field to move the selected CAD object to another layout page. To move text objects to a different layout page, select the text, open it for specification, and change the number in the Page field on the Attributes tab.
Testing the Print Area

To familiarize yourself with a printer, it is a good idea to print a test page. Go to layout page one. The blue border represents the edge of the printable area for the specified printer. Since each printer driver handles margins in a different way, it is good to determine how the blue border coincides with what prints on paper. To test this, draw a CAD box so that each edge of the box overlays one of the blue edges.
810
Creating Borders
After laying out the CAD box, make some other mark on the page to define one specific edge.
To print the test page select File> Print >Print from the pull down menu. Make sure that you select the Print to Scale option. Compare the printed results to what was shown on the screen. If one of the lines did not print, move that edge inside the blue border. If one of the lines printed at different distances from the paper edge, adjust it to create a uniform border when printed. You should also verify that it is correctly printing to scale. If the scale is set to 1/4 inch = 1
foot, then a 20 x 20 box should print out as 5" x 5".

To save production time it is a good idea to test the printable areas for all printers and paper sizes that you use and create Template Layout files for each one. Correct printer and paper size information, page zero, and other layout customizations can be saved. These layout files can then be opened for new projects by selecting File> Open Template.
Creating Borders
Once you have established the print area of the layout sheet, you can lay out the borders of a layout file on sheet zero using the CAD tools. You can use CAD boxes to create a border. Thicker borders can be created by defining the color, style, and/or line weight for the CAD objects. Drawing borders may be simplified by making certain changes in the Preferences dialog. To access the dialog, double-click the
811
Layout
Select Objects button or choose Edit> Preferences. Select the CAD panel and do the following:
double line borders. The copy is made at the same distance from all edges. object can be moved near another without snapping onto it.
1 Check Concentric to simplify making 2 Uncheck Auto Snap so that one CAD 3 Positioning Unit - Define a unit for all
center. Release the mouse button when the copy is at the desired distance from the original. If an exact distance is desired, make sure that value is entered in the Jump field on the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog before making the copy.
CAD objects to snap to when created or moved.
Filleted Borders
To fillet the corners of the border: 1. 2. Draw a rectangle. Set the Fillet radius by double-clicking the Fillet Two Lines edit button and setting the desired value in the Chamfer/Fillet dialog.
Double-Line Borders
To create a double line border, make sure that Concentric is checked in Preferences and Auto Snap is unchecked. Select a closed polyline and click the Copy edit button. Grab a corner handle and drag toward the
812
Sending Views to Layout
3.
Select one edge of the rectangle, click the Fillet Two Lines edit button and then select an adjacent edge. The fillet will be created. Repeat step 3 with the other sides until you have a rectangle with four filleted corners. Select one side of the rectangle and drag the edge to the extents of the printable area. Repeat step 5 with each of the other sides until you have a rectangular border the size you want.
Title Block
Lay out the title block using CAD boxes, lines and text on layout page zero. Create only those items which should display on every layout page. Create areas for page specific information such as the sheet number which can be filled in on each individual layout page. If you want to add a company logo, import it as a bitmap into a CAD detail, and then send the CAD detail to the layout file. When the border and title block are set up as desired, go to layout page one, save, and close the file.
4.
6.

Layout files can contain and print information from many drawing files. When you send a view to layout, the view is linked to the layout file. Once a drawing is linked to a layout file, do not change its path name by moving the drawing file to a new folder or renaming it. If the path name is changed by moving or renaming a drawing or layout file, you need to reestablish the link within the layout file for the drawing to appear in layout. The best way to do this is to resend the drawing to layout or to use the Relink File tool. For more information, see Relinking Layout Views on page 825. With the layout file open, configure the view to send to layout. Set up the view so that the items which should be seen are displayed, and the items which should not be seen for this view are suppressed. If you have Layer settings that you repeat often, define Layer Sets for your layout files. For more information, see Layer Sets on page 127. Before sending a view to layout, make sure the correct layout file is open and you are on the correct layout page. If you send the view to the wrong layout page the view can be moved to another page within the same file. For more information, see Moving Views to a Different Page on page 817. When the view is displayed as desired, choose File> Send to Layout. The Send to Layout dialog opens. It is similar to the Print dialog. In effect you are printing the view to the current layout page rather than to the printer. The options vary in the dialog depending on the type of view being sent to layout. You cannot send to a layout page if no print driver is present. If you try to do so a warning will appear. Install a driver and try again. For more information, see Print Drivers on page 834.
813
Layout
5.
When you have selected the desired options in the Send to Layout dialog click OK to send the view to the current page. You must toggle to or activate the layout to see the change. Choose the layout from the list at the bottom of the Window menu, or choose 3D> Show Layout. If you are sending 3D views to layout and you would like them to generate more quickly, increase the number of view panels in the 3D Preferences dialog, (choose
3D> 3D Preferences). For more information, see Options Tab on page 121. The current layout page contains the view you just sent, normally in the middle of the page. It is at the scale you defined in the Send to Layout dialog. To send other views to layout, repeat this process. If you need to, change the current page for the new view. This process is the same regardless of the view being sent to layout.
Plan Views and CAD Details 1 2 3 4
grayed out. If you print from the layout, this is the printer which is used.
1 The default printer displays, but is
view being sent to layout. The scale can easily be redefined in the layout file. Full Page (no scale) sends the view to the layout page without a specific scale. The current screen appears in the Layout View. Define the percentage of the sheet that the view occupies. It can be resized on the layout sheet. Architectural scales - Define at what scale the objects are printed.
3 Scaling - There are two ways to scale a
2 Select Current Screen or Entire Plan/

View. Current Screen Sends only what is shown on the screen to the layout page. Entire Plan/View Sends whatever would be visible if the Window> Fill Window is selected or if the F6 button is pushed.
814
1/32=1-0 should be entered as 1/16=20
Cross Section/Elevation Views
3 4
sent to layout at an architectural scale or at Full Page (no scale). layout you would like the Cross Section/Elevation View to be sent.
1 Cross Section/Elevation Views can be 2 Send Position - Specify where in
Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page. Snap to Active CAD Point - Check this box to snap the view you are sending to layout to the active CAD Point.
weight of the lines from the 3D elevation. Any CAD lines or dimensions added to the original view are not affected by this. This value may later be changed within the view on the layout sheet itself, or you can define the line weights of individual lines in a Layout View.
3 Line Weight refers to the printing line
4 Select Current Screen or Entire Plan/

View.
815
Layout
In most cases you specify an actual scale for Plan Views, CAD Details, and Section/ Elevations. A typical scale is =1-0. =1-0 is the same as 1" = 4. The program only allows scales with a denominator equal to or less than 16. To get more unusual scales, you may need to type in a fractional equivalent. For example:
3/32=1-0 should be entered as 3/16=20. layout you would like the Plan View or CAD Detail to be sent. Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page. Snap to Active CAD Point - Check this box to snap the view you are sending to layout to the active CAD Point. This allows you to specify where in the layout you would like the Plan View to be sent.
4 Send Position - Specify where in
Current Screen - Sends only what is shown on the screen to the layout page. Entire Plan/View - Sends whatever would be visible if the Window> Fill Window is selected or if the F6 button is pushed. check box to prevent the combination of multiple lines into single lines. Horizontal and vertical lines are still merged.
5 Suppress Line Merge - Select the
If Suppress Line Merge is not selected and a 3D view is being sent to layout, the program looks for any lines which are superimposed or in line with each other and it merges them so that the layout has only one line rather than several lines. This makes the final view on the layout easier to edit if necessary, but it may slightly slow down the process of sending 3D views containing nonvertical or horizontal lines to layout.
Perspectives and Overviews
1 2
3 4 5 4 In camera views and overviews, only
be sent to layout at a specified scale or at Full Page (no scale). These views may be resized in layout. layout you would like the Perspective or Overview to be sent. Send to Layout Page # - Enter a page. Snap to Active CAD Point - Check this box to snap the view you are sending to layout to the active CAD Point.
1 Perspective Views and Overviews may
the Current Screen may be sent to layout. Any lines or information beyond the current screen are not sent to layout. box to prevent the merge calculations for overlapping lines.
2 Send Position - Specify where in
5 Suppress line merge - Select the check
Line Weight defines the printing line weight for edge definition lines.
When a 3D view is sent to layout, the program looks for line segments which are in line (colinear) with each other and it merges them. When merged, the layout line is made up of only one line segment rather than several colinear or overlapping line segments. For more information, see Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 815.
816
Selecting Layout Views
Selecting Layout Views

To select a Layout View, click on it in Select Objects mode, (or right-click on it in any mode). When a view is selected handles will appear. There is a handle at the centers of all four sides, at all four corners, in the center of the view, and for a Plan or CAD Detail View there is a triangular handle outside of the border that can be used to rotate the view.
Deleting Views
To delete a view select it, then click Delete edit button or the Del key on the keyboard.
You cannot copy a view by selecting the view border in layout and copying it. If multiple copies of one view are needed, send the view to layout as many times as necessary. Each view will behave independently.
Moving Layout Views

To reposition the view on the layout page, select it, grab the center Move handle and drag it into position. The box and the image relocate.
Rotate Scaled Views

A Plan or CAD detail view has a triangular rotate handle when selected. Drag from this to rotate the view. Both the box and the image rotate.
Moving Views to a Different Page

To move a view from one layout page to another select the view border and click the Open Object 1. 2. edit button.
Click the Line Style tab. Change the Page number in the specified box. Click OK until you are back at the layout sheet. The view is moved to the new page.
Resizing Views
Any Layout View can be resized. Resizing the border has different effects depending on the type of view and how you resize it. Scaled views - Scaled views retain their scale regardless of how you resize the border. You can resize the border proportionally from a corner handle or select one of the handles on an edge to change the size in one direction only. Make the border smaller and the image may be cropped. If the view was sent to layout at Full Page (not scale) the way you resize the border determines what happens. If you drag a corner handle in or out, the border and the image resize proportionally.
817
Layout
Copying Views
This is how you make the image larger or smaller. If you drag a handle on one of the sides in or out, the image does not change size, but the border does. If you make the border smaller,
it may crop the image. If you make it larger, you may show more of the image. Use these two methods to customize your layout page.
Rescaling Views
Plan Views, Section/Elevations, Wall Elevations and CAD details can be rescaled on the layout page. To change the scale of the image, select the border, and click the Rescale Layout Picture edit button or select Tools> Layout> Rescale Layout Picture. The Change Scale dialog opens. the image. When the scale is changed, the layout picture resizes accordingly.
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
Specify a Scale
In most cases you want to specify an actual scale for Plan Views, CAD Details, and Section/Elevations. A typical scale is =10. =1-0 is the same as 1" = 4. The program allows scales with a denominator equal to or less than 16. To get more unusual scales, you may need to type in a fractional equivalent. For example: 1/32=1-0 should be entered as 1/ 16=2-0; 3/32=1-0 should be entered as 3/ 16=2-0.
1 2
specific scale factor from being associated with the selected view.
1 Choose No Scale to remove any
Changing the Display of Layout Views

Every view sent to the layout displays the same items which were visible when the view was originally sent to the layout. After the view has been sent to layout, the method of changing the display of different items depends on the type of view.
Displaying View Borders

Every view on a layout page has a border. The border of any view sent to layout prints if it displays on screen. If borders are turned off they do not print.
818
Changing the Display of Layout Views
To turn off the borders, first make sure nothing is selected. Then choose Tools> Display Options or click the Display Options button. The Layer Display Options dialog for borders opens.
made in the Layer Display Options dialog affect only the selected Layout View. You will need to save your changes before closing the layout. For more information on Layers and Layer Sets, see Layers on page 125.
Make changes in the original plan -
Clear the Borders check box if you do not want the borders to display. When you click OK, every border in the layout file disappears. These borders still exist, but are invisible. Select Tools> Display Options and check Borders to have borders display again.
When a layout sheet is open, double-click within the borders of a Layout View while in Select Objects mode to open the plan from which the Layout View originated. Notice that the display configuration matches that of the Layout View which was doubleclicked. If you want to change the display, choose Tools> Display Options from the pull down menu or click the Display Options button to open the Layer Display Options dialog. The Layer Set from the Layout View which was double-clicked is active. This Layer Set is called "Layout Set" to indicate the unique connection it has to the Layout View which was double-clicked. If a Layer Set already exists by the same name, a 1, 2, 3, etc. will be appended. Changes made in the Layer Display Options dialog while this Layer Set is active affect the Layout Views Layer Set. This Layer Set is not saved with the plan, but will remain accessible from the layout. For example, if you double-click in a Layout View that was set to display the electrical plan, you will open the original Plan View and the same electrical plan layer configuration will display. If you then turn off the framing layer in Plan View, the framing layer will be turned off when you return to that Layout View.
Dynamic Views
Layout Views created from Plan View, Cross Section/Elevations, and CAD Details are dynamic. A dynamic view is one that references the original plan. If you make changes to the original plan then the Layout View will change as well. There are two ways to change the display of dynamic views:
Make changes in the Layout View -To
do this, select the view border and choose Tools> Display Options from the pull down menu or click the Display Options button. The Layer Display Options dialog opens using a locked copy of the original Layer Set. The layer table will display information as it was set when the plan was originally sent to layout. Changes
819
Layout
Static Views
Layout Views created with perspective, cross section/elevation, or Overview cameras are static. These views do not reference the original plan, and will not be updated when the plan changes. Changes must be made in the original plan and then resent to layout.
set the line weight and color. Layers which cannot be changed are grayed out.
3D Items in any 3D View

Changing the display of 3D items from any 3D view (camera, elevation, cross section or overview) needs to be done in the original view itself, not in the layout. After you have changed the display in the original view, update the 3D view to layout in one of two ways: 1. If it is an elevation or cross section, close the original view and choose to update that view to the layout. If it is a perspective or overview, delete the incorrect copy from the layout and send a new copy to the layout, with all the 3D items displayed as desired.
CAD Objects in Elevations & CAD Details

Display of CAD objects, text objects and dimensions which were created in cross sections and CAD Details may be changed in layout. Select a CAD Detail or elevation view on the layout. Click the Open Object edit button to display the 3D Display Options dialog. This allows CAD layers, as well as text and dimension lines to be turned on or off locally for the layout picture. It also allows you to
2.
Keeping Layout Views Current

Plan Views and CAD Details
Everything in Plan View and in a CAD Detail window is under your control including the item colors and line widths. Because of this, there is a 100% correlation between these views and each copy sent to layout. All editing changes must be made in the original plan itself. Any editing changes made in the original plan or CAD Detail views are automatically reflected on every copy already sent to layout. In each Plan View sent to layout, each layer may be set to display in that view or not. In addition, each layer may also be defined with a unique color, line weight and line style. This does not affect the original plan or detail. To change the plan while in layout, doubleclick inside the borders of that view while in Select Objects mode. This opens the plan file where any editing can be done. Any changes are automatically reflected on each layout copy.
Perspectives and Overviews

You cannot draw lines, text, or anything else in a Perspective View or Overview. All the lines defining these views are generated
820
Keeping Layout Views Current
automatically. Although the view angle and the size, shape and position of most items can be manipulated, there is no editing of individual lines within these views. Neither CAD nor text can be added. When these views are sent to layout, a linefor-line copy of the view gets sent to layout, but those lines no longer represent 3D objects. There is no longer any link to the view. Every line in that view in layout is editable using Edit Layout button. Changes made in layout have no effect on the 3D model. In addition, any subsequent changes made to the 3D model have no effect on any camera view or overview in layout. Unlike copies of the Plan View which are dynamically linked and are always up-todate, copies of overviews or camera views are like a snapshot taken at a specific time from a specific location. Any changes made later do not show on that snapshot. To update these views on the layout sheets, delete the old view and send a new view. For more information, see Static Views on page 820.
Like Plan Views sent to layout, doubleclicking inside a Cross Section/Elevation View on the layout while in Select Objects mode activates the original view, allowing modifications to both the model or to CAD objects. Like camera views and overviews, when Cross Section/Elevation Views are first generated, every line in the view represents an edge within the model, and you have no further control over these specific lines. These lines cannot be changed in the original view either by line color or by line weight. Instead, the copies of these lines in the layout are editable with the Edit Layout button.
Updating Cross Sections/Elevations

If an elevation or cross section has been sent to layout, and if that camera is activated while the layout sheet is open, closing that elevation or cross section view opens the following dialog:
Cross Sections/Elevations
Cross Section/Elevation Views have certain updating characteristics similar to Plan Views. Since Cross Section/Elevations allow CAD to be added, the CAD on the original Cross Section/Elevation is directly linked to the layout copy, and the layout copy of the Cross Section/Elevation Views are automatically kept current with any CAD changes. These changes to CAD objects must be made in the original Cross Section/Elevation View. You cannot make them in the layout copy.
If no changes have been made to the 3D model since the last time that view was either sent or updated to layout, choose NO. Any changes using CAD show on the layout page. To update the view on the layout page choose OK. You do not have to update a layout picture every time its view changes. If
821
Layout
you wish, wait until later and update it all at once. When the picture is updated, the original picture on the layout is replaced by a new copy, so any changes made to the original
picture using Edit Layout are lost. For this reason, changes to any 3D views on the layout using Edit Layout should be made after the model is finalized.
Editing Layout
Any 3D view sent to layout can have individual lines modified and added in the layout file. These changes have no effect on the actual 3D model itself. In Edit Layout mode you can draw, move, delete and change the properties of lines in a Cross Section/Elevation or Overview. This feature is often used to delete extraneous lines that can appear in a layout picture. click on selected lines to subtract them from the selection set. Before any lines are selected you can press and hold the Shift key and drag a rectangular marquee to group select many lines.
Deleting Layout Lines

Once the lines are selected you can click the Delete edit button or press the Del key on the keyboard to delete the lines.
Adding New Layout Lines

Add a line in a Layout View by clicking the Edit Layout button and dragging a new line. Once drawn, this line can be edited like any other layout line and will stay in relation to the view or image that it was drawn in.
Changing Layout Line Length

If an individual line is selected, the red handle at either end of the line can be used to stretch, shorten or change the angle of that line. The selected line pivots on its opposite end. You may find it more convenient to edit these lines in a CAD Detail: 1. 2. 3. Click the CAD Detail From View button in the 3D View you want to work with. Send the Detail to the Layout. Edit the lines within the detail.
Selecting Layout Lines

CAD lines sent to layout cannot be edited with the Edit Layout tool. Lines generated by the program to draw 3D views can be edited. To select a line in a 3D Layout View, click the Edit Layout button and click on a line to select it. You can continue selecting lines within the same Layout View by holding down the Shift key and clicking on the individual lines. Hold the Shift key and
Lines in a detail have the full set of editing tools that are available for CAD lines. For more information, see CAD Detail From View on page 600.
822
Edit Layout Lines Dialog
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

When lines have been selected with the Edit Layout tool you can click the Open Object edit button to open the Edit Layout Lines dialog. The dialog allows you to change the properties of the selected lines without affecting the other lines in the view or change the properties for all lines in the view.
Line Weight Tab
1 2 3 5 7 4 6
a specific weight. This activates the Highlight Weight section, where you must specify which weights of lines are highlighted. be able to select all layout lines, even those which are not highlighted. If All lines editable is not checked, only the highlighted lines are selectable until you return to this dialog and uncheck Highlight certain weight. weight for each line type to highlight. In this case, since all normal lines have been defaulted to line weight 3, choosing to highlight Normal lines of line weight 2 displays those lines which were changed to line weight 2 and are no longer linked to the defaults. If All lines editable is unchecked,
value is set to 0, the selected lines use the Default Weight for their line type defined in the lower part of this same dialog. Default Weights - Set the line width for all Normal lines and all Pattern lines. on the properties of either the Pattern Lines or the Normal Lines. the edges of the surfaces of the 3D objects. patterns such as brick, siding, and shingles.
1 Weight for Selected Lines - If this
6 All Lines Editable - Check this box to
2 Selected lines can be changed to take
3 Normal Lines are those lines defining 4 Pattern Lines are those lines defining 5 Highlight Certain Weight - Select the
7 Highlight Weight - Specify the line
check box if you want to isolate lines of
823
Layout
the highlighted normal lines of line weight 2 would be simple to select by holding down the Shift key and dragging a marquee around
the view (inside the border). Only the highlighted lines would be selected.
Line Color Tab
1 2
Layout line color can be changed in either of two ways by changing it for the selected lines only, or by changing it for the entire layout line type.
selected layout lines to the default color for that line type. colors for Normal lines and for Pattern lines. Unless changed individually, every layout line in that view will take on the newly defined color for its line type.
2 Check Use default color to restore the 3 Use the menu to define new Default
1 Choose the Color for selected lines from the menu. All the selected lines are changed to the newly defined color.
Otherwise all the selected lines are changed to the defined color.
Changing the Printing Line Weight

CAD Objects Drawn in Layout
CAD objects drawn directly onto a layout page must be defined individually on the Style tab of the objects specification dialog.
CAD Objects in a 3D view Sent to Layout

Line weight, color or style of any CAD object inside a 3D view which has been sent to layout must be changed in the elevation or cross section camera itself, not from the layout sheet. Double-click inside the layout box displaying the elevation or cross section view in Select Objects mode to jump to that view. Make the changes and return to the layout. You do not need to update the view on the layout.
Views Sent to Layout

Line weight, color and style for the layers can be changed for an individual Layout View by selecting that view and then opening the Layer Display Options dialog.
824
Line Color and Printing
Line Color and Printing

Certain black inkjet printers use line color to define line weight. For example, a blue line may specify a .075 width line, while a green line specifies a .050 width, and a red line specifies a .035 width. In this example, the layout borders could be changed to blue for a thick line, the normal lines in each Layout View could be changed to green for a medium weight line, and the pattern lines could be changed to red for a thin line.
Relinking Layout Views

You can reestablish or change the file that a Layout View is linked to by selecting the view and choosing Tools> Layout> Relink File, or by clicking the Relink File edit button. The Choose Layout File Reference dialog will open. Select the file that you want to link to. If you want to relink all references to this file then use the Layout Files dialog. For more information, see Finding Missing Files on page 825.
Finding Missing Files

Plan Views, CAD Details, and Section/ Elevations are all dynamically linked to the layout file. When a layout file is opened, it looks for all linked files in the following order:
825
Layout
Pen plotters use the line color to define which pen is used.
1.
Files of the same name which are in the same directory or subdirectories as the layout being opened. If it cannot find them there, it then looks for;
2.
Files of the same name in the original directory from which the files were sent to the layout.
If it still cannot find files of the same name as those originally sent to the layout, the following dialog opens.
Layout Files Dialog
1 3 2
These files have been successfully found and the link to the layout is intact. Browse - Select a file and click Browse to replace to replace the selected file with another.
1 List of the Files present in layout.
instead type the entire path and file name to the correct plan. Browse - Select a file and click Browse to replace to replace the selected file with another. Do not click OK or press the Enter key until all the missing files have been redefined. (If you do, you have to choose Tools> Layout> Layout files to continue redefining the missing files.)
2 List of Files NOT FOUND in layout. Files of this name could not be found in the same directory or subdirectories as the layout, nor could they be found in the original directory (if different). At this point, user intervention is required to find these files and so the link may be reestablished. 3 Select a Files NOT FOUND in layout and click the Browse button find the file in the directory structure. You may
Results of Missing Files

If all replacement files are correctly redefined, the layout will open when you click OK.
826
Printing Layout Files
If an error message appears, one or more of the missing files could not be replaced by the redefined file. Click OK to continue. The layout opens, but with the following characteristics: 1. Any Plan Views or CAD Detail views relating to the missing file(s) are totally blank. Only the border displays. Any elevations or cross sections from the missing file(s) display the automatically generated lines, but any details added using the CAD facility are missing.
accounted for, there is not a bottom section listing missing files. If any files are missing the lower section displays, listing each missing file by full pathname. Click on each missing file in turn, typing in the full pathname or locate it using the Browse button. When you are done, click OK. Be sure to choose File> Save when the missing files have been restored to save the new path names. Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files again to double-check that all files have been found. If some are still missing, repeat the process. If there are some files that are lost and no longer needed, you can delete the view borders representing the missing files.
2.
Finding Files from an Opened Layout

Choose Tools> Layout> Layout files, the Layout Files dialog opens. If all files are

Text and dimensions do not always print exactly as they appear on screen. One way to get a better idea of how they will print is to zoom in. A table has been prepared to help you determine what size your text and dimensions should be set for printing purposes. See, Printing Text and Dimensions on page 837.
827
Layout
1 5 6 7 3 8 9 4
When the layout file is active select File> Print> Print and the Layout Printing dialog opens. Specify the percentage of the printable area to use. Print to scale - Prints the image on the paper, at the scales you specified in each layout window.
1 The printer must be defined before a layout sheet is created. Once it is created, the layout is linked to the printer. If you attempt to open the layout file when a different printer is set as the default, you get a warning. The warning allows you to Continue or to Scale Layout to Fit Printer. (See Changing Printer from Layout below.) 2 Print Range - Define range of pages to
print. sheet onto the sheet of paper. The architectural scales may be incorrect, but you are able to read most of the information and check layout problems.
4 Height Scaling/Width Scaling

Adjust the ratio of height and width if needed. This is how you recalibrate your printer if it is not accurate. This is typically used with a dot matrix printer, where the print may not be proportional. This is easily checked by printing a 1" square and measuring the print to see if it measures out exactly 1" square. If it does not, you can use the Height Scaling and the Width Scaling to adjust it until the print measures what it should.
3 Full Page (no scale)- Fits the layout
828
send the print to a file. This is used for remote printing and or batch printing. It creates a print file that you can take to a service bureau. They can then print your Chief Architect files, even if they do not have Chief Architect. Give the file a .PLT or .PRN extension.
5 Print to File - Select the check box to
Current Screen prints the view displayed on screen, including white space around the plan. Entire Plan/View - Prints the complete view as if you used the Fill Screen command even if you are zoomed in on a portion.
Changing Printer from Layout

When you create a layout file, it is created based on the default printer. If you are trying to print the final documents at the correct scale, make sure that the correct printer and configuration is set up before opening the layout file. If you attempt to open a layout file when a different printer is set as default, you get a warning. The warning allows you to Continue or to Scale Layout to Fit Printer. Select Scale Layout to Fit Printer only if you wish to reset the paper size for the final prints. Select Continue to open the layout file without changing the paper size, allowing you to print check plots on different size paper. The drawing rescales proportionally to fit the sheet. If you intend to print final plots, make sure the proper printer is configured before the layout file is printed.
colors on the screen. If you would like your printed output to look like your screen, check this box. If you want all lines, text, and fills to be black, uncheck the Color option. In layout, the 3D views are line drawings only. You may define the color of the lines which make up the 3D view. CAD objects may also be filled, or hatched with color if desired. If printing to a black & white printer, this option says Shaded. Check Shaded to print in gray scale. The colors are represented as shades of gray. to have True Type text and dimension numbers drawn as outlines. If you are using a pen plotter you may be unable to print solid filled True Type fonts, such as Arial. If Use Outline Printing is selected when printing to a regular printer, the text objects
6 Define number of Copies (if available). 7 Color - Lines can be drawn in many
8 Use Outline Printing - Check this box
829
Layout
Here is a common fix with a dot matrix printer, where the print may not be proportional. This is easily checked by printing a four foot square at 1/4 = 1-0 and measuring the print to see if it measures out exactly 1" square. If it does not, you can use the Height Scaling and the Width Scaling to adjust it until the print scales accurately.
and dimension numbers appear as outlines, they are not filled in with a solid color (normally black). If you are still having difficulty printing fonts on your pen plotter, try using a single pixel plotter font such as Modern.
9 Select Entire Plan or Current Screen.
Exporting Layout Files

Layout files can be exported just like any other view. The main difference is in the scale of the output. The output is in paper units rather than model units. If a line would be 1 inch on paper it will be exported as a 1 inch line instead of what the model might be. For more information, see Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files on page 780.
Layout & Printer Relationship

Each layout is created to fit a specific printer, specific paper size, and a specific paper orientation, all of which are defined prior to creating that layout. The borders, title blocks and views are all designed for that specific setup. This information is saved with the layout. Whenever a saved layout is opened, these three pieces of information are compared to the current printer setup.
Check Plots
Before making any plots configure the File> Printer Setup for the printer, paper size and paper orientation that you intend to use. Once the printer has been configured, choose File> Open Layout, then browse to the directory where the layout file was saved, select the desired layout file, and click OK. If the printer, paper size or paper orientation is different from the setting when the layout was originally created, the following warning appears:
Choose Continue to leave the layout as it was originally created. The layout file opens, maintaining the original printer settings, but temporarily resizing to fit the page whenever layout is printed. If the current settings have a smaller printable area, the pages are scaled down to fit on the paper. The prints can be used to check everything except the actual scale.
For example, assume the layout file was created for an HP DesignJet 220 plotter, for D size paper (24" x 36") and landscape orientation. The current printer is configured for an HP LaserJet 4, A size (8 x 11"), landscape orientation. Opening the layout file triggers the warning message. Choosing Continue opens the layout and temporarily scales the page to the HP LaserJet 4 on 8 x 11" paper. When
830
Layout & Printer Relationship
you are ready for full size sheets, close the layout file and reset your current printer to the HP DesignJet 220. When you reopen the layout file, it opens without a warning and the scale of the views are accurate. Scale Layout - Click this button to change the layout file to match the current printer. Your Layout View scales will be retained, but the blue border that you see may be a different size. You may need to adjust the views to fit on the paper. For more, see "Changing Plotter for Final Plots".
sheet edges to match the current printer settings. You then need to go to each layout page and make any changes necessary because of the modified layout page border definition. If you accidentally choose Scale Layout to fit printer but did not want to change the layout, immediately close the layout without saving. This discards the modification of the border definition, leaving it as it was originally.
Final Plots
Before you print final plots, configure the correct printer with the page configuration which was used to create the layout file. Once the printer has been configured, open the layout file. The layout opens without the warning message. Proceed for the final plots. If the warning message does appear, choose Continue to open the layout file, then immediately close it. Choose File> Print Setup to reconfigure the printer to match the layouts original settings. Then open the layout again. If no warning message appears this time, continue with the plotting.
Printing
The correct printer must be established before a layout sheet is created or an existing layout is opened. Once a layout is open, neither the printer type nor any of the printer properties should be changed. If a layout is opened and the wrong printer is selected, close the layout, change the printer (using File> Printer Setup) and then reopen the layout again. Printing from the layout with Full Page (no scale) selected results in the layout being printed to the current printer with each layout page fit to the printable area. It is not to scale, but the proportions and layout are correct. Choosing Print to Scale results in a scaled print, no matter what the sheet size. If the layout is set for a D size (22" x 34") page and it is printed to an A size (8 x 11") page with Print to Scale selected, as much of the sheet as possible is printed at full scale to the smaller sheet, starting at the upper left corner of the page. Since it takes four A size pages to make one D size page, the upper left fourth of the sheet would be printed to scale onto the A size page. This printing option is rarely used, since only the upper left section prints.
Changing Printer for Final Plots

If the layout was configured for one printer but you are printing the final plots to a another, it is important to have the layout changed to match the new printer. Before opening the layout, choose File> Printer Setup and configure the correct printer for the final plots. Then open the layout. When the warning message appears, choose Scale Layout. This modifies the blue layout
831
Layout
832
Chapter 37:
Printing & Plotting
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can print directly from any Plan View, 3D view or layout sheet to almost any printer or plotter which supports printing graphics from Windows programs. Printers and plotters vary widely in how well they function. Often, solving a problem is as simple as installing newer print drivers downloaded from the Internet. Sometimes a faulty cable can be a problem. Other times, the plotter demands the paper be loaded in a different orientation. Keep the Owners Manual for your printer or plotter close at hand. Write inside the Owners Manual the various phone numbers for technical support for that printer or plotter for the original manufacturer as well as for your local dealer.
Screen captures are provided for illustrative purposes only and are not an endorsement of any products. Many options available with one driver may not be available with another. Printers and plotters supported in one version of windows may not be supported by the manufacturer in another.
Chapter Contents
The Different Types of Printers and Plotters Printing Options Setting up the Printer Testing the Printer Printing Text and Dimensions Printing Directly from a View Printing from Layout Print Image Printing to Scale Printing Across Multiple Pages Printing Color or Black and White Line Weights Printing to a File Printing to a Remote Plotter
833
Printing
The Different Types of Printers and Plotters

There are many different types of printers and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller, normally outputting 8 x11 (Letter or A size), 8x14 (Legal Size) or sometimes as large as 11x17 (Tabloid or B size). Plotters are typically used to output larger sheets of paper such as 17x22 (C size), 22x34 (D size) or 34x44 (E size). Laser Printers use a dry toner, similar to a copier. These produce crisp, clean lines at high resolutions and are commonly available for black and white prints up to 11x17 in size. Laser Plotters are available, but the cost is still quite high. Ink Jet Printers use a liquid ink which is sprayed on the paper through tiny jets. These printers are usually letter or legal size, but some hold 11x17 or 17x22 size paper. Ink Jet Plotters uses the same technology as Ink Jet printers, but print larger size sheets. Single color (black) or full color plotters are also available. Pen Plotters utilize actual pens to produce the drawing. Since each line must be drawn individually, pen plotters take the longest time to plot. Pen plotters draw lines only, so a shaded wall will not be filled in. If a line thickness of three is specified (as walls often are), the pen actually makes three passes for that line. Line color is often used instead of line weight to define which pen is to be used. If you are using a pen plotter you will want to set all of your line thicknesses to one, and configure your plotter to change to pens of different weights depending on the color of the line in Chief Architect. It is up to the user to properly specify this information when setting up the printer and configuring it for Chief Architect.
Print Drivers
Print driver programs are basically interpreters between a software program and the printer. The drivers are usually created by the manufacturer of the printer and may be updated regularly. Different drivers are used for different versions of Windows. It is useful to keep track of the drivers for each printer or plotter, making sure to update them whenever the Windows operating system is changed. Choose Start> Settings> Printers to display the Printers information for Windows. Select the printer in question, then choose File> Properties. Somewhere in the Printer Properties dialog should be a button called About. Click this button to find the version and creation date of the driver currently being used. If this is not the latest driver, it should be replaced.
If you are using a printing service, it is important to have the same version of the printer driver that they use installed on your system.
Windows provides information on installing print drivers. To access Windows help, choose Start> Help. If you have problems installing a print driver, refer to your printer documentation for technical support.
834
Printing Options
Printing Options
Items must be displayed for them to print, but not all items displayed in a plan will print. The Reference Plan, the camera symbols, and the blue border showing the layout sheet do not print. All printing options are accessed from the File menu.
Printing Direct
The current view can be printed directly by selecting File> Print. Render Views can be printed using the File> Print Image option. If the printer supports it, scaled views (Plans, Section/Elevations) can be printed at a specified scale across multiple pages. Crop marks are printed, showing where to reassemble the pages. Line color in 3D views is always black.
The current view may be printed directly to a printer, or first sent to layout and printed from there. Print - Prints the current view or layout sheet to the default printer or plotter. Print Image - Prints a screen view including images, textures and backdrops. Print Model - Opens the Print Model dialog which allows you to print plan templates for making a physical model of your plan. Printer Setup - Opens a Windows dialog box which allows you to select and set up the default printer for direct printing. This printers settings are used for the creation of layout sheets. If you are using an NT based Windows operating system such as Windows NT or Windows 2000, you must change your printer properties by going to Start> Settings> Printers.
Printing from Layout

Layout sheets can be created to print traditional working drawings. Layout sheets can accomodate a border and title block which is consistent across all sheets of the layout. Multiple views, at different scales, can be sent to each page and organized as desired. The layout sheets can be printed on the media that they were originally created for, or printed on smaller media for check plots. No shading of 3D views is available on Layout sheets, but the line color of 3D views is definable. A layout sheet which is larger than the current paper size cannot be printed at full scale across multiple pages.
835
Printing
Setting up the Printer

Before printing or creating a layout sheet, the printer or plotter needs to be selected and the paper size and orientation defined. The printer driver must be installed correctly and the printer must be functioning properly. Configuring a printer is a Windows operation and not a Chief Architect function. See your printer manual for more information. When the printer is configured, click OK. Chief Architect assumes the paper size, margin settings, print quality, and paper orientation from your Windows settings.
Print Setup
Choose File> Print Setup from any view to access the Print Setup dialog. A complete list of printers and plotters that are currently installed on your system displays. Click the desired printer or plotter to highlight it, then click the Setup button to configure it.
Paper Orientation
Most printers allow both a portrait and a landscape orientation. Portrait mode is taller than it is wide, and landscape mode is wider than it is tall. Landscape orientation is the most common paper orientation for working drawings. Plotters can often have the paper inserted into the machine in either of the two orientations. Test your own machine, and refer to the printer manual to find out which way to insert the paper for correct results.
This is not supported in all versions of windows. You can also configure a printer from the control panel in windows. If you select a new printer in the Control Panel, Chief Architect uses the new printer.
Always familiarize yourself with your printer or plotter before a deadline. It may take a little time to configure the machine properly when you first start.
Testing the Printer

When setting up a printer for the first time, make sure that the test page prints properly. There is usually a Print Test Page button available in the Printer Properties dialog for that printer. If the test page prints properly, try printing from Chief Architect. If there is a printing problem, make sure that you can print from a graphics program such Windows Paint. If there is a problem printing the test page or printing from a different graphics program,
836
Printing Text and Dimensions
the printing problem is unrelated to Chief Architect. Make sure that the latest printer drivers are installed, then solve the printing problem for the other programs. Once the
printer prints properly from the other graphics programs, it should print from Chief Architect.
Printing Text and Dimensions

Text does not always print exactly as it appears on screen. One way to get a better idea of how text will print is to zoom in on it. This problem is more likely to occur when the font used by the printer is different than the font used on screen. Consult your printer documentation for more information on font substitution. Also, see Fonts on page 657. The following tables should help you determine the correct character height.
D " = 1' 1" " 3/8" " 1/8" 1" " 3/8" " 1/8" 24 12 9 6 3 16 8 6 4 2
" = 1'
Imperial Plans
Plan Scale in Layout Number or Dimension Text Print Dialog Box Height
1/8" = 1
" = 1'
3/8" = 1'
1" " 3/8" " 1/8" 1" " 3/8" " 1/8" 1" " 3/8" " 1/8"
96 48 36 24 12 48 24 18 12 6 36 18 12 8 4
Using the Printing Text and Number Table can be accomplished quickly and easily. If, for example, you would like to send a drawing to a layout at a scale of 1/8"=1' look at Row A. When reading the table from left to right, you will see that Row A defines a scale of 1/8"=1' in the Plan Scale in Layout column. In Row A several options for text size are listed in the Number or Text Print Height column: 1", 1/2", 3/8", 1/4" and 1/8". If you would like the text in your layout to be 1/8" high, you will need to set the text height in the drawing to 12, (12 is the number listed just to the right of 1/8", in the Dimension Defaults Dialog Box column). To set the text at that height, select Edit>Preferences to open the Preferences dialog, go to the Appearance panel and select Text Objects. To the right you will see a Text Attributes box, and within it a Character Height field. Erase the default value of 4 and type in a new value of
837
Printing
12. The text height of your drawing will not change in Plan View. However, the text height in Layout will change to 1/8". Dimension height will also need to be set at 12 to make it 1/8" high in layout. Dimension height can be set universally at a height of 12 by clicking Edit> Default Settings> Dimension Defaults. This will produce a Dimension Defaults window. In the Setup tab, erase the default value of 5 for Number Height and enter a new Number Height of 12. Once you click the OK button, the dimension text in plan view will change to 12. Dimensions, when sent to layout, will also appear at 1/8" high.
This method is very effective for resizing text that is part of a CAD Block or text that remains at the default text height. However, this method will not work when the character height has been set in the Text Specification dialog.
By using the Printing Text and Number Table, then, you can set the text height precisely in the layout by making a few simple adjustments in the drawing.
Metric Plans
Plan Scale in Layout Number or Text Print Height Dimension Dialog Box
1/8" scale
" scale
3/8" scale
In a second example, you might choose to send a drawing to a layout at 1/4"=1', so you will want to look at Row B. Row B lists a scale of 1/4"=1'. If you wanted the text to be 1" high in the layout, you will need to set the text and dimension height to a value of 48. If you wanted the text to be 1/2" high in the layout, you will need to set the text and dimension height in the drawing to 24, using the methods outlined above.
It is important to understand that different fonts may introduce slight variations in text height. When conducting your own printing tests to determine optimal text height in a Layout, we recommend a non true-type font such as Modern.fon.
" scale
" scale
25.4 mm 12.7 mm 9.525 mm 6.35 mm 3.175 mm 25.4 mm 12.7 mm 9.525 mm 6.35 mm 3.175 mm 35.4 mm 12.7 mm 9.525 mm 6.35 mm 3.175 mm 25.4 mm 12.7 mm 9.525 mm 6.35 mm 3.175 mm 25.4 mm 12.7 mm 9.525 mm 6.35 mm 3.175 mm
96 48 36 24 12 48 24 18 12 6 36 18 12 8 4 24 12 9 6 3 16 8 6 4 2
The above table is a metric equivalent of the imperial dimensioning system.
838
Printing Directly from a View
Printing Directly from a View

1 2 3
6 Printing 839 7
4 5
Direct printing can be used with any printer and any sized paper. To print directly from any Plan, Perspective Section/Elevation or Overview, choose File> Print. The Print dialog opens.
Render Views can only be printed with the File> Print Image command.
8 9
The Print Range is not available, since this option is only available from a Layout file.
4 Scaling - Choose the scaling.

Full Page (no scale) prints the selected portion on the page with no scale applied. If you define a percentage less than 100, only a portion of the printable area is used. If you select Full Page (no scale) and Current Screen you cannot adjust the percentage. To Scale -Use these fields to define the exact scale at which the image prints. Chief Architect can work to a precision of 1/16th of an inch. If you want to define a scale of 3/32 = 1-0 you need to specify 3/16 = 20. the accuracy of your printed documents with a scale. If your scaled documents are
that the printer is configured correctly. The paper size, orientation, and other settings are accessed here. send the print to a file for remote printing. When you click OK, you will be prompted to give the print file a name. Browse to the correct directory and name the file. Be sure to give the file a .prn extension.
1 Name - Choose a printer. 2 Properties - Click Properties to verify
3 Print to file - Select the check box to
5 Height/Width Scaling - You can check
not correct you can fine tune or calibrate the printer with these adjustments. Check printer calibration by printing a four foot square at 1/4 = 1-0 and measuring the print to see if it measures out exactly 1" square. Adjust the ratio of height and width if needed.
If Use Outline Printing is selected when printing to a regular printer, only the outlines of text objects and dimension numbers print. If you are using a pen plotter you may be unable to print solid filled True Type fonts (such as Arial, etc.), so this option gives you an outline font solution. If you are still having difficulty printing fonts on your pen plotter, try using a single pixel plotter font such as Modern. Select one of the options to define what is printed. Current Screen prints only the portion of the entire View showing on screen. Entire Plan/View prints the complete view as if you used the Fill Screen command even if you are currently zoomed in on a portion of the view.
6 Copies - Define the number of copies

(if available). or grayscale. Clear the check box if you want all lines and text to be black. If you are using solid fills, any fill color will print as black also. This option is available from layout files as well. check box to have True Type text and dimension numbers drawn as outlines.
7 Color - Check this box to print in color
9 Current Screen or Entire Plan/View -
8 Use Outline Printing - Select the
Printing from Layout

The Layout Facility consists of up to 199 layout sheets which match the current printer size and orientation. These sheets can be developed into working drawings, complete with border, title block, multiple views, etc. Printing from Layout is discussed in detail in the following chapter, see Printing Layout Files on page 827.
Print Image
Any view can be printed using the File> Print Image command. This is the only way to print a Render View or Raytrace View. The Print Image dialog is identical to the Print dialog, but the printing process is different. Print Image prints individual pixels as opposed to vectors.
840
Printing to Scale
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are available. Select Full Page to print the Entire Plan/ View or the Current Screen as large as possible on the page. This does not print at an accurate scale. It is the only option allowed when printing a Perspective or Over View. Full Page is normally set to 100%. If Full Page and Entire Plan/View are selected, a percent value is definable. This percent defines how much of the printed page to fill. It is a percentage of the sheet dimensions. A value of 50% would cause the print to be 50% of the height and 50% of the width of the paper. If printing to an 8x11 page, and assuming a total of 1" nonprintable border in each direction, 100% would print 7x10, and Full Page 50% would print 3x5. (Each printer may vary slightly depending on its own printing parameters.) There are certain items which are not recognized when sizing the view to fill the page (such as markers, electrical connections, etc.) which can be cut off when printing at 100%. This situation can be avoided by clicking Fill Window or F6 and noting if any items are cut off by the edges of the window. If so, reduce the percentage slightly so that everything prints. Plan Views, Wall Elevations, Section/ Elevations Views, and CAD Detail windows can print to scale. Imperial scales are typically noted as inches per foot. You can use a fraction with a denominator less than or equal to 16. 1/16, 1/8/ 1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 are some typical scales. The second edit box usually contains a 1, for one foot. The following example:
indicates inch to one foot scaling. Since Chief Architect cannot work in units less than 1/16th, 32 cannot be used as a denominator. To get 3/32 = 1-0, you must enter 3/16 = 2-0. Using this method, any scale is possible. Large scales may also be used for property layouts, such as 1 inch = 50 feet.
Metric Scales
Only one edit box is provided for metric scaling. To get 1 cm = 1 meter scaling, enter 100 in the mm box. When printing the Plan View of an entire house at 1/4 scale on to 8x11 paper, more than one sheet may be required. Chief can tile these sheets if your printer driver supports printing across multiple pages.
841
Printing
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Recommendation to switch paper orientation.
Fewest number of pages.
When printing directly from a Plan or Elevation/Section View, it is possible to print to a scale which does not fit the image on one page. If your printer driver supports it, Chief Architect can print the image on multiple sheets to make up the entire image. When this happens, some overlap occurs on each page to allow for a smooth tiling of the pages. Small crop marks also print on each sheet to help reassemble the printed view. If multiple sheets are necessary, the dialog states how many sheets are necessary at that
scale. If fewer pages can be used by changing the paper orientation, the system prompts you to change orientation. If you are zoomed out, and Current Screen is selected, any white space around the plan is calculated for printing. This may force multiple sheets when the actual plan would print to a single sheet if Entire Plan/View were selected. You cannot print a layout sheet to multiple pages.
Printing Color or Black and White

The Print dialog contains a check box for Color. If Color is checked, the view prints in color on a color printer, or in grayscale for a black and white printer. If a 3D view is being printed, the shading prints in addition to the delineation lines. The exception to this is a pen plotter, which never prints the 3D shading. If Color is unchecked when printing a 3D view all lines print as black, and no 3D shading prints.
Line Weights
Line weight is specified by the program in number of pixels. Pixels are expressed as dots by printers, as in dots per inch (dpi). 300 dpi, 600 dpi, and 1200 dpi printers all print different sized pixels. You can have your current line weight settings display on screen by turning on the Show Line Weight option in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Appearance Panel on page 90. To see how your printer prints line weights, draw ten lines, each with a different line weight and see how they print.
842
Printing to a File
The appearance of dashed lines can be controlled in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Line Properties Panel on page 111.
3D View Line Weights
Defining Line Weight

Line Weight is specified in pixels. Pixel size varies from printer to printer. You can specify a pixel width from 1 to 15. The method for changing the Line Weight of items is dependent on the type of view.
2.
When 3D views are sent to Layout, there is a separate line weight for pattern lines and a line weight for object lines. For more information, see Editing Layout on page 822. CAD object line weights are defined by Layer in the Layer Display Options dialog for each Cross Section/Elevation View, unless the CAD object is defined individually.
3.
Line Weight - Specify the Line Weight for all lines defining the edges of 3D items. This is a global setting for all edges. Individual lines, other than CAD lines superimposed on the image, cannot be defined with different line weights. To modify individual lines, the 3D view must first be sent to layout. To edit a line once the 3D view has been sent to layout, select Edit> Edit Layout, and then select the line to be modified.
Printing to a File
If you do not own a plotter you may print to a file, send the file to a service bureau via email or disk, and have prints made. The process is quite simple. 1. Find out the exact make and model of the plotter which is to be used to print your drawings. 2. Get the driver for the specific plotter and your version of Windows that your print service is using. Install the drivers for that plotter on your computer and configure it as a printer in the Control Panel. Change the port to be File instead of sending the information to a parallel or serial port.
3.
843
Printing
1.
When printing a Plan View, all line weights are defined by Layer, unless an individual object has a specified line weight. Walls have their line weight defined in the Wall Specification dialog.
4.
Test to make sure that everything is configured properly and functioning. Create print files of a simple plan and send them to the service bureau for printing. 5.
Once everything is configured properly, remote printing is a straightforward process. Remote printing is usually done from layout. The following instructions are based on that assumption. Remote printing from a view works exactly the same way. 1. Before opening the layout, choose File> Print Setup. Select the remote plotter. Make sure all properties such as paper size, paper orientation, etc. are properly defined. Open the layout file. If the layout was properly created for that plotter, and if the plotter was configured before opening the layout, there will be no Layout error message.
the .prn extension. The program does not automatically add this. Take careful note of the name and the directory location where the file is to be saved. Click OK. The print file is created with the name you specified in the directory you defined.
6.
2.
Repeat the process starting at step 3, for each layout sheet, until you have created a print file for each sheet. Each sheet must have a unique name. If you use the same name twice, one file is overwritten. Take the disk to the service bureau which has the specified plotter, or transfer the file electronically. At the service bureau, have the technician insert your disk into the computer which is directly attached to the plotter. He may copy the files to the computer first, or he may plot directly from the disk. Wherever the files are located, the technician needs to go to the MS DOS prompt and type: COPY path\filename port /B where path defines the location of the files filename is the exact name of the file, including its extension, and port defines the actual printer port that the plotter is attached to. For example, if the file is called JOHNL1.PRN located in the root directory of
7.
Note: If the "Layout Does Not Fit Printer" Error message appears, choose Continue to open the layout. Then find out whether the message occurred because the printer was not set correctly or the layout was created for different printer settings. Fix the problem, and try again.
8.
3.
Go to the first layout page to be printed. Choose File> Print. In the Print dialog Make sure that Print to File is checked and Copies set to 1. If there is any problem printing more than one page at a time, select Current Page under Page Range. Scaling should be Print to Scale. Entire Plan/View should also be selected. Click OK. The Print to File dialog opens. Give the print file a name making sure to add
4.
844
Printing to a Remote Plotter
the floppy disk in the A:\ drive, and the plotter is attached to the LPT1 port, the technician would type the following at the MS DOS prompt: COPY A:\JOHN-L1.PRN LPT1 /B
9.
The file should print. If everything checks out OK, repeat the sequence beginning with step 8 for each additional file, making sure to change the filename each time.

You must be familiar with MS/DOS commands to send a plot file to your plotter. In DOS, enter copy filename.prn lpt1 /b, to send a plot file to the printer. Filename.prn is the name or your plot file. Lpt1 is the printer port for your current printer. Copy and /B are DOS commands that you need to include when sending a file to a remote printer. Learn the method by practicing the technique with a printer you own. Instead of printing directly to that printer, practice printing to a file and copying that file to the port for the printer. When you understand the process itself, it is easy to apply it for large plots. Always run tests on the plotter before you need the final prints. This allows you to perfect the technique. If the plotter is attached through a network system, there may be problems sending the file to the plotter. Try to plot from the computer which is hooked directly to the plotter.
845
Printing
846
Chapter 38:
Model Maker
Chapter Overview
The Model Maker allows you to create a template of your plan that can be printed to scale and assembled into an actual 3D model. Three groups of templates are used in the process. Walls and roofs are printed separately. These can then be placed onto a Plan View, which is printed as a layout for the entire model. Since different people will build house models in different ways, the Model Maker focuses on providing the most necessary tools. It may not necessarily give you everything you might want in order to build house models your way. For example, you may wish to affix tabs to certain wall or roof edges to help attach them to their neighbors. While you can draw some of these things onto printed sheets, the system does not provide them automatically. What it does provide is accurate templates for wall and roof sections. Combining these with your own skills will help you create professional quality models.
Chapter Contents
Printing the Model Assembling the Model
Printing the Model

The best way to understand how the various options affect the final product is to make a very simple two story plan and try them out. To print the model templates, choose File> Print> Print Model. The Print Model dialog will open.
847
Model Maker
The Print Model Dialog 1
3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 11
10 12 13
14
model. Larger sheet sizes are better. Landscape is usually the best mode for printing models. If it is not your default printing mode, it can be selected via the Properties button. printer and its current setup display here. Check this box if you prefer to Print to File instead.
1 Printer - Select the printer for your
2 Printer Info - Information about your
to print the interior surface of a wall above its corresponding exterior surface and upside down. This allows both walls to be cut in one piece and folded over. This is convenient when making a separate model for each floor to show its interior. print together the exterior surfaces of walls that are on top of each other. Interior surfaces of those walls will still print separately. Allow Offset - This modifies the outcome of the Combine Floors Option. Normally the main layers of stacked walls must be closely aligned and have the same thickness for walls to combine. Check this box to allow an offset of up to six inches (15 cm) and allow different thicknesses.
5 Fold Interior Down - Check this box
6 Combine Floors - Check this box to
3 Walls - Clear the check box to suppress

walls from printing. suppress interior wall surfaces. Normally it is only the exterior walls that appear in a model. If interior walls and surfaces are produced, much more paper will be required. Interior surfaces are typically printed when composing a model of only the current floor, without a roof.
4 Exterior Only - Check this box to
7 Railings - Check this box to print

railings along with walls.
848
Assembling the Model
Check this box to include Outdoor Walls and/or Foundation Walls in the walls group. This will also affect which walls appear in the Plan View template. Outdoor Walls - An Outdoor wall is normally a garden wall or a wall used as a fence. It may be a No Room Def. type wall, see The Wall Specification Dialog on page 172, or have exterior type rooms, such as Court, Deck, Porch, or Attic on both sides of it. If there are extensive outdoor walls, printing them all may use a considerable amount of paper. Foundation Walls - Walls on floor zero, the foundation floor, will still print if they are not marked as foundation walls in the first or third tab of the Wall Specification dialog. For more information, see The Wall Specification Dialog on page 172.
8 Outdoor Walls/Foundation Walls -
in inches per feet. A simple ratio (1:48 for example) is used for metric plans. The system will arrange as many wall sections or roof sections as possible onto a single sheet. For larger scale models a printer with a larger sheet size can be helpful. If any wall surface, roof surface, or Plan View covers more than a sheet, it will print by itself on the number of sheets required. Models with large surfaces may require a lot of paper. check from box to print walls to the width specified in the edit box, ignoring the scale width. The walls of your plan will temporarily resize so that their interior and exterior surfaces accurately match the materials with which they will be modeled. These changes can be most readily seen when the Plan View of your model template is printed. Changing the wall thickness is useful when producing a model with an interior using material of the specified thickness for walls. thickness of the material you will use for the floor platform. appearing here will depend on if you have a color printer or not. Check this box to print in grey scale or color.
11 Scale - Specify the scale to be printed
12 Use Scale Wall Thickness - Remove
Roofs - Remove check from box to suppress roofs from printing.
Plan View Instructions - Remove check from box to suppress Plan View instructions from printing.
13 Floor Thickness - Specify the
10 Copies - Use the spin box to specify the

number of copies to be printed.
14 Shaded/Color - This selection
Assembling the Model

Once the templates have been printed they are ready to be assembled. You will need scissors and an adhesive. You will also need a rigid material that can be easily cut and glued, such as thin cardboard or styrofoam, to provide support for the 3D model.
849
Model Maker
Plan View Template

Begin by laying out the Plan View, which will be used as a layout for the entire 3D model. If your Plan View template printed on a number of sheets they should be combined into one. Exterior and interior wall surfaces should match throughout. Adhere your complete Plan View template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to provide support for your walls.
between floors that should merge together seamlessly. This is usually due to walls whose exterior surfaces match but overall thickness does not. You can prevent this by checking Use Scale Wall Thickness, which prevents walls from resizing. This is best if you do not wish to print the interior wall surfaces, or are using a modeling material that closely matches the scale thickness of your walls.
Roofs
Roof planes are joined together when possible before printing. For each roof surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are attached at the eave, so that the least amount of taping will produce the roof and adjoining surfaces. All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are placed into a CAD detail named "Model Detail". This is overwritten and updated each time the roof group is printed for a particular model. If the roof or portions of the roof need to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed from the detail.
Walls
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid backing so that they can stand on their own and/or support the weight of the roof or floors above them. How they are cut and assembled will vary depending on the desired appearance of the Model and how they were printed. It may be helpful to take the thickness of the rigid material being used into consideration and override the scale thickness of the walls so that it agrees with your material thickness. If your walls were resized in the Print Model dialog you may see unwanted lines
850
Chapter 39:
Schedules
Chapter Overview
A schedule is essentially a large, tabbed, text object with grid lines separating rows and columns. Schedules are available for Doors, Windows, Fixture, Furniture, and Electrical items. A schedule can contain information for one or all floors of your plan. Once created, the schedule is updated automatically whenever an object is created, deleted, moved or otherwise altered.
Chapter Contents
Schedule Defaults Creating Schedules Schedule Specification Dialog Converting Schedules to Text A Window Schedule Example
Schedule Defaults
Each schedule type can have default values set which are used when creating a schedule. Schedule defaults are accessed by double clicking on the Schedule parent button and selecting the schedule type that you wish to set defaults for. You can also select Edit> Default Settings> Schedule Defaults> from the menu. The Schedule Defaults dialog(s) look the same as the Schedule Specification dialog(s). The settings in the Schedule Defaults dialog determines the initial settings in the Schedule Specification dialog(s). Individual schedules can be edited. Changes made to individual schedules after
851
Schedules
they have been created will not alter the default settings. For more information about these settings, see Schedule Specification Dialog on page 852.
The defaults are stored with your plan. You can create a template plan with these defaults set the way you like for future use. For more information, see Template Files on page 72.
Creating Schedules
Schedules can be created in Plan View and in CAD Detail windows. Schedule Specification Dialog on page 852. When you have closed the Schedule Specification dialog the schedule you have just created will appear.
In Plan View
Create a schedule by clicking one of the Schedule Tools child buttons or by selecting one of the corresponding options from the Tools> Schedules menu. The Schedule Specification dialog displays, allowing you to control how the schedule will appear. For more information, see
In Layout
Schedules can be placed in plans or CAD details. If you want only a schedule in a layout, then create the schedule in an empty CAD detail window and send it to layout.
Schedule Specification Dialog

Schedules can be edited in the Schedule Specification dialog. To open the Schedule Specification dialog for a schedule you can either select the schedule and click the Open Object edit button or double click on the schedule itself in Select Objects mode.
852
Text Tab
5 6
2 4
box for each column you wish to appear in the schedule. At least one column must be checked to create a schedule. Columns will display in their order of appearance on this list. Columns may be added or removed at any time by selecting the schedule, clicking the Open Object edit button, and selecting or clearing check boxes. Many of the columns that are described in the following are available only for some of the schedule types.
The Number and Qty columns are unique in that you may choose to display them on either or both ends of a schedule.
1 Columns to Include - Select the check
number may also be used as all or part of the objects label. Qty - Quantity of the items represented by the row. These items match as far as the displayed columns show, but may differ if other columns are added to the schedule. For example, if the schedule only listed the Number, Quantity and Floor, all the windows on that floor would appear with the same schedule number, even though the windows might be different sizes and types. But the schedule does not show enough information to distinguish them (although the labels might).
Number - This is the sequence of this schedule entry. (For example, one window will be defined as W01, and the rest of the windows will be labeled sequentially.) This
853
Schedules
By simply displaying one more column, the two windows are separated by the schedule. Size would have also worked. Be careful to have sufficient columns to distinguish the objects. A 3040 fixed glass window is not the same as a 3040 arch top window, but it may appear to be the same in the schedule if Description is not displayed. Floor - Displays the floor for each item in the schedule. This column is usually needed only if the check box for All Floors is selected. Size - Displays the window or door size in feet-inches (mm) according to the format defined on the Label tab. A 3640 window means it is 36"x40", with the dimension order being defined on the Label tab. Size does not show the units. They are implied. Dimension - Displays the dimension of the opening, including the units, in the format Width x Height. This is an alternate method to display the size of an opening, and typically only one method (Size or Dimension) is used in a schedule. If Include Type is selected in the Label tab, the dimension will be followed by letters giving the object type. Width - Lists the width of an item. Depth - Lists the depth of an item. Height - Lists the height of an item. R/O - Lists the rough opening size. Attached To - For electrical schedules indicates what the electrical item is attached to. Description - Displays the general description of the object. This is the same as that which appears in the Components dialog Item column. It includes the type
(double hung or ext., hinged), and indicators such as "ct" (circle top) or "at" (arched top), and materials, if specified in the Components dialog of the objects specification dialog. Drawer Pull - Lists the name of any attached drawer pull hardware. Door Pull - Lists the name of any attached door pull hardware. Hinge - Lists the name of any attached hinge. Header - Displays the dimensions and quantity of header stock for each item. Thickness - Displays the door thickness. This is available for door schedules only. Code - Lists the value entered in the Code cell in of the Components dialog. Manufacturer - Lists manufacturer information, if added in the Components dialog. Comments - Displays the information entered in the Comments column of the Components dialog. In order to edit description, code, manufacturer, or comments you will need to open the Components dialog. Some objects have several rows. Find the row that the schedule uses. The quickest way to do this is to look at the ID column. For doors this will be D1, for windows W1 for cabinents C1, etc.
Note: When editing components remember to double click to edit the cells.
In addition to the default columns, the dialog will show a column for each subcategory
854
defined under the categories in the Preferences dialog, see Categories Panel on page 116. Check any of these to produce a column for that subcategorys information. Objects to Include - Check the boxes for objects you wish to include in the schedule. Multiple schedules can be created using these filters as desired. For more information, see Text Tab For Other Objects on page 855.
Double Doors - Include double doors. Sliding Doors - Include sliding doors. Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass doors. These may be included as part of a window schedule if so desired. Pocket Doors - Include pocket doors. Bifold Doors - Include bifold doors. Garage Doors - Include garage doors. Mulled Door Units - Include mulled door units. If Treat as door is checked in the Mulled Window Specification dialog it will be included here. For more information, see Options Tab for Blocked Units on page 255. For Windows Standard Windows - Include any window that isnt a Bow, Bay or mulled window unit. Bow Windows - Include bow windows. Bay Windows - Include bay windows. Glass Sliding Doors - Include sliding glass doors as part of a window schedule. Also available for door schedules. Mulled Window Units - Include mulled winodw units. If Treat as door is unchecked in the Mulled Window Specification dialog it will be included here. For more information, see Options Tab for Blocked Units on page 255. For Cabinets Base Cabinets - Include base cabinets. Wall Cabinets - Include wall cabinets. Full Height Cabinets - Include full height cabinets.
2 Character Height - Define a height for the Text in the schedule. Check Make Default to define this value for all subsequently created schedules.
box to make the text background transparent, allowing items behind the schedule to show through. If unchecked, the schedule will have an opaque background that blocks everything behind it.
3 Transparent Background - Check this
check box to include it at the top of the schedule. and set the floor whose objects will appear in the schedule. This defaults to the current floor. Check All Floors to have all floors appear in the schedule.
5 Title - Enter a title here and select the
6 Include From Floor - Check this box
Text Tab For Other Objects

For Doors Single Doors - Include single doors.
855
Schedules
4 Dont Rotate With Plan - Select the check box to prevent the schedule from rotating when the Options> Rotate View command is invoked.
For Fixtures Plumbing - Include any fixtures with the Appears in plumbing schedule option checked in the Symbol Specification Dialog. Appliance - Include any fixtures with the Appears in appliance schedule option checked in the Symbol Specification Dialog. HVAC - Include any fixtures with the Appears in HVAC schedule option checked in the Symbol Specification Dialog. Interior - Include any fixtures that dont appear in Plumbing, Appliance or HVAC that are in the interior fixtures library. Exterior - Include any fixtures that dont appear in Plumbing, Appliance or HVAC that are in the exterior fixtures library.
For Furniture Interior - Include any furniture that is in the interior furniture library. Exterior - Include any furniture that is in the exterior furniture library. For Electrical Outlets - Include any electrical items that are designated as outlets. Switches - Include any electrical items that are designated as switches. Lights - Include any electrical items that are designated as lights. Other - Include any electrical items that are not outlets, switches or lights.
Attributes Tab
For more information, see Attributes Tab on page 663.
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule Specification dialog sets the type, size and appearance of the labels that display in Plan View.
2
3
5 7
6 8 10
9 4
856
are six shapes that can be selected. The size of the shape is relative to the text contained in the shape. If a shape is selected and Show Labels is also selected, the windows (or doors) will display the shaped label with the schedule number and nothing else. All other label options (except for Character Height and Initial Offset) will have no effect. If no shape is selected and Show Labels is also selected, the window or door is labeled with its size according to the format defined by the other options selected on this tab and the Label tab for the specific object. to use when displaying the opening size. This applies to doors and windows only. This will also affect the display in the Size column of the schedule. append the Size and Dimension columns (from the first tab) with letters that designate the opening type (ie. 3050DH describes a 3050 double hung window).
1 Shape - There
Label - Replaces the size with the Code information added to Code column components dialog. display the objects labels in Plan View. This will also turn on the appropriate layer for the objects labels on the Architectural tab of the Layer Display Options dialog. You can suppress the display of the label for an individual door or window by checking the Suppress labels check box in the Labels tab of the Window or Door Specification dialog. Turning off the label will remove that item from the window or door schedule.
6 Product Code
7 Show Labels - Select the check box to
8 Initial Offset - Specify the initial
distance from the wall to the label.
2 Size - Select which of the three formats
Inside - Select the check box to initially position labels inside the room instead of on the exterior side.
3 Include type - Select the check box to
of characters (in inches or mm) associated with the labels.
9 Character Height - Specify the height
No rotate with Plan - Dont rotate the label with the plan.
10 Label Text - Specify the leading
characters to be used for the label.
# - Displays the schedule number in front of the size.
5 Include Schedule
857
Schedules
Labels are centered on the object that they are associated with. Labels can be repositioned as a group or individually.
Converting Schedules to Text

The Schedule to Text edit button will appear when a schedule is selected. Click this button to convert the selected schedule to a tabbed text object. You can then edit the schedule as text. When this is done the schedule will no longer be automatically updated.
You can also copy the text from the Text Specification dialog and paste it into other applications.
A Window Schedule Example
Here is a brief example explaining how to add additional information to windows. This simplistic example uses three windows. First, create the two subcategories (Categories Panel on page 116). Then create the Window Schedule, with the new subcategories set to display (Schedule Specification Dialog on page 852). To add definitions, select the window in Plan View and click the Components button. Click the Add button two times, and two rows of "accessories" will be added to the compo-
nent material list. For each accessory, click in the SubCat column and choose a subcategory from the drop-down list. Then rename the Item from "accessory" to the actual material information. If you need a new subcategory, click Edit Sub Categories, then use the subcategory when you return to the Components dialog. The Window Schedule will update to reflect the new materials as soon as you click OK. These materials will also be placed into any Material Lists that you generate.
858
Chapter 40:
Materials List
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List in three ways: From All Floors, From Area, or From Room. In addition, a polyline or multiple polylines can be used to generate a materials list for part of a plan. Materials lists can then be created, edited, and printed directly from the program. They can also be exported as text, html or Microsoft Excel format files for use in other programs.
The Materials List is based on certain assumptions which may not match your building style. ART, Inc. makes no representation as to the accuracy or reliability of the Materials List generated by Chief Architect. Always compare the Materials List with a manual take-off before providing a quote or ordering material for a job.
Chapter Contents
Creating an Accurate Materials List Working With the Materials List Calculate From All Floors Calculate From Area Calculate From Room Materials Polyline The Master List Editing Columns Editing Materials Lists Material List Display Options The Components Dialog Managing Materials Lists Manufacturers Exporting the Material List
859
Materials List
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Chiefs materials list capabilities there are several things to keep in mind. The first is that the accuracy of your materials list is tied directly to the accuracy of your model. It takes more than just making your model look right to generate an accurate materials list. If, for example, you use CAD lines to draw an item on a floor plan, that item will not show up in the materials list. A better way would be to use a symbol or some other structural element. Framing items will be added to the materials list even if you havent done any framing. The accuracy of framing materials is generally better with manual framing, since each framing piece is calculated based on the model. When no framing has been built the framing is calculated based on rules that will likely result in a different amount of material. Also keep in mind that using certain "tricks" such as using soffits to represent items that arent directly supported in Chief Architect can result in items being placed in the materials list that you didnt expect.
The more work you put into making your model right, the more accurate your materials list will be.
860
Working With the Materials List
Working With the Materials List

The materials list is based on accumulating quantities of various items that appear in your model. There are several different ways to generate a list. Each method is described in the following sections. The materials list that is generated from each of these methods behaves the same, only the content will vary. When a materials list is generated it takes a snapshot of the materials as they would be given the current state of the model. While you can save a materials list with your plan it will not update to reflect changes that you make after the materials list is generated. When a materials list is generated it uses your preferences for which columns are shown and the order of those columns. For more information, see Material List Panel on page 113. When you close the window that displays the materials list you will be asked whether you want to keep the materials list. You can name it or throw it away. Saved materials lists can be accessed via the Materials Lists dialog which allows you to edit, delete, or rename them. For more information, see Managing Materials Lists on page 871. You can control which columns will display and the order that they are displayed. For more, see Material List Display Options on page 868. A Materials List can be generated at any time. It is not necessary to wait until the plan is complete. Comparisons can be made by generating the Materials List with and without a proposed modification.
If you are designing an addition and the floor, ceiling, and roof information is needed, create the building design to completion and use File> Save As to create a copy of the plan under a different name. Then delete the existing structure, leaving only the building addition. (Be sure to Build Floors/ Ceilings afterward.) You can then generate the Materials List for the entire plan by using the Calculate From All Floors option.
Choose Tools> Materials List> Calculate From All Floors or click the Calculate From All Floors button to have a Materials List generated for the entire model. Materials Lists calculated From All Floors will be calculated including the framing information. Any changes made to the model, after a Materials List is generated,
will not be included in the list. To update the Materials List, you must reselect Tools>Materials List> Calculate From All Floors. Materials Lists can be long. Only a portion of the list may display on your screen. Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll through the complete list. You may move the cursor to certain cells, in order to make changes.
861
Materials List
Calculate From All Floors
Calculate From Area

Calculate from Area produces a materials list for the portion of a plan within a rectangle on a single floor. Any polyline can be used to produce a materials list. First select the polyline, then select Calculate from Area from the menu and the materials list is produced for items within the polyine on the current floor. If you select the polyline and then instead select Calculate from All Floors from the menu, the materials list is produced for items within the polyline on all floors. The amount or portion of items included in the materials lists is as described above under Calculate from Area. You can group-select multiple polylines before selecting Calculate from Area or Calculate from All Floors by holding down the Shift key in Select Objects mode. Materials are calculated for each polyline and added into the total. If two polylines intersect, materials in that area are counted twice. Normally the only time polylines would intersect is when Materials Polylines, described in the next section, are used. In this case each of the intersecting polylines would specify different materials categories.
Calculate From Room

To calculate the Materials List for a room, you must first select the room. For more information, see Selecting a Room on page 193. Then choose Tools> Materials List> Calculate From Room. A Materials List is created for only that room.
Materials Polyline
To create a Materials Polyline select Tools> Materials List> Materials Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline in Plan View around the area to be calculated. Select the polyline and click the Calculate Materials List edit button. A Materials List is created for items within the rectangle, on the current floor. Portions of walls, floors, and framing that are inside the designated area will be placed on the Materials List. Items such as cabinets, furniture, studs, windows, doors, etc. will appear in the Materials List only if their center is within the Materials Polyline. Large items such as walls, framing, floor/ ceiling covering, and floor and ceiling joists are split at the area boundaries so that only portions of them appear on the materials list. A few items, such as floor joists, which show as pieces in a full materials list, must be listed in footage to accomodate this. For example, if three 16 foot joists fall within a four foot square area, the materials list will show 12 linear feet of joist material. This
862
The Master List
method can be useful for additions and/or remodels.
1. 2.
Select and open the polyline. Check the categories to be included in the materials calculation. Categories not checked for this polyline will be ignored. Since you can group-select polylines for materials calculation, one polyline might show only Masonry and Framing where another might include only roofing. Everything else could be checked for another polyline.
Categories
A materials polyline can specify which materials categories (General, Foundation, Masonry, etc.) will be calculated within this polyline prior to the generation of the materials list. To do this:
The Master List

Any Materials List generated will access the Master List for price and supplier information. The Master List is referenced by all plan files. It allows you to manage Supplier, Manufacturer, Price and other information for all of the materials you use. When the system calculates a Materials List the program refers to the Master List and checks for a record available for each item. If one is available, it will be used to provide missing information such as the Supplier, Price, Code and/or Comment for that item. If a record is not available one is added to the Master List. Whatever information is available at that time will be placed into the materials list. You can edit the materials list directly to add or modify price information for particular items. You may also update information in the Master List by selecting one or more rows in a materials list and selecting Tools>Update to Master. If the information in your Master List has changed, you can update items in a materials list by selecting the row or rows that you want to update and the select Tools>Update from Master from the Materials List menu.
Note: If the Master List contains more than one record for an item, the program will reference the last one entered. You can override this by defining one specific entry as the default. This is achieved by clicking on the check box in the Def column.
Chief Architect allows you to have more than one Master List. Only one can be active, and only the active one will be updated with the new information. You can specify which Master List is current and active on the Master List panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Master List Panel on page 115. Select Choose to select a new file for the Master List File. Choose Tools>Materials List> Master list to view the current Master List.
863
Materials List
Displaying the Master List

To open the Master List, select Tools>Materials List> Master List or press Ctrl+M on your keyboard.
The Master List window is almost identical to a Materials List window, with a few additional controls to help with viewing. The category popup menu at the top of the window lets you limit the Master List to only show a particular category, or all categories. When viewing the Master List, you can control the width of columns and which columns are included in the spreadsheet. These settings will be remembered the next time the Master List is opened. For more, see Material List Display Options on page 868.
Searching the Master List

The Find item toward the bottom of the window lets you search for text in the Master List.
It starts from the currently selected cell and moves to the right, then moves down to the next row starting at the left column, and so on, until it finds an instance of the text you entered. If the text is not found, you will hear
864
Editing Columns
a beep. The status bar at the bottom displays how many entries are being displayed.
You can also use the Tools>Update to Master option to add edited records from a Materials List. To delete a row from the Master List, click the row number at the far left. The entire row will highlight. Choose Edit> Delete, click the Delete edit button, or press the Del key on your keyboard.
Editing the Master List

New records cannot be inserted directly into the Master List, but they can be deleted or modified. New records are added to the Master List when a Materials List is generated if a matching record is not found.
Editing Columns
The columns in a materials list, the Components dialog and the Master List are all very similar. Some columns dont appear in all places. Refer to the following for a description of the capabilities of each column. For columns that can be edited by typing in text; double click to cell to begin editing. ID - This column displays an automatically generated identifier for each entry. If you click on this column in the components dialog or in the materials list dialog you can change the category of an item. Use - This column appears only in the Master List and Components dialog. It is a check box that indicates whether the item will be displayed in a generated materials list. If this is unchecked in either place the item will not show up in the materials list. This is very useful in cases where Chief will generate several items but you really only want 1 item to be displayed because it will be purchased as a single unit. Sub Cat. - This column allows you to choose the sub category. Sub categories are defined on the Materials>Categories panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can also type in
the sub category directly by double clicking on the cell. Flr - This column displays the floor that the displayed material came from. It is only visible in a materials list and is not editable Size - This column displays the size of the item being displayed. You can edit this item in a components list and a materials list. If you wish to get the un-edited text back simply delete the text you typed in. If you want to blank it out simply type a single blank character. Description - This column displays a short description of the item. It is editiable in the same way as the Size column. Quantity - This column only appears in the Master List. It can be used to enter a quantity discount. Type in the number of items required to obtain the discounted price in the Master List. If at least that many items show up for a material entry, the price, supplier, and other information will be recorded. Count - This is the quantity of an item as calculated by Chief Architect. In a materials
865
Materials List
list this cannot be edited. In a components dialog it can be edited for added accessories. Extra - This is available in the components dialog and in the materials list. It is used to provide extra units of the item. When this is edited in the components list it is added to the count column in the materials list. Un - This displays the units of an item. It is not available in the master list. When you change the units of an item it will update the quantity to reflect the change. For accessories in the components dialog you can choose any unit that you wish. The quantity wont be updated when editing the units of an accessory in the components dialog. Additional unit conversions can be added in the General>Unit Conversions panel of the preferences dialog. For more information, see Unit Conversions Panel on page 101. Price - This is the price per unit of an item. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. % Markup - This is used to mark up the price of an item as entered. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. Labor - This is the cost of labor per unit required to install an item. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. Equip - This is the rental or other cost of equipment per unit to install an item. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. Tot. Cost - The calculated total cost. This uses the Count, Un, Price, %Markup, Labor
and Equip colums to calculate the cost. The formula used is (Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (% Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor) + ((Count + Extra) * Equip) If a column is not displayed then 0 is used for the value of that column with the exception of Count and Price, which are always used in the calculation even if they are not displayed. Supplier - The supplier of an item. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. Once more than one supplier has been added to the master list for a given item, double-click the supplier field for that items row in a materials list to activate a menu of all the suppliers which have been added. Choosing a different supplier will reference a different record in the Master List. Def - This column is only available in the Master List. It indicates which item is to be used as the default if more than one item is available. Click on this column to change the default. Code - Enter a code to specify an item. This could be a SKU number of the supplier for example. This can also be displayed in a schedule or used as a label. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. For more information, see Schedules on page 851. Comment - You can add additional text here. This can also be displayed in a schedule. If this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List. Manufacturer - This column can be used to specify the manufactuer of an item if desired. This can also be displayed in a schedule. If
866
Editing Materials Lists
this is not entered in the components dialog it is taken from the Master List.
Editing Materials Lists

Adding Information
You can enter information in the Price, Supplier, Code and Comment columns for each item. Once Master List information exists for a particular item.You wont have to enter this information. The system can load the Price, Supplier, Code and Comment fields for subsequent Materials Lists. The combination of Item, Size, and Supplier are used to identify unique materials in the Master List. Adding a supplier and price for any item is very straightforward. While in a materials list, Click in the cell, then enter the information. When the information is correct, highlight the entire row and select Tools>Update to Master from the Materials List menu. The new entry will be added to the master list. You can switch between several existing suppliers for a given item by double-clicking on the supplier field in a Materials List. A drop down button appears to the left of it. Click the button to display a menu of all the suppliers for that item and select one. When a Materials List is calculated, the program searches the Master List for the Price, Supplier, Code information for each item. This information, marked as default in the Master list, is used in the Materials List.
Copying
Sections of the Materials List can be copied and then pasted into a text box or into a word processing program or spreadsheet program using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and Paste commands. You can also copy and paste items that can normally be edited by selecting a block of cells.
Changing the Font

Open the Font panel of the Preferences dialog to change the font used for the Materials List. Click Materials, then click the Select Font button. Choose a new font from the list of those available. This will change the default Materials List font for all plan files, not just for the current plan.
867
Materials List
If you have problems with the Materials List printing too small, try changing the font.
Material List Display Options

Click the Display Options button or select Tools>Display Options from the Materials List menu to open the Material List Display Options dialog for the Materials or the Master List. These options correspond with the options in the Master List panel of the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Master List Panel on page 115.
Note: The display of the category is suppressed, but the information is still part of the Materials List. If the Materials List is exported, the information related to the suppressed categories will be exported as well.
Subcategories
The Materials List and Master List come with predefined categories. For each of these categories you can define any number of subcategories. Subcategories are defined in the Categories panel in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Categories Panel on page 116. Subcategories can be specified for any item in the Materials List or Components dialog. Once a subcategory is defined, it can be selected from the drop down list in the Type column. A subcategory consists of a code and a description. The code can be any sequence of characters, up to 12 characters in length. The description is how you want to label, or describe the sub-category. For example:
Each plan file can be set to display materials according to their category. Check boxes for any columns you want to display. The lists will display categories in the order they are listed here. These Categories will appear in the ID columns of the Material and Master List. The Materials List changes automatically to reflect these changes as soon as the OK button is selected.
LKS Lockset. Subcategories are used when creating door and window schedules. When creating a schedule, you could, for example choose to see the lockset for all doors and windows in the schedule. If a door or window has a material with the LKS "Lockset" subcategory, any text in the item field will be shown in the schedule under the lockset column. You would typically add an Accessory with a LKS subcategory to a door or window to add a lockset to a door or
868
The Components Dialog
window. For more information, see Creating Schedules on page 852.
appear in this list is the order that they will appear when the Materials List is displayed. Move Down - Click this button to change the order of the selected columns. This will move the slected items down in the list.
Columns Tab
Options Tab
1 2
floor to restrict Materials List to. To restore it to showing all floors, remove the check. This only affects the Materials List Calculated From All Floors. purchased from the same supplier, restricting the supplier saves a lot of time Check Restrict supplier to restrict it, then choose the supplier from the list.
1 Check Restrict floor and select the
Check to define which columns to display in the Materials List. You can suppress the columns display by removing the check next to the column name. Move Up - Click this button to change the order of the selected columns. This will move them up in the list. The order that items
2 If all the supplies for a job will be
The Components Dialog

You can open the Components dialog by selecting an item and then choosing Tools> Material Lists> Components from the menu or clicking the Components edit button. The Components dialog can also be opened from the contextual menu.
869
Materials List
Editing the Components Dialog

Besides editing and adding information for items in the Materials List and Master List, you can edit and add information directly for some items through the Components dialog. The Components dialog for an item is basically the Materials List entry for an individual item or group of items. Once the dialog is open you can edit it just as you would a Materials List or Master List. Entering specific Price, Supplier, Manufacturer, Comments or Type will embed that information into the item itself. When that item is copied, even into a different plan, all the information stays with the copy as well. This information will go into the Materials List. Components information can also be edited for library items. When an item in a library is placed into a plan the components information goes along with it.
Accessories
In the Components dialog you can add additional Materials List entries for the item being edited. The additional Materials List entries are called Accessories and are saved with the item. Accessories added to an item are embedded in the item and will display in the Materials List. To create a new accessory: 1. 2. 3.
Components dialog.
Select an Item and open the
Click the Add button and a new line will be added to the spreadsheet. The new entry will be given an item name of Accessory#. You can edit this and give it any item name you like. You can also edit all of the other columns for accessory items, except for the ID field. To remove an accessory, click on any part of the accessories information and click the Delete edit button.
4.
5.
870
Managing Materials Lists
For a specific example on how this is applied, see A Window Schedule Example on page 858.
Managing Materials Lists

To open the Material Lists dialog choose Tools> Material Lists> Manage Material Lists from the main menu or click the Manage Material List child button. Done - Click this to close the dialog. Help - Click this to get help. Edit - Click this to open the selected material list. Double clicking a materials list is equivalent. Delete - Click this to delete the selected materials list. Rename - Click this to bring up the Rename Material List dialog.
Manufacturers
Select Tools> Material Lists> Manufacturers to open the Manufacturers dialog. The Manufacturers dialog contains contact information for the manufacturers whose products appear in Chief Architects Library.
Exporting the Material List

Any Materials List can be exported into a text (.txt) file which can be opened directly by most spreadsheet programs. From the Materials List or Master Materials List, select File> Export Material List. The Material Export Options dialog opens.
871
Materials List
1 3
2 4
5 7
option to create a text file with a tab between each field entry in the Materials List, and a carriage return between each row. option to create a text file with a comma between each field entry in the Materials List and a carriage return between
1 Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this
are using a program that expects the file to be in this format.
Estimating Software
You can export the Materials List to a word processor, or to a spreadsheet program to arrange it in your estimating format. You can also export the Materials List to a number of commercial estimating programs in whose database you would keep your current pricing, labor costs, markups, etc. and be able to generate many different reports based on this data. If you are purchasing an estimating software program, make sure in advance that the program supports the direct import of the Chief Architect Materials List. Any questions regarding estimating software packages and how they interact with Chief Architect should be directed toward the company providing the estimating software. ART, Inc. is unable to provide any technical support for programs outside of Chief Architect.
2 Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select this
3 Excel (XLS) - Select this option to
create a Microsoft Excel format file.
html file that you can view with your web browser.
4 HTML - Select this option to create an
5 No Column Headers - Check this box to prevent column headings from appearing in the first row of the text file.
Check this box to immediately open the exported file with the program specified on your computer. Check this box to limit the export to only those columns that would have been exported by version 8. This is useful if you
6 Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor -
7 Export Version 8 Columns Only -
872
Appendix A
Technical Support Services

Printing Problems
If printing difficulties are the issue, check first to make sure that the printer and computer are communicating. This can be accomplished by clicking on the "Start" button, point to "Settings" and then click on the "Printers" folder. If using Windows XP, simply click on "Start" and "Printers". Once inside of the printers folder, locate the printer that will not function correctly. Right click on that printer, and from the menu click "Properties". In the "General" tab, click the button that says "Print Test Page". If a test page is produced by the printer, the problem resides with Chief Architect. If the printer is not capable of producing a test page, check the connection between the computer and the printer.
How to Contact Technical Support

ARTs world class technical support service can be contacted in a variety of ways. Chief Architect, and exit any other open programs. On the Windows desktop, a number of files will now be present with your last name. Each of these files will need to be archived in a single zip file. That zip file can then be sent directly to ART via the Technical Support section on our Web site at: www.chiefarchitect.com.
Web Support
Due to the larger file sizes associated with Chief Architect 9.0, submission via the ART Web site is recommended. To ensure that all necessary files are included in the email, first open the problem drawing. Next, click the File> Save As. The Save Plan File dialog will appear. Click the drop down arrow for the top field, Save In and choose Desktop. At the bottom of the window, in the File Name field, delete anything that may be present. In the blank space, type in your last name. Next, exit
Email Support
Questions can be emailed to the Technical Support department. You must include your name and serial number. It is often helpful to attach a copy of the plan that you are having trouble with, or send another example.
873
Tech Support
If ART asks for a plan file to be submitted via email, rest assured your plan will not be used for any other purpose and will be destroyed once the problem has been resolved. The Technical Support department cannot sign any non-disclosure or any other limiting agreements regarding plan files or any other information received, and cannot return these materials to you. Layout files are also supported via email. To submit a layout file, first open the layout file and select Tools> Layout Files from the menu. This will provide a list of all drawing files that have been sent to this layout. Make note of these drawing files, as each of these files will need to be submitted, using the file saving procedure outlined in the web support section of this chapter.
ence Manual. This manual will assist you in resolving most "how to" issues. Click Help> Index in Chief Architect. This is a comprehensive index listing all help topics included with the program. The tutorial CD included with Chief Architect can also resolve most "how to" questions. If Chief Architect simply will not start, or if your issue is not addressed in the manual or help files, check our online database of solutions at www.chiefarchitect.com. This database is updated regularly and includes solutions to many of the technical problems commonly encountered, as well as numerous tutorials and "how to" articles.
Note: Technicians are happy to assist with technical issues, and can often resolve a telephone call in just a few minutes. However, due to time constraints, only a single issue may be resolved per phone call.
Telephone Support
ART provides free telephone support for the current Full version of Chief Architect. Free telephone support for the Base version of Chief Architect is provided for the first 90 days. If you wish to extend your telephone support for the Base version, contact our Chief Architect sales department. (See the Getting Started Guide for Contact information.) Demand for technical support is sometimes great. When calling during peak hours, expect to wait a few minutes before speaking to a technician. Your issue will be addressed as quickly as possible. To minimize the amount of time on the telephone, please do the following before contacting Technical Support Services: Look up items related to your problem in the index of the Chief Architect Refer
When calling: Please be at the computer or work station that is experiencing the problem. Chief Architect should be running at the time of the telephone call, so that a suggested remedy can be implemented immediately. If you do not have access to the problem computer at the time a telephone call is placed, the technician will be unable to reproduce the issue and unable to suggest a remedy. Try to reproduce the problem at the time of the telephone call so that it can be clearly explained to the technician.
874
If an error box appears, record any error numbers or messages. These may appear within the box, in its title bar, or both. Knowing which version of Chief and the build date is especially critical information. The version and date can be found by clicking on the Help> About Chief Architect. Knowing which version of Windows you are using is also valuable to the technician.
The Technical Support office is open from 6am to 5pm pacific standard time, Monday through Friday. Calls are answered in the order they are recieved. If all current technicians are busy, you will be placed on hold. If you hang up and call back, your place in the queue will be lost. See the Getting Started Guide for Contact information.
875
Tech Support
876
2D Face: A triangular or quadrilateral portion of a surface object. 3D Acceleration: Some computers have graphics cards that have been designed specifically to improve the performance of 3D graphics applications. Such cards are said to be accelerated, and will give users improved performance when using the render feature of Chief Architect. absolute location: The location of a point in plan coordinates, or the horizontal distance (x) and vertical distance (y) from the plan origin which is at (0,0). Adobe Acrobat Reader: A software application which can be used to read the electronic version of the Chief Architect manual. alcove (minimum): The minimum alcove width specifies the minimum width of a recessed area in an exterior wall which will be noticed by the automatic roof generator. Any alcove that is less than the specified width will be treated as thought the wall continues straight across it. ambient light: The amount of light that appears to illuminate a rendered view without any other light
sources. It has no position or direction and illuminates all surfaces equally. anti-aliasing: The automatic removal of the jagged appearance (aliasing) produced by diagonal lines, curves or circles when display resolution is too coarse to hide the stair-stepped appearance of an image or display. apex: The top or peak or highest point of a pyramidal or conical shape.
apron (window): A piece of trim typically placed on a wall below a window sill. arc: A curved line segment representing a portion of a circle.
arc angle: The included angle of an arc. It can be measured between the two lines going from the center of an arc to the arc start point and end point. arc length: The length measured along an arc. This should not be confused with the chord length which is the measurement of the straight line between the arc end points and is always shorter then the arc length. attenuation: The rate at which the light intensity drops off as a result of the distance from the light source.
877
Glossary
Glossary
The farther away a surface is from a light source the less intense the lighting effects will be from that light source if its attenuated. The rate at which this intensity drops off can be specified with the light's 3 attenuation coefficients. automatic reach: Specifies how far an item can be from a dimension line, measured perpendicularly, and still be located by it. In this case, it is how far an automatic dimension line will reach to locate items along exterior walls that are set back. automatic roof generator: Builds a roof automatically using the information within walls and in the Build Roof dialog. auto save: When using the auto save feature, Chief Architect will automatically save the current plan at specified time intervals. If you exit normally from Chief Architect, any auto save files are deleted. If you exit abnormally, such as from a system crash or power failure, the auto save file will be made available the next time you restart Chief. auto snap: When using the auto snap feature, the start and end points of any item being drawn will attempt to snap to other locations within the specified screen distance. Also, lines and arcs will connect end to end to form polylines. awning window: A window in which the sash is hinged horizontally at the top and swings outward at the bot-
tom to open. Also known as a tophung window. axonometric view: A view of an architectural model that represents a true, head-on view of the front faces of the model. In Chief, it is produced from a plan or full Overview set to a front elevation through the view angle dialog box. A front elevation produced by a Cross section is also an axonometric view. back clip: When using the back clip cross section feature, only the items between the starting point and ending point of the cross section creation line are drawn in the cross section view. When back clipping is turned off the ending point only defines the direction in which you are looking. backdrop: A picture (bitmap file) placed in the background of any 3D or render view. backsplash: A vertical portion of counter top or tile typically used where base cabinets are against a wall. baluster: A vertical railing member which runs between the handrail and the floor or bottom rail (shoe). baseboard: A molding which goes around a room at the base of the walls. base cabinet: A cabinet that typically rests on the floor, has a toe kick, and has a countertop. baseline: A roof section's baseline is the line in 3D space around which the roof section pivots as you alter the roof section's pitch. Drawn over a wall's exterior surface, the baseline may also be drawn over a
878
bit:
batten:
A small rectangular piece of wood, usually oriented vertically, that covers the seam between adjacent siding boards.
Contraction of Binary Digit. (either a 1 or 0).
bay window: A composite window constructed from three wall segments each containing a single window called a component window. The first and last wall segments are usually at some angle to the center wall segment and the wall which contains the bay window. beam (wall): A 2D representation of an exposed ceiling beam that appears in a Plan View. A beam does not appear in other views and its use is being replaced by framing members or soffits which do. bearing: A horizontal angular direction which is usually specified with reference to true north which is determined by the north pointer. bearing line: A CAD line or open polyline is used to define areas over which framing members will break, such as over load-bearing walls or beams. bifold door: A door consisting of two hinged panels folding to one side of a door opening. Usually used for interior closet doors. birds-eye view: A view from above similar to what a bird would see if it were flying over and looking down. Also, a top view when using an overview. birdsmouth: A notch that is cut from the bottom of a rafter where it falls
bitmap (.bmp): A standard Windows file format that can be used to represent data as a picture. These files can be very large when representing a large screen area at a high color resolution since they are often uncompressed. Boolean Algebra: [after George Bool (1815-64)] a mathematical system originally devised for the analysis of symbolic logic, in which all variables have the value of either zero or one. Widely used in digital computers. Boolean operations: Binary logic operators used by a computer to calculate conditions that are based strictly on true (1) or false (0). Common operations are OR and AND. bow window: A composite window constructed from multiple, equal length wall segments forming an overall curve. Each wall segment contains a single window called a component window. A bow window may have between two and twenty components. box window: A bay window whose two side components are perpendicular to it's containing wall. break wall: The process of breaking a straight wall section into multiple wall sections that can be modified individually. bridging: A short horizontal member fixed between two studs in a wall.
879
Glossary
CAD line or at the corner or edge of an existing roof section.
over the wall's top plate.
Sometimes called fire blocking of just blocking. cabinet module: A single cabinet object which can be adjusted individually. When multiple cabinet modules are attached together they will appear to be one cabinet but are still treated as separate objects. CAD: Computer Aided Design or Computer Aided Drafting. In Chief Architect, CAD is usually a reference to any of the 2D entities that can be drawn such as lines, arcs, circles, boxes, etc.
user would be looking from to see such a view. Camera symbols are drawn in Plan Views that correspond to the camera location for one of these 3D views. A camera symbol can be active or inactive depending on whether its associated view is currently displayed. Capital: The top part of a column. Cartesian coordinates: A rectangular coordinate system. In order to locate points in three-dimensional space we must have a fixed reference frame. We obtain such a frame by selecting a fixed point for the origin and three directed lines that are mutually perpendicular at the origin. These lines are called the x-axis, y-axis, and zaxis. In a Chief Architect Plan View, the x-axis it to the right, the y-axis is up, and the z-axis is out of the screen towards the user. casing (windows & doors): The pieces of trim surrounding a window or door. casement window: A window which pivots vertically on one side to open. Also known as a side-hung window. cathedral ceiling: A ceiling which follows the underside of the roof or a sloping custom ceiling section. It is not flat like a normal ceiling. chair rail: A molding which typically goes around a room at the height of the top of a chair back. It was traditionally used to protect walls from getting damaged from chairs. chamfer: A corner which has been beveled
CAD block: A way of grouping multiple 2D CAD entities together so that they behave as a single object for the purposes of moving, copying, and editing. CAD detail: A CAD detail is a namable window for saving plan specific CAD drawings such as plot plans, cross sections, etc. CAD facility: The features in Chief Architect which allow users to draw lines, arcs, and other 2D entities. CAD layer: A storage area for CAD objects, soffits, dimension lines, and text objects, identified by a number. All items are grouped by their layer and can be manipulated (displayed, recolored, etc.) as a group. callout: A plan symbol drawn as a circle, square, etc. containing a code referring to another section and/or page in a plan set. camera: A camera represents a perspective, elevation, or cross section view. It is positioned where the
880
or broken at 45 degrees. Two boards butt-joined with chamfered corners will form a v joint. The chamfer tool creates a chamfer at the corner where two polyline component lines meet. check box: A small box within a dialog box that can contain a checkmark indicating whether or not a program feature has been selected. chord (Arc): An imaginary straight line that connects the start point to the end point of an arc. chord Angle (direction): The angle of the arc's chord. This angle is measured as 0 degrees when the chord is horizontal and directed to the right, and 90 degrees when directed straight up. chord length: The length of the imaginary line connecting the two endpoints of an arc. clipboard: An area of memory reserved by Windows for temporary storage of text or graphics being transferred during a user session brought about by using the cut, copy and paste commands. coffered ceiling: A coffered ceiling typically follows the underside of a hip roof section over a room up to some specified height above the normal ceiling height, and then follows a higher ceiling platform or custom ceiling section for the rest of its surface. components: The various materials that would make up the real objects represented in a plan, such as the three individual windows that
make up a bay window. concentric move/Copy: The ability to move or copy a polyline or box so that each edge moves an equal amount from its original position. contextual menu: A popup menu that displays by clicking the right mouse button (once or twice depending on preferences). It contains specific commands related to your current mode of operation or to a currently selected item. contour line: A line drawn in Plan View that connects all the points with the same elevation. Cosmo Viewer: A software application that works with an Internet browser and allows viewing VRML (WRL) files. CPU: Central Processing Unit, or the brain of a computer, which determines how fast it can perform.
craftsman style (windows): A style of window lites where only the top most horizontal muntin bar is kept with all of the vertical muntin bars appearing above it. cross box: A box with an X inside, typically used to create cross section details. cross section view: A cross section camera cuts a section through the complete multi-story model of a house showing all of the details from the vertical cutting plane onward. See also Back Clipping. crown molding: A molding which typically goes around a room at the
881
Glossary
top of the walls. cursor: The main, user controlled, symbol on screen that indicates where the user can affect changes (controlled by the mouse and keyboard). current point: A point in Chief Architect is indicated as the current point if it is drawn with a red X. This is the most recently created or selected point. dialog box: A popup window in Chief Architect, typically used to modify the specification of an object or setup the default values for an object. diamond style (windows): A style of window lites where the muntin bars are drawn diagonally to form diamond shaped lites. diffuse: Diffuse lighting accounts for the changes in intensity due to the direction of a light source. The perceived intensity of the light on a surface varies with the angle that the light makes with the surface. The more diffuse a material on a surface is, the brighter it appears under a light source because it scatters the light reflected from it more evenly. dithering: In computer graphics, the use of dots of different colors or shades to produce what appears to be a new color. Dithering is used to soften the edges of an image as an anti-aliasing technique, and to add realism to computer graphics. dockable toolbar: A toolbar, or set of buttons with associated commands
that will be performed when it is clicked on, which can be placed anywhere along the edges of the Chief Architect window, where it is said to be docked or placed anywhere else on the computer screen where it is said to be floating. dongle: see hardware key. dormer: A roof construction comprising of a vertical window and its own walls and pitched roof sections typically used to provide natural light to upper floor or attic spaces. Often designed with one sloped roof section and called a shed dormer or with a gable end and two sloped roof sections which is called a gable dormer. double hung window: A window with two sashes which can slide vertically to open. drawing exchange format (DXF): A file format which is used to transfer 2D or 3D data from one CAD program to another. It only stores data as CAD entities and so has limited information about the higher level 3D objects such as windows, walls, cabinets, etc. Different entities can be distinguished from one another by assigning them to different layers. dropped (false) ceiling: A dropped ceiling can be defined without affecting the true structural ceiling and wall heights and can be used to lower the apparent ceiling height of any room. It can also be used to individually color the ceilings of
882
different rooms. Dutch gable roof: A roof with gables near the ridge and a lower hipped portion. Also called a half-hipped roof. dwang: A short horizontal member fixed between two studs in a framed wall. Also called bridging, blocking, or nogging. DXF: eaves: see drawing exchange format. The lower part of a pitched roof or the edge of a flat roof which project beyond the wall face and are usually finished with a fascia board. Sometimes referred to as roof overhang. Refers to the lowest horizontal overhang area. The sloping overhang at a gable is referred to as the gable overhang.
eng. lumber: engineered lumber. explode block: Separate a CAD block back into it's individual CAD components so that they can be modified separately. export: The ability to create an output file from Chief Architect which can then be imported into another computer program. These are DXf, VRML (WRL), Windows metafile (WMF), bitmap (BMP), and various text format (DAT and TXT) files. In general, the files in which Chief Architect saves its plans cannot be read by other computer programs.
edge flashing: The metal trim that is attached to roof surfaces along their outer edges. egress (windows): A window designated as an egress window must meet certain code requirements to allow enough open area for a person to use the window as a fire escape. elevation view: A view of an architectural model taken horizontally, looking at a vertical face in the design. For an architect, in the strictest terms, an elevation includes symbols that show the relationship between the viewed face and the surrounding terrain. emissive: The property which effects the color or brightness of a material which is not coming from any light source. Materials that are emissive will appear to glow
face (as in 3D face): A flat surface defined by a rectangle or triangle. fascia: A wide horizontal board positioned on edge and attached to the lower ends of the rafters, which typically supports the rain gutters. This is called an eave fascia. Also used at the edge of a roof section above a gable wall. This sloping fascia is called a gable fascia.
fence (as in fence CAD tool): A CAD line or polyline used as a tool to select other CAD objects it contacts or crosses. field of view: The angle of the camera lens. A wider view makes the object appear farther away, a narrower view makes the object appear closer. file: A grouped unit of electronic data created by a program or end-user
883
Glossary
because they will be brighter even when there is no other light source.
(via application of Chief Architect) for storing CAD or other computer produced information. file extension: A three-letter abbreviation to represent various file types used or produced by a software application or program. Chief Architect uses a variety of file extensions to distinguish the purpose of the various computer files that it uses. file locking: Preventing the ability of another user or program to change, or even to access, a file stored on a computer. files can be locked in Chief Architect to prevent the confusion caused by two or more users changing the same plan at the same time. fillet: A corner that has been radiused (curved) instead left square. The fillet tool makes rounded corners between two non-parallel lines.
overhang or toekick inset such as when it is attached to a wall or another cabinet. It's front, and if exposed, its back may still have counter overhang and toekicks. floating slab: A reinforced concrete floor that is designed to be resistant to differential movement of unstable earth. foam seal: Material that is placed between the foundation wall and the framed structure above to seal against air leaks. focal point: The camera's focus point (where you are looking) for a Perspective or Render View. The focal point is initially defined by the end point (where you let go of the mouse button) when dragging the Perspective or Render camera tool. The focal point is used by the camera tools for rotating or moving in or out along the line of sight. The focal point will be moved as the camera is changed with the other camera movement tools. font: The complete set of numbers, letters and symbols in a specific typeface (Arial, Modern etc.)
fire box (fireplace): The open or inside area of a fireplace where the fire is meant to be. fixtures: A class of symbols appearing in a plan and 3D views that includes plumbing fixtures as well as appliances, manufactured fireplaces and stoves, custom millwork items such as pillars, etc. Distinguished from furniture symbols in that anything represented by a fixture would normally be supplied by the builder as part of the finished house. flat sides (cabinet): A cabinet is designated as having flat sides when its exposed sides have no counter
footing: A footing is used to support a foundation wall. The footing is wider than the foundation wall and runs continuously under the base of the wall. footprint: See plan footprint. front cap: This will show up in the material list when there are cabinets in a plan. This is the length of exposed countertop edge.
884
full camera: see perspective view. full gable wall: A wall in Chief Architect can be designated as a full gable wall if it is going to be at the end of a gable roof. full height cabinet: A full height cabinet typically goes from the floor all the way to the top of the wall cabinets and has a toe kick but not a counter top. Often used as a pantry cabinet. full overview: see overview. gable: The triangular portion of an external wall below a pitched roof.
name Glulam. Grade Beam: Grade Beams are foundation walls that receive their main support from piers extending deep into the ground. They are often used with stepped foundations on sloping lots or on level lots where unstable soil conditions exist. Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI): A type of electrical outlet commonly placed in bathrooms, exteriors, or other water-prone areas that is designed to prevent electrocution. ground plane: See lot perimeter. gull wing roof: A gull wing roof is the reverse of a gambrel roof. It has two pitches on either side of the ridge, but a gull wing has the first (lower) pitch shallower than the second pitch. gutters: A channel designed to carry away rainwater that runs off a roof surface. They are attached to the fascia at the (low horizontal) eaves of the roof. half hip: A half hip roof has two gable ends. Toward the top of each gable is a small hip that extends to the ridge. hardware lock/key (dongle): A computer hardware device plugged into the parallel (printer) port which is used for protecting the software from unauthorized use. hatch wall: A wall marked so that it is drawn with cross hatching in a Plan View. header: The large framing member that spans the top of window and door
gable line: A CAD line used to designate a portion of a wall as having a gable section at its top, and producing gable roof sections over it. gable roof: A pitched roof terminating in a gable at one or both ends. gambrel roof: A gambrel roof is a gable roof with two pitches on each side of the ridge. The first (lower) pitch is steeper then the second pitch. GFI: GIF: see Ground Fault Interrupt. A picture file format for storing bitmaps in a compressed form. They are considerably smaller then bitmaps but have worse image quality since they lose some of the data by compressing it.
girder truss: A truss designed to cover long spans and which usually supports other trusses that butt into it. Glulam: see laminated lumber beam. laminated lumber beam: Horizontal factory-glued laminated beam. Trade
885
Glossary
openings. hearth: A platform, at floor level or raised slightly above, that extends in front of a fireplace. This platform can be raised off the floor, in which case it is called a raised hearth.
herringbone: A zigzag type of pattern which can be used when laying out brick, tile, or wood and often used for flooring. hip roof: For every exterior wall, a hip roof slopes upward toward the house interior. This causes every exposed edge, or eave, of the roof to be level. Hip roofs are generally pyramidal in shape, and with level eaves all around. hopper window: A hopper window is one which pivots inward at the bottom to open. Also know as a bottomhung window. Howe Truss: A roof truss with vertical members at mid-point and quarter points and connected by diagonal bracing. HVAC: icon: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning equipment. An icon is a simple picture. It is usually in the form of a button that you can select by pointing at it with your cursor and clicking the left mouse button. In Chief Architect, an icon or button will launch various drawing modes like walls or doors or cause Chief Architect to perform various functions like zooming or place a view camera. A picture or bitmap which represents an individual object, such as
a tree, flower, car, person, etc. It is represented as a special 2D symbol in Plan Views and is visible in any 3D view or rendered view. Images can represent a very detailed object as only one surface instead of representing the same object with many 3D surfaces. Imperial: The English measuring system (inch, feet, etc.), as opposed to the metric system which is based on units of ten (millimeters, centimeters, kilometers, etc.) inactive camera: A camera symbol in a Plan View that represents a elevation or cross section view that has been saved and is not currently open. insulation: A CAD tool used for drawing insulation symbols in cross section details. interpolate: To approximate a value between two known values based on a trend or known formula or curve. (defined only as it is used in CAD applications) isometric view: A projection of an object upon a plane equally inclined to the object's three principal axes, so that the dimensions parallel to these are represented in their true proportions. Isometric views can be printed to scale and measured along their axes. An isometric view is a special case of Chief Architect's plan and full overviews. Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG): A compressed graphics file format that works well with photo-
image:
886
graphs with continuous tones. joist: A horizontal framing member usually spaced at regular intervals and used to support a floor or ceiling. LVL:
king post: The vertical member of a triangular truss that connects the peak with the center of the joist chord. knee wall: A short wall on an upper floor which is cut off by a roof section. A knee wall usually runs parallel to the main exterior walls but is set back several feet from the outer surface. landing (stair): The level platform that is between two sections of stairs. layout facility: That feature of Chief Architect designed for assembling full working drawings of a house plan. Each layout file can contain 200 layout pages each of which can contain multiple views, details, CAD, etc. library browser: A window in Chief Architect that allows you to inspect and select various objects stored in a library or collection of these objects. lites (window): The separated glass areas of a window. living Area: The living area label defines the square footage of the true livable areas of a house. Exterior, garage, and open below areas are not included in this calculation. Living area should not be mistaken for actual square footage of a house. lookout: Usually used when a hammer is
dropped from a roof section. Also, a framing member that attaches to the gable fascia and supports the gable overhang area. It extends over the gable wall or end truss and ties off on an interior truss of rafter. See Laminated Veneer Lumber beam
Laminated Veneer Lumber beam: Vertical factory laminated beam. Trade name LVL. macro: In computer programming, a macro is a way of combining a number of different commands into one command, thus saving time. Keyboard macros in Chief Architect allow you to substitute one or two keystroke entries for a complicated series of cursor movements.
mansard roof: A mansard roof is a hip roof with two slopes on the roof sections above each of the four walls. It can be thought of as a hipped gambrel roof. The second slope begins at the same height above each wall. Usually the lower slope is much steeper than the upper slope. manual reach: Specifies how far from a manually drawn dimension line an item (wall cabinet, window, etc.) can be and still be located by the initially draw line. marker: A plan symbol that may be used to indicate level lines, test boring information, or point elevations. It can also be used as a reference point for laying out floor, wall,
887
Glossary
and roof framing. marquee: A resizable rectangular area that is used for selecting groups of objects. master list: The master list contains all of the materials, suppliers, and prices that are used throughout Chief Architect for generating Material Lists. metafile (WMF): A standard Windows file format in which CAD data can be represented as actual lines instead of pixels. Metafiles can be smaller in size then bitmap files that represent the same view and can be rescaled without any loss of picture quality. Chief Architect can export metafiles from plan, CAD detail, and 3D views. metal drip edge: A type of flashing often used on the edge of roof surfaces to divert water away from the fascia. millwork: A library of 3D objects representing objects such as door trim, fireplace mantels, corbels, copulas, and columns. mitre: A diagonal or bevel joint between two framing members or moldings of equal cross sections which is typically at 45 degrees.
the edge of a slab foundation. The floor joists or wall framing is then attached to the mud sill. mulled windows: A group of windows that have been combined into a single unit such that trim pieces are used between the individual windows and casing surrounds the unit. multi-layered wall: A wall which has been made up of multiple wall layers. muntin bar: A wood or metal member used to divide up window lites. Often these are vertical or horizontal, but they can be diagonal or even curved. Traditionally these were structural, enabling windows to be made up from smaller, less expensive, panes of glass. They are often just for decoration. nested: A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that behaves like a single object and can be treated like any other CAD object. Any CAD block which is contained by another CAD block is said to be nested. newel: A support post at regular intervals along a railing, usually with rails and balusters between them.
monolithic slab: A single slab foundation for a house that incorporates footings at its edge without any joints. mud sill: The bottom most horizontal member of a wall frame which lays on top of a slab or foundation. Typically made from treated, rot-resistant, lumber that is bolted to the top of a foundation stem wall or at
no locate (wall): A no locate attribute in a wall prevents dimension lines from locating a wall in most cases. normal: A line that is perpendicular to another line or a plane, often referring to a perpendicular to a 3D face. north pointer: The north pointer defines the direction of true north in relation to the house. If north is not
888
object-based design: For architectural CAD users, a type of CAD software that allows you to draw using 3D objects like walls, windows, doors, and furniture, instead of just 2D geometric entities like lines, circles, and arcs. opaque glass: Opposite of transparent. If glass is designated as opaque it will be drawn as a solid color which can't be seen through. This is often done to simplify and speed up elevation and exterior views. OpenGL (Open Graphics Language): A powerful software interface to graphics hardware which is the newest industry standard for high quality 3D graphics. open below: A room designation used whenever a room does not have a floor and is not used in living area calculations. overview: An overview is an isometric view of a plan which can be viewed from any orientation. A plan overview shows the model for a single floor while the full overview shows all floors. pad (foundation): Foundation pads are usually square or rectangular and are used to support beams inside of a footing type foundation. pan: The process of moving the current display area within a window up/ down or left/right by using the scroll bar, arrow buttons, or drag-
parallel light: A parallel light source will simulate light coming from a certain direction and from an infinite distance away, such as light from the sun. parquet: A geometric pattern often used in hardwood flooring. pattern: Chief Architect uses patterns to enhance the appearance of surfaces and simulate real world materials such as flooring, brickwork, roofing, etc., by drawing additional CAD lines on the surfaces in 3D views. patterns can also be drawn within CAD objects in Plan Views. pier (foundation): Foundation piers are produced by filling a drilled hole in the ground with steel reinforced concrete. They will appear as a circle under a wall or beam in a Plan View. perspective view: A view of an architectural model that simulates how the design would look to the human eye. In a perspective view parallel lines diminish back to a vanishing point. In Chief Architect there are 2 types of perspective views. A plan camera will generate a perspective view of the current floor only, and a full camera will generate a perspective view of a whole house model. pillar: The post or newel that is used in railings can be designated as pillars if it is desired for it to extend up beyond the height of the rail.
889
Glossary
defined, north is assumed to be straight up. There can only be one north pointer per plan.
ging the cursor with the control key held.
pixel:
A single dot on a computer screen that can be represented by a single color. A plan in Chief Architect can refer to the entire model of a house, a single floor in a house model, or the current 2D Plan View of one floor of the house.
the plan) or the floor (inside the plan). point light: A point light source will simulate the light coming from a specified point. It is typically used to model light that would come from a light bulb that can shine in all directions. polar: A way of specifying the location of a point by using the relative distance and angle from an existing point. The angle can be specified in either degrees or as a bearing relative to the north pointer.
plan:
plan footprint: An automatically produced polyline in a CAD detail which traces the plan's exterior walls. Portions of the plan, usually walls, windows, doors and sometimes the roof, can also display within this polyline. Plan View: A view of an architectural model that is taken from above looking down, with no perspective aspect. By convention it is usually a 2D view of a single floor of the house with the top portion cut away at the four foot level. plinth block: A decorative block of wood often used at the bottom of door casings where the baseboard meets the door. plumb cut (eaves): Roof eaves can be plumb cut, where they are cut vertically, or square cut, where they are cut perpendicular to their length. PNG: see Portable Network Graphics pocket door: A door designed to slide into an opening into a wall instead of swinging open. Typically used for interior doors in situations where there is not enough room for the door to swing outward. point elevation: A marker that designates the height of the ground (outside
polyline: A polyline consists of two or more line and/or arc segments that are attached together at their endpoints. If the polyline connects back to it's start point, it is said to be closed. If there is a gap in the polyline it is said to be open. polymesh: A group of surfaces linked together as an entity. pony wall: The framed wall that extends short basement foundation walls to full ceiling height. These are commonly used for split entry type homes where the basement walls are around 3-4 feet tall. Portable Network Graphics (PNG) "ping": A graphics file format that is an alternative to GIFs and allows for transparent backgrounds. POV-ray: A 3D rendering program which can be used to simulate realistic views of a Chief Architect house model. To be used, a model must be exported from Chief using the extended POV-ray feature when
890
exporting a DXF file. prairie style (windows): A style of window lites where all of the central muntin bars have been removed leaving only the two outside muntin bars both horizontally and vertically. primitive: A library of 3D objects each representing a basic shape like a box, cylinder, wedge, sphere, cone, etc. queen post: One of two vertical members in a queen post roof truss which lies between the tie beam and the principle rafter. Often used for making an attic area using trusses. quoin: Large squared stones set at the external corners of buildings.
reflect:
relative location: A way of specifying the location of a point by using the relative distances from an existing point. The distances are specified as a horizontal (x) distance and a vertical (y) distance. RGB: A way of representing color on a computer with various amounts of Red, Green, and blue. The highest part of a sloped roof, usually where two roof sections meet along a horizontal seam. A sloping seam where two roof sections meet is called a hip ridge or a valley.
ridge:
radio button: A small circular button that appears in dialog boxes in groups of two or more where only one of the buttons can be selected at a time. rafter: An inclined roof framing member extending from the eave to the ridge and carrying the outer roof covering.
ridge cap: A covering over a ridge to provide a continuous cover and a weather seal where two roof sections meet. ridge vent: A special kind of ridge cap that allows ventilation of an attic area. rim joist: A joist at the outer edge of a ceiling or (more often) floor platform to which the ends of other joists attach. riser (stair): The vertical face of a step in a flight of stairs. room definition wall: An invisible wall used to define different room areas. room label/name: The text name that appears with each room which helps to define the type of room and it's associated characteristics. The text can be changed, but it is important to define the room type
railing shoe: See shoe. raked wall: A raked wall is one in which the top and/or bottom wall edge is not horizontal. rebar: Reinforcing bar used for reinforcing concrete structures.
reference floor: The plan or floor that is being used as a reference for the current working plan. The reference plan can be displayed and used to maintain the correct relationship between two different floors.
891
Glossary
The ability in Chief Architect to take any plan or portion of a plan and reflect it about a CAD line.
properly to get desired behavior. roof truss: see truss. saltbox roof: A saltbox roof is a type of gable roof with the ridge off center because there is a different pitch on each of the two roof sections. sash (window): A separate, framed unit which surrounds and holds the glass and may be either fixed or movable. In a double hung window, the sashes can be designated as the top sash and bottom sash. separation (cabinet): The amount of space between the openings in cabinets, thus representing the exposed width of the face frame members. For European style cabinets this value is typically 0. sheathing: The outer covering of a wall frame or roof section. shed roof: A single sloped roof section which covers an entire area. Shed roofs can cover multiple portions of a structure and meet at opposing angles, or cover dormer sections. shoe (railing): The lower rail used in a railing to which the balusters are connected. sill (window): The horizontal member which projects out from a wall below a window. slab foundation: A foundation in which the concrete foundation floor forms the first floor for the house. Can be built with a stem wall and footings around it's edge, or as a monolithic slab having no stem splice:
wall or footings incorporated at its edges. slider door: A door which typically has two glass sections, one of which will slide open instead of swinging open. snap to: The ability to located exactly, or snap, to a given point on a plan when trying to place an object. soffit: A boxed in area usually built above cabinets to fill in the gap between the top of the wall cabinets and the bottom of the ceiling. In Chief Architect, soffits are a general tool for building solid 3D objects and can be used for such things as exposed beams, posts, sidewalks, or any place a user needs a 3D box that can be moved, resized, or angled. The combining of multiple connected collinear lines into a single line in a layout picture produced from a 3D or elevation view. A line or polyline used to draw free form curves.
spline:
split level: A house in which the various sections of the plan have different floor and ceiling heights. spot light: A light used to simulate light coming from a specified point but also having a direction and a limited cone of illumination. Similar to light coming from a recessed lighting fixture or flashlight. stacked windows: Stacked windows are created by placing one window over another. stem wall: A foundation wall section which
892
stepped foundation, stepped wall: A wall whose bottom edge is made up of multiple horizontal sections at different levels. For a foundation wall the footing will follow these steps and thus be calls a stepped footing. stile (cabinet): A vertical face frame member of a cabinet. Used in Chief to allow for a frame member between a pair of doors in a single cabinet module. stringer (stair): The angled members of a stairway which support the risers and treads. stub wall: A short section of wall that is only attached at one end. In Chief Architect, it is better to create stub walls by laying out a straight wall first and then using a resized doorway to create the desired wall portion. stud: A vertical framing member used primarily in framing wall sections.
termite flashing: Sheet metal placed where the wall framing meets the concrete foundation to prevent insects from crossing from the foundation to the wooden structure. texture: A bitmap file which is used to show details of surface objects such as brick, tile, wood grain, carpet, etc. These can be applied to Chief Architect materials and are only visible in a Render View. top plate: The framing member placed across the top ends of studs used to carry the ceiling joists and support the rafters. transom window: A window that is placed above a doorway. trimmer: A vertical framing member which supports the end of a window or door header. truss: A structural frame used for bridging long spans and supporting loads. Typically used for roof framing and often arranged in a series of stable triangles.
sun angle: A CAD object used to show the direction of sunlight on a plan and to create a shadow area from a house model. It calculates the sun in relation to the 3D house according to any specified date, time, latitude and longitude. Also used as a light source in Render Views. SVGA: SWT: Acronym for Super Video Graphics Array. Stem Wall Top or the top of the stem wall, see also stem wall.
truss base: The surface which forms a boundary between the standard trusses and valley fill trusses which rest on top of them. truss chord: The length of a truss span. Also a framing member, often made of lumber but sometimes made of steel or other materials, from which a truss is constructed. The top chords are at the roof and the bottom chords are at the ceil-
tangent: A line that intersects a circle or
893
Glossary
lies above the footing and below the framing.
arc and is perpendicular to the line between the intersection point and the center.
ing. valley flashing: A shaped sheet metal flashing that is typically used in the valley of a roof, where two sloped roof sections meet. vector: A mathematical object with precise direction and length, but without a specific location. Acronym for Video Graphics Array. Virtual Reality Modeling Language. A Chief Architect model can be exported as a VRML (WRL) file. The supplied Cosmo viewer will read and display these files.
used to move a selected wall in 1/ 32 increments perpendicular to it's length. It is used for aligning collinear (in-line) walls containing sections of unequal width. webbing (trusses): Truss webbing is the collection of framing members that attach at each end to truss chords and that are used to fill in the truss structure. Most often the webbing is arranged in a series of triangular shapes. winder: A triangular or wedge shaped stair tread that is used where curved or angled stairways change direction. working plan: The currently active plan or floor that is being displayed and worked on when you have more then one floor. See also reference plan. WMF: see metafile. WP outlet: A waterproof electrical outlet designed to be used in exterior locations. WP Wall Board: This designates waterproof wallboard. This will show up in the material list when you have placed a bathtub or shower in a bathroom. zoom: The process of repositioning a view to move closer to any given area on the plan or 3D view. In other words, it magnifies the view.
VGA: VRML:
walkthrough: A recording of a series of camera movements in a 3D view such that it appears that a user is walking through a model of a house. Walkthroughs can be recorded and then played back at a much faster speed then it takes to generate each original view. Walkthroughs can also be done using the Cosmo viewer and the VRML export capability. wall cabinet: A cabinet typically mounted on a wall above the base cabinets and not having a toekick or counter top. wall elevation: see elevation view. wall layer: A component of a wall system. i.e. sheetrock, framing, sheeting, and siding are possible exterior wall layers. wall offset: The wall offset handle can be
zoom window: A small window with a bird's eye view of the entire plan which facilitates zooming and panning of the main window.
894
Index
2D Block ............................................. 794 3D Face .................................................. 784 Generation, increase speed ................ 589 Remove 3D views .............................. 592 Terrain ...................................... 491 , 515 3D Cameras, Save ............................. 591 3D Data, Import .................................. 788 3D Display Options ................... 588 , 601 3D Home Architect files .................................................... 68 3D Menu ............................................... 43 3D or Render View, Edit objects in . 590 3D Origin ............................................ 792 3D Preferences .................................. 120 3D Surface, Delete ............................. 591 3D Tab ................................................. 805 3D Toolbar Buttons ............................ 59 3D Tools ............................................. 581 3D View Generation, Speed up ........ 589 3D View Line Weights ....................... 843 3D Views Display .............................................. 588 Display Terrain In ............................... 495 Edit Materials in ................................. 569 Edit Walls in ...................................... 157 Panels ............................................... 122 3D, Remove ........................................ 592
Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the Library ........................................... 532 to the Library ..................................... 531 Tool Buttons ........................................ 18 Transoms Above Doors ..................... 220
Adjust 619 587 582 689 428 587 Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 619 Adjust Material Definition ................ 569 Adjust Wall Angle ..................... 103 , 145 Adobe Acrobat Reader Definition .......................................... 877 Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks ... 778 Advanced Layer Mapping ................ 775 Advanced Render Tab ...................... 567 Aerial View ........................................ 575
Lights ............................................... Overviews ......................................... Perspective and Render Cameras ...... Polylines ........................................... the Height ......................................... the View Angle ..................................
A
Absolute Location
895
Index
Numerics
877 709 678 707 Active Cameras ................................. 122 Add a Gable Over Doors ........................... 220 a Molding Profile ............................... 532 a New Library .................................... 531 a New Symbol ................................... 531 Extension Lines ................................. 642 Floors ............................................... 270 Floors Between Existing Floors .......... 271 Images to the Library ......................... 764 New Layout Lines .............................. 822 Road Objects to the Library ............... 526
Definition .......................................... Move point ........................................ New line end ..................................... New point .........................................
Alcove (Minimum) Definition .......................................... 877 Align Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 303 Curved stairs between floors .............. 303 Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 160 Curved walls between floors .............. 160 Ends of Curved Stairs ........................ 301 Ends of curved stairs to walls or CAD . 301 Roof Edges ....................................... 347 Stem Walls and Footings ................... 284 Text .................................................. 661 Walls ........................................ 159 160 Walls between floors ......................... 174 Allowed Angles ................... 87 , 105 , 161 Allowed Wall Angles ........................ 145 Alpha Channel ................................... 565 Alter Default Wall ............................. 136 Ambient Light ................................... 614 Definition .......................................... 877 Angled dormer hole see also Framing, Hole, Roofs ........... 380 Angles Additional allowed ............................... 87 Allowed for CAD ................................ 105 Definition .......................................... 877 Restrict/Unrestrict ............................. 679 Angular Dimensions ................. 637 , 646 Anti-aliasing ...................................... 117 Definition .......................................... 877 Apex Definition .......................................... 877 Appearance Color, background and reference ......... 92 Appearance Panel .............................. 90 Appliances ......................................... 457 Outlets, where placed ........................ 428 Apply Texture to Material ................ 569 Apron Window Definition .......................................... 877 Arc Specification Dialog .................. 687 Arc Tab .............................................. 687 Arc with Arrow .................................. 686
Arch Tab ..................................... 228 , 265 Arched Door ...................................... 228 Architectural Block Specification Dialog .............................................. 484 Architectural Blocks ................. 480 , 552 Copy ................................................. 482 Delete ............................................... 482 Display .............................................. 481 Edit ................................................... 484 Explode ............................................. 482 Library .............................................. 537 Move ................................................. 483 Rotate ............................................... 483 Select ............................................... 481 Architectural Edit Buttons ................. 62 Arcs ............................................ 684 , 722 About center ...................................... 686 Affect CAD stops ............................... 714 Change to lines ................................... 65 Chord direction .................................. 685 Definition ........................................... 877 Degrees in arc ................................... 685 Direction of bend ............................... 685 Draw along arc .................................. 684 Draw using center and radius ............. 686 Edit ................................................... 684 Length of arc ..................................... 685 Length of chord ................................. 685 Length, definition ............................... 877 Lock center ....................................... 686 Radius .............................................. 685 Start direction .................................... 685 Tangent, make .................... 65 , 160 , 693 Area Living ................................................ 197 Minimum which will dimension ............ 652 Polyline ............................................. 690 Room, display ................................... 196 Arrange All ......................................... 578 Arrange icons .................................... 578 Arrow Bend ................................................. 664 Include .............................................. 664 Joint ................................................. 664 Special use ....................................... 665
896
Arrow Tab ........................................... 683 Arrowhead Color ......................................... 664 , 671 Height ............................................... 656 Size ................................... 656 , 664 , 671 Special use ................................ 664 , 671 Type .................................................. 656 Arrows, Text ....................................... 664 Attach Cabinets ................................. 450 Attenuatation ............................. 433 , 624 Attic Retain attic wall ................................. 174 Walls ................................................. 174 Attic Trusses ...................................... 399 Attributes Tab .................................... 663 Auto Snap ........................................... 109 Definition ........................................... 878 Auto-Detailing .................................... 599 Automatic Exterior Dimensions ...... 639 Automatic Foundations vs. Manual Foundations ...................... 278 Automatic Framing ............................ 370 vs. Manual Framing ............................ 366 Automatic Rebuild of Floors and Ceilings ........................................... 351 Automatic Roofs ................................ 332 vs. Manual Roofs ............................... 331 Automatically Generate Sidewalks . 521 Automatically Generated Roof Styles ..................................... 334 Automatically Mulled Units .............. 237 Autosave Files .................................... 79 Awning Window Definition ........................................... 878
Backdrop
B
Back Clip ............................................ 598 Definition ........................................... 878 Back Splash Definition ........................................... 878
Backdrops .......................... 548 , 552 , 610 Backdrops Library ............................ 537 Background Colors ................................................. 92 Render ............................... 99 , 123 , 610 Backup Files ........................................ 80 Balcony Room label ....................................... 195 Balusters ........................................... 180 Definition .......................................... 878 Base cabinet Definition .......................................... 878 Base Cabinets ................................... 438 Base, Full Height, Wall Cabinets, Shelf, Partition .......................................... 463 Base, Truss ....................................... 404 Baseboard Definition .......................................... 878 Molding ..................................... 206 , 210 Baseline (Roofs) ........ 343 , 358 , 360 , 414 Definition .......................................... 878 Baseline Dimensions ....................... 639 Baselines (Roofs) ............................. 337 Batten Definition .......................................... 879 Bay Window ....................................... 234 Bay Trimmers .................................... 376 Definition .......................................... 879 see also Windows Bay Window Specification Dialog .. 247 Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs 250 Beam Specification .......................... 394 Beams Definition .......................................... 879 Exposed ........................................... 200 Soffits ............................................... 200 Bearing Line .............................. 368 , 384 Bearing Lines
Add new ................................... 120 , 764 Create ...................................... 120 , 764 Definition .................................. 610 , 878
897
Index
Definition .......................................... 879 Bearings ............................................ 111 Definition .......................................... 879 Relative to North pointer .................... 740 Bifold Door Definition .......................................... 879 Bifold Doors .............................. 212 , 219 Bi-levels ............................................. 189 Birds eye view Definition .......................................... 879 Zoom window .................................... 575 Birdsmouth ........................................ 358 Definition .......................................... 879 Bit Definition .......................................... 879 Bitmaps Definition .......................................... 879 Directories .......................................... 99 Black and White, Printing ................ 842 Blind Cabinets .................................. 452 Block Fill ............................................ 110 Blocked Doors and Windows .......... 221 Blocked Units .................................... 237 Blocking ............................................. 369 Boolean Algebra Definition .......................................... 879 Borders (Layout) ....................... 810 811 Double .............................................. 812 Rounded ........................................... 812 Show/Hide ........................................ 818 Bottom Chord .................................... 381 Bottom Plate Number of ......................................... 375 Thickness ......................................... 375 Bow Window ...................................... 235 Definition .......................................... 879 Bow Window Specification .............. 249 Box Tools .......................................... 701 Box Window ...................................... 235 Definition .......................................... 879 Box, 3D .............................................. 542 Boxes ................................................. 701
Break
CAD item .................................... 64 , 723 Partial ............................................... 724
Break Line .......................................... 723 Break Wall .................................. 136 , 143 Definition ........................................... 879 Brick Veneer ...................................... 466 Bridging ............................................. 369 Definition ........................................... 879 Build Additional Floors ................................ 270 Ceiling Framing ................................. 366 Foundation ................................ 271 , 279 new floor ........................................... 270 Terrain .............................................. 495 Wall Framing ..................................... 366 Build Framing Dialog ....................... 371 Build House ....................................... 747 Build House Wizard .......................... 145 Build Menu ........................................... 31 Build New Floor ................................ 270 Build Roof Dialog .............................. 352 Build Tab ............................................ 352 Building Codes .................................. 747 Built-in Fixtures Create ............................................... 547 Built-in fixtures Delete ............................................... 547 Buttons 3D Toolbar .......................................... 59 CAD .................................................. 712 Edit Toolbar ........................................ 62
C
Cabinet
Defaults ...................................... 85 , 438 Handles ............................................ 441 Labels ............................................... 442
Cabinet Door Library ........................ 440 Cabinet Doors Library ...................... 537 Cabinet Front Tab ............................. 456
898
Cabinet Library .................................. 440 Cabinet Modules Definition ........................................... 880 Library ............................................... 538 Cabinet Specification Dialog ........... 453 Cabinet Tools ..................................... 438 Cabinets ..................................... 437 , 552 Angled front ............................... 451 , 454 Attach ................................................ 450 Attach to wall ..................................... 450 Backsplash ........................................ 455 Base Cabinet ..................................... 438 Bevel ................................................. 458 Blind .................................................. 452 Copy ................................................. 444 Copy, (individual, multiple, stacked) .... 444
Corner Corner, Create ................................... 438 Corner, resize .................................... 446 Counter top ........................................ 455 Countertop, custom .................... 439 , 449 Delete ............................................... 443 Delete face items ............................... 458 Delete, (individual or multiple) ............. 443 Dimension to corners/sides ................. 654 Display .............................................. 442 Door library ........................................ 540 Door style .................................. 448 , 454 Door, glass ........................................ 458 Door, on back .................................... 458 Edit ................................................... 447 End cabinets ...................................... 451 Face Style ......................................... 454 Filler .................................................. 450 Flat sides ........................................... 458 Full height ......................................... 438 Glass doors ....................................... 458 Handles ............................................. 441 Lazy Susan ........................................ 458 Library ............................................... 440 Library, doors styles ................... 454 , 462 Min. Width ......................................... 438 Minimum Width .................. 438 , 463 , 466 Mode ................................................. 437 Module lines ...................................... 442 Move ................................................. 445 Move (individual or multiple) ............... 445
Move, restrictions .............................. Move, with wall .................................. Normal ...................................... 451 , Outlet placement ............................... Partition ............................................ Peninsula radius ........................ 451 , Radius end ............................... 451 , Resize .............................................. Restrictions, move ............................. Reverse fixture .................................. Roll-out shelves ................................ Rotate .............................................. Rotate (individual or multiple) ..... 446 , Select ............................................... Select handles .................................. Separation ........................................ Shaped ............................................. Shelves, roll out ................................ Special ............................................. Special shape ........................... 451 , Stile .................................................. Toe kick ............................................ Wall .................................................. Width Increment ................. 438 , 463 ,
445 450 454 428 439 454 454 446 445 458 458 446 483 440 441 458 451 458 451 454 458 455 450 466
CAD
Align edges ................................. 64 , 714 Allowed angles .................................. 105 Always available ................................ 735 Angles, restriction ............................. 679 Auto Snap ......................................... 677 Bitmap, insert .......................... 60 , 63 , 65 Block .......................................... 64 , 726 Block, copy ....................................... 726 Block, create ............................... 64 , 726 Block, delete ..................................... 726 Block, edit ......................................... 726 Block, fill by block .............................. 110 Block, fill by item ............................... 110 Block, rotate ...................................... 726 Block, scale ...................................... 726 Block, select ..................................... 726 Box ................................................... 701 Box, draw ......................................... 701 Box, edit ........................................... 701 Box, framing .............................. 701 702 Break ................................................ 723 Callout .............................................. 727
899
Index
Chamfer ...................................... 64 , 725 Change current layer ......................... 128 Circle ................................................ 704 Circle about center ............................ 704 Concentric copy ................................ 108 Concentric edit type ........................... 107 Concentric Jump ............................... 107 Convert to Terrain ............................. 512 Copy .................................. 108 , 711 , 715 Copy Point to Point ............................ 752 Copy, Point to Point ........................... 752 Create details .................................... 711 Cross box ......................................... 702 Definition .......................................... 880 Delete Points .................................... 708 Detail window ............................ 676 , 740 Dimension ......................................... 732 Dimensions, locate settings ............... 655 Explode Block ............................. 64 , 727 Extend ................................ 64 , 723 724 Fence ....................................... 711 , 724 Fill block by item ............................... 110 Fillet ........................................... 64 , 725 Fillet type .......................................... 109 Framing .................................... 701 702 Group edit ......................................... 711 Joist direction .................................... 385 Layer 9, cross section ........................ 710 Layers .............................................. 127 Layers, change current ...................... 128 Layers, Display ................................. 127 Layers, Line color .............................. 127 Layers, Line style .............................. 127 Layers, Line weight ........................... 127 Layers, Lock ..................................... 127 Layers, Reference plan ...................... 127 Line .................................................. 676 Line Properties .................................. 111 Line thickness visibility ...................... 743 Line to Arc button ................................ 65 Locate ends and corners ................... 655 Make Parallel/Perp. ..................... 64 , 714 Marker .............................................. 727 Move by dragging .............................. 713 Move Corners ................................... 107 Move Point to Point ........................... 752 Number style ..................................... 733 Oval ................................................. 705
Partial break ...................................... 724 Point ................................................. 707 Point, create ...................................... 707 Point, current ............................. 677 , 707 Point, keyboard input ......................... 707 Point, move (general) ........................ 708 Point, move along line........................ 709 Polyline ............................................. 344 Polyline, rectangular (tool) ................. 701 Positioning Unit ................................. 106 Resize ...................................... 105 , 108 Rotate around ................................... 105 Rotate items ...................................... 105 Rotate Jump ...................................... 105 Select ....................................... 710 711 Stops affected by curves .................... 714 Tangent button ............................ 65 , 693 Trim .................................... 64 , 723 724
CAD and Text in Layout ................... 810 CAD Block .......................... 553 , 726 , 731 Add to the Library .............................. 531 Creating Library ................................. 731 Definition ........................................... 880 Delete ............................................... 728 Duplicates ................................. 777 778 Insert ................................................ 728 Management ..................................... 728 Nested ...................................... 726 , 732 Undelete ........................................... 728 CAD Block Specification Dialog ..... 729 CAD Blocks Create a Library ................................ 731 CAD Blocks and Polylines ............... 722 CAD Blocks Library .......................... 538 CAD Box Specification Dialog ........ 703 CAD Buttons ...................................... 712 CAD Circle Specification Dialog ..... 705 CAD Detail Definition ........................................... 880 Trusses ............................................. 402 CAD Detail from View ............... 600 , 741 CAD Details ....................................... 740 CAD Drawing Tools .......................... 676 CAD Edit Buttons ........................ 64 , 712
900
CAD Facility Definition ........................................... 880 CAD Layers ................................ 127 , 129 Definition ........................................... 880 CAD Layers in Cross Sections ........ 710 CAD Line Properties ......................... 111 CAD Menu ..................................... 46 , 735 CAD mode ............................................. 4 CAD Objects Convert ............................................. 733 Copy ................................................. 715 Display .............................................. 710 Drawn in Layout ................................. 824 in a 3D view Sent to Layout ................ 824 in Elevations and CAD Details ............ 820 Move ................................................. 713 Select ................................................ 710 CAD Oval Specification Dialog ........ 706 CAD Panel .......................................... 104 CAD Polylines .................................... 689 CAD Preferences ............................... 732 CAD to Walls ...................... 160 , 733 , 772 Calculate All Floors ............................................ 63 Area, using polyline ............................ 862 Floor Heights ..................................... 189 From All Floors .................................. 861 From Area ......................................... 862 From Room ........................................ 862 Materials .............................................. 3 Materials on Soffits ............................ 467 Materials on soffits ............................. 467 Room area ......................................... 196 Callout Size ......................................... 96 Callout Specification Dialog ............ 669 Callout Tab ......................................... 669 Callouts .............................................. 667 Arrows ............................................... 668 CAD .................................................. 727 Color ................................................. 668 Cross section line .............................. 670 Definition ........................................... 880 Delete ............................................... 668 Edit ................................................... 668
Height ....................................... 504 , Layer ................................................ Move ................................................ Resize .............................................. Rotate .............................................. Select ............................................... Shape ............................................... Size .................................................. Text ..................................................
670 668 668 669 668 668 670 668 668
Camera
Adjust Perspective and Render .......... 582 Change Settings ................................ 592 Clip Surfaces within ................... 593 594 Color (red and green) ........................ 122 Defaults ...................................... 85 , 593 Definition .......................................... 880 Degrees each rotate .................. 593 594 Floor ................................................. 580 Full ................................................... 580 Green in Plan View ............................ 122 Height above floor ..................... 593 594 Move Tools ....................................... 583 Movement ......................................... 608 Movement Tools .................................. 60 Orbit Tools ........................................ 582 Perspective ....................................... 580 Remove Wall within ................... 593 594 Restrict to room ................................. 581 Save 3D ............................................ 591 Save Cross Section/Elevation ............ 600 Tilt Tools ........................................... 583 Tools ................................................ 582
Camera Specification Dialog ........... 592 Cape Cod Platforms, combine ............................ 386 Cartesian coordinates Definition .......................................... 880 Cascade ............................................. 578 Views ............................................... 578 Windows ........................................... 578 Casement window Definition .......................................... 880 Casing Definition .......................................... 880 Ignore for opening resize ..................... 87 Casing Tab ........................................ 258
901
Index
Categories ......................................... 863 Categories Panel .............................. 116 Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 199 Definition .......................................... 880 Ceiling Basement ......................................... 280 Build ................................................. 352 Cathedral .......................................... 199 Coffered ........................................... 199 Custom ............................................. 351 Diagram ............................................ 190 Different styles .................................. 189 Dropped ............................................ 198 Exposed beams ................................ 200 False ................................................ 198 Flat ceiling over this room .................. 208 Height ................ 189 190 , 204 205 , 209 Height, floor below ............................ 206 Lowered ............................................ 198 Materials ........................................... 188 Remove flat ceiling ............................ 208 Tiles ................................................. 199 For deck ........................................... 170 Ceiling Plane ............................. 330 , 350 Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog . 360 Ceiling Truss ..................................... 398 Ceilings .............................................. 249 Ceilings, Special ............................... 198 Center Curved walls, maintain location .......... 156 Doors ............................................... 217 Handle, curved walls ......................... 154 Lock Arc ........................................... 686 Window along wall ............................. 244 Window to sink .................................. 244 Windows ........................................... 244 Chair rail .................................... 207 , 210 Definition .......................................... 880 Molding ..................................... 206 , 210 Chamfer ............................................. 725 Definition .......................................... 880 Chamfer Two Lines .......................... 725 Change Arc to line ......................................... 302 Display of Layout Views ..................... 818
Door Swings ...................................... 217 Layout Line Length ............................ 822 Line to arc ......................................... 302 Materials in 3D Views ........................ 589 Printer for Final Plots ......................... 831 Printer from Layout ............................ 829 Printing Line Weight ........................... 824 Radius of Curved Stairs ..................... 304 View Panel Factors ............................ 589 Wall Types for Pony Walls ................. 139
Change Floor/Reference .................. 273 Change Line to Arc ........................... 693 Change Roof Pitch or Height Dialog ................................. 348 Check Plots ....................................... 830 Checkbox Definition ........................................... 881 Checklist, IRC .................................... 748 Chief Architect Definition ........................................... 881 Exit ..................................................... 77 Serial number ...................................... 59 Start ................................................... 10 Terms ................................................... 4 Tools .................................................. 22 Version number ................................... 59 Child Buttons ...................................... 18 Chimneys ........................................... 476 Masonry fireplaces ............................ 476 Metal fireplaces ................................. 476 Chord .................................................. 146 Definition ........................................... 881 Direction, arc ..................................... 685 Chord Angle Definition ........................................... 881 Circles ................................................ 704 Circle about center ............................ 704 Create ............................................... 704 Draw using center and radius ............. 704 Edit ................................................... 704 Clear the Terrain ............................... 497 Click Definition ............................................... 6 Clipboard
902
Definition ........................................... 881
Close
Create Symbol Wizard ........................ 804 Plans and Views ................................. 76 Views ................................................ 578
Closed polyline see also Polylines Coffered Ceiling Definition ........................................... 881 Coffered Ceilings .............................. 199 Color Off/On ....................................... 588 Colors Panel ....................................... 92 Columns ............................................. 542 Materials List settings ......................... 113 Tabs .................................................. 663 Columns Tab ...................................... 869 Components ....................... 247 , 484 , 534 Definition ........................................... 881 Components and Master List Columns .......................................... 865 Components Dialog .......................... 869 Compound Angled Walls .................. 172 Concave Curved Walls and Resulting Roofs ...... 168 Walls and resulting roofs .................... 168 Concentric .......................................... 107 CAD Edit type .................................... 107 Copy, CAD ........................................ 108 Definition ........................................... 881 Jump, CAD ........................................ 107 Concrete Stairs .................................. 315 Cone .................................................... 542 Configurations Tab ............................ 20 Connect Electrical ............................. 424 Connect Walls .................................... 158 Contextual Menu ............................... 608 Contextual Menus .............................. 91 Definition ...................................... 7 , 881 Contours Tab ..................................... 501 Convert CAD Lines to Terrain Data .................. 512 CAD Objects ...................................... 733
Copy ................................................... Architectural Blocks ........................... Cabinets ........................................... CAD Objects ..................................... Concentrically ................................... Doors ............................................... Electrical Objects .............................. Floors ............................................... Floors with Edit Area ......................... Folders and Library Objects ............... Images ............................................. Library List ........................................ Library Objects .................................. Restrictions ....................................... Stairs ................................................ Terrain .............................................. Trusses ............................................ Views ............................................... Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... Windows ........................................... Copy with Edit Area ......................... Copy, Cut and Paste ........................ Corner Boards ................................... Corner Cabinets ................................ Corner Windows ............................... Cosmo Player .................................... Definition .......................................... Countertops, Edit Custom ............... Court Room label ....................................... 195 CPU Definition .......................................... 881 Craftsman style Definition .......................................... 881 Create
903
Index
CAD Polylines ................................... Polyline ............................................. Polyline Dialog .................................. Polylines into Special Polylines .......... Polylines into Splines ........................ Room Molding ................................... Schedules to Text ............................. Special Polylines into Polylines .......... Splines into Polylines ........................ to Polyline Road/Sidewalk ..................
488 512 734 733 699 486 858 733 699 521 715 482 444 715 108 215 426 272 754 533 763 533 550 753 296 496 400 817 149 242 753 661 476 446 236 768 881 449
a Bar ................................................ 452 a Bench Seat .................................... 249 a Flared Stair .................................... 310 a Library of CAD Blocks ..................... 731 a New Layer Set ................................ 129 a Nook .............................................. 171 a Plan Database File ........................... 74 a Pony Wall ...................................... 138 a Raytrace View ................................ 627 a Stairwell ......................................... 316 Architectural Blocks ........................... 480 Backdrops ......................................... 120 Bay, Box and Bow Windows Manually 235 CAD Block ........................................ 795 CAD Details ...................................... 740 Compound Angled Walls .................... 172 Cross Section/Elevation Views ........... 596 Doors ............................................... 213 Exterior Decks ................................... 170 Interior Stairwells .............................. 170 Materials for Raytracing ..................... 630 Model ............................................... 847 Muntins ............................... 62 , 246 , 347 New Electrical Symbol ....................... 796 New Fixture ...................................... 796 New floor .......................................... 270 Objects in 3D Views .......................... 591 Polyline Solids .................................. 488 Raked Walls ...................................... 172 Render Views from Perspective Views 606 Rooms Beneath Staircases ................ 317 Schedules ......................................... 852 Stepped Walls and Footings .............. 169 Template Plan ..................................... 72 Terrain Features ................................ 493 Winders ............................................ 307 Wiring Schematics ............................. 424
Edit Truss Shape in ........................... 402 Save ................................................. 600
Create Symbol Wizard Close ................................................ 804 Open ................................................ 789 Cross Boxes ...................................... 702 Cross Hair ............................................ 98 Cross Section Lines ......................... 668 Cross Section Slider Dialog ............ 626 Cross Section/Elevations ........ 815 , 821 Create .............................................. 596
Crown molding Definition ........................................... 881 Ctrl key Pan the display .................................. 576 Cubes ................................................. 542 Cul-de-sacs ........................................ 521 Curb Tab ............................................ 523 Current Layer, dimensions ............................. 652 Current CAD Layer ............................ 128 Current Floor Delete ............................................... 271 Current Floor / Reference Floor ...... 272 Current Point Definition ........................................... 882 Cursor Coordinates ........................... 10 , 91 , 676 Cross Hair ........................................... 98 Definition ........................................... 882 Curvature Handle, curved wall ........................... 155 Curved Stairs ................................ 290 , 296 , 301 Stairs Made Tangent .......................... 303 Stairs, Change Radius ....................... 304 Treads .............................................. 311 Wall Tools ......................................... 137 Walls ........................................ 149 , 158 Walls and Roofs ................................ 168 Walls, Draw ....................................... 146 Walls, Edit ......................................... 153 Curved Deck Railing ......................... 137 Custom 2D symbols ....................................... 711 Custom Counter Tops ...................... 439 Custom Counterholes ...................... 439 Custom Countertop Specification Dialog .............................................. 461 Custom Countertops, Edit ............... 449 Custom Muntins ........................ 220 , 246 Custom Shaped Landings ................ 297
904
Customize Toolbars ....................... 4 , 18 Cylinders ............................................ 542
D
Dash
Add to dimensions .............................. 650 Decimal feet ....................................... 111 Deck .................................................... 170 Ceiling over ....................................... 170 Create ............................................... 170 Room label ........................................ 195 Deck Railing ....................................... 192 Deck Railings ..................................... 136 Decks .......................................... 136 , 192 Default Dimension Fonts .................. 636 Default Lights .................................... 615 Default Origin Locations .................. 792 Defaults Cabinet ...................................... 438 , 463 Camera ............................................. 593 Dimension ......................................... 636 Dimensions ........................................ 649 Door .......................................... 211 , 231 Dynamic ............................................. 86 Electrical ........................................... 435 Floor ......................................... 209 , 269 Foundation ........................................ 277 Framing ..................................... 365 , 371 Plan ................................................... 86 Railing ............................................... 185 Reset to .............................................. 89 Road and Sidewalk ............................ 515 Roof .................................................. 330 Room ................................................ 188 Room Material ................................... 188 Schedule ........................................... 851 Wall/Railing ....................................... 184 Window ..................................... 234 , 267 Define Default Materials ................................ 571 Light Types ........................................ 618 Line Weight ....................................... 843 Materials ........................................... 558
Define Materials Dialog ............ 558 , 569 Degrees in arc ................................... 685 Delete ......................................... 534 , 721 3D Surface ........................................ 591 a Layer Set ....................................... 130 a Polyline Edge ................................. 724 an Area ............................................. 752 Architectural Blocks ........................... 482 Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 550 Cabinets ........................................... 443 Cabinets (individual or multiple) ......... 443 CAD items ........................................ 721 CAD points ....................................... 708 Callouts ............................................ 668 Current Floor ..................................... 271 Dimension Lines ................................ 640 Dimension section ............................. 640 Doors ............................................... 215 Edge of polyline ................................ 724 Electrical ........................................... 426 Electrical Objects .............................. 426 Extension Lines ................................. 643 Floors ............................................... 271 Foundation ........................................ 283 Foundations ...................................... 283 Hatch, walls ...................................... 142 Keyboard .......................................... 708 Landing ............................................ 294 Layout Lines ..................................... 822 Layout view ....................................... 817 Library Objects .................................. 550 Markers ............................................ 672 Objects ............................................. 754 Plans .................................................. 80 Polyline Solids .................................. 488 Road Objects .................................... 519 Roof Planes .............................. 331 , 343 Shadows ........................................... 618 Stairs ................................................ 294 Stairs/Stair section ............................ 294 Surface ............................................. 604 Temporary Points .............................. 708 Terrain Data ...................................... 496 Text .................................................. 660 Tools from Toolbars ............................. 19 Trusses ............................................ 400 Views ............................................... 817
905
Index
142 158 148 242 Delete Gable Over Opening ............. 349 Depth .................................................. 373 Fireplace ................................... 472 , 848 Framing ............................................ 373 Detail a Cross Section/Elevation .... 599 Detail Mode, Low .............................. 607 Details CAD ................................................. 740 Truss ................................................ 402 Wall Framing ..................................... 388 Diagram Floor and ceiling ................................ 190 Room cross section ........................... 206 Diamond style Definition .......................................... 882 see Lites Dimension Defaults .................... 85 , 636 Dimension Defaults Dialog .............. 649 Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................. 646 Dimension Lines Delete ............................................... 640 Display ............................................. 640 Edit ................................................... 641 Select ............................................... 640 Dimension Tab .................................. 647 Dimension Tools ............................... 636 Dimensions ............................... 732 , 772 1st line offset .................................... 652 Add extension ................................... 642 Angular dimensions ........................... 637 Angular, CAD .................................... 732 Arrow see Arrowhead Automatic reach ................................ 652 Automatic/Manual Toggle .................. 647 To cabinets ............................... 653 654 To CAD .............................. 653 654 , 732 Create interior ................................... 638 Current layer ..................................... 652 Customize individual .......................... 647
Wall hatch ......................................... Walls ................................................ Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... Windows ...........................................
Delete complete line .......................... 640 Delete extension line ......................... 643 Delete section ................................... 640 Different Formats ............................... 649 Distance between .............................. 652 Edit ................................................... 641 To electrical items ..................... 653 654 End-to-end ........................................ 637 Erase ................................................ 640 Exterior ............................................. 639 Fireplace, suppress dimension ........... 473 Font ............................................ 93 , 636 General settings ................................ 651 Handle locations ................................ 641 Height ............................................... 651 Imperial ............................................. 650 Import/Export .................................... 644 Inches only ........................................ 652 Interior .............................................. 638 Items located ..................................... 654 Line separation .................................. 652 Locate CAD ....................................... 732 Locate electrical ................................ 427 Locate items ...................................... 653 Locate no locate walls ........................ 174 Locate on walls ................................. 653 Locate opening automatically ............. 652 Locate overall .................................... 652 Locate railing ..................................... 174 Locate specified items ....................... 637 Manual reach .................................... 652 Metric ............................................... 650 Min. size on screen ............................ 651 Minimum area .................................... 652 Minimum number size ................ 651 652 Move CAD item ................................. 644 Move Extension Lines ........................ 642 Move Labels ...................................... 641 Move walls ................................ 152 , 645 Move Walls Using .............................. 152 Number height ........................... 651 652 Number Size, individual dimension ..... 647 Offset ................................................ 652 To openings .............................. 653 654 Overall .............................................. 652 Point to point ..................................... 637 Print size ........................................... 651 Printing Text and ............................... 837
906
Reach, automatic ............................... 652 Relocate Objects Using ...................... 644 Screen size, minimum ................ 651 652 Separation ......................................... 652 Snap unit ........................................... 651 Temporary ......................................... 644 To Electrical items .............................. 654 To walls (surface, center, main layer) .. 653 When automatic does not work ........... 639
Directories Panel ................................ 99 Directory Autosave ...................................... 79 , 97 Display 3D Views ........................................... 588 Arc Centers ....................... 112 , 146 , 303 Arc Ends ............................................ 112 Architectural Blocks ........................... 481 Cabinet Module Lines ......................... 442 Cabinets ............................................ 442 CAD Objects ...................................... 710 Center of curved wall ......................... 146 Control Handles ................................. 697 Cursors CAD Coordinates ................... 91 Dimension Lines ................................ 640 Doors ................................................ 213 Electrical ........................................... 429 Foundations ....................................... 283 Framing ............................................. 390 Framing only ...................................... 124 Inactive Views .................................... 122 Layout Views ..................................... 818 Library Objects .................................. 549 Line angle in bearings ........................ 111 Line angle in degrees ......................... 111 Line Angles ........................................ 111 Line Length ........................................ 111 Molding Polylines ............................... 486 Objects .............................................. 128 Objects in Reference Floor ................. 274 Polyline Solids ................................... 489 Pony Walls in Plan View ..................... 148 Road Objects ..................................... 519 Roof Planes ....................................... 342 Room Labels ..................................... 196 Stairs ................................................ 292 Terrain In 3D Views ............................ 495 Terrain in Plan View ........................... 494
658 864 818 147 240 Display Options ................................ 762 Display Tab ........................................ 355 Distance Above Floor ...................... 210 Dithering Definition .......................................... 882 Divided Lites see Lites Dockable Toolbar Definition .......................................... 882 Docking the Library Browser .......... 530 Dongle Definition .......................................... 882 Door Defaults ...................... 84 , 211 , 231 Door Specification Dialog ............... 221 Door Swings, Change ...................... 217 Door Tools ......................................... 212 Doors 6-panel see Doors, Library Arch ................................................. 228 Blocked ............................................ 221 Casing, interior and exterior ............... 225 Center .............................................. 217 Copy ................................................. 215 Curved doors .................................... 224 Custom ............................................. 213 Delete ............................................... 215 Display ............................................. 213 Door style, library .............................. 222 Edit ................................................... 221 Entry ................................................ 237 Frame ............................................... 225 Gable over ........................................ 220 Headers ............................................ 377 In curved walls .................................. 224 Library 203 204 , 213 , 222 , 440 , 480 , 485 Lites (across and vertical) .................. 226 Move ................................................ 216 Move (individual or multiple) ...... 216 , 483 Move by dragging ...................... 216 , 483 Move restrictions ............................... 216 Muntin Width ..................................... 226
Text .................................................. the Master List .................................. View Borders .................................... Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... Windows ...........................................
907
Index
Opening ............................................ 211 Opening, wrapped ............................. 220 Plinth block, add ................................ 223 Railing opening ................................. 220 Recessed .......................................... 223 Recessed to sheathing layer .............. 223 Replicate .................................. 215 , 482 Resize .............................................. 219 Rough opening .................................. 375 Schedule .................................. 851 852 Select ............................................... 214 Select (individual or multiple) ............. 214 Special ............................................. 220 Special casings ................................. 224 Standard ........................................... 211 Style .......................... 203 204 , 222 , 485 Swing, changing for bifold .................. 219 Swing, changing for pocket ................ 218 Threshold ......................................... 748 Transom window ............................... 220 Trim .................................................. 225 Trimmers .......................................... 376 Type .......................... 203 204 , 222 , 485 Use to make opening in railing ........... 140 Wrapped opening .............................. 220
Curved Railing ................................... 146 Curved wall ....................................... 146 Curved Walls ..................................... 146 Custom Moldings ............................... 532 Framing Members .............................. 389 Wall Framing Members ...................... 389 Walls ................................................ 144 Your Own Electrical ........................... 424
Doors and Doorways ........................ 553 Doors Library .................................... 539 Doorways Openings (ISD) ......................... 802 803 Doorways Library ............................. 539 Dormer ............................................... 339 Angled hole for framing ...................... 380 Definition .......................................... 882 Over Windows and Doors, Gable ........ 349 Double Buffer Drawing ...................... 91 Double Hung Window Definition .......................................... 882 Double Sill see Windows Double truss see Trusses Double-click Definition .............................................. 6 Double-Line Borders ........................ 812 Drag Definition .............................................. 6 Draw
Draw Arc About Center .................... 686 Draw Circle About Center ................ 704 Drawing Unit ................................................... 779 Driveway Specification Dialog ........ 524 Driveways .......................................... 520 Drop Hip ............................................. 411 Drop Hip Truss see Trusses Dropped ceiling Definition ........................................... 882 Duplicate CAD Blocks ...................... 777 Dutch Gable Roof Definition ........................................... 883 Dwang (blocking) Definition ........................................... 883 DXF 3D DXF layers ................................... 784 Code ................................................. 785 Definition ................................... 882 883 Export 2D, all floors ........................... 780 Export 2D, cross section .................... 780 Export 2D, current floor ...................... 780 Export 2D, elevation .......................... 780 Export 2D, layers ............................... 782 Export 2D, overview ........................... 780 Export 3D, layers ............................... 784 Export 3D, model ............................... 784 Import, assign layers .......................... 776 Import, mapping layers ...................... 776 Layers ............................................... 782 Mapping layers on import ................... 776 vs. DWG ........................................... 772 DXF/DWG 2D View ............................................ 782 Elevation Data, Import ....................... 511 Export 3D .......................................... 784 Files ................................................. 507
908
Files, Export 2D ................................. 780 Files, Import 2D ................................. 772
Dynamic Defaults ........................... 8 , 86 Dynamic Views .................................. 819
E
Earth Data Tab ................................... 620 Eaves .................................................. 381 Definition ........................................... 883 Plumb cut .......................................... 355 Square cut ......................................... 355 Edge Flashing Definition ........................................... 883 Edge Lines ......................................... 791 Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 791 Edit Architectural Blocks ........................... 484 Arcs Using Handles ............................ 684 Bay Box, and Bow Windows ............... 247 Cabinets ............................................ 447 Callouts ............................................. 668 Curved Walls ..................................... 153 Custom Countertops .......................... 449 Dimension Lines ................................ 641 Doors ................................................ 221 Elevation Data ................................... 497 Extension Lines ................................. 642 Framing ............................................. 390 in a 3D or Render View ...................... 590 Layout ............................................... 822 Libraries ............................................ 533 Library Objects .................................. 551 Markers ............................................. 672 Masonry Fireplaces ............................ 472 Materials in 3D Views ......................... 569 Materials in Render Views .................. 611 Materials Lists ................................... 867 Molding Polylines ............................... 486 Objects in Render Views .................... 611 Pier and Grade Beam Foundations ..... 285 Piers and Pads .................................. 285 Polyline Parts, illustration ................... 110 Polyline Solids ................................... 488 Polylines ............................................ 689
Road Objects .................................... 520 Roof Baselines .................................. 338 Roof Planes ...................................... 344 Room Labels ..................................... 196 Rooms .............................................. 746 Selected Objects ................................. 11 Stairs ................................................ 318 Terrain Features ................................ 498 Text .................................................. 660 the Cabinet Door Style ....................... 448 the Components Dialog ..................... 870 the Length of Extension Lines ............ 643 the Master List .................................. 865 the Terrain Perimeter ......................... 497 Truss Shape in Cross Section View .... 402 Walls ................................................ 153 Walls in 3D ....................................... 157
Edit Area ............................................ (All Floors) ........................................ Copies, position exactly ..................... Copy area ......................................... Copy area between floors .................. Copy area between plans ..................
Copy plan Copy, hold position between floors ..... Copy, reflected .................................. Copy/Paste ....................................... Delete area ....................................... Delete contents of plan ...................... Delete floor ....................................... Hold position ..................................... Mirror area ................................ 718 , Move ................................................ Move, point to point ........................... Moving speed .................................... Point-to-Point Move ........................... Polylines as selection box .................. Reflect About Line ............................. Reflect around line .................... 718 , Reflective Copy ................................. Rotate area ....................................... Stack copies exactly .......................... Visible ..............................................
750 751 753 753 753 753
Edit Edit Edit Edit
754 754 753 752 752 752 754 753 751 752 652 752 751 753 753 754 752 753 750 Components ...................... 429 , 448 in a 3D View ............................... 590 Layout Lines Dialog ................. 823 Material Components ............... 484
909
Index
Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit
Menu ............................................. 25 Polyline Parts ............................ 110 Preferences Panel ...................... 90 Toolbar ......................................... 12 Toolbar Buttons .......................... 62 Type ............................................ 107 Concentric ........................................ 107 Fillet ................................................. 109 Move Corners ................................... 107 Resize .............................................. 108
see also CAD
Rotate ............................................... 427 Select ............................................... 426
Edit Walls in 3D ................................ 157 Egress (Windows) Definition .......................................... 883 Electrical ............................................ 553 Apply materials to .............................. 434 Buttons ............................................. 422 Connect ............................................ 424 Connect Additional ............................ 424 Copy ................................................. 426 Delete ............................................... 426 Dimension to ..................................... 654 Display in 2D ..................................... 429 Display in 3D ..................................... 429 General ............................................ 421 Layer to Material Mapping .................. 796 Library .............................................. 545 Light ................................................. 423 Locate, dimensions ........................... 427 Mode ................................................ 422 Move by dragging .............................. 427 Move using dimensions ..................... 427 Naming items .................................... 431 Options ............................................. 422 Outlet ............................................... 422 Outlets, automatic ............................. 425 Rotate .............................................. 427 Switch .............................................. 423 Symbol library ................................... 425 Electrical Defaults ...................... 85 , 435 Electrical Library ...................... 425 , 540 Electrical Objects Copy ................................................. 426 Delete ............................................... 426 Move ................................................ 427
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .............................................. 430 Electrical Tools ................................. 422 Electrical, Display ............................. 429 Elevation Data ................................... 492 Edit ................................................... 497 Import DXF/DWG ............................... 511 Elevation Line Specification Dialog 504 Elevation Lines and Splines ............ 498 Elevation Point Specification Dialog .............................................. 502 Elevation Points ........................ 492 , 497 Elevation Tab .................................... 505 Elevations Create ............................................... 596 Definition ........................................... 883 Exterior see Cross section Interior .............................................. 597 Update to layout ................................ 821 End Truss see Trusses Endcap Length .................................. 112 End-to-End Dimensions ................... 637 Energy heel ........................................ 417 Engineered lumber ............. 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Definition ........................................... 883 Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 766 Enter Dimensions ................................. 7 Estimating Software ......................... 872 Exit Chief Architect ............................ 77 Expand Room Polyline ..................... 202 Expand/Collapse All ......................... 534 Explode Architectural Blocks ........................... 482 Block .......................................... 64 , 727 Export ................................................. 771 2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 780 3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator .... 785 3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 784 an Entire Plan ..................................... 77
910
Definition ........................................... 883 Drawing File ...................................... 781 DWG ................................................. 780 DXF, 2D layers .................................. 782 DXF, 3D model .................................. 784 Layout ............................................... 830 Layout Files ....................................... 830 Material Definitions ............................ 570 Materials ........................................... 871 Materials List ..................................... 872 Metafile ............................................. 765 Picture Files ...................................... 761 Render view ...................................... 611 the Materials List ................................ 871 to POV-Ray ....................................... 634 VRML ........................................ 768 769 VRML Files ........................................ 769 Wall Definitions .................................. 167 Wall layers ......................................... 167 Windows Metafiles ............................. 765 WMF ................................................. 765
F
F,1-10 (Floor) Tabs ........................... 371 F6 key Fill window ........................................ 574 Face Definition .......................................... 883 Fascia ................................................. 381 Definition .......................................... 883 Plumb cut or square cut ..................... 358 Roof ................................................. 380 Top .................................... 358 , 360 , 414 Faster Raytracing ............................. 632 Faster Rendering .............................. 612 Fence .......................................... 711 , 724 Definition .......................................... 883 Fencing ...................................... 136 , 141 Fencing Defaults Dialog .................. 186 Field of View ....................... 594 , 609 , 769 File Definition .......................................... 883 File Extension Definition .......................................... 884 File Extensions, Floors and ............ 269 File locking .......................................... 98 Definition .......................................... 884 File Menu ............................................. 22 File Types ............................................ 80 File types DAT .................................................... 81 DLL .................................................... 81 DXF .................................................... 80 EXE .................................................... 81 LA1 .................................................... 80 LCK .................................................... 98 MAT ................................................... 80 PAn .............................................. 79 80 PBn .................................................... 80 PL0 .................................................. 270 PL1 .................................................. 270 PL2 .................................................. 270 PL3 .................................................. 270 PL4 .................................................. 270
Exposed beams ................................. 200 Extend ................................... 64 , 723 724 Fence ........................................ 711 , 724 Handle, curved wall ............................ 155 Objects .............................................. 724 Extend Slope Downward .................. 335 Extension Lines, Edit ........................ 642 Extension Tab .................................... 648 Extensions Tab .................................. 655 Exterior Deck ................................................. 170 Dimensions ........................................ 639 Door, threshold .................................. 748 Elevation see Cross section Room type ......................................... 194 Rooms ............................................... 194 Walls ................................. 135 , 137 , 174 Exterior Fixtures Library .................. 540 Exterior Furnishings Library ........... 541 Exterior Plinth Block ........................ 223 Exterior Rooms .................................. 194 External only ...................................... 653
911
Index
80 80 81 80 80 81 -File-Close ........................................... 76 Files Required by Chief Architect .... 81 Fill Polyline ..................................... 692 , 700 Window ............................................. 574 Fill Style Tab ..................................... 692 Fill Window ........................................ 574 Fillers ................................................. 452 Fillet Button ................................................. 64 CAD edit type .................................... 109 Definition .......................................... 884 Notes ................................................ 109 Fillet Edit Type .................................. 109 Fillet Two Lines ................................ 725 Filleted Borders ................................ 812 Filter Data .......................................... 509 Final Plots ......................................... 831 Layout .............................................. 831 Final Render View ............................. 607 Final View .......................................... 604 Finding Files from an Opened Layout ............................................. 827 Finding Missing Files ....................... 825 Fire Box Tab ...................................... 474 Fireplace ...................................... 63 , 471 Chimneys .......................................... 476 Definition .......................................... 884 Depth ............................................... 472 Dimensions, suppress ....................... 473 Direction facing ................................. 471 Fire box definition .............................. 884 Foundations ...................................... 472 Freestanding ............................. 472 , 848 Hearth height .................................... 473 Interior wall ....................................... 471 Library .............................................. 474
Pln ..................................................... TMn .................................................... TXT .................................................... WLK ................................................... WMF ................................................... WRL ...................................................
Masonry .................................... 471 , 848 No Fire Box ....................................... 474 Prefabricated ..................................... 474 Resize ...................................... 472 , 477 Symbol .............................................. 474 Types ................................................ 471
Fireplace Specification Dialog ........ 473 Fix Connections ................................ 159 Fix Roofs .................................... 331 , 347 Fix Wall Connections ................. 63 , 159 Fixture/Furniture Resize .................... 87 Fixtures .............................................. 540 Built-in, create ................................... 547 Built-in, delete ................................... 547 Counter top ....................................... 796 Definition ........................................... 884 Layer to Material Mapping .................. 796 Library .............................. 471 , 539 , 548 Stand alone ....................................... 796 Wall .................................................. 796 Fixtures Library Exterior ............................................. 540 Interior .............................................. 540 Flared Stairs ...................................... 309 Flat Region ........................................ 493 Flip layers see Walls Floating Slab Definition ........................................... 884 Floor ....................................................... 2 Build ................................................. 352 Combine platform with ceiling ............. 387 Diagram ............................................ 190 Export all ........................... 161 162 , 781 Export current ................... 161 162 , 781 Height ....................................... 204 205 Insert ................................................ 271 Floor Above Height ........................... 205 Floor and Ceiling Heights ................ 189 Floor and Ceiling Materials ............. 188 Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............... 398 Floor Camera ............................. 580 581 Floor Defaults .............................. 84 , 269 Floor Defaults Setup ........................ 209
912
Floor Floor Floor Floor
Dialog, New .............................. 283 Height ....................................... 209 Overview .......................... 584 585 Plan Drawing .............................................. 12 Floor Up/ Floor Down ........................ 273 Floor/Ceiling Beam ........................... 368 Floor/Ceiling Truss ........................... 368 Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog .............................................. 419 Floors Adding ............................................... 270 Calculate From All .............................. 861 Copying ............................................. 272 Deleting ............................................. 271 Floors and File Extensions .............. 269 Foam Seal Definition ........................................... 884 Font Panel ........................................... 93 Fonts ................................................... 657 Choosing ........................................... 657 Definition ........................................... 884 Different ............................................ 657 Dimensions .................................. 93 , 636 Materials List ............................... 93 , 867 Multiple ............................................. 657 Setup ................................................ 657 Text .................................................... 93 Toolbar ............................................... 93 Footings ............................................. 280 Alignment .......................................... 284 Centered on main layer ...................... 177 Centered on wall ................................ 177 Definition ........................................... 884 Foundation ........................................ 280 Height ....................................... 177 , 190 Special use arrow .............................. 665 Stem wall ........................................... 284 Stepped ............................................. 169 Wall height ........................................ 280 Wall thickness .................................... 280 Wall type ........................................... 280 Width ................................................. 177 Footprint
Definition .......................................... 884 Footprint, Plan .................................. 742 Foundation ............................................ 2 Foundation Defaults ................... 84 , 277 Foundation Tab ......................... 177 , 280 Foundation Walls ...................... 135 , 137 Foundations ...................................... 279 Alignment ......................................... 284 and Room Specification ............. 195 , 286 Automatic ......................................... 279 Automatic vs. Manual ........................ 278 Below Garage ................................... 286 Build blank plan ................................. 279 Build from 1st floor ............................ 279 Center footings (2 methods) ............... 177 Create .............................................. 279 Delete ............................................... 283 Display ............................................. 283 Edit Pier and Grade Beam ................. 285 Footing width and height .................... 177 Footings specification ........................ 280 Height ............................................... 190 How room name affects ..................... 286 Mesh ................................................ 283 Monolithic slab .................................. 281 Piers specification ............................. 283 Piers, add manually ........................... 279 Piers, automatic ................................ 281 Piers, edit ......................................... 279 Room supplies floor ........................... 208 Set up ............................................... 279 Slab at top of stem wall ..................... 280 Slab, monolithic ......................... 278 , 281 Slab, normal ...................................... 278 Slabs, create two ways ...................... 278 Stem wall .......................................... 280 Thickness ......................................... 177 Turn wall into .................................... 173 Types ............................................... 280 Wall .................................................. 177 Fractional Format ............................. 111 Frame and Trim Tab ......................... 224 Framing ...................................... 701 702 and the Materials List ........................ 391 Angled dormer hole ........................... 380 Automatic ................................. 370 , 390
913
Index
Bearing line ....................................... 384 Bottom plates, number ....................... 375 Butt over support ....................... 372 373 Ceiling, automatic .............................. 372 Create ...................................... 701 702 Depth ............................................... 373 Details .............................................. 388 Display ............................................. 390 Display only framing .......................... 124 Dormer ............................................. 380 Double sill ......................................... 377 Edit .................................... 390 , 701 702 Fascia .............................................. 380 Floor, automatic ................................ 372 General ............................................ 390 Headers specification ........................ 377 Joist direction .................................... 385 Lap over support ....................... 372 373 Layer ................................................ 166 Lookouts ........................................... 380 Manual Framing vs. Automatic ........... 366 Manually drawn ................................. 390 Materials List, how affects.................. 391 Mixing Trusses with Stick ................... 403 Platform ............................................ 372 Platform thickness ............................. 372 Rafter information .............................. 380 Reference marker .............................. 382 Regenerating .................................... 391 Represented by single line ......... 112 , 390 Resize items ..................................... 390 Roof ................................................. 366 Rough opening .................................. 375 Sill thickness ..................................... 377 Stick ................................................. 366 Stud spacing ..................................... 374 Stud thickness .......................... 374 , 380 Top plates, number ........................... 375 Trimmers .......................................... 376 Trusses ............................................ 381 Trusses and rafters mix ..................... 370 Type ................................................. 380 Wall .................................................. 388 Wall detail window ............................. 388 Walls and materials list ...................... 389 Width ................................................ 372
Framing Defaults ........................ 85 , 365 Framing Defaults / Build Framing Dialog .............................................. 371 Framing Overview ............................. 586 Framing Reference Marker .............. 368 Framing Reference Markers ............ 382 Trusses ............................................. 401 Framing Specification Dialog .......... 392 Framing Tools ................................... 367 Framing Type .... 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 From Line End Move point ........................................ 709 Notes ................................................ 709 Full Camera Definition ........................................... 885 Full Gable wall .......................... 176 , 333 Definition ........................................... 885 Full Height Cabinet Definition ........................................... 885 Full Height Cabinets ......................... 438 Full Overview ............................ 584 , 586 Definition ........................................... 885 Furnishings Library, Exterior .......... 541 Furnishings Library, Interior ........... 542 Furniture ...................................... 63 , 537 Library .............................................. 537 Stand alone ....................................... 542 Table item ......................................... 542 Wall item ........................................... 542
G
Gable
Definition ........................................... 885 Dormer Over Windows and Doors ....... 349 Over window ..................................... 220
Framing Decks .................................. 192
Gable Line Definition ........................................... 885 Gable Roof ................................. 251 , 334 Definition ........................................... 885 Gable/Roof Line ........................ 330 , 339
914
Gambrel Roof Definition ........................................... 885 Garage ........................................ 195 , 286 Doors ................................................ 213 Foundation ........................................ 286 Panels in door .................................... 222 Room label ........................................ 195 General Cabinet Defaults ................. 463 General Panel ..................................... 97 Generate the Terrain ......................... 495 Generated Roof Styles, Automatically ................................. 334 Geometric Shapes Library ............... 542 Getting Help ........................................ 14 GFI Outlets ......................................... 422 GIF Definition ........................................... 885 Girder Trusses ................................... 413 Girder trusses .................................... 413 Definition ........................................... 885 Glass House ....................................... 606 Glulam ................ 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Definition ........................................... 885 Graphics Directories .......................... 99 Grids Materials list reports ........................... 114 Ground Fault Interrupt Definition ........................................... 885 see GFI Outlets Ground Plane Definition ........................................... 885 Group Select ................................ 10 , 711 Click method ....................................... 11 Same type item, edit ........................... 11 Gutters Definition ........................................... 885 Remove ............................................. 353
H
Half hip
Definition ........................................... 885
Half walls see Railings, solid Hand Rail Tab .................................... 183 Handles .............................................. 677 Cabinets ........................................... 441 Center, curved walls .......................... 154 Curvature, curved wall ....................... 155 Curved stairs ..................................... 296 Curved walls ..................................... 154 Curved walls, locked center ............... 156 Extend, curved walls .......................... 155 For wall fireplace ....................... 472 , 848 for Curved Stairs ............................... 293 for Merged Stairs ............................... 293 for Straight Stairs .............................. 292 Identification by ................................. 677 Move, curved walls ............................ 155 on Curved Walls ................................ 154 Resize, curved walls .......................... 156 Stairs ................................................ 296 Wall offset ......................................... 160 Wall offset, curved ............................. 156 Handrail Tab ...................................... 326 Hardware ............................................ 604 Hardware Library .............................. 543 Hardware Lock Definition .......................................... 885 Hardware Tab for Cabinets ...................................... 459 for Doors ........................................... 229 Hatch DXF .................................................. 143 Patterns .................................... 692 , 700 Polyline ..................................... 692 , 700 Spacing .............................................. 88 Wall, definition .................................. 885 Walls ................................................ 142 Hatch Wall ................................. 136 , 142 Headers .............................................. 377 Definition .......................................... 885 Solid ................................................. 377 Thickness ......................................... 377 Type ................................................. 377 Headers Tab ...................................... 377 Hearth Definition .......................................... 886
915
Index
Depth ............................................... 473 Height ............................................... 473
I
Icons
Arrange ............................................. 578 Definition ........................................... 886
Height
Basement ceiling ............................... Ceiling .............................................. Ceiling on floor below ........................ Diagram ............................................ Dimension numbers, printing .............. Floor for room ................................... Footing ............................................. Foundation ........................................ Railings ............................................ Restore, walls ...................................
280 205 206 190 651 205 190 190 182 158
Help 10 58 14 14 Help Tips .............................................. 14 Herringbone Definition .......................................... 886 High Shed/Gable ............................... 335 Hill ...................................................... 493 Hinged Doors .................................... 217 Hip Roof ..................................... 250 , 334 Definition .......................................... 886 Hip Truss ........................................... 408 see also Trusses Hold position button ........................ 754 Holes In slab .............................................. 278 In slab with footing ............................ 278 Hopper Window Definition .......................................... 886 House Wizard .................................... 745 Howe Truss Definition .......................................... 886 HVAC Definition .......................................... 886 Library .............................................. 538
Display ............................................... Menu .................................................. Online ................................................. Tips ....................................................
Ignore Subsection Boundaries ....... 306 I-joist .................. 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Image Specification Dialog .............. 764 Images ........................................ 553 , 610 3D, add ............................................. 764 Add new ............................................ 764 Copy ................................................. 763 Create ............................................... 764 Definition ........................... 543 , 610 , 886 Display, 2D ....................................... 762 Display, 3D ....................................... 762 In Layout ........................................... 762 Move ................................................. 763 Place ................................................ 761 Print .......................................... 612 , 840 Resize .............................................. 763 Select from library ............................. 764 Transparent color .............................. 765 View ................................................. 762 Images Library .................................. 543 Imperial .............................................. 650 Definition ........................................... 886 Plans ................................................ 837 see Units Import 2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 772 3D Data ............................................ 788 DWG ................................................. 772 DXF, assign layers ............................ 776 DXF, mapping layers ......................... 776 DXF/DWG Elevation Data .................. 511 Layer Sets ......................................... 130 Picture Files ...................................... 758 Terrain Data ...................................... 507 Wall Definitions ................................. 166 Wall layers ........................................ 166 Import Drawing Wizard ..................... 772 Import Layer Set Dialog ................... 131 Import Material Definitions .............. 570 Import Terrain Wizard ...................... 508
916
Inactive Camera Definition ........................................... 886 Inches Only see Dimensions Inches scrolled By arrow key ....................................... 88 Include Tab ........................................ 123 Ink Jet Plotters .............................................. 834 Printers ............................................. 834 Input Arc ............................................. 685 Input Line ........................................... 677 Input Point .......................................... 707 Insert a Floor ..................................... 271 Insert a New Folder ........................... 533 Insert Bitmap .......................... 60 , 63 , 65 Insert Image ........................................ 63 Insulation ........................................... 702 Definition ........................................... 886 Interior Fireplace, wall ................................... 471 Room type ......................................... 194 Interior Dimensions .......................... 638 Interior Fixtures Library ................... 540 Interior Furnishings Library ............ 542 Interior Stairwell ................................ 170 Interpolate Definition ........................................... 886 Invisible Walls ........... 136 , 139 140 , 173 IRC Checklist ..................................... 748 Isometric View ........................... 584 , 587 Definition ........................................... 886 iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat ........... 166
Joist Direction .................................. 368 Joist Direction Line .................. 385 386 Joist Direction Specification Dialog .............................................. 386 Joist Orientation ............................... 370 Joists ......................................... 367 , 373 Automatically create .......................... 370 Bearing line ....................................... 384 Definition .......................................... 887 Direction ........................................... 385 Draw new, manually .......................... 367 Framing reference ............................. 372 Framing Type, Engineered lumber ..... 373 , 378 ............................... 380 , 393 , 395 General information ........................... 390 Height ............................................... 367 Type, Glulam ..... 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Type, I-joist ........ 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Type, Lumber ..... 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 Type, LVL .......... 373 , 378 380 , 393 , 395 see also Framing Joists and Rafters ............................ 370
K
Keeping Layout Views Current ....... 820 Keyboard Camera Movements ........ 583 Keyboard Commands ................... 8 , 535 Kidney Shaped Terrain Feature ...... 493 Kingpost .................................... 381 , 416 Definition .......................................... 887 Kitchen Island ................................... 450 Knee Wall ........................................... 335 Definition .......................................... 887
J
Jack Trusses see Trusses Join Roof Planes ............................... 346 Joist .................................................... 367 Joist and Rafter Blocking ................ 369 Joist Blocking .................................... 369
L
Label Tab ........................................... Labels Cabinet ............................................. Room ................................................ Room, automatic ............................... 461 442 196 748
917
Index
Truss ................................................ 403 Trusses ............................................ 403
Laminated Lumber Beam Definition .......................................... 885 Laminated Veneer Lumber Definition .......................................... 887 Landing Definition .......................................... 887 Height ............................................... 297 Stair ................................................. 296 Lap Framing .................................... 372 373 Laser Plotters ............................................. 834 Printers ............................................. 834 Layer 3D DXF ............................................. 784 Advanced Layer Mapping .................. 775 Colors ............................................... 127 Current CAD, changing ...................... 128 Current, dimensions .......................... 652 Dimension, individual ......................... 647 Export 2D ......................................... 782 Export 3D ......................................... 784 Mapping ............................................ 775 Properties ......................................... 127 Soffits ............................................... 468 Tables .............................................. 127 Text .................................................. 663 Text, changing .................................. 658 Wall, exporting .................................. 167 Wall, importing .................................. 166 Layer Display Options Dialog ............................... 126 , 197 , 743 Layer Mapping .................................. 775 Layer Properties ............................... 127 Layer Sets ........................... 125 , 127 , 129 Import ............................................... 130 Modify all .......................................... 130 Layer Spec Tab .................. 178 , 182 184 Layer Tables ...................................... 127 Layer Tabs ......................................... 126 Layers ........................................ 125 , 783 Architectural Layers ........................... 126
CAD .................................................. 129 CAD Layers ....................................... 129 Display in Reference .......................... 128 Export Layer Sets .............................. 782 for 3D DWG/DXF Model ..................... 784 Layer Sets ......................................... 129 Rename ............................................ 126 System layers .................................... 126 Tabs ................................................. 126 User layer ......................................... 127
Layout
100 pages ......................................... 809 Add CAD ........................................... 810 Add lines ........................................... 822 Border ....................................... 810 811 Border, show ..................................... 818 CAD and Text in ................................ 810 CAD Detail ................................ 814 , 820 CAD, add .......................................... 810 CAD, modify ...................................... 810 Camera views............................ 816 , 821 Change line length ............................. 822 Change pages ................................... 809 Change scale of views ....................... 814 Check plots ....................................... 830 Copy files ............................................ 77 Copy view ......................................... 817 Create ............................................... 809 Create a New ...................................... 69 Cross section .................................... 821 Current page ..................................... 809 Current screen .................................. 816 Delete lines ....................................... 822 Display contents ................................ 818 Double border ................................... 812 Edit ................................................... 822 Edit lines ........................................... 822 Edit views ......................................... 816 Elevation ........................................... 821 Entire plan ........................................ 816 Export ............................................... 830 Filleted border ................................... 812 Final plots ......................................... 831 Find view .......................................... 825 Images .............................................. 762 Line color .......................................... 824 Line weight ........................................ 815
918
Lines ................................................. 822 Lines, change .................................... 824 Lines, printing weight ......................... 824 Missing view ...................................... 825 Move view page ................................. 817 Move views ........................................ 816 Overview ................................... 807 , 821 Overviews ......................................... 816 Page down ........................................ 809 Page up ............................................. 809 Page zero .......................................... 810 Plan view ................................... 814 , 820 Plot from ............................................ 831 Preparation ........................................ 808 Prepare for ........................................ 808 Print from .................................. 831 , 840 Print Layout ....................................... 813 Print to .............................................. 840 Printer relationship ............................. 830 Printer selection ................................. 808 Printing line weight ............................. 824 Resize view ....................................... 817 Rotate views ...................................... 816 Scale ................................................. 814 Select lines ........................................ 822 Select views ...................................... 816 Send Views to .................................... 813 Send views to .................................... 813 Show border ...................................... 818 Show items ........................................ 818 Suppress line merge .......................... 816 Template ........................................... 811 Testing .............................................. 810 Text ................................................... 810 Title block .......................................... 813 Using ................................................. 813 View, contents ................................... 818 View, delete ....................................... 817 View, resize ....................................... 817 View, scale ........................................ 814 Views, change ................................... 816
Layout and Printer Relationship ..... 830 Layout Files Create ............................................... 809 Export ............................................... 830 Open .................................................. 70 Print .................................................. 827
Save ................................................... 69 Layout Files Dialog .......................... 826 Layout Page Zero ............................. 810 Layout Views Display ............................................. 818 Relink ............................................... 825 Select ............................................... 817 LCK see File types Left Button Definition .............................................. 5 Length Of arc ............................................... 685 Of chord ........................................... 685 Libraries, Edit ................................... 533 Library Add a new library .............................. 531 Add a new symbol ............................. 531 Add to the library ............................... 531 Appliances ................................ 539 , 548 Browser ............................................ 528 Cabinet doors ................................... 540 Cabinets ........................................... 440 CAD Block ........................................ 538 Cad Block ......................................... 731 Copy item ......................................... 550 Doors ............................................... 222 Electrical symbol ............................... 545 Fixtures .................................... 539 , 548 HVAC ............................................... 538 Materials List related ......................... 554 Millwork ............................................ 539 Move item ......................................... 550 Place item ......................................... 546 Primitives .................................. 542 543 Select item ........................................ 549 Sunrooms ......................................... 537 Windows ........................................... 544 Library Browser ................................ 528 Definition .......................................... 887 Navigation Window ............................ 529 Library Browser Panel ....................... 94 Library Categories ............................ 536 Library Fireplaces ............................ 474 Library Object Specification Dialog 554
919
Index
Library Objects 554 550 550 549 551 550 546 551 549 Library of CAD Blocks, Create ........ 731 Library Search .................................. 545 Library Types .................................... 536 Light Fixtures ............................................ 615 Render Data ..................................... 423 Sources ............................................ 614 Specification ..................................... 623 Types ............................................... 614 Types, Define .................................... 618 Light Specification Dialog ............... 622 Lights ................................................. 423 Adjust ............................................... 619 Attenuated ................................ 433 , 624 Auto Intensity ............................ 432 , 623 Casts Shadows ......................... 434 , 625 Color ........................................ 433 , 623 Connect to switch .............................. 424 Create globe ..................................... 423 Cut Off Angle ............................ 433 , 624 Dir Angle ................................... 433 , 624 Display sources ......................... 434 , 625 Drop Off Rate ............................ 434 , 624 Floor Number .................................... 624 Height ............................................... 624 Light Fixtures .................................... 615 Light Sources .................................... 614 Light Types ....................................... 614 Sources ............................................ 614 Tilt Angle .......................................... 624 Type ......................................... 432 , 623 Line Endcaps ........................................... 112 Line Color and Printing ................... 825 Line Color Tab .................................. 824
and the Materials List ........................ Copy ................................................. Delete ............................................... Display ............................................. Edit ................................................... Move ................................................ Place ................................................ Resize .............................................. Select ...............................................
Line Properties Panel ....................... 111 Line Specification Dialog ................. 680 Line Style Pattern Scaling ............... 112 Line Style Tab ................................... 681 Line Tab ............................................. 680 Line Thickness Visibility ................. 743 Line Type ........................................... 783 Line Weight .................................. 91 , 842 Line Weight Tab ................................ 823 Line with Arrow ................................. 679 Lines ........................................... 676 , 843 Change to arcs .................................... 65 Color, layout ...................................... 824 Color, plotting .................................... 825 Cross section .................................... 598 Define color, by layer ......................... 127 Define line weight by layer ................. 127 Define style, by layer ......................... 127 Delete, layout .................................... 822 Drawing ............................................ 676 Joist direction .................................... 385 Move ................................................. 679 Select ............................................... 679 Select, layout .................................... 822 Separation, dimensions ...................... 652 Show weight on screen ........................ 91 Thick lines displayed on screen .... 91 , 743 Weight ................................................ 91 Weight, printing ................................. 824 Lines in Section/Elevation Views ... 598 LinesTo Arc button ............................. 65 Lites Craftsman ......................................... 261 Definition ........................................... 887 Diamond ................................... 226 , 261 Normal ...................................... 226 , 261 Prairie ....................................... 226 , 261 Lites Tab .................................... 225 , 260 Living Area ........................ 194 , 197 , 210 Calculated ................................. 194 , 197 Definition ........................................... 887 Deleting ............................................ 197 Label ................................................ 197 Restoring .......................................... 197
920
vs. Footprint ...................................... 197 vs. Square footage ............................. 197
Living Area vs. Footprint ................. 197 Load Same for Rooms ...................... 204 Load the 3D File ................................ 791 Load to Make Same Value ................ 750 Locate Dimensions will find ........................... 637 External only ...................................... 653 Openings, automatically ..................... 652 Walls, both surfaces ........................... 653 Walls, centers .................................... 653 Walls, surfaces .................................. 653 Locate Objects Tab ........................... 653 Locate Roof Plane Intersections ..... 348 Lock CAD layer .......................................... 127 Center of curved walls ........................ 154 Center, curved wall type ..................... 154 Files ................................................... 98 Roof planes ....................................... 353 Lock Center Arc ................................. 686 Lock Center Button ........................... 154 Lock Tread Width .............................. 306 Locked Landings ............................... 298 Locked Tread Width .......................... 301 Lookout .............................................. 380 Definition ........................................... 887 Low Detail Mode ........................ 590 , 607 Lower Pony wall, show .................................. 87 Lowered Ceiling ................. 191 , 198 , 249 Lowered Region ................................. 493
M
Macro
Definition ........................................... 887
Main
Layer surfaces ................................... 653 Main Layer .................................. 165 , 184
Maintaining Tread Width .................. 305 Make Arc Tangent ............................. 693 Make arc tangent Edit button ........................................ 160 Make Block ........................................ 726 Make Parallel/Perpendicular ........... 721 Make Room Molding Polyline Dialog .............................................. 203 Making a Reflective Copy with Edit Area ................................................. 754 Managing Materials Lists ................ 871 Mansard Definition .......................................... 887 Manual Dimensions .......................... 637 Manual Foundations ......................... 278 Manual framing ................................. 365 Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing .......................................... 366 Manual reach Definition .......................................... 887 Dimensions ....................................... 652 Manual Roofs ............................ 331 , 341 Manufacturers ................................... 871 Map DXF layers to Chief layers ................. 776 to a Single Layer ............................... 775 to Multiple Layers .............................. 775 Marker Specification Dialog ............ 672 Marker Tab ......................................... 673 Markers .............................................. 671 CAD ................................................. 727 Create .............................................. 671 Definition .......................................... 887 Deleting ............................................ 672 Edit ................................................... 672 Framing reference ............................. 382 Move ................................................ 672 Rotate .............................................. 672 Select ............................................... 672 Type to create ................................... 673 Marquee ............................................... 10 Definition .......................................... 888 Masonry ............................................. 476
921
Index
see also Fireplace Stairs ................................................ 316 Master List ................................... 63 , 863 Columns to display ............................ 115 Definition .......................................... 888 Materials List ............................ 115 , 863 Name of file ...................................... 115 Master list see also Materials List Master List Panel .............................. 115 Master plan see Profile Plan Match the Center and Radius .......... 305 Material Categories, Display ........................... 868 Material Defaults ................................. 85 Material Definition ............................ 559 Material Definition Import Options . 571 Material Definition, Export/Import .. 570 Material Painter ................................. 570 Material Tab ....................................... 568 Material Tab, Selecting Materials with the ........................................... 568 Materials ........................................ 3 , 802 and Raytracing .................................. 630 Applying with Material Tab ................. 568 Calculating, on soffits ........................ 467 Calculation ........................................ 467 Categories ........................................ 562 Color ................................................ 560 Define for Materials List ..................... 558 Export ............................................... 871 in a Render View ............................... 611 Line Color ......................................... 561 Materials List .................................... 558 Polyline ............................................. 862 Render properties ............................. 566 Rules for calculating on soffits ........... 467 Rules for calculation .......................... 467 Textures ........................................... 565 see also Materials List Materials List .................................... 859 Add information ................................. 867 and Framing ...................................... 391
Fireplace ................................... 471 , 848
and Library Objects ........................... 554 Calculate from all floors ............. 861 862 Calculate from Area ........................... 862 Calculate from Room ......................... 862 Categories, Suppress ........................ 868 Change information ........................... 867 Code ................................................. 867 Columns to display ............................ 113 Comment .......................................... 867 Create ............................................... 861 Editing .............................................. 867 Estimating software ........................... 872 Export ....................................... 871 872 Font ............................................ 93 , 867 Framing ............................................ 380 Framing, how affects ......................... 391 Generate ........................................... 861 Grid display on reports ....................... 114 Library sizes ...................................... 554 Manage ............................................. 871 Master list ................................. 115 , 863 Material, define .................................. 558 Price ................................................. 867 Report style ....................................... 114 Supplier ............................................ 867 Wall framing ...................................... 389
Materials List Display Options ........ 868 Materials List Panel .......................... 113 Materials on Soffits .......................... 467 Materials Polyline ............................. 862 Materials, Define ............................... 558 Materials, Floor and Ceiling ............ 188 Materials, Wall ................................... 189 Maximize .............................................. 10 Medians .............................................. 520 Menu CAD .................................................. 735 Menus ..................................................... 7 3D ...................................................... 43 Build ................................................... 31 CAD .................................................... 46 Contextual ............................................. 7 Help .................................................... 58 Window ............................................... 57 Merging Stair Sections ..................... 299
922
Mesh
Specify for foundation ........................ 283
Metafiles ............................................. 765 Metal Drip Edge Definition ........................................... 888 Metric Dimensions ........................................ 650 Display .............................................. 111 Plans ................................................. 838 Scales ............................................... 841 see also Units Middle button Definition ...................................... 6 , 574 Fil-M- .................................................... 76 Millwork Definition ........................................... 888 Library ....................................... 539 , 543 Minimum Number Size .............................. 651 652 Minimum Alcove ................................ 354 Mirror Area see Edit Area, Reflect Missing Files, Finding ...................... 825 Mitre Definition ........................................... 888 Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ................ 375 Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing 403 Model Maker ....................................... 847 Printing .............................................. 847 Modify a Plan Database File ............. 75 Modify All Layer Sets ........................ 130 Molding ............................................... 187 Above cabinets .................................. 207 Baseboard ................................. 206 , 210 Chair rail ................................... 206 , 210 Crown ....................................... 206 , 210 Custom .............................................. 532 Defining ............................................. 207 Door .................................................. 230 Drawing ............................................. 532 Follow soffits ...................................... 207 Height ............................................... 207 Position ............................................. 207 Remove ............................................. 207
206 210 207 210 Molding Line Tool ............................. 485 Molding Polyline Specification Dialog .............................................. 486 Molding Polylines ............................. 485 Displaying ......................................... 486 Molding Profile, Adding ................... 532 Molding Tab for Doors ........................................... 230 for Floor Defaults .............................. 210 for Rooms ......................................... 206 for Windows ...................................... 266 Moldings and Profiles Library 486 , 544 Moldings Tab for Cabinets ...................................... 460 for Molding Polylines ......................... 487 for Soffits .......................................... 470 Monolithic Slab ................................. 281 Definition .......................................... 888 Monolithic Slab Foundations, Rebuilding ...................................... 285 Mouse ..................................................... 5 Move a CAD ObjectWith Dimensions ........... 644 a Camera by Dragging in Plan ........... 584 a Fireplace ........................................ 472 a Line ............................................... 679 an Edge ............................................ 345
and Resize Framing in Elevation and 3D Views ............................................. 391 Architectural Blocks ........................... 483 Cabinet Labels .................................. 443 Cabinet, individual ............................. 445 Cabinets ........................................... 445 Cabinets, multiple .............................. 445 Cabinets, restrictions ......................... 445 CAD Objects ............................. 713 , 715 CAD point ......................................... 708 CAD Point to Point .............................. 64 CAD Points ....................................... 708 Callouts ............................................ 668 Control key ....................................... 243
Room ................................................ Set per room ............................. 206 , Specifying Custom ............................ Width ........................................ 206 ,
923
Index
107 641 641 576 483 216 483 713 751 427 427 427 642 535 243 155 763 817 817 550 550 672 652 752 295 714 294 295 150 660 659 401 817 149 152 450 150 243 243 243 Move Handle ...................................... 149 Move Object .............................. 483 , 716 Move Object Dialog .......................... 716 Move Restrictions for Architectural Blocks ...................... 483 for Cabinets ...................................... 445 for Doors ........................................... 216
Corners, polyline ............................... Dimension Labels .............................. Dimension Lines ................................ Display ............................................. Door, single .............................. 216 , Doors ............................................... Doors as a group ....................... 216 , Drag ................................................. Edit Area .......................................... Electrica by dragging ......................... Electrical Objects .............................. Electrical using dimensions ................ Extension Lines ................................. Folders and Library Objects ............... Forced .............................................. Handle, curved wall ........................... Images ............................................. Layout view ....................................... Layout Views .................................... Library item ....................................... Library Objects .................................. Markers ............................................ Moving speed .................................... Point to Point .................................... Restriction, stairs .............................. Roof Planes ...................................... Stairs ................................................ Stairs, restrictions ............................. Straight and curved walls ................... Text .................................................. Text on Layout page .......................... Trusses ............................................ Views to a Different Page .................. Walls and Railings ............................. Walls Using Dimensions .................... Walls with Cabinets Attached ............. Walls, straight and curved .................. Windows ........................................... Windows by dragging ........................ Windows using dimensions ................
for Windows ...................................... 243
Move speed
Temporary change ............................. 652
to be Coplanar ........................ 347 to Framing Reference ............ 714 To Front ................................... 714 Walls ......................................... 149 With Dimensions ................................ 152 Mud Sill Definition ........................................... 888 Mudsills .............................................. 281 Mulled Units ....................... 237 , 255 , 804 in Plan View ...................................... 804 Materials List ..................................... 255 Windows ........................... 237 , 255 , 888 Multi-layered wall Definition ........................................... 888 Multiple Copy .................................... 715 Multiple Floors Reverse Plan ............................... 53 , 756 Multiple Objects ................................ 549 Multiple Select .................................... 10 CAD .................................................. 711 Click method ....................................... 11 in Plan View ...................................... 148 Same type item, edit ............................ 11 Multiple Subsections ........................ 304 Multiple Windows .............................. 241 Muntin bars Definition ........................................... 888 see Lites Muntins Custom ............................................. 246 in Special Windows ............................ 246 Width ................................................ 226
Move Move Move Move
N
Name
Of room for plancheck ........................ 747 Room ................................................ 205
Name/Code ......................................... 222
924
Nested
Definition ........................................... 888
Nested Block .............................. 726 , 732 Network Locking files ....................................... 98 New Floor Dialog ............................... 283 New Layout, Create ............................ 69 New Plan, Create ................................ 68 New Plans Panel ................................ 100 Newel Definition ........................................... 888 Newels/Balusters Tab ............... 182 , 324 No Locate Definition ........................................... 888 Wall ................................................... 174 Non-Rotating Images ........................ 467 Normal Definition ........................................... 888 Normal style see Lites North Pointer ..................................... 739 Definition ........................................... 888 Number Height, definition ................................ 111 Height, dimensions ..................... 651 652 Number Style/Angle Style Dialog .... 733
2nd floor plan ...................................... 70 3D Home Architect files ....................... 68 Different file types ............................... 70 Directory ............................................. 70 Files from a different version ................ 70 Last four plans recently opened ........... 71 Plan .................................................... 70 Polyline, definition ............................. 677
O
Object Specification Dialog ............. 569 Object-Based Design ........................... 2 Definition ........................................... 889 Offset Curved wall handles ........................... 156 Dimensions, first line .......................... 652 Handles ............................................. 159 Handles, walls ................................... 160 Wall handles, curved .......................... 156 One Stretch Plane ............................. 800 Opaque glass Definition ........................................... 889 Open
Open Below ....................................... 194 Definition .......................................... 889 Open Object ................................ 12 , 552 Open Plan File Dialog ...................... 131 Open Symbol ........ 26 , 534 , 552 , 804 805 Opening a Plan or Layout File .......... 70 Opening Tab ...................................... 806 Opening Template Files ..................... 72 Openings ................................... 802 803 Dimension locate ............................... 652 Dimensions to ................................... 654 Doorways, create ...................... 802 803 Ignore casing for resize ....................... 87 in Railings ......................................... 220 Size .................................................. 375 Trimmers .......................................... 376 Windows, create ........................ 802 803 Openings Tab .................................... 375 Options Tab for 3D Preferences ............................ 121 for Blocked Units ............................... 255 for Doors ........................................... 223 for Furniture ...................................... 556 for Materials List Display options ........ 869 for Soffits .......................................... 469 for Symbols ....................................... 806 for Windows ...................................... 254 Outlets ............................................... 422 Above cabinet ................................... 428 Automatic ......................................... 425 Dishwasher ....................................... 422 Exterior ............................................. 422 For appliance .................................... 428 GFI ................................................... 422 Interior .............................................. 422 Joining .............................................. 423 Manual ............................................. 422
925
Index
Sink .................................................. 422 WP ................................................... 422
Outlets, Place .................................... 425 Ovals .................................................. 705 CAD ................................................. 705 Create .............................................. 705 Edit ................................................... 705 Overall Dimension ............................ 652 Overhang ........................................... 343 Overview ................................................ 1 Camera tools .................................... 582 Create .............................................. 585 Definition .......................................... 889 Full ................................................... 585 Plan .................................................. 585
P
Pads
Definition .......................................... 889 Edit ................................................... 285
Page
Down ................................................ 809 Up .................................................... 809
Pan
Definition .......................................... Display ............................................. the Display ........................................ Using arrow keys ............................... Using Control key .............................. Using scroll bars ...............................
889 576 576 576 576 576
Paper
Orientation ........................................ 836 Size .................................................. 809
Paper Orientation ............................. 836 Parallel Light ..................................... 618 Definition .......................................... 889 see Lights ......................................... 616 Parallel/Perpendicular ............... 64 , 714 Illustrated .......................................... 722 Parent Buttons .................................... 18 Parquet Definition .......................................... 889
Partial break ...................................... 724 Partition ............................................. 439 Path To Master list .................................... 115 Pattern Tab ........................................ 564 Patterns Definition ........................................... 889 Pen plotters ....................................... 834 Perspective Cameras ....................... 580 Perspective View .............................. 579 Definition ........................................... 889 Perspective Views ............................ 580 Zoom ................................................ 584 Perspectives and Overviews ... 816 , 820 Picture Box Specification Dialog .... 760 Picture Files Export ............................................... 761 Import ............................................... 758 Scale ................................................ 759 Picture, Save a Render View ........... 611 Pier and Grade Beam Foundations, Edit .................................................. 285 Piers ................................................... 281 Automatic .......................................... 283 Beam, relationship ............................. 285 Create automatically .......................... 283 Create manually ................................ 279 Definition ........................................... 889 Delete ............................................... 285 Edit ................................................... 279 Manually add ..................................... 279 Move ......................................... 279 , 285 Move by dragging .............................. 285 Move, by dimensions ......................... 285 Resize .............................................. 285 Piers and Pads .................................. 279 Edit ................................................... 285 Pillars Definition ........................................... 889 Pitch ........................... 336 , 358 , 360 , 414 Show as degrees ................................. 87 Pixels Definition ........................................... 890
926
Dimension height ............................... 651
Place
a Library Fireplace ............................. 475 a Point ............................................... 707 at Allowed Angles Dialog .................... 162 Framing Reference Markers ............... 383 Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 239 Images .............................................. 761 Library Objects .................................. 546 Outlets .............................. 140 , 194 , 425 Soffits ................................................ 466 Switches ............................................ 423 Under Roof - Rectangular ................... 251 Under Roof Slope .............................. 250
Plan
Definition ........................................... 890 Drawing .............................................. 12 Rotate view ........................................ 755
Plan Check ......................................... 747 and room labels ................................. 195 Restart .............................................. 748 Plan Check Dialog ............................. 748 Plan Defaults ......................... 84 , 86 , 146 Plan Export ........................................ 611 Plan Find Wizard ................................ 73 Plan Footprint .................................... 742 Definition ........................................... 890 Plan Templates ................................... 72 Plan Thumbnail, Save ........................ 70 Plan View ............................................ 803 Definition ........................................... 890 Plan View Tab .................................... 806 Plan View Template ........................... 850 Plan Views and CAD Details .... 814 , 820 Plans Copy files ........................................... 77 Create a new plan ............................... 68 Delete ................................................ 80 New ................................................... 68 Open .................................................. 70 Save .................................................. 69 Search ............................................... 73 Transfer .............................................. 77 Plates .................................................. 375
Platform Holes .................................. 279 Platforms Cape Cod, combine ........................... 386 Combine floor and ceiling .................. 387 Thickness, information ....................... 206 Plinth block Definition .......................................... 890 Exterior ............................................. 223 Interior .............................................. 223 Plot Final plots ......................................... 831 From layout ....................................... 831 Plot plan North pointer ..................................... 739 Plotters Ink Jet Plotters .................................. 834 Pen Plotters ...................................... 834 Test .................................................. 836 Types ............................................... 834 see also Printers Plotting see also Print Plumb Cut Eaves .............................. 355 Definition .......................................... 890 Pocket Door Definition .......................................... 890 Pocket Doors ............................. 212 , 218 Point CAD, for accuracy ............................. 707 see also CAD point Point Elevation Definition .......................................... 890 Point Light ......................................... 618 Definition .......................................... 890 Point Markers .................................... 708 Point to Point Dimensions ....................................... 637 Move, Area ....................................... 752 Point to Point Dimensions .............. 638 Pointers and Arrows ........................ 667 Points ................................................. 707 Point-to-Point Move ......................... 714 Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area 752
927
Index
Polar
Definition .......................................... 890
Polyline .............................................. 677 Adjust ............................................... 107 Area ................................................. 690 Auto snap ......................................... 109 Definition ........................... 677 , 689 , 890 Edit Area .......................................... 751 Edit Tools ......................................... 693 Reshape ........................................... 107 Stretch .............................................. 107 Tool to create rectangular .................. 701 Polyline Intersection ........................ 694 Polyline Solid .................................... 488 Display ............................................. 489 Polyline Solid Specification Dialog 489 Polyline Specification Dialog .......... 690 Polyline Subtract .............................. 695 Polyline Tab ...................................... 690 Polyline Union ................................... 693 Pony Wall Defaults Dialog ............... 185 Pony Walls .......................... 136 , 138 , 157 Change wall types ............................. 139 Choose which displays in plan view .... 148 Create .............................................. 138 Definition .......................................... 890 Show lower ......................................... 87 Pony walls see also Railings, solid Porch Room label ....................................... 195 Positioning Unit ................................ 106 Notes ................................................ 106 Tip .................................................... 106 Post .................................................... 368 Post Specification ............................ 394 Posts/Beams Tab .............................. 378 POV-Ray ............................................. 633 Definition .......................................... 890 Prairie style Definition .......................................... 891 see Lites Preferences ................................. 86 , 535
3D .................................................... 120 Appearance ......................................... 91 Color ................................................... 92 Contextual menus ................................ 91 Global settings .................................... 90 Show line weight ................................. 91
Prepare for Layout ............................ 808 Preview vs. Final Render View ........ 607 Primitives Definition ........................................... 891 Library ...................................... 542 543 Print .................................................... 831 Across Multiple Pages ....................... 842 Across multiple pages ........................ 842 and Line Color ................................... 825 Color or Black and White ................... 842 Direct ................................................ 835 Directly from a View ........................... 839 Drivers .............................................. 834 Final prints ........................................ 831 From layout ............................... 831 , 835 from Layout ............................... 835 , 840 From view ......................................... 835 Full page ........................................... 831 General information ........................... 835 Image ........ 581 582 , 604 605 , 612 , 840 In color .............................................. 589 Introduction ....................................... 833 Layout Files ...................................... 827 Line weight ........................................ 843 Line Weight, Change ......................... 824 Model .................................................. 25 Options ............................................. 835 Problems ........................................... 873 Render Views .................................... 612 Services ............................................ 808 Setup ........................................ 809 , 836 Test .................................................. 810 Text .................................................. 666 Text and Dimensions ......................... 837 the Model .......................................... 847 Tiled ................................................. 842 to a File ............................................. 843 To layout ........................................... 813 To scale ............................................ 841 to Scale ............................................ 841 Print Model Dialog ............................ 848
928
Print to a Remote Plotter .................. 845 Printer Test ................................................... 836 Printer Setup ...................................... 808 Printers Layout relationship ............................. 830 Set up ....................................... 809 , 836 Test ................................................... 836 Types ................................................ 834 Profile Plan ......................................... 72 Profile plan .................................... 68 69 Materials ........................................... 558 Projecting Library Fireplaces .......... 476 Property lines .................................... 677 North pointer ...................................... 739 Proportional resize ........................... 108
Q
Queen Post Definition ........................................... 891 Quoin Specification Dialog .............. 479 Quoins ................................................ 478
R
Radio Button Definition ........................................... 891 Radius ......................................... 147 , 685 Radius of Curved Stairs, Change .... 304 Radius To ........................................... 175 Rafter Blocking .................................. 369 Rafters ........................................ 367 , 381 and Trusses ....................................... 370 Automatically create ........................... 370 Common ............................................ 411 Definition ........................................... 891 Depth ........................................ 361 , 370 Depth, individual roof plane ................ 361 Draw new, manually ........................... 367 General ............................................. 390
see also Framing Railing and Fencing Defaults .......... 135 Railing Defaults ................................ 185 Railing Defaults Dialog .................... 185 Railing Tab ........................................ 180 Railing Type ...................................... 180 Railings ...................................... 136 , 140 Balusters .......................................... 180 Change wall into railing ..................... 173 Connect walls ................................... 159 Curved, jumpy when drawing ............. 146 Exterior Materials .............................. 181 Fix connections ................................. 159 Half walls .......................................... 180 Height defined ................................... 182 Located by dimension lines ................ 174 Moving .............................................. 149 No Rail ............................................. 181 No Shoe ........................................... 182 Open rail type ................................... 181 Open with middle rail ......................... 181 Opening ............................................ 220 Raise Shoe ....................................... 181 Selecting in Plan View ....................... 148 Shoe,definition .................................. 891 Solid ................................................. 180 Special ............................................. 315 Type ................................................. 180 Raise Off plate ............................................ 354 Off plate, truss .................................. 417 Shoe ................................................. 181 Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ...................... 506 Raised Region ................................... 493 Raked walls ....................................... 157 Create .............................................. 172 Definition .......................................... 891 Raytrace Create .............................................. 627 Materials ........................................... 630
Height ............................................... Mixing with trusses ............................ Trusses mix ...................................... Vertical width ..................... 358 , 361 ,
367 403 370 414
929
Index
Parameters ....................................... 628 Properties ......................................... 628 Quality .............................................. 632
Raytrace Tab ..................................... 631 Raytrace Window .............................. 630 Reach Automatic dimensions ........................ 652 Manual dimensions ............................ 652 Rebar Definition .......................................... 891 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .......... 63 Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations ................................... 285 Recessed Door ................................................. 223 Rectangular Hip Roof ....................... 251 Rectangular Polyline ........................ 701 Reduce Gable .................................... 418 Reference Display ............................ 273 Reference Floor ................. 128 , 270 271 CAD layers ....................................... 274 Color .......................................... 92 , 274 Definition .......................................... 891 Display items .................................... 274 Reference Floor Color ...................... 274 Reflect Area see Edit Area Definition .......................................... 891 Reflect About Line ............................ 718 Reflect About Line with Edit Area .. 753 Reflect Object ................................... 719 Reflect Object Dialog ....................... 719 Reflect Tools ............................. 428 , 447 Refresh Display .................................. 57 Refresh Library Browser ................. 532 Regenerate Framing ......................... 391 Relative to Current Point, new line end ............ 678 to Current Point, new point ................ 707 to Current Point, polar, new line end ... 678 to Current point, polar, new point ....... 707 to Itself, move point ........................... 709
to Previous Point, move point ............. 709 Relative Location Definition ........................................... 891 Relink Layout Views ......................... 825 Relocate Objects Using Dimensions .................................... 644 Remove 3D ................................... 63 , 592 Remove Backdrop ............................. 123 Remove Deck Framing ..................... 192 Remove Muntins ............................... 247 Render Added Lights ..................................... 616 Ambient light ..................................... 614 Create a Render View ........................ 605 Daytime Ambient ............................... 614 Display light sources .................. 434 , 625 Export view ....................................... 611 Field of view .............................. 594 , 609 Final ................................................. 608 Floor Overview .......................... 605 , 627 Graphics card .................................... 604 Interior Ambient ................................. 614 Light Fixtures .................................... 615 Light Sources .................................... 614 Light sources ..................................... 614 Nighttime Ambient ............................. 614 Overviews ................................. 605 , 627 Preferences ....................................... 117 Preview ............................................. 608 Save view ......................................... 611 View Picture, Save ............................ 611 View, Edit in ...................................... 590 View, Materials .................................. 611 View, Preview vs. Final ...................... 607 View, Print ........................................ 612 Render Camera Field of View ..................................... 594 Render Camera, Adjust .................... 582 Render Data Tab ....................... 432 , 621 Render Full Overview ............... 605 , 627 Render Panel ..................................... 117 Render Settings ................................ 118 Render Tab ................................ 124 , 566 Render Tips and Tricks .................... 612
930
Render Tools ..................................... 604 Render Views ............................. 549 , 605 Ediiting Objects in .............................. 611 Repair Broken Walls ......................... 159 Replicate Object ................ 427 , 444 , 720 Replicate Object Dialog .................... 720 Report style Grid display settings ........................... 114 Materials List ..................................... 114 see also Materials List Report Style Panel ............................ 114 Rescale Layout view ....................................... 818 View, layout ....................................... 818 Rescale Views .................................... 818 Reset Defaults .................................... 86 Reset to Defaults ................................ 89 Reshape Splines ................................ 697 Reshape Text ..................................... 660 Resize ................................................. 108 (Proportional) ..................................... 108 a Fireplace ........................................ 472 a House With Exterior Dimensions ...... 645 an Image ........................................... 763 Cabinet .............................................. 446 Cabinets ............................................ 446 Callouts ............................................. 669 Components ...................................... 247 Corner Boards ................................... 477 Corner cabinet ................................... 446 Doors ................................................ 219 Enable for symbols .............................. 87 Factor ................................................ 759 Fireplace ................................... 472 , 477 Framing items .................................... 390 Handle, curved walls .......................... 156 Handles ............................................. 156 Ignore casing ...................................... 87 Image ................................................ 763 Layout view ....................................... 817 Library Objects .................................. 551 Picture ............................................... 759 Stairs ................................................ 294 Stem Walls ........................................ 284 Views ................................................ 817
Walls ................................................ 152 Windows ........................................... 244
Resize Object .................................... 718 Resize Object Dialog ........................ 718 Restore Toolbars ............................................. 21 Wall heights in 3D ............................. 158 Restrictions Move door ......................................... 216 Move stairs ....................................... 295 Move window .................................... 243 Results of Missing Files .................. 826 Retain Attic wall ........................................... 174 Wall Framing ..................................... 174 Reverse Fixture, cabinet ................................. 458 Wall layers ................................ 174 175 Reverse Direction ............................. 721 Reverse Plan ..................................... 756 Multiple Floors ............................ 53 , 756 RGB Definition .......................................... 891 Ridge .................................................. 381 Definition .......................................... 891 Top, edit roofs .................... 358 , 360 , 414 Ridge Cap Definition .......................................... 891 Ridge Vent Definition .......................................... 891 Right button ...................................... 710 Definition .............................................. 5 Right-click ......................................... 441 Rim Joist ............................................ 372 Definition .......................................... 891 Riser (Stair) Definition .......................................... 891 Road and Sidewalk Defaults ..... 85 , 515 Road Marking .................................... 518 Road Marking Specification Dialog 525 Road Objects Delete ............................................... 519 Different Types .................................. 516
931
Index
Display ............................................. 519 Edit ................................................... 520 Select ............................................... 519
Road Polyline .................................... 516 Road Specification Dialog ............... 522 Road Stripe ........................................ 517 Road Stripes and Markings ............. 521 Roads ................................................. 516 Roads and Road Polylines .............. 520 Roof Baseline Specification Dialog 356 Roof Baseline Tab ............................ 356 Roof Baselines .......................... 337 , 342 Edit ................................................... 338 Using ................................................ 338 Roof Beam ......................................... 367 Roof Defaults .................................... 330 Roof Dialog, Build ............................ 352 Roof Framing .................................... 366 Roof Group ........................................ 206 Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog .............................................. 362 Roof Mode ......................................... 330 Roof Over a Curved Wall ................. 168 Roof Plane ..................................... 2 , 330 Low roof planes ................................. 353 Roof Plane Intersections, Locate ... 348 Roof Plane Specification Dialog ..... 357 Roof Planes ....................................... 341 Delete ............................................... 343 Display ............................................. 342 Edit ................................................... 344 Select ............................................... 343 Roof Planes with Two Pitches ........ 336 Roof Styles, Automatically Generated ....................................... 334 Roof Tab .................................... 176 , 379 Roof Tools ......................................... 330 Roof Truss ................................. 367 , 398 Definition .......................................... 892 Roof Truss Specification Dialog ..... 415 Roofs .................................................. 850
2nd pitch ........................... 176 , 333 , 336 Automatic .......................................... 332 Automatic vs. Manual ......................... 331 Baseline ..... 337 , 342 343 , 358 , 360 , 414 Birdsmouth cut .................................. 358 Concave walls ................................... 168 Over curved wall ................................ 168 Extend slope downward ..... 176 , 333 , 335 Fascia ............................................... 380 Fascia top ......................... 358 , 360 , 414 Fix .................................................... 347 Framing ............................................ 366 Full gable wall ........................... 176 , 333 Gable ................................................ 334 Gable, automatic ............................... 334 Gable, define ..................................... 334 Gutters .............................................. 355 High shed/gable ................ 176 , 333 , 335 Hip .................................................... 334 Hole for skylights ............................... 331 Knee walls ........................ 176 , 333 , 335 Lock .................................................. 344 Lock roof planes ................................ 353 Lookouts ........................................... 380 Manual .............................................. 341 Material, individual roof .............. 359 , 415 Min. Alcove ....................................... 354 Over concave walls ............................ 168 Over this room ................................... 208 Overhang .......................................... 343 Pitch .......... 176 , 333 , 336 , 358 , 360 , 414 Plumb cut eaves ................................ 355 Plumb cut fascia ................................ 358 Rafter depth, individual roof plane ...... 361 Raise off plate ................................... 354 Ridge/top .......................... 358 , 360 , 414 Roof Plane ........................................ 330 Second pitch ..................................... 336 Show all ridges .................................. 355 Show pitch as degrees ......... 87 , 359 , 415 Skylights ........................................... 331 Square cut eaves ............................... 355 Square cut fascia ............................... 358 Story-and-a-half ................................ 335 Supply .............................................. 355 Trusses ............................................. 353 Two pitches ....................................... 336 Upslope Mark .................................... 343
932
Vertical rafter width ............ 358 , 361 , 414 Roofs and Curved Walls ................... 168 Room Size of Label ....................................... 96 Room Defaults ................................... 188 Room Definition ................................. 191 Definition ........................................... 891 Room Interior Area ............................ 196 Room Labels ...................................... 196 Area .................................................. 196 Change text ....................................... 196 Definition ........................................... 891 Delete ............................................... 196 Dimensions ........................................ 196 Display .............................................. 196 Edit ................................................... 196 Foundation, effect on ......................... 208 Move ................................................. 196 Name options .................................... 205 Size .................................................... 96 Room Material Defaults .................... 188 Room Molding Polylines .................. 203 Room Polylines ................................. 202 Room Sizes ........................................ 196 Room Specification ........................... 194 Room Specification and Foundations .................................... 286 Room Specification Dialog .............. 204 Room Types ....................................... 194 Room, Select ...................................... 193 Rooms .................................................... 2 Area calculations ............................... 196 Area, display ...................................... 196 Baseboard ................................. 206 , 210 Below stairs ....................................... 317 Ceiling height ..................................... 205 Chair rail molding ....................... 206 , 210 Crown molding ........................... 206 , 210 Define deck as ................................... 170 Define stairwell as .............................. 170 Diagram ............................................ 206 Edit information .................................. 204 Exterior (of house) ............................. 193 Exterior type ...................................... 194
Floor height ....................................... 205 Foundation floor definition .................. 208 Foundation, effect on ......................... 286 Height, ceiling ................................... 205 Height, floor ...................................... 205 Interior type ...................................... 194 Labels .............................................. 194 Labels, edit ....................................... 196 Molding specification ................. 206 , 210 Name ................................. 194 , 204 205 Name for PlanCheck .......................... 747 Naming, automatic ............................ 748 Opening for specification ................... 193 Platform thickness ............................. 206 Roof over this .................................... 208 Select ....................................... 193 , 205 Size, display ..................................... 196 Structure ........................................... 204 Type ................................................. 194
Rotate
an Area ............................................. Architectural Blocks ........................... Area, see Edit Area Cabinet, individual ..................... 446 , Cabinets ........................................... Cabinets, multiple ...................... 446 , CAD items ........................................ Electrical ........................................... Electrical Objects .............................. Jump ................................................ Markers ............................................ Plan View ......................................... Scaled Views .................................... Stairs ................................................ Text .................................................. View .................................................
752 483
483 446 483 105 427 427 105 672 755 817 296 661 755 Rotate Object .................................... 717 Rotate Object Dialog ........................ 717 Rotate/Resize About ........................ 105 Rough Opening ................................. 375 Doorways (ISD) ......................... 802 803 Windows (ISD) .......................... 802 803 Rounding corners ............................. 109
933
Index
S
Saltbox Roof Definition .......................................... 892 Same Type Wall ................................ 103 Same Wall Type ................................ 145 Sash Definition .......................................... 892 Sash and Frame Tab ........................ 256 Save 3D Cameras ...................................... 591 Bitmap ...................................... 582 , 605 Cross Section/Elevation Cameras ...... 600 Plan .............................................. 69 70 Plan and Layout Files .......................... 69 Plan Thumbnail ................................... 70 Render View Picture .......................... 611 Section/Elevation Cameras ................ 600 see also Autosave Save and Save As ............................... 70 Saved Cameras ................................. 122 Scale Layout view ............................... 814 , 818 Print ................................................. 841 Scale Data .......................................... 510 Scale Picture Files ........................... 759 Scale, Print to ................................... 841 Schedule Defaults ...................... 85 , 851 Schedule Example ............................ 858 Schedule Specification Dialog ........ 852 Schedules to Text, Convert ............. 858 Schedules, Create ............................ 852 Schematics, Wiring .......................... 424 Scissor Truss .................................... 413 Scroll bars ................................. 123 , 576 Defining amount of movement .............. 88 Pan .................................................. 576 Search for Plans ................................. 73 Search the Master List ..................... 864 Section see Cross section Section/Elevation ............................. 597 Views, Create ................................... 596
Views, Detailing ................................. 599 Views, Lines in .................................. 598
Select .................................................. 711 a Room ............................................. 193 Architectural Blocks ........................... 481 Blocked Units .................................... 241 By handles ........................................ 677 Cabinets ........................................... 440 CAD Objects ..................................... 710 CAD Objects Using a Fence ............... 711 Callouts ............................................ 668 Click method ....................................... 11 Components ...................................... 482 Components of Blocked Units ............. 241 Dimension Lines ................................ 640 Door, individual ................................. 214 Doors ................................................ 214 Doors, multiple .................................. 214 Double click for CAD Setup ................ 710 Edit same type item ............................. 11 Electrical Objects ............................... 426 Group, drag method ............................. 10 Group, marquee method ...................... 10 How to .............................................. 710 Layout Lines ...................................... 822 Layout Views ..................................... 817 Library item, single ............................ 549 Library items, multiple ........................ 549 Library Objects .................................. 549 Markers ............................................. 672 Materials with the Material Tab ........... 568 Multiple Cabinets ............................... 441 Multiple CAD items ............................ 711 Multiple items ...................................... 11 Multiple Text Objects ......................... 659 Objects ............................................... 10 Objects in 3D Views ........................... 590 Road Objects .................................... 519 Roof Planes ...................................... 343 Room ................................................ 205 Stacked Cabinets .............................. 441 Stairs ................................................ 292 Terrain Data ...................................... 496 Text .................................................. 659 the Symbol Category ......................... 789 the Wall ............................................ 157 Using fence ....................................... 711
934
Walls in cross section ......................... 157 Walls, Railing, and Fences ................. 148 Window, individual ............................. 241 Windows ............................................ 241 Windows, multiple .............................. 241
Backdrop ................................ 123 File .................................. 508 , 773 Layers ..................................... 774 Library Object Dialog ............ 535 Next Object .............................. 11 Objects .............................. 10 11 Same / Load Same ......... 448 , 749 for Rooms .......................................... 204 Select Walls ....................................... 148 Select/Make Fence ............................ 724 Selected Line Tab .............................. 691 Selection Restrictions ...................... 442 Send to layout Entire plan ......................................... 816 Line weight ........................................ 816 Scale ................................................. 816 Send Views to Layout ....................... 813 Separation Between dimension lines .................... 652 Separation (Cabinet) Definition ........................................... 892 Service Data Tab ............................... 431 Setting up the Printer ....................... 836 Setup Tab ................................... 650 651 Shadows ............................................. 617 Shadows see Sun Angle Shape Walls ................................................. 157 Window ..................................... 263 , 802 see also Windows Shape Tab .......................................... 263 Sheathing Definition ........................................... 892 Shed Roof Definition ........................................... 892 Shelf .................................................... 439 Create ....................................... 439 , 442
Select Select Select Select Select Select Select
Shift key ............................................. 711 Shoe Definition .......................................... 892 None for railing ................................. 182 Raise for railing ................................. 181 Short extensions ...................... 650 , 656 Shortcut Keys ....................................... 8 Show 0" ..................................................... 650 Dash in dimensions ........................... 650 Dimensions, inches only .................... 652 Dimensions, metric ............................ 650 Imperial dimensions ........................... 650 Inches only, dimensions ..................... 652 Items, 2D .......................................... 601 Items, 3D .......................................... 601 Lower pony wall .................................. 87 Metric dimensions ............................. 650 Pitch as degrees ................................. 87 Short extensions ....................... 650 , 656 Show all ridges ................................. 355 Show pitch as degrees ............ 359 , 415 Sidewalk ............................................ 518 Sidewalk Polyline ............................. 518 Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........ 525 Sill ...................................................... 377 Definition .......................................... 892 Double .............................................. 377 Thickness ......................................... 377 Single Section Stairs ....................... 304 Single Select ..................................... 710 Single/Multiple .................................. 482 Single/Multiple Doors ...................... 215 Site ......................................................... 3 Size Room, display ................................... 196 Sizing Symbols ................................. 799 Sizing Tab .......................................... 806 Skylights .................................... 330 331 Shaft surfaces ................................... 331 Slab ............................................ 195 , 278 At top of stem wall ............................. 280 Monolithic ......................................... 281
935
Index
Thickness ......................................... 195 Toolbar button ................................... 278
Wall hatch ........................................... 88
Slab Foundation Definition .......................................... 892 Slab Holes ......................................... 278 Slab Specification Dialog ................ 287 Slabs .................................................. 278 and the Materials List ........................ 279 Slider Door Definition .......................................... 892 Sliding Doors ............................ 212 , 218 Sloped Soffits ................................... 470 Snap to (Snap Points) .................................... 735 Attaching to line end .......................... 709 Definition .......................................... 892 Intersection ....................................... 737 Line Midpoint .................................... 738 Object ............................................... 738 Object End ........................................ 737 Point ................................................. 736 Snap units Dimensions ....................................... 651 Soffit Defaults ................................... 466 Soffit Specification Dialog .............. 468 Soffits .................................. 200 , 438 , 465 Angled .............................................. 200 Beams .............................................. 200 Definition .......................................... 892 Layer ................................................ 468 Material ............................................ 470 Minimum size .................................... 466 Place under ceiling ............................ 470 Place under Roof .............................. 470 Sloped soffit .............................. 469 470 Sloped, place under roof .................... 469 Soffits, Rules for Calculating Materials on ................................... 467 Soffits, Special Applications for .... 466 Softening the Flare Radius ............. 311 Solid Fill .................................... 692 , 700 Solid Railings .................................... 315 Spacing
Special Special Special Special Special Specify Specify Specify Speed
CAD Buttons .................. 61 , 712 CAD Panel ............................ 112 Details .................................. 741 Shaped Cabinets ................. 451 Use Arrow ...................... 96 , 665 a Scale .................................. 818 Custom Moldings ................ 207 Pitch ..................................... 336
3D views ........................................... 122 Speed up 3D View Generation ......... 589 Sphere ................................................ 542 Spherical Backdrops ........................ 610 Spline Handles .................................. 697 Spline Tab .......................................... 700 Splines ............................................... 696 Split Walls ................................................ 143 Split Levels ........................................ 200 Definition ........................................... 892 Split-entry sample .............................................. 200 Spot Light .......................................... 619 Definition ........................................... 892 Square Cut Eaves ............................. 355 Stacked Windows ............................. 236 Definition ........................................... 892 Stacked/Blocked Doors .................... 215 Stair Direction ................................... 290 Stair Landing Specification Dialog . 327 Stair Landings ................................... 296 Stair Sections, Merge ....................... 299 Stair Tools ......................................... 290 Staircase Specification Dialog ........ 318 Stairs Adjust using handles .......................... 296 Align curved stairs ............................. 301 Align curves between floors ................ 303 Align ends of curved .......................... 301 Copy ................................................. 296
936
Curved .............................................. 301 Delete ............................................... 294 Delete section .................................... 294 Display .............................................. 292 Display from floor above ..................... 170 Down ................................................. 291 Edit ................................................... 318 Exterior Colors ................................... 323 Flared ................................................ 309 Landing, delete .................................. 294 Large Stringer Base ........................... 322 Length ............................................... 320 Make Reach ...................................... 319 Merge ................................................ 299 Move ................................................. 294 Open underneath ............................... 322 Opening ............................................ 316 Reach next floor ................................. 319 Resize ............................................... 294 Revert ............................................... 319 Rise angle ......................................... 321 Riser ................................................. 292 Room below ....................................... 317 Rotate ............................................... 296 Section width ..................................... 321 Sections, merge ................................. 299 Select ................................................ 292 Stairwell, create ................................. 316 Subsection ......................................... 319 Tread ................................................ 292 Tread width ................................ 320 321 Treads, define .................................... 320 Treads, define number ............... 320 321 Treads, retain number ........................ 320 Understanding ................................... 292 View in 3D ......................................... 292 Walk line ................................... 305 , 323 Winders ..................................... 307 , 321
Stairwell .............................................. 170 Create ....................................... 170 , 316 Opening ............................................ 316 Standard Toolbar .................................. 6 Standard Windows ............................ 234 Start Chief Architect .......................... 10 Start Direction ................................... 685 Start House Wizard ........................... 746
Starter Tread ............................... 63 , 313 Static Views ....................................... 820 Status Bar .............................................. 9 Steel Stringer .................................... 315 Stem Wall ........................................... 280 Definition .......................................... 892 Slab at top ........................................ 280 Stem Walls and Footings, Align ..... 284 Stem Walls, Resize ........................... 284 Step Down Hip .................................. 408 Advantages and disadvantages .......... 412 Stepped Footings ........................................... 169 Foundation ........................................ 169 Walls ........................................ 157 , 169 Stepped Foundation Definition .......................................... 893 Show "S" marker ................................. 87 Stepped Wall Definition .......................................... 893 Stick Framing .................................... 366 Mixing with Trusses ........................... 403 Stile (Cabinet) Definition .......................................... 893 Story-and-a-half ................................ 335 Platforms, combine ............................ 386 Straight Stairs ................................... 290 Straight Walls .................................... 149 Straight/Curved Wall Combinations 150 Stretch Zones .................................... 801 Stretching a Line .............................. 679 Stringer (Stair) Definition .......................................... 893 Dimensions ....................................... 323 Structure Tab ............................ 207 , 286 Stub walls Definition .......................................... 893 Stud Definition .......................................... 893 Spacing ............................................ 374 Thickness ................................. 374 , 380 Style Dialog, Number Style/Angle .. 733
937
Index
Style Tab ............................................ 322 Sub girder hip Advantages and disadvantages .......... 412 Subcategories ................................... 868 Subfloor ............................................. 372 Thickness ......................................... 373 Subgirder hip .................................... 409 Submenu Definition .............................................. 7 Subsection Stairs ................................................ 319 Sun Angle .................................. 616 617 Arrow ................................................ 617 Create .............................................. 617 Date ................................................. 620 Definition .......................................... 893 Delete Shadows ................................ 618 Render Data ..................................... 621 Shadows ................................... 434 , 625 Sun Angle Specification Dialog ...... 620 Sun Shadows .................................... 496 Sunlight Toggle ................................ 604 Sunrooms .......................................... 541 Library .............................................. 537 Super VGA (SVGA) Definition .......................................... 893 Supply ................................................ 355 Gutters ............................................. 355 for Roofs ........................................... 355 Suppress Objects in 3D Views ........ 589 Surface Normals ............................... 788 Surface Smoothing Angle ............... 792 Swap Floor ........................................ 273 Swap Views ....................................... 578 Swap Work-Reference .............. 272 273 Swing, Door Change ............................................. 217 Switch Create .............................................. 423 Current Floor/Reference Floor .... 272 273 Double .............................................. 423 In circuit ............................................ 423 Place ................................................ 423
Three way ......................................... 424
SWT
Definition ........................................... 893
Symbol
Automatic Edge Lines ........................ 791 Boundary box .................................... 799 Create ............................................... 787 Dimensions ....................................... 799 Edge lines ......................................... 791 Edit ........................................... 428 , 447 Enable resize ...................................... 87 Faces ........................................ 788 , 792 Insertion point ........................... 788 , 792 Library, electrical ....................... 425 , 545 Modify ............................................... 787 Options ............................................. 796 Origin ........................................ 788 , 792 Reset origin ....................................... 792 Resize .............................................. 800 Sides ................................................ 788 Sizing ............................................... 799 Stretch Planes ................................... 800 Stretch Zones .................................... 801 Surface normals ................................ 788 Surface Smoothing Angle ................... 792
Symbol Options ................................ 796 Symbol Specification Dialog ........... 804 Symbols Sizing ............................................... 799 vs. Native Objects .............................. 551 Symmetrically Flared Stairs ............ 311 System Default Walls ....................... 162
T
Tab Key ................................................ 11 Tab Spacing ....................................... 661 Tabs Changing .......................................... 663 Columns ............................................ 663 Easy spacing ..................................... 661 Text .................................................. 663 Take Off see Materials List Tangent
938
Curved walls ...................................... 160 Definition ........................................... 893 Make arc, edit button .......................... 160 Make Tangent button .......................... 65
Technical Support ............................. 873 Template Files .................................... 72 Temporary File Directories ............... 99 Termite Flashing Definition ........................................... 893 Terms ..................................................... 4 Terrain and 3D Draw Time ............................. 495 Clear ................................................. 497 Copy ................................................. 496 Display in 3D View ............................. 495 Display in Plan View ........................... 494 Menu .................................................. 40 Terrain Data Convert CAD Lines to ......................... 512 Delete ............................................... 496 Different Types of .............................. 492 Import ................................................ 507 Select ................................................ 496 Terrain Elevation Tools .................... 492 Terrain Feature Specification Dialog .............................................. 506 Terrain Feature Tools ....................... 493 Terrain Features ................................ 493 Clip ................................................... 506 Height ............................................... 506 Terrain Features, Edit ....................... 498 Terrain Holes ..................................... 494 Terrain Library ................... 494 , 544 , 553 Terrain Modeler 3D Views ........................................... 495 Add Elevation Data .................... 492 , 497 Build Terrain .............................. 492 , 495 Building Pad Elevation ....................... 499 Clear Terrain ..................................... 497 Contour Line Smoothing ..................... 501 Contours ............................................ 501 Display Terrain .................................. 494 Elevation Lines/Splines ...................... 498 Elevation Points ................................. 492
495 494 501 492 496 493 492 499 499 500 494 Terrain Modifier Tools ..................... 493 Terrain Perimeter .............................. 492 Edit ................................................... 497 Terrain Properties Clip ................................................... 499 Terrain Specification Dialog ........... 498 Test the Print Area ........................... 810 Test the Printer ................................. 836 Text ..................................................... 658 and Layout ........................................ 666 Arrow, bend ...................................... 664 Arrow, include ................................... 664 Arrow, joint ....................................... 664 Arrows .............................................. 664 CAD ................................................. 658 Character height ................................ 662 Color ................................................ 663 Column spacing, easy ....................... 661 Convert Schedules to ........................ 858 Copy ................................................. 661 Create .............................................. 658 Cross section .................................... 659 Cut ................................................... 661 Delete ............................................... 660 Display ............................................. 658 Edit ................................................... 660 Elevation ........................................... 659 Height ............................................... 662 in Layout ........................................... 810 Include Arrow ..................... 664 665 , 671 Layer ........................................ 658 , 663 Layer, change ................................... 658 Move ................................................ 660 Move in Layout .................................. 659 Paste ................................................ 661
939
Index
Generate Terrain ............................... Plan View ......................................... Primary Contours .............................. Properties ......................................... Sun Shadows .................................... Terrain Features ................................ Terrain Perimeter .............................. Terrain Surface Quality ...................... Terrain Surface Smoothing ................ Triangle Size ..................................... Zooming ...........................................
666 660 658 659 661 663 Text Arrows ....................................... 664 Text Files ........................................... 507 Text Objects Panel ............................. 95 Text Specification Dialog ................ 662 Text Tab ............................................. 662 Text With Arrow ................................ 658 Texture Filter Panel .......................... 120 Texture Painter ......................... 581 , 605 Texture Tab ....................................... 565 Textures ..................................... 548 , 610 Add new ........................................... 764 Apply to items ................................... 565 Apply to materials .............................. 565 Create .............................................. 764 Definition .................................. 610 , 893 Filters ............................................... 120 View ................................................. 565 Textures Library ....................... 544 , 553 Textures, Images and Backdrops ... 610 Thick lines ........................................... 91 Thickness Bottom plate, wall .............................. 375 Headers ............................................ 377 Stud ......................................... 374 , 380 Top plate, wall ................................... 375 Third Party Libraries ........................ 528 Threshold For exterior door ............................... 748 Threshold Lines ................................ 195 Thumbnail, Save ................................. 70 Tile Surrounds .................................. 467 Tiling Views ....................................... 577 Time Autosave ............................................ 79 Title Bar Main Window ...................................... 10
Print ................................................. Reshape ........................................... Restrictions ....................................... Select ............................................... Spacing for columns .......................... Tabs .................................................
Title Block .................................. 810 , 813 Create ............................................... 813 Toe Kick Height/Depth ..................... 455 Tool, Gable/Roof Line ...................... 339 Toolbar Buttons 3D ...................................................... 59 Edit ..................................................... 62 Toolbar Configurations ...................... 21 Toolbar Sets ........................................ 21 Toolbar Tab ......................................... 19 Toolbars ........................................... 6 , 17 Add Tools ............................................ 18 Child Buttons ....................................... 18 Customize ........................................... 18 Delete Tools ........................................ 19 Font .................................................... 93 Parent Buttons .................................... 18 Restore ............................................... 21 Tools 3D .................................................... 581 Box ................................................... 701 Cabinet ............................................. 438 CAD Drawing .................................... 676 Chief Architects ................................... 22 Curved Wall ...................................... 137 Dimension ......................................... 636 Door ................................................. 212 Electrical ........................................... 422 Framing ............................................ 367 Menu .................................................. 52 Other Edit ......................................... 428 Polyline Edit ...................................... 693 Render .............................................. 604 Roof .................................................. 330 Slab .................................................. 278 Stair .................................................. 290 Wall .................................................. 135 Zoom ................................................ 573 Tools Tab ............................................. 18 Top Chord .......................................... 381 Top Plates Definition ........................................... 893 Number ............................................. 375 Thickness .......................................... 375 Transfer Plans ..................................... 77
940
Transom Window Definition ........................................... 893 Transom Window see Windows, stacked Transparent Color ............................. 765 Tread Width, Maintain ....................... 305 Treads Define number ........................... 320 321 Lock width ......................................... 320 Maintain Width ................................... 320 Overhang .......................................... 323 Perpendicular to Flare ........................ 312 Retain number in section .................... 320 Thickness .......................................... 323 Treatments Tab .................................. 265 Trim Fence ................................................ 724 Trim and Extend ................................ 724 Trim Objects ........................ 64 , 723 724 Trimmer .............................................. 376 Trimmers Definition ........................................... 893 Troubleshoot Winders ...................... 307 Truss Definition ........................................... 893 Truss Base ......................................... 404 Definition ........................................... 893 Truss Base Specification Dialog ..... 413 Truss Chord Definition ........................................... 893 Truss Details ...................................... 402 Truss Labels ...................................... 403 Truss Spacing .................................... 382 Trusses ....................................... 353 , 381 Attic trusses ....................................... 399 Bottom chord ..................... 381 , 416 , 419 Ceiling trusses ................................... 398 Copy ......................................... 398 , 400 Create ............................................... 398 Delete ............................................... 400 Detail ................................................ 402 Double truss ...................................... 410 Drop Hip truss ............ 412 , 416 417 , 419 End truss ................................... 416 , 419
Energy heel ...................................... 417 Floor and Ceiling ............................... 398 Floor trusses ..................................... 398 Framing reference ............................. 401 Girder ............................................... 413 Hip ........................................... 408 412 Hip jack ............................................ 409 Hip systems, comparisons ................. 412 Hip, step down .................................. 408 Hip, subgirder ................................... 409 Jack ................................................. 409 Kingpost, require ............................... 381 Label ................................................ 403 Labels, move as group ...................... 403 Laying out ......................................... 398 Locking ............................................. 418 Mix with rafters, preparation ............... 370 Mixing with standard framing .............. 403 Move ................................................ 401 Move labels as group ........................ 403 Raise off plate ................................... 417 Reduce gable .................................... 418 Require kingpost ....................... 416 , 419 Roof ................................................. 398 Scissor ............................................. 413 Scissors ............................................ 413 Step down hip ........................... 408 , 412 Sub girder ......................................... 412 Subgirder hip .................................... 409 Top chord .......................... 381 , 416 , 419 Truss Base ....................................... 404 Update .............................................. 401 Webbing ............ 381 , 399 , 416 , 418 419 Webbing specification ........................ 418
Trusses Tab ....................................... 381 Two Stretch Planes .......................... 800 Type Tab ............................................ 805
U
Unconnected wall Min. length .......................................... 88 Undo Zoom ................................................ 574 Undo Zoom ........................................ 574
941
Index
Unit Conversions Panel ................... Units Changing .......................................... Dimensions, show imperial ................ Dimensions, show metric ................... Imperial ............................................ Imperial dimensions .......................... Metric ............................................... Unlocked Landings .......................... Unrestricted Movement .................... Untitled plan
see New Plan
101 651 650 650 651 650 651 297 295
VRML .................................................. 770 Cosmo Player .................................... 768 Definition ........................................... 894 Export ....................................... 768 769 Images .............................................. 770 Textures ............................................ 770 Walkthroughs .................................... 768 VRML Player ...................................... 770 VRML use of Texture and Image Files ..................................... 770
Up/ Floor Down, Floor ...................... 273 Update Cross Sections/Elevations . 821 Update Templates ............................... 73 Use Existing Roof ............................. 250 Use framing reference ............. 372 , 380 Use Mesh ........................................... 283 User Layers ....................................... 126 User Specified Walls ........................ 163
W
Walk Line ........................................... 305 Displaying in Plan View ...................... 323 Walkthrough Playback Tools .......... 767 Walkthrough Recording Tools ........ 767 Walkthroughs ............................ 592 , 766 Definition ........................................... 894 Exterior ............................................. 767 Interior .............................................. 767 Play .................................................. 766 Record .............................................. 767 Show ................................................ 766 VRML ............................................... 768 Wall and Opening Snap Unit ........... 651 Wall Assemblies ................................ 162 Wall Bridging ..................................... 702 Wall Cabinet Definition ........................................... 894 Wall Cabinets .................................... 438 Wall Corner Specification Dialog .... 478 Wall Defaults ..................................... 134 Wall Defaults Dialog ......................... 184 Wall Definitions Exporting .......................................... 167 Importing ........................................... 166 Wall Elevation ................................... 597 Definition ........................................... 894 Wall Framing Detail .......................... 388 Wall Framing Details ................ 374 , 388 Wall Framing Members, Drawing .... 389
V
Valley ................................................. 493 Valley Flashing Definition .......................................... 894 Vertical rafter width .......... 358 , 361 , 414 VGA Definition .......................................... 894 View Angle Dialog ............................ 587 View Direction Tools .................. 61 , 587 View windows ....................................... 9 see also Window Types Viewing Images ................................. 762 Views Cascade ........................................... 578 Definition .......................................... 878 Missing from layout ........................... 825 Views Sent to Layout ....................... 824 Volume Materials ........................................... 562
942
Wall Wall Wall Wall
Hatch Dialog .............................. 143 Height Specification ................. 158 Heights ....................................... 153 Layer .......................................... 184 Definition ........................................... 894 Maximum ........................................... 184 Wall Materials .................................... 189 Wall Offset Definition ........................................... 894 Handles ............................................. 159 Wall Specification Dialog ......... 172 , 333 for Pony Walls ................................... 179 Wall Tab .............................................. 374 Wall Tools .......................................... 135 Wall Tools, Curved ............................ 137 Wall Type Definitions ........................ 162 Wall Type Definitions Dialog ........... 163 Wall Types Tab .................................. 178 Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults . 84 Wall/Floor/Ceiling Framing .............. 366 Wall/Railing Defaults Setup ............. 184 Walls ............................... 2 , 133 , 174 175 Accurate move ................................... 152 Adjusting in 3D .................................. 157 Aligning ............................................. 159 Aligning between floors ...................... 174 Aligning end-to-end ............................ 160 Allowed angles ................................... 145 Allowed angles diagram ....................... 88 Angled, compound in 3D .................... 172 Attic wall ............................................ 174 Back clip to edit ................................. 157 Blocked from moving .......................... 152 Bottom plate ...................................... 375 Bottom plates, number ....................... 375 Breaking in 3D ................................... 172 Center handle, curved ........................ 154 Centering footings (2 methods) ........... 177 Changing into railings ......................... 173 Co-linear ........................................... 160 Combining walls ................................. 159 Compound angles .............................. 172 Connect curved to straight .................. 158 Connect Walls ................................... 159
Connect, edit button .......................... 158 Connecting ....................................... 158 Creating foundation wall .................... 177 Curved .............................................. 146 Curved, align between floors .............. 160 Curved, center point .......................... 146 Curved, concave ............................... 168 Curved, handles ................................ 154 Curved, how to draw .......................... 146 Curved, jumpy when drawing ............. 146 Curved, lock center button ................. 154 Curved, locked center type ................ 154 Curved, maintain center location ........ 156 Curved, meeting straight .................... 158 Curved, normal type .......................... 153 Curved, resize handle ........................ 156 Curved, which type to use .................. 151 Deleting hatch ................................... 142 Dimension location ............................ 166 Dimensioning to centers .................... 166 Dimensioning to main layer ................ 166 Dimensioning to surfaces ................... 166 Drawing ............................................ 144 Editing .............................................. 153 Editing in 3D ..................................... 157 Editing wall attributes ........................ 148 Exporting wall layer definitions ........... 167 Exterior ............................................. 174 Exterior and Interior ........................... 137 Fireplace in ............................... 472 , 848 Fix connections ................................. 159 Flip layers ................................. 174 175 Footing width and height .................... 177 Foundation ........................................ 137 Foundation thickness ......................... 177 Foundation wall ................................. 173 Framing ............................................ 388 Handle, extend .................................. 155 Handles ............................................ 160 Hatch spacing ..................................... 88 Hatching ........................................... 142 Height change ................................... 153 Importing wall layer definitions ........... 166 Interior, fireplace in ........................... 471 Invisible .................................... 139 , 173 Invisible (Room Def) .......................... 173 Layers, exporting ............................... 167 Layers, importing ............................... 166
943
Index
Lower height in 3D ............................ 157 Minimum length if unconnected ............ 88 Moving ............................... 149 , 158 , 160 Moving by dimensions ....................... 152 No Locate ......................................... 174 No locate .......................................... 174 No Room Def .................................... 173 Offset handles ................................... 160 Pony ................................................. 138 Pony wall .......................................... 157 Raise height in 3D ............................. 157 Raked ............................................... 157 Resizing ........................................... 152 Restoring top and bottom heights ....... 158 Retain attic wall ................................. 174 Retain framing .................................. 174 Room Def (invisible) .......................... 173 Selecting in cross section .......... 148 , 157 Selecting in Plan View ....................... 148 Setting up for 3D editing .................... 157 Solid railings ..................................... 180 Specifying Foundation ....................... 177 Splitting ............................................ 143 Stepped ............................................ 157 Stud spacing ..................................... 374 Stud thickness .......................... 374 , 380 Top plate .......................................... 375 Top plates, number ........................... 375 Understanding ................................... 184 Wall Detail ........................................ 388 Working With Walls ........................... 184
Window Window Window Window Window
Walls In Section/Elevation .............. 148 Web Support ..................................... 873 Webbing ..................................... 416 , 419 Horizontal span ................................. 418 Webbing (Trusses) Definition .......................................... 894 Wedge ................................................ 542 Winders Create .............................................. 307 Definition .......................................... 894 Stairs ................................................ 321 Winders, Creating ............................. 307 Window Default Settings ................. 267 Window Defaults ......................... 84 , 234
Levels .................................. 239 Menu ...................................... 57 Schedule Example ............. 858 Specification Dialog .......... 252 Types ................................... 234 CAD Detail .................................... 9 , 740 Camera ................................................. 9 Elevation ............................................... 8 Layout ................................................... 9 Library Browser ..................................... 9 Materials ............................................... 9 Overview ............................................... 9 Plan ...................................................... 8 Walkthrough .......................................... 9 Wall Detail ........................................ 388 Zoom window .................................... 575 Windows ................................................. 8 Arch top (ISD) ................................... 803 Bay ................................................... 234 Bay Trimmers .................................... 376 Bay, gable roof .................................. 251 Bay, roof over .................................... 250 Bench seat ........................................ 249 Blocked ............................................. 221 Bow .................................................. 235 Bow, gable roof ................................. 251 Bow, roof over ................................... 250 Box, gable roof .................................. 251 Box, roof over .................................... 250 Cascade ........................................... 578 Casement ......................................... 253 Center along a wall ............................ 244 Center to sink .................................... 244 Centering .......................................... 244 Copy, multiple ................................... 242 Copy, single ...................................... 242 Copying ............................................ 242 Corner, special .................................. 236 Curved, in curved walls ...................... 245 Custom Muntins ................................. 246 Defining Openings (ISD) ............ 802 803 Deleting ............................................ 242 Displaying ......................................... 240 Divided lites ...................................... 260 Double sill ......................................... 377 Edit from ........................................... 590
944
Headers ............................................ 377 In curved walls ................................... 245 Layers see Window Levels Levels ............................................... 236 Library ....................................... 236 , 544 Lites see Lites Match roof ......................................... 263 Move by dragging .............................. 243 Move restrictions ................................ 243 Move using dimensions ...................... 243 Move, control key ............................... 243 Moving .............................................. 243 Muntin bars ........................................ 260 Muntins ............................................. 246 Recessed .......................................... 254 Recessed to sheathing layer ............... 255 Replicate ........................................... 242 Resize ............................................... 244 Resizing ............................................ 244 Rough opening .................................. 375 Schedules ................................. 851 852 Select, individual ................................ 241 Select, multiple .................................. 241 Selecting ........................................... 241 Sill thickness ...................................... 377 Sliding ............................................... 253 Stacked ............................................. 236 Trimmers ........................................... 376
Z
Zoom .................................................. 573 Closer ............................................... 573 Definition .......................................... 894 Extents ............................................. 574 F6 key to fill window .......................... 574 Fill window/Fill Screen ....................... 574 General overview .............................. 573 Mouse wheel ..................................... 574 Perspective views .............................. 584 Undo ................................................ 574 Wheel Mouse ........................................ 6 Zoom Tools ........................................ 573 Zoom Window ........................... 575 576 Birds eye view .................................. 575 Closing ............................................. 575 Create .............................................. 575 Definition .......................................... 894 Zoom, Undo ....................................... 574 Zooming in Perspective Views ....... 584 Zooming With the Mouse Wheel ..... 574
Windows and Doors, Gable Dormer Over ................................................. 349 Windows in Curved Walls ................ 245 Windows Library ............... 236 , 545 , 553 Windows MetaFile see WMF Windows Metafiles ............................ 765 Windows Standard Color Dialog ...... 15 Wiring Schematics, Creating ........... 424 WMF Export ............................................... 765 Working plan .............................. 270 , 272 Definition ........................................... 894 Working With the Materials List ...... 861 WP Outlet ........................................... 422 Definition ........................................... 894 Wrapped Openings ............................ 220
945
Index
946

Reference Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Reference Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Chief Architect 9.

Professional Design & Drafting Software for the Building Professional

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 2: Menus and Toolbar Buttons

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 3: File Management

Chapter 4: Defaults & Preferences

Chapter 6: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Wall Specification Dialog ........................................................172 Wall/Railing Defaults Setup ...........................................................184

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 10: Multiple Floors

Chapter 11: Foundations

Chapter 12: Stairs

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 13: Roofs

Chapter 14: Framing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 15: Trusses

Chapter 17: Cabinets

Chapter 16: Electrical

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 18: Other Objects

Chapter 19: Terrain

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 20: Roads & Sidewalks

Chapter 21: Libraries

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Library Object Specification Dialog.............................................. 554

Chapter 22: Materials

Chapter 23: Zoom & View Tools

Chapter 24: Perspectives & Overviews

Chapter 25: Cross Section/Elevation Views

Chapter 26: Render Views

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 27: Raytracing

Chapter 28: Dimensions

Chapter 29: Text

Chapter 30: Callouts & Markers

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Markers .............................................................................. 672 Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 672

Chapter 31: CAD

Chapter 32: Advanced Design & Editing

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 33: Pictures, Images, & Movies

Chapter 34: DXF/DWG

Chapter 35: Create Symbol Wizard

Chapter 36: Layout

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 37: Printing & Plotting

Chapter 39: Schedules

Chapter 40: Materials List

Chapter 38: Model Maker

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Appendix A: Technical Support Services ................. 873

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Chief Architect Environment

The Chief Architect Environment

Easy Access to Tools

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Comprehensive Default and Preference Settings

Chief Architect Terms

Chief Architect Interface

Chief Architect Interface